Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

Listening

In our profession, we are trained to read numbers, interpret laws, identify risks and ask the right questions. We are expected to have answers. Clients come to us because they believe we know something they do not.

It is therefore natural that we speak a lot. But the quality of our spoken or written advice depends on an oftenneglected skill: the ability to listen. And listening is not the same as hearing.

A client may spend twenty minutes explaining a problem, while the professional is already constructing an answer in his head. We hear the initial words, identify the apparent issue and begin solving it. But sometimes the real problem is hidden somewhere beyond the initial words.

Consider a client who seeks advice on whether tax is required to be deducted at source on a particular payment. The legal position may be genuinely debatable with arguments on both sides. The professional instinct is to analyse the provisions, examine the decisions and recommend the interpretation that appears stronger in law.

But suppose we first ask: “What is most important to you in taking this position?”

The answer may change the advice. The client may be willing to adopt an aggressive but defensible interpretation because the amounts involved are substantial. Another client, faced with the same legal question, may prefer the more conservative position because it has thousands of payees, cannot easily recover tax later, or does not wantrecurring disputes in assessment. A third may be concerned about the commercial consequences of withholding tax from a key vendor.

he-Professional-Art-of-Listening

The law has not changed. The competing interpretations remain exactly the same. What changes is our understanding of the client’s real problem. Good professional advice is therefore not merely about identifying the better legal argument. It is also about understanding the consequences the client is willing, or unwilling, to live with.

Listening allows us to discover the question behind the question.

This becomes particularly important as our profession changes. Technology and AI are increasingly capable of retrieving provisions, analysing documents, comparing judicial decisions and even generating technically sound opinions. The relative value of merely knowing information will inevitably decline. What will become more valuable is our ability to understand context, intention, risk and people.

Senior professionals often believe that their experience makes them better listeners. Yet, paradoxically, it can sometimes have the opposite effect. We recognise patterns quickly and therefore assume we already know what the younger colleague is going to say. So, we interrupt and give advice before the other person has finished explaining. In doing so, we may save two minutes of conversation and lose an opportunity to understand something important.

There is another dimension to listening: listening without immediately judging. Not every conversation requires a solution. Sometimes a colleague, client or team member needs to feel safe enough to articulate an innovative, contrarian or uncomfortable thought. If every statement is immediately evaluated, corrected or criticised, people eventually stop bringing us the information we most need to hear. For a profession built on trust, that is costly.

Perhaps the simplest way to improve is to introduce a small discipline into our conversations: pause before responding. Ask one more question. Paraphrase what you have heard. Resist the temptation to formulate the answer while the other person is still speaking.

The objective is not to become passive listeners. Quite the opposite. Great listening is an active professional skill. It requires curiosity, attention, patience and the humility to accept that our first understanding may be incomplete.

The future chartered accountant will still need technical excellence. That is non-negotiable. But technical excellence alone may no longer distinguish one professional from another. The differentiator may be something much more human. The ability to sit across the table from another person, put aside the urge to speak, and genuinely understand what they are trying to tell us.

We spend years learning how to read numbers. Perhaps it is time we became equally good at reading people.

Because sometimes, the most valuable professional advice begins not with an answer, but with a very simple question:

“Tell me more.”

77th Annual General Meeting And 78th Founding Day

The 77th Annual General Meeting of the BCAS was held on Monday, 6th July, 2026 at MCA-The Lounge, Wankhede Stadium, Marine Drive, Vinoo Mankad Road, Churchgate, Mumbai – 400020.

The President, Mr. Zubin F. Billimoria took the chair and called the meeting to order. All the business as per the agenda contained in the notice was conducted, including the adoption of accounts and appointment of auditors.

Mr. Zubin F. Billimoria, announced the results of the election of the President, the Vice-President, two Honorary Secretaries, the Treasurer and eight members of the Managing Committee for the year 2026–27.

CA Sunil Gabhawalla, Editor of the BCA Journal, announced the recipients of the Jal Erach Dastur Awards for the year 2025–26. The Best Article Award was conferred on CA Narasimhan Elangovan for his article, “Leveraging AI for Enhanced CA Practice: A Practical Guide to Publicly Available Models.” The Best Feature Award was jointly conferred on CA Puloma Dalal, CA Jayesh Gogri and CA Mandar Telang for their feature, “Recent Decisions in GST.”

The Editor also announced the S. V. Ghatalia Foundation Fund Award for the Best Audit Article, which was conferred on CA Manish Shah for his article, “Depreciation Policy Changes by Large Technology Companies: Analysis under Indian Accounting Standards.”

Before the conclusion of the AGM, members, including Past Presidents of BCAS, shared their views and reflections on the activities and contributions of the Society.

The occasion also witnessed the release of the July 2026 Special Issue of the BCA Journal on “Globalisation of Indian CA Firms”, along with the release of the book “Comprehensive Analysis of Related Party Transactions” authored by CA Abhinav Kumar K. P., and “Gita for Professionals” (Gujarati Version) authored by CA Chetan Dalal by Mr. Arvind Datar, Senior Advocate.

Following the AGM, the Society celebrated its 78th Founding Day with a lecture delivered by Mr. Arvind Datar, Senior Advocate, on the topic “Four Hurdles to Overcome for Viksit Bharat.” The lecture, attended by a packed audience, provided valuable insights and thought-provoking perspectives on India’s developmental journey.

The meeting concluded with a vote of thanks proposed by CA (Adv.) Kinjal Bhuta, who thanked the speaker for sharing his visionary thoughts on a highly relevant subject.

The following members were elected unopposed for the year 2026–27:

OFFICE BEARERS
President CA Kinjal Shah
Vice President CA Mandar Telang
Hon. Joint. Secretary CA (Adv.) Kinjal Bhuta
Hon. Joint. Secretary CA Samit Saraf
Treasurer CA Mrinal Mehta
MANAGING COMMITTEE

ELECTED MEMBERS

Elected Member Mr. Anand Kothari
Elected Member Ms. Divya B. Jokhakar
Elected Member Mr. Dushyant Bhatt
Elected Member Mr. Hardik Mehta
Elected Member Mr. Mahesh Nayak
Elected Member Ms. Preeti Cherian
Elected Member Ms. Sneh Bhuta
Elected Member Mr. Vishesh Sangoi
CO-OPTED MEMBERS
Member Mr. Prajit Gandhi
Member Mr. Amit Purohit
Member Mr. Gaurav Save
Member Mr. Raj Khona
Member Mr. Jagat Mehta
Member Mr. Parth Shah
EX-OFFICIO
Immediate Past President CA Zubin F. Billimoria
Member, (Editor BCAJ) CA Sunil Gabhawalla

[The video of the lecture is available on the BCAS YouTube Channel. A detailed report on the Founding Day Lecture is provided in the Society News section of this Journal.]

OUTGOING PRESIDENT’S SPEECH

CA Zubin

A very good evening on this rainy day. Thankfully, the rains have cleared off a little, thus providing some respite, so we hope more people will join in later. It is just one year and one day back that I was at the adjoining building giving my acceptance speech, and a year has flown by, and it looks like it was just yesterday that I assumed office. It has been a year of a lot of learning for me, mainly because I had a very young and dynamic team supporting me throughout and, in many cases, even correcting me for the better. I am very happy and proud of all that. In any organisation, a leader is only as good as his team. And while many of you have been saying that I have had a good year, it is actually the team which really deserves all the credit. I deserve all the blame for whatever has gone wrong this year. And for that, I stand before all of you and tender my unconditional apology. If something has gone wrong, if I have hurt somebody’s feelings or have not done something, but ultimately whatever it is, it is all in the interest of the organisation. The incoming team, comprising the incoming President, Kinjalbhai, and the other office-bearers, is young and dynamic, and I am sure that, going forward, they will continue to steer BCAS to greater heights. Kinjalbhai is a very dynamic and seasoned professional in BCAS; he has been through the grind. Along with him, the other team members- Mandar, who is taking over as the vice president; Mrinal, Kinjal Bhuta, and Samit Saraf, the newly inducted member make up a good, well-rounded team. Over the course of the year, our main focus, as discussed at the two earlier AGMs, has been on the five-year plan starting from 2023-24, which rests on the following six pillars:

  • Reach
  • Professional Development 
  • Networking
  • Advocacy
  • Yuva Shakti
  • Chartereds for Change – corresponding to Professional Social Responsibility

Unlike in earlier years, when the president had a separate theme each year, we have decided to continue with the five-year plan here, though the government has long back disbanded the concept of five year plans! Over the course of the year, as I indicated at the last AGM, each of these six pillars has been executed through specific projects and strategic verticals, with a focus on certain areas to facilitate easier monitoring and the implementation of key actionables. Hence, I would like to take you through my report card.

To begin, the year has been characterised by the themes focusing on reach, relevance and renewal. We now have a total of around 12,300 members and journal subscribers across the length and breadth of India, or what I call Bharat, with membership across nearly 400 towns and cities. An important initiative this year that I will discuss later is the digital push, which has garnered nearly 2 million YouTube views over the last year. So just before I go into the specific projects, let us look at, in a nutshell, what we have delivered:

  • Operating Backbone– through ISO renewal, strengthening events team capabilities and stronger MIS. My focus has been on strengthening the operational processes because, ultimately, that is the backbone, since the organisation of events is, to a certain extent, running on autopilot.
  • Member Engagement – through RRCs, lecture meetings, campus hooks and felicitation of fresh CAs.
  • Digital Acceleration – through podcasts, setting up the in-house studio, social growth and BCAS Academy usage.
  • Reach across Bharat – through appointment of Sherpas, Town halls and a geographically spread member base.
  • Women-led Participation – through Sakhi Circle, RefresHER courses and Women’s Day celebration.
  • Advocacy and Impact– through representations, legal success, partnerships and social good.

These and certain other initiatives were implemented through eleven separate projects that covered one or more of the six pillars discussed earlier.

Logistical and Administrative Excellence:

This was the overarching theme binding the implementation of various projects and initiatives, with the aim of becoming a process-agnostic rather than a person-agnostic organisation due to annual leadership changes. All of these are reflected through the following themes:

  • Compliance- Renewal of our ISO registration until 28th February, 2029, for which compliments to the entire office staff and the team led by our office Manager Sachin Kulkarni.
  • Capability – Three staff training programmes were conducted during the year, by internal and external faculties on areas such as Artificial Intelligence and compliance-related awareness sessions, including workplace conduct and Internal Complaints Committee (ICC) responsibilities under POSH guidelines.
  • Systems – Operational upgrades, event consultation team, SOP Reviews and strengthening documentation and MIS.

Initially, the staff found it a little challenging to adapt to these initiatives, but over the course of the year, they have started getting used to them. The other occasional pain point, to a certain extent, has been event execution and related issues, which we have tried to address by partially outsourcing and appointing an external consultant to help with event management. It is still a work in progress, and we hope that this will lead to the desired results in the foreseeable future.

Further, even at the OB level, we have tried to meet every Wednesday, as has been the custom, and during the year, out of the 52 weeks, we have met 37 times. What is more important is that I have made it a point that each of the decisions we have taken is minuted and recorded, because many times we found that, during the course of our functioning, we could not locate the source of what had been decided earlier. Hence, I hope that the succeeding office-bearer teams will not face this problem, and that my successors will also follow this practice as best they can. Without having set the tone at the top, we cannot expect documented policies and procedures to be implemented down the line.

OPERATION BHARAT (PART OF THE “REACH PILLAR”):

The next project is Operation Bharat. As you saw, we now have a membership base of nearly 12,300 members and journal subscribers, of whom nearly 50% are outside Mumbai across nearly 400 towns and cities; hence, we are no longer representing Bombay but truly Bharat. Our new tagline, Empowering the Profession Across Bharat”, which we released earlier during the year, reflects this new reality. So whilst we may not call ourselves Bharat Chartered Accountants Society because we don’t want to change the name, but at least now, we are seen as being across Bharat because many times still when I have been visiting certain other towns and cities, and asked people, whether they are members, I get the answer that we are not from Mumbai. We now hope to dispel all these doubts and myths through this tagline.

Another important facet of Operation Bharat has been that we have now appointed Sherpas in 13 towns and cities. They serve as our local representatives who help us connect with the local organizations and who also help us in organizing programs because one of the issues which had come up in the membership survey which was the last year, not during my year, is that the people out of Mumbai need to have and long for more physical programs. So this is one important need which is getting fulfilled. We hope to appoint more Sherpas going forward. There were a lot of Sherpa led events which were conducted during the year in the form of townhall meetings. or events either singly or jointly with local associations. We have held events during the year in Kolkata, Coimbatore, Jaipur, Thane, Indore and Vadodara and they have received very good response. These covered diverse topics ranging from income tax, GST, IPO readiness, family offices and various other topics. We hope that the momentum for this continues going forward.

MEMBERSHIP HOOKS (PART OF THE “REACH” AND “YUVA SHAKTI” PILLAR):

Whilst we are enrolling members at a fairly reasonable pace across Bharat, our membership base remains quite minuscule compared to the number of chartered accountants, even though we consider ourselves India’s largest and oldest voluntary body of CAs. Hence, it is our constant endeavour to take several initiatives to create meaningful engagement opportunities for members, students, and young professionals, while fostering a stronger sense of association and belonging within the fraternity to attract new members.

Events – They are our main pillar and play a key role in attracting new members. Whilst most of our events are open to non-members, we need more events that are open only to members. Further, during the year, we have striven to keep the fee differential between members and non-members slightly larger, in the hope of converting non-member participants at our events into members going forward. This year, of course, I was lucky to preside over a total of 6 RRCs, as opposed to the usual 4. This is primarily due to two reasons; firstly, the International Tax RRC scheduled for April 2025 got shifted to August 2025 in addition to the regular International Tax RRC held in April 2026; secondly, for the first time we had the Direct Tax RRC in Delhi, which was also a hit. I am happy to announce that nearly 1,400 participants attended the various RRCs during the year compared to a little over 700 participants in the previous year. However, only the General RRC is currently open to members. We hope that, in the future, either the fee differential for the events, including RRCs, is significant or there are more member-specific events, including RRCs.

Lecture Meetings– Another important membership hook is our lecture meetings, which are open to all. As per tradition, these are normally held on Wednesdays, once a month. In the year just gone, I am happy to state. that we have held a total of 17 lecture meetings, which is more than the average lecture meeting of one per month. These provide the necessary leverage for BCAS to attract more CAs towards membership of the Society

Felicitation of Fresh CAs- Another important facet of membership hooks is to tap them young. In this context, we organise felicitation programmes for CAs whenever the results are announced. This year, as the frequency of results has increased, we have held four such programmes; the last felicitation was held only last Friday. A total of nearly 1250 fresh CAs were felicitated. We also provide a 1-year free membership to rankers who attend this felicitation, and accordingly, around 15 freshers were enrolled as members during the year. Whilst I do not have the exact statistics of such conversions, I have been informed that 2 freshers who attended the latest felicitation have become life members. However, if you ask me, the overall response is still not very encouraging because the youngsters are still trying to find their bearings, and unless there is very strong peer pressure or a push from someone in the family, they don’t tend to join BCAS immediately. Accordingly, this is one area where we need to do more work.

AARAMBH & FALCON Initiatives: These are very specific, focused initiatives we started during the year. Through the AARAMBH – Making Articleship Count initiative, BCAS engages directly with students by sharing practical insights, real-life experiences, and guidance from young Chartered Accountants who have recently walked the same path. The sessions are designed to bridge the gap between academic learning and professional realities, enabling students to approach articleship with clarity, confidence, and a long-term perspective. The first session under this initiative was held at H.R. College of Commerce & Economics. The programme witnessed enthusiastic student participation, driven by an engaging panel discussion and vibrant interaction. Through the FALCON (FROM ARTICLESHIP TO LEADERSHIP CARVING ONES NICHE) initiative and taking a cue from the falcon bird, which always strives to go higher and achieve greater heights, BCAS offers aspiring graduates an opportunity to interact with and learn from young Core Group members – those who have walked the path before them. The panellists focus on topics related to articleship, post-qualification professional association, networking, and leadership. To ensure that the aspirants feel both comfortable and confident engaging with the panellists, this initiative has BCAS meet them on their home turf – be it in a college, a coaching class, or even at CA firms. The first session under this initiative was held at N M College of Commerce & Economics. The session was ably supported by the Association of Accountancy Committee of N M College. We hope that more such initiatives will continue in future.

Corporate Membership- During the year, a targeted approach focused on the benefits of Corporate Membership for LLPs, emphasising the flexibility to change nominees every year and the availability of GST Input Credit, though I must admit that the same has not been very successful.

OPERATION NARI SHAKTI (PART OF THE “REACH” PILLAR):

Another specific initiative, which was one of my pet initiatives, is Operation Nari Shakti, which aims to create more space for women professionals and to focus on women’s empowerment, inclusivity, and enhanced professional engagement, coupled with learning and networking and to try and help women who have challenges in returning to the fold. I would like to highlight two specific initiatives in this regard:

Sakhi Circle– This is a women-only study circle, providing a dedicated platform for women CAs to converse, connect and collaborate on professional and technical developments in a supportive environment. During the year, 3 meetings were held by senior women core group members on topics aimed at encouraging women’s uniqueness and on soft skills. Currently, there are around 250 members.

Women’s RefresHER Course:– During the year, the Society launched Specialised RefresHER Course under the BCAS Academy Platform exclusively for women CAs, covering relevant technical, regulatory, and professional subjects to help members stay updated in an evolving professional landscape. A total of 14 sessions were conducted during the year by experienced subject matter experts, all of whom were women. On completion, certificates were issued.

The membership base last year, when I addressed you, was 941; it has now increased to nearly 1200, which is still very low compared to ICAI’s corresponding membership base. I am confident that with these and other initiatives, we will increase it further.

TECHNOLOGY AND DIGITAL INITIATIVES (PART OF THE “PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT”, “NETWORKING” AND “CHARTEREDS’ FOR CHANGE” PILLARS) :

As we are aware, without technology and digitisation, no organisation, whether big or small, can survive. For the first time, we had three podcasts, under the Samvad series, recorded in our own in-house studio, details of which are given in the annual report, including a podcast with His Holiness Jagadguru Pujyashri Shankara Vijayendra Saraswathi Shankaracharya Swamiji of Kanchipuram, which was the icing on the cake. As I indicated earlier, we have a total of 2 million YouTube views. Social media followers have also increased to around 1 lakh across various platforms. We also have the BCAS Broadcast platform through which we circulate our events, programs, and certain select articles from the journal to the membership base at large. Our Digital Infrastructure for conducting Hybrid and virtual events has also been upgraded in line with the theme of Logistical and Administrative excellence mentioned earlier. This is because our hybrid setup, commissioned in a rush during the COVID-19 pandemic, began experiencing problems and receiving complaints from various event stakeholders. Further, during the year, a series of podcasts were conducted by the International Tax Committee under the “Are you Aware” series. I hope that more committees also have these podcasts with the aim of creating a repository of digital assets, available on BCAS Academy.

BCAS ACADEMY (PART OF THE “PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT” PILLAR):

This was launched during Anand’s term, and it has now moved to the next level, as is evident from its usage base as under:

  • 10,200 active members
  • 4,300 guest users
  • 300 e learn subscribers
  • 1,700 average monthly visits

Beyond its members, the platform is also accessible to non-members for a fee for certain specified courses and resources. Going forward, the aim is to provide self-learning modules and certification courses on contemporary topics, both on a recurring and one-off basis. Accordingly, it has evolved from a content repository to an engagement engine, with more and more professionals becoming engaged.

RESEARCH AND INDUSTRY COLLABORATIONS (PART OF THE “PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT”, “ADVOCACY” AND “NETWORKING” PILLAR):

This is where we move beyond classrooms and play our role as responsible professional citizens. This manifested itself in several ways as under:

Representations: During the year, BCAS engaged proactively and reactively on matters affecting the profession, submitting 13 representations on a wide range of topics. Apart from the standard areas of Income Tax and GST, we also made representations on other topics such as the Overseas Networking guidelines, Charitable Trusts, FEMA, and the Registration process under the SEBI Research Analyst Guidelines, amongst others.

Bombay High Court Writ Petition Success- Another important matter during the year was where we jointly petitioned with several other organisations to the Bombay High Court successfully challenging the rejection of the Section 12A approval under the Income Tax Act to charitable trusts solely due to absence of an irrevocability clause.

Collaborations and Outreach Initiatives: This year, we signed an MOU with SIMSREE, in addition to our existing MOUs with IIM Mumbai, NISM, and BIA. We also collaborated with NITI Aayog and the Indian School of Business on tax-related matters, during which various sessions have been held. Joint programs continue to be held primarily with IMC, CTC, WIRC of ICAI. There was a campus visit to IIM Bangalore, on the sidelines of the RRC. All these initiatives are gaining increasing prominence and importance, and we hope the momentum behind them will continue.

PUBLIC RELATIONS AND MARKETING (PART OF THE “NETWORKING” PILLAR):

We continued to strengthen our brand positioning, member communication, and media outreach during the year by focusing on enhanced visibility, credibility, and engagement across multiple platforms, with the help of external professional support. Through consistent communication and timely sharing of professional insights, events and other technical initiatives, BCAS reinforced its position as a respected and trusted voice in the profession. All this resulted in nearly 300 media mentions during the year.

LEVERAGING THE LIBRARY (PART OF THE “PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT” PILLAR):

Another particularly pet project of mine was trying to leverage the library. As many of you may know, we have a library that was very popular in earlier times. However, in recent years, especially post-pandemic, its use and relevance have declined due to office relocations and reliance on digital tools, especially amongst the younger generation.  Accordingly, a scheme to lend books and organise a reading club was initiated to revive and leverage this valuable resource and revive reading habits, especially amongst the younger generation. Though the response to the book lending is not very good, at least it is a beginning. However, I am pleased to report that the initial sessions of the reading club were attended by nearly 400 people in a hybrid format. The WhatsApp group created is very active and has garnered significant interest and enthusiasm, especially among the younger generation.

PROFESSIONAL SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (PART OF “CHARTEREDS’ FOR CHANGE” PILLAR):

Various initiatives were undertaken, as under, during the year through which the Society aims to play a wider social role not only for the members but also for their families and the larger community:

  • Entertainment events like CAThon, turf cricket and movie screenings.
  • Several meaningful activities and impactful projects through the BCAS Foundation, which is our CSR arm, including organising blood donation drives and tree-plantation campaigns, supporting various noble causes in partnership with the Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust and DBM, including distributing books and donating sewing machines to deserving women to support their livelihoods, amongst others. Details of these and various other activities of the Foundation will be covered later by our Past President Mayurbhai.
  • Out of The Shri. Under the P. N. Shah Students’ Endowment Fund, created towards the end of last year, the first instalment of scholarship support was disbursed during the year to 7 students pursuing the CA course, amounting to Rs. 37,500 each. I would like to acknowledge my deep gratitude to the family members of the late Shri. P.N. Shah for this noble gesture.

Two other unique initiatives undertaken during the year, on “Thought Leadership” and “Dharma & Corporate Life”, deserve special attention.

Thought Leadership- BCAS was one of the support partners at a conclave on “Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam Ki Oar 4: The 12 Principles that can Shape a New World”, organised in collaboration with JYOT FOUNDATION. The lecture titled “Ancient Roots, Global Routes: Reimagining Global Leadership for the Indian CA” was organised by BCAS on the sidelines of the conclave.

Dharma and Corporate Life- BCAS was the Support Partner for Dharmam Chara 2026 (walking the path of Dharma and its relevance to Corporate Life), a unique programme by Sri Pratyaksha Charitable Trust under the auspices of Shri Kanchi Kamakoti Peetam, in the benign presence of His Holiness Jagadguru Pujyashri Shankara Vijayendra Saraswathi Shankaracharya Swamiji (“His Holiness”), which was held at the BSE Convention Centre.

We are grateful and humbled by the blessings of HH as we continue towards our journey in the years ahead.

Friends, all these projects are not just one-year initiatives, and I hope many of them will continue in the years to come. For your information, I have highlighted seven specific initiatives that I hope will continue in my concluding President’s Page message in the journal, which will be released later today.

I am sure that the incoming team under Kinjalbhai has a lot of plans, well beyond the year 2027-28, when the 5-year plans expire, and into 2030 and beyond. We now have a young team. Accordingly, because I am moving out, the average age of the OB team has dropped drastically from 45 years last year to 40 years this year. However, the average age of the Managing Committee remains the same at 43 years for the third consecutive year! This young team is well poised to take us towards our goal not only for 2030 but also for the 100th year of BCAS and the 100th year of Bharat. I am sure Kinjalbhai will roll out his plans and has certain exciting things lined up about which he may speak more during his acceptance speech.
All that my team and I have achieved during the last year would not have been possible without the support and guidance of all the past presidents, who have always stood by us; some of you continue to play active roles as Chairmen of committees and in various other matters

And finally, before I conclude, I would like to acknowledge my wife Ferzana and my daughter Farah who have stood by me and tolerated my occasional erratic schedules. Last year, many of you may recollect, my father-in-law Mr Minoo Bilimoria, a life member of BCAS, was also here at the age of 93. He unfortunately passed away in the month of March. I am sure his blessings will always be there, and so will be the blessings of my late parents and my mother-in-law, who would all have been very happy to see me here today. I would also like to acknowledge the respectful presence of Mr. Y. H. Malegam, under whom I had the privilege to work in S.B. Billimoria & Co. Thank you, Sir, for honouring us with your presence. Finally, I would like to acknowledge the presence of Mehul Sheth, Vice President of the Chamber of Tax Consultants. Thank you, Mehulbhai, for gracing the occasion with your presence

All in all, I hope I have done justice to my role as the President of this august organisation. So once again I bow down before all of you with all humility for reposing confidence in me, and I am, needless to say, available whenever the society meets me. I will continue in certain roles as a trustee of the BCAS Foundation and as the Chairman of the Accounting and Auditing Committee, for which my good friend Abhay has graciously stepped down. Hence, my involvement, like many of the past presidents, will continue. So once again, thank you very much. May God bless all of you and may God bless our beloved Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society! Thank you very much.

INCOMING PRESIDENT’S SPEECH

CA Kinjal

SALUTATION

Respected Past Presidents, President – Zubin Billimoria, office bearer colleagues – Mandar, Kinjal, Mrinal & Samit; members of the Managing Committee; Core Group members; our distinguished guests from sister organisations; members of the press; our Yuva Shakti; and every member of this extraordinary family we call the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society.

Namaskar. Kem Chho, Kasa Kai, Khamma Ghani and a very warm good evening to each one of you.

Zubin bhai, let me be candid – you have set a benchmark that I will spend the year striving to live up to. Thank you for a year of deep conviction and extraordinary grace.

MY JOURNEY AT BCAS

My BCAS journey began in 2002 with a simple Communication course—and it changed everything. One meeting led to another; one mentor’s nudge from Sameer Kapadia opened doors I never imagined. From leading study circles to shaping the Technology, HRD, Corporate Laws, Journal, and SMPR committees, every role stretched me further. Working alongside Past Presidents taught me lessons no textbook could. By 2016, I joined the Managing Committee under Chetan Shah; by 2021, I stood as Office Bearer under Abhay Mehta. Twenty-five years later, BCAS isn’t just my journey it’s my family.

THIS MOMENT

Standing here today is beautifully overwhelming. Twenty years ago, in 2006, I sat in this very audience as a newly inducted core group member, listening to the Presidents speak, I remember feeling the immense responsibility they carried and the extraordinary privilege of leading this Society. Today, as I complete 25 years in the Chartered Accountancy profession, that very privilege is mine. I accept it with deep humility and immense gratitude.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Before I speak of the year ahead, I pause, for gratitude which is the foundation on which this Society stands.

To our Past Presidents, since 1949, you have handed me a living institution which I promise to carry with reverence and responsibility.

To our Core Group members and committee volunteers, the engine room of BCAS, you give your weekends, expertise, and hearts without expectation of return. And to my mentors of my professional journey, CA Mukesh Ghelani, Late CA Kishor Shaparia, Shri Vijay Shah, my Principal(s) – CA Chetan and Ketan Jatania, CA Nihar Jambusaria, and CA Bharat Shah, my gratitude.

To my family and office team, who have graciously agreed to share me with 12,000 members & subscribers.

BCAS IN PERSPECTIVE

Let me place this moment in context, because it is worth standing back and truly seeing where we are.

BCAS was founded on July 6, 1949, just two years after Independence, by a small group of CAs in Mumbai. There were no CPE credits—just a burning desire for quality, integrity, and learning.

Seventy-seven years later, we are 12,000 members & subscribers across 350 towns. With a one lakh social media follower base, 1.3 million YouTube views, a growing Academy, the pan-India Sherpa initiative, and over 1,000 women members following recent record growth, BCAS is surging. Yet, we are only at the beginning of what we can become.

MY LEADERSHIP PHILOSOPHY

At BCAS; we are running a long relay marathon, not a sprint. This baton was passed to me by extraordinary professionals, and I aspire to carry and pass it on with that same care.

Three living values will anchor our path forward:
1. Samanvay (Harmony): Fostering collaboration, bridging differences, and aligning our diverse strengths to move forward together.

2. Spandan (Responsiveness): Tuning into our members’ pulse through proactive initiatives and welfare platforms to build a vibrant ecosystem at BCAS and the BCAS Foundation.

3. Seva (Service): Viewing leadership as purpose, not position, to serve this legacy and its people with absolute humility.

Through harmony in thought (Samanvay), dedication in action (Seva), and responsiveness to our people (Spandan), we will take this institution to unprecedented heights.

THE FIVE-YEAR PLAN: YEAR FOUR

We now enter year four of our collective Five-Year Strategic Plan, going deeper, wider, and bolder across its six pillars.

Allow me to share the aspirations for 2026-27 across each pillar, and I say “aspirations” with full intention, because in a volunteer-driven Society, our plans are expressions of intent and collective will. We will give them our best effort, and let the work speak for itself.

Pillar One: Reach

BCAS’s reach has grown remarkably over the past three years. But reach is about relevance as much as numbers. We aspire to be visible to CA practitioners in Tier 2 and Tier 3 cities, present at the doorstep of every practitioner in this community.

We hope to intensify our Seminars at Doorsteps programme, carrying knowledge-intensive, faculty-led events to professional hubs across India. We want to go to our members, rather than wait for them to come to us.

We also aspire to pursue opportunities through MOUs and collaborative engagements already executed, as well as with international CA organisations, building a global network and elevating BCAS’s presence on the world stage.

And we wish to launch a Corporate Outreach and Engagement Initiative that bridge BCAS and industry. Because a Society’s reach is measured by how many professionals feel it belongs to them.

Pillar Two: Professional Development

The single most important thing BCAS does is develop professionals. This is our purpose and promise, one we hope to honour more innovatively this year.

We also wish to build pathways into emerging areas, Gift City advisory, M&A and Valuation, IPO support, GCC consulting, Wealth Management, and Virtual CFO services.

On technology, we aim to move beyond awareness into application, with case studies and hands-on sessions helping members integrate digital and AI tools into practice.

On practice management, an under-served area, we hope to share case studies on CA firm growth, valuation, and model agreements. Growing a practice is a skill BCAS can help to nurture.

We aspire to strengthen our publications with monographs on frontier subjects. Our journal, podcasts, and Academy will keep evolving, guided by one belief: learning should meet members where they are.

Close to my heart, we would like to create a structured ‘Career Comeback’ initiative for mid-career professionals returning after stepping away for family, health, or personal reasons, deserving a dignified pathway back with community support.

Because the best investment any professional society can make is in the Professional Development of its members. When members grow, the profession grows.

Pillar Three: Networking

BCAS has always been a community, a family, needing space for informal moments that build real bonds, alongside structured sessions that build knowledge.
This year, we aspire to be deliberate about networking, with dedicated ice-breaking sessions in events longer than two days, since corridor conversations are sometimes as valuable as auditorium sessions.

We would also explore sports as a vehicle for community, informal tournaments and activities helping members connect across seniority and geography.

Because Your network is your net worth — build it with intention.

Pillar Four: Advocacy

BCAS has always been willing to speak, with evidence, respect, and the long-term interest of the profession and public in mind. That voice will continue to grow.

We aspire to deepen proactive dialogue with regulators, visiting them and inviting them for substantive conversations that allow the profession’s perspectives to inform policy while it is still being shaped.

We also aspire to work toward unifying regional bodies to give our fraternity a stronger, unified voice in public discourse.

Because we Speak with evidence. Act with principle. Lead with purpose.

Pillar Five: Yuva Shakti, The Energy That Carries Us Forward

Youth RRC initiative launched in 2013, created a cohort I often call the “Tappu Sena” of BCAS, spirited yet responsible, playful yet purposeful, bold yet grounded in values. Significantly, all five OBs are products of the youth RRC. The average age of our Office Bearers has come down to 40, a nearly 25% reduction from a decade ago.

To our young members, the energy, ideas, and curiosity you bring keep this institution alive and evolving.

While our structured Youth RRC has run its course, the spirit behind it lives on. We aspire to channel that energy into new formats, creating spaces where emerging professionals can learn intensively, connect meaningfully, and grow rapidly.

We would also like to expand our Café Meetings with Founders initiative, bringing young members into intimate conversations with start-up founders and entrepreneurial leaders, the kind of conversations that shift careers and open new possibilities.

Because the best indication of an institution’s future is how much it trusts its youngest members today. The future is not coming. It is already in this room.

Pillar Six: Chartered for Change, Building the Next Chapter

And finally, the pillar that asks the deepest question of all: What is BCAS for, beyond the profession?

We believe Chartered Accountants are institution-builders, community leaders, and agents of social change. Under the banner of Chartered for Change, we aspire to deepen our involvement in the BCAS Foundation’s initiatives, integrating our community into social responsibility programmes that create impact well beyond the boardroom.

Because institutions that endure are those that continuously reimagine themselves, from a foundation of unshakeable values.

MY TEAM

I would be incomplete and unfair if I spoke of this year’s aspirations without acknowledging the team that makes it all possible.

Mandar is steady and execution-driven; Kinjal is versatile and the standard-bearer of Nari Shakti at BCAS; Samit and Mrinal bring experience and innovation.

To our Managing Committee, our Chairpersons across all committees, our Core Group volunteers, you are the real force behind everything BCAS achieves. The role of President in this Society is a privilege of service, not a position of authority. I am here to support, to facilitate, and to be grateful for what all of you make possible.

ACTION IN MOTION

The Team of 2026-27 has already set the wheels in motion.

  1.  This year, we celebrate six decades of the Residential Refresher Course, the 60th RRC, a milestone deserving reverence. We aspire to make it a landmark, immersive experience honouring tradition while looking ahead. The 60th RRC is scheduled from 10th to 13th December 2026 at the Hyatt Regency, Ahmedabad, on the Sabarmati Riverfront. Registration shall open soon; kindly block your calendars and make travel booking.
  2. The 4i Committee revives a long-discussed idea. The vibrancy of any organisation rests on imaginative ideas and innovative initiatives, and we hope this committee becomes BCAS’s change agent, one that dares to propose the seemingly impossible, incubates new projects until they mature, embraces challenges without fear of failure, and offers a platform for big, even outrageous, thinking. We shall commence our journey of creative madness, drawing on members and invitees spanning regulators, senior partners, NGOs, CEOs and entrepreneurs, blended with a young team for execution.
  3.  The Core Group Retreat, a leadership catalyst on 1st and 2nd August, offers core group members the chance to imbibe BCAS’s legacy while networking with an elite circle of our profession. A high-level think tank of Past Presidents and our Young Brigade, co-creating BCAS’s Vision for the CA Profession. We enter this with eyes wide open, knowing the process matters as much as the outcome; we may explore many paths, discard some, and find better ones, for that is the nature of genuine visioning. The Sanskrit shlok – उद्यमेन हि सिध्यन्ति कार्याणि न मनोरथैः, reminds us that it is sustained effort, not mere intention, that brings results. We shall put in the effort. The results will follow.

As I connect this with the philosophy – The Core group retreat represents our pursuit of Samanvay (Harmony among the Team BCAS to co-create a shared vision for the BCAS), 60th RRC represents the Seva (Unwavering Selfless service to the profession which has shaped generations of Chartered Accountants) and 4i committee represents the Spandan (Responsiveness that keeps an institution alive to the future rather than merely a custodian of its past)

CLOSING

Seventy-seven years ago, a handful of chartered accountants dared to dream that a community of professionals could become an institution. They were right, and have left us a living, breathing Society that belongs to all of us.

Today, as I accept the honour of contributing to BCAS as its President, I step into this role with humility, hope, and a deep sense of duty, inspired by the 3 guiding principles of Jainism – सम्यक् ज्ञान, सम्यक् दर्शन, and सम्यक् चारित्र — the wisdom to know, the vision to perceive, and the discipline to do what is right. Let this be our compass and our commitment, as we build not merely an institution of excellence, but a community of purpose, values, and enduring impact.

Thank you & Jai Hind!

Statistically Speaking

1. STRONGEST CURRENCIES IN THE WORLD IN 2026

Ranking Currency
1 Kuwaiti dinar (KWD)
2 Bahraini dinar (BHD)
3 Omani rial (OMR)
4 Jordanian dinar (JOD)
5 British pound (GBP)
6 Gibraltar pound (GIP)
7 Swiss franc (CHF)
8 Cayman Islands dollar (KYD)
9 Euro (EUR)
10 US dollar (USD)

Source: Forbes list

2. TOP AIR FORCES IN THE WORLD

Ranking Country
1 United States Air Force
2 United States Navy
3 Russian Air Force
4 United States Army
5 United States Marines
6 Indian Air Force
7 Chinese Air Force
8 Japanese Air Force
9 Israeli Air Force
10 French Air Force

Source: World Directory of Modern Military Aircraft

3. INCREASE IN DIRECT TAX COLLECTION FOR FY 2026-27

India’s net direct tax collections rose 16.4% year-on-year to Rs 6.51 lakh crore in the current financial year, driven by higher corporate tax, non-corporate tax and securities transaction tax (STT) collections.

Gross direct tax collections increased 16.11% to Rs 7.74 lakh crore during the period, while refunds issued rose 14.57% to Rs 1.22 lakh crore

 

Corporate tax collections, after adjusting for refunds, stood at Rs 2.40 lakh crore, up from Rs 1.97 lakh crore in the corresponding period last year.

Net non-corporate tax collections rose to Rs 3.85 lakh crore from Rs 3.44 lakh crore a year earlier.

 

Net collections from STT climbed to  Rs 26,428.96 crore, compared with Rs 17,875.88 crore in the year-ago period, while net collections under other taxes were marginally negative at Rs 2.02 crore, compared with a positive Rs 269.45 crore a year earlier.

Source: Income tax Department (as on 13 July 2026)

4. INDIA’S FOREX RESERVE RISE

India’s foreign exchange reserves rose by $964 million to $675.16 billion

 

Foreign currency assets (FCAs), the largest component of the country’s forex reserves, increased by $930 million to $546.51 billion
India’s gold reserves also recorded an increase, rising by $24 million to $105.23 billion.

 

Special Drawing Rights (SDRs) with the International Monetary Fund (IMF) increased by $3 million to $18.626 billion, while India’s reserve tranche position with the IMF edged up by $7 million to $4.793 billion.

Source: Reserve Bank of India (as on 10 July 2026)

5. WORLD’S SAFEST COUNTRIES AND MOST UNSAFE COUNTRIES

Ranking Safest Countries Most Unsafe Countries
1 Iceland Russia
2 New Zealand Sudan
3 Switzerland Pakistan
4 Slovenia Ukraine
5 Ireland Israel
6 Austria Afghanistan
7 Portugal
8 Singapore
9 Finland
10 Japan

Source: Global Peace Index

Regulatory Referencer

DIRECT TAX: SPOTLIGHT

1. Condonation of delay in filing Form No. 10AB electronically for approval under clause (ii) of the first proviso to section 80G(5) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 — reg– Circular No. 6/2026 dated 7 Jully 2026

Certain funds and institutions whose approval under first proviso to section 80G(5)(ii) was expiring on 31 March 2026 could not furnish Form No. 10AB for seeking renewal of approval within the due date of 30 September 2025.

The delay in filling Form No. 10AB, where the prescribed application in Form No.10AB has been furnished electronically between 1 October 2025 to 31 March 2026 has been condoned. Further, where an application in Form No. 10AB filed electronically between 1 October 2025 to 31 March 2026 has been rejected as on date of issue of this circular solely on the ground that it was furnished beyond the prescribed time limit of 30 September 2025, the delay shall be deemed to have been condoned. The jurisdictional Principal Commissioner or Commissioner of Income-tax are authorized to dispose of such applications on merits and pass an order on or before 31 December 2026.

2. Cost Inflation Index for financial Year 2026-27 is 384. – Notification No. 85 of 2026 dated 15 July 2026

3. Protocol amending the Agreement between the Republic of India and the Government of the Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income enters into force on 19 June 2026 – Notification No. 88 of 2026 dated 16 July 2026

FEMA

1. RBI permits AD Category-I banks to open repatriable INR accounts for overseas individuals investing under FEM (NDI) Rules, 2019

This circular enables investment in equity instruments of a listed Indian company on a recognized stock exchange in India by all individual person(s) resident outside India. Prior to this circular it was allowed only for NRIs and OCIs. The AD Category-I banks may open a repatriable INR account of an individual person resident outside India in accordance with Foreign Exchange Management (Deposit) Regulations, 2016 to facilitate investment under Schedule III to the Rules. The amendment significantly broadens the class of eligible investors by replacing only NRI/OCI with all individual person’s resident outside India.

The individual portfolio investment limit has doubled from 5% to 10%. The aggregate portfolio investment limit has increased from 10% to 24% without requiring a special resolution. Earlier aggregate limit was extended to 24% only by special resolution.

The amendment also introduces a clear transition mechanism that if an investor crosses the 10% threshold, they must either divest within 5 trading days or have their investment reclassified as FDI, thereby harmonizing the treatment with the framework applicable to FPIs.

(A.P. (DIR Series 2026-27) Circular No. 14 dated 15th June 2026)

2. RBI mandates daily reporting of FCNR(B), ECB and OFCB mobilised under swap facility

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) mandates all Authorized Dealer Category-I banks to submit daily reports detailing Foreign Currency Non-Resident [FCNR(B)] deposits, external commercial borrowings (ECBs), and overseas foreign currency borrowings (OFCBs) mobilized under its special concessional swap facilities. The data should be furnished by the bank by 6pm every day. A “nil” statement is required on days when no transactions take place, excluding Saturdays and holidays. The data on FCNR (B) deposits, ECBs and OFCBs from A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 13, dated 8th June 2026 (included in BCAJ July 2026 edition) till issuance of these directions, shall be submitted along with the first reporting due on June 22, 2026.

(A.P. (DIR Series 2026-27) Circular No. 15 dated 19th June 2026)

3. RBI amends FEM (Deposit) Regulations; permits opening of ‘Special Non-Resident Rupee Account’ with ADs in IFSC

This notification expands the scope of Special Non-Resident Rupee (SNRR) accounts. Persons resident outside India can now open these accounts with Authorized Dealer (AD) branches located in India, overseas, and—expressly—in the International Financial Services Centres (IFSC) in India, while eliminating the mandatory “business interest in India” requirement. Transfers between NRO, SNRR, and NRE Accounts are now permitted, provided they follow the established FEMA provisions.

(Notification F. No. FEMA 5(R)(6)/2026-RB, dated 18th June 2026)

4. RBI revises treatment of certain positions for computation of open position limits of AD Banks

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) mandated that Authorized Dealers must ensure their Net Open Positions involving the Indian Rupee (NOP-INR) in the onshore deliverable market do not exceed USD 100 million at the end of each business day as per A.P. (DIR series 2025-26) Circular No. 24, dated 27th March 2026 included in BCAJ May 2026 edition.

Through the A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 13, dated 8th June 2026 (included in BCAJ July 2026 edition) the RBI provided a specific relaxation to AD Category-I banks regarding how they calculate this limit. Banks were permitted to exclude swap positions that arise from Foreign Currency Non-Resident (B), or FCNR (B), deposits, External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) and Overseas Foreign Currency Borrowing.

In this circular, it has been decided that AD Cat-I banks shall exclude the positions arising out of hedged transactions related to FCNR (B) deposits, External Commercial Borrowings and Overseas Foreign Currency Borrowings raised in terms of the aforesaid circulars, while ensuring compliance with the provisions of the A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 24, dated March 27, 2026, and for computation of net overnight open position in terms of the aforesaid Master Direction.

(A.P. (DIR Series 2026-27) Circular No.16, dated 23rd June 2026)

5. RBI rationalizes reporting requirements under FEMA, 1999 for Authorized Persons

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) rationalized reporting requirements for Authorized Persons (APs) under FEMA, 1999, simplifying compliance. Key changes include discontinuing obsolete FLM-1 to FLM-7 registers, removing prior RBI approval for foreign currency write-offs exceeding USD 2,000, and standardizing new, simplified quarterly formats for franchisee and sub-agent tracking.

(A.P. (DIR series 2026-27) Circular No.17 dated 24th June 2026)

6. RBI reviews circulars issued under FEMA

RBI has rationalized the regulatory framework of FEMA by formally withdrawing 732 obsolete, redundant, and overlapping circulars issued since June 1, 2000, significantly simplifying foreign exchange compliance.

(A.P. (DIR series 2026-27) Circular No. 18, dated 24th June 2026)

New Clause In Second Schedule

Arjun : (to himself) “Oh God! They have revised the Code of Ethics. We don’t know the basic Code itself! Putting more and more burden on us”. Let Bhagwan come. I will get it clarified.

(Chants) – Hey Shrikrishna, Hey Shrikrishna

Shrikrishna : (enters) Arey Arjun, what are you thinking about? Whether the ITR last date will be extended?

Arjun : No, Lord. We have now become insensitive to such issues! Last many years we only begged for extensions. Things will never improve.

Shrikrishna : Then why were you waiting for me to come?

Arjun : See Lord. We CAs are already overburdened. In that, they keep on revising our Code of Ethics. I am told, they have inserted some new clause of misconduct in Second Schedule. What is that?

Shrikrishna : I don’t know whether basically you know the distinction between First and Second Schedule.

Arjun : Lord, I knew it, but forgot.

Shrikrishna : First Schedule contains those clauses that affect you CAs among yourselves. Normally, an outsider is not adversely affected by these items of misconduct. This is the only revision in the schedules.

Arjun : That is why they say, it is of lesser gravity.

Shrikrishna : True. Therefore, punishments prescribed for 1st schedule are much milder as compared to Second Schedule misconduct.

Arjun : Tell me, what is this new clause.

Shrikrishna : Arjun, you are aware of the very familiar item of misconduct – of non-communication with previous auditor.

Arjun : Yes, very much! Many of us try to avoid that communication.

Shrikrishna : That is item (8) of Part I of 1st Schedule. Immediately following item (9) is to ensure that when there is a change in auditor, the provisions of company Law be compiled with.

Arjun : Yes, I know.

Shrikrishna : But surprisingly, there was no express item that mandates the compliance of Company Law provisions while performing the audit.

Arjun : I feel, that was implied. Had he breached the provisions, it would have been a gross negligence. Isn’t it?

Shrikrishna : True. But they have now made it explicit.

Arjun : I don’t understand the object behind this new clause.

Shrikrishna : Arjun, the objective is to uphold the sanctity of the audit process and the statutory obligations attached to the role of an auditor as mentioned under the Companies Act.

Arjun : In short, what was implicit, they have made it explicit. But Lord, my query is why only under Companies Act? Why not similar provisions for audits under other Acts? Like Co-operative societies, Charitable Trusts.

Shrikrishna : Arjun, you have made a very valued point. I agree that the Auditor must act accordingly to the provisions of the respective law under which he is doing the audit.

Arjun : Lord, there are quite a few other revisions in the Code. Just now I am busy with July ITR; but next time tell me about other important changes.

Shrikrishna : One more point, Arjun. Please note that the new clause (5) that we discussed is in Second Schedule, Part I. So its seriousness is more; as an outsider may get aggrieved by your non-compliances.

Arjun : Yes, Lord, that’s a point. Thank you.

“OM SHANTI”

(This dialogue is based on the newly inserted item no. (5) in Part I of Second Schedule. It reads as follows:

‘acts as an auditor of the company in contravention of the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013’).

Is It Fair Fast Track Merger: A Wider Door, But The Same Trapdoor

BACKGROUND

Section 233 of the Companies Act, 2013 provides a simplified route for merger or amalgamation of specified classes of companies without recourse to the full NCLT process. Considering the objective of ease of doing business, the scope of the fast-track merger scheme has expanded over the last few years. The provision originally covered small companies and the merger of a holding company with its wholly owned subsidiary, and the scheme could proceed only after compliance with the statutory pre-conditions, including filing of a notice of objections, approval by members and creditors, and a declaration of solvency by each company involved. Section 233(c) requires each of the companies involved in the merger to file a declaration of solvency in the prescribed form. Rule 25(2) of the Companies (Compromises, Arrangements and Amalgamations) Rules, 2016 prescribes Form CAA.10 for the declaration of solvency.

The scheme is intended to provide a faster and more efficient merger route, but the structure of the solvency declaration has remained substantially the same even as the scope of eligible transactions has expanded. That creates stiffness between the statutory formality and the commercial reality of a merger, particularly where one company is intended to dissolve without winding up and its liabilities are to be taken over by the transferee.

PROBLEM

The issue lies in the requirement that each company involved in the merger must declare solvency in Form CAA.10. The form requires the directors to state, after full enquiry into the company’s affairs, that the company is capable of meeting its liabilities as and when they fall due and will not be rendered insolvent within one year from the date of the declaration. That language is familiar in a winding-up context, but it sits uneasily in a merger where the transferor is not expected to continue as a standalone enterprise after the scheme is implemented.

This becomes especially difficult in group restructurings. A transferor company may have negative net worth or liabilities that are largely intra-group, even though the overall transaction is commercially sound and no external creditor is prejudiced. If the declaration is read strictly on a standalone basis, the company may fail the solvency test even when the merger would improve operational efficiency and simplify the group structure.

UNFAIRNESS

The unfairness lies in the mismatch between the statutory form and the nature of the transaction. A company that is being merged and dissolved under Section 233 is asked to certify its ability to remain solvent for one year, even though it may cease to exist shortly after registration of the scheme. In practical terms, this makes the declaration look less like a merger compliance step and more like a borrowed formality from winding-up law.

The hardship is not theoretical. In Western Region v. Stock Traders Private Limited (C.P. 87/MB/2019, Order delivered on 29.01.2024), the Mumbai NCLT dealt with a holding-subsidiary amalgamation where the transferor had liabilities of about Rs.129.58 lakhs nearly half of which, some Rs.59.99 lakhs, was owed to the transferee itself and would stand extinguished upon the merger, and a negative net worth on a standalone reading. The Official Liquidator objected on the ground of solvency, and the scheme was converted into a full petition under Sections 232 read with 230. The Tribunal noted that a holding company ordinarily supports its subsidiary and that the consolidated net worth after amalgamation against a transferee net worth of Rs.2,853.96 lakhs, resulted in a healthy combined figure of approximately Rs.2,723 lakhs. It held that the objection regarding solvency was not correct and had no substance. Yet the matter had to proceed through the Section 232 route, consuming time and effort that the fast-track framework was intended to save. The problem is more acute when the Regional Director or Official Liquidator takes a strict view. In Asset Auto India Private Limited v. Union of India (Writ Petition No.556 OF 2019, 2024:BHC-OS:15393-DB, Date: 03.08.2024), the Bombay High Court held that the Regional Director could not reject the scheme under Section 233 outright merely on the ground that certain companies were not solvent. The Court held that if the Central Government, after receiving objections or for any reason, was of the opinion that the scheme was not in the public interest or in the interest of creditors, it had to file an application before the Tribunal under Section 233(5), requesting that the scheme be considered under Section 232 within the statutory period of sixty days. That ruling is important because it confirms that the administrative authority cannot finally decide the matter by rejection the scheme where the statute requires adjudication by the Tribunal.

The unfairness is therefore two-fold. First, the solvency declaration can prevent genuinely commercial mergers from using the fast-track route simply because the transferor’s standalone balance sheet is weak. Second, even where the issue is only a matter of interpretation, the matter may be diverted into prolonged litigation, defeating the very objective of a simplified route. The scheme may still eventually be approved, but only after avoidable delay and cost. Further, this burdens the system: the NCLTs are already heavily burdened and time-pressed with other litigation, especially matters relating to the IBC.

The deeper issue is that the declaration in Form CAA.10 is framed as though the company will continue as an independent solvent entity for one year. That may be apt when solvency is being tested in a continuation context, but it is not a perfect fit where the company is being merged into another entity and may be dissolved without winding up under Section 233(8). A strict literal approach can therefore produce a result that is legally formal but commercially unrealistic.

SOLUTION

The law would be fairer if the declaration of solvency were aligned with the merger context. For schemes under Section 233, the declaration could be framed to address the combined or post-merger position rather than require a standalone one-year survival statement from a company that may soon cease to exist. That would better reflect the commercial substance of the transaction and reduce the risk of rejecting otherwise valid schemes on purely technical grounds.

A practical reform could be achieved by revising Form CAA.10 and the related rules so that, in appropriate cases, directors may give a scheme-based or consolidated declaration supported by financial information of the merged entity. Where there is a genuine creditor concern, the Central Government should retain the ability to move the Tribunal under Section 233(5), but the matter should be decided promptly and on merits, rather than by administrative rejection. This would preserve creditor protection while preventing unnecessary delay.

Another possible improvement is to clarify the threshold for solvency review in group reorganisations. Where liabilities are largely intra-group and no external creditor is affected, a strict standalone test may not serve any meaningful protective purpose. A consolidated approach would better serve the policy objective of fast-track mergers and reduce avoidable strain on the NCLT system.

CONCLUSION

Section 233 was enacted to create a faster merger mechanism, but the current provisions relating to solvency declaration requirement can still operate as a trapdoor. The statutory form requires a declaration conceptually closer to winding-up law than to merger law, which can make the fast-track route difficult to use in otherwise straightforward group restructurings.

The issue, then, is not whether solvency matters, but whether the present form of the declaration is fair, proportionate, and suited to a merger — where the company is absorbed into another — rather than to a winding up, where it must survive on its own. Until the Rules and the form are aligned with the legislative intent of simplification and saving time, the route will remain vulnerable to delays, objections, and avoidable litigation.

This carries a larger question of policy direction. The vision of a Viksit Bharat rests, in no small measure, on Viksit compliance — a regulatory architecture that is proportionate, purposive, and calibrated to commercial reality rather than to inherited form. A solvency declaration transplanted from winding-up law, and applied mechanically to a company that the scheme itself is designed to dissolve, is the opposite of that ideal: it imposes cost and delay without any corresponding protective gain. If the fast-track route is to serve the ease-of-doing-business objective for which it was created, the requirement must move from a formal, standalone test to a substance-based one. That is the difference between compliance that merely exists and compliance that is Viksit — developed and fit for the purpose it is meant to serve.

Miscellanea

  •  ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

# The Frontier Model Race Accelerates: OpenAI’s GPT-5.6 Family, Musk’s Grok 4.5 and Google’s Gemma 4 Reshape the AI Landscape

June 2026 witnessed one of the most rapid concentrations of frontier-model launches in the short history of the artificial intelligence industry. OpenAI unveiled a limited preview of its GPT-5.6 family under the code-names “Sol”, “Terra” and “Luna”, differentiated by their reasoning depth, speed and multimodal capability. Google, at its I/O 2026 developer conference, released Gemma 4 12B — an open-weight model designed to run locally on consumer laptops with as little as 16 GB of memory — alongside Gemini Omni Flash, a natively multimodal API for enterprise video workflows, and a lower-cost image generator branded “Nano Banana 2 Lite”. On 28th June 2026, Elon Musk announced on the X platform that Grok 4.5, built on xAI’s new 1.5-trillion-parameter “V9” foundation model, had entered private beta at SpaceX and Tesla, with early evaluation scores approaching those of Anthropic’s Claude Opus.

The compressed launch calendar signals a decisive shift in how AI is being packaged and priced. Frontier capability is no longer confined to hyperscale cloud APIs — open-weight models running on ordinary laptops now deliver performance that would have been considered state-of-the-art only 18 months earlier. For Indian professional-services firms, three practical implications follow: first, the cost of embedding advanced AI into audit, tax-compliance and advisory workflows continues to fall sharply; second, on-device open-weight models materially reduce the data-residency and confidentiality concerns that previously constrained AI use for sensitive client work; and third, the widening choice among frontier vendors creates leverage for enterprise buyers, but also raises the strategic question of which AI ecosystem — US, Chinese or hybrid — Indian firms should standardise on for the next investment cycle.

(Source: Google Blog dated 10th–28th June 2026)

# India Prepares “Reforms 3.0” with Sovereign AI at the Heart of the New Growth Playbook

As global AI competition intensifies, a growing chorus of Indian policymakers and economists has argued that India needs a third generation of economic reforms — tentatively branded “Reforms 3.0” — anchored around sovereign artificial intelligence capability. Building on the 1991 liberalisation (Reforms 1.0) and the GST-plus-IBC generation of structural reforms (Reforms 2.0), Reforms 3.0 would treat AI as a general-purpose technology on par with electricity, requiring co-ordinated investment in indigenous foundation models, sovereign compute infrastructure, high-quality Indian-language data and domestic chip fabrication. Proponents argue that this is essential for India to transition from its current “baseline” 6.5–7% growth trajectory to a sustained “Bharat rate of growth” of 8% and beyond, positioning AI as a driver of high-value manufacturing, skilled employment and long-term technological sovereignty.

In parallel, the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation on 30th June 2026 released the SDG National Indicator Framework Progress Report 2026, tracking India’s performance across 277 national indicators covering all 17 Sustainable Development Goals; the Ministry of Home Affairs simultaneously launched the FCRA 2.0 Portal and the e-OCI Card, a fully digital end-to-end platform linked to PAN, Aadhaar, the NGO Darpan database and the ICAI UDIN system for real-time tracking of foreign-contribution filings. Read together, these developments suggest that the government’s reform agenda is converging on a technology-first model of state capacity — one where sovereign AI, digital public infrastructure and real-time compliance tooling reinforce each other. For chartered accountants and advisors, the practical implication is that AI-enabled compliance is transitioning from an option to an expectation across FCRA, GST, income-tax and MCA workflows.

(Source: The Hindu – dated 30th June & 1st July 2026)

  •  WORLD NEWS

# India-UK CETA Enters Force as New Delhi’s Trade Architecture Expands with Japan’s POWERR Framework

July 2026 has proved to be a landmark month for India’s external economic policy. The India-UK Comprehensive Economic and Trade Agreement (CETA), signed in mid-2025 after almost a decade of negotiation, formally entered into force in July 2026, phasing out tariffs on a wide range of Indian exports — including textiles, gems and jewellery, leather goods, marine products and select engineering items — while opening the Indian market to selected UK services, whisky and premium automobiles. In parallel, the Union Cabinet approved a INR 1.9 trillion (approximately USD 22 billion) production-linked incentive push for the electronics and component-manufacturing ecosystem, aimed at deepening domestic value-addition ahead of the CETA-enabled export ramp-up. Exports to ASEAN and Africa also surged during April-May of FY27, evidencing early success in diversifying India’s export base beyond North America and Europe.

The trade-policy activity was reinforced by a rapid deepening of the India-Japan partnership during the first week of July 2026. The two governments jointly launched a new bilateral framework informally known as “POWERR”, under which Japan committed an initial JPY 80 billion (approximately USD 492 million) concessional loan for transmission-grid modernisation, alongside a Joint Statement on Energy Resilience signed between India’s Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas and Japan’s METI to institutionalise co-operation on strategic crude stockpiling. Together, the CETA activation, the electronics-manufacturing thrust and the India-Japan POWERR framework signal a decisive shift in India’s external posture — from participation in the global economic order to co-authorship of it. For Indian businesses and their tax and legal advisors, the priorities now include reassessing supply-chain footprints, GST classification of dual-use imports and transfer-pricing benchmarks for cross-border IP flows within the new FTA network.

(Source: Business Standard– 5th July 2026)

  •  ENVIRONMENT

# India Crosses 100 GW Solar Manufacturing Milestone and Emerges as the World’s Third-Largest Renewable Energy Capacity Holder

In a landmark moment for India’s energy transition, the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy in July 2026 announced that India has crossed the 100 GW threshold in solar photovoltaic module manufacturing capacity registered under the Approved List of Models and Manufacturers (ALMM). Solar module manufacturing capacity has expanded from approximately 2.3 GW in 2014 to about 172 GW in 2026, while domestic wind-turbine manufacturing capacity now stands at around 24 GW. India’s total non-fossil-fuel installed power-generation capacity reached 283.46 GW as of 31st March 2026 — comprising 274.68 GW of renewables and 8.78 GW of nuclear — with FY 2025-26 delivering a record annual addition of 55.3 GW of non-fossil capacity, nearly double the previous year’s number. India now ranks as the third-largest holder of renewable energy capacity globally, behind only China and the United States.

The scale of the shift is matched by fiscal and policy commitment. The Union Budget 2026-27 raised the MNRE allocation by 40.52% to INR 44,614.67 crore (approximately USD 5.05 billion), retained the National Green Hydrogen Mission allocation at INR 600 crore, and preserved concessional GST rates on renewable-energy equipment. Indian conglomerates have collectively committed roughly INR 67.4 lakh crore (about USD 800 billion) of investment in green hydrogen, clean energy, semiconductors and electric vehicles through 2034. The Ministry of Power has released a Draft National Electricity Policy 2026 for consultation, aligned with the Viksit Bharat @ 2047 vision. For chartered accountants, the developments carry material implications for advisory work on renewable-energy PLI claims, ITC eligibility on capital goods, transfer-pricing benchmarking of imported cell and wafer inputs, and structuring of long-tenor power-purchase and green-hydrogen offtake contracts.

(Source: DD News – July 2026)

# World Ocean Day 2026: UNEP and WEF Sound Fresh Alarm on Plastic Pollution and Biodiversity Loss as Global Treaty Talks Continue

Marking World Ocean Day on 8th June 2026, the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) and the World Economic Forum released fresh assessments that together paint a stark picture of the state of global marine ecosystems. According to the UNEP, annual plastic-waste emissions to aquatic ecosystems now stand at approximately 52.1 million metric tonnes per year, with the equivalent of 2,000 garbage trucks of plastic being dumped into the world’s oceans, rivers and lakes every day. The WEF’s June 2026 report “Plastic Pollution and Biodiversity: a Global Overview” identifies plastic pollution as one of the top five drivers of accelerating global biodiversity loss, noting that annual plastic production has surged from about 2 million tonnes in 1950 to nearly 500 million tonnes today, while only around 10% of all plastic ever produced has been recycled.
A companion analysis published by the European Commission’s Directorate-General for Environment on 25th June 2026 identifies the north-eastern Atlantic Ocean as a particularly high-risk marine plastic-pollution zone and recommends that clean-up efforts look beyond the well-known ocean “garbage patches”. Meanwhile, negotiations under the auspices of the United Nations Environment Assembly toward a legally binding Global Plastics Treaty covering the entire plastic lifecycle continue in the second half of 2026, following an earlier round that adjourned without consensus. For Indian corporates — particularly FMCG, chemical, textile and packaging companies — the direction of travel is clear: Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) obligations under the Plastic Waste Management Rules are set to tighten further, single-use-plastic bans are being extended by successive state governments, and physical-risk and Scope 3 disclosures under SEBI’s BRSR framework will increasingly probe upstream and downstream plastic-value-chain exposures
(Source: UN News/ World Economic Forum – dated 5th–25th June 2026)

ICAI and Its Members

I. ICAI ANNOUNCEMENTS

1. Public Comments – Revision in Stipend Rates

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs has accorded in principle approval to the proposed stipend rates payable to articled assistants undergoing 2 years of practical training under the new scheme of education and training. Draft amendments to the Chartered Accountants Regulations, 1988 have been published in the Gazette of India, Extraordinary, Part III Section 4 dated 25th June, 2026.

Proposed Stipend Rates (per month)

  • First year – Rs.3,000 to Rs.5,000
  •  Second year Rs.4,000 to Rs.6,000

Stipend rates are dependent upon population of cities/town Candidates registered as articled assistants for a 3 year period on or before commencement of the 2023 amendment will continue to receive stipend at the pre amendment rates.

Stakeholder Participation

  • Suggestions/objections may be submitted by 5th August, 2026.
  • Submissions should be made via online Form: https://forms.gle/hrhgHJWcJz745i87A.

Submissions should be made via online Form

  • The notification and proposed rates are hosted on ICAI’s website: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/93090boso-aps5752-gazette-notification.pdf.

The notification and proposed rates are hosted on ICAI’s

2. Applicability of ‘Guidance Note on Financial Statements of Non-Corporate Entities’ and ‘Guidance Note on Financial Statements of Limited Liability Partnerships’ for annual reporting periods 2025-26 onwards

These Guidance Note(s) shall be applicable to Non-Corporate Entities and Limited Liability Partnerships in a phased manner, as under:

Phase I:

Accounting periods beginning on or after April 1, 2025 – Entities whose turnover exceeds Rs. 5 crores

Phase II

Accounting periods beginning on or after April 1, 2026 – All entities

3. Participation in Tender by Chartered Accountants

The Council of ICAI has decided that wherever the fee quoted by the member or the firm is extremely low and is not commensurate with the size, value, volume, manpower requirement and nature of work, the matter can be referred to Director (Discipline) for appropriate action. This decision shall stand whether or not the tender is issued in the area of service exclusively reserved for chartered accountants.

https://icai.org/post/pdc-announcement-02072027

pdc-announcement-02072027

4. Implementation of ICAI (Global Networking) Guidelines, 2025

It is hereby informed that further implementation of the ICAI (Global Networking) Guidelines, 2025, notified vide Notification No. 3-CACAF/GN-F/2026 dated 11th February, 2026 and published in the Gazette of India, Extraordinary, Part III, Section 4, dated 17th February, 2026, is kept in abeyance until further orders.

5. Launch of PRB Web Portal – Peer Review Process

  • Digital Transformation: The Peer Review Board (PRB) of ICAI has launched a fully integrated Web Portal to automate, streamline, and digitize the entire peer review lifecycle.
  • Scope of Automation: The portal covers all stages — submission of applications, allotment of peer reviewers, submission of reports, and generation of peer review certificates.’
  • Effective Date: From 2nd July, 2026, all new peer review applications (Form 1) will be processed exclusively through the PRB Web Portal.
  • Applications via physical documents or email will not be accepted thereafter.

• Access & Usage: Both Practice Units and Reviewers must log in to the portal for:

  • Initiating new peer review applications (Form 1)
  • Submitting peer review reports
  • Portal URL: https://prb.icai.org

prb.icai.org

6. Live Virtual Classes & Revisionary Classes for Intermediate and Final students

1. CA Intermediate – Live Virtual Classes (LVC)

Exams Covered: May 2027, September 2027, January 2028

Fees:

(a) Any one Group Rs 1,000 (live) Rs 200 (recorded)

(b) Both Groups Rs 2,000 (live) Rs 400 (recorded)

Link:

https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92666bos-aps5519.pdf

resource.cdn.icai.org

2. CA Intermediate – Live Virtual Revisionary Classes (LVRC)

Exam Covered: September 2026

Fees: NIL

Link:

https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92589bos-aps5359-sep2026-exam.pdf

CA Intermediate – Live Virtual Revisionary Classes (LVRC

3. CA Final – Live Virtual Classes (LVC)

Exams Covered: May 2027, November 2027

Fees: NIL

Link: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92646bos-aps5498-lvc.pdf

CA Final – Live Virtual Classes (LVC)

Students have unlimited access to recorded lectures

7. Expression of Interest (EOI) – Empanelment of Faculty for the Commercial Laws and Economic Advisory Committee

The Commercial Laws & Economic Advisory Committee of the ICAI invites Expressions of Interest (EOI) from Chartered Accountants and other professionals having significant experience, academic involvement, research exposure, or professional practice in the subject areas covered by the Committee.

The information furnished through the EOI will enable the Committee to identify and engage suitable faculty/resource persons based on their expertise, experience, and subject specialisation for its future programmes and activities.

Interested professionals are requested to submit their details through the online form available at the link: https://forms.gle/w1CPGrWeLLaZqytm9

Expression of Interest

8. ICAI Publications

The Publication Directorate of ICAI has developed the Publication Portal (publication.icai.org), a centralized digital repository designed to provide members and stakeholders seamless access to over 57,000 ICAI publications. The portal features advanced search capabilities, personalized dashboards, and mobile friendly access, ensuring efficient and user friendly navigation of ICAI’s extensive knowledge resources.

9. ICAI TV

ICAI TV has been completely revamped to deliver an enhanced user experience. The upgraded platform now offers personalised dashboards, improved content discovery, and a centralized digital archive featuring ICAI’s technical, educational, and professional video resources. This transformation ensures members and stakeholders can access knowledge more efficiently and intuitively than ever before.

10. Self-Paced Course on Accounting Standards (AS), Ind AS & Ind AS 117

The Accounting Standards Board is pleased to announce the launch of a comprehensive self-paced learning program designed exclusively for ICAI members. This initiative empowers professionals to strengthen their expertise in Accounting Standards (AS), Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS), and the newly introduced Ind AS 117 on Insurance Contracts—at their own pace and convenience.

  • Registration Link for Self-paced course on Ind AS https://learning.icai.org/committee/asb/self-paced-ind-as/

Registration Link for Self-paced course on Ind AS

  • Registration Link for Self-paced course on AS: https://learning.icai.org/committee/asb/self-paced-as/

• Registration Link for Self-paced course on AS

  •  Registration Link for Self-paced course on Ind AS 117: https://learning.icai.org/committee/asb/self-paced/ics-ind-as-117/

Registration Link for Self-paced course on Ind AS 117

II. ICAI DISCIPLINARY CASES

1. Case : M.L.B vs. CA. H.B.K
File No.: PR/422/2021/DD/15/2022/DC/1911/2024
Date of Order: 11.02.2026 (Findings dated 06.02.2026)

Companies Act – Certification of revised AOC-4 without compliance with Section 131.

The substantive changes to financial statements or the Board’s Report through a revised AOC-4 require prior approval of the NCLT under Section 131 of the Companies Act, 2013.

A Chartered Accountant must independently verify such statutory compliance before certifying the revised filing.

Particulars                             Details

Background         The Complainant claimed to have purchased 24 lakh equity shares (10% shareholding) of M/s ASPL in 2016. The audited financial statements for FY 2016-17 and the original AOC-4 XBRL filed on 07.11.2017 reflected the Complainant as a shareholder. Subsequently, a revised AOC-4 XBRL, certified by the Respondent and filed on 23.01.2018, omitted the Complainant’s name from the shareholding pattern and also contained changes in the Board’s Report, without obtaining prior approval of the NCLT under Section 131 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Key Allegations

– Certification of a revised AOC-4 XBRL after the original filing without obtaining prior NCLT approval under Section 131.

– Deletion of the Complainant’s name from the shareholding pattern in the revised filing.

– Certification of revised financial statements/Board’s Report without exercising due diligence.

Respondent’s Defence

The Respondent contended that  the Complainant was never the legal shareholder, relying upon subsequent NCLT proceedings. He argued that the revised AOC-4 merely reflected the correct shareholding position, that Section 131 did not apply because only Form AOC-4 was refiled and not the financial statements, that the original AOC-4 was certified by another partner, and that no objection had been raised by MCA regarding the revised filing.

Findings

The Committee held that the revised filing was not a mere clerical correction. The revised AOC-4 XBRL introduced changes in the shareholding pattern and the Board’s Report, both of which formed an integral part of the financial statements. Accordingly, the filing amounted to a revision of financial statements/Board’s Report, attracting Section 131 of the Companies Act, 2013. The Company had admittedly not obtained prior approval of the NCLT. Since the Respondent certified the revised AOC-4 XBRL despite such non-compliance, he failed to exercise the due diligence expected of a Chartered Accountant. The Committee rejected the contention that the dispute regarding ownership of shares or the absence of MCA objections absolved the Respondent of his professional responsibility.

Charges Established   

Guilty under Item (7), Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 (failure to exercise due diligence / gross negligence).

Punishment

Reprimand and monetary penalty of ₹50,000, payable within 60 days.

2. Case : TAQRB (based on information received from CBDT) vs. CA. K.N.S.

File No. : PPR/MISC/TAMC/31/2023/DD/14/TAMC/INF/2023/DC/2108/2025

Date of Order :  11.02.2026 (Findings dated 06.02.2026)

Certificate of Practice – Conducting tax audits without holding a valid COP.

Holding a valid Certificate of Practice is a statutory pre-condition for undertaking attest functions. A Chartered Accountant cannot conduct tax audits under section 44AB of the Income-tax Act without a COP, irrespective of professional exigencies or unable to secure sufficient professional work.

Particulars                                              Details

Complainant / Informant     Taxation Audits Quality Review Board (TAQRB), based on information received from the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT).

Background                      During a review of tax audit reports filed in FY 2010–11, CBDT furnished information to ICAI regarding members who had reportedly conducted tax audits without holding a Certificate of Practice. Based on the recommendation of TAQRB, disciplinary proceedings were initiated against the Respondent. It was found that the Respondent had certified two tax audit reports under Section 44AB of the Income-tax Act, 1961 during FY 2010–11 despite not holding a COP.

Key Allegations   

– Conducted tax audits under Section 44AB of the Income-tax Act, 1961 without holding a valid Certificate of Practice.

– Uploaded tax audit reports using his ICAI membership number despite being ineligible to undertake attest functions.

Respondent’s Defence

The Respondent admitted that he had certified two tax audit reports without holding a COP. He submitted that he was unable to secure sufficient professional work and therefore undertook a few small tax audits. He also highlighted that more than a decade had elapsed, that he had not signed any professional documents thereafter, and requested leniency. During the hearing, he pleaded guilty to the charge.

Findings

The Committee observed that Section 6(1) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 expressly prohibits a member from practising without obtaining a Certificate of Practice. It noted that the Respondent had admittedly conducted and certified two tax audit reports without a COP and had pleaded guilty before the Committee. The Committee held that inability to obtain sufficient professional work could not dilute the statutory requirement of holding a COP before performing attest functions, and certification of tax audit reports without a COP constituted a clear contravention of the Act.

Charges Established 

Guilty of professional misconduct under Item (1), Part II of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 (contravention of the provisions of the Act).

Punishment

Reprimand under Section 21B(3)(a) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

Significance

The decision reinforces that holding a valid Certificate of Practice is a mandatory statutory pre-condition for undertaking any attest function, including tax audits under Section 44AB of the Income-tax Act. Personal circumstances, lack of professional assignments, or admission of the lapse cannot override the statutory prohibition against practising without a COP.

3.Case:TMD vs. CA. N.C.

File No.: PPR/MISC/TMD/67/2024/DD/19/INF/2024/DC/2154/2025

Date of Order : 11.02.2026

Professional ethics – ICAI Tender Guidelines – Applicability of ICAI Tender Guidelines.

The ICAI Tender Guidelines restricting quotation below the estimated value apply only where the assignment is exclusively reserved for Chartered Accountants. Where the governing rules permit other professionals or authorised persons to undertake the work, participation by Chartered Accountants does not violate the Guidelines.

Particulars                                                                 Details

Complainant /Informant                     Tender Monitoring Directorate (TMD), ICAI.

Background

TMD, while monitoring tenders floated for professional services, noticed that the Respondent’s firm had participated in GeM Tender No. GEM/2023/B/3533649 floated by the Northern Regional Power Committee (NRPC), Ministry of Power for financial audit services. The tender mentioned an estimated bid value of ₹44,000, whereas the Respondent quoted ₹29,500.

Key Allegations

– Participated in a tender allegedly reserved exclusively for Chartered Accountants.

– Quoted a fee lower than the estimated bid value, allegedly violating the ICAI Tender Guidelines and Code of Ethics governing response to tenders.

Respondent’s Defence

The Respondent contended that the assignment was not an area exclusively reserved for Chartered Accountants, as the NRPC Fund Bye-laws permitted the audit to be conducted by officers nominated or authorised by the Chairperson, NRPC. He further submitted that the ₹44,000 represented only the estimated bid value (inclusive of GST) and not the minimum prescribed fee. Relying on ICAI FAQ No. 4 dated 07.04.2016, he argued that members are permitted to respond to tenders where the work is open to other professionals, even if the tender invites only Chartered Accountants.

Findings 

The Committee accepted the Respondent’s defence. It held that Clause 6 of the NRPC Fund Bye-laws expressly permitted the audit to be conducted by officers nominated or authorised by the Chairperson, demonstrating that the assignment was not exclusively reserved for Chartered Accountants. It also relied on the ICAI Tender Guidelines and FAQs, which permit members to respond to tenders where the work is open to other professionals. Consequently, the Committee held that merely quoting below the estimated bid value did not amount to violation of the Tender Guidelines in the facts of the case.

Charges Established

Not Guilty of professional misconduct under Item (1), Part II of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

4. Case: Deputy Registrar of Companies vs. CA. R.T.

File No.: PR/G/14/17/DD/119/2017/DC/1249/2019

Date of Order : 05.02.2026

Statutory audit – Failure to report material misstatement in share capital

An auditor who certifies statutory filings relating to share allotments is expected to ensure that the corresponding changes are reflected in the audited financial statements. Failure to disclose or report a known understatement of paid-up capital constitutes professional misconduct under Items (5), (6) and (7) of Part I of the Second Schedule

Particulars Details

Background

The Respondent was the statutory auditor of M/s Progress Cultivation Ltd. for FYs 2011-12 and 2012-13. The company had an opening paid-up equity share capital of ₹5 lakh and issued further equity shares of ₹40 lakh on 03.11.2011 and ₹15 lakh on 11.11.2011, both evidenced by Form 2 (Return of Allotment) certified by the Respondent himself. Consequently, the company’s paid-up equity share capital should have stood at ₹60 lakh as on 31.03.2012. However, the audited financial statements for both FY 2011-12 and FY 2012-13 disclosed the share capital as only ₹45 lakh, omitting the allotment of ₹15 lakh made on 11.11.2011. Despite certifying both allotment forms, the Respondent failed to report or rectify this material understatement in his audit reports.

Key Allegations

– Failed to disclose a material fact necessary for proper presentation of the financial statements.

– Failed to report a material misstatement relating to paid-up share capital in the audited financial statements.

– Failed to exercise due diligence while conducting the statutory audit.

Respondent’s Defence 

The Respondent did not file any written statement before the Director (Discipline) despite reminders and did not appear before the Disciplinary Committee despite multiple opportunities during both the findings stage and the hearing on punishment. Accordingly, the matter was decided on the basis of the available record.

Findings

The Committee found that the Respondent had certified both Form 2 filings relating to the allotments of ₹40 lakh and ₹15 lakh, yet audited financial statements showing paid-up capital of only ₹45 lakh instead of ₹60 lakh. Since the Respondent was aware of both allotments, his failure to disclose and report the understatement constituted lack of due diligence and gross negligence. His continued non-participation in the disciplinary proceedings further reflected a casual approach. The Committee therefore concurred with the Director (Discipline)’s findings.

Charges Established

Guilty of professional misconduct under Items (5), (6) and (7) of Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

Punishment

Reprimand and monetary penalty of ₹1,00,000, payable within 60 days from receipt of the order.

Company Law

9. Cameron Manufacturing (India) P. Ltd. vs. Regional Director

NCLT Chennai, Order dated 4 June 2026

CP(CA)/155(CHE)/2021)

Where petitioner company sought to revise its FY 2019-20 financial statements to reclassify Rs. 13.99 crores within current assets due to inadvertent error, and fulfilment of statutory requirements was established, permission was granted for such revision subject to applicable accounting standards and liabilities, while further revision for FY 2020-21 was barred as per law.

GIST:

NCLT Chennai permits a company to voluntarily revise its adopted financial statements for FY 2019–20 under Section 131 of the Companies Act, 2013 to correct inadvertent misclassifications and consequential disclosures, while clarifying limits on further revisions for the subsequent year. The Tribunal found the errors to be clerical and confined to reclassification within current assets, held that the statutory procedure under Section 131 and Rule 77 was satisfied, and imposed standard safeguards (shareholder approval, filing with ROC disclosure in Board’s Report). The order preserves the right of other authorities to take action (including tax or compounding), and notes that any taxes or charges arising from the revision must be paid in accordance with law.

FACTS:

TRANSACTION:

During FY 2019–20 the petitioner advanced an inter-corporate deposit (ICD) of ₹30 crores to a related party. Repayments of about ₹16.00 crore were made; ₹13.99 crore remained outstanding as on 31.03.2020.

  •  Adoption and filing: Financial statements for FY 2019–20 were approved by the Board and adopted by shareholders on 31.12.2020, audited by PwC, and later filed with the ROC (filed on 08.09.2021).
  • Errors discovered: After adoption but before filing, management discovered several inadvertent errors:

o The outstanding ICD of ₹13.99 crore was classified as Trade Receivables instead of Short-Term Loans and Advances (both fall under Current Assets in Schedule III).

o Interest income of ₹1.48 crore from the ICD was shown under “Interest Income on Bank deposits” instead of being disclosed as interest from loans and omitted from related-party disclosures.

o Cash flow classification: ICD movement was shown under Operating Activities instead of Investing Activities.

o Omission of disclosure required by Section 186(4).

  •  Petitioner’s action: Filed an application under Section 131 seeking Tribunal approval to revise the FY 2019–20 financial statements to correct the misclassifications and make consequential disclosures. The petitioner served the auditor, impleaded RD and auditor, published required advertisements and served the Income Tax Department (which did not appear).
  •  ROC objections: ROC argued that the company was aware of misclassifications before filing and that the errors amounted to violations of Section 129(5)/Schedule III, Section 186(4) and possibly Section 143(2) (auditor’s report), and suggested compounding under Section 441 might be appropriate. ROC also raised concerns about downstream effects on subsequent years and stakeholders.

DECISION

  • Revision permitted for FY 2019–20: The Tribunal allowed the petition and permitted revision of the financial statements for FY 2019–20 in accordance with applicable accounting standards and the corrections set out in the petition.
  • Conditions and directions: The Tribunal directed procedural safeguards:

o File certified copy of the order with the ROC within 30 days.

o Call a general meeting within two months, publish notice (English and vernacular) explaining reasons for change; place revised financial statements, directors’ statement and auditors’ statement for shareholder approval.

o On shareholder approval, file revised financial statements and auditor/board statements with ROC within 30 days.

o Disclose detailed reasons for revision in the Board’s Report for the relevant year.

o The order does not preclude other authorities (ROC, tax authorities, etc.) from seeking information or initiating proceedings; any taxes/charges arising must be paid as per law.

  •  Limitation on further revision: In line with the second proviso to Section 131(1), the petitioner cannot seek a further revision for the Financial Year 2020–21 (i.e., the Tribunal barred re-opening the next year’s statements under the same provision).
  •  Liberty to tax authorities: The Tribunal noted the interest income had been offered to tax and gave liberty to Income Tax Authorities to examine transactions under relevant law.

BASIS FOR THE DECISION:

Scope of Section 131: The Tribunal emphasized that Section 131 is designed to permit revision of financial statements that do not present a true and fair view or do not comply with Section 129/134, subject to safeguards. The provision is a remedial mechanism to correct statements already adopted or filed.

  1. Nature of the error — reclassification within Current Assets: The Tribunal found the ₹13.99 crore misclassification was a reclassification within the same broad head (Current Assets) under Schedule III. Because both Trade Receivables and Short-Term Loans and Advances are disclosed under Current Assets, the correction did not alter the company’s overall asset position materially.
  2. Inadvertence and supporting evidence: The petitioner produced ledger extracts, bank statements and proof of interest receipts showing the amounts were indeed ICD principal and interest. The Tribunal accepted these documents and concluded the misstatements were inadvertent clerical errors, not deliberate concealment.
  3. Consequential corrections: Reclassification of the principal required consequential adjustments — reclassifying interest income, correcting cash flow classification, and making the Section 186(4) disclosure. The Tribunal treated these as necessary to present a true and fair view.
  4. Procedural compliance: The petitioner complied with Rule 77 (NCLT Rules), serving parties, publishing notices, impleading auditor and RD and the Tribunal was satisfied that statutory requirements for invoking Section 131 were met.
  5. Limits and safeguards: The Tribunal stressed that allowing revision under Section 131 is procedural and does not immunize the company from other statutory proceedings; ROC or tax authorities may still pursue compounding or other actions if warranted. The Tribunal also applied the statutory bar against seeking a second revision for the next financial year.

PRACTICAL IMPLICATIONS AND TAKEAWAYS

  • Permissibility of voluntary revision: Companies may use Section 131 to correct inadvertent accounting misclassifications even after adoption, provided they follow the statutory procedure and can substantiate the corrections with documentary evidence.
  •  Materiality and classification matters: Reclassifications that do not change the overall financial position materially (e.g., within the same Schedule III head) are more likely to be permitted, especially when supported by contemporaneous records.
  •  Procedural strictness: Tribunal approval requires strict compliance with Rule 77 (service, advertisement, impleading relevant parties). Shareholder ratification and filing with ROC are mandatory post-approval.
  • No shield from other authorities: Revision under Section 131 does not prevent ROC, tax authorities, or other regulators from initiating inquiries, compounding, or imposing taxes/penalties if warranted.
  • Care with auditor statements: Where auditors have issued an unqualified report, subsequent discovery of large errors may raise questions about auditor compliance under Section 143(2); the Tribunal noted this but treated it as a separate issue for appropriate authorities.
  • Limit on repeated revisions: Companies cannot repeatedly revise successive years under Section 131; statutory provisos limit reopening of subsequent years.

CONCLUDING NOTE

The NCLT’s order balances the remedial purpose of Section 131; correcting financial statements to reflect a true and fair view with safeguards to protect stakeholders and preserve regulatory oversight. The decision underscores that documentary proof, prompt remedial action, and procedural compliance are decisive when seeking voluntary revision of adopted financial statements.

10. Pannalal Bhansali vs. Bharti Telecom Limited & Ors.

Before Supreme Court of India

Civil Appellate Jurisdiction

In Civil Appeal No. 7655 of 2025

Date of Order: 10th March 2026

The Supreme Court of India held that neither Section 66 of the Companies Act, 2013, nor the rules framed thereunder mandate the obtaining of a valuation report from a Registered Valuer for the purpose of reduction of share capital.

FACTS:

M/s BTL, was a closely held unlisted public company, wherein approximately 98.91% of its equity was held by promoter group entities while the remaining 1.09% was held by around 25,000 minority shareholders.

The Board of Directors proposed a reduction of share capital under Section 66 of the Companies Act, 2013, with a plan to cancel the entire 1.09% minority shareholding, thereby making BTL a wholly owned subsidiary of the promoter group. For this purpose, M/s BTL appointed a firm of Chartered Accountants to undertake the valuation of its shares instead of appointing a Registered Valuer.

The valuer arrived at a certain price after applying a 25% Discount for Lack of Marketability (DLOM), citing that the shares were unlisted and had no active market. Thereafter, an Extraordinary General Meeting (EOGM) was held, where a Special Resolution was passed with more than 99.9% of the total shareholders voting in favour of the proposed reduction of share capital.

The National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) approved the reduction, however, it modified the valuation price, observing that the company had unfairly deducted Dividend Distribution Tax (DDT) while determining the share value. Subsequently, certain minority shareholders appealed against NCLT’s order before the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) on various grounds. One of the principal grounds raised was that the valuation exercise had been entrusted to an associate entity of the company’s internal auditor, giving rise to allegations of bias and lack of independence. The appellants further contended that the Discount for Lack of Marketability (DLOM) had been applied arbitrarily and without legal basis, thereby artificially depressing the share value. The NCLAT, however, upheld the order of the NCLT. Aggrieved by the said decision, the minority shareholders preferred an appeal before the Supreme Court of India in the matter.

ORDER:

The Supreme Court held that Section 66 of the Companies Act, 2013, provides a legally valid mechanism for the reduction of share capital. Unlike certain other provisions of the Act (such as Sections 62, 230, and 232), Section 66 does not statutorily mandate the submission of a valuation report from a Registered Valuer.

Further, the Court observed that a reduction of share capital under Section 66 may simultaneously serve as an exit mechanism for minority shareholders. In this regard, the Court noted that, under Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS) 113, “fair value” is a market-based measurement. Therefore, the application of a Discount for Lack of Marketability (DLOM) is permissible and appropriate in the valuation of shares of unlisted or closely held companies that do not have a readily available market, provided that the shareholders are fairly compensated.

The Supreme Court also reaffirmed the principle of shareholders sovereignty, it held that where a reduction of share capital has been approved by the requisite majority through a Special Resolution, (75% in favour), the Court is not required to second-guess about the commercial wisdom of the shareholders. Rather, its role is limited to ensuring that the process is fair, just, equitable, and not contrary to public interest.

Infrastructure Investment Trust (INVIT) – Emerging Asset Class

Infrastructure Investment Trusts (InvITs) are SEBI-regulated vehicles that pool capital to invest in operational infrastructure assets such as roads and power. They allow developers to monetize assets while providing investors with stable, periodic distributions; the regulations mandate the distributing at least 90% of net cash flows. As of March 2026, India has 28 registered InvITs, with assets under management projected to triple by 2030. Governance is ensured through strict leverage limits (70%), mandatory valuations, and unitholder rights. Despite rapid growth, InvITs face sector-specific risks and represent only ~1.5% of India’s GDP compared to mature global markets.

1. INTRODUCTION TO INVIT

Infrastructure Investment Trusts (“InvITs”) are investment vehicles established to facilitate investment in completed and revenue-generating infrastructure assets. Regulated under the SEBI (Infrastructure Investment Trusts) Regulations, 2014, InvITs enable the pooling of capital from institutional and retail investors for investment in infrastructure sectors such as roads, power transmission, renewable energy, telecom, pipelines, and logistics. They provide infrastructure developers with an efficient mechanism to monetize operational assets and recycle capital into new projects, while offering investors an opportunity to participate in long-term infrastructure assets that generate stable and periodic cash flows through distributions.

InvITs in India are broadly classified into publicly listed InvITs and privately listed InvITs. Publicly listed InvITs are listed on recognized stock exchanges and are accessible to both retail and institutional investors, thereby enhancing market participation and liquidity. In contrast, privately listed InvITs are primarily targeted at institutional investors and accredited investors through private placement.

As of 31st March 2026, the Indian InvIT ecosystem comprises 28 registered InvITs1 spanning diverse infrastructure sectors, including roads, power transmission, renewable energy, telecom infrastructure, pipelines, warehousing, and supply chain assets, reflecting the growing adoption of the InvIT structure across India’s infrastructure landscape. The growing diversification of underlying assets reflects the increasing adoption of the InvIT structure as a preferred vehicle for infrastructure financing and asset monetisation.


1Bharat InvIT Association (BIA) Primer, June 2026

2. INVIT STRUCTURE & CASHFLOW MECHANICS

In an InvIT, a party that originates the assets, the party that manages the portfolio, the party that operates the underlying projects, and the party that holds the assets on trust for the unitholders are required to be functionally different and, in the trustee, structurally separate.

A diagrammatic representation of an InvIT structure is set out below: –

Structure of InviTs

An infographic illustrating the flow of funds from the Unit holder to the SPV through the InvIT structure, and subsequent distribution back to the unitholders in the form of dividend, interest, and capital, is set out as follows:

Cash flow in Invits

3. KEY REGULATORY ARCHITECTURE

The SEBI (Infrastructure Investment Trusts) Regulations, 2014 (the “InvIT Regulations”), notified on 26th September 2014, were designed to facilitate the monetisation of operating infrastructure assets through a yield instrument vehicle. This framework enables institutional and retail investors to participate, thereby substantially reducing exposure to construction and promoter-related risk.

SEBI has been progressively aligned the regulatory framework governing InvIT with the disclosure, issuance and listing standards applicable to equity securities under the SEBI (Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2018 and the SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015, while simultaneously lowering the thresholds that had earlier confined the instrument to a narrow institutional base.

InvITS

The InvIT Regulations have been amended repeatedly over the past two years and are supplemented by the Master Circular for InvITs, updated on 11th July 2025. Key highlights of InvIT regulatory framework include:

  • InvIT Corpus, Offer Size and Composition of Investor Base

A publicly offered InvIT requires a minimum asset value of ₹500 crore, a minimum offer size of ₹250 crore, a minimum public float of 25 per cent, and mandatory listing; The minimum application and trading lot is in the ₹10,000 to ₹15,000 range. Further, the maximum subscription by any investor, other than the sponsor(s), its related parties, and its associates, in initial offer shall not be more than 25 percent of the total unit capital. A privately placed InvIT requires a minimum of five and a maximum of one thousand investors.

  • Ticket Size

Recently, the minimum investment by any investor in a privately placed InvIT was reduced from ₹1 crore to ₹25 lakh, and the separate ₹25 crore minimum investment requirement that had applied where such an InvIT invested, or proposed to invest, not less than 80 per cent of the value of its assets in completed and revenue-generating assets was removed. The effect is to align the primary market allotment lot with the ₹25 lakh secondary market trading lot and to open the private channel to a considerably broader base of high net worth and family office capital.

  • Investment Restrictions

Investment is permitted only in infrastructure as defined in the Harmonised Master List of Infrastructure Sub-sectors issued by the Ministry of Finance, whether held directly or through holding companies and special purpose vehicles. Of this, not less than 80 per cent of the value of InvIT assets must be invested in completed and revenue generating projects. The residual permitted basket comprises under-construction projects, listed and unlisted debt of infrastructure companies; equity of listed companies deriving at least 80 per cent of their income from the infrastructure sector, as per the audited accounts of the previous financial year; government securities; money market instruments; liquid mutual funds and cash equivalents; and, pursuant to the recent amendment, also includes unlisted equity shares and liquid mutual fund schemes, etc.

  • Distribution Waterfall

Regulation 18(6) requires that not less than 90 per cent of Net Distributable Cash Flows (NDCF) be distributed at both the InvIT level and the holding company or SPV level, subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 or the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008 as applicable. Distributions are to be declared half-yearly for publicly offered InvITs and yearly for privately placed InvITs. Amendment and relaxations have been introduced wherein a holding company may now offset its negative net distributable cash flows against cash flows received from its SPVs where its own NDCF is negative, subject to adequate disclosure.

  • Leverage and its Monitoring

Aggregate consolidated borrowings and deferred payments, net of cash and cash equivalents, must not exceed 70 per cent of the value of InvIT assets. Borrowings above 25 per cent and up to 49 per cent require a credit rating and unitholder approval. Borrowings above 49 per cent only require credit rating of “AAA” or equivalent. The fund must be utilised only for the acquisition or development of an infrastructure project. In addition, the InvIT must have a track record of six consecutive distributions following listing and obtain unitholder approval. Investments in overnight mutual fund schemes are treated as cash and cash equivalents, and the aggregate of cash and cash equivalents is excluded when computing the value of assets for this purpose.

The Third Amendment introduced a risk-based overlap, wherein an InvIT whose borrowings exceed 49 per cent must undertake a valuation of its assets at the end of every quarter and submit both that valuation report and a quarterly report to the designated stock exchanges along with its quarterly financial results. If an InvIT exceeds this 49% limit, SEBI permits fresh borrowings, but restricts them strictly to capital expenditure for enhancement of assets, major maintenance for road projects, and refinancing of principal debt.

  • Valuation of Assets & Disclosure

Regulation 21 requires a full valuation at the end of each financial year, with the report submitted to the designated stock exchanges alongside the annual financial results. Half-yearly valuation reports accompany the quarterly financial results for the quarter ending 30th September, and valuation reports are to be submitted to the trustee simultaneously with their submission to the stock exchanges, within 15 days from receipt. Reporting timelines under Regulation 23 have been aligned with the financial results calendar. The quarterly report on the activities of the InvIT is now due within the period specified by SEBI for quarterly financial results.

  • Governance Norms & Control by Unitholders

The audit architecture has been aligned to the norms applicable to listed companies. Regulation 22 confers on unitholders a set of rights, including annual meetings, approval rights over specified matters, and the right to remove the investment manager, the trustee, the auditor or the valuer. This signifies a major shift of control from the sponsor to the unitholder.

  • Mandatory Disclosure in offer documents

Schedule III of Regulations mandates comprehensive disclosures in every offer document or placement memorandum of an InvIT. It requires disclosure of the InvIT’s constitution and registration details; particulars of the sponsor, investment manager, project manager, trustee and other key parties, details of the investment strategy and underlying infrastructure assets, financial information, valuation methodology, borrowing arrangements, distribution policy, risk factors, related party transactions, taxation; legal and regulatory matters; governance framework; litigation; and sector-specific information necessary for an informed investment decision.

In addition, the Schedule mandates that the offer document be supported by specified documents, including the full valuation report, auditors’ report, project implementation or project management agreement, due diligence certificate of the lead merchant banker, in-principle approval from the recognised stock exchange(s), and such other material reports. Collectively, these mandatory disclosures and supporting documents establish a robust disclosure framework designed to promote transparency, facilitate regulatory oversight and protect investor interests.

The reduction in the private placement ticket, the recalibration of the public float definition, the alignment of reporting calendars, and the shift to risk-based valuation for leveraged structures have been accompanied by tighter and more frequent disclosure requirements.

4. RISKS INVOLVED IN INVIT

Infrastructure Investment Trusts (InvITs) are often presented as stable, yield-generating investment vehicles backed by operational infrastructure assets. However, their apparent stability should not obscure the complex risk architecture embedded within the structure. While the underlying infrastructure assets may generate relatively predictable cash flows, the ability of those cash flows to reach investors depends upon a series of contractual, statutory and operational mechanisms, each of which introduces its own layer of uncertainty. Consequently, an assessment of InvITs requires a holistic examination of asset-level risks, cash flow risks and structural risks inherent in the trust framework.

Equally significant is the fact that many of the principal risks affecting InvITs are not readily diversifiable. Sector-specific risks—such as fluctuations in traffic volumes for toll roads, payment delays by power distribution companies, or tenant concentration in logistics parks—may vary across different asset classes. However, risks arising from leverage limits, evolving regulatory requirements, governance constraints, distribution mechanisms, and valuation practices are common across the InvIT ecosystem.

5. INVIT OUTLOOK – GLOBAL & INDIA

Globally, InvITs (commonly referred to as REITs in several jurisdictions) have evolved into a mature asset class, with over 1,000 listed REITs/InvITs spread across more than forty countries and an aggregate market capitalization of approximately USD 2 trillion2. Compared to mature markets such as the United States, Australia, Singapore and Japan, India’s InvIT market remains at a relatively early stage of development, despite recording strong growth since the framework was introduced in 2014 and the first listings in 2017.

India vs the World: The Gap3

Country REIT and InvIT Market as % of GDP
United States ~12%
Australia ~8–10%
Singapore ~7–9%
Japan ~5–7%
India ~1.5%

While the Indian market has expanded rapidly in terms of assets under management and the number of InvITs, it continues to face certain structural challenges, including

  •  relatively lower retail participation,
  •  limited secondary market liquidity,
  •  a narrower pool of infrastructure assets concentrated primarily in roads and power transmission; and
  • a comparatively smaller institutional investor base.

Continued regulatory reforms, broadening of eligible asset classes, enhanced market liquidity, and greater participation from domestic institutional and retail investors are expected to bridge these gaps and further strengthen India’s position in the global InvIT market.

A notable recent development addressing the liquidity constraints of InvITs is SEBI’s streamlined framework for the conversion of privately placed listed InvITs into publicly offered InvITs. The August 2025 amendments removed conversion-specific sponsor lock-in requirements and aligned the conversion process with the regulatory framework applicable to follow-on public offers, thereby reducing procedural barriers for mature private InvITs seeking access to public markets. Cube Highways Trust is the first InvIT to utilise this framework, having received unitholder approval, filed its offer documents with SEBI, and launched its public offer. This may provide a viable pathway for improving liquidity and expanding institutional participation in the InvIT market without requiring fresh capital to be raised by the trust.

Further, Mutual Funds have also recognised the importance of InvIT as a significant inclusion to their multiasset portfolio & hybrid schemes in order to diversify the investments while providing a relatively stable income stream, thereby also ensuring long term portfolio stability. This move will also contribute to broadening the institutional investor base.

India’s InvIT market is expected to witness a three-fold growth, supported by the Government’s infrastructure development agenda and asset monetisation initiatives. With assets under management of approximately INR 7.1 lakh crore as on 31 March 2026, the industry is projected to expand to nearly INR 21 lakh crore by 2030.


2 https://www.niftytrader.in/markets/reit-invit-aum-20-trillion-sebi-reforms/

3 https://www.niftytrader.in/markets/reit-invit-aum-20-trillion-sebi-reforms/

6. INVIT IN INTEREST OF STAKEHOLDERS

The InvIT market has witnessed increasing investor confidence, reflected in rising assets under management, cumulative distributions exceeding ₹91,000 crore, and a steadily expanding investor base. During FY26 alone, nearly 2 lakh new unitholders joined the InvIT ecosystem, taking the total investor base to approximately 5.58 lakh unitholders, indicating growing retail participation alongside continued institutional interest.4

Supported by stable cash flows from operational infrastructure assets, predictable distribution mechanisms, and a transparent regulatory framework, InvITs are increasingly being recognised by its stakeholders as an opportunity for:

  •  participation in long term financing for existing infrastructure projects;
  •  freeing-up developer capital for investing in new infrastructure projects;
  •  low- risk investments that attract long term investors such as endowment and pension funds’
  •  facilitation ownership of diversified infrastructure assets by retail investors; and
  •  implementation higher standards of governance in infrastructure development & management

InvIT, as a structure, have opened up an opportunity for individual participation in infrastructure investments as an asset class by establishing a regulated, professionally-managed structure while ensuring liquidity, stable income from investments, and diversification of overall investment risk.


4 https://www.business-standard.com/finance/investment/invits-cumulative-distribution-since-inception-reaches-91-000-cr-report-126061601308_1.html

Yoosaf NA. vs. The Initiating Officer (BPU), Kochi: Unaccounted cash with untraceable sources falls within benami property definitions, and filing returns doesn’t exonerate the possessor from the Act.

4. 2026(5) TMI 936 – Appellate Tribunal under SAFEMA

Yoosaf NA. v. The Initiating Officer (BPU), Kochi

Date of Order : 14.5.2026

Possession of unaccounted cash or cash without ownership cannot go scot-free from the purview of the PBPT Act – the same is covered under the Act.

Unaccounted cash, the source of which is unexplained, falls within the definition of `benami property’.

Only two parties, namely, the `benamidar’ and the `beneficial owner’ are sufficient to constitute a benami transaction – The contention that three parties are required for every benami transaction is devoid of merit.

Section 2(9)(D) of the PBPT Act is clearly attracted because the IO could not trace the source from which the appellant collected the cash.

Mere filing of, or an intention to file, an ITR does not exonerate a person from the application of the PBPT Act.

FACTS

On 27.3.2017, during a routine police vehicle check, cash of Rs 50,13,000 was found in possession of the appellant, Shri Yoosaf N.A. and one Shri Jamsheer P.K. The cash was seized since neither the appellant nor Jamsheer was able to explain its source. In a statement recorded under section 131 of the Income-tax Act, 1961, and in a subsequent affidavit, the Appellant claimed full personal ownership of the cash seized and submitted that the funds had been pooled from friends and relatives for investment in land at Koduvally. He stated that, since those persons were not willing to appear before the Department, he offered to declare the entire amount as his income in AY 2017-18. The Appellant did not furnish any documents identifying the contributors or substantiating his claim. Shri Jamsheer disowned ownership of any part of the cash.

The Initiating Officer (IO) held that, since the source of the cash was untraceable, the provisions of section 2(9)(D) of PBPTA applied. He passed a Provisional Attachment Order (PAO) dated 12.3.2018. The Adjudicating Authority, vide order dated 25.3.2019, confirmed the action of the IO.

Aggrieved, the Appellant (alleged benamidar) preferred an appeal to the Tribunal.

HELD

The Tribunal observed that the following issues emerged for its decision –

i) Whether cash is not property?

ii) Whether, for any benami transaction, three parties are required?

iii) Whether section 2(9)(D) can be invoked in the absence of any investigation regarding the ownership of the cash?

iv) Whether the provisions of the PBPT Act are not attracted, considering the fact that the Appellant is ready to file ITR qua the seized amount?

The Tribunal having considered the rival submissions held as follows –

As regards issue (i), the Tribunal held that cash is often considered tangible movable property due to its physical nature. Assets represent value of ownership that can be converted into cash (although cash itself is also considered as an asset). Considering the intent of the PBPT Act to curb black money, it held that unaccounted cash or cash without ownership cannot go scot-free from the purview of the PBPT Act and the same would be covered under the Act. Since the source of the cash was unexplained, it held that it falls within the definition of benami property.

As regards issue (ii), it held that the contention of the Appellant that, for any benami transaction, three parties are required, is devoid of any merit, as a benami transaction requires only the `benamidar’ and `beneficial owner’. Accordingly, only two parties are sufficient to constitute a benami transaction, as is apparent from the bare perusal of the definition contained in section 2(9)(D) of the PBPT Act, 1988.

As regards issue (iii) i.e. the contention of the Appellant that section 2(9)(D) cannot be invoked in the absence of any investigation regarding the ownership of the cash, the Tribunal held that the Appellant had not denied the fact that cash was seized from his possession without any valid document / evidence regarding its source. It also observed that it could not ignore the statement of the Appellant recorded under section 131 of the Income-tax Act, wherein he stated that he claimed full ownership of the seized cash of Rs.50,13,000, that Shri Jamsheer has no relationship with the cash, and that the total amount of Rs.50,13,000 seized from him had been received from his friends and relatives as contribution towards investment in an immovable property at Koduvally. However, he did not provide valid documents in support of his claim. Since the Appellant neither challenged the said statement nor disclosed the persons from whom he received such a huge amount, the IO could not trace the source from which the Appellant had collected the cash. Therefore, section 2(9)(D) was clearly attracted.

As regards issue (iv), the Tribunal held that the submission of the Appellant that the provisions of PBPT Act were not attracted because he was ready to file an ITR qua the seized amount was untenable. Firstly, the filing of an ITR after being caught and proceeded against was an afterthought strategy to claim back at least 50% of the seized amount. Secondly, the recovery of cash, in the absence of any explanation, is duly covered within the scope of PBPT Act. The right of action under PBPT Act cannot be restrained merely because the Appellant is ready to file ITR under the Income-tax Act. The principal object of the Income-tax Act is to collect income-tax, whereas the object of PBPT Act is to prohibit the practice of benami transactions, to check the accumulation of wealth in the name of benamidars for the use of the beneficial owner without detection, and to confiscate the property involved in a benami transaction. Both the Acts are enacted for different purposes. Mere filing of, or an intention to file, an ITR does not exonerate a person from the application of PBPT Act where the source of money is unknown and remains unexplained.

Kaluram Berva vs. Initiating Officer, Pune: Properties acquired for a company’s benefit in an individual’s name using company funds constitute benami transactions despite legal caste-related restrictions.

3. [2026] 183 taxmann.com 459 (SAFEMA – New Delhi)

Kaluram Berva v. Initiating Officer, Pune

Date of Order : 27.01.2026

Property acquired in the name of the Appellant with consideration provided by PMPL for the future benefit of PMPL constituted a benami transaction under section 2(9)(A) of the Act.

The plea that the Appellant held the property in a fiduciary capacity was untenable since title had been conclusively transferred through registered sale deeds, which was inconsistent with fiduciary holding.

Further also, the use of name of a scheduled caste individual owing to the Rajasthan Revenue Laws did not take the transaction outside the mischief of the Act.

Property held by a benamidar after the amendment w.e.f. 1.11.2016, though acquired prior to the amendment, continued to be covered by the provisions of the PBPTA in view of the decision in Prism Scan, Accordingly,- the provisional attachment was not invalid merely because the acquisition pre-dated the amendment.

FACTS

The present batch of appeals was preferred by the alleged Benamidar and the Beneficial Owner (PMPL), challenging the order dated 19.5.2022 passed by the Adjudicating Authority (AA) confirming the Provisional Attachment Order (PAO).

The properties had been purchased in the name of the Appellant, though the consideration had been provided by Padmavati Marbles Private Limited (PMPL). The transactions were taken as `benami transaction’, and accordingly the properties standing in the names of the alleged benamidars were attached.

The AA concluded that the alleged benamidar was not even an employee of the Beneficial Owner.

The Appellants contended that –

i) the Purchase of the property by PMPA formed part of its business;

ii) the land in question was agricultural land held by an individual of a Reserved Caste and under the Revenue Laws of State of Rajasthan unless the land was converted into a non-agricultural land it could not have been acquired by a person other than that of a Reserved Caste;

iii) the transaction had been entered into prior to the amendment of the PBPTA; and

iv) the Appellants had acted in a fiduciary capacity and thus matter will fall into the exceptions to section 2(9)(A)

On behalf of the Respondents it was contended that –

i)  the land had been purchased in the name of the appellant with consideration provided by PMPL for its future benefit, and therefore it was clearly a benami transaction. Upon conversion of land from agricultural to non-agricultural use, it was transferred to PMPL;

ii) the purchase of the land could not be regarded as being in a fiduciary capacity, because it is not that the property in the name of the company was given in a fiduciary capacity; and

iii) the transaction for land in question was completed with the registration of the Sale Deed in the name of benamidars and, once it was registered in their names, it cannot be claimed to be in a fiduciary capacity. It could have been in a fiduciary capacity if the land had not been registered in the names of the benamidars.

HELD

The land has been registered in the name of the benamidars, for which consideration was paid by the beneficial owner for its future benefit. It was for future benefit of beneficial owner because, after conversion of the land from agricultural to non-agricultural, it was taken by the appellant company (beneficial owner). Thus, the case in hand squarely falls within the definition of Section 2(9)(A) of the Act of 1988 defining “benami transaction”.

In the fiduciary capacity, title of the property cannot be passed on with concluded transaction. Accordingly, the Tribunal held that it did not agree that, even after conclusion of the transaction by registration of the Sale Deed in favour of the appellants, the holding of the land could be said to be in fiduciary capacity, because the beneficial owner does not hold title to the land so as to pass on to another in a fiduciary capacity.

If the Revenue Laws prohibit transfer of the land by Reserved Caste candidate to a person belonging to another caste, it does not mean that the appellant or, for that matter, anyone, could purchase the property by creating a benami transaction. The reason for purchasing the property in the name of the Reserved Caste candidate does not nullify the provisions of the Act of 1988; rather, in view of the statement of the appellant, no reason remained to interference with the impugned order because the transaction falls under Section 2(9)(A) of the Act of 1988 without any exception. That being the position, the Tribunal held that the Adjudicating Authority rightly confirmed the provisional attachment of the property.

As regards prospective application of the amended Act of 2016 the Tribunal held that no doubt the Apex Court, in the case of Ganpati Dealcom (P.) Ltd. (supra), applied the amending Act of 2016 prospectively, but that judgment has been recalled by the order dated 18.10.2024. Thus, the issue no longer remains open for debate. It is, however, necessary to refer the order of this Tribunal in the case of Prism Scan Express (P.) Ltd. (supra) wherein, while, referring to the judgment in Ganpati Dealcom (P.) Ltd. (supra), the definition of ‘benami transaction’ under Section 2(9)(A) of the Act of 1988 was interpreted with prospective application.

The word ‘ held’ used in Section 2(9)(A) of the Act of 1988 was interpreted and held to be applicable to this case. The land in dispute continued to be held in the names of benamidars on the date of the amendment and for some years thereafter.

If a property is transferred to a person whose consideration was paid or provided by another person prior to 01.11.2016, and such a property is not held by that person on or after the date of the amendment, then such a Benami transaction would not be affected by the Amending Act of 2016.

However, if transfer of property took place prior to 01.10.2016 and the property is “held” even after the aforesaid date by the person who has not paid the consideration, which was paid or provided by another person, then irrespective of the date of transfer of the property, its holding would constitute a “Benami Transaction”.

Compiler’s Note: The readers may also consider the ratio of the decision of the Apex Court in the case of Manjula vs. D.A. Srinivas [2026] 186 taxmann.com 357 (SC)[08-05-2026]

DCIT (BPU-1), Mumbai vs. Jiten Pujari: Cash held by employees in lockers for beneficial owners constitutes a fiduciary holding, exempting it from “benami transaction” definitions.

2. [2026] 166 taxmann.com 672 (SAFEMA – New Delhi)

DCIT (BPU-1), Mumbai v. Jiten Pujari

Date of Order: 09.09.2024

Where the beneficial owners did not disown the cash but claimed the cash to be theirs, it was held that where the cash was found in the lockers of the employees of the beneficial owners, which employees were alleged to be benamidars, the employees were holding the cash in fiduciary capacity and such holding would fall under the exception given under section 2(9)(A)(ii) of the PBPT Act

FACTS

A search was conducted on M/s. Trigon Hotels and Resource Private Limited (THRPL) under section 132 of the Income-tax Act, 1961. During the course of search, several bank lockers standing in the name of alleged benamidars were searched, and cash amounting to Rs.9.94 crores was found.

During the search, the statement of the Respondent Benamidar was recorded, wherein he stated that the cash found in the locker belonged to one RKS, the Beneficial Owner. The statement of one VS was also recorded, who stated that the keys to the lockers in which the cash was found were with the Respondent and that the cash belonged to RKS. The statement of one SRP was also recorded, wherein he stated that the cash did not belong to him but had been given to him by the Respondent, and the cash belonged to one SSS, the Beneficial Owner.

The Respondent that the cash was given to him and others for safe custody in their capacity of being the employees of SSS and brothers, the Beneficial Owners, who were holding M/s. Noble India Construction Company. In the affidavit given by the Beneficial Owners, it was stated that the cash found in the lockers were kept in the name of Respondent and others, but the same belonged to SSS, the Beneficial Owner.

The Appellant contended that:

i) there were material inconsistencies in the statements of the witnesses inasmuch as the Respondent and VS stated that the cash belonged to RKS whereas SRP stated that the cash belonged to SSS;

ii) the Respondent was not a long standing employee of M/s. Global India Construction Company belonging to SSS but was merely associated with the firm as a “piece rate worker” and therefore could not claim the benefit of being a long standing employee;

iii) the outcome of the assessment proceedings, wherein the cash had been treated as undisclosed income in the hands of the beneficial owners, had not been taken into consideration; and
iv) the Balance Sheet and books of account did not disclose the cash held by the Beneficial Owners.

On behalf of the Respondent, it was contended that –
i) this was a case where the cash had been entrusted to the Respondent for safe custody in a fiduciary capacity;

ii) the alleged Benamidars had not claimed the cash as their own but had consistently stated that it belonged to the Beneficial Owners;

iii) the Beneficial Owners had not disowned the cash found in the locker and rather, they had claimed it to be theirs and stated that it had been entrusted to the employees for safe custody; and

iv) the case fell within the exception contained in sub-clause (ii) of section 2(9)(A) of the definition of “benami transaction”, as amended by the Amending Act of 2016.

HELD

The Tribunal relied upon the decisions of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in the case of Marcel Martins v. M. Printer AIR 2012 Supreme Court 1987 and in the case of RBI v. Jayantilal N. Mistry (2015) 64 taxmann.com 264 (SC) while interpreting the expression “fiduciary capacity”. It held that although fiduciary capacity cannot constitute an exception in every case, it would apply where the money is entrusted to another person for safe custody. The Appellant’s contention regarding inconsistencies in the witness statements was rejected on the ground that the Adjudicating Authority had analysed those statements in detail and reproduced the relevant portions. The Tribunal further observed that the only addition made in the income tax assessment was in respect of the undisclosed cash in the hands of the Beneficial Owners, which, by its very nature, was not reflected in the books of account, thereby supporting the Respondent’s case. In view of the fact that the Respondent never claimed ownership of the property and, at the same time, the Beneficial Owners did not disown the cash found, and in fact claimed it to be theirs, the appeal was dismissed and the issue was decided in favour of the Respondent Benamidar.

Balkar Singh vs. Initiating Officer: Provisional attachments under section 24(4) must relate to the same property previously attached under section 24(3), not different assets.

Editor’s Note:

From this month, we start a new feature titled “BePR Digest”. This feature will digest cases under the Prohibition of Benami Property Transactions Act, 1988 (“Be”), the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 (“P”) and the Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 (“R”). We are confident that the readers will find reading this monthly digest of cases useful. We invite feedback from the readers on this new feature.

1. [2026] 182 taxmann.com 25 (SAFEMA – New Delhi)

Balkar Singh v. Initiating Officer

Date of Order : 17.12.2025

Provisional attachment under section 24(4)(a)(i) of PBPT Act provides only for the continuation of a provisional attachment made under section 24(3) till the passing of the order by the Adjudicating Authority – therefore the property attached under section 24(4)(a)(i) cannot be different from the property attached under section 24(3)

FACTS

A provisional attachment under section 24(3) of the PBPT Act was made by the Initiating Officer (IO) in respect of the bank account of the Appellant with Andhra Bank. Subsequently, while passing an order under section 24(4)(a)(i) of the Act for the continuation of provisional attachment till the passing of the order by the Adjudicating Authority (AA), the IO provisionally attached a bank account with Axis Bank in the name of Mala Petro Chemicals and Polymers. On a reference made to the AA, the Provisional Attachment Order was confirmed.

The Assessee filed appeal before the Appellate Tribunal and, for the first time, raised the contention that section 24(4)(a)(i) permits only the continuation of the provisional attachment made under section 24(3). Therefore, an order passed under section 24(4)(a)(i) must relate to the same property that had been attached under section 24(3), and not to a different property. The Appellant further submitted that this was a pure question of law and could therefore be raised for the first time before the Appellate Tribunal.

The Respondent contended that the substitution of the property under attachment was due to an oversight or a bona fide mistake and therefore prayed that the matter be remanded with liberty to revisit the issue or pass a fresh order.

HELD

The Tribunal permitted the Appeallant to raise the legal plea for the first time before it, holding that the issue went to the root of the matter and that, if decided in favour of the Appellant, there would be no necessity to examine the remaining issues.

The Appellate Tribunal noted that the property attached under section 24(3) and the property attached under section 24(4)(a)(i) were indeed different. It held that section 24(4)(a)(i) provides only for the continuation of the attachment order passed under section 24(3), and not for addition or substitution of property under attachment. Accordingly, the Tribunal set aside the provisional attachment orders, while grantingliberty to the Respondent to initiate fresh proceedings, as the legal defect pointed out by the Appellant was curable. The Respondent was therefore permitted to proceed afresh strictly in accordance with law.

Transmission of Flats in Co-Operative Societies: An Updated Position

Recent amendments to the Maharashtra Co-operative Societies Act streamline flat transmission. Societies transfer interest based on testamentary documents, succession certificates, or registered family arrangement deeds. Crucially, a nominee serves only as a provisional member and trustee, holding the property for the legal heirs without gaining ownership. In Mumbai, probate is no longer mandatory for certain Wills, though societies may request authentication. While minors or persons of unsound mind can inherit through guardians, they face restrictions on the alienation of property. These updates aim to reduce litigation and improve the transmission process.

INTRODUCTION

This Feature has, on multiple occasions, dealt with the nomination of a person in respect of a flat in a co-operative housing society, transmission post the amendment to the probate law, etc. However, recently, in the State of Maharashtra, the Maharashtra Co-operative Societies Act, 1960 (“the Act”) and the Maharashtra Co-operative Societies Rules, 1961 (“the Rules”) have been amended with respect to the transmission formalities for a flat in a co-operative housing society. This month’s Feature now presents a holistic view of the transmission process of a flat in a co-operative housing society located in the State of Maharashtra, including the process of nomination.

Procedure on the Demise of a Member

Transmission of the share, right, title and interest of a deceased member of a flat in a co-operative housing society in Maharashtra is governed primarily by Chapter XIII-B of the Act.

Section 154B-13 of the Act provides for the transfer of interest on the death of a Member. On the death of a Member of a society, the society shall transfer share, right, title and interest in the property of the deceased member in the society to a person or persons based on:

(a) Testamentary documents – The term testamentary document means a Will. It may be noted, that, after the omission of Section 213 of the Indian Succession Act, 1925, a co-operative society in Mumbai is no longer entitled to insist, as a matter of law, upon production of probate or letters of administration as a precondition to admitting a legatee under a Hindu, Buddhist, Sikh, Jain or Parsi Will as a regular member. However, it is still open to the society — through its bye-laws or by way of a resolution — to require appropriate authentication of the Will, including by way of an affidavit of execution from one or more of the attesting witnesses, an affidavit-cum-indemnity bond from the legatee, and a No-Objection Certificate from the heirs who would have inherited had there been no Will. Some societies may even insist upon a probated Will.

(b) Succession certificate – A succession certificate is a certificate granted by a Court under the Indian Succession Act in respect of any debt due to the deceased or securities owned by him. In case the deceased died leaving behind a Will which only empowered the beneficiaries to collect his debts and securities, then the courts would grant a succession certificate instead of a probate. Ideally, the Act should have mentioned a Letter of Administration, which is a succession document issued in the case of an intestate succession.

(c) Legal heirship certificate – A legal heir certificate is granted under the Bombay Regulation No. VIII of 1827, a pre-independence Order of the then-Governor-General of India. It was issued to provide formal recognition of heirs, executors and administrators and for appointment of administrators and managers of the deceased’s property by the courts. In Anthony Fernandez and others, 1993(1) Bom.C.R. 580 the Bombay High Court held that Bombay Regulation VIII of 1827 continues to be in force and that its provisions are supplemented in certain respects by the Indian Succession Act, 1925.

(d) Family Arrangement Deed – A family arrangement deed is a registered document recording a family arrangement executed by the persons who are entitled to inherit the property of the deceased Member or in favour of a person duly nominated in accordance with the Rules. The Act and the Rules now provide that a society can transfer a flat after the death of a member to the legal heir of such member based on a deed of family settlement. The Rules require that the deed must be registered and must record the terms and conditions with respect to the flat held by the deceased member in the society. The legal heirs must then make an application to the society in Form Y-5 along with the registered deed and an indemnity bond indemnifying the society against any claims in respect of the flat. The society would then invite objections to the proposed transfer by issuing a public notice in two local newspapers. If no claims or objections are received, the flat would be transferred. However, if objections are received, the transfer would not be affected. In such a case, the society would require a Letter of Administration or a Legal Heirship Certificate from a Court.

The Flat successor handbook

Supreme Court decisions such as Kale v. Dy. Director of Consolidation, (1976) AIR SC, 807, Ram Charan Das v. Girja Nandini Devi (1955) 2 SCWR 837; Tek Bahadur Bhujil v. Debi Singh Bhujil, (1966) 2 SCJ 290; K. V. Narayanan v. K. V. Ranganadhan, AIR 1976 SC 1715 have laid down that, under an oral family arrangement/settlement, the terms of which may be recorded in a memorandum, a registered deed is not required. When a document is nothing but a memorandum of what had taken place, it is not a document that would otherwise require compulsory registration. Despite this, the Rules require a registered family settlement document. Parties would need to examine whether this attracts stamp duty as an instrument. This would depend upon the manner in which the deed is drafted. It may be noted that the transmission of a flat under a Will or by way of an intestate succession does not attract any registration or stamp duty. However, the same would not necessarily be true in the case of a deed of family settlement.

While the Act permits transmission in favour of a person named in a Will or under an intestate succession, one must also bear in mind the provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and the Rules/Regulations framed thereunder. For instance, any person resident outside India can own/hold any immovable property in India if it has been inherited from a resident. However, only an NRI/OCI can inherit Indian immovable property from a person resident outside India. Thus, the residential status of the deceased determines which category of non-residents is eligible to inherit the immovable property.

Procedure in the case of Nomination by a Member

The Act provides that the society shall admit a nominee as a provisional member after the death of a member till the legal heir or a person who is entitled to the flat and shares in accordance with law of succession or under a Will or testamentary document is admitted as a member in place of such deceased member. Lastly, it states that if no person has been so nominated, the society shall admit such person as a provisional member as may appear to the Committee to be the heir or legal representative of the deceased member, in the manner as may be prescribed. The Act permits a member of a co-operative society to nominate, in writing, any person to whom his share or interest in the society shall be transferred on his death.

Nominee not the Legal Owner

To refresh, a nomination is not a mode of testamentary disposition. It does not confer beneficial ownership upon the nominee. The nominee, on the death of the member, is no more than a person designated to receive the share or interest of the deceased member from the society and holds the same in trust until the legal heirs or legatees, as the case may be, are ascertained. This proposition has been repeatedly affirmed by the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India over several decades, most emphatically in Indrani Wahi v. Registrar of Co-operative Societies & Ors., (2016) 6 SCC 440, in which the Supreme Court laid down the law relating to nominations in the context of a flat in a co-operative housing society. This decision was rendered by a Division Bench of the Supreme Court in a case arising out of the West Bengal Co-operative Societies Act, 1983, and the West Bengal Co-operative Societies Rules, 1987. However, the principles laid down are of pan-Indian application in respect of nominations under the co-operative societies legislation. The principal issue before the Supreme Court was whether, on the death of a member of a co-operative society who has made a valid nomination, the society was bound to transfer the share or interest of the deceased member in favour of the nominee — and, conversely, whether the act of transfer in favour of the nominee determined the question of title as between the nominee and the other heirs of the deceased member. The Court held that the transfer of shares or interest in favour of the nominee is with reference to the concerned Cooperative Society and is binding on the said society. The Cooperative Society had no option whatsoever except to transfer the membership in the name of the nominee. However, that would per se, have no relevance to the issue of title between the inheritors or successors to the property of the deceased. Thus, on the death of a member who has made a valid nomination, the co-operative society has “no option whatsoever” but to transfer the share and interest of the deceased member in favour of the nominee. The society does not adjudicate competing claims of heirs and is not entitled to delay or refuse the transfer on the ground that other heirs may have a superior claim in succession.

The transfer of shares and interest in favour of the nominee — vis-à-vis the society — does not adjudicate the question of title. The other heirs and legal representatives of the deceased member retain the right to pursue their claims succession or inheritance, in accordance with applicable personal law, before a competent civil forum. The nominee holds, qua the property in the society, the position of a trustee for the true owners, as may be determined inter se the heirs.

The principles laid down in Indrani Wahi apply with equal force to a co-operative housing society in Maharashtra. The position has been authoritatively reinforced and amplified by the Hon’ble Bombay High Court in its decision in Foreshore Co-operative Housing Society Limited v. Divisional Joint Registrar of Co-operative Societies & Ors., WP No. 7834 of 2025, decided on 9th December 2025, which is the most up-to-date pronouncement on the working of Section 154B-13 of the Act.

In Foreshore, after a careful textual analysis of Section 154B-12 and Section 154B-13 of the Act, the Court laid down certain principles that are of general application to all co-operative housing societies in Maharashtra. A clear distinction was drawn between transfer of interest by a living member under Section 154B-12 (which used the expression “may transfer” and preserved the discretion of the society to scrutinise the eligibility of the proposed transferee) and the transfer on the death of a member under Section 154B-13 (where the society’s role is confined to giving effect to the statutory succession). On death, “the society’s discretion was significantly reduced. The society could not choose among claimants or impose additional eligibility norms not found in the statute.” The society’s role was confined to verifying the legal status of the nominee or heir. The Bombay High Court in Pravinkumar Jethalal Dave, vs. The State Of Maharashtra, WP No. 2317/2011 in order dated 9th February 2026 was also on similar lines. It held that the nomination only enabled the society to deal with an identified person after the death of a member. The Bombay High Court in Rhea Parthasarathy Versus Sonali Nimesh Lokhandwala, 2025 (6) Bom.C.R has reiterated that nomination under the Act merely indicates the person with whom the society should deal and does not confer ownership rights on the nominee to the exclusion of the legal heirs. Referring to Gopal Vishnu Ghatnekar vs. Madhukar Vishnu Ghatnekar, 1981 Bom.C.R. 1010; Om Siddharaj Co-operative Housing Society Ltd vs. State of Maharashtra & Ors. 1998(4) Bom.C.R. 506; the Court observed that the nominee merely holds the deceased’s share and interest in trust for the lawful heirs. The rights of the heirs are not lost, and the society’s role remains administrative until succession is duly determined by law or Court. It concluded that a nominee is merely a trustee for the lawful heirs

Nomination Formalities

Under the provisions of the Act, a member can nominate any person as nominee and deposit the nomination with the society. The nomination form would be as outlined in the society’s bye-laws. It must be signed by the member and submitted during his lifetime. In case of joint members, a separate nomination form can be submitted by each member for his respective share. Any nomination made can be revoked or varied by submitting a fresh nomination form in accordance with the procedure specified in the society’s bye-laws. “Bye-laws” are defined under the Act as follows: “bye-laws” mean bye-laws registered under this Act and, for the time being in force, and include registered amendments of such by-laws. The bye-laws are the internal rules and regulations adopted by a society to govern its day-to-day operations. Currently, the Model Bye-laws, 2014 issued by the Commissioner for Cooperation and Registrar, Cooperative Societies (CC and RCS) Maharashtra State, Pune have been adopted by most housing societies. Bye-law 31 lays down the process for nomination. It provides that the acknowledgement of the nomination by the Secretary shall be deemed to be the acceptance of nomination by the Secretary. No fees shall be charged for recording the first nomination.

On receipt of the Nomination form, or the letter revoking the earlier nomination, the same shall be placed before the next meeting of the Committee held after its receipt by the Secretary of the Society for recording the same in the minutes of the Committee. The society would maintain the details of such nominees in a Register of Nominations in Form I under Rule 32 of the Rules.

After the demise of the member, the procedure for admitting the nominee as a provisional member would be as follows:

a) After the death of the member, the nominee must apply for provisional membership in Form Y-4, along with an indemnity in favour of the society. In this respect, Bye-law 33 provides that the Nominee/Nominees shall submit the Application for membership, within 6 months from the death of a Member. If there are more than one Nominees, such Nominees shall make Joint Application to the Society and indicate the name of the Nominee who should be enrolled as Member. The other nominees shall be enrolled as Joint/Associate Members unless the nominees indicate otherwise.

(b) If there is no nomination, or if no nominee comes forth to be admitted as a provisional member, then the society would invite applications from legal heirs by publishing a public notice;

(c) The managing committee of the society would then decide whether to admit a person as a provisional member. If there is more than one claimant, they would be asked to decide inter se who should become the provisional member. If they cannot reach an agreement, then they would need a Court order to that effect;

(d) The Rules expressly provide that the provisional member shall not have any right, title or ownership of the flat and that his name would not be included on the share certificate of the flat. This provides a statutory recognition to what, until now, was judge-made law and was often disputed by nominees. Bye-law 33 also provides that the provisional member shall hold the flat / unit in ‘trust’ till all the Legal Heirs are brought on record and shall not have any ownership rights or create any 3rd party interest or alienate the flat in any manner whatsoever.

Press Reports indicate that, under the draft model Bye-laws 2025-26, nominees would be recognised as “provisional members” immediately upon the death of the original member, entitling them to attend and participate in General Body Meetings — but without voting rights until legal title is actually established in their name. It may be noted that the 2025-26 Model Bye-laws have not yet officially gazetted and, hence, are not final.

Interest acquired by Minor/Person with Unsound Mind

The Act recognises that a minor or a person of unsound mind can acquire, by inheritance or otherwise, the share or interest of a deceased member in a society. There is no bar under the Act to such persons acquiring such a right. They can be admitted as members through their legal representatives or guardians. Such persons would enjoy the rights and discharge their liabilities through their legal representatives or guardians.

It may be noted that such persons would not be able to make a Will in respect of the flat, since a Will can only be made by a major of sound mind. Hence, their estate would always devolve by intestate succession and, subject to their personal law, such as the Hindu Succession Act, 1956, in the case of Hindus. Further, under the Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act, 1956, the natural guardian of a Hindu minor cannot sell/transfer/alienate the minor’s immovable property without the prior permission of a Court. Thus, although such persons can become owners of the property, these qualifications should be borne in mind.

CONCLUSION

The amendments to the Act, the Rules and the Model Bye-laws are welcome changes and would help ease the transmission process in respect of a flat in a co-operative housing society. Hopefully, these amendments would reduce litigation and disputes and improve the ease of transmission of flats in co-operative housing societies.

Allied Laws

20. Union of India & Anr. v. The Registrar, Central Administrative Tribunal & Anr. 2026 LiveLaw (Mad) 308 July 3, 2026

Family pension – Step-son – Definition of “family” – Nomination for gratuity does not confer eligibility for family pension – Step-son not entitled to family pension. [Railway Services (Pension) Rules, 1993, R.70, 75]

FACTS

The second respondent was the step-son of a Railway employee who died in service. He claimed a family pension under the Railway Services (Pension) Rules, 1993.

The gratuity payable to the deceased employee had already been settled in his favour under Rule 70. The Central Administrative Tribunal granted a family pension to the respondent by relying upon the said provision.

The Railways challenged the order of the Tribunal before the High Court.

HELD

The Court held that the entitlement to family pension must be determined strictly in accordance with the definition of “family” under rule 75 of the Railway Services (Pension) Rules.

Though a Government servant may nominate any person for the receipt of gratuity, family pension can be granted only to persons falling within the statutory definition of “family”.

A step-son is not included within the definition of “family” under Rule 75 and is therefore not eligible to receive a family pension. The Tribunal erred in relying upon Rule 70, which governs gratuity and has no application to the grant of a family pension.

The Writ Petition was allowed.

21. Rashmirekha Tripathy & Anr. v. The Branch Manager (Legal Claims), Sriram General Insurance Company Ltd. & Ors. 2026 INSC 661, July 01, 2026

Motor accident compensation – Assessment of income – Income-tax returns – Salaried and self-employed persons – Separate principles for determination of annual income. [Motor Vehicles Act, 1988, S.166, 168]

FACTS

The deceased, aged 39 years, was engaged in the construction business and died in a motor accident.

The Motor Accident Claims Tribunal assessed his annual income at Rs.15,00,000/- on the basis of the income-tax return for the immediately preceding assessment year and awarded compensation of Rs.2.27 crore.

The High Court took the average income disclosed in the previous two income-tax returns, assessed the annual income at Rs.13,33,226/- and reduced the compensation to Rs.1.87 crore.

The claimants approached the Supreme Court. The issue before the Court was whether the income-tax return for immediately preceding year or the average of returns for the previous years should be considered for assessing annual income.

HELD

The Supreme Court held that there can be no rigid formula for computing the annual income of a deceased person or claimant. Income-tax returns, being statutory documents, constitute an important reference point for assessment of income.

A distinction must be drawn between salaried and self-employed persons. In the case of salaried persons, the income-tax return of the immediately preceding year would ordinarily be sufficient, subject to corroborative material relating to promotion or change in salary.

In the case of self-employed persons or persons carrying on business, the average income disclosed in income-tax returns for up to the preceding three years should be taken as a reference point. The nature and growth pattern of the business, its potential growth, initial losses, and other relevant circumstances must also be considered.
Income-tax returns filed after the death or injury are not necessarily liable to be excluded. Where supported by financial statements and surrounding circumstances, such returns may also be considered.

On the facts, considering the nature of the construction business, the annual income of the deceased was fixed at Rs.14,00,000/-, and compensation was determined at Rs.1,97,81,505/-.

The Appeal is allowed.

22. Sardari Lal v. Bishan Dass & Ors. 2026 INSC 669, July 06, 2026

Will – suspicious circumstances – Disinheritance of sole Class-I heir in favour of non-relatives – Propounder required to dispel suspicion – Interference with concurrent findings in second appeal impermissible. [Indian Succession Act, 1925, S.63; Indian Evidence Act, 1872, S.68; Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, S.100]

FACTS

The plaintiff instituted a suit claiming ownership and possession of properties left by her husband, who died issueless. She claimed to be his sole heir.

The defendants relied upon a registered Will allegedly executed by the deceased in 1974, under which his entire estate was bequeathed to them. The plaintiff disputed the Will, alleging fraud, undue influence and suspicious circumstances.

The Trial Court and the First Appellate Court discarded the Will. They noticed, inter alia, the complete exclusion of the testator’s wife, incorrect recitals regarding the relationship of the beneficiaries with the testator, and unexplained circumstances surrounding the execution of the Will.

The High Court, in second appeal, reversed the concurrent findings and dismissed the suit.

The plaintiff’s successor approached the Supreme Court.

HELD

The Supreme Court held that the onus to prove a Will lies upon its propounder. Where suspicious circumstances surround its execution, the propounder must explain such circumstances and dispel the doubts to the satisfaction of the Court.

The complete disinheritance of the sole Class-I heir, namely the testator’s wife, in favour of persons who were not close relatives constituted an unnatural disposition requiring satisfactory explanation. The incorrect recitals regarding the beneficiaries’ relationship with the testator and the testator’s residence and maintenance further raised serious doubts as to whether the Will had executed of the testator’s own free will and with a full understanding of its effect.

Whether the judicial conscience of the Court is satisfied regarding the valid execution of a Will is essentially a question of fact. The High Court could not interfere under section 100 of the Code of Civil Procedure with well-reasoned concurrent findings merely by reassessing the evidence.

The Will was rightly discarded by the lower courts. The Appeal was allowed.

23. Anshad Badruddin v. Directorate of Enforcement and Abdul Khader Puttur v. Directorate of Enforcement 2026 LiveLaw (Del) 628, July 2, 2026

Money laundering – proceeds of crime – Receipt of money in personal bank account – Foundational scheduled offence must first be established – Unexplained credit by itself not proceeds of crime – Prolonged incarceration – Bail granted. [Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002, S.2(1)(u), 3, 45; Constitution of India, Art.21]

FACTS

The applicants were arrayed as accused in a supplementary prosecution complaint under the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 on allegations that they had acted as physical education trainers of an association and received monies from the association.

The Enforcement Directorate alleged that the applicants had personally received funds in their bank accounts and exercised dominion and control over the proceeds of crime.

The applicants sought bail, contending that their role was no graver than that of other accused who had already been granted bail and that no foundational material established that the monies received by them constituted proceeds derived from a scheduled offence.

The Special Court rejected their bail applications.

HELD

The Court held that the question of dominion or control over proceeds of crime arises only after it is first established that the property in question constitutes “proceeds of crime”, namely, property derived or obtained as a result of an accomplished scheduled offence.

The mere fact that money was credited directly to the personal accounts of the applicants does not convert such amounts into proceeds of crime. An unexplained bank credit, without independent material connecting it to a completed scheduled offence, remains merely an unexplained credit.

Neither applicant had been charge-sheeted in the predicate offence. Mere sharing of information between investigating agencies under section 66(2) of the PMLA could not crystallise the existence of a scheduled offence against the applicants.

The applicants had remained incarcerated for more than two years and three months, charges had not been framed, and there was no reasonable likelihood of the trial concluding in the near future. The rigours of section 45 cannot operate to sanction indefinite pre-trial detention.

Considering parity, absence of a foundational scheduled offence at the prima facie stage, and the prolonged incarceration, the applicants were entitled to bail.

The Bail Applications are allowed.

24. Mimansa Nangia & Ors. v. Shivani Hospital Pvt. Ltd. 2026:AHC:103559/ 2026 LiveLaw (AB) 365 May 6, 2026

Specific performance – Readiness and willingness – Financial capacity and conduct of purchaser – Mere escalation in property value no ground to refuse specific performance – Suit within limitation.

[Specific Relief Act, 1963, S.16(c); Limitation Act, 1963, Art.54; Registration Act, 1908, S.32A]

FACTS

The original defendants’ father executed a registered agreement to sell immovable property in favour of the plaintiff company for Rs.5.25 crore. An amount of Rs.2 crore was paid at the time of execution of the agreement, and further amounts were paid towards conversion of the property into freehold.

The vendor died before execution of the sale deed. The original plaintiff repeatedly called upon his legal heirs to execute the conveyance and claimed to have remained ready and willing to pay the balance consideration of Rs.2.84 crore.

The legal heirs resisted the suit, alleging undue influence, inadequate consideration, lack of financial capacity, and absence of continuous readiness and willingness on the part of the plaintiff.

The Trial Court decreed the suit for specific performance. The defendants preferred an appeal.

HELD

The Court held that readiness and willingness must be determined from the financial capacity and overall conduct of the purchaser in the facts and circumstances of each case.

The bank accounts, balance sheets, mutual funds and fixed deposits established that the original plaintiff (respondent) possessed sufficient financial capacity to pay the balance consideration. Its representatives had remained present before the Sub-Registrar for execution of the sale deed, whereas the original defendants (appellants) failed to appear.

The original plaintiff had continuously remained ready and willing to perform its obligations. Mere escalation in the value of the property could not, by itself, constitute a ground to refuse specific performance where the purchaser’s conduct was otherwise unblemished.

The last date fixed for execution of the sale deed was 05.01.2016. The defendants’ failure to appear on that date constituted a refusal of performance for the purposes of Article 54 of the Limitation Act. The suit instituted on 10.01.2017 was therefore within limitation.

No perversity was found in the decree granting specific performance. The defendants were directed to execute the sale deed within one month, failing which the plaintiff was entitled to have it executed through the Court.

The Appeal was dismissed with costs.

IFRS 20 – A New Era In Accounting For Rate-Regulated Activities: Implications For India

IFRS 20, effective January 2029, establishes a robust framework for rate-regulated activities, replacing the temporary Ind AS 114. It mandates recognizing “total allowed compensation” when services are delivered, using discounted cash flows and regulatory interest rates. For India’s power sector, this shift reduces earnings volatility by aligning financial reporting with economic performance rather than tariff billing cycles. Unlike the preservation-focused Ind AS 114, IFRS 20 introduces rigorous measurement and disclosure standards. While evolving from existing ICAI guidance, it significantly enhances transparency, giving investors clearer insights into future recoveries and the quality of regulatory balances.

INTRODUCTION

In May 2026, the IASB issued IFRS 20 Regulatory Assets and Regulatory Liabilities, a comprehensive accounting standard for specified rate-regulated activities. Effective from 1 January 2029, IFRS 20 replaces IFRS 14 and introduces a robust framework for recognising, measuring, presenting and disclosing regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities.

For India, IFRS 20 is particularly relevant because Indian entities currently operate under a mixed landscape. Under Indian GAAP, the ICAI Guidance Note on Accounting for Rate Regulated Activities permits recognition of regulatory assets and liabilities in specified circumstances. Under Ind AS, however, there is currently no equivalent of IFRS 20.

CORE PRINCIPLE OF IFRS 20

The central principle of IFRS 20 is that an entity should recognise the total allowed compensation for regulatory goods or services in the same reporting period in which those goods or services are supplied. Where tariff recovery occurs in a different period, the resulting timing differences are recognised through regulatory assets, regulatory liabilities, regulatory income and regulatory expense.

KEY ACCOUNTING REQUIREMENTS

  • Recognition of enforceable rights and obligations arising from regulatory agreements.
  • Measurement using discounted future cash flows.
  • Use of regulatory interest rates specified or implied by the regulatory framework.
  • Continuous reassessment of future cash-flow estimates.
  • Separate presentation of regulatory income and expense
  • Extensive disclosure requirements.

POTENTIAL IMPACT IF ADOPTED UNDER IND AS

If India adopts an Ind AS equivalent of IFRS 20 (which in all probability it will), regulated entities would recognise many tariff-related rights and obligations directly on the balance sheet. Earnings would better reflect economic performance rather than tariff timing, thereby reducing artificial volatility. Investor understanding of future recoveries and refunds would improve significantly.

However, implementation would require sophisticated modelling of regulatory balances, discounting calculations, regulatory interest tracking, and substantial systems changes.

IFRS 20 VERSUS IND AS 114

One of the most important distinctions is between IFRS 20 and Ind AS 114.

Ind AS 114 (mirroring IFRS 14) is essentially a temporary accommodation standard. It permits first-time adopters that already recognised regulatory deferral account balances under the previous GAAP to continue doing so. It does not establish a comprehensive recognition and measurement model for rate-regulated activities. Its primary purpose is to preserve existing accounting practices until a permanent standard is developed.

IFRS 20, by contrast, is a comprehensive accounting standard. It introduces:

  • A new “total allowed compensation” model
  • Defined concepts of regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities.
  • Detailed recognition criteria based on enforceable rights and obligations
  • Mandatory cash-flow-based measurement.
  • Discounting using regulatory interest rates.
  • Detailed guidance on performance incentives, inflation adjustments, regulatory returns and depreciation-related differences.
  • Comprehensive disclosure requirements

Accordingly, IFRS 20 is not merely an enhancement of IFRS 14 or Ind AS 114; it represents a fundamentally different accounting model.

IFRS 20

LIKELY IMPACT ON INDIAN POWER UTILITIES

The Indian power sector is likely to be among the sectors most significantly affected if IFRS 20 is adopted under Ind AS.

Transmission Utilities

Entities such as Power Grid and state transmission utilities often earn regulated returns based on approved capital bases. IFRS 20 would provide a more structured framework for recognising timing differences arising from tariff orders, true-up adjustments, and delayed recoveries.

Distribution Companies

Electricity distribution companies frequently experience regulatory assets arising from fuel cost adjustments, power purchase cost variations, carrying cost claims and tariff true-ups. IFRS 20 could result in larger recognised regulatory asset balances and greater transparency regarding their expected future recovery.

Generation Companies

Certain regulated generation businesses may experience impacts from deferred tariff recoveries, performance incentives, and regulatory return mechanisms. Earnings could become more stable because economic compensation would be recognised in the period in which it is earned rather than when approved tariffs are billed.

INVESTOR PERSPECTIVE

Analysts would obtain improved visibility into:

  • Future tariff recoveries
  • Regulatory carrying costs.
  • Timing of cash-flow realisation.
  • Quality and recoverability of regulatory balances.

This could improve comparability across utilities and reduce uncertainty surrounding the large regulatory asset positions that are common within the Indian power sector.

CONCLUSION

IFRS 20 represents one of the most significant developments in utility accounting in recent years. By introducing a comprehensive framework for recognising regulatory assets, regulatory liabilities, regulatory income and regulatory expense, it seeks to ensure that financial statements reflect the economic effects of regulation rather than merely the timing of customer billings.
Importantly, India is not starting from a blank slate. The ICAI Guidance Note already recognises the concept of regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities for certain forms of cost-of-service regulation. Consequently, the most significant impact of a future Ind AS equivalent may not be the introduction of regulatory balances themselves, but rather the transition to IFRS 20’s more rigorous recognition criteria, discounted cash-flow measurement requirements, regulatory interest mechanisms, presentation requirements and extensive disclosure framework.

Accordingly, IFRS 20 should be viewed as an evolution of the existing Indian approach rather than a complete conceptual departure, while at the same time representing a major enhancement in transparency, consistency and comparability for regulated entities.

Recent Decisions in GST

I HIGH COURT

38. (2026) 44 Centax 42 (Bom.) Kanakia Spaces Realty Pvt. Ltd. vs. Union of India dated 24.06.2026.

An SCN issued after amalgamation to a dissolved transferor is jurisdictionally void and section 87 cannot preserve proceedings against an entity without legal existence.

FACTS

Petitioner’s transferor company merged into the petitioner under a sanctioned amalgamation scheme. Transferor consequently stood dissolved, and its name was removed from corporate records. Before GST implementation, it had filed service tax returns and informed the respondent regarding amalgamation and credit transfer. Automatic migration nevertheless generated a GST registration in the dissolved transferor’s name. Petitioner repeatedly informed the respondent that the transferor had ceased to exist. Respondent subsequently cancelled that registration after determining NIL liability. Despite these disclosures, the respondent issued an SCN under section 74 against the dissolved transferor. The respondent thereafter confirmed GST, interest and penalty through an order against that entity. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that proceedings initiated against a company dissolved pursuant to amalgamation were without jurisdiction and void ab initio. Section 87 applies only during the period between the appointed date and the amalgamation order and cannot authorize issuance of an SCN to an entity that has ceased to exist. Accordingly, the demand was quashed, while leaving it open to the authorities to initiate lawful proceedings against the petitioner. Relying on Principal Commissioner of Income Tax vs. Maruti Suzuki India Limited, [2019] 416 ITR 613, dated 25.07.2019, which held that informed proceedings against a dissolved amalgamating company are legal nullities and Vodafone Idea Limited vs. Union of India, (2026) 42 Centax 455, dated 12.02.2026, which clarified that section 87 cannot sustain proceedings against a non-existent entity after amalgamation. Accordingly, the Court held that the impugned proceedings were unsustainable in law.

39. (2026) 44 Centax 203 (Cal.) M.M. Motors v. Senior Joint Commissioner of Revenue dated 13.07.2026.

Adjudication order digitally authenticated within statutory limitation remains valid, although served later and enforceability commences only upon service as per section 169.

FACTS

Petitioner faced adjudication under section 73 for April 2018 to March 2019. Respondent digitally signed the adjudication order on 30 April 2024, the extended limitation’s final day and uploaded the order and Form GST DRC-07 on the common portal on 1st May 2024. The petitioner preferred a statutory appeal after making the prescribed pre-deposit. The appellate authority disposed the appeal by varying the original demand and issued a consequential demand. The petitioner though did not question merits of the appeal; however, challenged the respondent’s competence and validity to enforce the adjudication order which, though based on digital signature within limitation, the service of the order was made after the expiry of limitation period. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that the limitation under section 73 governs the issuance of the order and not its subsequent service. Digital authentication on 30.04.2024 completed the adjudication within the prescribed limitation, while uploading the order on 01.05.2024 merely effected service under section 169. Such subsequent communication neither altered the date of issuance nor rendered the order time-barred, although the order became enforceable only upon valid service. Relying on R.K. Upadhyaya vs. Shanabhai P. Patel, (1987) 3 SCC 96 dated 28.04.1987, which distinguishes issuance within limitation from subsequent service as separate statutory acts, the Court held that the CGST Act consciously separates issuance under section 73 from service under section 169. Consequently, the petitioner’s challenge was rejected and the writ petition was dismissed.

40. 2026 (7) TMI 575 Kuehne Nagel Pvt. Ltd. & Anr. vs The Union of India & Ors.(Guj) dated 02.07.2026.

When an original refund claim was unlawfully rejected and decided in favour of Appellant as per Court’s direction, interest must be computed from original claim’s date and not from subsequent application.

FACTS

Petitioner filed an original refund application. Respondent declined to process that application despite supporting certification submitted by the petitioner. Petitioner earlier challenged that refusal before the Hon’ble High Court. The refusal was set aside and the respondent was directed to process the refund claim lawfully. Following that decision, the petitioner filed another refund application. Respondent sanctioned refund of Rs.2,29,32,535/- but rejected claimed interest of Rs.29,51,700/- under section 56 of the CGST Act. Respondent treated the later application as the relevant date for determining delayed-refund interest. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that the petitioner’s entitlement to interest must be determined with reference to the original refund application and not the subsequent application, which was necessitated by the respondent’s unlawful rejection of the original claim. Accordingly, the later filing could not displace the date of the initial refund application for the purposes of section 56. Relying on Kuehne Plus Nagel Private Limited vs. Union of India, 2025 (12) TMI 310, dated 06.11.2025, which held that a duly supported original refund claim must be processed in accordance with law. Court set aside the impugned order insofar as it denied interest and directed the respondent to reconsider the petitioner’s claim by treating the original refund application as the relevant date.

41. (2026) 38 Centax 331 (Guj.) Jyoti Agro vs. Deputy Commissioner of State Tax dated 08.01.2026.

Refund satisfying substantive statutory conditions cannot be denied merely because portal restrictions or technical defects obstructing the prescribed electronic filing procedure.

FACTS

Petitioner exported goods and accumulated unutilised ITC from zero-rated supplies and filed a refund application under section 54(3) of the CGST Act with supporting documents. Shipping bills could not be uploaded because the portal restricted file size. Respondent also declined to accept their hard copies and rejected the application for alleged defects in the undertaking and declaration. After re-credit, the portal prevented another refund application for the same period. Petitioner therefore filed an application under the “Any Other” category with documents. Respondent issued a deficiency memo citing Rule 89(5) and absence of ledger debit, therefore Petitioner was compelled to reverse the entire ITC once again. Aggrieved, Petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that substantive entitlement to refund cannot be defeated by portal limitations or procedural technicalities. The petitioner had made bona fide efforts to comply with the statutory requirements, furnished the necessary documents, and subsequently reversed the entire ITC through Form GST DRC-03. Relying on Shree Renuka Sugars Limited vs. State of Gujarat (2023) 8 Centax 235 dated 13.07.2023, which held that technical defects cannot defeat a refund where the substantive statutory conditions are satisfied, the Court directed the respondent to verify the documents and decide the petitioner’s fresh manual or electronic refund application on merits. It further held that no objection on the ground of limitation could be raised and an appropriate order was to be passed within six weeks.

42. [2026] 188 taxmann.com 168 (Telangana) SDE Engineers Ltd vs. Commercial Tax Officer dated 03-07-2026.

After examining the lease rent agreements between the parties, the Hon’ble Court held that the activity of leasing office spaces along with all amenities and furniture, including movable assets like furniture, fixtures and equipment, does not constitute transfer of right to use goods liable for VAT.

FACTS

The petitioners are engaged in construction of high-rise buildings in the industrial technology park and the same are let out to software companies in terms of the lease agreement along with all facilities and amenities such as IP floor, centralized air conditioning, raw power supply up to the distribution board, light fittings and functional toilets, portable drinking water facility, electricity, sub-station, DG Power Pack, sewage power plant, fully equipped kitchen and cafeteria, furniture, other fixtures etc. The movability of certain amenities is not disputed by the petitioners. The VAT Department levied tax on rental income received by the petitioners on immovable property along with facilities like generators, air conditioners, transformers, lifts and other amenities like furniture and fit-outs to the lessees under section 4(8) of the Andhra Pradesh Value Added Tax, 2005. The question of law before the Hon’ble Court was “whether the rent received by the petitioners towards immovable property would be amenable to tax under the APVAT Act and under section 5E of the APGST Act (a Pre-GST Act levying tax on transfers the right to use any goods) and whether the petitioners are liable to pay tax for the rental income received on the supply of interiors, furniture and fixtures?” The primary contention of the petitioners was that the entire consideration received by them from the IT companies was by way of rent, and that service tax had been paid on the entire consideration so received.

HELD

After considering the terms of the lease agreement between the parties, the Hon’ble Court observed that the petitioners have not parted with possession or control of the properties, except to the limited extent of permitting the tenants to use them as part of the common amenities and facilities provided under the lease. It further observed that, in several instances, such facilities are intended for the common use of more than one tenant and that rentals are charged on a per-square-foot basis and not separately in respect of furniture and fixtures. After examining the legislative rationale behind the enactment of Article 366(29A) and various judicial pronouncements, the Hon’ble Court held that the VAT department could not have, merely on the basis of presumption, bifurcated the composite lease rentals into components attributable to movable and immovable properties. Referring to Para 97 of the decision of Hon’ble Supreme Court in Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited [2006] 2 STR 161 (SC), and upon comparing the ingredient stated therein with the facts of the present case, and the terms and conditions of the lease deeds, the Court held that the said requirement is not satisfied since the goods were not specifically identified for delivery as per any clause of the lease deeds. The Court further held that the agreement only prescribed that the petitioners shall provide the service of making available certain facilities and amenities that could be suspended by the petitioners and that the furniture, fixtures and equipment were replaceable. The Court also held that there is no legal right to use goods, insofar as the agreement does not specifically prescribe the same and that effective control and possession are with the landlord and the legal consequences of use are not transferred to the tenants. It held that the goods are not used to the exclusion of the petitioner and that common facilities, including a cafeteria, are commonly used by employees of several IT companies, including the employees of petitioners stationed in the building. The Hon’ble Court thus concluded that the rent paid by the tenants to the petitioners/landlords towards the furniture, equipment, and other movable items provided in the kitchen and cafeteria, in respect of which the tenants have paid rent, would not be amenable to tax under the APGST Act (VAT regime), as such payments arise out of a contract of service.

43. [2026] 188 taxmann.com 508 (Orissa) Magnum Estates (P.) Ltd. vs. Additional Commissioner, GST (Appeals) dated 15-07-2026.

When the amount of interest was wrongly mentioned in DRC-07 as tax, the Court set aside the order of the first appellate authority after observing that although the Order-In-Original is rectified, the First Appellate Authority cannot rectify his order.

FACTS

In the course of Audit under section 65 of the GST Act, the petitioner was found to have availed wrong input tax credit in respect of exempt supply. The petitioner reversed the credit, but no interest was paid. Therefore, a show cause notice was issued demanding interest and penalty. In DRC-07, the amount of interest is wrongly shown as demand towards tax, preventing the petitioner from filing the appeal without making payment of pre-deposit. The petitioner filed an appeal before the First Appellate Authority, which was dismissed on 29-09-2025. In the meantime, the Original Authority rectified the Order-in-Original exercising power under section 161 of the GST Act on 28-01-2016.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court declined to entertain the petition on merits as it involved verification of facts. However, the Hon’ble Court perceived that if the petitioner is directed to avail the alternate remedy available under section 112 and were asked to pay pre-deposit of interest, when the law does not require them to do so, justice would not be sub-served. The Court was informed that although the Order-in-Original was subsequently modified, the appellant authority is unable to modify the Order-In-Appeal, as the period for rectification under section 161 of the CGST Act has already lapsed and there is no provision to recall the order of the First Appellate Authority. In these circumstances, the Hon’ble Court set aside the Order of the First Appellate Authority and the matter was remitted to the Appellate Authority for deciding the appeal on merit afresh without being swayed by the earlier order.

II GSTAT

44. [2026] 188 taxmann.com 445 (GSTAT – NEW DELHI) Manoranjan Dash vs. Commissioner, Odisha, Commissionerate of CT GST dated 08-07-2026.

No additional pre-deposit is required for filing an appeal before the Tribunal where the mandatory pre-deposit already paid at the first appellate stage exceeds the pre-deposit required on the balance tax amount that remains in dispute after the relief granted by the First Appellate Authority.

FACTS

The appellant preferred an appeal to the First Appellate Authority against the said Order confirming excess Input Tax Credit to the tune of Rs.11,34,474/-, paying 10% pre-deposit to the extent of Rs.1,13,447/-. The Learned First Appellate Authority reduced the total amount to Rs.1,02,012/- towards tax. As the appellant had already deposited a pre-deposit of Rs.1,13,447/- which was much in excess of the 10% of the confirmed tax demand as per the First Appellate Authority’s order, i.e. Rs.10,201, the appellant did not pay additional pre-deposit, treating that the pre-deposit paid at the first appellate level is sufficient to cover the pre-deposit requirement at the second appeal.

HELD

Referring to the decision of Hon’ble Jharkhand High Court in the case of Ashirwad Food Industries vs. Union of India [2026] 183 taxmann.com 563/114 GST 463/107 GSTL 89 (Jharkhand), the Tribunal held that no further pre-deposit is required to be made under section 112 of the Act

Recent Developments in GST

A. CIRCULARS

Clarification regarding jurisdiction change due to Business Migration

Circular no.255/01/2026-GST dated 25.06.2026

By the above circular, clarification has been provided regarding the jurisdictional position when a registered taxpayer shifts the principal place of business and migrates to another GST jurisdiction is given.

B. GSTN

(a) GSTN has issued Advisory dated 01.07.2026 on the revision of the timeline for amendment of Aggregate Annual Turnover (AATO), 2026.

(b) GSTN has issued an Advisory dated 17.06.2026 in relation to e-Invoice API and e-Way Bill by IRN API changes for mandatory capture of Ship-to GSTIN and Voluntary closure of e-Way Bill.

(c) GSTN has also issued FAQs dated 01.07.2026 on Bill-to/Ship-to Transactions, Export scenarios and API Impact

C. ADVANCE RULINGS

21. Pon Pure Chemical India Pvt. Ltd. (AAR Order No. GUJ/GAAR/R/2026/23 (In App. No. Advance Ruling/SGST & CGST/2025/AR/31) dt.24.06.2026)(Guj)

Liquidated damages payable by the transporters to the applicant for various material defects, breaches and non-performance of the obligations, etc., does not constitute consideration for supply. Such receipts are not liable to GST.

The applicant is engaged in the business of chemicals. For the movement of chemicals from supplier’s location to the applicant’s location or from the applicant’s place of business to the Customer’s place of business or Port etc. the applicant has engaged different transporters. The chemicals being transported , are susceptible to certain unavoidable losses during transportation due to evaporation, spillage, leakages, weight loss due to moisture, absorption or desorption, compaction, etc. As per Industry norms, there is an agreed tolerance limit for such losses. Losses within tolerance limit are anticipated, and the applicant accepts the same, with no recovery being made from the transporters. However, losses exceeding the agreed threshold are considered breaches of the contractual terms, prompting the applicant to seek compensation from transporters for the excess loss. The various circumstances under which compensation is received from the transporters, as well as the quantum of such compensation, are narrated in the advance ruling order.

Under above circumstances, the applicant posed following question before ld. AAR.

“Whether the amount from the transporters as a compensation for loss would be considered as a “Supply of services” by the applicant as per para 5(e) of Schedule II of Section 7 of Central Goods and Services Tax Act, 2017?”

The applicant submitted its case regarding the non-liability of the above compensation, citing various provisions of law, including that the amount received from the transporters against the above loss of goods being transported cannot be considered as a ‘supply of service’ under Para 5(e) of Schedule II read with Section 7 of the CGST Act and, therefore, GST cannot be levied on such activity. The provisions of the Indian Contract Act,1972 were also cited. Various judgments were also cited.

It was also informed that the applicant had already reversed the Input Tax Credit (ITC) in respect of goods which were lost in transit, in compliance with the provisions of the GST law.

The ld. AAR noted that though there is no formal contract or agreement between the applicant and the transporters for compensation to be paid by the transporters to the applicant, there was a contract for transportation between the applicant and the transporters, wherein a general reference was found to have been made with regard to the compensation claimed by the applicant.

Details of circumstances, under which the compensation is to be paid by the transporters are also available in said transport agreement.

The ld. AAR referred to meaning of Liquidated damages in the Dictionary as well as, as given in Circular No. 178/10/2022-GST dated 3.8.2022.

The ld. AAR observed that the liquidated damages or penalty are not the desired outcome of the contract and that, by accepting the liquidated damages, the party aggrieved by breach of contract cannot be said to have permitted or tolerated the deviation or non-fulfilment of the promise by the other party. The ld. AAR held that compensation in given facts of applicant constituted liquidated damages payable by the transporters to the applicant for various material defects, breaches and non-performance of the obligations as per the contractual terms and, therefore, such receipts are not liable to GST, as they do not constitute consideration for a supply and are not within the ambit of ‘supply of services’.

The ruling was given in favour of the applicant.

22. Sunil Vishvasrao Khune (AAR Order No. GST/ARA-54/2020-21/B-51 dt.30.3.2026)(Mah)

ITC is available on the inputs and input services used in the construction of commercial property which is sold to customers before receipt of the Occupation Certificate/Completion Certificate from the concerned municipal authorities.

The applicant and his wife, out of their surplus/saving funds, had jointly purchased a property/plot of land by an agreement dated 23.7.2003. The said plot was recognized as a capital asset in the personal Balance sheet of the applicant and his wife till date.

The applicant & his wife are not in any business activity in their individual capacity.

The applicant and his wife, with an intention to earn fixed monthly income in the form of rentals, after their retirement, proposed to develop the above plot of land and re-construct the structure thereon as new commercial building. In order to meet the financial requirements for the said construction, the applicant decided to sale few units while under Construction and to generate funds therefrom. With the above back ground, the applicant sought an advance ruling in respect of the following questions.

“1. Whether the activity of construction / developing commercial units on vacant plot of land being acquired as capital asset out of surplus funds be treated as in the course or furtherance of business in respect of income generated on account of following transactions:

a. Sale of commercial units to prospective buyers

b. Rent received on leasing of commercial units

2. If yes, whether input tax credit be eligible for inputs & input services used for the construction of commercial units in case of above transactions i.e.

a. Sale of commercial units to prospective buyers

b. Rent received on leasing of commercial units”

In support of non-liability, various arguments, such as absence of any intention to carry on business, salary back ground, treatment of the property as a capital asset and not as stock in trader etc. were forwarded.

The ld. AAR, referring to definition of ‘business’, observed that any trade, commerce or similar activity would amount to a business, whether or not it is for a pecuniary benefit. The ld. AAR noted that, as per the meaning of ‘commerce’ in general parlance, it is the exchange of goods or services on a large scale between two persons. The ld. AAR observed that the literal meaning of the phrase ‘in the course of or furtherance of business’ means either of following:

Anything done in relation to business while carrying out business; or

Or

simply a revenue-generating ordinary activity of that organization/concern.

The ld. AAR held that the activity of sale of units in an under construction commercial premises/property to prospective buyers would be classified as a business under GST and would amount to a supply under GST. It was further held that leasing of the premises on rent is also a commercial activity which amounts to a supply under GST and is liable to GST.

Regarding ITC, the ld. AAR referred to section 17(5)(d) and held that ITC is not available on the goods or services received by a taxable person for construction of an immovable property on his own account, including when such goods or services or both are used in the course or furtherance of business.

In view of retrospective amendment, the ld. AAR held that the judgment of Hon. Supreme Court in case of Chief Commissioner of CGST & Ors. Vs. M/s Safari Retreats Private Ltd. & Ors. (Civil Appeal No. 2948 of 2023 – 2024-VIL-45-SC) would not be applicable.

Accordingly, the ld. AAR held that the applicant is not eligible to avail input tax credit on the GST paid on the goods or services or both used for the construction of the immovable property to the extent the units are not sold and are treated as his own property.

So far as in respect of sale of commercial property to prospective buyers is concerned , the ld. AAR held that ITC is available on the inputs and input services used in the construction of commercial property which is sold to customers before receipt of the Occupation Certificate/Completion Certificate from the concerned municipal authorities.

Thus, the ld. AAR disposed of application by clarifying the issues as above.

23. The Assistant Commissioner of Revenue, Shibpur Div., Howrah Commissionerate, CGST & Cx. Vs. Navya Electric Vehicle Pvt. Ltd. (AAR Order No.01/WBAAAR/APPEAL/2026-27 dt.6.4.2026)(WB)

Classification – E-Rickshaw Components in CKD form.

This appeal was filed by department against the ruling passed by the WBAAR vide order no. 26/WBAAR/2025-26 dated 16.1.2026, reported in 2026-VIL-05-AAR (reported in March,2026 issue of BCAJ), in respect of the application for Advance Ruling filed by M/s. Navya Electric Vehicle Pvt. Ltd.

The question before the ld. AAR was:

“Whether the supply of a complete set of components of an electric three-wheeler vehicle (e- rickshaw) in Completely Knocked Down (CKD) form, necessary and sufficient for the assembly of the finished vehicle, should be classified as:

(a) the finished vehicle itself or

(b) a set of various individual parts.”

The ld. AAR, in its ruling, held that when the CKD form includes the motor and any three of the other four major components (other than the motor), viz. transmission, axles, chassis and controller, in proportionate numbers for the assembly of the finished vehicle, then they will be covered by the entry at Serial no.441 of Schedule I of Central Notification no.09/2025-Central Tax (Rate) dated 17.9.2025 and liable to tax @ 5%.

The department challenged above ruling on various grounds, including with reference to the meaning of E-Rickshaw and the Rules of interpretation.

The ld. AAAR noted that the principle underlying the ruling is that once the goods supplied possess the essential character of an e-rickshaw, the provisions of Rule 2(a) of the Rules of interoperation becomes applicable and the supply is required to be classified as the complete article, notwithstanding that the vehicle is supplied in an unassembled condition.

The ld. AAAR held that such principle will apply in a case involving the supply of an e-rickshaw in completely knocked down or semi-knocked down condition, but would not apply where only certain specified components, even if major or critical in nature, are supplied.

The ld. AAAR observed that the test adopted by the AAR regarding the supply of a motor together with any three out of four identified components to consider it as a supply of an e-Rickshaw, does not emerge from the language of Rule 2(a), the Customs Tariff or the relevant GST rate notification.

Accordingly, the ld. AAAR reversed the AAR and held that;

“I. Classification as an electrically operated vehicle in knocked down condition, and GST rate of 5% on the finished vehicle itself shall be applicable only where:

a) all components necessary for assembly of a complete e-rickshaw are supplied together as a single identifiable unit, kit or package;

b) the components supplied constitute a complete CKD/SKD kit requiring only assembly and not the addition of any essential component.

c) the purchase order, invoice, packing list and other contemporaneous commercial records consistently establish that the transaction is for supply of an e-rickshaw in CKD/SKD condition; and,

d) the actual contents of the consignment correspond with the description contained in such commercial records.

III. Failure to satisfy any of the aforesaid conditions would result in the goods being classified as individual parts and components and taxed at the rate applicable thereto.”

24 Eastern Coalfields Ltd. (AAR Order No.04/WBAAR/ 2026-27 dt.5.6.2026)(WB)

Reclaim of ITC upon retrospective Amendment

The facts are that the applicant had entered into a contract with M/s. China Coal Overseas Development Co. Ltd. (here-in-after referred to as “CODCO”) for a Longwall Mining project vide agreement dated 19.12.2015. In respect of the said contract, the applicant availed services from M/s. Gayatri Projects Ltd. (GPL).

M/s. GPL had raised 3 invoices on applicant against the work done in the months of January 2020, February 2020, and March 2020 on 01.01.2020, 01.02.2020 and 02.03.2020 respectively. Based on the invoices issued by GPL, the applicant had availed ITC. However, owing to the outbreak of COVID-19 pandemic and financial constraints, GST Returns for the said months were filed belatedly, i.e. beyond the cut off period, by the supplier, M/s. GPL. In the above facts, the applicant filed an application for Advance Ruling.

Vide Order No. 07/WBAAR/2021-22 dated 09.08.2021 – 2021-VIL-345-AAR, the ld. AAR, on the facts of the case, held that the ITC availed by the applicant on the invoices raised by GPL would be required to be reversed by the applicant in view of Rule 36 (4) of the CGST/WBGST Rules 2017. Accordingly, during the course of the Advance Ruling proceedings, the applicant reversed the ITC availed earlier on the disputed invoices and intimated the compliance to its jurisdictional officer.

There was an amendment to the GST Act vide Notification no.17/2024-Central Tax dated 17.9.2024, by which section 16(5) was inserted into the CGST Act.

The applicant believed that, pursuant to insertion of Section 16(5) of the CGST Act, 2017, the ITC originally availed pertaining to the months January, February and March 2020, was fully eligible, as the same was availed in the monthly GSTR returns filed before 30th November 2021 and GPL had also filed its GSTR-1 monthly returns on 17.11.2020, well before 30th November 2021.

In this background, the applicant has approached this ld. AAR with following new question:

“Whether, in view of the insertion of sub-section (5) of Section 16 of the CGST/WBGST Act, 2017, by the Finance Act (No 2) of 2024, which operates retrospectively w.e.f. July 2017, whether the applicant is now entitled to reclaim the Input Tax Credit on inward supplies on invoices issued by the Vendor/Supplier pertaining to the tax period January, February and March 2020 which have already been reversed pursuant to the Order of the Advance Ruling Authority dated 09.08.2021?”

Pursuant to the retrospective amendment, the applicant sought to reclaim the ITC that had earlier been reversedThe ld. AAR referred to Section 150 of the Finance (No.2) Act,2024, which provides that:

‘No refund shall be made of all the tax paid or the input tax credit reversed, which would not have been so paid, or not reversed, had section 118 been in force at all material times’

The ld. AAR observed that, since it was a case of re-availing of ITC that had already been reversed, the reclaim of the same would tantamount to a refund of Input Tax Credit and was, therefore, barred by the above provision.

Based on above analysis, the ld. AAR held that the reclaim of the reversed ITC is not permissible.

25. The Deputy Commissioner, State Tax, Bowbazar Charge, Govt. of WB vs. Om Jai Balajee Construction Pvt. Ltd. (AAAR Order No.03/WBAAR/Appeal/2026 dt.2.7.2026)(WB)

Classification – Sun-cured tobacco leaves

This appeal was filed by the Department against the Ruling passed by the WBAAR, vide Advance Ruling Order No. 28/WBAAR/2025-26 dated 13.02.2026 (2026-VIL-31-AAR) in respect of the application for Advance Ruling filed by M/s Om Jai Balajee Construction Private Limited.

The Respondent intended to procure tobacco leaves directly from cultivators/farmers and supply the same, without undertaking any further processing, to other dealers.

The applicant raised the following questions before the ld. AAR:

“(i) What would be the applicable rate of GST on tobacco leaves sold to the other traders, by the Respondent as they were purchased from farmers after sun curing in the fields, without undertaking any processing except the storage/ stocking of the leaves?

(ii) What would be the applicable rate of GST if the Respondent segregates the tobacco into grades depending upon their size (width), colour /shade, length, texture of the leaf etc., and sells such graded tobacco leaf?

(iii) What would be the applicable rate of GST if the tobacco leaves are sold to other dealers after removing the butts to avoid damage to leaves during transportation etc.?”

Upon appreciating submissions from both sides, the ld. AAR took the view that tobacco, which is not stemmed or stripped, retains the essential character of tobacco leaves and that the tariff itself recognises cured tobacco as tobacco leaves.

The ld. AAR also observed that curing does not alter the essential character of tobacco leaves and merely renders them commercially fit for further use, and that they do not lose their character as tobacco leaves merely because moisture and sap are removed through the curing process.

The ld. AAR ruled that;

(a) sun-cured tobacco leaves supplied after storage or stocking; (b) graded tobacco leaves; and (c) tobacco leaves subjected to butting,  continue to retain their character as tobacco leaves and are classifiable under Tariff Item 240110. Accordingly, the Authority held that the above supplies are covered by Entry No. 162 of Schedule I to Notification No. 1/2017-Central Tax (Rate), as amended, and are liable to GST at the rate of 5%.

The argument of appellant before AAAR was that, though “Tobacco Leaves” attract GST at the rate of 5%, “Unmanufactured Tobacco (other than tobacco leaves)” attract GST at the higher rate prescribed under the relevant GST rate notification, and therefore the higher rate should be applied.

Looking to the basic nature of tobacco leaves, the ld. AAAR concurred with the AAR and held that sun-cured tobacco leaves procured from farmers and supplied by the respondent without any further processing, except storage or stocking, as well as tobacco leaves subjected only to grading, bundling or butting, continue to retain their character as “tobacco leaves” and are rightly covered under Entry No. 162 of Schedule I to Notification No. 1/2017-Central Tax (Rate), as amended from time to time, and are liable to GST at the rate of 5%. The appeal of department was, thus, rejected.

Sanction For Reassessment – Retrospective Applicability Of Proviso To Section 151

The authors examine whether the 2023 amendment to Section 151, aligning sanctioning authorities with Section 149’s extended time limits, applies retrospectively. For reassessment notices issued beyond three years between 2021 and 2023, the Ahmedabad Tribunal deemed the proviso clarificatory, validating sanctions by the Principal Commissioner. Conversely, the Mumbai Tribunal and Bombay High Court ruled the amendment prospective, finding such sanctions invalid without Principal Chief Commissioner approval. They emphasize that Section 149(2) subordinates limitation periods to Section 151’s mandates. Although the Finance Act 2023 resolved this for subsequent notices, earlier cases remain contested.

ISSUE FOR CONSIDERATION

The time limit for issue of notices for reassessment under section 148 are contained in section 149(1) of the Income Tax Act, 1961 (“the Act”). This time limit (as it stood on 1st April 2022) was 3 years from the end of the relevant assessment year, unless an asset, expenditure in respect of a transaction, event or occasion or entry in books of account, of a value of more than Rs.50 lakh, had escaped assessment, in which case the time limit was 10 years from the end of the relevant assessment year.

This time limit stood extended by the third and fourth provisos to section 149(1) (applicable from 1st April 2021 till 1st September 2024), which read as under:

“…Provided also that for the purposes of computing the period of limitation as per this section, the time or extended time allowed to the assessee, as per show-cause notice issued under clause (b) of section 148A or the period during which the proceeding under section 148A is stayed by an order or injunction of any court, shall be excluded:

Provided also that where immediately after the exclusion of the period referred to in the immediately preceding proviso, the period of limitation available to the Assessing Officer for passing an order under clause (d) of section 148A is less than seven days, such remaining period shall be extended to seven days and the period of limitation under this sub-section shall be deemed to be extended accordingly…”

Section 151 of the Act stipulates the authority who is required to grant sanction for issue of notice under section 148. From 1st April 2021 till 31st March 2023, section 151 read as under:

“Specified authority for the purposes of section 148 and section 148A shall be,—

(i) Principal Commissioner or Principal Director or Commissioner or Director, if three years or less than three years have elapsed from the end of the relevant assessment year;

(ii) Principal Chief Commissioner or Principal Director General or Chief Commissioner or Director General, if more than three years have elapsed from the end of the relevant assessment year:”

This section 151 was amended with effect from 1st April 2023, by insertion of a proviso to this section, which read as under:

“Provided that the period of three years for the purposes of Clause (i) shall be computed after taking into account, the period of limitation as excluded by the third, fourth and fifth provisos or extended by the sixth proviso to sub section (1) of Section 149 of the Act.”

An issue has arisen before the Tribunal as to whether the insertion of the above proviso to section 151 with effect from 1st April 2023 is clarificatory in nature and therefore retrospective in operation. In particular, for the period from 1st April 2021 to 31st March 2023, where a notice was issued under section 148 on any date subsequent to the expiry of the relevant time limit of 3 years for issue of such notice (i.e. beyond the period of 3 years), by applying the third or fourth proviso to section 149(1), which was the relevant authority for grant of sanction for issue of notice – the Principal Commissioner of Income Tax (“Pr CIT”) or Principal Chief Commissioner of Income Tax (“Pr CCIT”)? In other words, could there be different time limits for issue of notice and for sanctioning of such a notice? Once the time limit for issue of notice is extended, will it also be extended to the power of the Pr. CIT to sanction such a notice, which otherwise was required to be sanctioned by Pr. CCIT only?

The reassessment Authority Rift

While the Ahmedabad bench of the Tribunal has taken a view that the insertion of the above proviso, extending the date for sanction of issue of notice, is clarificatory in nature and therefore applies retrospectively, and that the sanction by the Pr. CIT in such a case was valid, the Mumbai bench of the Tribunal has held that the proviso operated prospectively, and therefore sanction by the Pr. CIT was invalid in such a case. In other words, the issue is about the authority who should have sanctioned the notice within the extended time; the Pr. CIT or the Pr. CCIT. The amendment by the Finance Act, 2023 seeks to settle this conflict for notices issued and sanctioned on or after 1st April, 2023.

PINKIBEN RIDDHESHKUMAR BHANDARI’S CASE

The issue recently came up before the Ahmedabad Bench of the Tribunal in the case of DCIT vs Pinkiben Riddheshkumar Bhandari, TS-954-ITAT-2026 (AHD).

This was a case pertaining to AY 2018-19, where a notice under section 148A, asking the assessee to show cause as to why proceedings under section 148 should not be initiated, was issued on 11th March 2022, to which the assessee filed a reply on 19th March 2022. A notice under section 148 was subsequently issued on 7th April 2022, after obtaining the approval of the Pr. CIT, alleging that income of Rs.44.19 lakh had escaped assessment.

The reassessment proceedings were completed by making the addition of Rs.44.19 lakh on account of bogus long-term capital gains, based on information obtained from the Insight Portal.
In first appeal, the Commissioner (Appeals) deleted the addition made by the AO both on legal grounds as well as on merits. The Commissioner (Appeals) noted that the income alleged to have escaped assessment was less than Rs.50 lakhs. He observed that as per the provisions of section 149 as in force during the relevant period, no notice under section 148 could have been issued for the relevant assessment year if three years had elapsed from the end of the relevant assessment year, unless the case fell under clause (b). As the case of the assessee was clearly covered under section 149(1)(a), the three years’ time period from the end of the relevant year expired on 31 March 2022. Since the notice was issued on 7 April 2022, the same was held to be time barred by the Commissioner (Appeals).

The Commissioner (Appeals) also noted that no notice under section 148 could be issued without the prior approval of the specified authority. As per the provisions of section 151 as in force during the relevant period, the specified authority for the purpose of section 148 and section 148A was the Pr. CIT if three years or less than three years had elapsed from the end of the relevant assessment year. In other cases, it was the Pr. CCIT where more than three years had elapsed from the end of the relevant assessment year.

The Commissioner (Appeals) observed that the relevant assessment year in this case was AY 2018-19, and the three-year time period had elapsed on 31 March 2022, and also that the notice under section 148 was issued on 7 April 2022 after obtaining the prior approval of the Pr. CIT. Since, as per the provisions of section 151(ii), the competent authority to give approval after the lapse of three years from the end of the relevant assessment year was the Pr. CCIT, therefore the notice issued under section 148 was liable to be quashed.

In further appeal, the Tribunal examined the third and fourth provisos to section 149(1) as they then stood for the relevant period. It observed that these provisos had escaped the attention of the Commissioner (Appeals). The notice under section 148A(b) was issued by the AO on 11 March 2022, and the reply to that was filed by the assessee on 19 March 2022. As per the third proviso to section 149(1), the limitation period stopped running on 11 March 2022 and restarted on 19 March 2022. Further, as per the fourth proviso, if, after exclusion of the time period allowed to the assessee for filing reply to the notice under section 148A(b), the period of limitation available to the AO for passing order under section 148A(d) was less than seven days, the remaining period was extended to seven days. The Tribunal accordingly held that after excluding the time period of eight days from the date of issue of notice under section 148A(b) till the date of filing of reply by the assessee to this notice, the order under section 148A(d) was passed in time and the notice under section 148 had been issued well within the limitation period.

The Tribunal held that, for the purposes of section 151, the limitation period as provided under section 149, including the extended period under the third and fourth provisos for calculating the time period of three years, would also apply. Therefore, in the view of the tribunal, the three years from the end of the relevant year had to be counted as per the provisions of section 149 for obtaining approval of the specified authority.

The Tribunal observed that it would be an implausible, far-fetched and unconvincing interpretation of the relevant provisions of Sections 149 read with Section 151, to interpret that the three years’ limitation period for issuing of notice u/s 148 as prescribed u/s 149 and that for obtaining approval of the specified authority u/s 151, were different. Both the provisions of Sections 149 and 151, as held by the Tribunal, were required to be read in consonance and in harmony with each other as they operated collectively and not in isolation to each other. Therefore, the three-year period from the relevant assessment year for issuing notice under section 148 and for obtaining section under section 151 had to be counted after excluding the extended period as provided under the third and fourth provisos to section 149.

The Tribunal further noted that this anomaly stood removed by the insertion of the proviso to section 151 by the Finance Act, 2023 with effect from 1 April 2023, which read as under:

“… Provided that the period of three years for the purposes of clause (1) shall be computed after taking into account the period of limitation as excluded by the third or fourth or fifth provisos or extended by the sixth proviso to sub-section (1) of section 149.”

The Tribunal was of the view that this proviso was clarificatory in nature, and supported the view taken by it. Merely because this proviso had been inserted with effect from 1 April 2023, in the view of the tribunal, that would not lead to any conclusion that, before such insertion, the provisions of section 151 were to be read on a standalone basis and in isolation from the provisions of section 149. As per the view taken by the tribunal, even before the insertion of the proviso to section 151, the provisions of sections 149 and 151 had to be read together to arrive at a harmonious view. Hence the period of three years could not be different for the purpose of computing limitation for the issuance of notice under section 148 and for obtaining approval of the specified authority under section 151.

The Tribunal therefore decided this issue against the assessee and in favour of the revenue, holding that the sanction by the Pr. CIT (instead of the Pr. CCIT), during the extended period, was valid.

SHABBIR TAHERI’S CASE

The issue had come up earlier before the Mumbai bench of the tribunal in the case of Shabbir Taheri v ITO, ITA No 1574/Mum/2025, adjudicated by the order dated 15 October 2025.

In this case, the AO had issued show cause notice under section 148A(b) on 20 March 2022. In response to this notice, the assessee furnished his reply on 30 March 2022. After considering the reply of the assessee, the AO passed an order under section 148A(d) on 6 April 2022. Simultaneously, the AO issued notice under section 148 on 6 April 2022, proposing to reassess the income for AY 2018-2019, after obtaining the prior approval of the Pr. CIT on the same day.

The issue of sanction by the Pr. CIT was contested in appeal by the assessee but the appeal was dismissed by the Commissioner (Appeals).

Before the Tribunal, it was argued on behalf of the assessee, that after the expiry of three years from the end of the assessment year under dispute, as per section 151(ii), the specified authority who could grant sanction/approval under section 148A and 148 was only the Pr. CCIT. Since the approval/sanction in the case had been obtained from the Pr. CIT, it was invalid. Hence, all actions taken by the AO pursuant to such approval were also invalid.

On behalf of the revenue, reliance was placed upon a decision of the Mumbai bench of the tribunal in the case of Albert Joseph Rosario v ITO, ITA No 1168/Mum/2025, order dated 22nd July 2025. In this case, a view had been taken that the limitation prescribed under section 149(1) for issuance of notice under section 148 would authorise the Pr. CIT to grant sanction for issue of notice as provided under section 151. As per the reasoning of the bench in that decision, applying the provisions contained in third and fourth proviso to section 149(1) as it then stood, the three year period in terms with section 151(i) was to be determined after excluding the time allowed to the assessee as per show cause notice issued under section 148(b); and further additional time of seven days thereafter to the AO to issue the notice under section 148. The Tribunal chose not to follow the ratio of this decision in view of the other decisions referred to by it in the order.

In adjudicating the appeal in the case under consideration, i.e. Shabbir Taheri’s case, the bench, including the Vice-President of the Tribunal, analyzed the provisions relating to reassessment prior to 1 April 2021, and those as amended by the Finance Act, 2021 with effect from 1 April 2021. The Tribunal noted that section 149(2) provided that the limitation prescribed under section 149(1) for issuance of notice shall be subject to the provisions of Section 151. As per the Tribunal, the use of the word ‘shall’ in section 149(2) made it clear that the limitation prescribed u/s. 149 for issuance of notice u/s. 148 was subject to the timeline prescribed u/s. 151. In other words, the limitation prescribed u/s. 149(1) would not override the timeline prescribed for grant of approval by the specified authority u/s. 151.

The Tribunal noted that the specified authority for grant of sanction before expiry of 3 years from the end of the assessment year was the Pr. CIT, while if more than three years had elapsed, the specified authority was the Pr. CCIT. It found it noteworthy that while the third and fourth provisos were added to section 149(1) effective from 1st April 2021, no corresponding amendment was made to section 151. The proviso to section 151 was added only by the Finance Act, 2023 effective from 1st April 2023. Therefore, as per section 151, as it stood prior to the 2023 amendment, the limitation prescribed under clause (i) of section 151 was three years from the end of the relevant assessment year, without the benefit of further extension as under third, fourth or fifth proviso to section 149(1).

Therefore, according to the Tribunal, keeping in view the provision contained under sub section (2) of section 149 (which made the limitation provided u/s. 149(1) subject to the timeline provided u/s. 151) the limitation provided u/s. 149(1) (including the provisos), could not get imported for the purpose of extending the limitation u/s. 151(i), prior to the amendment of section 151 by Finance Act, 2023. That being the case, the timeline for sanction by specified authority fixed u/s. 151 of the Act had to be scrupulously followed.

The Tribunal relied upon the following decisions of the Bombay High Court, where it had been held that the sanctioning authority for notices issued after expiry of three years was the Pr. CCIT and that the proviso to section 151 would not be applicable in such cases:

Vodafone India Limited, WP No 2678 of 2022

Mystique Media Pvt Ltd v ITO, WP(L) No 12562 of 2024

Punrima Jitendra Navsariwala v ITO, WP No 7 of 2024

Agnello Oswin Dias v ACIT 161 taxmann.com 16 (Bom)

The Tribunal also noted that the Mumbai bench of the Tribunal, after considering the Bombay High Court decision in the case of Vodafone India, had considered the identical issue in the following cases, and decided the matter in favour of the assessee:

Davos International Fund v ACIT, ITA No 1190/Mum/2024

Asha P Kedia 174 taxmann.com 99 (Mum)

The Tribunal also observed that sections 149 and 151 had been enacted for different purposes and operated in different situations. While section 149 prescribed limitation for issuance of notice u/s. 148 and 148A, section 151 prescribed the timeline for the specified authority to grant sanction for sections 148 and 148A. It reiterated that in absence of any enabling provision u/s. 151, the third, fourth, fifth or sixth provisos of section 149(1) could not be read into section 151 to authorise the Pr. CIT to grant sanction for issue of notice under section 148 during the extended time limit u/s. 151(i).

The Tribunal therefore set aside the notice under section 148 for want of sanction from the appropriate authority, and therefore quashed the resultant reassessment order.

OBSERVATIONS

At the outset it is relevant to note that the Tribunal, in holding that the sanction by the Pr. CIT for issue of notice u/s 148 in extended time, was valid in cases of both Pinkiben Riddeshkumar Bhandari (supra) as well as Albert Joseph Rosario (supra), the Bombay High Court decisions on the subject, as well as the earlier decision of Mumbai bench of the Tribunal in Davos International Fund’s case (supra), had not been cited nor considered by the Tribunal.

In Vodafone India’s case (supra), the Bombay High Court held as under:

“3. The impugned order and the impugned notice both dated 7% April 2022 state that the Authority that has accorded the sanction is the PCIT, Mumbai 5. The matter pertains to Assessment Year (“AY”) 2018-19 and since the impugned order as well as the notice are issued on 7th April 2022, both have been issued beyond a period of three years. Therefore, the sanctioning authority has to be the PCCIT as provided under Section 151 (ii) of the Act. The proviso to Section 151 has been inserted only with effect from 1 April 2023 and, therefore, shall not be applicable to the matter at hand.

4. In this circumstances, as held by this Court in Siemens Financial Services Private Limited Vs. Deputy Commissioner of Income Tax & Ors.,’ the sanction is invalid and consequently, the impugned order and impugned notice both dated 7th April 2022 under section 148A(d) and 148 of the Act are hereby quashed and set aside.”

In Mystique Media’s case (supra), the Bombay High Court’s order reads as under:

“4. The impugned order and the impugned notice both dated 5th April 2022 state that the Authority that has accorded the sanction is the PCIT, Mumbai. The matter pertains to Assessment Year (“AY”) 2018-2019 and since the impugned order as well as the notice are issued on 5th April 2022, both have been issued beyond a period of three years. Therefore, the sanctioning authority has to be the PCCIT as provided under Section 151(ii) of the Act. The proviso to Section 151 of the Act has been inserted only with effect from 1 April 2023 and, therefore, shall not be applicable to the matter at hand.

5. In the circumstances, as held by this Court in Siemens Financial Services Private Limited Vs. Deputy Commissioner of Income Tax & Ors, the sanction is invalid and consequently, the impugned order and impugned notice both dated 5 April 2022 under Sections 148A(d) and 148 of the Act are hereby quashed and set aside.”

In Purnima Navsariwala’s case (supra), the conclusion of the Bombay High Court is as under:

“4…..The matter pertains to Assessment Year (“AY”) 2018-2019. Since the impugned order as well as the notice are both issued on 7th April 2022, both have been issued beyond a period of three years, therefore, the sanctioning authority has to be the PCCIT as provided under Section 151(iii) of the Act. The proviso to Section 151 of the Act has been inserted only with effect from 1 April 2023 and, therefore, shall not be applicable to the matter at hand.

5. In these circumstances, Mr. Shah submits that as held by this Court in Siemens Financial Services Private Limited v. Deputy Commissioner of Income Tax & Ors, the sanction is invalid. Mr. Rattesar agrees. Consequently, the impugned order passed under Sections 148A(d) of the Act and impugned notice issued under Section 148 of the Act, both dated 7″ April 2022, are hereby quashed and set aside.”

A similar view has been taken by the Bombay High Court in Alag Property Construction Pvt. Ltd. v. ACIT(2025) 179 taxmann.com 578 (Bom) and in Skypak Travels (P.) Ltd. vs. Income-tax Officer [2026] 185 taxmann.com 963 (Bombay). The Court held that where the period of three years from the end of the relevant assessment year has expired, sanction under section 151(i) could not have been accorded by the Principal Commissioner, and such sanction renders the reassessment proceedings void ab initio.

In Davos International Fund’s case (supra), the Tribunal, after considering the ratio of the Bombay High Court decision in the case of Vodafone India (supra), observed as under:

“8….In the decision of the Vodafone Idea (supra), the Hon’ble High Court has given a specific finding that the proviso to section 151 extending the time limit as per the third, fourth or fifth proviso to section 149 is not applicable for AY 2018-19 as the same is inserted only w.e.f. 01.04.2023. When we apply the said ratio to assessee’s case, in our considered view, the claim of the revenue that the period of 3 years expires only on 09.04.2022 is not correct and that revenue cannot take shelter under the proviso to section 151 which came into effect only from 01.04.2023. Accordingly, the notice issued on 04.04.2022 by the AO is issued beyond three years and therefore the approval should have been obtained by the authorities as specified under section 151(ii) Principal Chief Commissioner. As already stated the approval in assessee’s case is obtained from CIT(IT) and therefore we are inclined to agree with the contention of the assessee that the notice under section 148 has been issued without obtaining the approval from the correct authority as specified under section 151. Respectfully following the above decisions of the Hon’ble Bombay High Court we hold that the notice issued by the AO under section 148 without obtaining approval from correct appropriate authority is invalid and the assessment done under section 147 r.w.s. 144(13) of the Act is liable to be quashed.”

A similar view has been taken by the Mumbai bench of the Tribunal, following the decision in the case of Shabbir Taheri (supra), in the cases of Sanjay Shantilal Dave v Asst Unit 186 taxmann.com 138 (Mum), and Shailesh Asalaraj Jain v Pr CIT, 184 taxmann.com 745 (Mum).

Judicial propriety would have required both benches of the Tribunal to follow the ratio of these decisions. Had these decisions been considered, the view taken by the Tribunal in the cases of Pinkiben Riddeshkumar Bhandari (supra) as well as Albert Joseph Rosario (supra) would have been different.

Further, both these decisions did not consider the impact of section 149(2), as considered by the Tribunal in Shabbir Taheri’s case (supra), which states that the limitation prescribed under section 149(1) shall be subject to the provisions of section 151, and that therefore the provisions of section 151 would override that of section 149(1).

Therefore, the view taken by the Mumbai bench of the Tribunal in Shabbir Taheri’s case (supra), is evidently the better view of the matter, that the extension of time limit under the third and fourth provisos to section 149(1) does not apply to section 151 so as to authorise the Pr. CIT to grant sanction for issue of notice under section 148 during the period extended by third and fourth provisos to section 149. Of course, this controversy no longer survives for notices issued on or after 1st April 2023 by the Finance Act 2023, given the insertion of the proviso to section 151 from that date. After the amendment, the issue of notice u/s 148 on or after 1st April, 2023 during the extended period on sanction by the Pr. CIT is valid in law.

Society News

I. LEARNING EVENTS AT BCAS

1. 78th Founding Day Conclave held on Monday, 6th July 2026 @ MCA-The Lounge, Wankhede Stadium, Churchgate, Mumbai

The Fireside Chat featured Advocate Arvind Datar, eminent Senior Advocate, on the topic “Four Hurdles to Overcome for Viksit Bharat,” held on the occasion of the 78th Founding Day of the Bombay Chartered Accountants Society held on Monday, 6th July 2026 at MCA The Lounge, Churchgate, Mumbai. The discussion, moderated by our Past President CA Anil Sathe in conversation with Adv. Arvind Datar, ranged across economic history, manufacturing, governance, judicial reform, and the role of professionals, offering wide-ranging insights on the path to a developed India.

Key takeaways from Advocate Arvind Datar:

1. Reframing India’s Starting Point: Adv. Datar pushed back on the narrative that 1947 India was a “devastated” nation, noting that the country inherited significant infrastructure — 12,000 kilometres of railways, universities, and ports. He argued that India’s real setback was “endless socialism and nationalisation” between 1947 and 1991, not the colonial legacy itself.

2. A Shorter Runway for Viksit Bharat: Citing Elon Musk’s line that “a long goal is a wrong goal,” he suggested India should mentally advance its target from Viksit Bharat 2047 to 2030, since a closer deadline drives greater urgency and action.

3. Manufacturing as the Core Lever: Adv. Datar’s central thesis was that India must raise manufacturing’s share of GDP from around 15% to 25% within six to seven years. He warned that services could shrink due to AI, making manufacturing essential for resilience and durable employment.

4. Lessons from Deng Xiaoping: Drawing on Ezra Vogel’s biography of Deng Xiaoping, he highlighted Deng’s 1978 memo acknowledging China’s backwardness and the need to learn from the capitalist West — a reminder that introspection, not denial, drives national transformation.

5. Atmanirbharata and Globalisation are Compatible: He argued the two are not contradictory: true self-reliance comes from building a stronger domestic manufacturing base, not from insulation. He illustrated import-dependence with examples like China-made luggage trolleys at Indian airports and ₹1,300 crore worth of imported party balloons.

6. Democracy is Not a Growth Impediment: Adv. Datar firmly rejected the idea that authoritarian systems grow faster, calling democracy “non-negotiable” and pointing to its self-correcting power through elections. He noted the human cost of China’s alternative path — around 40 million deaths in the Cultural Revolution — as a price not worth paying.

7. The Case for Decentralisation: He criticised excessive centralisation of power and finance, noting India employs roughly four times more people at the central level relative to local government than developed nations do, the reverse of the ideal ratio. Effective implementation of the 73rd and 74th constitutional amendments on panchayats, he said, remains unrealised.

8. FDI Needs Certainty, Not Just Announcements: He described ease of doing business as the sum of ease of starting, running, and closing a business — the last being the hardest in India. He was critical of the Supreme Court’s Tiger Global ruling for undermining certainty on pre-2017 investments, and argued that policy should court smaller “Mittelstand-style” investors rather than chase only marquee names.

9. Rethinking Bilateral Investment Treaties: Adv. Datar called for treaties that include a fair-and-equitable-treatment clause and cover taxation explicitly, criticising India’s current BIT template for its “exhaustion of remedies” requirement, which he said has deterred all but a handful of countries from signing on.

10. MSMEs as the Backbone: Referencing recent research, he noted that 99% of India’s registered MSMEs are “micro” enterprises employing fewer than 10 people, and only about 5 lakh entities cross that threshold. He called for consolidating overlapping compliance requirements (Shops and Establishments Act, Payment of Bonus Act, Wages Act) that burden small businesses.

11. Judicial Reform, State by State: Citing the National Judicial Data Grid, Adv. Datar noted that 70% of Indian cases are resolved within five years, challenging the perception of universal delay, though he acknowledged real backlogs exist. He proposed appointing ad hoc judges under Article 224A and argued reforms should be tailored to each state’s specific caseload rather than applying blanket fixes.

12. Cutting “Calling Work” to Speed Up Trials: A study he sponsored across Karnataka courts found that up to 52% of court time was consumed by procedural “calling work” rather than actual hearings. He suggested shifting this administrative task to registrars or retired judges to potentially double court productivity.

13. Professionals as Nation-Builders: Adv. Datar said chartered accountants and lawyers are uniquely placed to contribute to nation-building given their grasp of tax, economics, and regulation, but urged the government to at least acknowledge and respond to professional bodies’ policy suggestions, even when rejecting them.

14. On Regulation, Education, and Online Gaming: Adv. Datar spoke of India’s “regulatory cholesterol” and argued for systems built on trust rather than designed solely to catch offenders. He advocated introducing English in government schools to level the playing field, and — drawing on his own appearance in gaming-related litigation — argued that skill-based online games should be regulated, not banned outright.

15. Closing Message: Asked for a single most important step toward Viksit Bharat, Datar returned to his central theme: without a rise in manufacturing, India cannot generate durable employment or reduce its dependence on imports for everyday goods — from electronics to party balloons.

Click to watch online at YouTube – https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2JwhDJZfhm4&t

2. “Felicitation of Newly Qualified Chartered Accountants of May 2026 Exam” held on Friday, 3rd July 2026@ BCAS

The Seminar, Membership and Public Relations (SMPR) Committee hosted a felicitation ceremony on 3rd July 2026 at the BCAS Hall, Jolly Bhavan, Churchgate, to honour the newly qualified Chartered Accountants from the May 2026 batch. Limited seats of 250 were announced and all the registrations got full in the first two days of declaring the event. The mentor for the event to guide the new passouts was BCAS President CA Kinjal Shah. Before the formal address, he showed a beautifully put-together video which encapsulated all the emotions felt by every CA student, right from the days of struggle and sleepless nights to the day they finally read the words “PASS” on the results screen. The video literally made every person in the room nostalgic and almost teary eyed. After this wonderful start, he guided the students in a very easy and fluid manner as to how the days of struggle in the CA course unknowingly make us more resilient and ready to face real life challenges. He also advised them to try on new things and choose a line of work which interests them the best. He then expressed gratitude towards his association with BCAS and encouraged the new CAs to consider getting associated with BCAS and its activities.

14 rankers attended the event and the then President CA Zubin Billimoria announced a free annual membership for all these rankers. A celebration cake was also cut by the rankers. All the attendees were extremely happy to receive the medals celebrating their achievement.

Speaker: CA Kinjal Shah

Click to watch online at YouTube – https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PtfXwrxrk34&t

3. Seminar on GST 2.0 and Beyond: Digitisation, Litigation Trends and Policy Directions held on Wednesday, 1st July 2026 @ BCAS – Hybrid

  • The seminar was held on the occasion of GST Day. It explored India’s transition from a fragmented indirect tax system to a unified digital framework.
  • Mr. Sumit Kumar, highlighted the success of cooperative federalism, noting that the GST Council functions as a unique body in which states and the center make collective, mandatory decisions. The success of GST was reflected in significant revenue growth, with monthly collections crossing the two lakh crore milestone.
  • Mr. Pramod Kumar Rai spoke on the 9-year journey of GST and addressed the various “pain points”, such as the challenges of transit checks and the harsh 200% penalties often imposed for minor clerical aberrations. He called for an introspection of Input Tax Credit (ITC) rules, particularly the “foul play” of blocking credits under Section 17(5) for legitimate business expenses.
  • Mr. Divyesh Lapsiwala spoke on the next phase of reform, the need for creation of a dedicated GST Tariff Heading (GTH) to harmonize classifications and reduce dependency on customs-based descriptions. He addressed administrative hurdles, including the need for standardized show-cause notices and a centralized audit calendar to reduce the burden of repetitive state-wise audits. Concerns were raised regarding the digital economy, specifically the need for clearer guidelines on the registration front.
  • Lastly, the session explored the impact of retrospective amendments, arguing that they should be rare and only used to solve teething problems rather than nullifying favorable court decisions.
  • The seminar concluded with a proposal for a “trusted taxpayer framework” and a rating system to reward compliant businesses with reduced audit frequencies.

Speakers: Mr. Sumit Kumar – Pr. Additional Director General of the Directorate General of Taxpayer Services, Mr. Pramod Kumar Rai – Hon’ble Member (J), GSTAT – Rajkot Bench & Mr. Divyesh Lapsiwala (CA.

Click to watch online at YouTube – https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DKKk_Kw_6TE

4. 20th Residential Study Course (RSC) on GST held on Thursday 25th June 2026 to Sunday 28th June 2026 @ The Grand Chola by ITC, Chennai

Day & Date Time Format Topics Speakers/Panelists
Thursday 25th June 2026 3:00 PM to 6:00 PM Group Discussion Assorted issues on Substantive and Procedural aspects in GST [Delegate Zone]

Group Leaders

7:00 PM to 8:30 PM Keynote DPDP Law –  Impact & Challenges for Tax Professionals Adv. Vaitheeswaran K
Friday 26th June 2026 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM General Assembly – GD Replies “Assorted issues on Substantive and Procedural aspects in GST” CA. Sagar Shah
12:15 PM to 01:30 PM Presentation Paper Interplay of jurisprudence of other laws on GST Adv. CA. Arpit Haldia
04:00 PM to 07:00 PM General Assembly – GSTAT National Moot Finals Bench Members:

Adv. Vaitheeswaran K

CA. Sunil Gabhawalla

07:00 PM to  08:00 PM General Assembly – Mastering the GSTAT Appeals: From Defect Free Filing to Effective Advocacy Shaik Khader Rahman, IRS

Member, GSTAT Chennai

Saturday 27th June 2026 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM Group Discussion Case studies in GST involving “Principles of Interpretation of Statutes” [Delegate Zone]

Group Leaders

12:15 PM to 01:30 PM General Assembly Use Cases of Practical utility of AI in GST

 

– GST Copilot – A multi agent system for GST Advisory, compliance and litigation

 

– Litigation Management using Python

[Delegate Zone]

 

CA. Tapas Ruparelia

 

CA. Raghavendra Nayak

04:00 PM to 07:30 PM General Assembly – GD Replies Case studies in GST involving “Principles of Interpretation of Statutes” Panelists:

Sr. Adv. V Raghuraman

Adv. Vinay Shraff

Moderator:

CA. Chirag Mehta

  • The 20th Residential Study Course (RSC) organised by the Indirect Taxation Committee was on the topics of Goods and Services Tax (GST). This was also the 10th RSC on GST.
  • Total Registrations of 395 out of which 13 cancellations prior to the event. Effective registration of 382 from over 60 cities across India
  • High delegate participation of 28 group leaders, 12 moot finalist, 30 moot participants in preliminary rounds, 2 T20 speakers, 1 bench member and 1 moderator, thereby RSC harnessing talent of almost 75 delegates plus round 15 volunteer coordinators which accounts for near over 20% of the registered delegates.
  • The Keynote address on the “DPDP Law – Impact & Challenges for Tax Professionals” quite informative for tax practitioners. The Keynote speaker also read out the message from the Justice Anita Sumanth, who could not join in due to her service exigencies. Also the interaction with the GSTAT Bench member regarding expectation of the bench from the filings was fruitful for delegates.
  • Intense discussions amongst 7 groups for both the group discussion paper as well as panel discussion paper were held. Each group was lead by 2 group leaders.
  • The GD Paper covered the Substantial and Practical Issues live in GST.
  • The panel discussion was to improvise the basics of understanding and reading of the law and gain clarity in statutory interpretation of taxation laws.
  • Final round of National GST Appellate Tribunal Moot was held in RSC wherein 12 finalists argued on the real matters; the preliminary round was held as memorial submissions and virtual hearing supported by 10 members in 5 benches. Total 43 participants had participated in the memorial and virtual round.
  • The session on Interplay of Allied Laws with GST underlined the need to look at GST not in isolation but holistically giving due consideration to all the other applicable laws.
  • The T20 sessions of the delegates were on the effective use of AI in GST Practice
  • The RSC ended with leisure trip to Crocodile Park and UNESCO World Hertiage Sites at Mahabalipuram

5. Use of AI and Big Data in Internal Audit – A Practitioner’s Perspective” event held on 25th June 2026@Virtual.

Speaker: KN Vaidyanathan

  • The Technology Initiatives Committee of BCAS organised a webinar on “Use of AI and Big Data in Internal Audit – A Practitioner’s Perspective” on 25th June 2026. The session explained how Artificial Intelligence and Big Data Analytics are reshaping internal audit by enabling predictive, data-driven assurance and helping auditors move beyond traditional sample-based reviews.
  • Drawing on Mahindra Group’s implementation journey, the speaker demonstrated practical AI use cases across the audit lifecycle, including pre-audit planning, audit execution, report generation and continuous monitoring. The session showcased how AI can automate repetitive tasks, improve audit quality, analyse entire data populations and generate deeper business insights.
  • The webinar also highlighted the role of Big Data Analytics in continuous monitoring, early fraud detection, revenue leakage prevention and strengthening internal controls. Practical examples illustrated how technology can significantly improve audit efficiency while enhancing governance.
  • Participants gained valuable insights into the challenges of AI adoption, including data quality, security concerns, AI hallucinations and the importance of developing new skills to effectively leverage AI in audit engagements.
  • The session concluded by emphasising that AI is an enabler for auditors rather than a replacement. Audit professionals were encouraged to embrace a technology-first mindset and leverage AI responsibly to deliver greater value, efficiency and strategic insights.

Click to watch online at BCAS Academy – https://academy.bcasonline.org/courses/use-of-ai-and-big-data-in-internal-audit-a-practitioners-perspective/

6. Direct Tax Laws Study Circle Meeting – “Presumptive Taxation under the Income-tax Act, 2025” held on 23rd June 2026@ Virtual.

The session examined the structural shift in presumptive taxation from the Income Tax Act 1961 to the 2025 Act, covering key policy changes and transition issues for residents and non-residents.

Speaker: CA Krishna Upadhya S

1. Section 58 replaces Sections 44AD, 44ADA and 44AE for residents; Sections 59 and 61 replace the non-resident provisions (44DA, 44B, 44BBA, 44BB, 44BBB, 44BBD, 44BBC).
2. The non-obstante clause has been narrowed from a sweeping override (Sections 28–43C) to a conditional override limited to “the manner of computation” under Section 58(1), raising new interpretive questions on what provisions survive alongside Section 58.

3. Section 58(11) eligibility bars assessees earning commission/brokerage, carrying on agency business or specified profession, or claiming Chapter VIII-C deductions. Isolated brokerage income potentially triggering full disqualification is a flagged drafting concern.

4. Section 58(4) bars all losses, allowances and deductions against presumptive income — raising open questions on set-off of house property losses, brought-forward losses and 80C/80D deductions.

5. Multi-business principle: once the gateway test is cleared, each business is independently tested; failure in one does not disqualify another.

6. Section 58 vs. Section 63 (tax audit) interplay was analysed via a comparative matrix; a literal reading may inadvertently sweep in small and first-time businesses.

7. Goods carriage (Sl. No. 2, old 44AE) and profession schemes (Sl. No. 3, 50% deemed profit, threshold ₹50L/₹75L) were explained, including partner salary/interest deductions.

8. Section 62(4) governs by substance of activity, not formal credentials. Non-specified vocations (YouTubers, content creators, motivational speakers) may access the Sl. No. 1 business scheme within the turnover ceiling.

The session was highly interactive. The speaker presented the provisions in a structured and practical manner, enabling participants to gain clarity on key structural shifts, controversies and transition issues.

7. International Yoga Day Celebration held on Sunday 21st June, 2026@ Shree Ghoghari Lohana Mahajan Bhavan Andheri West, Mumbai.

On June 21, 2026, the BCAS Foundation organized “International Yoga Day Celebrations” with assistance from the Human Resource Development Committee. In Andheri East, Mumbai, the event was co-organized with MaBap.

Mr. Pradeep Thakkar, the accredited Yoga Trainer, conducted the session.

The takeaways from the workshop are briefly given below:

1. Participants were guided to do various exercises and were explained the benefits of doing the exercises.

2. The exercises dealt with Asanas and tips for Osteoarthritis, Knee Pain, Blood Pressure, Diabetes and a lot more.

3. Also, breathing exercises, along with their benefits, were explained to the participants.

4. The benefits of yoga for Flexibility, Strength and overall health were explained in detail.

CA Mayur Nayak – assisted in the presentation and ensured the smooth conduct of the yoga. BCAS Foundation was also awarded with the Certificate of Recognition from the Ministry of Ayush.

8. Full day Seminar on Business Restructuring – A Holistic Perspective held on 18th June, 2026@ Hybrid – IMC

The Direct Tax committee of Bombay Chartered Accountants Society alongwith IMC Chamber of Commerce & Industry and The Chamber of Tax Consultants had organised a full day seminar on Business Restructuring – A Holistic Perspective at Walchand Hirachand Hall, IMC Building, Churchgate, Mumbai and virtually on 18th June, 2026. The seminar was to address the new age business restructuring from various perspectives of Income Tax , SEBI, FEMA, Companies Act and various other regulations applicable.

The keynote address was given by the Presidents of all the 3 associations and they gave their thoughts on the seminar subject. CA Ketan Dalal opened the seminar with the commercial aspects that goes around the promoters or the business owners during the business restructuring process. He shared his practical challenges that a professional has to address during such large commercial business restructuring deals. He mentioned that for a promoter, taxation becomes secondary during the course of such deals.

The second session was taken by CA Abhishek Lahoti, on the regulatory aspects for listed companies in the restructuring process. He covered the provisions applicable under the SEBI, FEMA, Companies Act, Competition Act and the Income Tax Act for various mode of restructuring like the acquisition, divestment and scheme of arrangement mode.

CA Binoy Parikh took the next session on the regulatory aspects for unlisted companies in the restructuring process. He discussed the restructuring process regulatory aspects with practical case studies covering the FEMA, Companies Act, Competition Act and the Income Tax Act for various mode for the unlisted entities.

The next session was taken by Mr. Sanjay Doshi on the due diligence process during the business restructuring. He mentioned to the crowd the importance of due diligence in this process. He also shared what areas should be covered from financial and Tax perspective during the restructuring process of any entity. He explained the role of professionals in guiding the parties by sharing the facts of the restructuring entities.

CA Neeraj Garg explained the key role of Valuation in the business restructuring. He explained with practical case studies about the intricacies of valuation from the taxation angle and the business owner thought process. As valuation is more art than science, he highlighted the practical issues that arise in the valuation process.

Lastly the session concluded with CA Amrish Shah session who touched upon the common tax and FEMA Issues in these mergers and acquisition deals. He covered the GAAR implications during such restructuring within the group. Further, the practical challenges which are faced by large corporate entities in slump sale vs itemized sale transactions. The practical cases of deferred consideration and their accounting were discussed. He mentioned the various funding instruments which are nowadays available for such restructuring process.

The full day seminar offered a comprehensive and a holistic perspective in this Business restructuring.

Click to watch online at BCAS Academy – https://academy.bcasonline.org/courses/seminar-on-business-restructuring-a-holistic-perspective/

9. ITF Study Circle meeting on “Virtual Service PE – Recent Developments” held on 16th June, 2026@ Virtual.

The session began with the opening address by the Chairman of the session on the on the Background and brief introduction of concept and Virtual PE.

Post that the Group Leader explained the nuances of the Virtual PE under the UN & OECD Commentary.

The Group Leader discussed the key points from the Recent Rulings on Virtual PE.

The session concluded with closing remarks by the Chairman of the session and the Group Leader.

Speakers: Chairman of the session – CA Bhaumik Goda & Group Leader – CA Sudin Sabnis

10. Webinar on Charitable Trusts – Recent Developments held on Thursday 21st May 2026 @ Virtual.

The Direct Tax Committee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society, jointly with the IMC Chamber of Commerce and Industry, organised a Webinar on “Charitable Trusts – Recent Developments.” The webinar was conceived in view of the rapidly evolving regulatory framework governing charitable and religious trusts, with significant developments under the Income-tax law, the Maharashtra Public Trusts Act and the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA).

The session provided participants with practical guidance on navigating the changing compliance landscape for charitable institutions. The discussions focused on renewal of registrations, recent legislative amendments, regulatory expectations and best practices for ensuring continued tax exemption and statutory compliance. Emphasis was placed on addressing practical challenges faced by trusts and professionals in day-to-day administration rather than limiting the discussions to theoretical provisions.

CA Anil Sathe discussed the recent changes introduced under the Income-tax Act, 2025 affecting charitable and religious trusts. He explained the practical issues surrounding renewal of registrations, scrutiny proceedings, conditions for availing exemptions and the evolving approach of tax authorities towards compliance. Drawing upon practical experiences, he highlighted the importance of maintaining robust governance, documentation and regulatory discipline for preserving charitable status and avoiding disputes.

Mr. Noshir Dadrawala deliberated upon recent developments under the Maharashtra Public Trusts Act and the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA). He shared valuable practical insights on governance, regulatory compliance, transparency requirements, and emerging expectations from charitable organisations. The session also covered common compliance pitfalls, evolving litigation trends and measures that trustees and advisors should adopt to strengthen governance and ensure smooth functioning of charitable institutions.

Overall, the webinar provided participants with a comprehensive and practice-oriented understanding of the recent developments impacting the charitable sector and equipped them with actionable guidance for effective compliance and risk management.

Speaker: Panelist-CA Anil Sathe & Mr. Noshir Dadrawala

Moderator: CA Gautam Nayak

Click to watch online at YouTube – https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mlZ1WJlQZ7o

II. BCAS IN NEWS & MEDIA

  • BCAS has been featured in several news and media platforms, showing our active involvement, professional contributions, and commitment to the field. This reflects the growing recognition of BCAS in the public and professional space.

Link: https://bcasonline.org/bcas-in-news/

Sanand Properties P. Ltd. vs. JCIT: Reopening assessment based on fresh information uncovering the true nature of transactions is valid and not a change of opinion.

6. Sanand Properties P. Ltd. Vs. JCIT – (2026) 488 ITR 337 –SC

Reopening of assessment – Mere disclosure at the time of original assessment does not preclude the Assessing Officer from reopening the assessment where fresh information emerges which prima facie indicates that certain income has escaped assessment.

Reason to believe – It is immaterial whether the Assessing Officer, at the time of making the original assessment, could or could not have found, through further enquiry or investigation, whether the transaction was genuine or not, if, on the basis of subsequent information, the Assessing Officer has reasons to believe that income chargeable to tax has escaped assessment.

To constitute a “change of opinion”, there must first be a conscious application of mind and formation of an opinion during the original assessment proceedings.

The validity of a reopening must be tested solely on the basis of the reasons recorded at the time of issuing the notice under Section 148.

SPPL, a private limited company, had entered into an agreement dated 29.04.2003 with M/s. Raviraj Kothari & Co. (hereinafter referred to as “RKC”) to constitute an Association of Persons (“AOP”) titled Fortaleza Developers for the purpose of developing a parcel of land into residential housing projects.

SPPL had duly filed its returns of income for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 within the prescribed statutory time. Both returns were selected for scrutiny assessment under Section 143(3) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, and the respective assessment orders were passed on 21.12.2009 and 20.07.2010 respectively.

However, on 11.01.2011, the Revenue issued two notices under Section 148 of the Income Tax Act, 1961, for reopening the assessments for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 on the ground that the Assessing Officer had reason to believe that income chargeable to tax had escaped assessment within the meaning of Section 147 of the IT Act. Although the reasons recorded for reopening the assessments for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 were recorded separately, they were nearly identical except for the numerical figures pertaining to the respective assessment years.

The reasons recorded stated that a Survey under Section 133A of the IT Act had been conducted at the business premises of SPPL on 23.12.2010, during which the books of account and six documents were seized and impounded. These documents included the original copy of the AOP Agreement dated 29.04.2003 and a copy of the audited financial statements of M/s Fortaleza Developers for FY 2007-08.

Moreover, the statement of one Shri Ashok V. Suratwala, Director of SPPL, was also recorded on oath under Section 131 of the IT Act. According to the ‘reasons recorded’ under Section 148 of the IT Act, all these materials indicated that the income received by SPPL from the AOP was not a share of its profits but a share of its revenue, as it was consideration received against the development rights over the land sold/surrendered by SPPL in favour of the AOP. The AOP had shown such amount paid to SPPL as part of its profits in order to claim a deduction under Section 80IB(10) of the IT Act. SPPL had claimed in its return of income that, since tax on the income of the AOP was payable by the AOP itself under Section 167B(2) of the IT Act, no tax was liable to be paid by SPPL in respect of its share of profit from the AOP. However, in the ‘reasons recorded’, the Assessing Officer concluded that the income received by SPPL from the AOP, being a 35% share of the gross sale receipts and not its share of profits, was not exempt income but was taxable in the hands of SPPL. Since such income had escaped assessment, the Revenue was justified in reopening the assessment under Section 148 of the IT Act.

In response, SPPL, vide letter dated 19.03.2011, filed its objections to the reopening of the assessment, contending that four out of the six documents impounded during the survey under Section 133A, on the basis of which the assessments were sought to be reopened, were already part of the record of the Assessing Officer while finalizing the assessments for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09. However, the objections submitted by SPPL were dismissed by the Assessing Officer vide a speaking order dated 14.07.2011, holding that the reopening of the assessments for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 had been validly initiated.

Aggrieved by the Order dated 14.07.2011, the SPPL challenged the reopening of the assessments by filing Writ Petition (C) No. 1647 of 2011 and Writ Petition (C) No. 1648 of 2011 before the Bombay High Court for AYs 2007-08 and AY 2008-09, respectively.

While the High Court set aside the notice reopening the assessment for AY 2007-08 as invalid, it upheld the notice reopening the assessment for AY 2008-09 as valid.

With respect to AY 2007-08, the High Court, while referring to the Supreme Court’s decision in Commissioner of Income Tax, Delhi v. Kelvinator of India Limited [(2010) 320 ITR 561], observed that although the power of the Assessing Officer to reopen assessment under Section 148 is much wider than the position that existed prior to the amendment brought about by the Direct Tax Laws (Amendment) Act, 1987, the power to reopen an assessment is nevertheless conditional upon the existence of a reason to believe that income has escaped assessment. Post the Direct Tax Laws (Amendment) Act, 1989, the Assessing Officer has no power to review his assessment, nor can an assessment be reopened merely on the basis of a change of opinion. For the Assessing Officer to validly reopen an assessment in law, there must be tangible material on the basis of which he arrives at the conclusion that income has escaped assessment.

The High Court then went on to observe that the material on record indicates that the return of income by SPPL contained a disclosure of the profits received by it from the AOP, which SPPL claimed to be exempt in light of Section 167B(2) of the IT Act. The High Court placed reliance on the note appended to the return of income, as well as the profit and loss account and ledger extract of SPPL’s capital account with the AOP, which disclosed the share of profits received from the AOP.

More particularly, the High Court focused on two aspects of the assessment order passed under Section 143(3) dated 21.12.2009. First, paragraph 4 of the assessment order stated that SPPL had earned an income of INR 3.49 Crore in the form of profits from the AOP. Secondly, the Assessment Order contained a statement reflecting the Assessing Officer’s awareness that the gross sale proceeds were to be shared between SPPL and its collaborator in the ratio of 35% and 65% respectively. Although the High Court clearly observed that the assessment order referred to the 35:65 ratio of sharing the gross sale proceeds in relation to the Joint Venture Agreement dated 26.08.2002 between SPPL and M/s Raviraj Kothari and Associates (hereinafter referred to as “RKA”), and not to the AOP Agreement dated 29.04.2003, it nevertheless held that these statements, significantly demonstrated that the Assessing Officer was aware that (i) SPPL had returned an income of INR. 3.49 Crore as its share of profits from the AOP; and (ii) under the terms of the agreement, SPPL was entitled to a 35% share of the gross sale proceeds.

The High Court further noted that the order dated 14.07.2011, passed by the Assessing Order rejecting the objections filed by SPPL, did not dispute the factual position that, except for the two documents (namely, an internal audit note and a standard sale agreement, both of which, according to the High Court, did not carry the matter further), the material had in fact been submitted during the course of the assessment proceedings.

The High Court further observed that since the AOP had been duly assessed and had been subjected to an assessment order in which neither the existence nor the validity of the AOP was not questioned, SPPL was not liable to pay income tax with respect of its share of the income of the AOP in view of Section 86 read with Section 67A and Section 167B of the IT Act.

In the aforesaid view of the matter, the High Court held that the Assessing Officer had purported to reopen the assessment for AY 2007-08 in the absence of any valid tangible material and that the reopening amounted to nothing more than a mere change of opinion. Accordingly, the High Court quashed the notice dated 11.01.2011 issued under Section 148 for reopening the assessment for AY 2007-08.

Aggrieved by the said judgment, the Revenue filed Civil Appeal No. 744 of 2013 before the Supreme Court.
Thereafter, when the writ petition challenging the reopening of assessment for AY 2008-09 came up for hearing before the High Court, SPPL argued that since the grounds for reopening the assessment were substantially similar to those for AY 2007-08, and there were no material differences in the factual matrix between the two assessment years, the notice for reassessment for AY 2008-09 should likewise be set aside.

However, with respect to the reopening of assessment for the AY 2008-09, the High Court reached a conclusion different from that in respect of AY 2007-08. This time, the High Court held that the notice issued under Section 148 seeking reopening of the assessment for AY 2008-09 was valid.

The High Court distinguished AY 2007-08 from AY 2008-09 on the basis of the assessment orders passed in the case of the AOP for the respective assessment years. It laid emphasis on the following three aspects in support of its decision concerning AY 2007-08: (i) the assessment order of the AOP for AY 2007-08 contained no discussion regarding the nature of the receipt accruing to SPPL, (ii) the High Court, in its order dated 23.09.2011 relating to AY 2007-08, had noted that neither the existence nor the validity of the AOP had been questioned; and (iii) the Revenue had not sought to reopen the assessment of the AOP for AY 2007-08.

In sharp contrast, the assessment order of the AOP for AY 2008-09 dated 29.12.2010, contained a detailed discussion of the nature of the AOP agreement and concluded that the AOP agreement was based on revenue sharing. Since these detailed observations regarding the nature of the AOP Agreement formed part of the assessment order of the AOP for AY 2008-09, the High Court held that the reopening of of SPPL’s assessment for AY 2008-09 was based on tangible material and, dismissed the writ petition.

Being aggrieved, SPPL filed Civil Appeal No. 9107 of 2012 before the Supreme Court.

In the aforesaid circumstances, both SPPL and the Revenue were before the Supreme Court by way of separate appeals.

According to the Supreme Court, the following questions fell for its consideration:

(i) Whether the reopening of the assessments of SPPL for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09, respectively, was valid?
(ii) Whether the amount accrued to SPPL from the AOP, based on Clause 7 of the AOP Agreement dated 29.04.2003, was liable to be taxed in the hands of SPPL for AYs 2008-09 and 2009-10, respectively?

The Supreme Court noted that, in the present matter, the Revenue had sought to reopen assessments on the basis of the books of account and six documents impounded during the survey dated 23.12.2010 conducted at the premises of SPPL. Along with impounding the aforesaid documents, the statement of Shri Ashok V. Suratwala, Director of SPPL, was recorded on oath under Section 131 of the Act. The relevant portion of the reasons recorded under Section 148, (which was identical for both AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09) read as follows:

“The statement of Shri Ashok V. Suratwala, Director of Assessee Company was recorded on oath Under Section 131 of the Act.

5.The evidences indicate that the assessee has received a share at 35% from the gross receipts on sale of residential units in Fortaleza Complex. The audited financial statements of AOP M/s Fortaleza Developers show that assessee was given 35% of the gross receipts from sale of residential units in the said complex. It did not indicate that assessee has received its share out of the profits of AOP, M/s Fortaleza Developers. This finding was confronted to Shri Ashok V. Suratwala, Director of Assessee Company. In reply he has stated thus:

The development rights over the land belonged to us which are precious. Because of many other factors affecting the output of construction business, the returns that we should have received from those rights could not be exposed to the inherent risks of business. In pursuit of this and in order to safeguard the value of those rights we have devised a formula by which we are entitled to 35% of the gross receipts out of sales of flats in Fortaleza. Amount of the sales do not include other incidental charges charged to the customers like MSEB charges, maintenance charges, legal charges and administrative charges, etc.

5.1 Thus it is clear that assessee has received its share from the gross sale proceeds and not the share of profit. Further, the following facts came to notice.

  • The assessee does not have any employee on its muster.
  • It does not have any stake in the construction of the said Fortaleza Complex except the land it has given to the AOP against which it receives 35% of the sale proceeds of flats.
  • It has been stated that the assessee is the owner of the land and when the land is to be finally transferred to the society/community that will be formed after all the residential unit are sold, the assessee company will sign the conveyance as transferor and AOP as a confirming party.
  • The AOP, M/s Fortaleza Developers, has claimed deduction Under Section 80IB(10) of the Act on the profits and gains of business derived by it from sale of flats in Fortaleza Complex.

6. Thus, it is found that the assessee is not receiving the share of the profit from the AOP, but is receiving the consideration in the form of 35% share in proceeds of sale, against the development rights in a land surrendered by it to other member of AOP and finally to the purchaser of the flat / residential units.

7. In view of this, the income received by Assessee from AOP M/s Fortaleza Developers is not a share of profit, but consideration received against the development rights sold/surrendered. Hence the income of [Rs.3,49,18,587/- for AY 2007-08 & Rs.14,18,52,156 for AY 2008-09] is not an exempt income but taxable in the hands of assessee. Therefore, income of [Rs.3,49,18,587/- for AY 2007-08 & Rs.14,18,52,156 for AY 2008-09] chargeable to tax has escaped assessment within the meaning of sub-clause (iv) of clause (c) of Explanation 2 to Section 147 of the Act. In order to bring the income escaped assessment, assessment is reopened Under Section 148 of the Act. Issue notice Under Section 148 of the Act.”

Before the Supreme Court, learned Counsel for SPPL drew the Court’s attention to the following statement made by SPPL in its return of income for the relevant assessment years to demonstrate that the Assessing Officer was aware of the income accrued to SPPL from the AOP:

“1. The Assessee is a member in the Association of Persons doing business under the name and style of “Fortaleza Developers”. The tax on the income of AOP being payable in the case of the AOP itself. Under Section 167B(2) of the Act, no tax is payable by the Assessee in respect of its share of income from the AOP.

2. For computation of book profit Under Section 115JB of the Income-tax, 1961, share of profit from the AOP has been considered as a ‘non-income’ category as spelt out in Mumbai Tribunal decision in the case of Income-tax officer v. Suraj Jewellery India Ltd. As such this income is deducted from book profit to arrive at profit chargeable under that section.”

Upon a perusal of the material on record, the Supreme Court observed that a copy of the AOP Agreement had indeed submitted by SPPL to the Assessing Officer during the scrutiny assessments for both AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 . SPPL had submitted a copy of the AOP Agreement, along with other documents, by its letter dated 06.11.2009, during the course of scrutiny assessment for that year. On another occasion, SPPL submitted a copy of the AOP Agreement with its letter attached 01.07.2010 during the course of the assessment proceedings for AY 2008-09.

However, according to the Supreme Court, the materials on record indicated that SPPL had not disclosed the primary fact that the income which it had declared as its share of the ‘profit’ of the AOP was, in fact, a 35% share of the gross sale receipts from the residential units sold by the AOP. When the information gathered form the impounded documents and the statement of SPPL’s director came to the knowledge of the Revenue, the true nature of the transaction between SPPL and the AOP came to light.

The Supreme Court was of the view that mere disclosure of the existence of the AOP and the quantum of income derived by SPPL from the AOP at the time of the original assessment does not preclude the Assessing Officer from reopening the assessment where fresh information emerges which prima facie indicates that certain income has escaped assessment. The statements made by SPPL regarding the AOP in its return of income or during the course of the original assessment did not amount to discharging its duty to provide the Assessing Officer with the primary facts relevant to determining the issue in dispute. A perusal of the materials on record indicate that SPPL had merely informed the Revenue that certain income had accrued to it as its share of the profits of the AOP. Even though a copy of the AOP Agreement had been submitted to the Assessing Officer, the specific provision in the agreement, namely Clause 7, which lay at the heart of the dispute, was not specifically brought to the Assessing Officer’s attention.

Upon a detailed reading of the assessment orders for AYs 2007-08 and the 2008-09, respectively, the Supreme Court found that the Revenue had accepted SPPL’s declaration regarding the income derived from the AOP at face value without examining the fundamental nature of the income . In other words, the Revenue had proceeded with the assessments without considering whether the income in question was, in fact, a share of the profits of the AOP. Although the assessment orders were not entirely silent on this income, the discussion therein pertained to entirely different issues.

In the assessment order dated 21.12.2009 passed in the case of SPPL for AY 2007–08, the income accrued to SPPL from the AOP was mentioned only briefly in paragraph No. 4. The relevant extract from paragraph 4 of the assessment order for AY 2007-08 is as follows:

“4. As per the agreement the assessee company received 333.56 lacs, i.e. 35% of the sales proceeds from Raviraj Kothari & Associates. Assessee has also earned Income of Rs.349.19 lacs in the form of share of profit from AOP i.e. M/s. Fortaleza Developers.”

The Supreme Court observed that the ‘agreement’ referred to in the above-mentioned paragraph no. 4 was the Joint Venture Agreement dated 26.08.2002 (hereinafter referred to as “the JV Agreement”), between SPPL and RKA, and not the AOP Agreement dated 29.04.2003 between SPPL and RKC . While the assessment order examined the JV Agreement in great detail, there was no discussion on the AOP Agreement beyond the lone sentence in the above-mentioned paragraph no. 4. This peripheral reference to the income derived from the AOP clearly demonstrated that the Assessing Officer had never formed an opinion on whether such income constituted a share of the AOP’s profit or its revenue. The High Court, however, erroneously conflated the references to the 35:65 gross receipt-sharing arrangement contained in Clause 11 of the JV Agreement with Clause 7 of the AOP Agreement. According to the Supreme Court, despite the superficial resemblance between these two clauses regarding the 35:65 ratio for sharing the sale proceeds between the respective parties, the Assessing Officer’s analysis of the JV Agreement could not be construed as an opinion on Clause 7 of the AOP Agreement or the nature of the income accrued from the AOP. To constitute a “change of opinion”, there must first be a conscious application of mind and the formation of an opinion during the original assessment proceedings.

According to the Supreme Court, in the present case, the Assessing Officer’s discussion in the assessment order for the AY 2007-08 was confined to the JV Agreement. There was perceptible lack of any inquiry or adjudication regarding the specific terms of the AOP Agreement, particularly the nature of the income under Clause 7. In the absence of such an initial inquiry, the plea of “change of opinion” was legally untenable. A change of opinion presupposes the existence of a previously formed opinion. Where no such opinion was formed in the first instance, the Revenue is not precluded from reopening the assessment upon the discovery of facts suggesting that income has escaped assessment. The Supreme Court thus concluded that, since the Revenue had not formed any opinion on the fundamental nature of the income accrued to SPPL from the AOP, namely whether it was a share of profit or revenue, the Revenue retained the authority to reassess the income upon coming across information which prima facie indicated that the income was taxable revenue and not tax-exempt profit.

Coming to the assessment order for AY 2008-09, the Supreme Court found that there was some discussion regarding the income accrued to SPPL from the AOP, but on an issue wholly different from the reasons for reopening assessment. The issue discussed pertained to whether the income, despite being a share of the profits of the AOP, would nevertheless be excluded from the net profit to arrive at its book profit under Section 115JB of the Act. The assessment order indicated that the assessment had proceeded on the assumption that the subject income was profit, without verifying whether that assumption was correct.

Thus, the Supreme Court found that, in the assessment orders for both AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09, the Assessing Officer had not formed any opinion on the fundamental nature of the income accrued to SPPL from the AOP. Hence, when ‘tangible material’ in the form of the impounded documents and the Director’s statement shed light on the manner in which SPPL received its income from the AOP, it gave rise to ‘reasons to believe’ that income chargeable to tax has escaped assessment. The Supreme Court noted that, in Phool Chand Bajrang Lal and Ors. v. Income Tax Officer and Ors. [ (1993) 4 SCC 77], it had observed that it would be immaterial whether the Income Tax Officer, at the time of making the original assessment, could or could not have found through further enquiry or investigation whether the transaction was genuine, if, on the basis of subsequent information, the Income Tax Officer had reasons to believe that income chargeable to tax had escaped assessment. The Income Tax Officer may inititate reassessment proceedings either because fresh facts come to light which were not previously disclosed or because information regarding previously disclosed facts subsequently comes into his possession and tends to expose the untruthfulness of those facts. In such circumstances, it is not a case of mere change of opinion or of the drawing a different inference from the same facts as previously available, but of acting upon fresh information. Applying the principle laid down in Phool Chand (supra), the Supreme Court held that, when fresh information was obtained during the survey conducted on 23.12.2010 which prima facie led the Assessing Officer to believe that the true nature of the income was revenue and not profit, and that such income had escaped assessment, the reopening could not be discarded as being based merely on change of opinion.

The Supreme Court, therefore, held that the notices reopening SPPL’s assessments for AYs 2007-08 and 2008-09 were issued on the basis of fresh information and not merely on a change of opinion, and were therefore held valid.

However, the Supreme Court clarified that the validity of the reopening of the assessment would not no bearing on the merits of the reassessment orders that may ultimately be passed upon completion of the reopening proceedings.

While the Supreme Court upheld the ultimate conclusion reached by the High Court regarding the validity of the reopening of assessment for the AY 2008-09, it found the reasoning adopted by the High Court to be flawed. According to the Supreme Court, in determining the validity of the reassessment proceedings, the High Court had erroneously travelled beyond the reasons recorded under Section 148 by relying upon the assessment order of the AOP for AYs 2007-08 and the AY 2008-09. According to the Supreme Court, such an approach defeated the principles of natural justice as well as the statutory object underlying the requirement to record reasons and was impermissible in law. In doing so, the High Court overlooked the fact that the reasons recorded under Section 148 serve the important purpose of informing the assessee of the grounds on which the assessment is sought to be reopened, thereby enabling the assessee to file meaningful objections.

The Supreme Court observed that it is a settled law that the validity of a reopening must be tested solely on the basis of the reasons recorded at the time of issuing the notice under Section 148.

Notes: (1) In the above case, after the High Court delivered its judgments on the validity of Notices issued under Sec. 148 for AYs 2007-2008 and 2008-2009, the Revenue passed the reassessment order for AY 2008-2009 and the assessment order for AY 2009-2010. Both these orders were challenged by the assessee and the appeals eventually came up before the Supreme Court. The Supreme Court also dealt with these issues (with reference to the second question framed by it for consideration). However, those aspects are beyond the scope of this write-up, which is confined onlyto the validity of the notices issued under Sec. 148.

(2) The Judgement of the Supreme Court in Kelvinator of India Ltd. [320 ITR 561], referred to in the above case, was analyzed by us in the “Closements” column in the June 2010 issue of BCAJ.

Section 148 : Reassessment – service of notice – date of digital signature and date of issuance and receipt.

9. Shreenath Finstock Private Ltd. Vs. Union of India & Ors.

WP (C) NO. 3526 OF 2022, Dated: 06/07/2026, (Bom)(HC)

AY 2013-14.

Section 148 : Reassessment – service of notice – date of digital signature and date of issuance and receipt.

The short ground on which the Notice u/s. 148 and the Assessment Order are challenged was that though the impugned Notice under Section 148 is dated 31st March 2021 and digitally signed on 31st March 2021, it was received by the Petitioner only on 1st April 2021 via e-mail dated 1st April 2021 at 5:51 a.m. If this be the case, then the re-assessment proceedings cannot continue under the unamended provisions of Section 148 of the Act and the same would have to comply with the provisions which were brought into effect by the Finance Act of 2021, which came into effect from 1st April 2021.

The Petitioner, pointed out that the impugned Notice issued under Section 148 of the Act was issued to the Petitioner via email. It was clear from the snapshot of the email that the Notice was received by the Petitioner only on 1st April 2021 at 5:51 a.m. He thus submitted that the date of issuance of the Notice must be considered as 1st April 2021 and, consequently, the Department must comply with the procedure as introduced by the new provisions of the Act w.e.f. 1st April 2021. He submits that the ITBA Portal was entirely under the control of the Income Tax Department and any delay in triggering the issuance of the Notice in the system would be attributable to the Department. To fortify this proposition, he relies on these two judgments of the High Courts:

a) Daujee Abhushan Bhandar (P.) Ltd. vs. Union of India [2022] 136 taxmann.com 246 (Allahabad) and

b) Suman Jeet Agarwal vs. Income-tax Officer [2022] 143 taxmann.com 11 (Delhi).

The learned counsel for the Respondents, submitted that it was an admitted position that the impugned Notice is dated 31st March 2021 and also digitally signed on 31st March 2021. The Assessing Officer had uploaded the Notice on the ITBA Portal also on 31st March 2021. The digital signature, whenever affixed, bears the real time and in the present case it bears the time of 31st March 2021 at 1:32 p.m. The ITBA system, immediately after the digital signature, in a way, ousts the Assessing Officer, who cannot make any change in the document or stop the outward transmission. Having done so, it was beyond the control of the Assessing Officer once the Notice was uploaded on the ITBA Portal and the Notice was dispatched through the ITBA Portal and intimated to the Petitioner. He thus submitted that the Notice must be deemed to have been ‘issued’ the moment it left the hands of the Assessing Officer i.e. in this case, 31st March 2021 at 1:32 PM. He also submitted that the date of email should not be regarded as the date of issuance of Notice as sending an email is a measure adopted by the Assessing Officer merely out of abundant caution and the actual date of uploading the Notice on the ITBA Portal should be taken as the date to determine the date of issuance of Notice.

To narrow down the controversy and to seek clarification regarding the date on which the email dispatching the impugned Notice was triggered in the system of the Department, the court had passed order to enable the Revenue to bring on record as to when was the e-mail dispatching the Section 148 Notice was triggered in the system of the Income Tax Department.

Thereafter, on written instructions from the Assessing Officer i.e. Deputy Commissioner of Income-tax 3(2)(1), Mumbai, who is Respondent No. 2, it was submitted that as per the system delivery report, the ‘Notice Sent’ time stamp is reflected as 1st April 2021 at 05:51:42 a.m., while the ‘Delivered’ time stamp is reflected as 1st April 2021 at 05:51:47 a.m. Thus, there is no doubt that the email dispatching the impugned Notice itself was triggered on 1st April 2021 from the ITBA Portal and subsequently received by the Petitioner at 5:51 a.m. on 1st April 2021. In view of the above the impugned Notice would be deemed to have been issued on 1st April 2021.

In this context, reliance was placed on the observations of the Hon’ble Delhi High Court in Suman Jeet Agarwal (supra), wherein the Hon’ble Court had carved out different categories of impugned Notices based on the actual date mentioned in the Notice, date of digital signature and date of issuance and receipt. The Category – C in the aforesaid judgement reads as under:

“Category C: is in respect of writ petitions where Notice is dated 31st March, 2021 or before, digitally signed on or before 31st March, 2021, however sent and received on or after 1st April, 2021.”

The case of the Petitioner would fall in ‘Category C’ i.e. where Notices were dated 31st March 2021 or before, digitally signed on or before 31st March 2021, however sent and received on or after 1st April 2021. The Hon’ble Court, in respect of Notices falling under ‘Category C’, held as under:

“26.22 We answer question no. (III) against the Department and hold that the time taken by the ITBA’s e-mail software system in triggering the email and transmitting the said e-mails from the ITBA servers is attributable to the Department and therefore for the e-mails despatched on 1st April 2021 or thereafter, the Notices are held not to have been issued on 31st March 2021.”

A similar issue came up in the case of Jose Kattadyil Joseph vs. Assistant Commissioner of Income Tax 19(1), Mumbai & Ors. [Writ Petition No. 430 of 2023 (OS)] wherein we observed that the impugned Notice under Section 148 of the I.T. Act, though dated 31st March 2021, was deemed to be issued on 1st April 2021 (as it was digitally signed on 1st April 2021).

The Hon’ble Supreme Court in Union of India & Ors v/s Ashish Agarwal (444 ITR 1) observed that Notices issued under the unamended law after 1st April 2021 shall be deemed to have been issued under Section 148A of the I.T. Act as substituted by the Finance Act, 2021 and treated to be Show Cause Notices in terms of Section 148A(b) of the Act.

The Hon Court held that the impugned Assessment Order dated 30th March 2022, passed under Section 147 read with Section 144B, and any consequential notices / orders thereof were quashed and set aside. The impugned Notice under Section 148 of the Act issued to the Petitioner under the unamended Section 148 of the Act shall be deemed to be issued under Section 148A of the Act as substituted by the Finance Act, 2021 and treated to be a Show Cause Notice in terms of Section 148A(b).

The Assessing Officer shall, within thirty days from the date of uploading this order, provide to the Petitioner information and material relied upon by the Revenue, so that the Petitioner can reply to the Show Cause Notice within two weeks thereafter.

All defences which may be available to the Petitioner, including those available under Section 149 of the Act, and all rights and contentions which may be available to it and the Revenue under the Finance Act, 2021, and in law, shall continue to be available.

In the aforesaid terms the Writ Petition was disposed of.

Section 69A and 153A –Search action – Information – Foreign Asset – no incriminating material – Burden of proof – Addition not justified based on base note – contents of the Base Note incomplete.

8. Pr. Commissioner of Income Tax Central -4, Mumbai Vs. Arunkumar Ramniklal Mehta,

[ITXA. 118 OF 2020 with ITXA. 132 OF 2020, dated 01/07/2026 (Bom)(HC)] Assessment Year 2006-07.

Section 69A and 153A –Search action – Information – Foreign Asset – no incriminating material – Burden of proof – Addition not justified based on base note – contents of the Base Note incomplete.

Two Appeals have been filed against the same order, as one of them raises issues arising out of an Appeal filed by the Revenue before the Tribunal, whereas the other one is concerned with issues arising from the Appeal filed by the Assessee.

The Respondent-Assessee was a promoter and director in various entities forming part of the Rosy Blue Group. He filed his original Return of Income for Assessment Year 2006-07 on 31.07.2006 declaring a total income of Rs.18,16,910. Since his Return of Income was not selected for scrutiny, the intimation as issued under Section 143(1) of the Act had become final.

Information in the form of a Base Note was received by the Government of India from the French Government inter alia, suggesting that the Assessee was a beneficiary of a private discretionary Trust being the Oak Trust, which held certain shares in a company being White Cedar Investments Ltd. (formed and registered in British Virgin Islands). Further, he was also referred to as a beneficiary in respect of another company being Ruby Enterprises Inc. (again formed and registered in British Virgin Islands). Both the said companies [White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc.] had bank accounts with the HSBC Bank in Geneva. The peak balance lying in the said bank account of White Cedar Investments Ltd. for the year under consideration stood at USD 44,861,171, while such peak balance lying in the bank account of Ruby Enterprises Inc. stood at USD 4,020.02.

Pursuant to receipt of the above information, on 25th and 26th August 2011, a search action was carried out on the entities in the Rosy Blue Group, including the Assessee. It is an admitted position that no assessment proceedings were pending in his case for this year at the time of search. Hence, the assessment proceedings did not abate in terms of the second proviso to Section 153A of the Act. Also, no incriminating material was found during the course of the search as relatable to this year.

During the course of search, Mr. Russell Mehta (being the Assessee’s son) clarified that his uncle Mr. Dilip Mehta (being the Assessee’s brother, and then a resident of Belgium) was acting as a legal representative of the Estate of Late Mr. Ramniklal R Mehta (being the Assessee’s father), and who would be aware of the said foreign bank accounts. Based thereon, the Investigation Wing of the Income-tax Department which had carried out the search action, sought information from Mr. Dilip Mehta, who responded by his letter dated 06.01.2012. His statement on oath was also recorded by them under Section 131 of the Act on 10.01.2012. In his statement, he explained that the Late Mr. Ramniklal Mehta owned certain natural pearls and some rubies which had been given by him to his close friend being Mr. Abdul Sultan Meherali, who before his demise handed over the same to his son-in-law Mr. Mohammedali Hassanali. It was his intention that the said assets should be applied for the benefit of the family. As per the directions of Mr. Dilip Mehta, the said assets were sold by Mr. Hassanali around December 2003 realising approximately USD 27,95,000 which were remitted by him in the account of the Estate of Late Mr. Ramniklal Mehta. This position has also been confirmed by Mr. Hassanali by a letter. Mr. Dilip Mehta had invested the said amount in an investment company by name of White Cedar Investments Limited on behalf of the Estate through the Oak Trust. White Cedar Investments Ltd. was an independent investment company with several subscribers. The said investment made by Mr. Dilip Mehta comprised of 5.73% interest in the said company. These facts also stood confirmed by Mr. Karl French, a director of White Cedar Investments Ltd., by a letter. He also confirmed that the present Assessee, including the other beneficiaries, had neither visited nor opened or operated the account of White Cedar Investments Ltd. This fact also stood confirmed by HSBC Bank, Geneva by its letter dated 22.12.2011. Though Mr. Dilip Mehta believed that the said amount would not be chargeable to tax in India, with a view to buy peace, he offered to tax USD 25,70,545 (being 5.73% of USD 4,48,61,171) equivalent to INR 11,46,72,012 based on the exchange rate of INR 44.61 to 1 USD prevailing as on 31.03.2006 in the statement recorded under section 131 of the Act. This was based on a specific understanding that the offer was made to avoid litigation and regularise the Estate’s position and that no penalty shall be levied. For the purposes of payment of taxes arising thereon, he also had to liquidate the said investment in White Cedar Investments Limited.

In view of the search action, a notice dated 14.02.2013 came to be issued under Section 153A of the Act directing the Assessee to file his Returns of Income for the Assessment Years 2006-07 to 2011-12. Pursuant thereto, on 06.03.2013, the Assessee filed his Returns of Income for the said years, including the year under consideration. Similar notices were also issued to other members of the Mehta family, and in the Return of Income as filed by the Estate of Late Mr. Ramniklal Mehta, the aforesaid amount of Rs.11,46,72,012 was offered for tax.

In the Assessment Order dated 30.05.2014 passed under Section 153A in the case of the said Estate, the entire rupee equivalent of the peak balance lying in the HSBC bank account of White Cedar Investments Limited (being Rs.2,00,12,56,838) was added by their Assessing Officer as unexplained money under Section 69A of the Act. The said Assessment Order passed in the case of the Estate has been found by the Tribunal to be unjustified for various technical reasons.

The Returns of Income filed by the Assessee were selected for scrutiny. In the course of the assessment proceedings, the Assessee reiterated and confirmed that he did not have any bank account outside India. The assets and investments as held by him are only those as reflected in his Return of Income. Reliance was placed on the letter dated 06.01.2012 and the statement recorded on 10.01.2012 of Mr. Dilip Mehta. Reference was also invited to the letter dated 27.12.2011 from Mr. Hassanali, the letter dated 22.12.2011 from the HSBC Bank Geneva, and the letter dated 27.12.2011 from Mr. Karl French. Emphasis was laid on the fact that before making an addition in respect of unexplained money, it is incumbent on the Revenue to show that ownership of the same belonged to the Assessee. In the present case, this burden of proof was not discharged. Further, though the Estate had offered for tax an amount of Rs.11,46,72,012 in its Return of Income filed pursuant to notice issued under Section 153A of the Act, in the Assessment Order passed in its case, the rupee equivalent of the entire peak amount being Rs.200,12,56,838 already stands assessed to tax. Further, separate affidavits dated 09.03.2015 [from Mr. Dilip Mehta] and 10.03.2015 [from Mr. Karl French] were also filed confirming the position explained by them in their earlier letters/statements recorded under Section 131 of the Act. A letter dated 05.03.2015 from Solicitors Charles Russel Speechlys was also filed confirming the aforesaid position. Rejecting the aforesaid submissions, the Assessing Officer has made exhaustive reference to the Base Note. The burden of proving/disproving the Assessee’s interest in the said bank accounts held by White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. in HSBC Bank, Geneva has been placed on the Assessee, and it is alleged that the Assessee has not discharged the said burden. Consequent thereto, an amount of USD 4,020.02 equivalent to Rs.1,79,333 belonging to Ruby Enterprises Inc. and USD 4,48,61,171 equivalent to Rs.2,00,12,56,838 was assessed to tax in the Assessee’s hands as unexplained money under Section 69A of the IT Act. In respect of the amount lying in the bank account of White Cedar Investments Ltd., a substantive addition of Rs.28,58,93,834 was made to the extent of 1/7th of the total amount of Rs.2,00,12,56,838 (as there were seven beneficiaries as per the Base Note). The balance amount of Rs.1,71,53,63,004 representing 6/7th of the aggregate amount, was added on a protective basis.

The Assessee filed an Appeal before the Commissioner of Income-tax (Appeals), which was partly allowed by him by his Appellate Order dated 31.03.2017. The submissions made by the Assessee before him with respect to the scope of an Assessment under Section 153A being restricted to such additions based on incriminating material found in the course of search and justification in respect of Assessment of the amount of Rs.1,79,333 lying in the bank account of Ruby Enterprises Inc. were dismissed by him. However, he deleted the addition of Rs.2,00,12,56,838 being Rupee equivalent of the USD funds lying in the bank account of White Cedar Investments Ltd.

Aggrieved by the aforesaid Appellate Order, both the Assessee as well as the Revenue filed Appeals before the Tribunal. The Assessee inter alia urged that the additions made by the Assessing Officer were beyond the scope of Section 153A as they were solely based on the Base Note which was already available with him before conducting the search. The Base Note was not a document found in the course of the search. Admittedly, the assessment proceeding for the year under consideration was not pending at the time of search. Hence, the assessment did not abate as per the second proviso to Section 153A of the Act. In such circumstances, no addition could be made in the Assessment Order passed under Section 153A of the IT Act, unless incriminating material in support of such addition was found in the course of search. Further, the USD equivalent of Rs.1,79,333 was found to be lying in the bank account of Ruby Enterprises Inc. with HSBC Bank, Geneva, ownership of which could not be attributed to the Assessee. Hence, addition of the said amount in his hands was not justified. In the Appeal filed by the Revenue before the Tribunal, it was urged that the USD equivalent of Rs.2,00,12,56,838 lying in the bank account of White Cedar Investments Ltd. should be assessed as unexplained money in the hands of the Assessee.

The Tribunal, allowed the appeal filed by the Assessee as well as dismissed the Appeal filed by the Revenue. With respect to the preliminary issue being the scope of assessment under Section 153A, the Tribunal has given a finding of fact that no incriminating material in respect of the bank accounts maintained by White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. with HSBC Bank, Geneva was found during the course of the search. Hence, the additions made by the AO in respect of funds lying in the bank accounts belonging to White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. were not supported by any incriminating material found in the course of search. The Tribunal upheld the Assessee’s contention that the additions as made by the AO based on the Base Note were not justified in the assessment made under Section 153A.

Separately, on the merits of the case also, it held that the Assessee has been expressing his unawareness about the contents of the Base Note right from the beginning. Mr. Dilip Mehta had given an explanation with respect to the investments made in White Cedar Investments Ltd. to the extent of USD 27,95,000 including the source of such investment. For invoking the provisions of section 69A of the Act, the Assessee must be found to be the owner of the money, bullion, jewellery or other valuable article. There was nothing on record to indicate that the Assessee, was the owner of the bank account operated and maintained in the name of White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. HSBC Bank, Geneva also confirmed by its letter that the Assessee herein had neither visited nor opened and operated any bank account and that no payments were received or made by him in relation to the said account. Further, the statement recorded under Section 131 and the affidavit given by Mr. Dilip Mehta, letters from Mr. Hassanali, Mr. Karl French and Solicitor Charles Russel Speechlys also supported the case of the Assessee. Since the Revenue could not prove with necessary material that the said bank accounts belonged to the Assessee herein, the provisions of Section 69A of the Act could not be invoked, was the finding of the Tribunal. It has also observed that the sole basis for addition is the Base Note received from the French Government, but which is an unauthenticated document not received from the bank directly. Though the information exchanged between two sovereign countries cannot be ignored, but the contents of the Base Note are incomplete. Based thereon, the Tribunal deleted both the aforesaid additions made by the AO.

On appeal by the Revenue the Court held that the issue of incriminating material was no more a substantial question of law, as the same is covered by the decision of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Abhisar Buildwell Pvt. Ltd. (2023) 454 ITR 212 (SC). As regards question on addition of 69A, it was pointed out that having regard to the plain reading of the section, it is apparent that the burden is on the Revenue to establish that the Assessee, in whose hands an addition is proposed under Section 69A, is to be found as the owner of the asset. The Tribunal has found as a matter of fact that the Assessee was not the owner of the bank account, the balance wherein is sought to be assessed in his hands, and therefore, the addition cannot be sustained. In this view of the matter, no substantial question of law arose for consideration. The court also noted that the Base Note, which was the only evidence relied upon be the Revenue itself, makes it clear that the bank accounts belonged to White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc.

It was an admitted position that the Government of India had received a Base Note from the French Government disclosing that the Respondent Assessee was a beneficiary of the Oak Trust, being a private discretionary trust which held investments in a company being White Cedar Investments Ltd. The said company and Ruby Enterprises Inc. had bank accounts with HSBC Bank in Geneva. Pursuant thereto, a search and seizure action was carried out at the premises of entities belonging to the Rosy Blue Group, including the Assessee herein. On the date of search, i.e. on 25 and 26.08.2011, no assessment proceedings were pending in the case of the Assessee for the Assessment Year 2006-07. The intimation issued under Section 143(1) of the IT Act for the year under consideration became final in the absence of any notice for scrutinising the assessment being issued under Section 143(2) of the IT Act. Hence, the assessment did not abate. In such circumstances, in the Assessment Order passed under Section 153A of the IT Act, only such additions could be made which were based on incriminating material found in the course of the search. That the Base Note, which formed the sole basis for the additions as made by the Assessing Officer in respect of balances lying in the bank account of White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. held with HSBC Bank, Geneva, which was already available with the Revenue before the search, does not qualify as incriminating material found in the course of search.

Further, a bare perusal of Section 69A of the Act also shows that, for invoking the said provision, the Revenue has to first find an Assessee to be the owner of any money, bullion, jewellery or other valuable article, and such asset has not been recorded in his books of account. Once this condition is fulfilled, the Assessee is under an obligation to explain the source from which such asset has been acquired. Only in such cases where the Assessee is unable to offer any explanation or the explanation as offered by him is found to be not satisfactory, the money or the value of the assets may be deemed to be the income of the Assessee for such Financial Year. In the present case, the Revenue has not discharged the burden of showing that the Respondent Assessee is the owner of the money lying in the said bank accounts. On the face of it, the bank accounts with HSBC Bank, Geneva are of White Cedar Investments Ltd. and Ruby Enterprises Inc. It stands confirmed by the said Bank that the Assessee herein neither visited nor opened or operated the said bank accounts held by the aforesaid two entities. Further, Mr. Dilip Mehta has repeatedly explained the investments made by the Estate of Late Mr. Ramniklal Mehta through the said White Cedar Investments Ltd. to the extent of USD 27,95,000, and that the said company was an investment vehicle in which the Estate only held 5.73% interest. He has also explained the source of funds from which the said investments were made. The said facts are also confirmed by a letter dated 27.12.2011 from Mr. Karl French, being the Director of White Cedar Investments Ltd., and a letter dated 22.12.2011 from the HSBC Bank, Geneva. In such circumstances, the Tribunal was fully justified in holding that the first condition for invoking Section 69A of the Act viz., the Assessee should be found to be the owner of the money in the said bank accounts, has not been satisfied. Hence, the Tribunal was also justified in deleting the additions.

Both the Appeals filed by the Revenue were dismissed.

Section 144 and 144B: Assessment – Service of notice on wrong email ID- Breach of principles of natural justice – without granting a fair and effective opportunity of hearing.

7. Hero Products India Pvt Ltd Vs. National Faceless Assessment Centre & Ors.

[WP No. 5730 OF 2026, Dated: 13/07/2026. (Bom) (HC)]

Section 144 and 144B: Assessment – Service of notice on wrong email ID- Breach of principles of natural justice – without granting a fair and effective opportunity of hearing.

The Petitioner’s registered primary email address on the income tax portal was dhanashree.sawant@apac.hero.ca and its registered secondary email address was chandrasekhar.ella@apac.hero.ca.

The secondary email address, namely chandrasekhar.ella@apac.hero.ca, was also reflected in the database of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. It is further the case of the Petitioner that while filing its return of income in response to notice under Section 148 on 20th October 2021, the Petitioner had specifically mentioned its email addresses as dhanashree.sawant@apac.hero.ca.

It is the case of the Petitioner that despite the Petitioner’s primary and secondary email IDs being available with the Respondents, all subsequent notices, including notice under Section 143(2) of the Act, were sent to tarini.03@gmail.com. According to the Petitioner, though the said email ID was reflected in the Return of Income for Assessment Year 2015-16, the said email ID does not belong to the Petitioner and appears to have been mentioned by the earlier tax consultants handling the compliance aspects of the Petitioner Company. The Petitioner further states that in the Return of Income for A.Y.2016-17, the email ID rushabhapatel30@gmail.com was mentioned, which pertained to the Chartered Accountant appointed as the Auditor and tax consultant of the Petitioner, who had ceased to represent the Petitioner during the assessment proceedings.

According to the Petitioner, though certain communications appear to have been received on tarini.03@gmail.com and rushabhapatel30@gmail.com, the crucial statutory notices, including the Show Cause Notice and the notice proposing additions, were not effectively served on the Petitioner’s registered email IDs. According to the Petitioner, it was therefore denied a fair and effective opportunity to place its explanation and supporting documents on record before the passing of the impugned Assessment Order. The Petitioner therefore contends breach of principles of natural justice.

It is the case of the Respondents that notices were uploaded on the e-filing portal and were also sent on the email address of the Petitioner. The Respondent submitted that the Petitioner had responded to the notice issued under Section 148 of the Act by seeking the reasons of reopening. The said notice in addition to being uploaded on the ITBA portal, was also sent to the mail ID tarini.03@gmail.com and rushabhapatel30@gmail.com. Thereafter, sufficient notices/ opportunities were given to the Petitioner. The Petitioner could have intimated the National Faceless Assessment Centre about change of their mail on account of change of their CA. In the facts of the present case, no deficiency could be found with the assessment proceedings.

The Court held that it was not in dispute that the Petitioner had furnished its email address being dhanashree.sawant@apac.hero.ca in the return filed in response to notice under Section 148. The secondary email address, namely chandrasekhar.ella@apac.hero.ca, was also registered on the income tax portal and was also reflected in the database of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. It was also not in dispute that none of the notices were sent on either of these two email addresses registered on the portal.

The Court held that the assessment proceedings culminating into the impugned Assessment Order, had been completed without granting the Petitioner a fair and effective opportunity to respond to the proposed additions. Further that disputes had arisen between the Petitioner and its Auditor, who subsequently resigned on 21st January 2022. In view thereof, further notices issued by the Respondents on the email ID of the said Auditor do not appear to have been effectively communicated to the Petitioner. In view of these peculiar facts, the Petitioner did not get an adequate opportunity to place on record its explanation and supporting documents before passing of the impugned Assessment Order. Therefore, the court directed the Assessing Officer to grant a fresh hearing to the Petitioner on the show cause notice issued, provide an opportunity to the Petitioner to submit its response, and thereafter pass a fresh Assessment Order.

From Published Accounts

COMPILER’S NOTE:

Vide notification date 24th March 2021, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs amended Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013 to include disclosure of the utilisation of Borrowed Funds and Share Premium where any loans given or investments are made (directly or indirectly) in other persons / entities on behalf of the company (ultimate beneficiary). This disclosure is an onerous requirement and was introduced with the objective of reporting circuitous lending or investing of funds where the ultimate beneficiary is the company itself.

A similar requirement was also included in Rule 11 of the reporting requirements applicable to statutory auditors while reporting on the financial statements of a Company.

Given below is an illustration of such disclosure and the corresponding reporting by the statutory auditor.

CYIENT LIMITED (YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH 2026)

Extracts from Note 33 of Standalone financial statements

Other statutory information

i. The Company does not have any Benami property in respect of which any proceeding has been initiated or is pending against the Company

ii. The Company does not have any transactions with companies that have been struck off.

iii. The Company does not have any charges or satisfaction thereof that are yet to be registered with the ROC beyond the statutory period.

iv. The Company has not traded or invested in Crypto currency or virtual currency during the financial year.

v. The Company has not been declared wilful defaulter by any bank, financial institution, Government, or Government authority.

vi. Other than disclosed below, the Company has not advanced or loaned, or invested funds to any other person(s) or entity(ies), including foreign entities (Intermediaries), with the understanding that the Intermediary shall, directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Funding Party (Ultimate Beneficiaries) or provide any guarantee, security, or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries.

For the year ended March 31, 2026

(All amounts in ₹ Millions)

Name of the intermediary to which the funds are advanced or loaned or invested Nature of transaction Date on which funds are advanced or loaned or invested Amount of funds advanced or loaned or invested Parties to which these funds are ultimately advanced or loaned or invested Date on which funds are further advanced or loaned or invested Amount of funds further advanced or loaned or invested
Cyient Semiconductors Private Limited Investment in equity shares April 04, 2025 and March 17, 2026

 

3,785 Cyient GmbH June 11, 2025 341
Cyient Europe Limited May 28, 2025 2,012
Cyient Inc June 11, 2025 243
Cyient Limited June 11, 2025 629
Kinetic Technologies#1 April 08, 2026 460

#1. On December 17, 2025, the Company’s subsidiary, Cyient Semiconductors Private Limited through its wholly owned subsidiary, Cyient Cayman Limited located at Cayman Islands, entered into a definitive agreement to acquire a majority stake in Kinetic Technologies. As at March 31,2026, the acquisition was subject to the fulfilment of customary closing conditions, including receipt of applicable regulatory approvals.

Subsequent to the reporting date, the acquisition was completed on April 8, 2026, following satisfaction of all closing conditions, resulting in Kinetic Technologies becoming a step-down subsidiary of the Company.

The Company has complied with the relevant provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (42 of 1999) and the Companies Act (18 of 2013) for the above transactions, and the transactions are not violative of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 (15 of 2003).

Complete details of intermediaries and ultimate beneficiaries

Name Registered address Government Identification Relationship with the Company
Cyient Semiconductors Private Limited 2nd Floor, Cyient Limited, Plot No. 11, Infocity, Madhapur, Hyderabad, Shaikpet, Telangana, India, 500081 CIN:U46521TS20 24PTC188699 Subsidiary
Cyient Semiconductors Inc. 131 Continental Dr, Suite 305, Newark, Delaware, United States of America EIN: 33-1622621 Step-down subsidiary
Cyient Gmbh Düsseldorfer Landstraße 401, 47259 Duisburg, Germany Reg. no: 251924 Subsidiary
Cyient Europe Limited First Floor Block A, Apex Plaza, Forbury Road, Reading, England RG1 1AX United Kingdom. 2743776 Subsidiary
Cyient Inc 99 East River Drive, 5th Floor, East Hartford, CT 06108, USA EIN: 33-0867496 Subsidiary
Cyient Limited 4th floor, ‘A’ wing, Plot No. 11, Software Layout Units, Infocity, Madhapur, Hyderabad, Telangana, India – 500081. CIN No.: L72200TG1991 PLC013134 Subsidiary
Kinetic Technologies P.O. Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman MC – 167695 Step-down subsidiary#1 (supra)
Azimuth AI Inc. 131 Continental Dr, Suite 305, Newark, Delaware, United States of America EIN: 88-1363299 Associate

vii. The Company has not received any fund from any person(s) or entity(ies), including foreign entities (Funding Party) with the understanding (whether recorded in writing or otherwise) that the Company shall:

(a) directly or indirectly lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Funding Party (Ultimate Beneficiaries) or

(b) provide any guarantee, security, or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries

viii. The Company does not have any such transaction that is not recorded in the books of account and that has been surrendered or disclosed as income during the year in the tax assessments under the Income-tax Act, 1961 such as during a search, survey, or under any other relevant provisions of the Income-tax Act, 1961).

FROM AUDITOR’S REPORT

With respect to the other matters to be included in the Auditor’s Report in accordance with Rule 11 of the Companies (Audit and Auditors) Rules, 2014, as amended, in our opinion and to the best of our information and according to the explanations given to us,

(i) to (iii) not reproduced

(iv) (a) The management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, other than as disclosed in the Note 33 to the Standalone Financial Statements, no funds have been advanced, loaned, or invested (either from borrowed funds, share premium, or any other sources or kind of funds) by the Company to or in any other persons or entities, including foreign entities (“Intermediaries”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the Intermediary shall, whether directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Company (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security, or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries;

b) The management has represented that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, other than as disclosed in the Note 33 to the Standalone Financial Statements, no funds have been received by the Company from any persons or entities, including foreign entities (“Funding Parties”), with the understanding, whether recorded in writing or otherwise, that the Company shall, whether, directly or indirectly, lend or invest in other persons or entities identified in any manner whatsoever by or on behalf of the Funding Parties (“Ultimate Beneficiaries”) or provide any guarantee, security, or the like on behalf of the Ultimate Beneficiaries.

Search and seizure — Assessment of third person — Notice for reassessment — Meaning of period of six or ten assessment years from “relevant assessment year” for which assessment can be made — How to compute “Six years immediately preceding assessment year relevant to previous year in which search is conducted” — Ten assessment years to be reckoned from end of assessment year pertaining to previous year in which search was conducted — Distinct from preceding year spoken of in case of six relevant assessment years — Date of search falling during F. Y. 2024-25 — A. Y. 2025-26 would be first assessment year and A. Y. 2016-17 would be tenth assessment year — Notice issued for A. Y. 2015-16 falls beyond period of ten years prescribed — Notice issued for A. Y. 2015-16 barred by limitation and accordingly invalid.

26. Jayantibhai Karamshibhai Maniya v. ITO: (2026) 488 ITR 90 (Guj): 2026 SCC OnLine Guj 2776

A. Y. 2015-16: Date of order 05/01/2026

Sections. 148, 149(1)(b), 153A(1)(b), Expln 1, and 153C of ITA 1961

Search and seizure — Assessment of third person — Notice for reassessment — Meaning of period of six or ten assessment years from “relevant assessment year” for which assessment can be made — How to compute “Six years immediately preceding assessment year relevant to previous year in which search is conducted” — Ten assessment years to be reckoned from end of assessment year pertaining to previous year in which search was conducted — Distinct from preceding year spoken of in case of six relevant assessment years — Date of search falling during F. Y. 2024-25 — A. Y. 2025-26 would be first assessment year and A. Y. 2016-17 would be tenth assessment year — Notice issued for A. Y. 2015-16 falls beyond period of ten years prescribed — Notice issued for A. Y. 2015-16 barred by limitation and accordingly invalid.

The assessee petitioner was engaged in the business of job work of diamonds during the year under consideration. The petitioner filed the return of income for the A. Y. 2015-16 on March 31, 2016 declaring a total income of Rs.19,85,220. The respondent Assessing Officer issued a notice dated March 31, 2025 u/s. 148 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 for the A. Y. 2015-16 stating therein that a search was initiated u/s. 132 of the Act on May 9, 2024 in the case of the person in respect of whom the petitioner is assessable under the Act. Further, it was stated that the respondent is satisfied, with the approval of the Principal Commissioner or Commissioner, that the books of account or documents seized or requisitioned under Section 132 or Section 132A of the Act in the case of Sushil Kumar Keval Kishan Goyal pertain to the petitioner or the person in respect of whom the petitioner is assessable under the Act, and hence, the notice dated March 31, 2025 has been issued under Section 148 of the Act after obtaining prior approval of Chief Commissioner of Income-tax, Ahmedabad-1.

The petitioner filed a writ petition and challenged the notice contending that the notice is barred by time. The Gujarat High Court allowed the petition and held as under:

“i) Section 149(1)(b) of the Act refers to the limitation period of ten years, which has elapsed from the end of the “relevant assessment year”. The relevant assessment year in the present case is 2015-2016, which is prior to the cut-off date of April 1, 2021, as specified in the first proviso. The link between section 149 and Sections 153A and 153C of the Act is found in the first proviso to Section 149(1) of the Act. The expression “relevant assessment year” is explained under Explanation 1 to the fourth proviso to Section 153A(1). The first proviso to Section 149(1) of the Act bars the issuance of notice under Section 148 of the Act for the relevant assessment year beginning on or before April 1, 2021, if a notice under Section 148 or Section 153A or Section 153C of the Act could not have been issued at that time on account of it being beyond the time limit specified under the provisions of clause (b) of sub-section (1) of Section 149 of the Act or Section 153A or Section 153C of the Act. In the present case, the notice under Section 148 of the Act emanates from the search proceedings undertaken under Sections 132/132A of the Act, and hence the provisions of Sections 153A and 153C of the Act would get attracted, and the reassessment of the petitioner has to be examined by keeping in mind the limitation provided under Sections 153C of the Act, which is pari materia to Section 153A of the Act.

ii) The provisions of Section 153A/153C of the Act find place in the proviso to Section 149 of the Act and, hence, the limitation as provided in Sections 153A/153C of the Act gets triggered upon the initiation of assessment proceedings emanating from a search under Section 132/132A of the Act. We may, at this stage, mention that the Delhi High Court as well as the Madras High Court have already considered the implications of Explanation 1 to Section 153A of the Act to the limitation and the expression “relevant assessment year” used therein in Explanation 1 to Section 153A of the Act.

iii) The statute prescribes different modes of computation for six years and ten years. We reiterate that the provisions of Section 153A(1)(b) of the Act stipulate that the Assessing Officer shall assess or reassess the total income of six years immediately preceding the assessment year relevant to the previous year in which the search is conducted. However, the ten assessment year period, consequently, is to be reckoned from the end of the assessment year pertaining to the previous year in which the search was conducted, as distinct from the preceding year which is spoken of in the case of the six relevant assessment years. Thus, the contention with regard to the computation of six years as well as ten years under the provisions of Section 153A of the Act has already been gone into by the Delhi High Court as well as the Madras High Court, and we have no convincing reason to take a divergent view from the view expressed hereinabove. Applying the aforesaid computation to the facts of the present case, taking the date of the search as May 9, 2024 during the F. Y. 2024-25, the A. Y. 2025-26 will become the first assessment year and, in the same manner, the A. Y. 2016-17 will become the tenth assessment year. Thus, the year under consideration, namely, A. Y. 2015-16, for which the impugned notice has been issued under Section 148 of the Act, would fall beyond the period of ten years prescribed under the statute as it stood immediately before the commencement of the Finance Act, 2021 ((2021) 432 ITR (St) 52), and hence, on this count, the impugned notice can be said to be barred by limitation.

iv) For the foregoing reasons, the impugned notice dated March 31, 2025 issued under Section 148 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 by the respondent-Department seeking to reopen the income-tax assessment of the petitioner for the respective assessment year is hereby quashed and set aside. The petitions are allowed accordingly.”

Refund — Section 244A — Return of income — Intimation issued u/s. 143(1) in 2019 — Refund determined along with interest — Interest upto the date of intimation under Section 143(1) — Refund paid only in 2023 — Assessee’s request to grant interest till the date of payment of refund to the assessee — Rejection by the AO — The AO does not have jurisdiction to decide the question of exclusion of period and deny interest — Delay due to system failure — Cannot be held against the assessee — Once refund determined in the proceedings – Interest runs till the date of payment.

25. Bedmutha Industries Limited v. ACIT

TS-917-HC-2026(Bom.)

A. Y. 2017-18: Date of order 15/06/2026

S. 244A of ITA 1961

Refund — Section 244A — Return of income — Intimation issued u/s. 143(1) in 2019 — Refund determined along with interest — Interest upto the date of intimation under Section 143(1) — Refund paid only in 2023 — Assessee’s request to grant interest till the date of payment of refund to the assessee — Rejection by the AO — The AO does not have jurisdiction to decide the question of exclusion of period and deny interest — Delay due to system failure — Cannot be held against the assessee — Once refund determined in the proceedings – Interest runs till the date of payment.

The Assessee filed its return of income for A. Y. 2017-18 on 29/10/2017 claiming a refund of Rs.1,60,47,550. Subsequently, the return of income was revised on 31/01/2019 once again claiming the refund. The return was processed and intimation under Section 143(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, was issued on 14/11/2019 determining the refund along with interest under Section 244A. The interest was determined at Rs.25,67,600 upto the date of intimation.

The assessee’s case was selected for scrutiny and the assessment was completed under Section 143(3) of the Act accepting the loss returned by the assessee and accepting the refund determined by the assessee in the return of income.

While the refund was determined, the same was not paid to the assessee. As a result, the assessee addressed several communications for the release of refund to the assessee and submitted the bank account details. The assessee also raised grievances on the portal in this regard. Finally, the refund was issued on 10th March 2023.

Thereafter, in April 2024, the assessee made an application for grant of interest u/s. 244A upto the date when the refund amount was actually credited to the assessee. However, the Assessing Officer, vide order dated 25/04/2024 rejected the request of the assessee on the ground that delay in release of refund was on account of the assessee due to incorrect bank details and therefore, the assessee was not entitled to interest upto the date of payment.

Against the said order passed by the Assessing Officer rejecting the grant of interest till the date of payment, the assessee filed a petition before the Hon’ble High Court, inter alia, on the ground that firstly, the question regarding the period to be excluded on account of delay attributable to the assessee ought to be decided by the Principal Chief Commissioner or Chief Commissioner or Principal Commissioner or Commissioner under Section 244A(2) and therefore the Assessing Officer could not have assumed the jurisdiction to determine the exclusion of any period and deny interest for such period. Secondly, the reference to proceeding resulting in refund refers to the proceeding in which the refund is determined and since in the present case, the refund was determined in the intimation issued under Section 143(1) on 14/11/2019 it could not be said that the proceedings were delayed on account of any act attributable to the assessee. The assessee had submitted multiple bank accounts and the refund was being attempted to be credited to a bank account which was not the chosen account in the return of income for the relevant assessment year. Further, despite submitting new bank account details, the system continued to re-initiate refund to another bank account. It was also submitted that where the refund cannot be processed due to technical difficulty, the Board’s instructions permit manual payment of refund.

On the other hand, the Department contended that the delay was on account of the details of the assessee’s bank account which was solely attributable to the assessee.

The Bombay High Court allowed the petition of the assessee and held as under:

“i) The proceedings resulting in the refund were the intimation under Section 143(1) dated 14th November 2019 and the Assessment Order under Section 143(3) is dated 24th December 2019. There is no finding anywhere that either of these proceedings was delayed for reasons attributable to the Petitioner. Once the refund stood determined in those proceedings, the statutory consequence under Section 244A(1) was that interest had to run till the date on which the refund was granted. Section 244A(2) does not deal with administrative or post-determination delays in actual remittance of the refund. No such case has been made out here.

ii) There is yet another reason why the impugned order is unsustainable. Section 244A(2) itself provides that where any question arises as to the period to be excluded, it shall be decided by the Principal Chief Commissioner or Chief Commissioner or Principal Commissioner or Commissioner, whose decision thereon shall be final. The impugned order has been passed by the Assessing Officer i.e., Assistant Commissioner of Income-tax-1, Nashik. Therefore, even assuming that the Revenue wished to invoke Section 244A(2), the Assessing Officer had no jurisdiction to decide the question of exclusion of period and deny interest on that basis. On this count also, the impugned order is bad in law.

iii) Even otherwise, the factual foundation on which the impugned order proceeds, is found to be at variance with the record, especially the affidavit filed by Shri Sairaj of CPC. First, they show that till 25th August 2021, approval itself had not been granted by the JAO. Therefore, the suggestion that the entire delay was on account of incorrect bank details furnished by the Petitioner is plainly inaccurate. Second, CPC’s own affidavit shows that the first release in September 2021 was to a bank account which was not the selected account for the relevant year in the Return of Income. Third, once a new bank account was validated and nominated on 25th March 2022 [though the Petitioner has filed a screenshot from the portal which shows that request for validation of this account was made on 31st December 2021 and the same was validated only on 12th January 2022], the system nonetheless continued to re-initiate refund to another account. It was only on 15th March 2023, that the refund was credited to the bank account already validated on 12th January 2022. Thus, the record disclosed by the CPC itself points to a systemic and administrative failure rather than to any default attributable to the Petitioner.

iv) We are unable to accept the Revenue’s broad submission that because some refund attempts failed for bank-related reasons, the entire period of delay must be attributed to the Petitioner. Technology and automated processing are intended to facilitate administration and not to defeat statutory rights. If the system continued to route refund to an incorrect or earlier bank account despite subsequent validation and nomination of another account, that is plainly a system issue. Such system deficiency cannot be held against the Petitioner. Further, if the Department found that automated re-issue was not fructifying despite repeated attempts and grievances, it was always open to it to resort to a manual refund. The Department cannot retain monies admittedly refundable and thereafter deny statutory interest by relying upon its own technological limitations.

v) The Supreme Court in Union of India v. Tata Chemicals Ltd. (2014) 363 ITR 658 (SC) has held that refund due and payable to the assessee is a debt owed by the Revenue and that interest follows as a matter of course as compensation for the use and retention of the money. The Supreme Court observed that the State, having received money without any right and retained and used it, is bound to make the party good.

vi) In these circumstances, the impugned order dated 25th April 2024 cannot be sustained. The Petitioner is entitled to interest under Section 244A on the refund amount till the date on which the refund was actually paid.”

Order giving effect to CIT(A) Order — Order not passed within time limit as provided under Section 153 — Validity and effect of — Order passed by the CIT(A) with direction to re-characterise receipts and apply beneficial tax rate after opportunity of being heard — Order giving effect to CIT(A) Order not passed within statutory time limit provided u/s. 153 — Order passed beyond the time limit — Original assessment does not survive — Return of income to be treated as accepted.

24. Global Hospitality Licensing SARL v. A/DCIT (IT)

2026 (6) TMI 1344 (Bom)

A. Y. 2009-10: Date of order 22/06/2026

S. 153 of ITA 1961

Order giving effect to CIT(A) Order — Order not passed within time limit as provided under Section 153 — Validity and effect of — Order passed by the CIT(A) with direction to re-characterise receipts and apply beneficial tax rate after opportunity of being heard — Order giving effect to CIT(A) Order not passed within statutory time limit provided u/s. 153 — Order passed beyond the time limit — Original assessment does not survive — Return of income to be treated as accepted.

The assessee is a company and a tax resident of Luxembourg. The assessee is engaged in the business of providing marketing activities on a central / group basis to Mariott chain of hotels worldwide. The assessee filed its return of income declaring total income at NIL. The receipts by the assessee under the International Marketing Program Participation Agreement assigned to it by a group company were claimed to be not taxable in India as per the Act and accordingly refund of TDS was claimed by the assessee. In the scrutiny assessment, the Assessing Officer did not agree with the stand taken by the assessee and held that receipts under the IMPPA were taxable as business profits under the provisions of the Act and taxed the same at 40% plus applicable surcharge and cess. The Assessing Officer did not allow any credit of tax deducted at source. Interest under Section 234A and 234B was levied and simultaneously penalty proceedings were initiated under Section 271(1)(c) of the Income-tax Act, 1961.

The CIT(A) held that the receipts under the IMPPA were in the nature of royalty and directed the Assessing Officer to apply the beneficial rate of tax and also directed the Assessing Officer to allow the credit for tax deducted if found in order. The CIT(A) directed the Assessing Officer to grant the assessee an opportunity of being heard before passing an order in pursuance of the CIT(A)’s order.

Against the said order of the CIT(A), the assessee filed an appeal before the Tribunal. In the mean while the assessee found that time limit as provided under Section 153 to pass an order giving effect to the order of CIT(A) has expired but the Assessing Officer has not passed an order giving effect to the order of CIT(A) and accordingly, the assessment has abated.

In the circumstances, there was no need of an order from the Tribunal in the appeal filed by the assessee. Therefore, the assessee, vide a letter, withdrew the appeal on the premise that since no order giving effect to the CIT(A)’s order was passed by the Assessing Officer within the statutory time limits, the assessment had abated. The Tribunal permitted the withdrawal of appeal.

Thereafter, the assessee filed an application before the Assessing Officer seeking refund of the excess tax deducted against the amount liable to be paid by the assessee stating that the assessment proceedings had abated and any tax collected in excess of the amount payable by the assessee was liable to be refunded along with interest.

Penalty notice issued along with the assessment order was initially kept in abeyance. Subsequently, the Assessing Officer issued a show cause notice why the order imposing penalty under Section 271(1)(c) of the Act should not be passed. In response to the notice, the assessee submitted that since the assessment stood abated no penalty could be levied. The assessee also submitted a detailed response as to why penalty should not be levied. However, the Assessing Officer, vide order dated 30/03/2023 levied penalty under Section 271(1)(c) of the Act.

Against the said penalty order, the assessee filed a writ petition before the High Court challenging the validity of the penalty order on the ground that the underlying assessment proceedings had abated on account of failure on the part of the Assessing Officer to pass order giving effect to the order of CIT(A) within the period of limitation provided under Section 153 of the Act.

The Bombay High Court allowed the petition and held as under:

“i) Section 153(5) of the IT Act inter alia provides that where effect to an order passed by the CIT(A) is to be given otherwise than by passing a fresh assessment, such effect shall be given within a period of three months from the end of the month in which order of the CIT(A) is received by the Principal Chief Commissioner or Chief Commissioner or Principal Commissioner or Commissioner, as the case may be.

ii) As per the second proviso to Section 153(5) of the IT Act, where as a consequence of the order of the CIT(A), verification of any issue by way of submission of any document by the Assessee or any other person is necessary or where an opportunity of being heard is to be provided to the assessee, the order giving effect shall be made within the time specified in sub-section (3). Thus, the larger time limit of nine months as provided for in sub-section (3) is made applicable to cases governed by sub-section (5) which require verification or the grant of an opportunity of being heard, as is the fact in the present case.

iii) In the present case, the CIT(A) has altered the very basis of taxation and directed application of the beneficial rate of taxation applicable to royalty. Consequently, even though the assessed income remained the same, nevertheless, the original computation of tax liability was set at naught and required fresh determination through a valid order giving effect. So far as the submission of the Revenue as to the nature of an order passed in consequence of orders of the appellate authorities with a view to giving effect to the directions contained therein, it is difficult to hold that such an order is an Administrative Order. An order contemplated by Section 153(5) is not ministerial in nature but quasi-judicial, as it determines the rights and liabilities of the assessee in accordance with the appellate directions. It may involve verification, quantification of income, re-computation of tax liability and net sum payable by the assessee-all of which, collectively or independently have substantive civil consequences. Therefore, such an order cannot be trivialised as administrative so as to escape the rigor of limitation. The power coupled with an obligation on the Assessing Officer is to make an assessment u/s. 143 or 144 of the IT Act. The final order after giving effect to the orders of the appellate authorities is an order of assessment and the same is complete only upon computation of the total income and the net tax payable by an assessee.

iv) Respondent No. 1 in the present case also had to verify and allow the credit of the tax deducted at source to arrive at the tax payable by the Petitioner. The term ‘assessment’ bears a comprehensive meaning. It comprehends the whole procedure for ascertaining the total income and the determination of tax liability. The latter is as crucial as the former. The Assessing Officer in terms of Section 143(3) has to determine, by an order in writing, not only the total income but also the net sum which will be payable by the assessee, in consequence of such an order.

v) As far as the consequence of not passing the order giving effect within the time limit as provided for in Section 153 of the IT Act is concerned, an identical controversy arose before this Court in the case of Laqshya Media Limited v. Asst/Dy. CIT [WP no. 468 of 2026], wherein it was held that where the Assessing Officer was obliged to comply with the directions of the Tribunal and complete the assessment upon remand, the inaction on his part to pass any assessment order within the limitation cannot disturb the income returned by the Petitioner.

vi) We disagree with the contention of the Department that the assessment proceedings do not abate merely because the Assessee is entitled to interest under Section 244A(1A) of the IT Act for any delay in passing the OGE. Section 244A(1A) operates solely for the benefit of an assessee by providing compensatory interest, where there is a delay on the part of the Department in granting a refund. It is probably meant to cover a case where an order is passed in time, but the refund is not granted.

vii) However, the grant of such interest cannot validate or cure a belated Assessment Order. Further, in a situation where demand is sought to be raised, the Department cannot impose a tax liability if the OGE is not passed within the period of limitation provided for. It is a settled principle that the Department cannot take advantage of its own default. Article 265 of the Constitution mandates that no tax shall be levied or collected except by authority of law. Consequently, any excess tax collected must be refunded, and Section 244A(1A) of the IT Act merely compensates an assessee for delays in grant of such refunds; it does not legitimise proceedings or orders that are otherwise time-barred.

viii) In the present case no order giving effect has been passed pursuant to the appellate order within the time limit provided for in Section 153 of the IT Act as stated above. This has resulted in the assessment abating, and the return of income of the Petitioner is to be regarded as accepted. The penalty proceedings were initiated in the course of the original assessment proceeding where Respondent No. 1 had assessed the Petitioner’s receipt from the IMPPA as its business income. That basis no longer survives. A penalty u/s. 271(1)(c) is levied on the amount of tax sought to be evaded. As in the present case there is no tax that is evaded as it is the income that is declared in the return that now represents the income that is assessed, the levy of penalty is unsustainable. When the very foundation of the penalty proceedings does not survive, the penalty order dated 30 March 2023, therefore, is unsustainable in law.”

House Rent Allowance — Section 10(13A) — Rent paid by employer to the landlord — Recovered from employee’s salary — House Rent Allowance denied by the AO on the ground that the employee did not pay rent and was living in the accommodation provided by the employer — Mode of payment of rent does not change the character of the payment — Incurring of the rent has to be seen — Not the mode of payment to the landlord — Disallowance was not sustainable.

23. Kuldeepkumar D. Kaura v. DCIT

2026 (6) TMI 1458 (Guj.)

A. Y. 2006-07: Date of order 22/06/2026

S. 10(13A) of ITA 1961

House Rent Allowance — Section 10(13A) — Rent paid by employer to the landlord — Recovered from employee’s salary — House Rent Allowance denied by the AO on the ground that the employee did not pay rent and was living in the accommodation provided by the employer — Mode of payment of rent does not change the character of the payment — Incurring of the rent has to be seen — Not the mode of payment to the landlord — Disallowance was not sustainable.

The assessee is an individual and the CEO and COO of one Sterlite Industries India Ltd. The assessee’s return of income was selected for scrutiny on the ground that the assessee had one house property in Delhi which was claimed as self-occupied and therefore exempt. However, the assessee was in Mumbai in a leased premises of the company where the assessee was employed as the CEO.

The assessee claimed exemption of House Rent Allowance (HRA) under Section 10(13A) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, in respect of the leased premises. It was submitted that being the employee of the company, the employer company paid the lease rent and recovered the same from the salary of the assessee on a monthly basis. The assessee therefore claimed that the assessee was paid HRA by the employer and claimed exemption of Rs.16,19,940 under Section 10(13A) of the Act. The Assessing Officer denied the assessee’s claim for exemption under Section 10(13A) on the ground that the assessee did not pay any rent to the landlord directly and that the assessee was in occupation of premises provided by the employer.

The CIT(A) allowed the appeal filed by the assessee and held that the Assessing Officer’s reasoning that the employee did not pay rent directly to the landlord and therefore the employee is not eligible for exemption under Section 10(13A) was ill founded. It was observed by the CIT(A) that in the big cities, the rent agreement is often entered between the landlord and the employer to safeguard the interests of the landlord.

The Tribunal, reversed the decision of the CIT(A) and restored the order of the Assessing Officer, holding that the amount was chargeable as perquisite under Section 17(2) of the Act as there was no reimbursement of rent by the employee and the rent was paid directly by the employer to the landlord. Therefore, the ingredients of Section 10(13A) were not fulfilled.

The Gujarat High Court allowed the appeal filed by the assessee and held as under:

“i) It is clear that the said provision is inserted with effect from 06/10/1964 and any special allowance granted to the assessee by employer to meet the expenditure actually incurred on payment of rent in respect of residential accommodation occupied by the assessee, as may be prescribed, and to that extent such special allowance would be exempt from the income and would not form part of the total income.

ii) In view of the above unambiguous position of Section 10(13A) of the Act, the CIT(A) was justified in holding that it is immaterial as to who pays the rent, more particularly when in the facts of the case, the assessee has not been provided rent free accommodation by the employer, in fact, the rent of same amount is recovered from the salary of the assessee, which is paid by the employer to the landlord.

iii) Therefore, the reimbursement of the amount which otherwise would have been payable by the assessee but is paid by the employer and recovered from the salary of the assessee and paid to the landlord by the employer, would not make any difference for granting exemption of the HRA under Section 10(13A) of the Act.

iv) Circular No. 90 [F.No. 275/79/72-ITJ] dated 26/6/1972 issued by the CBDT also clarifies the entitlement of eligibility of exemption under Section 10(13A) of the Act in Para-4 of the Circular. It is also clarified that it is not necessary for rent receipt from the assessee but expenditure on rent is required to be actually incurred and only clarification is to be made regarding the fact that the employee concerned has incurred the expenditure on rent. Similarly, letter F. No. 12/19/64-IT (A-1) dated 02/01/1967 issued by the Department also clarifies of the expenditure which have been actually incurred for the purpose of claiming exemption under Section 10(13A) of the Act.

v) Only in a case where the employee is not incurring any actual expenditure of rent or is residing in his own house, then special allowance paid by the employer to meet with the expenditure on rent by the employee is not eligible for exemption. In the facts of the case, it is not in dispute that the amount of rent is actually recovered from the employee from the salary of the employee by the employer to be paid to the landlord and, therefore, in effect the employee has incurred expenditure on payment of rent, which was first paid on his behalf by the employer. The effect of both the said transactions is same as payment of special allowance by the employer to meet the actual expenditure incurred by the employee on the rent paid.

vi) The question is answered in favour of the assessee and against the revenue as the Tribunal was not right in law in reversing the order of CIT(A) and confirming the addition and was also not right in confirming the addition of HRA of Rs.16,19,940/- by denying exemption under Section 10(13A) of the Act. The order of the CIT(A) deleting the addition is, therefore, restored and the Assessing Officer is directed to allow the claim of the appellant.”

Article 12 of India-USA DTAA – Consideration received for providing access to publicly available information through a database does not constitute royalty. Provision of marketing support services does not encompass ‘making available’ technical knowledge; hence, consideration received will not constitute ‘fees for included services’.

10. [2026] 184 taxmann.com 667 (Delhi – Trib.)

Coforge BPS America Inc. vs. ACIT(IT)

A.Y.: 2021-22 Dated: 09 March 2026

Article 12 of India-USA DTAA – Consideration received for providing access to publicly available information through a database does not constitute royalty. Provision of marketing support services does not encompass ‘making available’ technical knowledge; hence, consideration received will not constitute ‘fees for included services’.

FACTS:

The Assessee, a US company, was engaged in ITES sector, providing title search services to its AEs. The database contained information from public domain about property titles, property tax, mortgage status, etc., for American properties. Indian AE monetized the database by conducting title search reports for customers of US AE, such as banks and insurance companies. The Assessee received an amount of INR 7.73 Crores for providing access to a database and claimed that it was not taxable under India-USA DTAA. The AO observed that such receipts were royalty under Article 12(3) of DTAA as they encompassed commercial experience. The DRP upheld the action of the AO.

Aggrieved by the final order, the Assessee preferred an appeal before the ITAT.

HELD I:

Commercial experience under Article 12(3) of DTAA requires transfer of specialised knowledge or know-how that can be applied by the service recipient on its own.

Tax authority did not bring any evidence on record to prove that the Assessee had shared the search methodology or any information with Indian AE. Providing access to information obtained from public sources cannot result in use or right to use commercial experience. Reliance was placed on coordinate bench in Uptodate Inc v. Dy. CIT [2023] 150 taxmann.com 231 (Delhi-Trib).

Having regard to the foregoing, the ITAT held that consideration received for providing access to database cannot constitute royalty under Article 12(3) of India-USA DTAA

FACTS II:

The Assessee rendered marketing support services (“MSS”) including advice/guidance, suggestions on customer queries, customer identification, etc. The Assessee was remunerated on a cost-plus 10% mark-up basis. During the relevant year, consideration was INR 28.45 Crores. The Assessee contended that income earned by it was not taxable under India-USA DTAA. However, the AO held that consideration was taxable as fees for included services (“FIS”). The DRP upheld the action of the AO.

Aggrieved by the final order, the Assessee preferred an appeal before the ITAT

HELD II:

MSS were in the nature of advisory services, which should be classified as consultancy services. In terms of Article 12(4) of India-USA DTAA, a service must satisfy the make available condition to be regarded as FIS. In the instant case, MSS did not satisfy make available requirement.

Having regard to the foregoing, the ITAT held that consideration received towards MSS was not taxable as FIS under Article 12(4) of India-USA DTAA.

Circulars under GST – Scope, Binding Effect and Judicial Limits

Section 168 of the CGST Act empowers the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs (CBIC) to issue circulars and ensure uniform implementation of the Act. These instructions are binding on tax officers but do not bind taxpayers or the judiciary. While circulars can clarify ambiguities or provide benevolent relief, they cannot override the parent statute or impose fresh liabilities. Alternative communications, such as FAQs and regional directives, lack statutory authority. Centralising interpretative power within the Board is essential to prevent regional inconsistencies, uphold the “One Nation, One Tax” framework, and minimize litigation.

INTRODUCTION

Nine years after the introduction of GST, one of the largest sources of litigation is no longer ambiguity in legislation but the multiplicity of administrative clarifications. Circulars, Trade Notices, FAQs, Press Releases, and internal departmental communications often coexist, sometimes expressing different views on the same issue.

To implement the law and ensure compliance, clarifications on statutory provisions are required. Clarifications provide certainty to taxpayers regarding the tax treatment of their transactions and operations. However, the source and the statutory authority issuing these clarifications are critical. The GST regime is administered concurrently by the Centre and the States. If multiple field formations or regional authorities issue independent interpretative directives, the uniformity of the tax system is compromised. For the “One Nation, One Tax” structure to function, clarifications must be issued by a single, authorized, centralized body. This article examines the statutory provisions governing the issuance of circulars and clarifications under the GST law, assesses the legal validity of instructions issued by regional field formations, and highlights the need for centralized administrative control to maintain the uniformity of the GST framework.

SECTION 168 OF THE CGST ACT

To achieve the objective of a harmonized tax structure and to prevent administrative chaos, the law provides for a specific centralized mechanism for issuing clarifications. The power to issue binding instructions under the GST law is derived from Section 168(1) of the Act, which reads as follows:

“The Board may, if it considers it necessary or expedient so to do for the purpose of uniformity in the implementation of this Act, issue such orders, instructions or directions to the central tax officers as it may deem fit, and thereupon all such officers and all other persons employed in the implementation of this Act shall observe and follow such orders, instructions or directions.”

An analysis of this provision reveals three important aspects:

1. The authority to issue such orders, instructions, or directions is vested exclusively in the “Board”. The statute does not delegate this interpretative power to individual Principal Commissioners, Chief Commissioners, or regional field formations.

2. The exercise of this power is conditional upon the objective of achieving “uniformity in the implementation” of the Act. Parliament recognized that GST, being a pan-India tax administered concurrently by the Centre and the States, is highly susceptible to divergent interpretations. Section 168(1) acts as a tool to bind the executive wing to a single, unified interpretation, thereby preventing a situation where different jurisdictions apply the same legal provision differently.

3. The provision mandates that all central tax officers and persons employed in the implementation of the Act are statutorily bound to observe and follow these instructions.

The-Weight-of-the-Word

LEGAL SANCTITY AND BINDING VALUE OF SECTION 168 CIRCULARS

The binding nature of Board circulars has been conclusively interpreted by the Hon’ble Supreme Court over decades of indirect tax litigation. Under the statutory mandate of Section 168(1) of the CGST Act, 2017, the orders, instructions, and directions issued by the CBIC are binding on the officers and persons employed in the implementation of the Act. The objective is to ensure that the administrative machinery operates with a unified approach. Consequently, a proper officer or an adjudicating authority cannot independently adopt a legal interpretation that runs contrary to a Board circular, even if the officer believes that the circular misinterprets the law. The Hon’ble Supreme Court, in landmark decisions such as Paper Products Ltd. v. Commissioner of Central Excise [1999 (112) E.L.T. 765 (S.C.)] and Commissioner of Customs v. Indian Oil Corporation Ltd. [2004 (165) E.L.T. 257 (S.C.)], has authoritatively held that the Revenue Department is bound by its own circulars and cannot advance arguments contrary to them in appellate proceedings.

However, this binding effect is unidirectional. While the Department is bound by the interpretations issued by the Board, such circulars hold no binding force on the taxpayer or the judiciary. A taxpayer retains the absolute right to challenge a circular if it imposes a tax liability beyond the contours of the parent statute or misinterprets the legal provisions. Furthermore, the judiciary adjudicates matters based solely on the text of the statute enacted by the Legislature. In the Constitution Bench decision in Commissioner of Central Excise, Bolpur v. Ratan Melting & Wire Industries [2008 (231) E.L.T. 22 (S.C.)], the Supreme Court unequivocally ruled that a circular which is contrary to the statutory provisions has no existence in law. The Court clarified that circulars and instructions merely represent the executive’s understanding of the statutory provisions and cannot override the law itself or the interpretation of the law pronounced by the courts. Therefore, a circular issued under Section 168 serves to standardise departmental action but cannot usurp the interpretative authority of the courts or abrogate the substantive rights of the taxpayer.

CONSTRUCTIVE ROLE OF CIRCULARS:

Circulars are essentially administrative tools designed to ensure that a complex statute is applied consistently across multiple jurisdictions. When utilized within their statutory mandate, they bridge the gap between legislative intent and practical execution. A valid circular serves to mitigate the rigours of the law, clarify ambiguous provisions, and provide standard operating procedures for the assessing officers. By adopting a pragmatic approach and issuing beneficial clarifications, the Board can prevent unwarranted litigation and foster a stable business environment.

Over the past few years, the CBIC has issued several beneficial circulars that have successfully resolved long-standing industry disputes. For instance, Circular No. 178/10/2022-GST provided a detailed clarification on the non-taxability of liquidated damages, notice pay recoveries, and cancellation charges, thereby settling a contentious issue where field formations were demanding tax by treating such instances as an agreement to “tolerate an act”.

Similarly, Circular No. 183/15/2022-GST established a practical mechanism to resolve input tax credit mismatches between Form GSTR-3B and Form GSTR-2A for the initial years of the GST regime. This clarification offered relief to taxpayers facing rigid systemic restrictions and mass disallowances based on mere portal discrepancies. Another pertinent example is Circular No. 199/11/2023-GST, which resolved the dispute between Cross-Charge and Input Service Distributor (ISD) mechanisms by clarifying that the ISD route was not mandatory for distributing common credits in the past periods.

These instances illustrate the proper function of a circular under Section 168 of the CGST Act: to act as a catalyst for dispute resolution, ensure uniformity among tax authorities, and facilitate ease of compliance without altering the statutory framework.

LIMITS OF EXECUTIVE POWER: WHAT A CIRCULAR CANNOT DO

While Section 168 of the CGST Act, 2017 confers upon the Board the power to issue instructions, it is a settled principle of administrative law that executive instructions cannot travel beyond the confines of the parent statute. A circular is a piece of subordinate executive instruction designed to facilitate the implementation of the law; it can supplement the statutory provisions, but it cannot supplant them. The executive cannot use the route of a circular to impose new restrictions, withdraw statutory benefits, or create fresh tax liabilities that are not expressly provided in the parent Act or the Rules.

The judiciary has consistently intervened when the Revenue authorities have attempted to expand the scope of taxation or restrict statutory rights through administrative circulars. The fundamental rule was authoritatively laid down by the Constitution Bench of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Commissioner of Central Excise, Bolpur v. Ratan Melting & Wire Industries [2008 (231) E.L.T. 22 (S.C.)] where it held that “a circular which is contrary to the statutory provisions has really no existence in law”. Furthermore, in Tata Teleservices Ltd. v. Commissioner of Customs [2006 (194) E.L.T. 11 (S.C.)], the Hon’ble Supreme Court held that a circular cannot impose limitations or conditions that are not provided in the statute, nor can it take away the rights conferred by the statute.

In the context of GST, the limitations of the Board’s circular-issuing powers were examined by the Hon’ble Delhi High Court in the case of Pitambra Books Pvt. Ltd. v. Union of India [2020-VIL-45-DEL]. The dispute involved paragraph 8 of the Master Refund Circular No. 125/44/2019-GST dated 18.11.2019, which artificially restricted taxpayers from clubbing refund claims across successive months if they fell in different financial years. The Court stayed the operation of the said paragraph, observing that the Central Government is not empowered to withdraw benefits or impose stricter conditions than those contemplated by law. The Court noted that while circulars may mitigate the rigours of the law by granting administrative relief beyond the relevant provisions of the statute, they cannot impose constraints that the legislature did not envisage. Following this judicial pronouncement, the Board issued a subsequent clarification to removing the restriction.

Similarly, the Courts have frequently intervened when the Circular is used to restrict substantive rights granted by the Act. In M/s Precot Meridian Limited vs. Commissioner of Customs [2019-VIL-616-MAD], it was held that if the statute provides a benefit (such as an IGST refund on exports), a circular cannot deny it if the statutory conditions are otherwise satisfied. A few more instances are tabulated below:

Circular No. & Date Nature of Conflict with Act/Rules Judicial Decision & Outcome
80/54/2018-GST (31.12.2018) Imposed new conditions for exemptions not found in the original Notification issued u/s 6(1) of the IGST Act. The Madras High Court in Jenefa India vs. Union of India [2021-VIL-763-MAD] held that the Circular was ultra vires the exemption notification.
123/42/2019-GST (11.11.2019) Mandated month-to-month ITC reconciliation, conflicting with the “cumulative period” relaxation allowed under the first proviso to Rule 36(4). In State of Uttar Pradesh vs. Vivo Mobile India Pvt. Ltd. [(2024) 14 Centax 117 (S.C.)], the Court held the circular lost its efficacy for the period February 2020 to August 2020 as it conflicted with the amended statutory law.
125/44/2019-GST (18.11.2019) Paragraph 8 mandated exclusive electronic filing of refund claims, even when technical glitches prevented such filing. The Bombay High Court (Goa Bench) in C. P. Ravindranath Menon vs. UOI [2022 (64) G.S.T.L. 183 (Bom.)] directed the acceptance of manual applications where the portal was not functional.
181/13/2022-GST (10.11.2022) Created an artificial class of assessee for Inverted Duty refunds based on the date of application (before/after 18.07.2022). The Allahabad High Court in Vaibhav Edibles vs State of U.P. [2025-VIL-1238-ALH] held that the artificial classification created by the Circular was discriminatory and violative of Article 14.
109/28/2019-GST (22-7-2019) The petitioners challenged the interpretation that exemption entry 77 applies only where the monthly contribution exceeded Rs.7,500/- and not on a slab wise, i.e., taxable only to the extent that the monthly contribution exceeded Rs.7,500/- The Madras High Court in Greenwood Owners Association vs. UOI [2021 (55) G.S.T.L. 529 (Mad.)] held that clarification was contrary to entry 77 and quashed the Circular.
132/02/2020-GST (18-3-2020) Order No. 9/2019 dated 03.12.2019 suspended the limitation period for filing an appeal u/s 112 and stipulated that the three-month period for filing an appeal would commence only from the date on which the President of the Appellate Tribunal assumed office.

 

The Board Circular clarified that, during this period, an Appellant desirous of filing an appeal u/s 112 was required to voluntarily pay the pre-deposit and intimate the jurisdictional officer of its intention to file such an appeal u/s 112.

The Hon’ble Orissa High Court in Swastik Marketing Vs Chief Commissioner of CT & GST [2025-VIL-1024-ORI] held that the Department’s contention regarding mandatory pre-deposit in the absence of the GSTAT was “fallacious and without any legal basis”.

The Hon’ble Calcutta High Court in Vidya Trading Co. vs Senior Joint Commissioner [2025-VIL-1257-CAL] further held that, as long as the time to prefer an appeal remained available (even if extended due to non-constitution), the authorities could not proceed to recover the entire tax demand; and were confined to the cumulative pre-deposit sums (10% + 10%).

These precedents highlight an important boundary in tax administration: while the Board has the authority to issue directions to ensure uniformity among its officers, it lacks the power to legislate through circulars. Any instruction that introduces conditions not found in the principal Act or the Rules is ultra vires and holds no legal validity before the courts.

MITIGATING POWER OF BENEVOLENT CIRCULARS

While administrative instructions cannot impose fresh liabilities or withdraw statutory rights, the jurisprudence governing tax laws recognises that the Board possesses the authority to issue benevolent circulars that mitigate the rigour of the law. When a statutory provision is susceptible to multiple interpretations, the executive may issue a circular adopting a view that favours the taxpayer, even if a stricter alternative view exists. The Hon’ble Supreme Court in UCO Bank, Calcutta v. Commissioner of Income Tax, W.B. [1999 (4) SCC 599] held that circulars can be issued to tone down the strictness of a provision for the benefit of the assessee. The Court observed that the authority vested with the power under the Act has the right to forgo a revenue advantage to ensure a fair enforcement of its provisions and to reduce unnecessary litigation.

A recent illustration of this principle is Circular No. 210/4/2024-GST dated 26.06.2024, which addresses the valuation of import of services between related persons. Under the normal valuation mechanism, transactions between related persons must be assessed at the open market value. However, the second proviso to Rule 28(1) of the CGST Rules, 2017 States that where the recipient is eligible for full input tax credit, the value declared in the invoice shall be deemed to be the open market value. Interpreting this provision beneficially, the Board clarified that in cases where tax is payable on reverse charge mechanism and the services are procured from unregistered suppliers, the invoice referred to in Rule 28 would mean the self-invoice generated by the recipient under section 31(3) of the Act and in cases where no such invoice is generated, the value of such services may be deemed as ‘Nil’. This clarification adopts a pragmatic and revenue-neutral approach, saving taxpayers from complex valuation disputes for transactions where the tax paid would ultimately be available as credit.

The judiciary has promptly enforced this benevolent clarification against the Department. In the case of Metal One Corporation India Pvt. Ltd. v. Union of India [(2024) 24 Centax 13 (Del.)], the Revenue authorities had issued a show cause notice demanding tax on the import of manpower supply services regarding expatriates seconded by overseas group companies. The Hon’ble Delhi High Court quashed the demand by placing reliance on the above Circular. The Court observed that the second proviso to Rule 28 cannot be invoked to displace the legal effect of a ‘Nil’ value where the legislative framework itself permits such a deeming fiction. The Court held, since no invoice was raised by the related domestic entity for the services rendered by its foreign affiliate, the value of such services must be deemed to be ‘Nil’ and, consequently, no tax liability arises. This demonstrates that while circulars cannot supplement the law to the detriment of the taxpayer, they play a vital role in providing administrative relief and certainty when they interpret the law beneficially.

ADMINISTRATIVE MAZE: MULTIPLE ALTERNATIVE MEANS OF CLARIFICATIONS

The centralized statutory mechanism referred to in Section 168(1) of the Act inherently results in delayed clarifications. Consequently, the tax administration frequently relies on alternative modes of communication to disseminate information and interpretations. These include Trade Notices, regional circulars, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), Press Releases, social media updates, modus operandi circulars, and advisories. While these documents communicate policy intent or administrative views rapidly, they operate outside the statutory mandate of Section 168 and lack the authority to bind taxpayers or quasi-judicial authorities.

Trade Notices and Regional Directives: Historically, and continuing into the GST regime, regional field formations, such as jurisdictional Principal Commissioners, issue “Trade Notices” or local circulars to guide taxpayers.

Simultaneously, State Commissioners issue Trade Circulars under the respective State Goods and Services Tax (SGST) Acts. While State Commissioners possess the statutory authority under Section 168 of the SGST Act to direct state officers within their jurisdiction, Central field formations do not possess independent statutory authority to issue interpretative Trade Notices under the CGST Act. Section 168 of the CGST Act reserves the power to issue binding orders, instructions, or directions exclusively to the “Board” (CBIC). To ensure widespread publicity, such Circulars direct the field formations to issue trade notices. Therefore, any Trade Notice or regional guideline issued by a local Central Tax formation is expected to derive its content from the relevant circular. Because it derives its content from a Circular, the Supreme Court in Poulose and Mathen v. Collector of Central Excise [1997 (90) E.L.T. 264 (S.C.)] held that Trade Notices based on Board circulars are equally binding on the Department and cannot be departed from unless the Trade Notice itself is modified or rescinded. However, unlike a Circular (which has all-India application), a Trade Notice binds officers only within the jurisdiction of the issuing Commissionerate. A Trade Notice that travels beyond its parent Circular, or is not traceable to any Circular or statutory instrument at all, would attract the same tests of validity discussed earlier for circulars and would not enjoy any greater sanctity merely because it is issued locally.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Flyers: The CBIC and the Goods and Services Tax Network (GSTN) regularly publish FAQs, sectoral booklets, and flyers to guide taxpayers on procedural compliance and substantive issues. However, these documents invariably carry a standard disclaimer stating that they are purely for educational and guidance purposes and do not have any legal validity. Because they are not issued under the statutory framework of Section 168 of the CGST Act, 2017, they cannot be cited by the Revenue to create a tax demand, nor can they be relied upon by the taxpayer to enforce a statutory right in judicial proceedings.

Press Releases: The Government frequently issues Press Releases to announce policy decisions, particularly immediately after GST Council meetings. While a Press Release communicates the intent of the executive, it does not constitute the law. The legal standing of Press Releases was recently examined by the Hon’ble Bombay High Court in Schulke India Pvt. Ltd. v. Union of India [2024 (11) TMI 522 (Bom.)]. In this case, a Ministry of Finance Press Release dated 15.07.2020 sought to classify alcohol-based hand sanitizers as “disinfectants” attracting an 18% tax rate. The High Court quashed the Press Release, observing that the classification of a product is essentially an issue of interpretation that must be undertaken independently by judicial and quasi-judicial authorities. The Court held that executive instructions communicated through a Press Release cannot dictate matters of classification or tax rates to adjudicating authorities, reinforcing that such documents lack statutory force and cannot interfere with the separation of powers. Similarly, in Nabha Power Limited v. Punjab State Power Corporation Limited [(2024) 24 Centax 74 (S.C.)], the Supreme Court held that a Government press release announcing Cabinet approval to modify a policy – to be given shape only after the fulfilment of conditions – created no vested rights and did not amount to a legal “order.” In Eurotex Industries & Exports Ltd. v. Union of India [2011 (267) E.L.T. 13 (Bom.)], the Bombay High Court held that an Office Memorandum or press release, not published in the Official Gazette, has no legal force.

This has a practical corollary that deserves emphasis in the article: press notes and media briefings issued immediately after a Council meeting – often the first source of information for trade – carry an even weaker legal status than the Council’s recommendation itself, since Council decisions are not infrequently modified before they are formally notified. Taxpayers who alter their compliance position based on a post-Council press briefing, without waiting for the actual Notification or Circular, do so at their own risk.

Recommendations of the GST Council: The GST Council, constituted under Article 279A of the Constitution of India, serves as the constitutional body responsible for making recommendations to the Union and the States on matters related to GST. However, the recommendations, meeting minutes, and agenda notes of the Council do not possess the independent force of law.

The Hon’ble Supreme Court in Union of India v. Mohit Minerals Pvt. Ltd. [2022 (61) G.S.T.L. 257 (S.C.)] conclusively settled this aspect. The Apex Court held that the recommendations of the GST Council are not binding on the Union and States. They are recommendatory in nature and possess persuasive value. To regard them as binding edicts would disrupt fiscal federalism, as both the Parliament and the State Legislatures possess simultaneous power to legislate on GST. The Court clarified that the Government is bound by the recommendations of the GST Council only when it exercises its power to notify secondary legislation, such as Rules and Notifications, to give effect to the uniform taxation system. Until a recommendation of the GST Council is translated into a formal statutory notification or a circular under Section 168, it cannot be enforced as law.

Social Media Communications: With the advent of digital administration, official Twitter (X) handles of the CBIC and GSTN frequently post updates, procedural guides, and clarifications. While these serve as rapid communication tools for deadline extensions or portal updates, they hold no legal standing. Taxpayers and adjudicating authorities cannot rely on social media posts to interpret complex statutory provisions, and any substantive clarification provided on these platforms remains legally invalid unless backed by a formal notification or a circular.

Modus Operandi Internal Circulars: The intelligence and investigative wings, particularly the Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGGI), are entrusted with the task of collection, collation, and dissemination of intelligence relating to tax evasion. A standard mechanism employed to achieve this is the issuance of “Modus Operandi” circulars and alert circulars. The legitimate and primary objective of a modus operandi circular is to sensitize field formations across the country about the latest factual trends, novel mechanisms, and newly detected methodologies of duty evasion. By identifying and compiling these unique evasion tactics, the authorities can effectively guide assessing officers on what factual anomalies to look out for during scrutiny or audit. However, a highly concerning trend has emerged in recent times where regional field formations are actively issuing substantive interpretative guidelines under the guise of internal “Modus Operandi” circulars. Instead of confining these documents to alerting officers about factual fraud or procedural evasion, regional authorities are utilizing them to interpret complex statutory definitions, classify goods, and lay down binding legal conclusions for their subordinate officers.

A prime illustration of this administrative overreach is the recent circular1 issued by the Principal Commissioner of CGST, Siliguri. The Circular interprets that a principal contractor is barred from availing Input Tax Credit (ITC) under Section 17(5)(c) of the CGST Act, relying on the “principle of accretion” to state that the transfer of property occurs directly from the subcontractor to the project owner.

While the intent behind such a circular may be to safeguard revenue, its issuance by a regional authority raises questions regarding statutory competence and jurisdictional overreach. More dangerously, this decentralized issuance of interpretative mandates risks fracturing the “One Nation, One Tax” fabric of the GST framework, creating a fragmented system of regional jurisprudence where the same statutory transaction might be assessed differently depending on the local Commissionerate’s internal circulars.

The Delhi High Court in Association of Technical Textiles Manufacturers and Processors v. Union of India (2023) 12 Centax 195 (Del.) reaffirmed that the statutory power to issue binding instructions, directions, and clarifications under the GST law is vested exclusively in the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs (CBIC) under section 168 of the CGST Act. The Court noted that while the impugned clarification had been issued by the Tax Research Unit (TRU), the Revenue was unable to point to any statutory provision conferring such authority on the TRU. Consequently, the Court held that the TRU lacked jurisdiction to issue a clarification on the classification of goods and quashed the circular on this ground alone, without even entering into the merits of the classification dispute.

The judgment draws a clear distinction between the administrative role of the TRU and the statutory authority conferred upon the Board. While the TRU may assist in policy formulation or budgetary matters, it cannot assume the statutory function assigned by Parliament to the Board under section 168. The Court observed that the legislative intent is unambiguous—the power to issue orders, instructions or directions for ensuring uniformity in the implementation of the GST law rests exclusively with the Board, and cannot be exercised by any other wing of the Department unless specifically authorised by the statute.

The decision has implications extending well beyond the classification dispute before the Court. It reinforces the principle that departmental communications, FAQs, press releases or TRU letters cannot acquire the status of statutory clarifications merely because they emanate from the Ministry of Finance. Unless a clarification is issued by the Board in exercise of its powers under section 168, it lacks statutory backing and cannot be treated as binding for the purposes of GST administration. This ruling therefore serves as an important reminder that the source of a clarification is as significant as its content, and that statutory powers cannot be exercised through administrative convenience.

BENEVOLENT FAQ VS. STRICT CIRCULAR: WHICH PREVAILS?

The taxation of maintenance charges collected by Resident Welfare Associations (RWAs) and the interpretation of Entry 77 of Notification No. 12/2017-C.T. (Rate), dated 28-6-2017 presents an example of a direct conflict between benevolent departmental FAQs and strict statutory Circulars. Initially, educational materials and FAQs published by the authorities created an understanding that if the monthly maintenance contribution exceeded the prescribed limit of Rs.7,500 per member, the exemption would still apply up to Rs.7,500, and only the excess amount would be subjected to GST2. However, the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs (CBIC) subsequently issued Circular No. 109/28/2019-GST dated 22.07.2019, which strictly clarified that “In case the charges exceed Rs.7500/- per month per member, the entire amount is taxable”. When evaluating which document prevails in assessment proceedings, assessing officers will invariably rely on the Circular. FAQs and educational flyers are accompanied by standard disclaimers stating that they are purely for guidance, are not manuals of instruction, and do not hold any legal validity. In contrast, a Circular is issued under Section 168(1) of the CGST Act, 2017, and it is a settled principle that such directions are statutorily binding on the departmental officers.

Despite the binding nature of the Circular on the tax authorities, it does not bind the taxpayer or the judiciary. The Hon’ble Supreme Court in Commissioner of C. Ex., Bolpur vs Ratan Melting & Wire Industries [2008 (231) E.L.T. 22 (S.C.)] conclusively held that circulars represent merely the executive’s understanding of the statutory provisions and are not binding upon the courts. Therefore, an RWA retains the right to challenge the strict assessment by relying on the interpretative logic and arguments originally canvassed in the FAQ. More importantly, the existence of conflicting interpretations propagated by the Department’s own publications serves as a robust defense against the invocation of the extended period of limitation and the imposition of penalties. Under Section 74 of the CGST Act, 2017, the extended period can only be invoked in cases of fraud, wilful misstatement, or suppression of facts to evade tax. The Hon’ble Supreme Court in Principal Commissioner of CGST, Bhopal vs Surya Roshni Ltd. [2025 (391) E.L.T. 64 (S.C.)] has held that where the Department itself is under confusion or doubt regarding the applicability of the law, the invocation of the extended period of limitation cannot be justified. Thus, the shift in the Department’s stance from a benevolent FAQ to a strict Circular establishes that the issue is interpretational, thereby precluding any allegation of suppression or intent to evade tax against the taxpayer.

CALL FOR UNIFORMITY AND CENTRALISATION

The proliferation of non-statutory clarifications and regional directives results in significant practical difficulties for taxpayers. When assessing officers rely on internal modus operandi circulars, Frequently Asked Questions, or social media updates to issue Show Cause Notices, it creates unwarranted litigation. A taxpayer operating in multiple states may face conflicting tax demands on the exact same transaction, simply because different regional formations adopt varying interpretations. This fragmented approach defeats the core legislative intent of Section 168 of the CGST Act, 2017. The Parliament deliberately restricted the power to issue binding instructions to the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs to ensure absolute uniformity in the implementation of the law. Allowing multiple regional authorities or intelligence units to publish their own interpretative mandates disrupts this statutory safeguard and directly contradicts the foundational principle of a unified Goods and Services Tax.

CONCLUSION

Past experience demonstrates that circulars are most effective when they clarify ambiguity and facilitate compliance. Difficulties arise when executive interpretation seeks to fill perceived legislative gaps or resolve disputes that properly fall within the domain of adjudication and judicial interpretation. The legitimacy of a circular ultimately depends not upon its administrative convenience but upon its fidelity to the statutory framework from which it derives authority. The enduring principle remains that while circulars may illuminate the statute’s path, they cannot be permitted to redraw it.

Further, the administration of GST requires strict discipline and jurisdictional restraint by field formations. While identifying tax evasion and sharing factual intelligence are legitimate administrative functions, regional authorities must refrain from issuing directives that interpret substantive legal provisions. The power to clarify the law, classify goods, or determine the eligibility of input tax credit is exclusively vested in the Board. To foster a stable and predictable tax environment, it is important that the revenue department centralizes all interpretative guidance through formally issued statutory circulars. Adhering strictly to the mechanism provided under Section 168 will not only reduce unnecessary litigation but also preserve the structural integrity of the GST framework across the country.

Article 13(5) of India-Netherlands DTAA – Gains derived from alienation of shares by way of buyback are covered within the ambit of ‘reorganization’ under Article 13(5) of DTAA; hence, taxable only in the country of residence

9. [2026] 184 taxmann.com 602 (Delhi – Trib.)

Huntsman Investment [Netherlands] BV vs ADIT (IT) A.Y.: 2009-10 Dated: 25 March 2026

Article 13(5) of India-Netherlands DTAA – Gains derived from alienation of shares by way of buyback are covered within the ambit of ‘reorganization’ under Article 13(5) of DTAA; hence, taxable only in the country of residence

FACTS I:

The Assessee, a tax resident of Netherlands, held a 99.98% stake in an Indian entity. Pursuant to a buyback under Section 77A of the Companies Act, 1956, the Assessee alienated 24% of equity shares at INR 23.10/share. It filed return of its income declaring capital gain aggregating to INR 49.43 Crores. The TPO determined arm’s length price (“ALP”) of shares at INR 80.77/share. Pursuant to ALP determination, the AO recomputed the capital gains at INR 123.41 Crores.

Before the DRP, the Assessee raised two contentions – (i) transaction of buyback was exempted from capital gains by virtue of Section 47(iv) of the Act and (ii) alternatively, in terms of Article 13(5) of India-Netherlands DTAA, gains, if any, were taxable only in Netherlands. DRP rejected both contentions, and as regards Section 47(iv) of the Act, the benefit was denied since the Assessee did not hold whole of the share capital of Indian entity.

Aggrieved by final order, the Assessee preferred an appeal before ITAT.

The issue before the ITAT was whether the buyback transaction fell within the ambit of ‘Corporate Reorganisation’ under Article 13(5) of the India-Netherlands DTAA. While Accountant Member held that benefit of Article 13(5) should be available in case of buyback of shares, Judicial Member held otherwise. Hence, the issue was referred to third member.

HELD :

According to the ‘exception to exception’ rule under Article 13(5)1, if gains are derived in the course of global reorganization or parent company reorganization, then such gains are taxable only in resident state of alienator.


1Under Article 13(5), any gains derived from alienation of shares of Indian Company that is forming part of at least 
10% interest in capital are taxable in India, if the buyer is a resident of India. However, 
if such alienation is on account of corporate reorganisation, then such gains is taxable only in Netherlands

While the percentage ownership remained the same post-buyback, the quantum of overall holding decreased on account of buyback.

In P. Ramanatha Aiyar’s Major Law Lexicon, the term ‘reorganization’ includes substantial change in a company’s capital structure. ICAI Guidance Note provides that buyback is covered under the definition of “Capital and Finanical Structuring”. ICSI guidance states that buyback is part of corporate reorganization.

Intent of Article 13(5) of India-Netherlands DTAA is to provide taxing rights to resident state in respect of gains arising from corporate reorganization involving the transfer of shares within the same group. Accordingly, buyback of shares should qualify as a corporate reorganization.

Having regard to the foregoing, the Third Member held that benefit of Article 13(5) should be available in case of buyback of shares, Accordingly, the gains were taxable only in Netherlands.

Sec. 37(1) – Business expenditure – Disallowance of ‘discount/claim/shortage/deduction’ expenses made solely on proportionate comparison with preceding year without enquiry into supporting details or defects in books – Not sustainable – Matter restored for de novo assessment Sec. 250(6) – Commissioner (Appeals) – Ex parte dismissal of appeal for non-prosecution without adjudicating issues on merits, without specifying points for determination, decision thereon and reasons – Order unsustainable and liable to be set aside.

42. [2026] 134 ITR(T) 49 (Agra – Trib.)

Hari Om Agarwal v. Income-tax Officer

A.Y.: 2017-18 DATE: 17.01.2025

Sec. 37(1) – Business expenditure – Disallowance of ‘discount/claim/shortage/deduction’ expenses made solely on proportionate comparison with preceding year without enquiry into supporting details or defects in books – Not sustainable – Matter restored for de novo assessment Sec. 250(6) – Commissioner (Appeals) – Ex parte dismissal of appeal for non-prosecution without adjudicating issues on merits, without specifying points for determination, decision thereon and reasons – Order unsustainable and liable to be set aside.

FACTS

The assessee, a proprietary concern engaged in trading of grains and pulses, filed return of income declaring income of Rs.7.89 lakhs for A.Y. 2017-18. During the relevant previous year, the assessee’s turnover increased to Rs.16.36 crores as against Rs.6.62 crores in the preceding year.

The Assessing Officer observed that general administration and selling expenses had increased to Rs.68.92 lakhs from Rs.13.74 lakhs and that expenditure under the head ‘Discount/claim/shortage/deduction’ had increased to Rs.59.18 lakhs from Rs.12.18 lakhs.

Though the assessee explained that such expenditure was related to damage, shortage, quantity and weight reduction in goods sold and had furnished ledger accounts containing party-wise details, the Assessing Officer held that the increase in such expenditure was not commensurate with the increase in turnover and disallowed Rs.29.10 lakhs on proportionate basis.

On appeal, the Commissioner (Appeals) issued multiple notices; however, except seeking adjournment on one occasion, the assessee did not effectively participate, and the appeal was dismissed ex parte confirming of the assessment order.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred appeal before the Tribunal.

HELD

The Tribunal observed that the assessee had placed on record ledger accounts containing details of parties and amounts debited under the relevant expenditure head and had thus discharged the primary onus cast upon it.

It was noted that the Assessing Officer had not made any enquiry with the concerned parties, had not examined the correctness of the claim through independent verification, and had not pointed out any specific defect or deficiency in the books or supporting details. The disallowance had been made merely because the expenditure had risen at a rate higher than turnover as compared to the preceding year.

The Tribunal held that such proportionate or comparative disallowance, made only on assumptions and without factual enquiry, was unsustainable in law.

The Tribunal further observed that the Commissioner (Appeals) was statutorily obliged under section 250(6) to decide the appeal on merits by specifying the points for determination, the decision thereon and the reasons for such decision.

Since the appellate order had been passed ex parte without adjudicating the controversy on merits, without calling for records and without seeking any remand report or further enquiry, the same was also unsustainable.

Accordingly, both the assessment order and appellate order were set aside and the matter was restored to the file of the Assessing Officer for de novo assessment after granting proper opportunity of hearing to the assessee. The appeal was allowed for statistical purposes.

Where CIT(E) granted registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G by following the binding judgment of the jurisdictional High Court, imposition of conditions making such registration, approval and all consequential benefits subject to the outcome of a proposed challenge before the Supreme Court was unjustified.

41. (2026) 187 taxmann.com 1010 (Mum Trib)

Keshavlal Vajechand Kapadia Charity Trust v. CIT(E)

A.Ys.: 2027-28 to 2031-32 Date of Order : 24.06.2026

Sections: 12AB, 80G

Where CIT(E) granted registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G by following the binding judgment of the jurisdictional High Court, imposition of conditions making such registration, approval and all consequential benefits subject to the outcome of a proposed challenge before the Supreme Court was unjustified.

FACTS

The assessee trust had applied for renewal of registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G. CIT(E), by separate orders dated 14.02.2026, rejected both applications primarily on the ground that the trust deed did not contain an express clause declaring the trust irrevocable.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed appeals before ITAT. During pendency of the appeals, the Bombay High Court, in the case of Chamber of Tax Consultants v. CIT (Exemptions) [2026] 184 taxmann.com 374 (Bombay), held that a public charitable trust is presumed to be irrevocable by operation of law unless the trust instrument specifically provides for revocation, and directed that registration/approval not be rejected merely for absence of an express irrevocability clause. Following this judgment, CIT(E) granted registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G to the assessee; however, while granting registration / approval, CIT(E) recorded certain observations, stating that the Revenue was contemplating challenge to the said judgment before the Supreme Court and therefore, by way of abundant caution, the assessee trust, donor entities and other stakeholders were being informed that the registration, approval and consequential benefits flowing therefrom would remain subject to the ultimate outcome of the proceedings before the Supreme Court.

Aggrieved by these observations and caveats, the assessee preferred appeals before ITAT.

HELD

The Tribunal observed as follows:

(a) It is a fundamental principle governing judicial discipline that a judgment rendered by the jurisdictional High Court is binding upon all authorities functioning within its territorial jurisdiction so long as it continues to hold the field. The efficacy and binding character of such a judgment do not depend upon whether one of the parties proposes to challenge it before a superior forum. A contemplated appeal, a proposed special leave petition or even a pending challenge before a higher court does not dilute the binding force of the judgment unless its operation is stayed, modified or reversed by a competent judicial authority. Therefore, once CIT(E) accepted the binding nature of the judgment of the Bombay High Court and proceeded to grant registration and approval on that basis, it was not open to simultaneously dilute the effect of such grant by incorporating observations founded merely upon a possible future contingency.

(b) The observations incorporated by CIT(E) travelled beyond the scope of the directions issued by the High Court. The High Court directed that applications should not be rejected solely on the ground of absence of an express irrevocability clause. CIT(E), while implementing those directions, was required to grant or refuse registration in accordance with law and on the basis of the facts before him. Once registration and approval were granted, the statutory recognition so conferred could not be converted into a tentative or conditional recognition by referring to a possible future challenge. Such observations do not emanate from any provision of the Act and are unsupported by any statutory mechanism permitting a registration order to remain perpetually subject to an anticipated future event.

(c) Such caveats also have wider practical ramifications. Registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G are not merely procedural recognitions. They constitute the foundation upon which charitable institutions organise their activities, mobilise resources and secure public participation. Donors, contributors and stakeholders often evaluate the legal status of a charitable institution on the basis of the registration and approvals granted under the Act. An observation by the statutory authority itself suggesting that the approval presently granted may remain subject to an uncertain future outcome is capable of creating avoidable ambiguity and hesitation in the minds of stakeholders. Such uncertainty is neither contemplated by the statutory scheme nor warranted by the judicial directions pursuant to which the approval has been granted.

(d) The validity and efficacy of the registration granted to the assessee must be examined with reference to the law as it exists on the date of grant and not on the basis of speculative future developments. Needless to state, if at any future point of time any superior judicial forum lays down a different legal position, the consequences, if any, would follow in accordance with law. However, such hypothetical future possibilities cannot furnish a legal basis for qualifying a registration that presently stands validly granted.

Noting that the identical issue came up before coordinate bench in ILLA Rajesh Foundation v. CIT (Exemptions) (IT Appeal Nos. 4488 to 4491 of 2026, dated 15.05.2026), the Tribunal held that the impugned observations and caveats which made such registration and consequential benefits subject to the outcome of a proposed challenge before the Supreme Court, are directed to be deleted and the assessee shall be entitled to registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G as granted by CIT (E) without any such qualification, restriction or conditional rider.

In the result, the appeals of the assessee were allowed.

Where the assessee initially filed Form No. 10AB under an incorrect clause and thereafter filed a fresh application under the correct clause during registration proceedings, such filing was a curative step and continuation of the original proceedings and rejection of registration on the ground that the corrected application was time-barred was not justified.

40. (2026) 187 taxmann.com 993 (Mum Trib)

Akashdeep Education Trust v. ITO

A.Y.: 2026-27 Date of Order : 24.06.2026

Sections: 12A(1)(ac), 12AB

Where the assessee initially filed Form No. 10AB under an incorrect clause and thereafter filed a fresh application under the correct clause during registration proceedings, such filing was a curative step and continuation of the original proceedings and rejection of registration on the ground that the corrected application was time-barred was not justified.

FACTS

The assessee was constituted under a trust deed dated 28.10.1991 and registered with the Charity Commissioner, on 07.03.1992, and had been running educational institutions for over three decades. An earlier application under section 12AA had been rejected by the CIT(E), but on appeal in 2018, the Tribunal had directed grant of registration after examining the trust’s charitable objects and genuineness of activities. Under the regime introduced by the Finance Act, 2020, the assessee was granted provisional registration under section 12AB in Form No. 10AC on 07.04.2023, valid up to 31.03.2025. Before expiry of the provisional registration, the assessee filed Form No. 10AB on 26.03.2025 to convert the provisional registration into regular registration but inadvertently selected “sub-clause (ii): of section 12A(1)(ac) instead of “sub-clause (iii)”. On noticing the defect, CIT(E) issued a show-cause notice on maintainability of the application. The assessee accepted the mistake and filed a fresh Form No. 10AB on 03.09.2025 under the correct sub-clause, clarifying that it was merely a rectification of the earlier inadvertent error.

By order dated 27.03.2026, the CIT(E) rejected the application, holding that the application filed under the correct sub-clause was beyond the prescribed period and time-barred.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed an appeal before the Tribunal.

HELD

The Tribunal observed as follows:

(a) The assessee was not a newly established institution but an educational trust in existence since 1991, whose charitable character and genuineness of activities had already been recognised by the Tribunal in its own earlier case. The CIT(E)’s approach of invoking the ‘commencement of activities’ limb of section 12A(1)(ac) proceeded on a factual premise wholly inconsistent with the admitted position on record.

(b) The original Form No. 10AB was filed on 26.03.2025, prior to expiry of the provisional registration on 31.03.2025, demonstrating the assessee’s intention to seek conversion within the prescribed period. The defect pointed out by CIT(E) was confined to selection of a sub-clause within the same statutory provision and it was not a case that no application had been filed.

(c) The distinction between a fresh claim and a corrective claim is well recognised in law. In the present case, the subsequent application did not introduce any new claim, new relief, new factual foundation or new cause of action. It merely corrected the procedural defect arising from selection of an incorrect statutory limb while seeking the very same relief. The trust deed remained the same; the objects remained the same; the registration sought remained the same; and the supporting documents remained the same. The subsequent application was therefore, in substance and effect, a continuation of the original proceedings and merely rectified a procedural irregularity. Such a curative exercise cannot be construed in a manner that extinguishes the original application which had admittedly been filed before expiry of the provisional registration.

(d) Even assuming, for the sake of argument, that the corrected application was to be viewed independently, the statute itself had conferred upon CIT(E) the power to condone delay where reasonable cause exists. The proviso inserted by the Finance (No.2) Act, 2024 was very much in force both on the date of filing of the corrected application and on the date of passing of the impugned order. Once such a power stood vested in the authority, it became incumbent upon CIT(E) to examine whether the circumstances leading to the filing of the corrected application constituted reasonable cause.

(e) Despite issuance of notices and conduct of proceedings over time, CIT(E) had not recorded a single adverse finding regarding the trust’s charitable objects, genuineness of activities, utilisation of funds, maintenance of accounts or compliance with statutory requirements; the rejection was founded entirely on limitation. To deny registration in such circumstances would amount to elevating procedural form over substantive justice.

The Tribunal held that having regard to the long-standing existence of the trust since 1991, the earlier Tribunal order directing registration, the provisional registration already granted, the undisputed timely filing of the original Form No. 10AB, the curable nature of the defect, the corrective filing, the statutory power of condonation available with CIT, and the complete absence of any adverse finding regarding charitable objects or genuineness of activities, the impugned order of the CIT(E) is liable to be set aside and the CIT(E) was directed to grant regular registration to the assessee trust in accordance with law.

In the result, the appeal filed by the assessee was allowed.

Payment for availing Google AdWords advertising services through Google’s standardised, automated self-service platform could not be characterised as fees for managerial, technical or consultancy services under section 194J and deduction of tax at 2% under section 194C was proper.

39. (2026) 187 taxmann.com 871 (Hyd Trib)

DCIT v. Head Digital Works (P.) Ltd.

A.Y.: 2018-19 Date of Order : 19.06.2026

Sections: 194C, 194J

Payment for availing Google AdWords advertising services through Google’s standardised, automated self-service platform could not be characterised as fees for managerial, technical or consultancy services under section 194J and deduction of tax at 2% under section 194C was proper.

FACTS

The assessee-company, running an online gaming website, availed online advertising space under the Google AdWords program from Google India Pvt. Ltd. and deducted TDS at 2% under section 194C, treating the payments as an advertising contract.

During a survey under section 133A conducted to verify TDS compliance, the AO held that the payments were fees for technical services under section 194J, observing that the AdWords platform involved sophisticated automated algorithms, real-time bidding, data analytics and interfaces, and hence constituted managerial, technical or consultancy services under Explanation 2 to section 9(1)(vii). Accordingly, he passed orders under sections 201(1)/201(1A), treating the assessee as an assessee in default for short deduction of TDS (computed at Rs. 2,55,90,804) with consequential interest under section 201(1A) (Rs.57,75,297).

On appeal, the CIT(A) accepted the assessee’s contention, following CBDT Circular No. 715 dated 8.8.1995 and the decision of Google India (P.) Ltd. v. DCIT, (2022) 143 taxmann.com 302 (Bangalore – Trib.) and accordingly, held that the payments fell under section 194C.

Aggrieved, the Revenue filed an appeal before ITAT.

HELD

The Tribunal observed as follows:

(a) For payment to be characterized as “Fee for Technical Services” under Section 194J read with Explanation 2 to Section 9(1)(vii) of the Act, the services rendered must be managerial, technical or consultancy in nature. Technical services require application of human skill, intelligence or direct human intervention; mere use of a highly sophisticated automated technology or standard software interface by the consumer does not mean the service provider is rendering technical services.

(b) In the Google AdWords program, the platform is a standard, automated, self-service portal: the advertiser logs in, selects keywords, sets budgets and uploads ad copy, while matching of keywords, auctioning of ad rank and publishing of the ad are all managed automatically via Google’s algorithm. Presence of a sophisticated automated technology facility does not equate to rendering of technical services; the consumer merely uses an automated facility to purchase advertising space. Reliance on Bharti Cellular Ltd. was misplaced, as the Supreme Court in that case did not decide the issue on merits but remanded it to verify human intervention.

(c) Advertising is specifically covered by section 194C, which includes contracts for advertising. Once the Legislature has consciously made advertising the subject matter of section 194C, it cannot be brought within section 194J merely because the medium is electronic or technologically advanced — a specific provision overrides a general one. This is reinforced by CBDT Circular No. 714 dated 3.8.1995, clarifying that section 194J applies to advertising agencies making payments for professional services, whereas advertising in print or electronic media is governed by section 194C.

(d) The amendment to section 194J by the Finance Act, 2020, reducing the TDS rate on FTS (other than professional services) from 10% to 2%, was intended to reduce litigation on the conflict between sections 194C and 194J. Although effective from A.Y. 2020-21, the rationale justifies extending the benefit to earlier years; since the assessee had already deducted TDS at 2% (matching the amended rate), the order treating it as an assessee in default could not be upheld on this count either.

Accordingly, the Tribunal held that the payments made by the assessee to Google India Pvt. Ltd. for “Google AdWords program” constituted a simple advertising contract in electronic media falling under section 194C, and the assessee had rightly deducted TDS at 2%.

In the result, the appeal filed by the Revenue was dismissed.

Addition for payment of on-money cannot be sustained merely on the basis of a statement which per statement per se cannot be considered as evidence against third party unless it is tested by cross examination.

38. 2026(6) TMI 1385 – ITAT – Mumbai

Nitish Baburao Bhatkar v. ITO

A.Y.: 2019-20 Date of Order : 23.6.2026

Sections: 28, 132

Addition for payment of on-money cannot be sustained merely on the basis of a statement which per statement per se cannot be considered as evidence against third party unless it is tested by cross examination.

FACTS

The Assessing Officer (AO), on the basis of information obtained from the Investigation Wing that in the course of search on GNP Group, an incriminating document was found and seized, which revealed details of on-money collected by GNP Group, reopened the assessment of the assessee on the ground that the assessee has paid on-money of Rs.30 lakh for purchase of immovable property.

The assessee submitted that he had purchased the industrial unit on 27.8.2020 for a consideration of Rs.27 lakh. Payment of Rs.27 lakh plus other amounts such as development charges, etc was made by cheques, details whereof were furnished. The AO was of the view that since the particulars of the unit purchased by the assessee viz. Unit No. 7 on 1st floor matched with details mentioned on seized material, he concluded that the assessee has made initial payment of Rs 30 lakh in AY 2019-20.

The AO made an addition of Rs.30,00,000 under section 69C disregarding the registered agreement, receipts issued by the builder, bank statement, affidavit of the assessee stating consideration for purchase of immovable property was paid by cheques and also the contention that the seized document mentioned name of one “Mr Anup Tejwani”.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to CIT(A) who confirmed the action of the AO by passing a non-speaking order.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the Tribunal where on behalf of the assessee, reliance was placed on the decision in the case of Monica Anand Gupta v. ITO [ITA No. 5561/Mum./2018; Order dated 21.4.2022] where a similar addition made on the basis of a search conducted on COSMOS Group was adjudicated by the Tribunal.

HELD

The Tribunal observed that the AO made additions solely on the basis of a report prepared by the investigation team. No cognizance of various documentary evidence furnished by the assessee was taken by the AO or the CIT(A). The AO has not brought any other corroborative evidence of actual payment of on-money on record. There is specific reference about the name of assessee in the Excel sheet relied on by the AO. While the said document contained reference of “Anup Tejwani”, the AO has not explained such name on the seized paper. The statement of the key person is general and the name of assessee was not disclosed.

The Tribunal held that statement per se cannot be considered as evidence against third party unless it is tested by cross examination. It stated that co-ordinate bench of this Tribunal in Prakash Bhaguji Katkade v. ITO [ITA No. 7402/M/2025], deleted similar addition which was made on the basis of search on Cosmos Group. Further, similar additions were deleted in case of Bharat Laxman Bhiwapurkar v. ITO [ITA No.3413/M/2023 dated 04.03.2024], and in Anand Gupta V. ITO [ITA No.5561/Mum/2018].

Considering the aforementioned decisions of the Tribunal on similar set of facts, the Tribunal deleted the addition made by the AO and allowed the appeal filed by the assessee.

What the Assessing Officer could not have done directly while exercising jurisdiction under sections 147/148, the CIT(A) cannot be permitted to do indirectly while exercising powers under section 251. What cannot be done directly cannot be permitted to be achieved indirectly. Where no addition survives on the issue for which the assessment was reopened, the Revenue cannot independently assess income on issues unconnected with the reasons recorded for reopening. Power of enhancement is only ancillary to appellate jurisdiction and cannot become an independent source of jurisdiction to assess income which the Assessing Officer himself could not have assessed in the reassessment proceedings If Revenue’s argument that the CIT(A) can at any stage introduce a completely new source of income unrelated to the issue for which reassessment proceedings were initiated, is accepted, then it would virtually render the statutory limitations prescribed under sections 147 to 149 otiose.

37. TS-9340-ITAT-2026(Chandigarh)

Ritu Chopra v. ITO

A.Y.: 2013-14 Date of Order : 22.6.2026

Sections: 147, 251

What the Assessing Officer could not have done directly while exercising jurisdiction under sections 147/148, the CIT(A) cannot be permitted to do indirectly while exercising powers under section 251. What cannot be done directly cannot be permitted to be achieved indirectly.

Where no addition survives on the issue for which the assessment was reopened, the Revenue cannot independently assess income on issues unconnected with the reasons recorded for reopening.
Power of enhancement is only ancillary to appellate jurisdiction and cannot become an independent source of jurisdiction to assess income which the Assessing Officer himself could not have assessed in the reassessment proceedings

If Revenue’s argument that the CIT(A) can at any stage introduce a completely new source of income unrelated to the issue for which reassessment proceedings were initiated, is accepted, then it would virtually render the statutory limitations prescribed under sections 147 to 149 otiose.

FACTS

The assessment of the assessee was reopened to examine source of investment of Rs.79,20,000 made by the assessee in Panchkula Property. The Assessing Officer (AO) not being satisfied with the explanations furnished, added the said sum of Rs.79,20,000 to the total income as unexplained investment under section 69A of the Act.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) who was satisfied that the investment was made out of sale proceeds of the property at Manesar. Consequently, the CIT(A) deleted the addition of Rs.79,20,000 made by the AO but noticed that the assessee has sold the property at Manesar for a consideration of Rs.1.20 crore and no capital gains thereof has been offered for taxation. The CIT(A), exercising the powers under section 251 of the Act, enhanced the income of the assessee by computing LTCG of Rs.98,94,000.

Aggrieved by the action of the CIT(A), the assessee preferred an appeal to the Tribunal, where on behalf of the assessee it was contended that the addition made by CIT(A) is wholly without jurisdiction since the capital gain in respect of Manesar property was not a subject matter of reassessment and once the basis of reopening stood extinguished, by reason of CIT(A) having accepted the source of investment of Rs.79,20,000, the CIT(A) could not have introduced a new source of income while exercising powers under section 251 of the Act.

HELD

At the outset, the Tribunal noticed that the reassessment was initiated to verify the source of investment of Rs.79,20,000 in property at Panchkula. The reasons recorded under section 148, the notices issued during reassessment proceedings and the assessment order passed under section 147 read with section 144 clearly revealed that the entire enquiry conducted by the AO was confined to examining the source of such investment. The AO never examined the issue relating to taxability of capital gains arising from sale of the Manesar property. No enquiry was conducted by him from the standpoint of taxability of such gains and no finding whatsoever was recorded in the assessment order in this regard.

It noted that issue under consideration stands directly covered by the decisions of the Supreme Court in the cases of CIT v. Rai Bahadur Hardutroy Motilal Chamaria [66 ITR 443] and CIT v. Shapoorji Pallonji Mistry [44 ITR 891] where it has been categorically held that although the powers of the first appellate authority are wide, such powers do not extend to bringing to tax a new source of income which was not considered by the AO. Similar view has been expressed by the Full Bench of the Hon’ble Delhi High Court in the case of CIT v. Sardari Lal & Co. [251 ITR 864].

Further, the Delhi High Court in the case of Ranbaxy Laboratories Ltd. v. CIT [336 ITR 136] and the Bombay High Court in the case of CIT v. Jet Airways (I) Ltd. [331 ITR 236] have categorically held that where no addition survives on the issue for which the assessment was reopened, the Revenue cannot independently assess income on issues unconnected with the reasons recorded for reopening. The jurisdiction under section 147 is founded upon the reasons recorded and cannot be enlarged to unrelated matters once the very basis of reopening fails.

It held that –

i) the Act prescribes specific statutory conditions and time limits for reopening an assessment and bringing to tax income alleged to have escaped assessment. The reassessment jurisdiction is not an unbridled jurisdiction but is circumscribed by the limitations consciously imposed by the legislature. If the contention of the Revenue is accepted that the CIT(A) can, at any stage, introduce a completely new source of income unrelated to the issue for which reassessment proceedings were initiated, it would virtually render the statutory limitations prescribed under sections 147 to 149 otiose;

ii) such an interpretation would confer upon the Appellate Authority a power wider than that available to the AO himself. The consequence would be that although the AO may be precluded from examining a particular issue due to statutory limitations or jurisdictional restrictions, the same issue could nevertheless be brought to tax years later by the Appellate Authority under the guise of enhancement. Such a consequence could never have been intended by the Legislature;

iii) the powers conferred under section 251 are undoubtedly wide; however, they cannot be interpreted in a manner which defeats the safeguards and limitations built into the reassessment provisions. The power of enhancement is only ancillary to appellate jurisdiction and cannot become an independent source of jurisdiction to assess income which the AO himself could not have assessed in the reassessment proceedings;

iv) stated differently, what the AO could not have done directly while exercising jurisdiction under sections 147/148, the CIT(A) cannot be permitted to do indirectly while exercising powers under section 251 of the Act. The settled principle of law is that what cannot be done directly cannot be permitted to be achieved indirectly. Therefore, viewed from this angle also, the enhancement made by the CIT(A) cannot be sustained.

Following the aforesaid judicial precedents and for the reasons recorded hereinabove, the Tribunal held that the enhancement made by the CIT(A) by bringing to tax Long Term Capital Gain of Rs.98,94,000 is beyond the scope of his jurisdiction and is liable to be deleted.

Denial of claim under section 54F cannot be sustained where the case of the assessee was selected for limited scrutiny with the notice under section 143(2) stating verification of large cash deposits in savings bank account to be the reason therefor. Once a revised return is filed, the original return stands replaced. Consequently, the assessment made on the basis of original return by ignoring the revised return which reduced the total income needs to be quashed.

36. 2026(6) TMI 1392 – ITAT – Delhi

Paluri Raghavan Gopala v. ACIT

A.Y.: 2015-16 Date of Order : 24.6.2026

Sections: 139, 143

Denial of claim under section 54F cannot be sustained where the case of the assessee was selected for limited scrutiny with the notice under section 143(2) stating verification of large cash deposits in savings bank account to be the reason therefor.

Once a revised return is filed, the original return stands replaced. Consequently, the assessment made on the basis of original return by ignoring the revised return which reduced the total income needs to be quashed.

FACTS

The assessee preferred an appeal against the appellate order passed under section 250 of the Act by National Faceless Appeal Centre confirming the additions made by the Assessing Officer while assessing the total income of the assessee under section 143(3) of the Act.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal where it raised two additional grounds viz. (i) that the CIT(A) erred in confirming the addition to total income as a result of disallowance of claim under section 54F on the ground that the same was beyond the scope of limited scrutiny; and (ii) the assessment framed on the basis of original return which stood replaced by revised return is bad in law and needs to be quashed.

HELD

The Tribunal noted that the notice under section 143(2) merely mentioned cash deposit in savings bank account to be the reason for examination under limited scrutiny. The mere assertion of the Assessing Officer (AO) that issue of transfer of properties being part of limited scrutiny is not sufficient. It held that the AO travelled beyond the scope of limited scrutiny mentioned in the notice issued under section 143(2) of the Act.

As regards the second ground the Tribunal noticed that the assessee has filed a revised return wherein the total income has been reduced. The case of the assessee was that the notice under section 143(2) of the Act was issued with reference to the original return and not with reference to the revised return and that upon filing of revised return, the original return stood replaced.

The DR submitted that the revised return was filed after issuance of notice under section 143(2) of the Act and therefore no cognizance thereof was required to be taken.

The Tribunal held that the issue seems to be settled in favour of the assessee by decision of Tripura High Court in the case of Tripura State Electricity Corporation Ltd. v. PCIT [(2025) (8)TMI 1193 (Tripura HC)] wherein the High Court has held that once revised return is filed, the original return stand obliterated.

The Tribunal noted that in the case of assessee, when the assessment order was passed while re-computing taxable income on the basis of disallowance of capital gain and considering the same to be under the head of business income, the AO has taken return income of Rs. 57,71,360 which admittedly was total income in the original return dated 26.08.2015. Thus, a revised return seems to be completely ignored by the AO.

In view of the aforesaid discussion, the Tribunal allowed the additional ground raised by the assessee.

The enhanced rate of 60% under section 115BBE is applicable only from AY 2018-19. Consequently, during the AY 2017-18, in respect of the professional receipts surrendered in the course of survey, the AO could not have applied the enhanced rate.

35. 2026(6) TMI 1328 – ITAT – Agra

Vikas Chandra Mittal v. ACIT

A.Y.: 2017-18 Date of Order : 24.6.2026

Section: 115BBE

The enhanced rate of 60% under section 115BBE is applicable only from AY 2018-19. Consequently, during the AY 2017-18, in respect of the professional receipts surrendered in the course of survey, the AO could not have applied the enhanced rate.

FACTS

During the survey action conducted u/s 133A of the Act at the business premises of the assessee on 31.08.2016, the assessee surrendered Rs. 20,00,000/- out of professional receipts said to have been invested in building construction. The Assessing Officer (AO) subjected this amount to tax under the provisions of section 115BBE @ 60% as against the normal rate of tax @ 30% paid by the assessee and added to the income of the assessee.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) which was dismissed.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the Tribunal where it relied upon the order of the Madras High Court in W.P (MD) No.2078/2020 and WMP (MD) No. 1742/2020 in S.M.I.L.E Microfinance Ltd v. ACIT and also on the order dated 03.02.2025 passed by the Agra Bench in ITA No. 209/Agr/2023 (A.Y.2017-18) in the case of Jai Narayan Maheshwari v. ITO, wherein, the tribunal has referred and relied upon S.M.I.L.E Microfinance Ltd. (supra).

HELD

The Tribunal observed that the main point for determination under appeal is whether impugned amount of Rs. 20,00,000 surrendered by the assessee during the survey conducted on 31.08.2016, for A.Y. 2017-18, has to be taxed at normal rate i.e. @ 30% as against 60% invoked by the revenue u/s 115BBE of the Act.
It noted that it is an undisputed fact that assessee, during the survey conducted on 31.8.2016, relevant to A.Y. 2017-18, disclosed Rs.20,00,000/- as income from professional receipts.
The Tribunal held that in view of the order dated 19.11.2024 passed by Madras High Court in S.M.I.L.E Microfinance Ltd (supra), section 115BBE of the Act applying tax @ 60% cannot be applied in the instant case, which is related to A.Y. 2017-18 and the AO is empowered to impose only @ 30% u/s 115BBE of the Act. The Tribunal decided the issue in favour of the assessee and against the revenue.

Payment made by the assessee to its teachers qualified for deduction of tax at source under section 194J and not under section 192. Regulations, restrictions, guidelines and control exercised in regard to logistical and administrative functions of the workforce are not unique to an education organisations and it is difficult to identify any establishment that does not exercise some degree of control over the administrative and logistical functioning of the workforce, be they salaried or otherwise called as a consultant

34. TS-931-ITAT-2026(Cochin)

Brilliant Study Centre Pvt. Ltd. v. ITO, TDS

A.Y.: 2023-24 Date of Order : 16.6.2026

Sections: 192, 194J, 201, 201(1A)

Payment made by the assessee to its teachers qualified for deduction of tax at source under section 194J and not under section 192.

Regulations, restrictions, guidelines and control exercised in regard to logistical and administrative functions of the workforce are not unique to an education organisations and it is difficult to identify any establishment that does not exercise some degree of control over the administrative and logistical functioning of the workforce, be they salaried or otherwise called as a consultant

FACTS

Consequent to a survey conducted on the assessee, engaged in imparting coaching for medical and engineering aspirants, under section 133A(2A) of the Act, the Assessing Officer (AO) issued a show cause notice to the assessee seeking explanation as to why tax has been deducted at source under section 194J and not under section 192 of the Act in respect of payments made to 121 teachers.

The AO, in the show cause notice, observed that assessee has appointed 121 teachers who are treated as professionals and not employees. He also noted that they were initially treated as employees but subsequently, to meet market competition, were regarded as professionals. He observed that when teachers joined from other institutes they were treated as professionals. The teachers were appointed on the basis of verbal agreement with the management as faculty members. They were paid on hourly basis and were to take lectures for 5 to 7 hours a day. They were not allowed to take lectures in other institutes and were promised an increment of approximately 10%. The assessee responded that all these are administrative measures and that the teachers are not employees but are professionals.

The AO held that in view of the fact that the effective control, set working hours, termination procedure, policies and applicable leave rules along with the non-compete clause, monthly payment of remuneration, medical insurance and provision of transport services are all indicative that the teachers are employees. However, he admitted that each of the teachers have filed their respective returns of income and have offered income for taxation under section 44ADA of the Act which returns have been accepted by the revenue. Relying on certain judicial precedents he held that the relationship of the assessee with the teachers was an employer-employee relationship and therefore tax ought to have been deducted under section 192 and not under section 194J as has been done by the assessee. He passed an order under section 201 demanding the amount of tax short deducted and also interest thereon u/s 201(1A).

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) who upheld the action of the AO.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the Tribunal where the submissions made earlier were reiterated and reliance was placed inter alia on the decision of the Mumbai Bench of the Tribunal in ITA No. 1352/Mum/2014 and 5227/Mum/2014 dated 11.1.2017 wherein it has been held that the payment made to radio jockey on similar terms and conditions has been held to be payment for professional services liable for TDS under section 194J.

HELD

The Tribunal, at the outset, noted that the only issue involved is the section under which tax is required to be deducted at source by the assessee in respect of payments made by the assessee to the teachers engaged by it. The Tribunal noted that the teachers were referred to as ‘consultants’ and fell within the category of visiting teachers. Remuneration was a fixed amount along with a variable component and is termed as `professional fees’. They are not entitled to any statutory benefits like PF, Gratuity, Bonus, Medical reimbursement, leave encashment, etc. Working hours are stipulated and the teachers are expected to be available for extra lectures. Teachers cannot go to other coaching classes. The assessee does not exercise control, intervention or direction over the exercise of professional duties by them and the teachers are free to teach in their own way subject to curriculum. There is no indemnity between the assessee and the teachers and there is no written agreement / contract.

The Tribunal observed that the key distinction is between a contract for service and one of service and depends on several factors. It held that the regulations, restrictions, guidelines and control exercised in regard to logistical and administrative functions of the workforce are not unique to an education organisation and it is difficult to identify any establishment that does not exercise some degree of control over administrative and logistical functioning of the workforce, be they salaried employees or otherwise called as consultants.

The Tribunal found that the identical issue arose before the Madras High Court in case of Dr. Mathew Cherian vs. Assistant Commissioner of Income-tax [(2023) 450 ITR 568 (Madras)] wherein all those decisions relied upon by the revenue authorities are considered and the High Court has held that ‘Where agreement between doctors and hospital revealed that doctors were not entitled for any statutory benefits and doctors held full responsibility for their medical decisions without any interference of hospital, it could be said that intention of parties were to engage in a relationship of equals and not one of master-servant and therefore, department was not justified in issuing reassessment notice under section 148A for taxing income returned by assessees as salary income’.

Following the decision of the Madras High Court, the Tribunal held that the payment made by the assessee to the teachers engaged by it qualified for deduction of tax at source under section 194J of the Act. Accordingly, the order passed by the AO under section 201 / 201(1A) and the order of the CIT(A) confirming the action of the AO were quashed.

Earn-Outs And The Taxman (Part II): Taxation Of Contingent Consideration

The taxation of contingent consideration (earn-outs) remains legally unsettled under the Income-tax Act, 2025. Indian courts maintain that contingent amounts do not accrue in the transfer year because no enforceable right yet exists. Drawing from the UK’s Marren v. Inglis ruling, this contingent right could be treated as a separate capital asset taxed upfront at fair market value, with subsequent gains taxed upon crystallization. Alternatively, taxpayers may argue it is a non-taxable capital receipt if the acquisition cost is indeterminable, despite recent legislative amendments. Additionally, earn-outs tied to continued employment risk being recharacterized and taxed as salary. Legislative clarity is ultimately required to resolve these ambiguities.

In the first part of this article1, the discussion focused on consideration placed in escrow and the difficulties that arise under the Income-tax Act, 2025 (IT Act) where a portion of the sale consideration does not accrue to the seller in the year of transfer, but only becomes receivable later upon fulfillment of stipulated conditions. The present part turns to a related, but conceptually distinct, issue: contingent consideration.

Unlike escrow, which ordinarily involves a retained portion of an already agreed consideration being held back as a risk-allocation mechanism, contingent consideration is typically an additional amount that itself becomes payable only upon the occurrence of uncertain future events (i.e., to say the quantum of the consideration itself depends on the future event). In modern M&A transactions, such earn-out structures are frequently used to bridge valuation gaps and align post-closing incentives. Their tax treatment, however, remains doctrinally unsettled. The issues do not concern timing alone. They extend to the character of the seller’s contractual right, the possible relevance of the English decision in Marren (Inspector of Taxes) v. Inglis2, the implications of the amendment to Section 55(2)(a) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (ITA 1961) by the Finance Act, 2023, and the risk that what is labelled as contingent consideration may, in substance, be recast as salary or business income where it is linked to continued employment or post-closing services.


1 Published in BCAJ 58 (2026) 255.

2 [1980] 1 WLR 983 (HL) cited by HMRC in their capital gains manual, 
available at CG14950 -https://www.gov.uk/hmrc-internal-manuals/capital-gains manual/cg14950 (Last accessed 12th July 2026).

This distinction also assumes practical significance at the drafting stage. In a share purchase agreement (SPA), the precise manner in which the earn-out is documented may materially affect its eventual tax treatment. For instance, language that more clearly evidences that the earn-out is part of the negotiated capital value for the shares—rather than compensation for future services—may support capital gains treatment. Similarly, the formulation of the contingency, the length of the earn-out period, and the extent to which the payout is linked to post-closing employment or managerial functions may significantly influence the characterization analysis. These practical aspects are revisited later in this article.

The concept of accrual, relevance of Section 5 and its interplay was discussed in the first part of this article.3 This principle—that contingent consideration does not accrue in the year of transfer if the contingency has not materialized—was clearly articulated by the Bombay High Court in CIT v. Mrs. Hemal Raju Shete4. In this case, consideration for the sale of shares was capped at a maximum of INR 20 crores, but the actual amount payable was dependent on future profits. The Revenue sought to tax the entire INR 20 crores in the year of transfer.

The High Court rejected this view, observing that the consideration was not assured but was merely the maximum that could be received. The Court held that since the amount was contingent upon future profits, no right to claim any particular amount had vested in the assessee during the assessment year. Consequently, the amount could not be said to have accrued.

This view—that the test of accrual is whether there is a legally enforceable right to receive the amount—has been followed in subsequent decisions.5


3 BCAJ 58 (2026) 256, 257.

4 [2016] 239 Taxman 176 (Bom.).

5 Dinesh Vazirani v. PCIT [2022] 445 ITR 110 (Bom.); Modi Rubber Ltd v. DCIT [TS-81-ITAT-2024(DEL)]. 
Cf. Ajay Gulia v ACIT [2012] 209 Taxman 295 (Delhi), wherein it was held that capital gains are chargeable
 in the year of transfer and, therefore, contingent consideration was includible in the full value of consideration,
 even though it had not accrued. It was further observed that Section 48 could not curtail the operation of Section 45(1).
 These observations, particularly regarding the interplay between Sections 45(1) and 48, may warrant reconsideration. 
It is well settled that any income sought to be taxed must first fall within the ambit of Section 5. Although, 
a solitary reading of Section 67(1), a conclusion may be drawn that once the contingent consideration accrues, 
the gains are referable to and thus taxable in the year of transfer, the reasoning adopted in the judgment may nonetheless 
invite closer scrutiny given that Section 5 covers only accruals during the year. The referability condition of Section 2(108)
 would not be met in the year of transfer.

 

 

The Earn Out Enigma

THE LACUNA: TAXATION UPON CRYSTALLIZATION

The current framework of Section 5, Section 67(1)6, and Section 727 does not specifically provide for the taxability of contingent consideration in the year in which the contingency is fulfilled and the additional amount becomes payable.

More specifically, should the additional consideration be subjected to tax as capital gains, retaining the character of the original transfer, but in the year of realization? If so, would this approach conflict with Section 67(1), which mandates that capital gains be charged to tax in the year in which the transfer takes place? Alternatively, should the gain be characterized independently at the time the contingent consideration crystallizes? It may also be argued that the amount received as contingent consideration constitutes a capital receipt falling outside the ambit of Section 67(1), since there is no separate transfer of a capital asset upon the crystallization of the contingency.

At this juncture, it is apposite to acknowledge the prevailing market practice: taxpayers generally offer contingent consideration to tax in the year of its accrual, characterizing it as capital gains of the same nature as the original transfer8 (i.e., if the original gains were long term (LTCG), contingent consideration is also treated as long term, though not in the year of transfer, but in the year of accrual).

The issue, therefore, is not whether the market has adopted a pragmatic convention, but whether that convention is supported by the statute on a strict construction. In addressing this question, one may refer to Section 2(108) of the IT Act,9 which defines “total income”10 to mean the total amount of income referred to in Section 5, computed in the manner as laid down in the IT Act. Accordingly, it is not sufficient that the referability requirement under Section 5—whether by way of accrual or receipt—is satisfied. The computation of such income must also be possible in the manner contemplated by the IT Act.

The objective of the discussion that follows is to examine whether a more technically coherent framework may be derived from English jurisprudence, particularly from the decision in Marren v. Inglis, and whether an alternative argument remains available that the receipt may, in certain circumstances, not be chargeable to tax at all.


6 Section 45(1) of ITA 1961

7 Section 48 of ITA 1961


8 See Footnote 11 on BCAJ 58 (2026) 258.

9 Section 2(45) of ITA 1961.

10 On which Section 4 of the IT Act creates the charge. 
Section 4(1) provides that where any Central Act enacts that income-tax shall
 be charged for any tax year at any rate or rates, income-tax for such tax year 
shall be charged at that rate or those rates in accordance with and subject to 
the provisions of the IT Act. Section 4(2) further provides that the charge of
 income-tax under sub-section (1) shall be on the total income of the tax year of 
every person as determined in accordance with the provisions of the IT Act.

THE ENGLISH POSITION: MARREN V. INGLIS

In the absence of direct Supreme Court / High Court rulings11 on the subsequent taxability of crystallized contingent consideration, the House of Lords decision in Marren (Inspector of Taxes) v. Inglis (supra) could provide instructive guidance.

In Marren, the taxpayer, Inglis, transferred 69 shares of J. L. Inglis (Holdings) Ltd. to Industrial and Commercial Finance Corporation Ltd. (ICFC) under a share sale agreement dated 15 September, 1970. The consideration was structured in two parts: (i) For 41 shares, a fixed consideration of £1,500 per share was paid upfront; and (ii) For the remaining 28 shares, the consideration comprised an immediate cash payment of £750 per share, plus a deferred and contingent amount described as “one-half of the profit”. This deferred amount was contingent upon the flotation of the Company on a recognized stock exchange by 31 December 31, 1975. The Company was floated in November 1972, and the deferred consideration was quantified at £2,825 per share. The Revenue argued that the right to receive the future consideration was a distinct asset (a chose in action) acquired at the time of the original share transfer, and the subsequent receipt of money in 1972 was as a result disposal of that separate asset.

The House of Lords held that the right to receive contingent consideration constituted “property” and therefore an “asset” under the UK Finance Act, 1965 (1965 Act).12 Consequently, the transaction involved the acquisition of this separate asset at the time of the original sale. When the contingency materialized and funds were received, it constituted a disposal of this right, attracting capital gains tax.13 The Court rejected the argument that the receipt was merely the realization of a debt, noting that a contingent right to an unascertainable sum is not a debt until crystallized.14

Lord Fraser noted that the correct approach was to value the contingent right (the chose in action) as of the date of the original transfer and tax that value as part of the initial consideration. Any subsequent gain upon the realization of that right would be a separate taxable event.15


11 See also discussion on Sunil’s decision (infra).

12 The House of Lords referred to Section 22(1) of the 1965 Act which defined asset as 
“All forms of property shall be assets for the purposes of this Part of this Act... 
including— (a) options, debts and incorporeal property generally...”. 
One may note the similarities between this definition and the definition of 
capital asset under Section 2(22) of the IT Act [erstwhile Section 2(14)].

13 The House of Lords referred to Section 22(3) which provided that there is 
disposal of assets by their owner where any capital sum is derived from assets 
notwithstanding that no asset is acquired by the person paying the capital sum. 
One may draw parallels to the concept of extinguishment of rights in the capital asset
 under Section 2(109)(b) of the IT Act [erstwhile Section 2(47)(ii)].

14 For context, Para 11(1) of Schedule 7 of the 1965 Act provided that where a person incurs a debt to another
... no chargeable gain shall accrue to that (that is the original) creditor... on a disposal of the debt...” 
It was held that no debt existed at the time of the initial transfer because a contingent right to an 
unascertainable sum could not be regarded as a debt. When the contingency materialized, while a debt
 may then have arisen, the sum received was “derived from” the asset (the chose in action) that crystallized, 
and was chargeable on that basis. Full text of the 1965 Act can be accessed at https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1965/25/contents/enacted, 
Part III therein dealt with capital gains (Last accessed 12th July 2026).

15 Marren v. Inglis (supra), at p. 988. Basis the question raised before the House of Lords 
(as noted on p. 984 and 985), these observations should be regarded as an obiter dictum and not the ratio decidendi.

APPLICABILITY TO INDIA

Given the similarities between the 1965 Act and the IT Act regarding the definitions of “capital asset” and “transfer”, the ratio in Marren v. Inglis may have significant persuasive value in India.16 If this principle is applied, the “right to receive” contingent consideration should be treated as a separate capital asset distinct from the shares originally transferred.


16 Sampath Iyengar’s Law of Income Tax (13th Ed., Vol. 1, p. 207) notes 
“English statutes may appear superficially to be similar but on deeper scrutiny may reveal differences... 
In some matters, however... the Indian law is in no way different from the English law and 
English decisions can be of assistance in interpretation... English decisions are continued 
to be cited and even followed in Indian Law.” Recently, the Supreme Court, in Jindal Equipment 
Leasing Consultancy Service Ltd v. CIT [2026] 484 ITR 641 (SC), relied on an English precedent
 while examining the taxability of shares received in an amalgamated company in exchange for shares 
held as stock-in-trade in the amalgamating company. In this context, the Court referred to
 Royal Insurance Co Ltd v Stephen [1928] 14 TC 22 (KB), which addressed a comparable issue (see para 19 on p.680).

PROPOSED APPROACH FOR TAXATION

A technically sustainable approach under the IT Act, aligned with Marren v. Inglis, is as follows:

1. Year of Transfer: The full value of consideration should include the initial cash consideration, the deferred consideration (at full value), and the Fair Market Value (FMV) of the contingent right (the separate asset);

2. Valuation: The FMV of the contingent right can be determined using Scenario-Based Methods (for simple structures) or Option Pricing Models such as Black–Scholes (for complex, non-linear structures).17 If the FMV is indeterminable, Section 8018 of the IT Act may be invoked to deem the FMV of the transferred shares as the full value of consideration. As no specific rules are prescribed for the determination of FMV under Section 80, the term must be understood in the context of Section 2(44)19 of the IT Act—i.e., the price that the asset would ordinarily fetch if sold in the open market on the relevant date. In the absence of specific statutory guidance under the IT Act, the valuation could be determined based on a reasonably acceptable date (such as within 180 days prior to the date of transfer, drawing parallels from FEMA pricing guidelines and Rule 15(8)(l) of the Income-tax Rules, 2026)20. Furthermore, the method of valuation should align with generally accepted valuation principles, and reliance may be placed on the valuation standards issued by the ICAI;

• The valuation of the contingent right for the purposes of Section 72, or the underlying shares for the purposes of Section 80, may be carried out by a Chartered Accountant, a Registered Valuer, or a Merchant Banker. It is pertinent to note that, in both instances, there is no strict statutory prescription regarding the specific method, the exact valuation date, or the designated professional required to conduct the valuation21;

• Lord Fraser in Marren (supra)22 also observed that there is a suggestion that it may be impossible to assess the value of the right and nothing that he said was intended to indicate any opinion on the valuation of the right as at the date of transfer of shares; and

3. Year of Crystallization: When the contingency is met and money is received, capital gains should be computed as the difference between the amount received and the cost of acquisition of the right (i.e., the FMV taxed in the year of transfer).

This approach resolves the difficulty of taxing an unknown future sum in the year of transfer while ensuring the income does not escape the tax net. It also addresses the characterization of the gain. If the right is held for more than 24 months before the contingency materializes, the subsequent gain should be long term; otherwise, it is short term.


17 See Grant Thornton, Valuation of Complex Financial Instruments. 
https://www.grantthornton.in/globalassets/1.-member firms/india/assets /pdfs/valuation_and_accounting_complex_fin_instruments.pdf
 (Last accessed on 12th July 2026).

18 Section 50D of ITA 1961.

19 Section 2(22B) of ITA 1961.

20 Rule 3(8) of the Income-tax Rules, 1962.

21 It may not be out of context to quote Viscount Simon from Gold Coast 
Selection Trust Ltd v Humphrey (Inspector of Taxes) [1949] 17 ITR(Supp.) 19 (HL) 
wherein he observed that “valuation is an art, not an exact science. Mathematical 
certainty is not demanded, nor indeed it is possible”. Valuation thus is a subjective issue which cannot be quantified or narrowed down.

22 On p. 988(E).

AN ALTERNATIVE PERSPECTIVE: COULD CONTINGENT CONSIDERATION BE A CAPITAL RECEIPT NOT CHARGEABLE TO TAX?

For the sake of brevity, the discussion around definition of income, requirement of strict construction, sine qua non for Section 67(1) and the statutory lacunae in the IT Act are not discussed in this article.23 These arguments could very well apply even in the context of contingent consideration. The discussion that follows proceeds in the alternative, assuming that the dictum of the House of Lords in Marren v. Inglis (supra) were to apply.

Notwithstanding the conceptual attractiveness of Marren, a substantial line of argument remains available that contingent consideration may, in some cases, constitute a capital receipt not chargeable to tax. This argument may be approached in stages.


23 See BCAJ 58(2026) 258, 259, 260 and 261 for discussion on the same.

CHARACTERIZATION OF THE CONTRACTUAL RIGHT AS A “CAPITAL ASSET”

Section 2(22) of the IT Act defines a capital asset to mean “property of any kind held by an assessee.” The expression “property” is not defined in the IT Act and must, therefore, be understood in its ordinary legal sense and in light of judicial authority. The term is one of the widest amplitude. It is commonly understood as a thing or aggregate of rights belonging to a person, and is often described as a “bundle of rights”.24 Property is nomen generalissimum, and extends to every species of valuable right and interest including real and personal property, easements, franchises, and other incorporeal hereditaments.25 Judicially too, the Supreme Court in CWT v. Ahmed G. Arif26 recognized that “property” is a term of the widest import and, subject to contextual limitations, signifies every possible interest which a person can clearly hold or enjoy.

At first principle, therefore, a right under an agreement to receive additional money in future may readily answer the description of “property”. The real difficulty lies not in the width of the word “property”, but in determining whether an earn-out right, while still contingent and inchoate, is sufficiently vested in law to qualify as a distinct capital asset at the time of the original transfer. This question assumes significance because, if the right itself constitutes a separate capital asset, the subsequent receipt upon crystallization may be analyzed as consideration derived from, or on extinguishment of, that asset rather than merely as a delayed fragment of the original sale price.27

In this regard, the Bombay High Court’s reasoning in CIT v. Abbasbhoy A. Dehgamwalla is relevant. The Court held, in the context of Section 2(14) of the ITA 1961, that an item incapable of transfer under Section 6 of the Transfer of Property Act, 1882 (TOPA) may fall outside the conception of a capital asset.28 Section 6(e) of the TOPA specifically prohibits the transfer of a “mere right to sue”. Drawing from this reasoning, it may be argued that a purely contingent and unenforceable right to receive earn-out consideration, prior to fulfilment of the stipulated conditions, is analogous to a right that lacks present transferability and therefore does not yet attain the status of a capital asset.

Certain allied concepts help illustrate the point. A legacy before the death of the testator (spes successionis), an unvested employee stock option, or a mere right to sue all involve a form of expectation or contingent entitlement; yet these are not treated as capital assets for the lack of transferability, no present enforceable right or on account of the restriction contained in TOPA. On this line of reasoning, one may contend that, until the contingency is satisfied, the seller has no more than a contractual expectancy and not “property” in the capital asset sense. A similar argument may also be sought to be drawn, by analogy, from the escrow discussion—namely, that some contractual stipulations may be better viewed as part of the mechanics of the bargain rather than as giving rise to an independent asset in the hands of the seller.29

That said, this argument faces substantial difficulty in light of Marren v. Inglis. The House of Lords unanimously treated the seller’s right under the agreement to receive contingent consideration as a distinct chose in action and therefore as “property”. Lord Fraser expressly observed that incorporeal rights to money’s worth can constitute property and further noted that such rights could, in principle, be assigned or otherwise disposed of.30 Given the breadth of the expression “property of any kind” in Section 2(22), and absent any express statutory exclusion, the reasoning in Marren offers a strong basis to regard the earn-out right itself as a separate capital asset, notwithstanding that the amount receivable is uncertain and conditional.

In the author’s view, therefore, while the transferability objection provides an argument at the inception stage, it is ultimately difficult—especially after Marren and the wide judicial understanding of “property”—to maintain that the earn-out right is merely a contractual promise and not an asset at all.31 The utility of this discussion lies elsewhere. It helps frame the argument that, until crystallization, the right may not appropriately be brought to tax upfront as part of the full value of consideration; and, more importantly, it provides a conceptual basis for examining whether, upon a later waiver, cancellation, or mutual surrender of that right (prior to crystallization), there is an extinguishment of rights in a capital asset capable of having independent tax consequences.32 Once the contingency is fulfilled, the right ceases to be inchoate; at that stage, it much more clearly answers the description of “property”, and the argument that no capital asset exists becomes materially harder to sustain.


24  Concise Oxford English Dictionary, 12th edition, p. 1150, Black’s Law Dictionary, 12th Edition, p. 1472.

25 Advanced Law Lexicon by P. Ramanatha Aiyar, Seventh Edition, Volume 3, pp. 5085-5097.

26 [1970] 76 ITR 471 (SC).

27 See discussion on the possible treatment of contingent consideration upon crystallization 
and the relevance of analyzing the right itself as a distinct asset in Marren v. Inglis (supra).

28 CIT v. Abbasbhoy A. Dehgamwalla [1992] 195 ITR 28 (Bom.).

29 See BCAJ 58(2026) 259, 260 where this was discussed.

30 Marren v Inglis (supra) at p. 988.

31 See paragraph 4 of Sunil’s decision (infra). 
This records the reasoning of the CIT(A) as part of the factual background 
leading up to the lis before the Court. In the author’s view, however, 
the treatment of the asset as a short-term capital asset, without granting the
 benefit of the holding period from the date of receipt of such right, may not be
 correct and is not free from doubt. In this regard, one may refer to the observations
 of Bangalore ITAT in N.R. Ravikrishnan v ACIT [2018] 68 ITR(T) 457 (paras 4.4.1-4.4.4).

32 See Section 2(109)(b) of the IT Act [corresponding to Section 2(47)(ii) of the ITA 1961],
 which includes the extinguishment of rights in a capital asset within the ambit of “transfer”.

EXCLUSION FROM THE “FULL VALUE OF CONSIDERATION” UPFRONT

Foregoing analysis gives a robust defense for taxpayers to argue that the FMV of the right to receive contingent consideration should not be included in the full value of consideration accruing or received as a result of the initial transfer of shares or business. Since the contractual right is contingent and unenforceable on the date of the primary transfer, treating it as “consideration” would amount to taxing notional income—income that has neither accrued to nor been received by the taxpayer. This could assist the taxpayer in not paying taxes on the FMV of the right in the year of transfer and overcome the obiter dictum of Lord Fraser.33 It is reiterated that the issue for consideration before the House of Lords was the taxability in the year of receipt of contingent consideration and not the year of transfer of shares. Hence, the observation of Lord Fraser should be understood in that context.


33 Marren v Inglis (supra) at p. 988.

THE “TRANSFER” ELEMENT AND THE TRANSFER OF PROPERTY ACT

The next aspect for consideration is whether the assessee “transfers” any capital asset upon the receipt of the contingent consideration. Section 2(109) of the IT Act defines “transfer” in the widest possible manner, explicitly including the “extinguishment of any rights therein.” Accordingly, the Revenue may argue that the assessee realizes the contingent consideration as a direct result of the extinguishment of their contractual right under the agreement.

MUTUAL EXTINGUISHMENT OF RIGHTS AND GAAR IMPLICATIONS

The practical benefit of the above discussion (with regard to requirement of transferability element for existence of a capital asset) may be evaluated in instances where a taxpayer mutually agrees with the buyer to give up or cancel their right to receive the contingent consideration prior to the achievement of the performance conditions.

However, a strong note of caution is warranted: this mechanism should not be utilized as a colourable device to avoid tax where there is no genuine commercial rationale for cancelling the right. In such scenarios, the tax authorities are highly likely to invoke the General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAAR) under Chapter XI of the IT Act to scrutinize the transaction. The Revenue may recharacterize the purported capital receipt as a revenue receipt and contend that the income should be taxed as “Income from Other Sources” (IFOS) under Section 92(1) of the IT Act34, thereby attracting the highest applicable tax rates and denying the benefit of lower capital gains rates. It is pertinent to note that substantive jurisprudence on GAAR recharacterization remains nascent; currently, the reported cases stem from writ petitions filed against the directions of the Approving Panel rather than final appellate rulings on the merits of recharacterization.35


34 Section 56(1) of ITA 1961.

35 See Ayodhya Rami Reddy Alla v. PCIT [2024] 466 ITR 497 (Telangana) and Anvida Bandi v. DCIT [2025] 177 taxmann.com 726 (Telangana)
 on the issue of bonus stripping and the applicability of GAAR (prior to the amendment to Section 94(8) of the ITA 1961, 
extending its scope to shares). Subject to one factual distinction—the shares were listed in the latter case—the decisions are diametrically opposed.
 While the former held that GAAR was applicable, the latter ruled that GAAR did not apply.
 Further, in Anvida Bandi, the Court does not appear to have been informed of the 2019 bonus issue, 
as the judgment contains no discussion of that fact. It will be interesting to see whether the Court provides
 an exposition on GAAR and its applicability in Hinduja Global Solutions Limited v. PCIT [WP No. 4867 of 2025 (Bom.)].

FAILURE OF THE COMPUTATION MECHANISM: COST OF ACQUISITION AND THE FINANCE ACT, 2023 AMENDMENT

The final, and perhaps most critical, argument against the taxability of contingent consideration rests on the inability to determine the cost of acquisition. It is crucial to note that the cost of acquisition of this contractual right is not nil. The taxpayer surely incurs a cost to acquire this right (though inchoate / contingent as on the date of transfer, and later getting vested on satisfaction of the conditions / veracity of the promises made), which may include a commercial discount on the initial upfront consideration (accepting a price lower than the FMV of the shares / business on the date of transfer) or the ongoing efforts of the shareholder in assisting the company to achieve the performance thresholds. Therefore, the contractual right is acquired for a cost, but such cost is inherently incapable of precise mathematical determination.

Prior to the amendment of Section 55(2)(a) by the Finance Act, 2023, taxpayers could successfully rely on the Supreme Court judgment in B.C. Srinivasa Setty.36 The Court held that the charging section (Section 45 of ITA 1961) and the computation section (Section 48 of ITA 1961) constitute an integrated code. If the cost of acquisition cannot be determined, the computation mechanism fails and, consequently, the charge under Section 67(1) must also fail.

To counter this, specific amendments were made by successive Finance Acts to gradually expand the scope of assets specified in Section 55(2)(a) of the ITA 1961, with the recent amendment being made by the Finance Act, 2023 to deem the cost of acquisition even in case of “other intangibles” or “other rights”. The amended provision reads as follows:37

“2) For the purposes of sections 48 and 49, ‘cost of acquisition’,-

(a) in relation to a capital asset, being goodwill of a business or profession, or a trade mark or brand name associated with a business or profession, or any other intangible asset or right to manufacture, produce or process any article or thing, or right to carry on any business or profession, or tenancy rights, or stage carriage permits, or loom hours, or any other right.”
(emphasis supplied)

To determine if the position discussed above would still continue post the Finance Act, 2023 amendment, it would be apposite to understand the connotation of the words “any other intangible asset” or “any other right”. The denotation of ‘intangible asset’ and ‘right’ is as under:

A. Intangible asset

Not constituting or represented by a physical object and not precisely measurable in value.38

Any non-physical asset or resource that can be amortized or converted to cash, such as patents, goodwill, and computer programs, or a right to something, such as services paid for in advance. 39

An item of value whose true worth is hard or almost impossible to determine, such as goodwill, reputation, patents and so on.40

B. Right

A moral or legal entitlement to have or do something. 41

The term “right”, in a civil society, is defined to mean that which a man is entitled to have or to do, or to receive from others, within the limits prescribed by law. ‘Right’ is an interest recognized and protected by moral or legal rules. Such right may be a vested right or accrued right or an acquired right. The nature of such right would depend upon and also vary from statute to statute.42

Something that is due to a person by just claim, legal guarantee, or moral principle. A legally enforceable claim that another will do or will not do a given act; a recognized and protected interest the violation of which is wrong. The interest, claim, or ownership that one has in tangible or intangible property. 43

The dictionary meaning of the term “intangible asset” and “right” is sufficiently broad enough to cover the rights under the SPA / Business Transfer Agreement (BTA) (as held in Marren v Inglis) and, accordingly, the cost may be deemed to be nil under Section 90(3) of the IT Act44, thereby making the computation mechanism workable.

However, the terms, viewed in context, may assist in discerning that their scope could be interpreted ejusdem generis. Essentially, the terms “any other intangible asset” and “any other right” should be understood based on the terms that precede them.

The rule of ejusdem generis has been explained thus:45 when particular words pertaining to a class, category or genus are followed by general words, the general words are construed as limited to things of the same kind as those specified. This rule, known as the rule of ejusdem generis, reflects an attempt to reconcile incompatibility between the specific and general words in view of the other rules of interpretation: that all words in a statute are to be given effect if possible, that a statute is to be construed as a whole, and that no words in a statute are presumed to be superfluous.

The rule applies when (1) the statute contains an enumeration of specific words; (2) the subjects of enumeration constitute a class or category; (3) that class or category is not exhausted by the enumeration; (4) the general terms follow the enumeration; and (5) there is no indication of a different legislative intent. If the subjects of enumeration belong to a broad-based genus as also to a narrower genus, there is no principle that the general words should be confined to the narrower genus.

The rule of ejusdem generis dictates that where general words follow specific words in a statute, the general words must be construed as taking their meaning and colour from the specific words preceding them. The specific assets listed in Section 90(3)—goodwill, trademarks, brand name, right to manufacture, tenancy rights, stage carriage permits, loom hours—are all distinct, commercial, business-related intangible assets or rights (except tenancy, which may be acquired for non-business purposes also). Tenancy rights are also acquired pursuant to a rental agreement / lease agreement, which has an element of continuity. A mere contractual right to receive contingent consideration does not share the same genus or commercial character as the specified business intangibles or rights. Therefore, the phrase “any other intangible asset” and “any other right” should be read down to exclude such contractual rights. If this interpretation holds, the cost of acquisition remains indeterminable (and not statutorily nil), meaning the B.C. Srinivasa Setty principle continues to apply, rendering the contingent consideration not chargeable to capital gains tax.

The author wishes to acknowledge that two views are reasonably possible here.46 The interpretation of the above terms may be contended to be wide by applying the mischief rule of interpretation as propounded by Lord Coke in Heydon’s case.47 The Memorandum explaining the provisions of the Finance Bill, 2023 provides as follows:48

“The existing provisions of the section 55 of the Act, inter alia, defines the ‘cost of any improvement’ and ‘cost of acquisition’ for the purposes of computing capital gains. However, there are certain assets like intangible assets or any sort of right for which no consideration has been paid for acquisition. The cost of acquisition of such assets is not clearly defined as ‘nil’ in the present provision. This has led to many legal disputes and the courts have held that for taxability under capital gains there has to be a definite cost of acquisition or it should be deemed to be nil under the Act. Since there is no specific provision which states that the cost of such assets is nil, the chargeability of capital gains from transfer of such assets has not found favour with the Courts.”

(emphasis supplied)

While the usage of “any other right” after specified rights and similarly “any other intangible asset” after specified intangible assets may, if the memorandum, CBDT circular explaining the amendment and the mischief rule were not considered, have reasonably invited the application of the rule of ejusdem generis to determine the scope of the amendment, the legislative intent would have been put beyond doubt if the words “any other right whatsoever” or “any sort of right” had been used in the statute itself rather than such words being employed only in the memorandum and circular explaining the amendment.

However, the Explanatory Memorandum to the Finance Bill, 2023 specifically uses the words “any sort of right” while explaining the legislative intent underlying the introduction of the expression “any other right” in the aforesaid provisions. Thus, the introduction of “any other right” in context may be understood as expressly meant to widen the concept and, therefore, suggests a somewhat contrary intention to the application of the ejusdem generis rule. If this interpretation were to hold good, the amendment would be understood broadly and, hence, the cost of acquisition of the right to receive contingent consideration would be deemed to be nil and capital gains tax would be payable as per the dictum of Marren v Inglis (supra).

For the sake of completeness, if the receipt of contingent consideration escapes the charge of capital gains tax (for the reasons discussed above), the Revenue may attempt to tax such receipts under the residuary head, “Income from Other Sources”. This approach should not be tenable. For the sake of brevity, the reasons supporting this conclusion are not elaborated upon in this section, as they have already been discussed in detail in the first part of this article.49 Additionally, it may be contended that the contingent sum received is a composite payment for the satisfaction and extinguishment of the seller’s rights under the contract, which constitutes consideration for the purposes of Section 92(2)(m).50

To conclude on this branch, the non-taxability position primarily hinges upon the applicability of the ratio of Marren v Inglis (supra) in India. If the ‘right to receive contingent consideration’ is not considered a capital asset, the receipts thereunder would be capital receipts not liable to tax in the absence of a specific fiction to tax the same. However, if it is considered a distinct capital asset, one may have to argue on the non-applicability of Section 90(3) to these rights in order to defend the non-taxability position. It will have to be seen how the Courts would address this line of argument when raised in future.

Given the above discussion, it is pertinent to draw attention to the recent judgment of the Bombay High Court in Sunil Pran Sikand, on an issue akin to contingent consideration.51 In Sunil, the assessee along with his two sons had entered into a development agreement in 1992, under which the property was agreed to be developed by the builder. On the same date, the developer also issued a letter of commitment stating that, if it was able to obtain and load additional transferable development rights (TDR) on the property, it would pay further compensation to the assessee at the agreed rate. During the course of development, the builder obtained TDRs and paid the additional consideration in the previous year relevant to AY 1997-98. Such sums were offered to tax as LTCG in AY 1997-98.

The AO rejected this position and taxed the amount as IFOS on the basis that the original property had already been transferred under the 1992 development agreement and, therefore, no capital asset belonging to the assessee existed when the additional sum was received. In appeal, the Commissioner (Appeals), while substantially agreeing with the Assessing Officer’s reasoning, held that the amount was taxable instead as short-term capital gains, on the footing that the enforceable right arose only when the contingency materialized. The Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (ITAT), however, restored the characterization as income from other sources, inter alia, on the basis that the commitment letter was unilateral and could not be read as part of the original development agreement.

The lis before the High Court was threefold: (i) whether the ITAT was justified in holding that, upon receipt of consideration under the development agreement, the assessee had ceased to be the owner of the property; (ii) without prejudice, whether the additional compensation was a capital receipt not liable to tax; and (iii) whether, if no cost had been incurred to acquire the additional FSI / TDR-related entitlement, the amount could at all be brought to tax, essentially on the applicability of the principle in B.C. Srinivasa Setty. The Court held that the development agreement and the letter of commitment, both dated 29 September 1992, ought to be read as one composite arrangement and that the additional amount paid upon loading of TDR was to be regarded as payment under the development agreement itself. Accordingly, the Court held that the ITAT was not correct in treating the sum as IFOS and accepted the assessee’s stand that the amount was taxable as LTCG in the year of receipt. Further, in view of the Court’s answer to question (i), the assessee did not press question nos. (ii) and (iii) pertaining to the capital receipt plea and the no-cost-of-acquisition argument.52

Essentially, it should be borne in mind that the Court never had an occasion to analyze the plea that the additional compensation constituted a capital receipt not chargeable to tax, since that contention was expressly not pressed and the fact that “A case is only an authority for what it actually decides and not what may come to follow logically from it”.53 Equally, one may still contend that the taxability of such additional compensation as LTCG in the year of receipt is not free from difficulty having regard to the definition of “total income” under section 2(108). As discussed in the first part of this article, such consideration could not have been included in the full value of consideration in the year of transfer because, at that stage, the right to receive the same had not accrued and the referability requirement under section 5 was therefore not satisfied. Conversely, in the year of accrual or receipt, the difficulty arises from the charging provision itself, namely section 67(1), under which capital gains are taxable only in the year in which the transfer of the capital asset takes place. Where, as the Court itself recognized, there is no separate transfer of a distinct capital asset at the stage of receipt of the additional amount, the computation in the manner laid down in the IT Act also becomes problematic. In that sense, one limb fails in the year of transfer for want of accrual, while the other fails in the year of receipt for want of a transfer in that year. This statutory lacuna was discussed in detail in the first part of the article and is not reproduced here for the sake of brevity.54 Reference is also drawn to the observations made in Decoding Section 5 (pp. 151-152), wherein it is noted that:

“The same [contingent consideration] cannot be taxed under Section 45(1) as no transfer is taking place in the year of receipt. It is not possible to revisit the taxation for the year of transfer as this part of the consideration did not accrue at all in the year of transfer. Therefore, there appears to be a legislative gap in dealing with this type of situation.”


36 CIT v B.C. Srinivasa Setty [1981] 128 ITR 294 (SC).

37 Section 90(3) of the IT Act corresponds to Section 55(2)(a) of ITA 1961.

38 Concise Oxford English Dictionary, 12th edition, p. 737.

39 Black’s Law Dictionary, 12th Edition, p. 144.

40 Advanced Law Lexicon by P. Ramanatha Aiyar, Seventh Edition, Volume 2, pp. 3248-3249.

41 Concise Oxford English Dictionary, 12th edition, p. 1238.

42 Advanced Law Lexicon by P. Ramanatha Aiyar, Seventh Edition, Volume 4, pp. 5601-5603.

43 Black’s Law Dictionary, 12th Edition, p. 1584.

46 “Such is the character of human language, 
that no word conveys to the mind, in all situations, 
one single definite idea…” per CJ Marshall in McCulloch v Maryland, 17 U.S. (4 Wheat.) 316, 414 (1819).

47 [1584] 76 ER 637. For the sure and true interpretation of all statutes in general, 
be they penal or beneficial, restrictive or enlarging of the common law, four things are to be discerned and considered, 
(a) what was the common law before the making of the Act (in context of statutes, understood as the law before the amendment), 
(b) what was the mischief and defect for which the common law (in context of statutes, understood as the pre-amended law) did not provide, 
(c) what remedy Parliament hath resolved and appointed to cure the disease of the Commonwealth (in context of statutes, understood as the pre-amended law),
 and (d) the true reason of the remedy.

48 Also see Circular 1/2024 explaining the amendments carried out by Finance Act, 2023, p. 78.

49 See BCAJ 58(2026) 261, 262.

50 Section 56(2)(x) of ITA 1961.

51 Sunil Pran Sikand v ACIT [2024] 466 ITR 770 (Bom), 
the case pertained to AY 1997-98 and appeal was admitted by the Court on 13th June 2006 
against the ITAT order dated 20th September 2002. The appellant herein was the son of the deceased assessee.

52 Ibid. para 9.

53 See Lord Halsbury LC, in Quinn v Leathem [1901] AC 495, 
wherein he inter alia observed that a case is only an authority for what it actually decides and 
that it cannot be quoted for a proposition that may seem to follow logically from it, 
quoted and endorsed by Justice Katju in Sarva Shramik Sanghatana (KV) Mumbai v State of Maharashtra [2008] 1 SCC 494 (SC) (para 15);
 Ambica Quarry Works v State of Gujarat & Others [1987] 1 SCC 213 (para 18); See also CIT v Sun Engineering Works P Ltd [1992] 198 ITR 297 (SC) 
and CIT v Thana Electricity Supply Ltd [1994] 206 ITR 727 (Bombay).

54 See BCAJ 58(2026) 258-261.

NATURE OF INCOME – UNDER WHAT HEAD WOULD THE CONTINGENT CONSIDERATION BE TAXED

Contingent consideration is an obligation on the acquirer to transfer additional assets or equity interests to the former owners of an acquiree if specified future events occur or conditions are met. Common conditions or triggers for such payments include:

  • Financial Performance: Achieving specified performance targets, such as exceeding a certain level of revenue, earnings, or EBITDA within a set period. [akin to the facts of Hemal Raju (supra)];
  • Operational Milestones: Reaching a specific milestone on a research and development project or obtaining regulatory approvals for a product;
  • Share Price Targets: Reaching a specified share price for the acquirer’s stock. [akin to the facts of Inglis (supra)]; or
  • Continuing Employment: Payments linked to the continued employment of selling shareholders who become key employee’s post-acquisition.

While the first three categories generally retain the character of capital receipts55, the fourth category—payments linked to continued employment—exposes the transaction to characterization risks. In practice, particularly involving individual promoters, share purchase agreements often stipulate cumulative conditions: the satisfaction of financial metrics (e.g., achieving ‘X’ EBITDA or a specific share price) coupled with a requirement for continued employment for a defined tenure (Y’ years). In such hybrid scenarios, a critical question arises: should the contingent consideration be regarded as capital receipts (may be taxable as capital gains) or as compensation for services rendered (salary)?56

In the absence of a specific test under the IT Act, the principles laid down in Ind AS 103 (Business Combinations) could be referred to for distinguishing between “purchase consideration” and “remuneration for post-combination services”.57 The distinction turns on the substance of the arrangement. The primary litmus test is the linkage to service: if the contingent payment is automatically forfeited upon termination of employment, it is likely to be treated as remuneration. Conversely, if the payment is unaffected by the cessation of employment, it supports the characterization as additional purchase consideration. Other determinative factors include the reasonableness of the employee’s standalone salary, the proportionality of payments relative to shareholding, and the specific formula used for valuation.58

These propositions are equally applicable under the IT Act. The factors delineated in Ind AS 103 are fundamentally commercial in nature and grounded in the doctrine of substance over form. Accordingly, they would serve as a critical guide in ascertaining the true character of the payment and determining the specific head of income to which it is inextricably connected.

In this regard, reference may be made to the decision of the Madras High Court in Anurag Jain59 and the Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR) ruling in Moody’s Analytics.60 The judgment in Anurag Jain should not be treated as laying down a blanket principle applicable to all situations where a promoter or individual shareholder receives contingent consideration while also being required to continue in employment with the company for a specified period. The mere existence of a continued employment condition should not, by itself, operate as an embargo against characterizing contingent payments as consideration for the transfer of assets. Instead, a holistic evaluation of the surrounding facts and commercial arrangements is warranted. One may refer to Ind AS 103 for the relevant factors, as discussed above.

Notably, such a comprehensive analysis appears to be absent in both the AAR ruling and the decision of the Madras High Court. Considerable emphasis was placed on the forfeiture or restitution of contingent consideration upon termination for cause. However, even where “cause” encompassed failure to achieve specified EBITDA thresholds, the contingent consideration was not, in fact, returnable in such circumstances. This nuance does not appear to have received adequate judicial attention.


55 Taxability as capital gains depending on the discussion undertaken above.

56 It may also be regarded as business income, in the absence of an employer-employee relationship.

57 This distinction is critical for accounting purposes: 
remuneration is recognized as a compensation expense in the post-combination period,
 whereas consideration is measured at its fair value on the acquisition date and forms part of the initial calculation of goodwill.

58 In this regard one may refer to Appendix B of Ind AS 103. Para B54 and Para B55 provide detailed guidance in this regard. 
Broadly, factors such as forfeiture on termination, alignment with employment period, below-market salary, 
disproportionate payouts, or profit-sharing style formulas point toward remuneration, while valuation-linked formulas and 
fair market compensation more strongly support treatment as additional consideration.

59 Anurag Jain v. AAR [2009] 308 ITR 302 (Madras), arising from an AAR order (277 ITR 1).

60 Moody’s Analytics Inc., USA, In re [2012] 348 ITR 205 (AAR).

A SHORT PRACTITIONER’S PERSPECTIVE

To preserve capital gains treatment, earn-out provisions should be drafted as an integral part of the negotiated share consideration, with a consistent commercial narrative across the SPA, employment documents, valuation materials, board papers, and correspondence. Post-closing compensation for sellers who remain involved in the business should be separately documented and benchmarked at arm’s length, and the earn-out should ideally be linked to objective business or valuation metrics rather than continued employment or service-based conditions; drafting should also avoid language suggesting bonus, incentive, or reward, and instead clearly state that the earn-out is part of the share purchase price and not remuneration for services, the following protective clause may be incorporated into the SPA:

DRAFT CLAUSE FOR SPA

“The Parties mutually acknowledge and agree that the Contingent Consideration (as defined herein) payable to the Sellers under Clause [Insert Clause Number] constitutes an integral component of the Purchase Price for the transfer of the Sale Shares and represents the deferred capital value of the Company negotiated between the Parties.

It is expressly clarified that the Contingent Consideration is strictly linked to the achievement of the Financial Milestones and does not, in any manner, constitute remuneration, compensation, bonus, or reward for any past, present, or future employment, consultancy, or other services rendered or to be rendered by the Sellers (or their affiliates) to the Acquirer, the Company, or any of their respective affiliates.

The Parties further acknowledge that any post-closing services provided by the Sellers to the Company shall be governed exclusively by a separate [Employment Agreement / Consultancy Agreement] dated [Insert Date], under which the Sellers shall be independently compensated at an arm’s-length fair market value, which is entirely distinct from and independent of the Sellers’ entitlement to receive the Contingent Consideration under this Agreement.”

APPLICABILITY OF SECTION 92(2)(M)

Section 92(2)(m)(iii)(B) of the IT Act provides that where a person receives any specified property (such as shares) for a consideration that is less than its FMV, the difference between such FMV and the consideration paid is taxable as income from other sources in the hands of the recipient (buyer).

In the context of contingent consideration, a question arises: what constitutes the “consideration” paid by the buyer? Is it merely the upfront cash, or does it include the obligation to pay future contingent amounts?

The term “consideration” is not defined under the IT Act and must be understood in its contextual sense. Section 2(d) of the Indian Contract Act, 187261 defines consideration to include past, executed, and executory consideration. For the purposes of Section 92(2)(m), consideration would ordinarily include the initial purchase consideration and deferred consideration (being executory consideration) at their full value.

However, a promise to pay contingent consideration is conditional and cannot be equated with executory consideration simpliciter. Given the uncertainty, the FMV of the obligation to pay (or the corresponding right to receive, in the hands of the seller) should be included in determining the value of consideration.

In essence, the full value of consideration accruing to the transferor may be regarded as the consideration due from the transferee. This aggregate value (Upfront + Deferred + FMV of Contingent Obligation) should be benchmarked against the FMV of the shares received to determine if any deemed income arises under Section 92(2)(m).


61 Section 2(d) reads: “When, at the desire of the promisor,
 the promisee or any other person has done or abstained from doing or does or abstains from doing, 
or promises to do or the abstain from doing something, such an act or abstinence or promise is called a consideration for the promise”.

OBLIGATION TO WITHHOLD TAXES

Section 393(2), Table: Sl. No.1762 casts an obligation on any person responsible for paying to a non-resident any sum chargeable to tax under the IT Act to withhold tax at the rates in force at the time of credit of such income to the account of the payee or at the time of payment thereof, whichever is earlier.

For initial and deferred consideration, the withholding obligation is clear. However, for contingent consideration, the issue is whether withholding is required prior to accrual. Even where contingent consideration is recognized in the books of account (e.g., as a provision under Ind AS), the mere credit of such amount may not be sufficient to trigger withholding obligations if the income has not legally accrued to the payee.

A tenable view is that income has not accrued until the contingency materializes. This position is reinforced by the language of Section 393(2), Table: Sl. No.17, which applies only to sums “chargeable to tax.” If the income has not accrued, it is not yet chargeable.

This is also the practice followed generally and finds mention in the decision of the Mumbai ITAT in Huntsman Investments (Netherlands) B.V.63 In this case, the buyer withheld taxes on the contingent consideration only upon its crystallization, distinct from the closing date consideration.

However, if the rationale of Marren v. Inglis (supra) is adopted—treating the contingent right as a separate asset transferred at closing—it may be prudent, from a risk-mitigation perspective, to withhold tax on the FMV of that right at the time of the initial transfer. Given the ambiguity, the prevailing practice remains to withhold tax on contingent consideration only upon crystallization.


62 Section 195 of ITA 1961.

63 Huntsman Investments (Netherlands) B.V. v DCIT [2024] 166 taxmann.com 63 (Mum Trib). 
While not a direct ruling on the timing of tax withholding, a factual finding was recorded in Para 7, 
wherein it was noted that the buyer had withheld taxes on the contingent consideration only upon its crystallization, 
distinct from the consideration paid at closing. In this case, Huntsman had sold the shares of Huntsman Advanced Materials Solution Private Limited 
to the Pidilite Industries Ltd. for an aggregate consideration of USD 285 million bifurcated into two components:
 ‘closing date consideration’ of USD 256.9 million and the ‘contingent consideration’ of USD 28.1 million.

CONCLUSION

The taxation of contingent consideration remains one of the more unresolved areas of capital gains law under the IT Act. Judicial authority clearly supports the proposition that such consideration does not accrue in the year of transfer so long as the seller has no enforceable right to receive it. The real controversy lies in what follows thereafter.

The principles in Marren v. Inglis provide a conceptually elegant framework by treating the contingent right as a separate capital asset and taxing the value of that right at inception, with further gains computed upon realization. Yet the Indian position is complicated by fundamental questions as to whether the right is itself a capital asset, how such a right is to be valued, and whether Section 90(3), is broad enough to deem the cost of acquisition of such rights to be nil. The issue is therefore far from free from doubt.

“The taxation of contingent consideration remains one of the more unresolved areas of capital gains law under the IT Act. “

A substantial counter-argument remains available that, depending on the nature of the right and the application of B.C. Srinivasa Setty, some receipts may still fall outside the charge to capital gains tax in the absence of a clear statutory fiction. Added to this are practical characterization risks where earn-outs are linked with continued employment and may, in substance, represent remuneration rather than purchase consideration.

Until legislative clarity is provided, the issue is likely to remain contested between literal and purposive readings of the statute. From a policy standpoint, a specific framework—similar in spirit to Section 67(12)—for contingent consideration, escrow releases, and claw backs would greatly reduce uncertainty and litigation. As Chief Justice of India S.H. Kapadia64 observed, “Certainty is integral to the rule of law. Certainty and stability are fundamental to any fiscal system, and tax policy clarity is crucial for taxpayers (including foreign investors) to make rational economic decisions in the most efficient manner”.

Additionally, readers may consider the taxability of contingent consideration in cases involving non-residents who have invested in shares of Indian companies and are residents of countries with which India has a Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (DTAA). In such cases, while India retains the right to tax gains arising from the transfer of shares in an Indian company, the right to tax gains from the transfer of other assets may lie with the country of residence.65 For instance, in a joint development agreement, where a landowner (a company) parts with a portion of land to a developer in exchange for a right to a share in the project, the consideration for the transfer of land is the right to receive a share in the project. If the landowner transfers this right before receiving the completion certificate, what is being transferred is the right itself, not the land or building. Therefore, in such cases, Section 7866 of the IT Act, which applies only to the transfer of land or building, should not apply.67 A similar distinction should be drawn between the share and the right to receive contingent consideration when applying the DTAA.


64 In Vodafone International Holdings B.V. v Union of India [2012] 341 ITR 1 (SC), para 91. Similarly, refer to the observations of Justice Radhakrishnan in para 3 of his concurring judgment.

65 Illustratively refer to India-Singapore DTAA [Article 13(4B) and 13(5)] and India-Mauritius DTAA [Article 13(3A), Article 13(4)].

66 Section 50C of ITA 1961.

67 The decision of the Bombay High Court in Vidarbha Veneer Industries Ltd, (in liquidation) v ITO [2026] 484 ITR 132 (Bom) 
extending the scope of Section 50C to all immovable properties (not just land and building) 
may warrant reconsideration based on the literal language of the deeming provision. For a detailed critique on the judgment, 
one may refer to 484 ITR (Journal) 1-12.

Revised Code of Ethics, 2026

The Revised Code of Ethics, 2026, effective April 1, 2026, modernizes the ethical framework for Indian Chartered Accountants while preserving core professional integrity. The 13th Edition introduces a restructured three-volume format. Volume I updates domestic provisions, expanding permitted advisory services to include AI, forensics, and sustainability, while relaxing digital communication, website, and advertising guidelines. Volume II converges with the IESBA 2024 Code, strengthening independence rules around non-assurance services, expanding the definition of Public Interest Entities, and updating NOCLAR applicability. Finally, Volume III introduces entirely new ethical standards dedicated to sustainability assurance.

Ethics: A Timeless Foundation Rooted in Indian Tradition

The idea of ethics has deep roots in India’s philosophical and cultural traditions. The principle of Satyameva Jayate — “Truth Alone Triumphs” — reflects a timeless value that has guided personal conduct, public life and social institutions for centuries. Embedded in the national ethos, this principle continues to hold great relevance in modern professional life.

For Chartered Accountants, this ideal translates into a commitment to truth, transparency, fairness and professional responsibility. Ethical conduct is not limited to compliance with prescribed rules; it requires continuous alignment of professional behaviour with fundamental values. These values become especially important in situations where regulations may not provide explicit answers, or where competing interests require careful professional judgment.

Enhanced Significance of Ethics in the Accountancy Profession

The accountancy profession occupies a position of public trust. Chartered Accountants interact with a wide range of stakeholders — clients seeking professional advice, investors making financial decisions, regulators overseeing compliance, financial institutions evaluating credibility, and the public whose confidence supports the economic system.

In such a setting, ethics is not merely a regulatory obligation. It is the defining strength of the profession. The credibility, dignity and long-term sustainability of the Chartered Accountancy profession depend on the trust that society places in its members. That trust can be preserved only when professional competence is supported by integrity, independence and ethical conduct.

Genesis and Evolution of the Ethical Standards Board

Recognising the need for structured ethical guidance, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India constituted the Ethical Standards Committee in 1976. This marked an important step in institutionalising ethical standard-setting for the profession.

Over the years, the Committee evolved in response to the changing professional environment. It was renamed as the Committee on Ethical Standards and Unjustified Removal of Auditors (CESURA), reflecting an expanded role, including its function as a fact-finding body. Subsequently, it was reconstituted as the Committee on Ethical Standards (CES) in 2005. In December 2008, it assumed its present name — the Ethical Standards Board (ESB) — aligning its role more closely with developments in ethical standard-setting at the national and international levels.

Today, the Ethical Standards Board is responsible for developing and issuing ethical standards, guiding members on matters of professional conduct, examining ethical issues referred by various stakeholders, and promoting awareness and compliance. Its role has steadily expanded from standard-setting to active engagement with the profession on ethical issues arising in practice.
The current year is particularly significant as it marks nearly five decades of the Board’s sustained contribution to strengthening ethical standards within the profession. This milestone reflects ICAI’s continuing commitment to integrity, independence and professionalism.

Evolution of the Code of Ethics

The Code of Ethics is a foundational publication that sets out the ethical framework for the Chartered Accountancy profession in India. Its origins go back to 1963, when ICAI issued the first edition titled the “Code of Conduct”. The initial framework incorporated statutory provisions and judicial interpretations, thereby providing a formal structure for regulating professional behaviour.

With the growth of the profession and changes in the regulatory landscape, the Code underwent significant transformation. In 2001, its nomenclature was changed from “Code of Conduct” to “Code of Ethics”, reflecting a broader and more principle-based approach. The focus expanded beyond prescribed conduct to include values, independence requirements and the exercise of professional judgment.

The evolution of the Code demonstrates the profession’s responsiveness to emerging challenges. Each revision has sought to maintain a balance between regulatory discipline and practical relevance, ensuring that the Code remains robust, contemporary and adaptable.

The Modern CA

The Revised Code of Ethics, 2026: A Significant Milestone

The revised Code of Ethics, 13th Edition, comprising Volumes I, II and III, is applicable with effect from April 1, 2026, except for Serial No. (xxxi) relating to “Assessment and evaluation of Social Impact, CSR Impact, Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting, and the like” under Management Consultancy and Other Services issued under Section 2(2)(iv) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949. This particular provision in Volume I is effective from December 11, 2025.

The revision reflects a comprehensive effort to align the Code with contemporary developments, international standards and the evolving needs of the profession. It also recognises the expanding role of Chartered Accountants in areas such as sustainability, technology, forensic services, governance and public interest reporting.

A Revised Structure

The 13th Edition brings a significant structural change. In the earlier 12th Edition, Volume I was converged with the IESBA Code of Ethics, 2018 edition; Volume II contained domestic provisions governing Chartered Accountants; and Volume III served as a Case Laws Referencer.

The revised Code reorganises this structure. Volume I now contains domestic provisions governing Chartered Accountants, including amendments arising from the Chartered Accountants Act, Council decisions and contemporary developments. It also includes the Council General Guidelines. Volume II is converged with the IESBA Code of Ethics, 2024 edition, with suitable modifications for Indian requirements. Volume III is a new addition and deals with Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance, including independence standards.

The Case Laws Referencer, which was earlier part of the Code, has now been issued as a separate publication.

A Shloka that Sets the Tone

The revised Code begins with the shloka:

धर्मो रक्षति रक्षितः

Meaning: Dharma protected, protects. Therefore, let us not violate Dharma.

This opening is not merely symbolic. It reflects the philosophy underlying the Code. If professionals protect ethical principles, those principles in turn protect the profession. For a profession built on public trust, this message is both timeless and practical.

VOLUME I: DOMESTIC PROVISIONS

Bringing the Chartered Accountants Act to the Forefront

Volume I has been comprehensively updated to reflect amendments arising from the Chartered Accountants Act, contemporary developments and decisions of the Council. It provides members with a consolidated view of domestic ethical requirements applicable to Chartered Accountants.

Expansion of Professional Services

The revised Code broadens the scope of Management Consultancy and Other Services under Section 2(2)(iv) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949. Earlier, 28 services were recognised under this provision. The revised Code increases the list to 32 by including the following services:

  • Forensic Accounting and Investigation;
  • Research Analyst recognised by a regulator;
  • Assessment and evaluation of Social Impact, CSR Impact, Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting, and the like; and
  • Artificial Intelligence Consultancy in areas of services that can be rendered by a Chartered Accountant in practice.

Further, “Management and operational audits” has been expanded to include Information System Audit. These changes recognise the increasing demand for Chartered Accountants in specialised advisory and assurance areas, including forensic investigations, sustainability reporting, information systems and emerging technologies.

The revised Code also permits Chartered Accountants in practice to enter into partnerships with other recognised professionals under an Insolvency Professional Entity or Registered Valuers Entity, subject to compliance with the provisions of the Code.

Communication with the Previous Auditor

The recognised mode of communication with the previous auditor has been updated from “Registered Acknowledgement Due” to “Registered/Speed Post with Acknowledgement Due”. This change reflects current postal practices and provides practical clarity to members.

Compliance with Appointment Provisions

Clause (9) of Part I of the First Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 has been updated to incorporate amendments arising from the Chartered Accountants, Cost and Works Accountants and Company Secretaries (Amendment) Act, 2022.

The revised provision now requires compliance not only with Sections 139 to 141 of the Companies Act, 2013, but also with any other applicable law governing the appointment of auditors. For instance, appointment of auditors in banking and insurance companies must comply with the relevant sectoral laws.

New Clause Relating to Auditors

A new Clause (5) has been inserted in Part II of the Second Schedule. It provides that a member, whether in practice or not, shall be deemed guilty of professional misconduct if he acts as an auditor of a company in contravention of the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.

The objective is to uphold the sanctity of the audit process and reinforce the statutory responsibilities attached to the role of an auditor.

Modernising Professional Communication and Visibility

One of the important features of the revised Code is its recognition of modern modes of professional communication. The earlier Code permitted educational videos but restricted the mention of firm names and contact details. The revised provisions now allow members to upload educational audio, video and podcast content, with the firm’s name and contact details, provided the content remains educational in nature.

Restrictions relating to professional visibility have also been relaxed. Members writing articles or letters to the press on subjects connected with the profession may mention the name of the firm in which they are a partner or proprietor. Chartered Accountants in practice may conduct virtual programmes and webcasts, and invitations for such programmes may be sent not only to clients and staff of other Chartered Accountants, but also to others.

Another important change concerns network firms. Firms forming part of a network may now mention the name of the network on professional stationery, and the network may mention the names of the firms forming part of it. Networks registered with ICAI are also permitted to have websites, subject to the applicable website guidelines.

Write-up and Contemporary Forms of Communication

The revised Code significantly updates the Council Guidelines for Advertisement, 2008. The definition of “write-up” has been expanded to include “contemporary form” and “directories”, thereby recognising modern presentation formats and electronic directories as legitimate means of professional communication.
Several restrictions on the content of write-ups have been relaxed:

  • the earlier limit on font size has been removed;
  • the mandatory requirement to mention Membership Number or Firm Registration Number has been dispensed with;
  • members have greater flexibility in including additional professional information;
  • for non-exclusive services, the names of clients and the nature of assignments may be mentioned, subject to the client’s permission; and
  • for services exclusively reserved for Chartered Accountants, only the names of clients may be mentioned, again subject to the client’s permission.

At the same time, the underlying principle remains unchanged. A write-up must comply with the prescribed guidelines. It should not be false, misleading, exaggerated or undignified. Its purpose must be to provide information, not to secure professional work through solicitation or unfair advantage.

Website Guidelines: Pull and Push Technology

The website guidelines have also been modernised. Chartered Accountants, firms and registered networks may use both “pull” and “push” technology for non-exclusive services, while exclusive services must continue to follow the “pull” model.

Websites may display peer review status, Audit Quality Maturity Model level, and affiliation with a registered network. The revised provisions also permit passport-style photographs of persons associated with the firm, photographs of professional events organised by the firm, and photographs of professional events where lectures are delivered by partners or proprietors.

These changes recognise the importance of digital presence in professional practice, while retaining safeguards against solicitation and misleading advertisement.

Listing with Application-Based Service Provider Aggregators

A practical and relevant change relates to listing with online application-based service provider aggregators. Earlier, there was a prohibition where members or firms were listed along with categories such as businessmen, technicians, maintenance workers, event organisers and similar service providers.

The revised position permits members and firms to list themselves with online application-based service provider aggregators for non-exclusive services. This reflects present market realities and the growing use of digital platforms. There is no restriction on listing for non-exclusive services.

Members may also list themselves on platforms of the Government or regulators for providing professional services, such as the GeM portal. Members are also encouraged to use “CA Connect”, the listing portal on the platform of the Institute.

Guidelines on Ethical Issues, 2026

Another important change is the shift in terminology from “Council General Guidelines, 2008” to “Guidelines on Ethical Issues, 2026”. The revised guidelines address several practical matters affecting members in practice.

Non-payment of Undisputed Audit Fees

The revised Code introduces a new chapter on non-payment of undisputed audit fees in the case of continuing audits. A member in practice shall not sign the audit report of a Public Interest Entity if the undisputed audit fees for the previous year have not been paid.

In the case of non-PIE entities, the restriction applies where undisputed audit fees for two consecutive previous years have not been paid. An exemption is provided where insolvency resolution proceedings have been initiated and a Resolution Professional has been appointed.

Indebtedness and Audit Assignment Limits

The limit of indebtedness for accepting appointment as auditor has been increased from ₹1,00,000 to ₹5,00,000. The revised provision also clarifies that, for this purpose, the term “auditor” does not include an internal auditor, concurrent auditor or an auditor giving a report to management.

The limit on the number of company audit assignments has been increased from 30 to 40 audits of companies, excluding One Person Companies and Dormant Companies.
Further, the Guidelines for Practice in Corporate Form have been amended to include services such as forensic accounting, administrative services, research analysis, social impact assessment and evaluation, CSR impact assessment, Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting, and artificial intelligence services that may be rendered through a company.

Audit Fees through Digital Media

In line with the Government of India’s policy to promote the digital economy, the Council has recommended that members or firms should accept audit fees only through digital modes or banking channels.

Volume II: Convergence with the IESBA Code, 2024

Volume II of the revised Code is converged with the IESBA Code of Ethics, 2024 edition, with necessary modifications to suit Indian provisions.

The earlier terminology such as “Professional Accountant”, “Professional Accountant in Public Practice” and “Professional Accountant in Service” has been replaced with “Chartered Accountant”, “Chartered Accountant in Practice” and “Chartered Accountant in Service”. This change brings the language of the Code closer to the Chartered Accountants Act and the professional identity of Indian members.

Honesty as Part of Integrity

The fundamental principle of integrity has always required a Chartered Accountant to be straightforward and honest in professional and business relationships. The revised Code further strengthens this principle by including a specific paragraph on honesty.

Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations

The revised Volume II contains provisions relating to Responding to Non-Compliance with Laws and Regulations, commonly known as NOCLAR. The earlier applicability criterion of ₹250 crore has been removed. The provisions now apply to all listed companies and their material subsidiaries as defined in Regulation 16C of SEBI LODR. The provision relating to NOCLAR in the case of an imminent breach has also been restored.

These changes reinforce the public interest responsibility of Chartered Accountants and their role in responding appropriately to non-compliance with laws and regulations.

Non-Assurance Services to Audit Clients

A significant area of revision relates to Non-Assurance Services to Audit Clients, particularly under Section 600. This area is important because providing advisory or consultancy services to an audit client may create threats to independence, especially a self-review threat.

The revised provisions adopt a more consistent structure across subsections. They also introduce new prohibitions, particularly for Public Interest Entity audit clients, where certain non-assurance services may create self-review threats. Examples include valuation services and certain tax advisory services where the effectiveness of the advice depends on a particular accounting treatment.

The revised provisions clarify that advice and recommendations to audit clients may create a self-review threat in certain circumstances. Advisory services are not automatically prohibited; however, the firm must evaluate whether providing such services would affect independence.

Revised Definition of Public Interest Entity

The revised Code incorporates an additional parameter in the definition of Public Interest Entity by including “an entity one of whose main functions is to take deposits from the public”.

The earlier provision has also been modified to include entities having borrowings of ₹500 crore or more, to be assessed at both the beginning and end of the year.

The revised definition of Public Interest Entity is as follows:

A Public Interest Entity means:

(a) a listed entity; or

(b) an entity one of whose main functions is to take deposits from the public; or

(c) an entity:

(i) defined by regulation or legislation as a public interest entity; or

(ii) having borrowings of ₹500 crore or more, to be assessed at both the beginning and end of the year.

This revised definition extends enhanced safeguards to entities that have significant public interest implications.

Volume III: Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance

Volume III deals with Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance, including independence standards. These standards are converged with the International Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance, including International Independence Standards, issued by IESBA.

The standards prescribe requirements for sustainability assurance providers while performing sustainability assurance engagements. They also include provisions relating to independence in such engagements.

Where laws or regulations preclude a sustainability assurance provider from complying with certain provisions of this part, such laws and regulations shall prevail, and the practitioner shall comply with all other applicable provisions. Further, where industry or sector-specific provisions prescribe more stringent or additional requirements, such provisions shall apply to the concerned industry or sector.

The inclusion of sustainability assurance standards is an important development. It recognises the growing relevance of sustainability reporting and assurance, and prepares the profession to meet emerging expectations from businesses, regulators, investors and society.

Balancing Growth with Ethical Integrity

The revised Code strikes a careful balance between enabling professional growth and preserving ethical integrity. It recognises new opportunities in areas such as artificial intelligence, forensic accounting, sustainability, digital platforms and specialised advisory services. At the same time, it reinforces independence, objectivity, transparency and professional dignity.

The changes discussed above are indicative in nature. Members are advised to refer to the complete Code of Ethics available at ethics.icai.org for detailed provisions and applicability.

Role of the Ethical Standards Board Beyond Standard-Setting While formulation of ethical standards remains a central function, the role of the Ethical Standards Board extends well beyond standard-setting. The Board actively supports members in understanding and applying ethical principles in day-to-day professional work.

It also plays an important role in promoting awareness and disseminating knowledge. Through publications, programmes, guidance material and technology-based initiatives, the Board works to strengthen ethical competence within the profession. Its efforts are directed towards ensuring that ethical standards do not remain confined to the text of the Code, but are reflected in actual professional conduct.

CONCLUSION: SUSTAINING THE PROFESSION THROUGH ETHICAL COMMITMENT

The Chartered Accountancy profession derives its strength from the trust it commands. The Ethical Standards Board has played a vital role in nurturing and strengthening this trust. Through its work in standard-setting, guidance, awareness and capacity-building, it has helped ensure that ethical principles remain central to professional practice.
However, the responsibility of upholding ethics does not rest with the Board alone. It belongs equally to every member of the profession. Ethical conduct requires conscious and continuous effort, particularly when professional judgment is tested by pressure, ambiguity or competing interests.

The revised Code of Ethics, 2026 should not be seen merely as a compliance document. It is a guide for professional conduct in a changing world. It explains what is permitted, what is restricted and, more importantly, what is expected from a Chartered Accountant.

For members in practice, it provides clarity on communication, websites, non-assurance services, independence and emerging professional opportunities. For members in service, it reinforces honesty, integrity, responsibility in responding to non-compliance, and the need to act beyond mere employment instructions. For the profession as a whole, it strengthens alignment with global standards and creates a structured path for sustainability assurance.

The message of the revised Code is clear: the profession may modernise, but it must not lose its ethical foundation. Visibility may increase, but dignity must remain. Technology may assist, but professional judgment must remain human. Opportunities may expand, but independence must never be compromised.

Significance of Auditing Opening Balances (SA 510)

Under SA 510, incoming auditors must independently verify opening balances during initial engagements to ensure they lack misstatements affecting the current period. In India, this is especially challenging because professional conduct rules prohibit predecessor auditors from sharing their working papers. Consequently, incoming auditors must essentially reconstruct the prior year’s closing position from scratch using only client records and signed financial statements. Because this workload is rarely priced correctly, practitioners must explicitly plan and budget for opening balance procedures at the initial engagement stage. If sufficient evidence is unavailable or misstatements remain unresolved, the auditor must modify their current year report accordingly.

SA 510: WHAT IT COVERS

SA 510, “Initial Audit Engagements—Opening Balances,” sets out the auditor’s responsibilities in relation to opening balances when taking up an audit for the first time. It applies where the previous year’s financial statements were either not audited or were audited by a predecessor auditor. Accordingly, since a newly incorporated entity preparing its first financial statements has no prior period, this standard does not apply to it. Opening balances extend beyond opening figures and also include matters requiring disclosure at the beginning of the period, such as contingencies and commitments. Where comparative financial information is presented, SA 710 assumes relevance, while SA 300 provides guidance on planning activities at the commencement of an initial audit engagement.

THE RISK OF GETTING IT WRONG

The importance of SA 510 lies in a simple but fundamental proposition: if opening balances are misstated, the current period’s financial statements may also be misstated. The incoming auditor cannot simply carry forward prior balances without independent verification. The reliability of the current year’s audit opinion rests, in part, on the soundness of the starting point.

WHAT THE STANDARD REQUIRES

The auditor’s objective under SA 510 may be summarised in three points:

1. Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence as to whether opening balances contain misstatements that materially affect the current period;
2. Determine whether accounting policies reflected in opening balances have been consistently applied, or whether changes have been properly accounted for, presented, and disclosed; and

3. Where the prior year was audited by another firm, assess whether any modification in the predecessor auditor’s report remains relevant to the current period.

Where the previous year’s financial statements were audited, the auditor may obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence by reviewing the audited financial statements, including schedules and other supporting documents. Ordinarily, the current auditor can place reliance on the predecessor’s closing balances, except where current-period procedures indicate the possibility of misstatements in opening balances. This conditionality matters: reliance is permitted as a starting position, but it is not unconditional.

VERIFICATION PROCEDURES

The procedures required under SA 510 vary depending on the nature of the balance being verified. It is advisable to complete opening balance procedures before initiating current-period audit work. Once current-year procedures are underway, revisiting opening balances adds complexity, and, in practice, these procedures may not receive the attention they warrant.

For current assets and liabilities:

  • The collection or payment of opening accounts receivable and accounts payable during the current period provides natural evidence of the opening position.
  • Balance confirmations from banks, vendors, and customers on a sample basis corroborate the opening figures independently.

For inventories:

Current period closing procedures provide limited evidence about what was on hand at the start of the year. Additional procedures are therefore required:

  • Observe a current physical inventory count and reconcile it to the opening inventory quantities.
  • Perform audit procedures on the valuation of opening inventory items.
  • Perform audit procedures on gross profit, inventory turnover, and cut-off.

For non-current assets and liabilities (property, plant and equipment, investments, and long-term debt):

  • Third-party balance confirmations and reconciliation.
  • Review of the fixed asset register (FAR) and physical verification documents. Where these are incomplete or unavailable, invoices should be verified on a sample basis for material items.
  • Verification of demat statements and, where investments are not held in demat form, physical verification.

Beyond balance-specific procedures, the auditor must also review the prior year’s audited financial statements and the predecessor auditor’s report, verify the carry-forward of balances, and assess whether any prior qualification or modification continues to affect the current period. Where opening balance misstatements are identified and remain unresolved, they must be communicated to management and those charged with governance in accordance with SA 450.

Two Audits in One

THE STANDARD IN PRINCIPLE, THE PRACTICE IN INDIA

It is worth acknowledging that audit practice has made genuine progress in recent years. Firms increasingly use improved documentation, digital working papers, data analytics, and more structured engagement acceptance procedures. And yet, first-year audits involving opening balances remain an area where gaps persist.

A first-year audit in India is, in effect, two audits. When an auditor takes over an engagement, SA 510 requires independent verification of opening balances. While ISA 510 permits review of the predecessor auditor’s working papers in certain cases, SA 510 modifies this approach for India. Since Clause 1 of Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 treats disclosure of information acquired during a professional engagement to any person other than the client as professional misconduct, a predecessor auditor cannot provide access to working papers to another auditor. Accordingly, SA 510 has replaced the requirement to review predecessor working papers with perusal of the audited financial statements and other relevant documents relating to the prior period financial statements.

The practical consequence is that verifying opening balances requires the incoming auditor to essentially re-perform a closing-balance audit of the prior year from scratch, using only the signed financial statements and whatever records the client makes available. And then the current year’s audit follows on top of that. The workload this implies is rarely reflected in how first-year engagements are scoped or priced.

Opening balance procedures have no natural billing home. In most engagements, the effort required to verify opening balances is absorbed into the current year’s audit fee rather than scoped as a distinct first-year requirement. This is a market reality, but it creates a compliance risk. A critical area that directly affects the reliability of the current period’s financial statements may receive insufficient attention, not because practitioners are unaware of SA 510, but because the engagement economics do not make room for it.

Two further conditions compound these challenges. Client records at the commencement of a new engagement are often incomplete, making independent reconstruction of opening balances more difficult. And there is frequently an expectation from management that the incoming auditor will accept prior balances as given, without the independent verification required by SA 510.

The way around these constraints is the same: plan earlier and plan explicitly.

  • Identify SA 510 as a distinct risk item at the engagement acceptance stage, not after current-period work has begun.
  • Budget separately for first-year opening balance procedures. This makes the scope visible to the client and ensures the work is actually performed.
  • Use a focused checklist for high-risk areas: inventory, fixed assets, provisions, and related-party balances tend to carry the most opening balance risk.
  • Communicate early with management and those charged with governance, particularly where records are incomplete or the prior audit file is unavailable.
  • Strengthen documentation, review discipline, and planning under SA 300.

REPORTING OUTCOMES

Depending on the findings from opening balance procedures, SA 510 may require the auditor to reflect those conclusions in the audit report. The possible outcomes include:

  • where the auditor is unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding opening balances, the resulting limitation must be reflected in the audit report and may lead to a qualified opinion or a disclaimer of opinion, depending on the circumstances;
  • where misstatements in opening balances could materially affect the current period’s financial statements and remain unresolved after additional procedures, they must be communicated in accordance with SA 450, and the opinion may need to be qualified or adverse;
  • where accounting policies reflected in opening balances have not been consistently applied, or changes have not been properly accounted for, presented, or disclosed, the auditor may need to issue a qualified or adverse opinion; and where the predecessor auditor’s opinion was modified, and that matter remains relevant and material to the current period, the current auditor must modify the opinion accordingly. Where the matter has since been resolved or is no longer relevant, that conclusion should be documented appropriately.

PRACTICAL EXAMPLE

Case Illustration – Opening Inventory Misstatement

ABC Ltd. appointed a new auditor for FY 2024-25. During opening balance procedures, the auditor noted that inventory of ₹1 crore carried forward from the previous year included obsolete items that should have been written down. The overstatement affected both opening inventory and current-year profit. Management declined to record an adjustment. Although the issue originated in the prior year, it had a material impact on the current year’s financial statements. Accordingly, the auditor evaluated the need for a modified opinion under SA 510.

Key takeaway: Opening balance errors are not merely historical issues; they can directly affect the current year’s audit opinion.

Case Illustration – Inability to Verify Opening Inventory

A newly appointed auditor was engaged to audit a trading company. Opening inventory amounted to ₹15 crore. The auditor had not observed the prior year’s physical stock count and the client was unable to provide adequate stock records, movement registers or valuation workings relating to the opening inventory. As the auditor could not obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding a material opening balance, a limitation of scope arose under SA 510, requiring consideration of a qualified opinion or disclaimer, depending on materiality and pervasiveness.

Key takeaway: When evidence relating to opening balances is unavailable, the issue may affect the auditor’s opinion even when current-year records are otherwise satisfactory.

Case Illustration – Missing Fixed Asset Records

An incoming auditor found that fixed assets of ₹25 crore had been carried forward from prior years, but the entity maintained no comprehensive fixed asset register. For several material assets, management could not provide acquisition documents or evidence of ownership. Since the auditor could not independently verify significant opening balances, additional procedures were required and the impact on the audit opinion had to be evaluated under SA 510.

CONCLUSION

SA 510 warrants greater practical attention because opening balances form the foundation of the current year’s audit opinion. The constraints specific to India, particularly the restriction on access to predecessor working papers under the Clause 1 of Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949, mean that compliance requires more deliberate planning than the standard alone might suggest. A first-year audit here is not a routine handover; it is an independent reconstruction of the prior year’s closing position, followed by the current year’s audit. Recognising that reality, and planning for it explicitly, is what sound first-year audit practice looks like.

Letter to The Editor

Dear Sunil Gabhawalla,

Editor, BCAJ

I refer to the July 2026 Globalisation subject:

1. The central concept of globalisation and all the nine articles relating to it are highly exhaustive, supportive and guiding for the 90% of the firms which are placed in the three-partner category. All the articles and authors have given nice inputs. But I would like to specifically mention the write-up by Shri Dinesh Kanabar on talent, leadership and culture. He has gone beyond the traditional analytical matter. All the articles combined together should form a very good guideline.

2. ICAI, mid-size CA firms, young CAs, all leading stakeholders, and the government have declared globalisation of Indian CA firms as their first and foremost priority. In this effort, everybody has missed the most important limiting point, which is as under: all MNCs and the US government are acting as goons in the world; in the process, they will not allow professionals of any other countries to replace or share in the position of the Big 4. The ideology of MNCs and the USA to control the world’s resources, business, and ideology is unending and unrelenting.

3. In the process of going global, there is a danger of Indian CAs becoming part of the Big Four, diluting Indian interest. India, or Indian professionals, may be growing, but will the interest of India or Indians grow as well? It is very clear even today that international forces are playing against our efforts. This needs to be made part of the guidance so that we do not face any frustration in the future.

Kindly review the above position.

In any case, on many platforms I have cited the example of BCAJ. Our journal starts with ethics. I have also suggested to ICAI that our ancient wisdom, which goes beyond time and will continue to go beyond time, should be part of our first article. Ethics should be the starting point, and it should also be the end point, of any great nation, profession, or person. My sincere request is that this be continued for all time to come.

Congratulations to the entire team of BCAJ for making this possible.

Hitesh Shah

Surendranagar

RNPOs @ 2025 Act: New Complexities

The Income-tax Act 2025 simplifies the tax structure for Registered Non-Profit Organisations (RNPOs) but inadvertently introduces three critical drafting anomalies. First, corpus donations excluded from “regular income” might fall into the taxable “residual income” basket, potentially losing their historical tax exemption. Second, income applied towards non-registered purposes risks double taxation, as it is disallowed as a deduction from regular income while simultaneously being taxed as specified income. Finally, the omission of a clause enforcing “additional income-tax” on accreted income when normal tax is zero could render the levy unenforceable. Legislative clarifications are urgently needed.

The provisions relating to charitable institutions (now rechristened as Registered Non-Profit Organisations -RNPOs), have undergone significant structural revamp in the Income-tax Act, 2025 (“2025 Act”). Consolidation of scattered provisions of the Income-tax Act, 1961 in one single chapter XVII-B, arrangement of sections in a logical sequence and expression of law in a simpler language-these changes are undoubtedly welcome and make the law easier to navigate.

At the same time, the extensive restructuring appears to have introduced certain serious structural anomalies and drafting gaps which may have unintended tax consequences for a large number of RNPOs. Some provisions seem capable of altering long-settled tax positions, while others raise computational or interpretational issues that were absent in the 1961 Act. If left unaddressed, these issues may become fertile grounds for avoidable litigation, defeating the very purpose of simplification.

This article examines three such anomalies that merit careful consideration and timely clarification.

ISSUE 1 : WHETHER THE DRAFTING OF 2025 ACT HAS CHANGED THE TREATMENT OF CORPUS DONATIONS?

Treatment of Corpus Donations in the 1961 Act

In the 1961 Act, corpus donations were initially excluded from the definition of income itself by virtue of exclusion contained in clause (iia) of Sec. 2(24). Direct Tax Law (Amendment) Act, 1989 deleted that exclusion from Sec. 2(24)(iia) and instead brought in Sec. 11(1)(d) w.e.f. 01.04.89 providing as follows:

11. (1) Subject to the provisions of sections 60 to 63, the following income shall not be included in the total income of the previous year of the person in receipt of the income—
……….

(d) income in the form of voluntary contributions made with a specific direction that they shall form part of the corpus of the trust or institution, subject to the condition that such voluntary contributions are invested or deposited in one or more of the forms or modes specified in sub-section (5) maintained specifically for such corpus.

Thus, the 1961 Act is very clear in its treatment of corpus donations for registered charitable or religious institutions – a corpus donation, subject to the fulfilment of conditions regarding its investment etc., is excluded from the “total Income” itself, meaning thereby for all practical purposes, it never enters the computation of income at all.

The RNPO Paradox

Relevant Provisions of the 2025 Act

In the 2025 Act, the total income of RNPOs is being categorised into 3 buckets with each bucket having a separate taxability under sec. 334(1):

  • Specified Income- taxable @30%
  • Regular Income- taxable at the applicable rates
  • Residual Income- taxable at the applicable rates

Section 334 makes it clear that the Income-tax payable by an RNPO on its “total income” for any tax year shall be the aggregate of the amounts calculated above.

The definition of “income” contained in Sec. 2(49) of the 2025 Act is similar to the definition contained in Sec. 2(24) of the 1961 Act. As per clause (c) of Sec. 2(49), “Income” of an RNPO includes voluntary contributions received by it.

By virtue of Sec. 335(d), Regular Income of an RNPO includes all voluntary contributions received by it and then Sec. 338(b) provides that the corpus donations received by an RNPO are not to be included in the “regular income”.

Residual Income has been defined in Sec. 355(j) as follows:

“residual income” means the total income without giving effect to the provisions of this Part, as reduced by regular income and specified income.

Residual Income is a new category created by the 2025 Act and as the name suggests, is a residuary figure. It catches whatever remains of the total income when Regular Income and Specified Income have been reduced from it.

The Emerging Anomaly

Against this backdrop, the issue arising is whether, in the era of 2025 Act, corpus donations in the hands of RNPOs continue to enjoy the same exemption as accorded to them by Sec. 11(1)(d) of the 1961 Act, or the structural recalibration of the Act has inadvertently brought about a change in this position?

As mentioned above, the wordings in the 1961 Act are that corpus donation shall not be included in the “total income”. Replacing this, the 2025 Act provides that a corpus donation shall not be included in the “regular income”.

The question arises whether the non-inclusion of a corpus donation in the “regular income” under the 2025 Act is the same as non-inclusion of corpus donation in the “total income” under the 1961 Act? To put it differently, once a corpus donation is excluded from the “Regular Income” under Section 338(b) of the 2025 Act, where does it go? Does it fall into the bucket of “exempt income”, or still remains within the sphere of “total income”?

The issue assumes added significance due to the concept of “Residual Income” introduced in the 2025 Act – Total Income Less Regular Income and Specified Income = Residual Income. And it is here that the drafting anomaly becomes evident. Once a corpus donation- by virtue of being voluntary contribution – falls within the ambit of “total income” of an RNPO, and is then not allowed to enter the “Regular Income” by Sec. 338 (b), it does not move out from the clutches of “total income”, the “Residual Income” is standing there to catch it.

To put it somewhat poetically, in the era of the 2025 Act, a corpus donation appears to be destined for a short and unhappy journey- in the total income as a voluntary contribution, out of Regular Income, and straight into the lap of Residual Income — a basket that, unlike the corpus donation of the 1961 Act, enjoys no exemption from tax. And thus, it appears that the time-tested exemption available to corpus donation has got lost in the drafting of the 2025 Act.

The capital-receipt argument

There is of course a catena of judicial decisions holding that corpus donation being a capital receipt is not includible in the total income at all. But till now, the legal battle regarding taxability or otherwise of corpus donation was limited only to unregistered charitable institutions (One may refer to Dec. 2021 issue of BCA Journal for a detailed discussion on the Taxability of Corpus Donation Received By An Unregistered Trust). Registered institutions were entitled to claim a clear exemption for corpus donation by virtue of provision of Sec. 11(1)(d) of the 1961 Act. Now in the 2025 Act that unambiguous tax position seems to have got shrouded in uncertainty even for the registered NPOs.

Unless clarified, the present drafting of the 2025 Act has the potential to unsettle the long-settled tax exemption of corpus donations enjoyed by the registered charitable institutions in the 1961 Act.

ISSUE 2 : INCOME APPLIED FOR PURPOSES OTHER THAN THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH RNPO IS REGISTERED- WHETHER TAXABLE TWICE ?

Taxable Regular Income

As mentioned above, in the 2025 Act total income of an RNPO is being divided into 3 categories- Specified Income, Regular Income and Residual Income.

Regular Income is the core of this troika covering –

  • income from charitable/religious activities,
  • income from any property, deposit or investment held for charitable/religious purposes
  • Voluntary contributions
  • Gains of permissible commercial activities

This regular income is to be converted into “Taxable Regular Income” (TRI) u/s. 336 by reducing “application of income” and accumulation thereof from the 85% of Regular Income. The resulting Taxable Regular Income, if any, is then taxable at the applicable rate.

Application of Income

Section 341 sets the parameters regarding “application of income” which is to be reduced from the “Regular Income”.

Sub-section (1) of section 341 provides that “any sum applied by it for charitable or religious purpose in India for which it is registered”, shall be allowed as application of income to a registered non-profit organisation.

The words “for the purpose for which it is registered” are significant. They connote that if any amount is applied by an RNPO for a charitable or religious purpose other than the purpose for which it is registered, such amount shall not be treated as application of income. Consequently, such amount shall not be allowed as a deduction from the Regular Income while computing the Taxable Regular Income u/s. 336.

Let’s take an example. The only income of an RNPO is bank interest of Rs. 20 lacs.

The RNPO is registered for educational purposes. During the year, it spends:

  • Rs. 8 lacs on distribution of books to school children and
  • Rs. 9 lacs on some non-educational purposes.

The expenditure of Rs. 8 lacs is in furtherance of the educational objects of the RNPO and therefore qualifies as application of income u/s. 341. However, the expenditure of Rs. 9 lacs on non-educational purposes is not for the purposes for which the RNPO is registered. Accordingly, this amount shall not pass the test of Sec. 341 and shall not be treated as application of income.

As a result, the Taxable Regular Income of the RNPO shall be computed as under:

85% of Regular Income i.e. 85% of Rs. 20 Lacs 17 Lacs
Less : Application of income being Exp. for the purpose for which RNPO is registered 8 Lacs
Taxable Regular Income 9 Lacs

Under section 334, this amount of Rs. 9 Lacs shall be taxable at the applicable rate.

Whether Such Amount Shall be Taxable as “Specified Income” also?

Let us now refer to section 337 dealing with Specified Income.

Section 337 lays down 13 different situations where an amount shall be treated as “Specified Income” of the RNPO. By virtue of Sec. 334, all specified incomes are taxable @ 30%.

Serial No. 10 of the table in Sec. 337 provides that any income applied to purposes other than charitable or religious purposes for which the RNPO is registered shall be treated as “Specified Income” and shall be taxable as such in the tax year in which such application takes place.

Thus, on the one hand, Sec. 341(1) does not allow the application of income for purposes other than for which the RNPO is registered to be reduced from the Regular Income and, on the other hand, Sec. 337 treats the same amount as Specified Income.

Applying this to our above example, the amount of Rs.9 Lacs applied towards non-educational purposes, being applied for purposes other than the objects for which the RNPO is registered, would get covered by TSN 10 of Sec. 337 and accordingly shall be taxable as Specified Income also. The overall implication would be that Regular Income is getting taxed without the benefit of such application and the application itself is also getting taxed separately.

1961 Act Vs. 2025 Act

In the 1961 Act, the corresponding provision for taxability of Specified Income is section 115BBI. There is no provision in Sec. 115BBI similar to Table Sr. No. 10 of Sec. 337 i.e. application of income to purposes other than charitable or religious purposes for which the RNPO is registered is not a “Specified Income” in the 1961 Act.

Moreover, section 115BBI gives a two tier tax calculation mechanism by providing that the income-tax payable shall be the aggregate of, —

(i) the amount of income-tax calculated at the rate of thirty per cent on the aggregate of such specified income; and

(ii) the amount of income-tax with which the assessee would have been chargeable had the total income of the assessee been reduced by the aggregate of specified income referred to in clause (i).

In the 2025 Act, there is no provision corresponding to the above clause (ii) providing for reduction of “specified income” from the regular income or providing that whatever has been included in the Specified Income shall not be included in the Regular Income. Consequently, as demonstrated by the example discussed above, there appears to be a clear case of the same amount being subjected to tax twice—first at the income level as Regular Income, and then again at the application level as Specified Income.

It can certainly be argued that the specific overrides the general and, thus, when the same amount is covered by two categories of income, it should be classified under the more specific head (Specified Income) rather than under the general head (Regular Income). However, acceptance of this proposition would ultimately depend upon judicial approval through the course of litigation—precisely the kind of uncertainty that the 2025 Act seeks to minimise.

Clarifications Needed in the Act

It may be appreciated that both these issues assume greater significance in the backdrop of CPC’s software driven ITR processing, which operates mechanically on the basis of the wordings in the Act and leaves hardly any room for application of the principles of statutory interpretation to mitigate drafting gaps.

For the computational scheme of Regular Income, Specified Income and Residual Income to function seamlessly, the 2025 Act appears to require two clarifications:

a. Whatever is included in the Specified Income, shall be excluded from the Regular Income.
b. Whatever is excluded from Regular Income, shall not be included in the Residual Income.

In the absence of these clarifications, the three categories of income may not have mutual exclusivity and may instead overlap with one another- resulting in the same amount being subjected to tax under more than one category or, conversely, an amount intended to be excluded from taxation inadvertently finding its way into the Residual Income.

ISSUE 3 : TAXABILITY OF ACCRETED INCOME- IS SOMETHING MISSING?

Sec. 352 of the 2025 Act provides for levy of tax on accreted income. The charging provision in sub section 1 reads as follows:

“Every specified person shall, in addition to the income-tax chargeable in respect of his total income, be liable to pay additional income-tax on accreted income at the maximum marginal rate…..”

Sec. 352 vs. Sec. 115TD

Sec. 352 of 2025 Act is the reincarnation of Sec. 115TD of the 1961 Act.

At first glance, both provisions look the same (except for the presentation difference in Sec. 352 by way of addition of a table, formula based calculation etc.). However, a closer reading reveals some significant distinctions.

One would observe that while Sec. 115TD starts with a non-obstante clause- “notwithstanding anything contained in the Act”, its replacement-“irrespective of”-does not find a place in Sec. 352 of 2025 Act.

This omission may, however, be explained by the presence of the comprehensive overriding provision contained in section 334(2) of the 2025 Act which provides that the provisions of the whole chapter XVII-B shall apply irrespective of anything to the contrary contained in any other provision of this Act other than sections 96 to 98.

It is actually another difference which merits consideration.

Both under section 115TD of the 1961 Act and section 352 of the 2025 Act, tax on accreted income is levied as “additional income-tax” and is stated to be payable “in addition to the income-tax chargeable in respect of total income”.

Sec. 115TD(4) of the 1961 Act contains another specific provision regarding the levy of tax :-

4) Notwithstanding that no income-tax is payable by a specified person on its total income computed in accordance with the provisions of this Act, the tax on the accreted income under sub-section (1) shall be payable by such specified person.

In the 2025 Act, the provision corresponding to Sec. 115TD(4) is missing. And this leads to an important question –

Since the tax under section 352 is payable “in addition to the income-tax chargeable in respect of total income”, would it still be payable in a case where there is no total income and no income-tax chargeable in respect of total income in the tax year in which accreted income arises u/s 352?

To put it differently, does the levy of additional income-tax on accreted income u/s. 352 require something to which it can be added/fastened to, or would it still be payable even if there is nothing for it to be “in addition to”?

Additional Income Tax in the 1961 Act

In the 1961 Act, there are at least three similar instances of additional income-tax being levied:

1. Section 115-O (Dividend Distribution Tax)

2. Section 115-QA (Tax on buy-back of shares)

3. Section 115TD (Tax on accreted income)

In each of these cases:

  • The levy has been described as additional income-tax.
  • It is payable “in addition to” the normal income-tax, and
  • There is a specific provision laying down that additional tax would be payable notwithstanding that there is no tax payable on total income. [Ref.: Sec. 115-O(2), 115QA(2) and 115TD(4)]

So, the 1961 Act is clear in its intent – though the additional income-tax is payable “in addition to” the normal tax, by the force of Sec. 115-O(2)/115QA(2)/115TD(4), it will still be payable even if “normal tax” is not there.

Possible Argument under Sec. 352

Section 352 continues to provide that tax on accreted income is payable “in addition to” the tax on total income. However, unlike its predecessor, it is not protected by the declaration of intent that the levy would continue to apply even in the absence of any normal tax liability. This creates room for the argument that the words “in addition to the income-tax chargeable in respect of total income” presuppose the existence of an income-tax liability on total income. If no such liability exists, there is nothing to which the additional income-tax can be added, and accordingly the charging mechanism fails.

It can certainly be counter-argued that even if “income-tax chargeable on total income” is absent, the additional tax u/s 352 would still be there- being added to Zero. However, acceptance of this interpretation raises a conceptual difficulty- if the expression “in addition to” by itself is sufficient to achieve that result, then the specific provisions enacted by Parliament in sections 115-O(2), 115-QA(2), and 115TD(4) of the 1961 Act would become largely redundant.

Additional Income-tax : Judicial Interpretation

The concept of “additional income-tax” has previously come up for judicial interpretation in the context of erstwhile section 143(1A) of the 1961 act, (prior to its amendment by the Finance Act, 1993).

At the relevant time, section 143(1A)(a)(i) provided that where adjustments were made while processing the return under section 143(1), the Assessing Officer shall “further increase the amount of tax payable under sub-section (1) by an additional income-tax…”.

Interpreting this provision, the Delhi High Court in Modi Cement Ltd. v. Union of India (1992) 193 ITR 91 held that where even after the adjustments, returned income was a loss and no tax was payable, the levy of additional income-tax could not be sustained. The courts reasoned that where no tax is payable, “question of there being any further increase to this does not arise” (Also Allahabad High Court in Indo-Gulf Fertilizers And Chemicals vs Union Of India 195 ITR 485).

Although these decisions arose in the context of section 143(1A), the principle underlying them is certainly of relevance. Where the statute contemplates an additional income-tax as an increase over, or in addition to, the normal income-tax, the existence of a normal tax liability may constitute the very foundation for the additional levy.

Whether the omission of the equivalent of section 115TD(4) in section 352 is inconsequential or gives birth to a sustainable legal proposition, the answer will emerge only through future judicial interpretations. Until then, the issue is likely to remain an interesting subject of debate—unless, of course, the legislature settles it first.

CONCLUSION

The Income-tax Act, 2025 is undoubtedly a significant step towards simplifying the law governing charitable institutions. However, simplification should not come at the expense of certainty. It is hoped that the issues discussed above will receive timely attention, either through legislative amendment or suitable clarification, so that the objective of simplification is achieved without giving rise to avoidable litigation.

When The Burden Shifts: Exceptions to the Residence State’s Obligation to Relieve Double Taxation

Under the OECD Model Convention, the residence State generally relieves double taxation. However, exceptions shift this obligation to the State hosting a permanent establishment (PE). First, if the residence State is also the source of income attributable to the PE, the PE State must credit the residence State’s source tax. Second, in “triangular cases” where a PE earns income from a third State, the PE State must relieve the third-State tax by extending domestic unilateral relief to the PE via non-discrimination principles, or through specific treaty clauses. Practitioners must carefully account for these exceptions in their cross-border financial models.

I. THE GENERAL RULE

1. The architecture of double taxation relief under the OECD Model Convention rests on a simple division- the State of source taxes first, and the State of residence relieves. Articles 23A (exemption method) and 23B (credit method) apply only to the State of residence (State R). They oblige that State either to exempt income which the Convention permits the other Contracting State to tax, or to credit the tax paid in the other State against its own levy. Paragraph 8 of the Commentary on the said Articles makes this explicit by stating that the Articles “apply only to the State of residence and do not prescribe how the other Contracting State has to proceed.”

2. This general rule, however, is not without exceptions. Paragraphs 9 to 10 of the Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B, read with paragraphs 67 to 70 of the Commentary on Article 24, identify situations in which the obligation to extend relief travels away from the residence State and settles, wholly or partly, on the State in which a permanent establishment (PE) is situated. Two fact patterns dominate this discussion: first, where the residence State is itself the State of source; and second, the classic “triangular case” where income flows from a third State to a PE.

II. FIRST EXCEPTION — RESIDENCE STATE AS SOURCE STATE (PARAGRAPH 9)

3. Paragraph 9 of the Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B deals with the situation where a resident of State R derives income from State R itself through a PE in the other Contracting State (State E). Under Article 7(1) read with Article 21(2), State E may tax such income (other than income from immovable property situated in State R) if it is attributable to the PE. Remarkably, State R must still give relief under Article 23A or 23B for the income attributable to the PE, notwithstanding that the income originally arises in State R.

4. The Commentary then carves the true exception. It provides that where the Contracting States agree to preserve for State R a limited right to tax dividends or interest within the ceilings of Articles 10(2) and 11(2) as would have been taxed by a Source State, the two States “should also agree upon a credit to be given by State E for the tax levied by State R, along the lines of paragraph 2 of Article 23A or of paragraph 1 of Article 23B.” In other words, it is the PE State and not the residence State that extends the credit for the source tax of the residence State.

5. Paragraph 9.1 adds a wrinkle for exemption-method treaties. Where State R applies Article 23A (dealing with exemption method), the combination of Articles 7 and 23A prevents State R from taxing the dividends or interest even as the State of source, although had the same income been paid to a resident of the other State, State R could have taxed it at the rates in Articles 10(2) and 11(2). The Commentary then provides that States finding this unacceptable may insert a clause preserving State R’s source taxation, with State E giving a corresponding credit, though no credit is due if State E, under its domestic law, does not tax the dividends or interest attributed to the PE.

6. The working appended to this article (Sheet “Paragraph 9”) illustrates the rule with an Indian flavour. In the said example, India is the residence State and also the source State of interest of Rs.100. The enterprise has a PE in Sri Lanka to which the interest is attributable. Sri Lanka taxes the PE profits of Rs. 600 (revenue Rs.1,000 less expenses Rs.400) at 20 per cent, i.e. Rs.120. We may assume that India retains a limited source right of 10 per cent on the gross interest, i.e. Rs.10 under the India-Sri Lanka DTAA. [The assumptions have been made solely for illustrative purposes and are not based on the respective domestic laws of the States and the inter-se treaty position between them]

7. Sri Lanka, as PE State, grants the credit contemplated by paragraph 9 of Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B at the lower of the Indian tax on the interest (Rs.10) and the Sri Lankan tax attributable to that interest (Rs.100 × 60% profit ratio × 20% = Rs.12), i.e. Rs.10, leaving a net Sri Lankan tax of Rs.110 (i.e. 120- 10). India, as residence State, then taxes the interest (Rs.10) and the balance PE profits of Rs.540 (i.e. Rs.900 * 60% profit ratio) at 30 per cent (Rs.162), giving credit for the proportionate Sri Lankan tax of Rs.99 (Rs.110 × 900/1,000), restricted to the Indian tax thereon. The net Indian tax is Rs.73 (10+162-99) and the aggregate burden across both States is Rs.183 (110+73). Double taxation stands relieved, but only because each State performed a crediting function: Sri Lanka for India’s source tax, and India for Sri Lanka’s PE tax.

The Tax Relief Flip

Illustration I —

Paragraph 9

(amounts in Rs.)

Sri Lanka (E) India (R)
Tax before credit 120 172 (10 + 162)
Credit granted 10 (for Indian source tax) 99 (for Sri Lankan PE tax)
Net tax 110 73
Aggregate tax in both States 183

 

III. SECOND EXCEPTION — THE TRIANGULAR CASE (PARAGRAPH 10)

8. Paragraph 10 of OECD Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B addresses the triangular configuration- a resident of State R derives income from a third State (State S) through a PE situated in State E. State E may tax the income attributable to the PE (Articles 7(1) and 21(2)), and State R must give relief under Article 23A or 23B for the income attributable to the PE. So far, the general rule holds. The difficulty lies elsewhere in as much as the Convention between R and E contains no provision obliging State E to relieve the tax levied by the third State (State S) where the income arises. The PE thus risks bearing third-State withholding tax with no treaty avenue for credit in the State that actually taxes it on a net basis.

9. The Commentary supplies the answer through the non-discrimination Article i.e. under Article 24(3). By applying such non-discrimination provision the Commentary requires that any relief provided under the domestic laws of State E (double taxation conventions excluded) for its own residents must equally be granted to a PE in State E of an enterprise of State R. Paragraph 10 expressly cross-refers to paragraphs 67 to 72 of the Commentary on Article 24.

IV. THE ARTICLE 24 DIMENSION — PARAGRAPHS 67 TO 70

10. Paragraph 67 of the Commentary on Article 24 states the principle: when foreign income is included in the profits attributable to a PE, it is right to grant the PE credit for the foreign tax borne by such income when such credit is granted to resident enterprises under domestic law. This is the equal-treatment obligation in action. On the basis of the said principle of equal treatment a unilateral relief provision under the domestic law of State E [which may be similar to section 91 of the Income-tax Act, 1961] cannot be confined to its’ residents.

11. Paragraph 68 confronts the harder case. What if State E’s domestic law grants no unilateral credit and relief flows only from tax conventions? The PE is not a “person” and not a “resident”, and is therefore not itself entitled to the benefits of State E’s conventions with third States (State S). Paragraph 69 frames the resulting question for dividends and interest received by the PE from a third State: whether, and to what extent, the PE State should credit the third-State tax that cannot be recovered.

12. Paragraph 70 records the consensus that double taxation does arise and some method of relief should be found. It observes that most member countries can grant credit on the basis of domestic law or of Article 24(3) itself. However it also provides that, States that cannot grant credit under their domestic law owing to absence of such a credit mechanism thereunder, or that wish to clarify the position, may supplement Article 24(3) with wording that permits the PE State (State E) to credit the third-State tax (State S) “by applying the rate of tax provided in the convention between the State of which the enterprise is a resident and the third State”, subject to a ceiling: the credit “shall not exceed the amount that an enterprise that is a resident of the first-mentioned State can claim under that State’s convention with the third State.” If the unrecoverable tax under the treaty or convention between State R and the third State (i.e. State S) is lower than that under the treaty or convention between State E and third State (State S), only the lower tax is credited. The PE, in effect, receives the less favourable of the two treaties, which amounts to a floor of protection and not a charter for treaty shopping.

V. THE TRIANGULAR CASE IN NUMBERS

13. The second and third sheets of the workings model the triangle with India as residence State (30 per cent), a PE in Sri Lanka (20 per cent) and interest of Rs.100 arising in Bangladesh suffering withholding at 25 per cent (Rs.25). PE profits are Rs.600 on revenue of Rs.1,000. [Again these assumptions are for illustrative purposes and do not represent the actual position under the respective domestic laws and the inter-se treaty position between the States.]

14. Route one — domestic-law relief (Sheet “Paragraph 10 of Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B read with Paragraph 67 on Article 24”). Sri Lanka is assumed to have a unilateral relief provision similar to section 91 of the Income Tax Act, 1961. Its tax of Rs.120 is reduced by credit at the lower of the Bangladesh rate (25%) and its own effective rate (12%), applied to the doubly taxed interest of Rs.100 resulting in a credit of Rs.12, leaving net Sri Lankan tax of Rs.108 (120-12). By applying Article 24(3), this domestic relief must be extended by Sri Lanka to the Indian enterprise’s PE. India then levies Rs.180 on the income inclusive of interest, allowing credit of Rs.18 for the Bangladesh tax (lower of Rs.25 and the Indian tax attributable to such interest of Rs.18) and Rs.108 for the Sri Lankan tax. The total foreign tax credit thus extended by India would be Rs.126 (Rs.108 + Rs.18), resulting in net Indian tax Rs.54 (180-126). Aggregate outflow across the three States would be Rs.187 (25+108+126).

15. Route two — the paragraph 70 treaty clause (Sheet “Paragraph 10 of Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B read with Paragraph 70 of Commentary on Article 24”). Here Sri Lanka is assumed to have no unilateral relief under its’ domestic law, but the India–Sri Lanka treaty contains the clause suggested by paragraph 70 of the Commentary on Article 24. Sri Lanka computes the credit under the India–Bangladesh treaty (Rs.18, being the lower of Rs.25 being Bangladesh Tax on interest and the Indian tax attributable to the interest) and caps it at what its own resident could claim under the Sri Lanka–Bangladesh treaty (Rs.12, being the lower of Rs.25 and the Sri Lankan tax attributable to the interest income). The credit is the minimum of the two i.e. Rs.12, and the net Sri Lankan tax is again Rs.108 (120-12). The Indian computation is unchanged, and the aggregate outflow is again Rs.187.

Illustration II — Triangular case (amounts in Rs.) Para 10 (Art. 23A and 23B) r.w. Para 67 (Art 24) route Para 10 (Art. 23A and 23B) r.w. Para 70

(Art 24) route

Tax in Bangladesh (source) 25 25
Sri Lanka: tax before credit 120 120
Sri Lanka: credit for Bangladesh tax 12 (s. 91-type relief) 12 (treaty clause)
Sri Lanka: net tax 108 108
India: tax before credit 180 180
India: total foreign tax credit (18 + 108) 126 126
India: net tax 54 54
Aggregate tax outflow 187 187

16. Two features of the illustrations deserve emphasis. First, in both routes the PE State’s credit is rate-capped at its own effective tax attributable to the doubly taxed income (12 per cent), so a residue of Bangladesh tax (Rs.13) remains unrelieved at the PE level. This difference however gets absorbed downstream while computing the tax credit given by India as State of residence as India being the State of residence extends credit for the taxes paid in Sri Lanka. However, with respect to taxes paid in Bangladesh, India does not extend full credit of Rs.25 (being the tax paid in Bangladesh on interest), but limits it to the Indian tax attributable to such interest being Rs.18. The difference of un-credited Bangladesh Tax of Rs.7 (i.e. 25-18) has resulted in the aggregate burden of Rs.187 exceeding the tax of Rs.180 (i.e. Rs.1000 * 60% profit percentage * 30% being tax rate in India) that a pure residence taxation would have produced. Relief in triangular cases is real but imperfect. Secondly, the paragraph 70 clause and a section 91-type domestic provision converge on the same result in this fact pattern, which is precisely its design i.e. to place PEs on par with, but not better than, local residents.

VI. CONCLUSION

17. The proposition that the residence State alone bears the burden of relieving double taxation is accurate only as a first approximation. Paragraph 9 of the Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B shows that where residence and source converge in one State and the income is attributable to a PE in the other, the PE State must credit the residence State’s source tax. Paragraph 10 of Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B, read with paragraphs 67 to 70 of the Commentary on Article 24, shows that in triangular cases the PE State must extend to the PE whatever unilateral relief its domestic law gives its own residents, or may by treaty bind itself to a credit capped at the less favourable of the two relevant conventions.

18. For Indian practice the lessons are concrete. Indian enterprises with foreign PEs earning Indian-source interest or dividends should examine whether the PE State has granted the paragraph 9 credit before computing relief under section 90 read with relevant article of the applicable treaty. Conversely, where a foreign enterprise operates a PE in India that receives third-country income, Article 24(3)-type non-discrimination clauses oblige India to extend section 91-type relief to that PE on par with residents. In triangular structures, the residual, unrelieved sliver of source-State tax is a costing reality that deserves a line in every cross-border financial model. The general rule tells us who usually pays for relief, the exceptions remind us that in treaty law, as in life, the burden does not always fall where one first expects.

WORKINGS AS PER PARAGRAPH 9 OF 2017 OECD COMMENTARY ON ARTICLES 23A AND 23B

Nature of case: There is a convergence of residence and source in the same State and income is effectively connected with a PE in the other State.

Assumptions made:

1. India is the resident State. India is also the source State inasmuch as interest is arising in India.

2. Enterprise has a PE in Sri Lanka and interest is attributable to such PE and is taxed as business profits in Sri Lanka at say 20%.

3. India has limited taxing rights under the Indo–Sri Lanka Treaty to tax the interest at a lower rate of say 10% on gross basis.

Tax on PE profits in Sri Lanka
PE revenue 1,000
Less: PE expenses 400
PE profits 600
Tax at 20% 120
Tax on Interest income in India
Interest 100
Tax at 10% 10
Tax on reworked PE profits in India
PE revenue (excluding interest) 900
Less: Proportionate PE expenses (i.e. 400 × 900/1000) 360
PE profits 540
Tax at 30% 162
Tax in Sri Lanka as per Paragraph 9 of OECD Commentary
Tax on PE profits 120
Less: Credit for Indian tax paid on interest included in PE profits in accordance with Article 23B(1)
1) Income tax paid in India on interest income (i.e. interest of Rs. 100 × 10% being tax rate in India) 10
2) Income tax payable in Sri Lanka which is attributable to interest income taxed in India (i.e. interest of Rs. 100 × 60% being profit percentage × 20% being tax rate in Sri Lanka) 12
Lower of the two amounts eligible for tax credit 10
Net tax in Sri Lanka 110
Tax in India
Tax on Interest [A] 10
Tax on PE profits 162
Less: Credit of Sri Lankan tax paid on PE profits
1) Income tax paid in Sri Lanka on PE profits [Rs. 110 being total tax paid in Sri Lanka × (Rs. 900 being income other than interest / Rs. 1000 being total income)] 99
2) Income tax payable in India which is attributable to PE profits taxed in Sri Lanka [Since income of Rs. 900 is taxed both in India and Sri Lanka, the tax of Rs. 162 which is paid in India on such income of Rs. 900 is considered] 162
Lower of the two amounts eligible for tax credit 99
Net Tax on PE profits [B] 63
Net Tax in India [A] + [B] 73
Total tax in India and Sri Lanka 183

WORKINGS AS PER PARAGRAPH 10 OF 2017 OECD COMMENTARY ON ARTICLES 23A AND 23B READ WITH PARAGRAPH 67 OF 2017 OECD COMMENTARY ON ARTICLE 24

Nature of case: Income derived by a resident of Residence State (R), from a source in Source State (S) but is considered as income of a PE situated in a Third State (€).

Assumptions made:

1. India is the resident State. India taxes profits as a resident State at full rate (assuming 30%).

2. Enterprise has a PE in Sri Lanka and interest is attributable to such PE and is taxed as business profits in Sri Lanka at 20%.

3. The interest is derived from a third State say Bangladesh (source State). Tax rate in Bangladesh presumed at 25%.

4. It is presumed that Sri Lanka has a provision similar to section 91 of the IT Act, 1961 in its domestic law.

Tax on profits in India
Revenue 1,000
Expenses 400
Profits 600
Tax on profits at 30% 180
Tax on PE profits in Sri Lanka
PE revenue 1,000
Less: PE expenses 400
PE profits 600
Tax at 20% 120
Tax in Bangladesh on interest income
Interest 100
Tax at 25% 25
Tax in India
Tax on profits 180
Less: Credit for Bangladesh tax paid on interest
1) Income tax paid in Bangladesh on interest income 25
2) Income tax payable in India which is attributable to interest income taxed in Bangladesh [Rs. 100 × 60% profit percentage × 30% tax rate in India] 18
Lower of two amounts eligible for credit 18
Less: Credit for Sri Lanka tax paid on profits
1) Income tax paid in Sri Lanka [Rs. 108 being tax paid on income of Rs. 1000 is considered] 108
2) Income tax payable in India [Rs. 180 being tax payable on income of Rs. 1000 is considered] 180
Lower of two amounts eligible for credit 108
Total FTC 126
Net Tax in India 54
Tax in Sri Lanka
Tax on PE profits 120
Less: Credit as per provision similar to section 91 of ITA
1) Bangladesh Tax Rate [(Rs. 25 / Rs. 100 interest income taxable in Bangladesh) × 100] 25
2) Sri Lanka Tax Rate [(Rs. 120 Sri Lanka Tax / Rs. 1000 total income) × 100] 12
Lower of two tax rates at which credit is available 12
Doubly taxed interest income 100
Eligible credit on doubly taxed income 12
Net Tax in Sri Lanka 108
Tax paid in Bangladesh
Tax paid in Bangladesh 25
Total tax outflow in India, Sri Lanka and Bangladesh 187

WORKINGS AS PER PARAGRAPH 10 OF 2017 OECD COMMENTARY ON ARTICLES 23A AND 23B READ WITH PARAGRAPH 70 OF 2017 OECD COMMENTARY ON ARTICLE 24

Nature of case: Income derived by a resident of Residence State (R), from a source in Source State (S) but is considered as income of a PE situated in a Third State (€).

Assumptions made:

1. India is the resident State. India taxes profits as a resident State at full rate (assuming 30%).

2. Enterprise has a PE in Sri Lanka and interest is attributable to such PE and is taxed as business profits in Sri Lanka at 20%.

3. The interest is derived from a third State say Bangladesh (source State). Tax rate in Bangladesh presumed at 25%.

4. It is presumed that Sri Lanka does not have a provision similar to section 91 of the IT Act, 1961 in its domestic law. However, it is presumed that the DTAA between India and Sri Lanka has a clause similar to that provided in paragraph 70 of the OECD Commentary on Article 24 which enables Sri Lanka to extend the credit available under the DTAA between India and a third State, subject to such credit not exceeding what is available as per the DTAA between Sri Lanka and such third State.

5. It is presumed that the tax rates at which credit is available in respective treaties is based on the rates mentioned above in respect of each jurisdiction.

Tax on profits in India
Revenue 1,000
Expenses 400
Profits 600
Tax on profits at 30% 180
Tax on PE profits in Sri Lanka
PE revenue 1,000
Less: PE expenses 400
PE profits 600
Tax at 20% 120
Tax in Bangladesh on interest income
Interest 100
Tax at 25% 25
Tax in India
Tax on profits 180
Less: Credit for Bangladesh tax paid on interest
1) Income tax paid in Bangladesh on interest 25
2) Income tax payable in India attributable to interest taxed in Bangladesh [Rs. 100 × 60% profit percentage × 30% tax rate in India] 18
Lower of two amounts eligible for credit 18
Less: Credit for Sri Lanka tax paid on profits
1) Income tax paid in Sri Lanka on profits [Rs. 108 being tax paid on income of Rs. 1000] 108
2) Income tax payable in India on profits [Rs. 180 being tax payable on income of Rs. 1000] 180
Lower of two amounts eligible for credit 108
Total FTC 126
Net Tax in India 54
Tax in Sri Lanka
Tax on PE profits 120
Less: Credit for Bangladesh tax paid on interest
1) Tax credit under Indo–Bangladesh DTAA
a) Tax paid in Bangladesh on interest 25
b) Tax payable in India attributable to interest taxed in Bangladesh [Rs. 100 × 60% profit percentage × 30% tax rate in India] 18
Lower of two amounts eligible for tax credit [A] 18
2) Tax credit under Sri Lanka–Bangladesh DTAA
1) Tax paid in Bangladesh on interest 25
2) Tax payable in Sri Lanka attributable to interest taxed in Bangladesh [Rs. 100 × 60% profit percentage × 20% tax rate in Sri Lanka] 12
Lower of two amounts eligible for tax credit [B] 12
Tax credit eligible being minimum of [A] and [B] 12
Net tax in Sri Lanka 108
Tax paid in Bangladesh
Tax paid in Bangladesh 25
Total tax outflow in India, Sri Lanka & Bangladesh 187

 

This article is based on the 2017 OECD Model Tax Convention and Commentary: paragraphs 8, 9, 9.1 and 10 of the Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B, and paragraphs 67 to 70 of the Commentary on Article 24, with illustrative computations assuming Indian tax at 30%, Sri Lankan tax at 20%, Bangladesh withholding at 25% and an Indian limited source rate of 10% on interest. Figures are illustrative only and do not represent the actual domestic law positions and the inter-se treaty positions between the Contracting States referred to.

From The President

My Dear BCAS Family,

My association with BCAS began in 2002, in a communication course for Chartered Accountants, a first encounter whose full significance I could scarcely have imagined then. Twenty-four years later, serving as the 78th President of this Society feels less like a new chapter and more like the continuation of a journey, BCAS itself set in motion. I step into this responsibility with humility, hope and a deep sense of duty, inspired by the three guiding principles of Jainism; “सम्यक् ज्ञान”, “सम्यक् दर्शन”, and “सम्यक् चारित्र”, the wisdom to know, the vision to perceive, and the discipline to do what is right.

On Guru Purnima (29th July 2026 / Ashadhi Purnima), I offer deep gratitude to our Past Presidents and mentors at BCAS. Like one lamp lighting another, our visionary seniors have guided generations of young CAs with integrity, shaping BCAS into the institution it is today.

I express my sincere gratitude to CA Zubin Billimoria, the outgoing President, for his exemplary service, steadfast dedication, and invaluable contributions to BCAS. His legacy will continue to inspire us as we build upon his work.

Celebrating Krishna Janmashtami this month should reminds us of the timeless teachings in the Bhagavad Gita to uphold righteousness, protect good, and fulfill duty which are essential principle for every professional. To bring this enduring wisdom closer to the members, BCAS has released the Gujarati edition of “Gita for Professionals”, now available alongside the English edition. It serves as a practical compass to cultivate integrity, independence and professional skepticism, and to help members achieve greater excellence in profession.

During the year ahead, I hope to focus our collective efforts on strengthening professional capability, creating greater opportunities for young members and ensuring that BCAS remains responsive to the changing expectations of the profession.

The Soul of the Profession

The newly implemented India-UK Free Trade Agreement opens significant new horizons for our profession. It will unlock demand for advice relating to cross-border structuring, taxation, transfer pricing, customs, regulatory compliance, assurance and business establishment. With reduced trade barriers and easier mobility, our fraternity now has a wonderful gateway to offer high-value consulting to international businesses and showcase Indian professional talent on a global stage.

The world today continues to witness considerable political and economic volatility. As Bharat enjoys global trust, the world is looking up to her for guidance. BCAS was proud to support ‘Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam Ki Oar 4.0’, organised in January 2026 by Jyot India Foundation under the guidance of Jainacharya Yogbhushansuriji Maharaj. His message is deeply relevant today: our ancient wisdom reminds us that the whole world is one family. To resolve modern crises, we must restore core values and establish the ‘Rule of Justice’ in every walk of life.

As the 15th of August approaches, it brings with it a deep sense of pride as our nation celebrates Independence Day. Beyond celebrating our freedom, it is a reminder of our collective responsibility to build a strong Bharat.

As students, we were taught a simple principle: an auditor must always be independent. It sounds straight-forward in textbooks. But in real life, independence is rarely lost in one big, dramatic moment. It quietly slips away through small, comfortable choices.

You may wonder why this matters to an ordinary citizen. The RBI projecting a strong 6.6% growth for Indian economy look wonderful, but behind every economic number lies a set of financial statement audited by professionals like us. Most citizens may never meet the professionals who audit, certify and advise the institutions they depend on. Yet every time they invest, donate, borrow or place their trust in an organisation, they rely on the quality and honesty of our work. That is why professional independence is not just a personal value; it is the foundation of public trust. As India celebrates its freedom, let us renew our commitment to the freedom that our profession demands; the freedom to examine facts without prejudice, to express an honest view without fear, and to act without compromising our conscience. That is how we will honour both our profession and our nation.

Just as national independence grants sovereignty and dignity to our country, independence of thought and action is the very soul of the Chartered Accountancy profession. For a CA, independence is not merely a compliance checkbox or a regulatory mandate; it is a sacred state of mind. It demands unyielding objectivity, fearless professional skepticism, and an uncompromising commitment to truth.

It is my immense privilege to serve as the torchbearer for the milestone 60th Residential Refresher Course (RRC), scheduled from 10th to 13th December 2026 at Ahmedabad. I warmly request our Yuva Shakti to join and witness this historic moment first hand, while our senior members can relive old memories and experience the joyous nostalgia of togetherness.

BCAS is a family where every member’s voice matters. We have launched a members’ survey to understand your expectations from our Society. Please spare a few minutes to share your honest thoughts.

I extend my heartiest wishes for Parsi New Year (Navroz) and Raksha Bandhan. May these celebrations fill your homes with joy, peace and happiness.

Jai Hind.

CA. Kinjal Shah

President, BCAS

A Compressed File – An Uncompressed Risk

A client emails a scanned copy of his Aadhaar card to your office for uploading on the GST registration portal. The file size is 3 MB, while the portal accepts uploads only up to 1 MB. The intern handling the registration opens a free online PDF-compression website, uploads the Aadhaar scan, downloads the compressed version and completes the filing. The registration is successful. The client is satisfied. No one in the office gives the compression website another thought.

Yet this simple and commonplace act illustrates one of the most overlooked data protection risks in professional practice.

Across Chartered Accountants’ offices, personal identity documents such as Aadhaar cards, PAN cards, passport copies and bank statements are routinely compressed, merged, converted, translated or subjected to OCR using freely available online tools. The convenience is undeniable. The legal implications, however, deserve closer attention.

The High Cost of free online tools

The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (“DPDP Act”) introduces a statutory framework governing the processing of digital personal data. The principal compliance requirements including notices, consent management, security safeguards, breach reporting and data principal rights become operative from 13 May 2027.

Consider the Aadhaar example. Once the document is uploaded to an external website, the firm relinquishes direct control over how that file is processed, stored or deleted. Many online utilities process documents on servers outside the firm’s infrastructure, under terms that users seldom read and whose retention practices may vary. A complete identity document, in the wrong hands, is a master key: it is good enough to open a mule bank account, procure a duplicate SIM card through fraudulent e-KYC, apply for an unsecured loan in the client’s name, or register a shell entity. Even where a service claims to delete uploaded files after a specified period, the firm has entrusted sensitive personal data to a third party over whom it exercises no contractual control.

The DPDP Act applies to personal data processed in digital form, or to physical data that is subsequently digitised. Accordingly, while a physical photocopy of an identity document lying in a paper file may fall outside its scope, the moment that document is scanned, emailed, uploaded or electronically processed, the statutory framework becomes relevant.

For most professional engagements, a Chartered Accountant processes personal data on behalf of the client and becomes a Data Processor under the Act. At the same time, where the firm independently determines the manner or means of processing—for instance, deciding to use a particular software platform or online utility—it may also assume obligations associated with a Data Fiduciary under the Act. The precise legal characterisation will depend upon the facts of each engagement, but in either case the responsibility to handle personal data with appropriate care remains.

In the illustration above, several provisions of the DPDP framework could become relevant. The processing continues to serve the authorised purpose of GST registration. However, the firm’s decision to route the Aadhaar through an unapproved public website raises broader compliance questions. Was the client adequately informed that an external service provider might process the document and did he consent to that arrangement explicitly/implicitly? Has the firm exercised reasonable due diligence before entrusting personal data to that provider? Is there an appropriate contractual arrangement with the website governing confidentiality, security safeguards, retention and deletion of the data? The DPDP framework places the responsibility for these decisions squarely on the organisation processing the personal data. Convenience cannot substitute governance.

The DPDP Act prescribes substantial monetary penalties ranging upto Rs.250 crores for failure to put in place reasonable security safeguards to prevent a personal security breach. Many other contraventions also attract high penalties. These represent statutory maximums, and any penalty would necessarily depend upon the facts, the nature of the contravention, mitigating circumstances and the assessment of the Data Protection Board.

Fortunately, the solution to this specific risk is neither expensive nor complicated.

Every firm should adopt a simple written policy prohibiting the upload of client documents to public or unapproved online utilities for compression, conversion, OCR or similar processing. Where such functionality is required, firms should use licensed desktop software or approved applications operating within their own controlled environment. Equally important is a basic due diligence process before introducing any technology that handles client data, together with periodic sensitisation of staff who routinely process documents. This will necessarily require incurring of additional costs, but failure to do so may result in far higher financial penalties.

The most significant data protection risks seldom arise from sophisticated cyberattacks. More often, they emerge from ordinary shortcuts taken in busy offices by well-intentioned people. A seemingly harmless decision to compress a PDF using a free website may appear inconsequential, but it can expose sensitive personal information to risks that neither the client nor the professional intended.

Best Regards,

CA. Sunil Gabhawalla

Editor

Laughter – The Therapeutic and Inveterate Stimulant

1. “Laughter”-a basic human expression – takes birth in a beatific smile and given the requisite wings transforms into laughter – an expression, invariably of pure joy and, sometimes, a manifestation, even in adversity, of the unbroken spirit. Laughter by releasing the mind of its mechanical regularity and freeing it of its inner demons has the effect of injecting the playful and joyous element into our daily existence while also imbuing it with a sense of richness thereby becoming as His Holiness, the Dalai Lama repeatedly emphasizes “an expression of inner peace, freedom, compassion and clarity” – accompanied with the all-pervading sense of bonhomie that it exudes and generates.

Laughter The Spirits Great Stimulant

2. Most spiritual and thought leaders and opinion makers have personified the power of laughter with their countenance almost always sporting a pleasant smile backed by the ability to break into spontaneous unrestrained laughter at the earliest available opportunity – the perpetually smiling and glowing face of the Dalai Lama being a perfect and live example. In the masterpiece – “The Book of Joy”, which chronicles a series of conversations between His Holiness the Dalai Lama and Archbishop Desmond Tutu, facilitated by Douglas Abrams – the two spiritual leaders discuss the challenges of a joyful life and among the eight pillars of joy, identify humour (a twin brother of laughter) as a necessary ingredient. Of course, in the book repeated references arise as to how both the Dalai Lama and Archbishop Desmond Tutu would break into guffaws and laughter at frequent intervals – a reflection of how they valued the inveterate necessity of laughter to lighten moods, recharge the brain and enliven the atmosphere even while discussing what may appear to be deeper theological issues. The book, while referring to how it seems that there is an evolutionary role for laughter and humour in managing anxiety and stress of the unknown, also notes how both the Archbishop and the Dalai Lama are masters of using humour to connect and forge relationships while meeting others.

3. Laughter as a fundamental human expression by lowering grief, anxiety and dissipating tension – even in the most adverse, tragic situations has the effect of implanting in the mind a Zen like serenity resulting in a subconscious meditative state and life becoming a celebration. Nay sayers may equate laughter to reflecting a somewhat lack of seriousness about life, to which the definitive answer is laughter as an antidote to the ego is a pure expression of the most joyous feelings and above all an intensely spiritual exercise – even bordering sometimes on praying. The capability to laugh is the ultimate route to inner joy and the most accessible path to turn adversity into opportunity. And, of course, the added capability to laugh at yourself is the proverbial icing on the cake with the approbation of society to such a quality being the added bonus.

4. Even the scriptures spanning all Religions and eons of Centuries recognize and emphasize the role of laughter. To take an example, the “Nāṭyaśāstra” (often described as the “Fifth Veda”) composed by the Sage Bharata Muni while in itself a comprehensive philosophy of human expression talks of “Hāsya Rasa” to experience the delight born of humour – it elevates laughter from being just a reaction to a refined authentic experience to be savoured.

5. The following words attributed to the Sage J Krishnamurti who, of course, was famously known for his love of jokes and the ability to portray an almost perpetually smiling countenance beautifully captures the essence of laughter:

“There is also laughter in life;

Laughter is a lovely thing;

To laugh without reason;

To have joy in one’s heart without cause;

To love without seeking anything in return.”

6. The following quote (the source of which I have not been able to discover) also perpetually encapsulates the essence of laughter by emphasizing that joy and peace are not mutually exclusive but rather work in tandem to aid navigation in an uncertain, dynamic and complex world:

“Laugh gently, for the world is already burdened;

Laugh kindly, for every face hides a story;

Laugh invariably and you will find peace does not resist joy;

Laughter by fostering inward harmony reduces fear and preserves freedom of spirit.”

BCAS Foundation Annual Activities Report 2025-2026

During the year 2025–26, the BCAS Foundation continued its commitment to social development by undertaking and supporting a wide range of initiatives in the areas of education, environment, healthcare, skill development, women empowerment, and community welfare. Through strategic partnerships and direct interventions, the Foundation strengthened its efforts to create sustainable impact in underserved communities.

Education had always remained one of the key focus areas of the Foundation. The Foundation extended substantial assistance to institutions serving tribal and rural communities, with a focus on infrastructure development and improving learning conditions.

A major initiative undertaken during the year was the support extended to the V.K. Lakhani School.

BCAS Foundation 1

BCAS Foundation 2

The Foundation sanctioned financial assistance of ` 6 lakhs for essential repairs to the school infrastructure, specifically, roof restoration and refurbishment of the science laboratory. The work was completed successfully during the year, and the school submitted the required documentation evidencing proper utilisation of the funds. Trustees visited the school personally to inspect the completed work and appreciated the positive outcomes achieved through the project.

The interaction with the school also led to discussions on future development possibilities. During the visit, it was observed that the school required extensive structural repairs estimated at approximately ` 20 lakhs. Discussions were initiated to mobilise additional resources through member contributions and fundraising efforts. A proposal to establish a vocational skills development centre on the school campus was also discussed, recognising the employment opportunities expected to arise in the surrounding region due to the upcoming Vadhvan Port development. This initiative is expected to become a significant long-term project for the Foundation.

The Foundation also continued its association with the digital classroom initiative. This year, on 2nd August, 2025, the Foundation donated 5 digital classrooms to the V. K. Lakhani High School, Bordi. President Zubin F. Billimoria along with other trustees of the Foundation and a group of 25 volunteers visited Bordi school during the inauguration function. Trustees and volunteers visited the tribal schools in Talasari, Bordi and Umargam areas to review the implementation of digital classrooms introduced earlier with the Foundation’s support. The visit provided an opportunity to assess the effectiveness of technology-enabled learning in rural educational settings and reaffirmed the Foundation’s commitment to educational advancement in tribal areas.

BCAS Foundation 3

BCAS Foundation 4

Further, the Foundation extended support to Kumbharwadi Madhyamik School at Kolhapur by donating ₹2.5 lakhs towards the procurement of desks and benches for students. This assistance was aimed at improving the basic classroom environment and creating better learning conditions for students from economically weaker sections.

BCAS Foundation 5

This year, the Foundation also undertook the tree plantation programme in collaboration with Keshav Shrushti Foundation. The Tree Plantation Drive 2025 was conducted at Vada, Palghar. The initiative focused on increasing green cover and contributing to ecological conservation in the region.

A donation of ₹6.25 lakhs was collected to support the plantation programme. This initiative reflected the Foundation’s belief that environmental sustainability is an essential pillar of community development. The programme also facilitated active participation by members and strengthened collaboration with institutions dedicated to ecological preservation.

BCAS Foundation 6

BCAS Foundation 7

BCAS Foundation 8

The Foundation remained actively engaged in programmes aimed at enhancing employability and livelihood opportunities, particularly for women and underprivileged communities.

Its long-standing collaboration with the Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust continued during the year. The Foundation approved financial support of ₹5 lakhs for the Trust’s educational and skill-building activities. These initiatives included vocational training programmes aimed at equipping women and youth with practical skills for sustainable employment.

A report received from the Rangoonwala Centre highlighted the launch of a new community skills development programme. The same was formally taken on record by the Trustees as part of the Foundation’s ongoing developmental work. The programme aligns closely with BCAS Foundation’s objective of empowering communities through skill enhancement and self-reliance.

BCAS Foundation 9
Further, representatives of the Foundation attended the Women’s Day celebrations organised by Rangoonwala Foundation. During the event, women who had successfully completed beautician training courses were felicitated. Several of these beneficiaries had received sponsorship support under the BCAS Foundation’s skill development programme. This initiative showcased the direct impact of the Foundation’s support in creating employment opportunities and encouraging economic independence among women.

The Foundation also supported women’s empowerment initiatives under the CA-Thon programme. As part of this initiative, five sewing machines were donated to beneficiaries to enable income generation through tailoring and related vocational activities. The total expenditure for this programme was ₹92,500. This project was recognised as a meaningful contribution to empowering women through self-employment.

The Foundation, jointly with the Seminar, Membership & Public Relations Committee of BCAS, organised the annual Blood Donation Drive in association with Tata Memorial Hospital. The event received enthusiastic participation from members, office bearers, past presidents, and staff. A total of 54 eligible donors contributed blood during the drive.

BCAS Foundation 10

The programme also included a Platelet Donation Awareness Campaign, which helped educate participants about platelet donation and assess their eligibility for future participation. NSS volunteers from H.R. College of Commerce & Economics and Dharma Bharathi Mission played an active role in raising awareness and securing donor support. Donors were felicitated with “Life Saver” medals in recognition of their contribution to this noble cause.

BCAS Foundation 11
In addition, the Foundation has decided to donate ₹3 lakhs to Dignity Foundation to support its welfare programmes focused on senior citizens and community well-being. This continued the Foundation’s broader engagement with healthcare and social support institutions.

BCAS Foundation 12

The Foundation made significant progress in operationalising the Shri P. N. Shah Memorial Endowment Fund, an important initiative established to provide financial assistance to deserving students pursuing the CA curriculum.

During the year, the Trustees deliberated on the fund’s utilisation framework and constituted a dedicated committee comprising trustees and office bearers to identify appropriate beneficiaries and recommend support mechanisms. As part of due diligence, it was decided that applicants seeking assistance should provide recommendation letters, preferably from BCAS members, to ensure transparency and effective utilisation.

BCAS Foundation 13

BCAS Foundation 14

The first instalment of scholarship support under the Endowment Fund was disbursed during the year, with selected beneficiaries receiving `37,500 each. This marked the formal commencement of the scholarship programme under the fund.

A significant development during the year was the receipt of a generous contribution of `21 lakhs from CA Anil Kumar Desai to the Shri P. N. Shah Memorial Endowment Fund.

The year 2025–26 was marked by purposeful growth in the Foundation’s outreach and impact. Through support to schools, environmental initiatives, healthcare programmes, women empowerment activities, and scholarship assistance, the BCAS Foundation continued to translate its vision of social responsibility into meaningful action.

INTERNATIONAL YOGA DAY CELEBRATIONS

On June 21, 2026, the BCAS Foundation organized “International Yoga Day Celebrations” Jointly with the Human Resource Committee of the BCAS and MaBap Foundation at Shree Goghari Lohana Bhuvan, Paliram Road, Andheri West, Mumbai 400058. In Andheri East, Mumbai, the event was co-organized with MaBap.

Mr. Pradeep Thakkar, the accredited Yoga Trainer, conducted the session.

The takeaways from the workshop are briefly given below:

BCAS Foundation 15

  1.  Participants were guided to do various exercises and were explained the benefits of doing the exercises.
  2.  The exercises dealt with Asanas and tips for Osteoarthritis, Knee Pain, Blood Pressure, Diabetes and a lot more.
  3.  Also, breathing exercises, along with their benefits, were explained to the participants.
  4. The benefits of yoga for Flexibility, Strength and overall health were explained in detail.

Dr CA Mayur Nayak, a Certified Yoga Teacher, assisted in the conduct of the Yoga Session and ensured the smooth conduct of the yoga. BCAS Foundation was also awarded with the Certificate of Recognition from the Ministry of Ayush.

BCAS Foundation 17

BCAS Foundation 18

We take this opportunity to thank all our donors, volunteers, sister NGOs, office bearers of schools, Office Bearers and the Staff of BCAS, participants of all conferences/seminars at BCAS, for their continued support and encouragement to carry out some noble work to make a positive difference to the world. We also thank all beneficiaries and students/children for giving BCAS Foundation the opportunity to serve them.

We welcome suggestions and volunteering. Kindly send volunteering requests to

bcasfoundation@bcasonline.org

Best Regards,

For BCAS Foundation

Trustees

Learning Events At BCAS

1. Webinar on the Procedural Aspects of GSTAT held on Friday, 12th June 2026 @ Virtual

The Indirect Tax Committee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society (BCAS) successfully organized a webinar on “Procedural Aspects of GSTAT” on 12 June 2026.The webinar received an enthusiastic response from the professional community and was attended virtually by more than 700 members.

The session aimed to provide participants with practical insights into the procedural framework and operational aspects of the Goods and Services Tax Appellate Tribunal (GSTAT). The keynote address was delivered by Hon’ble Justice (Retd.) Dr. Sanjaya Kumar Mishra, President of GSTAT and Former Chief Justice of the Jharkhand High Court.

During the keynote session, valuable perspectives were shared regarding the role, functioning, and significance of GSTAT in the indirect tax dispute resolution mechanism. The technical session was conducted by Shri Vivek Chandel, Senior Consultant, NIC, who explained various technological and procedural facets associated with GSTAT.

The panelists highlighted practical aspects and key procedural considerations relevant for tax professionals and stakeholders in the interactive Question & Answer session, which was conducted after the above sessions, enabling participants to seek clarifications and engage directly with the experts and the same was skillfully moderated by CA Mandar Telang, who seamlessly guided the proceedings and facilitated meaningful engagement throughout the session.

The webinar concluded on a highly informative and engaging note, with participants appreciating the quality of discussions and practical insights shared during the session.

Scan to watch online at Youtube

Procedural Aspects of GSTAT

2. Finance, Corporate & Allied Laws Study Circle – Climate Finance: Opportunities, Regulations & Future Outlook held on Friday, 5th June 2026 @ Virtual

The study circle was led by Dr. Chetana Asbe, who is certified in Climate Finance by CFA Institute. She commenced the session with climate fundamentals and key concepts. She broadly covered the following aspects in the session.

– Climate Finance’s scope, Ecosystem, Global and Indian regulatory landscape.

– Impact of Climate change on the business and finance.

– professional responsibility and opportunities in Climate Finance.

The interactive format of the session, complemented by practical examples, made it highly engaging. The session was insightful, and all participant queries were comprehensively addressed by Dr. Chetana Asbe

3. AI Adoption & Peer Review Readiness held on Friday, 29th May 2026 @ BCAS

The Accounting & Auditing Committee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society organised this full-day hybrid programme at BCAS Hall, Mumbai and through Zoom. The seminar focused on the practical implementation of Artificial Intelligence in professional practice, together with ICAI Peer Review preparedness and Audit Quality Maturity Model (AQMM) implementation. The programme witnessed participation from around 93 members across physical and virtual modes.

The programme commenced with an inaugural and overview session by CA Raman Jokhakar, setting the context on the growing role of technology and quality frameworks in the profession. CA Devang Doshi conducted an insightful session on practical use cases of AI tools in Audit and Tax, demonstrating how professionals can leverage AI for efficiency, automation and better decision-making.

CA Murtaza Ghadiali delivered a practical session on the use cases of IDEA software in Audit, Income Tax and GST assignments, highlighting data analytics and risk identification techniques. The post-lunch session by CA Amruta Kulkarni focused on Peer Review preparedness, covering documentation standards, quality control measures and practical expectations during peer review processes.

The programme concluded with an informative session by CA Padmashree Crasto on practical implementation aspects of the Audit Quality Maturity Model (AQMM), helping participants understand structured approaches towards enhancing audit quality and compliance standards.

The seminar witnessed enthusiastic participation and interactive discussions throughout the day, providing members with practical insights into integrating technology with professional compliance and audit quality requirements.

Scan to watch online at BCAS Academy

AI Adoption & Peer Review

4. Direct Tax Laws Study Circle Meeting on Reassessment Provisions Under Income Tax Act 2025 held on Thursday 28th May 2026 @ Virtual.

The Direct Tax Laws Committee of BCAS organised this study circle session, covering the legal framework, judicial precedents, and practical strategies for handling reassessment notices.

1. Section 279 – AO can reassess escaped income and recompute losses/deductions. Reassessment is not a tool for review (CIT vs. Kelvinator of India Ltd.).

2. Reopening Notice (Sections 280 & 281) – Notice requires specific ‘information’ of escaped income; change of opinion does not suffice. Section 281 mandates a prior SCN with the information and an opportunity of hearing.

3. Section 282 – General limit: 4 years 3 months; extended to 6 years 3 months if escaped income ≥ Rs. 50 lakhs. No notice within 1 year from end of tax year.

4. Judicial Precedents – Reopening quashed on: no new material (Sapphire Foods, Alkem Laboratories); wrong authority (Skypak Travels); natural justice violation (Rajesh Kumar Agarwal); income below Rs. 50 lakh threshold (Sanath Kumar Murali).

5. JAO-FAO Controversy – Finance Act, 2026 retrospectively clarified via Section 147A (w.e.f. 1 April 2021) that JAO conducts the pre-assessment inquiry; NFAC completes reassessment in a faceless manner.

6. Validity of Section 147A – Sub judice before multiple High Courts; SC directed disposal by 30 September 2026. Pending writ petitions have an interim stay on reassessment proceedings.

7. Strategy – Raise all arguments at the first instance: change of opinion, time bar, wrong authority. Evaluate merits and exposure before choosing tax proceedings or writ petition.

The session was well-attended and generated active participation, providing practical clarity on the evolving reassessment framework under the Income Tax Act, 2025.

Speaker: Ujjval Gangwal, Khaitan & Co

5. ITF Study Circle meeting on “Recent Ruling in case of Bank of India on Issue of Foreign Tax Credit” held on 19th May 2026@ Virtual.

The Chairman of the session addressed the participants on the key aspects of the Background and Core Issues discussed in the Judgement. Thereafter, the Group Leader explained the nuances of the Foreign Tax Credit and the requirement to be subject to tax. He further analysed the key findings of the ruling for Assessment Year 2012–13, highlighting the critical considerations and judicial reasoning adopted. This was followed by a comparative discussion on Assessment Year 2013–14, wherein he elaborated on the nuanced distinctions and their implications

The session concluded with closing remarks from both the Chairman and the Group Leader, effectively summarising the deliberations and reinforcing the key takeaways for the participants

Speaker: Chairman of the session – CA Mayur Desai

Group Leader – CA Pranay Gandhi

6 Finance, Corporate & Allied Laws Study Circle – Virtual CFO Services & GCC: Emerging Opportunities for Professionals held on Saturday, 16th May 2026 @ Virtual.

The study circle was led by Ms. Kaveri Venkataraman, the learned speaker, who conducted an insightful session on emerging and non-conventional service offerings for chartered accountants, with a focus on roles such as Chief Financial Officer (CFO) and Global Capability Centers (GCC). Ms. Kaveri took the participants through the journey of virtual CFO in India – evolution to date. She highlighted that the extensive and rigorous training undergone by Chartered Accountants provides them with a distinct advantage over others in delivering such service offerings. She also emphasized the importance of keeping pace with technological advancements, particularly in the field of artificial intelligence, alongside developing complementary skill sets. The discussion on commonly encountered challenges and their proven solutions was particularly valuable and insightful

Ms. Kaveri also dealt with GCCs, inter alia, comprising its evolution types, finance function, career arch, etc. She also guided on ‘must have skills’ as well as ‘good to have skills’ to gain an advantage in service offerings. Her real-world examples, case studies, summarizing the options available along with a range of compensation trends for such services, added value to the session like icing on the cake.

Ms. Kaveri satisfactorily replied to all queries of the attendees. 75+ participants benefited from this session and expressed their appreciation.

7. FEMA Study Circle Meeting on FEMA Implications Arising Out of Cross-Border Structuring held on Friday, 8th May 2026 @Virtual.

The session examined FEMA implications across five areas of cross-border structuring –

Part I – Cross-border investment / acquisitions

  • Deferred consideration between PROI and PRII is capped at 25% of the total consideration with an 18-month timeline; transfers between two PROIs face no such restriction. Partly paid equity shares may be issued to PROIs with 25% upfront and balance within 12 months, whereas CCPS and CCDs must be fully paid-up. ODI regulations are comparatively flexible, permitting deferred consideration and indemnity obligations as contractually agreed between parties, subject to FEMA compliance.’
  • Press Note 3 of 2020 mandated Government Approval for investments from land-border countries (LBCs). Press Note 2 of 2026, implemented via the FEM (NDI) Amendment Rules 2026, expands this further covering direct LBC holdings, beneficial ownership via non-LBC entities exceeding 10% under PMLA, and cumulative indirect LBC holdings with drafting ambiguities persisting on aggregation.

Part II – Cross-border mergers

  • Inbound Mergers: The foreign company merges into Indian company subject to NDI Rules. RBI deemed approval available where the merger satisfies the FEM (Cross Border Merger) Regulations, 2018. Post-merger, overseas investments, ODI structures, and foreign assets acquired by Indian Company must be regularised within prescribed timelines.
  • Issuance of RPS to PROIs: While NCLT-approved merger schemes permit issuance of equity instruments to non-resident shareholders under the NDI Rules, the issuance of RPS or OCRPS remains contentious since such instruments are generally classified as debt instruments under FEMA. Consequently, their issuance may fall outside the automatic route and potentially require RBI approval and compliance with ECB regulations.
  • Outbound Merger: The Indian company merges into foreign entity and resident shareholders receive foreign securities, which are treated as ODI/OPI and must comply with the ODI framework with practical challenges including LRS constraints, host jurisdiction restrictions, and absence of tax neutrality under Indian tax laws.

Part III – ODI transaction

  • Investment in foreign startups (classified as “strategic sector”) is restricted to internal accruals for Indian entities, and own funds for resident individuals. For foreign startups with unlimited liability, any financial commitment may be regarded as exceeding the ODI limit, potentially requiring Central Government approval under the OI Rules.
  • SAFE Notes (Simple Agreement for Future Equity) raise interpretational questions on whether they qualify as “equity capital” under the OI Rules.
  • OI Rules restricts financial commitments in foreign entities that re-invest into India to two subsidiary layers. For resident individuals, ODI is further limited to operating entities not engaged in financial services and no subsidiary or SDS where individual has control. The definition of “control” creates interpretive challenges in multi-party structures.

Part IV – Conversions

  • Company ↔ LLP: Conversion of a company with foreign investment into an LLP is permitted under the automatic route where 100% FDI is allowed and no FDI-linked performance conditions apply. However, companies with outstanding ECBs may face compliance challenges, as LLPs were not recognised as eligible borrowers under the erstwhile ECB framework. Further issues arise where companies holding FDI-linked downstream investments seek conversion into LLPs. Conversion of an LLP (with foreign interest) into a company generally provides broader sectoral eligibility.
  • FDI ↔ ECB: While ECB to FDI conversion is expressly permitted under FEMA, conversion of FDI instruments (e.g., CCPS) into debt instruments (e.g., OCRPS) raises issues regarding prior RBI approval, ECB compliance, assured exit concerns, and whether such amendments constitute as transfer under the NDI Rules.

Part V – Repatriation

  • Capital reduction and buybacks involving PROI shareholders are treated as transfers under the NDI Rules, attracting pricing guidelines, reporting requirements, and applicable government approvals.
  • Resident shareholder buybacks of an Indian company may inadvertently increase foreign shareholding beyond the applicable sectoral cap, potentially triggering sectoral approval concerns despite no fresh foreign investment being received.

Closing Thoughts

  • FEMA an evolving and incomplete framework, early engagement with RBI is often preferable to relying on assumptions.
  • The foundational rule of FEMA – “What cannot be done directly, cannot be done indirectly.”

Group Leader – CA Parag Kiri, Partner at TransEdge Advisory LLP

Chairman – CA Shabbir Motorwala

8. Workshop on New Look at Proven Principles of Professional Success held on Saturday 25th April 2026 & Saturday 09th May 2026 @ BCAS

The Human Resources Development Committee Organized this half-day workshop spread over two days The speaker Mr. Walter Vieira explained the various Proven Principles for Professional Success, especially considering the current circumstances today. Through a combination of lectures and group discussions, he brought out the practical aspects of challenges faced today and how proven principles can be adjusted to achieve success.

The takeaways from the workshop are briefly given below:

  1. How every CA needs to ideally convert the Profession into a passion.
  2. The Group dealt with the Pros and Cons for CA’s in different categories – Single/Partners/Senate/SMP.
  3. The Workshop also dealt with (i) The Role of an Independent (ii) The Role as an Independent and (iii) The Role of a Team Player. Participants were encouraged to assess their strengths and preferences to determine the role in which they can contribute most effectively
  4. The Workshop discussed the critical role of ethics in the profession, especially in the context of ‘Intrapreneurship’ and ‘Extrapreneurship’
  5. Working “Ethically” becomes much easier if each one subscribes to a list of Nine values articulated by Cyrus Vance were discussed at length.
  6. The session highlighted communication as one of the fundamental pillars of success across professions. It was discussed that communication can manifest in both overt and covert forms, each significantly influencing professional outcomes. Participants actively engaged in group discussions, sharing illustrative examples of both effective and ineffective communication practices. A presentation was also made on the themes of jealousy and envy, examining how these emotions often surface through communication patterns and can adversely impact professional relationships. It was observed that such factors have, in several instances, contributed to setbacks in the careers of professionals.
  7. Networking: The session also covered the importance of networking, with particular emphasis on building a strong managerial network to enhance professional performance and expand career opportunities. It further explored networking across various dimensions, including within the organization, the profession, peer groups at similar levels, and shared interests such as music and sports.
  8. How do you assess yourself- Additionally, participants were encouraged to undertake self-assessment to determine their preferred career path, whether to function as an independent professional or to operate within the structured environment of a corporate framework.

Workshop on New Look at Proven Principles of Professional Success

9. Direct Tax Home Refresher Course – 7 held on Saturday 25th April 2026 to Saturday 9th May 2026 @ Virtual

The Direct Tax Committee of BCAS successfully organized the Direct Tax Home Refresher Course 7 (DTHRC 7) jointly with 14 professional organizations from across the country, namely:

  • Association of Chartered Accountants, Chennai
  • Chartered Accountants Association, Ahmedabad
  • Chartered Accountants Association Surat
  • CA Association of Jalandhar
  • The Chartered Accountants Study Circle, Chennai
  • Hyderabad Chartered Accountants Society
  • Karnataka State Chartered Accountants’ Association
  • Lucknow Chartered Accountants’ Society
  • Goa Chamber of Commerce and Industry
  • Tax Practitioners’ Association, Indore
  • Jaipur Chartered Accountants’ Group
  • All India Federation of Tax Practitioners (Western Zone)
  • Bbdbag Professional Association, Kolkata
  • Maharashtra Tax Practitioners Association, Pune

The virtual refresher course was conducted over 7 days from 25 April 2026 to 9 May 2026 and comprised 14 technical sessions covering important and contemporary developments under the Income-tax Act, 2025 and allied tax laws.

The topics covered during the course included:

  1. Income-tax Act, 2025 – Structural Overview and Key Conceptual Changes vis-à-vis the Income-tax Act, 1961
  2. Technology, Artificial Intelligence and Data Analytics in Tax Practice
  3. Practical Issues relating to TDS/TCS – Outreach Programme
  4. TDS & TCS Regime under the Income-tax Act, 2025
  5. Salary Income under the New Income-tax Act, 2025 – Computation Framework, Deductions and Rules
  6. Business Income under the New Income-tax Act, 2025 – Computation Framework, Deductions and Emerging Controversies
  7. Issues under Corporate Taxation including MAT, Business Reorganisation, Buy-back and Tax Schemes for Corporates
  8. Presumptive Taxation – Practical Issues and Case Studies
  9. Foreign Assets of Small Taxpayers – Disclosure Scheme (FAST-DS 2026)
  10. Charitable Trusts Taxation – Recent Amendments, Registration and Compliance Requirements
  11. Capital Gains relating to Real Estate Transactions and Redevelopment Issues
  12. Transfer Pricing – Documentation and Safe Harbour Updates
  13. Penalty Provisions, Immunity Provisions and Decriminalisation under Income-tax Law
  14. Recent Important Judicial Decisions covering various provisions of Direct Tax Laws

The distinguished speakers shared their deep insights on the evolving tax landscape, particularly the implementation and interpretation of the Income-tax Act, 2025, practical challenges faced by taxpayers and professionals, and the latest judicial and legislative developments. Each session concluded with an interactive question-and-answer segment, enabling participants to engage directly with the faculty and seek practical guidance on complex issues.

The course witnessed enthusiastic participation of more than 1500 tax professionals, chartered accountants, advocates, and industry representatives from across India, reaffirming the significance of DTHRC as a premier knowledge-sharing platform in the field of direct taxation. The collaborative efforts of BCAS and the 14 participating associations contributed immensely to the success of the programme and strengthened professional learning across the country.

Speakers: The faculty for the course comprised eminent professionals and subject matter experts, including Adv. K.K. Chythanya, CA Karthikeya Shenoy, Mr. Amit K Singh (JCIT-TDS, Mumbai), CA Sandeep Kumar Jain, CA Ravikant Kamat, CA Bhadresh Doshi, CA Dhinal Shah, CA Pankaj Agarwal, CA Rishab Aggarwal, CA Deven Shah, CA Jagdish Punjabi, CA Riddhi Shah, Sr. Adv Dr. K. Shivaram & Adv. Rahul Hakani, Adv T. Banusekar

Scan to watch online at BCAS Academy

Direct Tax Home Refresher Course

10. Indirect Tax Laws Study Circle Meeting on GST Issues in Manufacturing Sector held on Friday, 24th April 2026 @ Virtual.

The session was led by CA. Jinesh Shah (Group Leader) under the mentorship of Adv. (CA) Harsh Shah (mentor), and witnessed active participation from members across the fraternity.

The presentation covered the following aspects for a detailed discussion:

  • GST Implications on Volume Discounts

It focused on GST implications of primary discounts, volume discounts, retail incentive schemes, secondary discounts and return of expired or obsolete goods. Deliberations were made on the valuation provisions under Section 15, treatment of credit notes, post-sale discount mechanisms and the impact of recent GST clarifications.

  • Input Tax Credit (ITC) Challenges on Solar Power Plant

The Study Circle thereafter examined complex input tax credit issues arising in the context of captive solar power plants established by manufacturing companies. Deliberations centred around the GST implications of electricity generation, captive consumption through the power grid, sale of surplus electricity, admissibility of ITC on EPC contracts and the applicability of ITC reversal provisions under Sections 17(2), Rule 42 and Rule 43 of the CGST Rules

  • Supply of moulds and dies by a manufacturer to outsourced vendors on a free-of-cost basis.

Discussions were made as to whether such arrangements constitute a supply under GST, the admissibility of ITC on moulds, valuation implications and the applicability of Circular No. 47/21/2018-GST. The valuation treatment of scrap retained by job workers and its possible characterization as consideration in kind also generated significant discussion.

  • Eligibility of ITC on Expenses incurred for an Initial Public Offering

Discussions were made regarding whether IPO-related expenditure, such as merchant banker fees, legal expenses, listing fees and advertising costs, could be regarded as incurred in the course or furtherance of business and whether issuance of shares could be regarded as a transaction in securities requiring reversal of ITC under Section 17.

Around 147 participants from all over India benefited while taking an active part in the discussion. Participants appreciated the efforts of the group leader and the mentor.

11. ITF Study Circle Meeting on “Transfer Pricing Provisions under the New Income Tax Act, 2025 & Income Tax Rules, 2026 and Impact of the current Middle East crisis on Transfer Pricing” held on 23rd April 2026 @ Virtual.

The session commenced with the opening address by the session Chairman on the key aspects of the Transfer Pricing provisions under the New Income Tax Act, 2025. Subsequently, the Group Leader provided a detailed overview of the Transfer Pricing provisions of the New Income Tax Rules, 2026.

The participants discussed an issue regarding significant changes to the definition of ‘Associated Enterprises’ and debated the impact of the change, expressing divergent views.

The Group Leader discussed the changes in the forms under the New Income Tax Rules, 2026, dealing with the additional disclosures under the Transfer Pricing provisions The Group Leader discussed the nuances of the new Safe Harbour regime for software companies and its application. Further, the Group Leader discussed the impact of war and other significant economic events on Transfer Pricing and the approach to be adopted in determining arm’s length price. The participants debated the implications with many senior members sharing their past experiences in similar situations.

The session concluded with closing remarks by the Chairman of the session and the Group Leader.

Speaker: Chairman of the session – CA Natwar Thakrar, Group Leader – CA Namrata Dedhia

12. Future Ready CA Summit Vadodara held on Saturday 18th April 2026 @ Hotel Grand Mercure – Surya Palace, Vadodara

Under the BCAS Sherpa Initiative, the Society organized the full-day summit that brought together members and non-members to explore emerging opportunities, regulatory developments, and strategies for building future-ready professional practices.

Future Ready CA Summit

CA Zubin Billimoria, President of BCAS, and CA Kinjal Shah, Vice President of BCAS, addressed the participants and highlighted the significance of BCAS membership and the wide range of professional development initiatives undertaken by the Society.

CA Anand Sanghvi spoke on Strategic Practice Development – Domestic & Global Pathways for CA Firms, highlighting the need for firms to embrace global delivery models, technology, and cross-border competencies to remain competitive in an evolving professional landscape.

CA Chirag Doshi’s session on CA Firm’s Valuation focused on building institutional value through robust systems, processes, and intellectual capital, while providing insights into the key drivers of firm valuation.

A Brain Trust Session on case studies on Direct and Indirect Taxes, led by CA Anil Sathe and CA Jatin Harjai and ably moderated by CA Manish Baxi, provided practical insights into recent tax developments, judicial precedents, and emerging challenges in professional practice.

In line with the summit’s theme of being “Future Ready,” Adv. (CA) Kinjal Bhuta, Treasurer of BCAS, shared her perspectives on the transition of assessment provisions from the Income-tax Act, 1961 to the Income-tax Act, 2025 and its implications for tax professionals.

The summit featured engaging discussions, interactive Q&A sessions, and valuable networking opportunities, enabling participants to exchange ideas and gain practical insights. The event successfully reinforced the importance of strategic growth, continuous learning, and adaptability in preparing the profession for the future.

13. M&A Summit 2026 held on 17th April 2026 @ Ginger by Taj, Mumbai Airport.

The Finance, Corporate & Allied Laws Committee of BCAS organised the M&A Summit bringing together regulators, investors, legal professionals, transaction advisors and corporate leaders to discuss developments shaping the mergers and acquisitions landscape.

The summit was inaugurated by Chief Guest Mr. Deep Mani Shah, Chief General Manager, SEBI, who shared his perspectives on the evolving deal environment and the growing importance of governance, transparency and investor confidence in transactions.

Mr. Ashok Wadhwa, Group CEO, Ambit Private Limted, in his keynote address on “India’s M&A Outlook 2030: What’s Driving the Next Wave?”, shared perspectives on the evolving deal landscape, discussing the factors likely to shape M&A activity over the next decade, including consolidation trends, capital flows and strategic growth opportunities.

Discussions during the summit highlighted the evolving regulatory landscape, increasing investor participation and the growing complexity of transaction structuring in today’s deal environment.

Participants gained insights into key considerations influencing M&A transactions, including governance, financing, tax implications, ESG factors and cross-border regulatory challenges. The deliberations underscored the importance of balancing commercial objectives with legal, regulatory and stakeholder expectations while executing transactions.

Industry experts shared practical perspectives on value creation, risk management and successful deal execution in a dynamic business environment. The summit concluded with an engaging exchange of views on emerging opportunities, challenges and future trends shaping the Indian M&A ecosystem.

14. Multi-Stakeholder Workshop on Reforming Tax Policy Consultation in India held on Tuesday, 15th April 2026 @ Jolly Bhavan Hall – BCAS, Mumbai

The Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society (BCAS) partnered with the Bharti Institute of Public Policy (BIPP), Indian School of Business (ISB), to host a one-of-its-kind – Multi-Stakeholder Workshop on “Reforming Tax Policy Consultation in India” on 15th April 2026 at BCAS Office, Mumbai.

Multi-Stakeholder Workshop on Reforming Tax Policy Consultation in India

The workshop was organised as part of a larger research initiative by BIPP, ISB, promoted by the Consultative Group on Tax Policy (CGTP) at NITI Aayog, with the objective of developing a structured and inclusive framework for tax policy consultation in India. The Delhi leg of this initiative was held on 23rd February 2026 at India Habitat Centre, New Delhi where BCAS was invited and participated. The Mumbai workshop represented the second leg of stakeholder engagement, with BCAS as the proud partner.

The proceedings commenced with key note address by Dr. Pushpinder S. Puniha, Chairperson of the Consultative Group on Tax Policy at NITI Aayog who spoke for building a more consultative and collaborative policy ecosystem in India. This was followed by address of Dr. Aarushi Jain, Director Policy and Head, Government Affairs, at the BIPP, ISB, who emphasized the need to move from ad hoc consultation to a predictable process that strengthens trust between the government, the profession, and citizens.

The workshop was structured into two focused rounds of deliberation. The first round brought together senior tax practitioners to discuss the ground-level realities of how policy changes affect compliance and advisory work. The discussion provided suggestions on how the government could make consultations more structured and outcome-linked. The second round engaged corporate representatives of industry bodies. This group brought a complementary perspective — that of taxpayers navigating complex compliance landscapes while also trying to plan long-term investments.

Together, both rounds of discussion were practical, bringing in ground-level experiences, and provided recommendations that will provide meaningful inputs for a framework for tax policy consultation. The insights from the discussions will feed directly into the study’s final framework to be presented to NITI Aayog.
The workshop reflected BCAS’s enduring commitment to advocacy and contributing constructively to public policy processes that positively impacts the profession.

15. “Empowering the Profession — A BCAS Outreach on Firm Growth & Income Tax Imperatives” event held on 11th April 2026 at ICAI Bhawan, Indore.

On the sidelines of BCAS 30th International Taxation and Finance Conference, the Society conducted an Outreach Program in Indore jointly with the Indore Branch of CIRC of ICAI and the Tax Practitioners Association, Indore.

Empowering the Profession — A BCAS Outreach on Firm Growth & Income Tax Imperatives

The program was conducted on Saturday, 11th April 2026 at the ICAI Bhawan Indore from 4.30 pm to 6.30 pm. CA Samkit Bhandari, Chairman of ICAI Indore Branch along with CA. Vijay Bansal, President TPA Indore gave the welcome address. The CA Megha Jain, Treasurer of the Indore Branch Moderated the program. Then the President of BCAS, CA. Zubin Billimoria addressed the participants in which he made them aware about various initiatives, courses, activities conducted by the Society.

CA Shariq Contactor, spoke on the topic “India’s Big Four Moment: Are we Ready to Lead the World?”.

His session was followed by panel discussion, where the panellists CA. Jagdish Punjabi and CA. Naman Shrimal along with CA. Manish Dafria as moderator, enshrined on important practical issues under the Income-tax Act revolving around following topics:

  1.  Taxation of real estate transactions; and
  2.  TDS & TCS.

The co-ordination for this Outreach Program was done by CA. Chaitanya Maheshwari and CA. Chirayu Sodani.

The program was attended by about 50 participants.

II. BCAS IN NEWS & MEDIA

  •  BCAS has been featured in several news and media platforms, showing our active involvement, professional contributions, and commitment to the field. This reflects the growing recognition of BCAS in the public and professional space.

Link: https://bcasonline.org/bcas-in-news/

QR code

News and Views

Regulatory Referencer

I. FEMA

1. RBI issues framework for outward remittance services by non-bank entities through AD Category-I banks

Para 10 of the Master Direction – ‘Miscellaneous’ which provided a framework under which non-bank entities could obtain specific approval from RBI for tie-up arrangements with Authorised Dealers (AD) for facilitating international money transfers through third-party digital platforms has been deleted. The AD is now responsible to comply with instructions furnished in Annex to the Circular while facilitating cross-border outward remittance of funds for non-trade current account transactions using third party entity in online mode. To protect consumers, the third-party interface must prominently display the AD’s name, role, and category, the quoted foreign exchange (FX) rate with its timestamp and validity, a transparent breakdown of the total estimated transaction costs (separately outlining the interbank rate, mark-up, and service charges), the exact foreign exchange amount to be credited, the maximum credit timeline, and grievance contact details.

(A.P. (DIR Series 2026-27) Circular No.10, dated 13th May 2026)

2. AD Category-I banks must submit monthly BO/LO/PO and NRO remittance returns

The Reserve Bank of India has issued a new directive mandating that Category-I Authorised Dealer banks to electronically submit monthly data regarding the establishment and closure of Branch, Liaison, and Project Offices using return code R343 on the Centralized Information Management System (CIMS) starting 30 June 2026. Additionally, the reporting of fund transfers from Non-Resident (Ordinary) Rupee accounts must now be processed through the same digital portal under return code R006.

(A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 12, dated 5th June 2026)

3. RBI allows AD banks to exclude FCNR (B), ECB & forex swap positions from NOP-INR limits

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) mandated that Authorised Dealers must ensure their Net Open Positions involving the Indian Rupee (NOP-INR) in the onshore deliverable market do not exceed USD 100 million at the end of each business day as per A.P. (DIR SERIES 2025-26) Circular No. 24, dated 27th March 2026 included in BCAJ May 2026 edition.

Through this circular, the RBI provided a specific relaxation to AD Category-I banks regarding how they calculate this limit. Banks are permitted to exclude swap positions that arise from Foreign Currency Non-Resident (B), or FCNR (B), deposits, External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) and Overseas Foreign Currency Borrowings.

(A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 13, dated 8th June 2026)

II. IFSCA

1) IFSCA Circular on FLA Return Obligations for GIFT City Financial Institutions

The International Financial Services Centres Authority (IFSCA) has issued an advisory to all Financial Institutions operating in GIFT IFSC drawing their attention to Q. Nos. 43, 44 and 45 of the RBI’s updated FAQs on the Annual Return on Foreign Liabilities and Assets (FLA) under FEMA, 1999 (updated as on March 25, 2026) which provided that the entities registered in IFSC shall also file the FLA Returns. The Authority has noted that the implications of the said FAQs are presently under discussion with the Reserve Bank of India, and has accordingly directed Financial Institutions to refrain from taking any action on the matter until further instructions are issued.

(Circular No. IFSCA-BDev0DEAC/1/2026 dated 1st May 2026)

2) IFSCA issues Master Circular for Broker Dealers and Clearing Members in GIFT IFSC

The IFSCA issued a comprehensive Master Circular for Broker Dealers and Clearing Members in GIFT IFSC, consolidating past circulars into a single, unified regulatory framework. It aligns with the CMI Regulations and supersedes various IFSCA Circulars issued between 2021 to 2025 and all applicable SEBI circulars issued prior to October 1, 2020, streamlining compliance and bolstering risk management. The Master Circular is organised across eleven chapters covering the full lifecycle of a Broker Dealer or Clearing Member, from registration and eligibility through ongoing supervision, technology and conduct obligations, to surrender of registration.

(Circular No. IFSCA/CMD/MIIT/MCBDCM/2026 and Press release dated 12th May 2026 )

3) IFSCA issues clarification on implementation services framework for Investment Advisers in IFSC

IFSCA issued a circular concerning the provision of implementation services by Investment Advisers in the International Financial Services Centre (“Circular”). The Circular is issued under the IFSCA (Capital Market Intermediaries) Regulations, 2025 (“CMI Regulations”), which, inter alia, permit investment advisers, in the IFSC, to provide implementation services to advisory client in securities market. By way of this Circular it is clarified that the term “implementation services” shall refer to the services provided for the purpose of executing or giving effect to the Investment Advice rendered by the Investment Adviser. It prevents investment advisors from functioning as unregulated brokers or distributors. It also protects investors through regulated execution channels, prescribes separate mechanism for foreign listed, IFSC listed and unlisted products.

(Circular No. E.F.No .IFSCA-PLNP/94/2025- Capital Markets dated 12th May 2026)

4) IFSC Authority updates consolidated framework for ship leasing activities in IFSCs

The IFSCA has issued a comprehensive regulatory framework to govern ship leasing operations within IFSC from time to time. Originally, the framework has been issued on 16th August 2022 which was last amended up to 7th April, 2025 incorporating all the intervening amendments. The IFSCA has again updated the said framework on 20th May, 2026 incorporating the amendments to the framework introduced through ‘IFSCA-FCR0SL/25/2025-Banking/2026-27/01’ dated April 22, 2026 doing away with the carve-out requiring a separate ancillary services authorisation for such Asset Management Support Services. The framework overall classifies operating and financial leases as distinct financial products, outlining specific capital requirements and licensing fees for each category. Prospective lessors must register through a digital single window and may operate as companies, trusts, or partnerships, provided they meet strict anti-money laundering and eligibility standards. Beyond basic leasing, the guidelines permit ancillary activities such as voyage charters and asset management support, provided the entities maintain adequate foreign currency reserves. Furthermore, the framework imposes rigorous compliance and reporting obligations to ensure transparency and financial stability in the maritime sector.

(Circular No. 496/IFSCA/FC/SLF/2022-23/001, dated 16th August 2026 and updated up to 20th May 2026)

5) IFSCA cautions IFSC entities on cyber risks arising from frontier AI models

The IFSCA has issued an advisory highlighting heightened cyber security risks arising from frontier AI models, which can significantly accelerate identification and exploitation of vulnerabilities. Regulated Entities in IFSCs have been advised to reassess cyber security risks, strengthen monitoring and detection capabilities, maintain software inventories, assess third-party risks & implement appropriate safeguards while deploying AI-assisted vulnerability management tools.

(Circular No. IFSCA-CSD/MSC/3/2026-DCS dated 4th June 2026)

6) IFSCA issues formats for reporting requirements prescribed in regulation 25 and 27 of CMI Regulations.

International Financial Services Centres Authority (Capital Market Intermediaries) Regulations, 2025 (“CMI Regulations”), under regulation 25 requires CMIs to conduct an annual audit in respect of their compliance with CMI Regulations and submit a copy of such compliance audit report to the Authority. Also, under regulation 27, it provides that CMIs, including broker dealers, desirous of dealing in securities in foreign jurisdictions, shall comply with the norms and requirements specified by the Authority. Therefore, IFSCA has issued reporting formats and norms for annual compliance audits of Capital Market Intermediaries (CMIs) in IFSCs. Accordingly, all categories of CMIs must submit a copy of the Annual Compliance Audit Report (ACAR) along with the Annual Compliance Audit Checklist (ACAC) to the Authority in the specified format by September 30th of each year for the preceding financial year. Further, Global Access Providers have been directed to file ACAR and ACAC to the IFSCA annually in the formats specified therein. Along with the formats, the IFSCA has also provided the clarification on the criteria for appointment of the Compliance Auditor.

(Circular No. IFSCA-DSI/1/2026-Capital Markets dated 5th June 2026)

7) IFSCA issues master circular for Stock Exchanges and Clearing Corporations in IFSCs

IFSCA has issued a Master Circular for recognised Stock Exchanges and recognised Clearing Corporations in IFSC. The Master Circular consolidates various circulars and guidelines relating to trading, settlement, technology, governance, risk management, business continuity, reporting requirements and other operational aspects applicable to Market Infrastructure Institutions (MIIs) in IFSC. The circular supersedes various circular issued by the IFSCA previously and all circulars and guidelines issued by SEBI prior to October 1, 2020.

(Master Circular IFSCA/CMD/MIIT/MCSECC/2026-27 dated 5th June 2026)

Tech Mantra

ReAlarm – Alarm Clock for Heavy Sleepers

Transform your habits with ReAlarm, the advanced smart interval alarm clock built especially for heavy sleepers who struggle to wake up on time. Stay perfectly notified with powerful scheduling and wake-up tools!

You can customize your alarms for daily, weekly, monthly, and other schedules. It supports very long repeat intervals with gradual volume increase. You may choose from built-in tones or add yours. Smart Wake-Up Challenges are available for Heavy Sleepers, includingMath Problems, QR Code Scanner, Walk to Dismiss and many more!

It also features a smart snooze system. You can customize the snooze duration and even make the snooze interval progressively shorter. Weather integration is also built-in, with an elaborate real-time weather display. You can set quiet hours to prevent alarms during certain times and change themes too!

A very customisable alarm clock for heavy sleepers, designed to help them wake up or be reminded of tasks more assertively!

Android : https://tinyurl.com/realarm

Google AI Edge Gallery – Minimalist Powerful AI for Android

Google

AI Edge Gallery is the premier destination for running the world’s most powerful open-source Large Language Models (LLMs) on your mobile device. Experience high-performance Generative AI directly on your hardware—fully offline, private, and lightning-fast.

It now features Gemma 4 which allowing you to test the cutting edge of on-device AI. Experience advanced reasoning, logic, and creative capabilities without ever sending your data to a server.

Core features include

Agent Skills: Transforming it from a conversationalist to a proactive assistant

AI Chat with Thinking Mode: Displays the reasoning that takes place behind the scenes to arrive at the final solution

Ask Image: Identify objects, solve visual puzzles, or get detailed descriptions using your device’s camera or gallery

Audio Scribe: Transcribe and Translate voice recordings into text in real time

and much more…..

AI Edge Gallery is an open-source project, free for all and designed for the developer community and AI enthusiasts alike. You can explore features, contribute your own skills, and help shape the future of the on-device agent ecosystem.

Android : https://tinyurl.com/gaiedge

Wispr Flow: AI Voice-to-Text

Wispr Flow
Talk naturally. Wispr Flow writes perfectly.

Wispr Flow is a voice-to-text accessibility tool for Android that turns rambling speech into perfectly formatted text, so you can just talk instead of type.

Unlike built-in voice dictation, Flow cleans up what you say as you speak. No filler words. No broken sentences. No reformatting before you hit send.

It works inside any app, including ChatGPT, WhatsApp, Instagram, Slack, and Gmail. It also eliminates filler words such as “ah” and “um” and accurately catches your corrections. Punctuation and formatting are automatic and you can train it to recognize new words that you use often.

Whether you’re texting friends, taking notes, drafting emails, or navigating pain, fatigue, or mobility challenges that make typing difficult, Wispr Flow makes it easier than ever to just talk instead of type. Flow supports users with motor impairments, Parkinson’s, arthritis, RSI, dyslexia, ADHD, stuttering, visual impairments, and more.

And the best part is that you can use it in 100+ languages: Communicate in the language that works best for you, including Español, Français, 中文, ไทย, हिन्दी, or Hinglish.

Very cool, one of my current favourites!

Android : https://tinyurl.com/wisprflo

Adaptive Volume

Adaptive
We have all been using Adaptive Display for a while – it adjusts the display based on the ambient light at that moment. This app does exactly that with sound – it adjusts the volume based on the ambient sounds around.

The app uses your microphone to detect ambient noise and intelligently increases or decreases the volume. Once installed, it runs quietly in the background and is lightweight and battery efficient. There is no data collection – everything is processed locally on your device.

Perfect for people who move between quiet offices, noisy streets, or busy cafes throughout the day.

Android : https://tinyurl.com/mvb37ba4

ICAI and Its Members

ICAI CODE ETHICS

The revised Code of Ethics, 2026 represents a significant modernization of the ethical framework governing Chartered Accountants. The overall direction of change is towards greater professional visibility, digital engagement, expansion of permissible services, recognition of emerging practice areas, and strengthening audit-related accountability and independence requirements.

The revised Code of Ethics (13th edition)- Volume-I, II & III is applicable with effect from April 01, 2026 except for the s.no. (xxxi).

  • The s.no. (xxxi) “Assessment and evaluation of Social Impact, CSR Impact, Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting, and the like” under Management Consultancy and other services issued under Section 2(2)(iv) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 in Code of Ethics, Volume-I, is effective from December 11, 2025.

The Code has been completely restructured:

  • Volume I now contains domestic ethical provisions and ICAI guidelines.
  • Link- https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92475coe2026v1.pdf

resourcecdnicaiorg

  • Volume II is aligned with the latest IESBA Code (2024 edition).
  • Link- https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92476coe2026v2.pdf

IESBA Code

  • Volume III introduces Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance.

  • Link- https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92477coe2026v3.pdf

Ethics Standards for Sustainability Assurance

  • The Case law referencer has been separated into an independent publication.

PUBLIC CONSULTATION

IAASB Consultation on Amendments – Working with Experts

The International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB) has issued a public consultation on narrow scope amendments to align its standards with recent revisions to the IESBA Code regarding the use of external experts.

The targeted amendments focus on the following IAASB standards:

  • ISA 620, Using the Work of an Auditor’s Expert
  • ISRE 2400 (Revised), Engagements to Review Historical Financial Statements
  • ISAE 3000 (Revised), Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information
  • ISRS 4400 (Revised), Agreed-upon Procedures Engagements

Stakeholders are invited to submit comments via the digital Response Template on the IAASB website by July 24, 2025.

Link: https://www.iaasb.org/publications/proposed-narrow-scope-amendments-iaasb-standards-arising-iesba-s-using-work-external-expert-project

IAASB

Announcement link: https://www.iaasb.org/news-events/2025-04/iaasb-requests-feedback-proposed-narrow-scope-amendments-related-working-experts utm_source=Main+List+New&utm_campaign=f2ddf45d11-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2025_04_25_09_11&utm_medium=email&utm_term=0_-f2ddf45d11-80733240

Announcement

ICAI PUBLICATIONS:

  • GST Act(s) and Rule(s) Bare Law: The revised (12th) edition of this publication has been updated with amendments up to 31st March 2026.

https://d23z1tp9il9etb.cloudfront.net/download/pdf26/GST%20Act(s)%20and%20Rule(s)-Bare%20Law.pdf

GST Act(s) and Rule(s) Bare Law

  • Handbook on Government Supplies under GST (Including TDS Provisions): This Handbook focuses specifically on the GST implications of supplies made to and by the Government and has been comprehensively updated up to 15th April, 2026.

https://d23z1tp9il9etb.cloudfront.net/download/pdf26/Handbook%20on%20Government%20Supplies%20under%20GST%20(IncludingTDS%20Provisions).pdf

Handbook on Government Supplies under GST

  • Practical Guide to GST Adjudication and Appeals including GSTAT

The GST & Indirect Taxes Committee of ICAI has released the Practical Guide to GST Adjudication and Appeals including GSTAT, updated to 31 March 2026. The Guide provides practical insights on handling GST disputes, demands, investigations, and appeals, with coverage of litigation strategy, drafting, evidence, revisionary proceedings, and ethics. It also includes a step by step guide to filing appeals on the GSTAT portal, equipping CAs to represent clients effectively across all stages of adjudication and appellate processes.

https://d23z1tp9il9etb.cloudfront.net/download/pdf26/Practical%20Guide%20to%20GST%20Adjudication%20and%20Appeals%20including%20GSTAT.pdf

Practical Guide

GIST OF OPINIONS

1. Capitalisation of Dry Dock Expenditure (Major Inspection Costs) as a Separate Component of Dredgers and Depreciation Thereon After Completion of Their Estimated Useful Lives

A. FACTS OF THE CASE

A public sector company engaged in dredging activities owned dredgers having an estimated useful life of 25 years. Out of 14 dredgers, 4 dredgers had completed their estimated useful life of 25 years but continued to operate. To continue operations, each dredger was required to undergo periodic inspections and obtain a fitness certificate from the Indian Register of Shipping (IRS). For this purpose, the company incurred substantial dry dock expenditure comprising repairs, overhauls, inspections and related activities.

The company treated such dry dock expenditure as major inspection costs and capitalised them under Ind AS 16. The CAG objected to such capitalisation on the ground that the useful lives of the dredgers had already expired and the expenditure should have been charged to repairs and maintenance. The company contended that the expenditure generated economic benefits up to the next dry-docking cycle and that the useful life of the dredgers had been reassessed and extended based on inspection results.

B. QUERY

Whether capitalisation of dry dock expenditure incurred on dredgers whose estimated useful lives had already expired is permissible under Ind AS.

Whether subsequent expenditure can be recognised as a separate component of property, plant and equipment even after expiry of the useful life of the main dredger.

C. POINTS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

The Committee analysed the requirements of Ind AS 16 relating to replacement costs, major inspection costs, spare parts and subsequent expenditure. It observed that not every cost incurred during a dry-docking exercise qualifies for capitalisation. Each expenditure must be separately analysed to determine whether it satisfies the recognition criteria under paragraph 7 of Ind AS 16.

The Committee noted that inspection costs may be capitalised as a separate component if they satisfy the recognition criteria. Similarly, replacement costs may be capitalised where the relevant conditions are met. However, expenditure on repairs, maintenance, consumables and day-to-day servicing must be charged to profit and loss.

The Committee further observed that Ind AS 16 does not prohibit capitalisation of qualifying subsequent expenditure merely because the useful life of the main asset has expired. Where expenditure results in an increase in expected utility or useful life, the useful life of the dredger should also be reassessed. The Committee also remarked that the company should revisit its methodology for determining the useful life of dredgers since several dredgers had continued to operate beyond the originally estimated useful life.

D. OPINION

The Committee opined that Ind AS 16 does not prohibit capitalisation of qualifying subsequent expenditure after expiry of the useful life of the main asset. Expenditure incurred during dry-docking that satisfies the recognition criteria of Ind AS 16 may be capitalised, while expenditure in the nature of repairs and maintenance must be charged to the statement of profit and loss.

Replacement costs and inspection costs recognised as part of the dredger should be depreciated separately where their useful lives differ from that of the dredger.

2. Accounting Treatment of Grant (Structured Package of Assistance for Setting up a Hardwood Pulp Plant) under Ind AS 20

A. FACTS OF THE CASE

A listed company engaged in the manufacturing of newsprint and printing and writing paper received incentives from the Government of Tamil Nadu under a structured package for setting up a Hardwood Pulp Plant (Expansion Project II).

Originally, the incentive was linked to reimbursement of VAT/CST and was subsequently converted into a capital subsidy option after implementation of GST. Under the revised arrangement, the company became eligible to receive subsidy over a period of 15 years, subject to fulfilment of investment commitments, employment generation requirements, continued operation of the plant and maintenance of committed employment levels.

The company treated the subsidy as a grant related to income and recognised it in the Statement of Profit and Loss under “Other Income”. The Auditors objected to this treatment and viewed the subsidy as a capital subsidy requiring treatment as a grant related to assets.

B. QUERY

Whether the accounting treatment adopted by the company for the structured package of assistance relating to the Hardwood Pulp Plant under Ind AS 20 was appropriate and, if not, what would be the correct accounting treatment.

C. POINTS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

The Committee examined whether the subsidy constituted a grant related to assets or a grant related to income under Ind AS 20.

It observed that the nature of a government grant is determined by its substance and not by the nomenclature used. Although the subsidy was described as a “capital subsidy”, eligibility depended not merely on investment in the plant but also on fulfilment of continuing employment obligations and continued operation of the plant throughout the incentive period.

The Committee noted that these operational and employment-related conditions were primary conditions for entitlement to the subsidy. Therefore, acquisition of the hardwood pulp plant was not the sole primary condition for obtaining the grant.

The Committee also observed that the method of computing the subsidy with reference to capital investment and the fact that the subsidy was paid annually were not determinative of the nature of the grant.

D. OPINION

The Committee concluded that the subsidy was not a grant related to assets because eligibility depended on several primary conditions beyond acquisition of a long-term asset.

Accordingly, the subsidy constituted a grant related to income under Ind AS 20, and the accounting treatment adopted by the company in recognising the grant as income was appropriate.

3. Accounting Treatment of Payment Made to NHAI for Development of Road Connectivity to Exhibition-cum-Convention Centre (ECC) Project

A. FACTS OF THE CASE

A public sector undertaking incorporated as a special purpose vehicle for development of an Exhibition-cum-Convention Centre (ECC) project incurred expenditure towards development of external road connectivity through NHAI. The approved project cost for road connectivity was ₹442.39 crore, of which ₹354.89 crore had already been paid.

The company initially recognised the expenditure as Capital Work-in-Progress and subsequently capitalised it as part of Property, Plant and Equipment upon commencement of commercial operations, considering the expenditure to be directly attributable to making the ECC operational.

The auditor objected and contended that the expenditure should have been charged to the Statement of Profit and Loss.

B. QUERY

Whether capitalisation of the amount paid to NHAI for development of road connectivity as part of the cost of the ECC project under Ind AS 16 was appropriate.

If capitalisation was not appropriate, what accounting treatment should be followed.

C. POINTS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

The Committee examined whether the expenditure on road connectivity was directly attributable to bringing the ECC project to the location and condition necessary for it to operate in the manner intended by management.

It observed that Ind AS 16 requires capitalisation only of costs directly attributable to bringing an asset to the location and condition necessary for its intended operation. Not every expenditure incurred in connection with a project qualifies for capitalisation.

The Committee noted that the expenditure was incurred to provide connectivity and additional access to the ECC through dedicated entry and exit points from nearby roads and expressways. The road development and the ECC project progressed simultaneously and the road was not necessary for construction of the ECC itself.

The Committee concluded that although improved connectivity could enhance future economic benefits and attractiveness of the project, it was not necessary for making the ECC capable of operating in the manner intended by management.

D. OPINION

The Committee opined that expenditure incurred on development of road connectivity was not directly attributable to bringing the ECC Centre to the location and condition necessary for it to operate as intended.

Accordingly, the expenditure could not be capitalised as part of the cost of any property, plant and equipment and should instead be recognised as an expense in the Statement of Profit and Loss when incurred.

The Chartered Accountant June 2026 Pages 95-100

Link: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92505cajournal-june2026-27.pdf

jUNE 2026

Case Digest – ICAI Disciplinary Committee

1. Case: Information by J&K Bank vs. M/s SK & A

File No.: PPR/333/2016/DD/03/INF/2017/DC/1260/2020

Date of Order: 21.01.2026

Particulars                         Details

Complainant                  Information received from J&K Bank

Respondent                  M/s SK & A; Member Answerable: CA. RS and CA. SKS

Nature of Case          Failure of concurrent auditors to detect and report irregularities in Letter of Credit (LC) discounting transactions

Background             J&K Bank reported irregularities in the discounting of high-value Letters of Credit at its Ghaziabad Business Unit. The respondent firm was appointed as Concurrent Auditor. The allegation was that the auditors failed to identify and report suspicious LC transactions, including discounting of LCs without proper verification, discounting within unusually short time gaps, and processing based on hand-delivered documents instead of authenticated banking channels. The matter was referred to the Disciplinary Committee after the Board of Discipline disagreed with the Director (Discipline)’s prima facie opinion of not guilty.

Key Allegations – Failure to report high-value LC discounting transactions beyond delegated powers.

– Failure to comment on LCs issued, accepted and discounted within unusually short periods.

– Failure to report discounting based on hand-delivered documents instead of authorised banking channels.

– Failure to obtain sufficient audit evidence and exercise due diligence during concurrent audit.

Respondent’s Allegations –  Investigation report and concurrent audit reports were not supplied by the Bank.

– Audit reports were generated through the Bank’s software system and could not be downloaded or printed.

– Certain working papers were allegedly destroyed due to flooding of the office.

– Some respondents denied participation in the audit and sought to distance themselves from the engagement.

Findings

– The Committee held that concurrent auditors are required to verify not only supporting documents but also internal branch records and transactions reflected in the books of the Bank.

– Merely recording “No Record Found” was not considered an adequate audit response where material transactions existed.

– If records were unavailable, the auditors should have escalated the matter to higher authorities and performed additional verification procedures.

– High-value LC discounting transactions were reflected in the Bank’s records, yet no meaningful comments were made in the audit reports.

– The auditors failed to detect and report discrepancies in LC discounting and failed to exercise the degree of professional skepticism and diligence expected from concurrent auditors.

Charges Established        Guilty under Clauses (5), (6), (7) and (8) of Part I of the Second Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949

2. Case: Mr. MR & Ms. GR vs. CA. AT

File No.: PR/157/20-DD/159/2020/DC/1785/2023

Date of Order: 21 January 2026

Particulars                           Details

Complainant               Mr. MR and Ms. GR

Nature of Case          Alleged forgery of directors’ signatures in financial statements and negligent certification of Form AOC-4

Background           

The Respondent was the statutory auditor of M/s MKJ since incorporation. The Complainants alleged that financial statements for FY 2016-17 and FY 2017-18 were filed with forged signatures of the directors. They contended that Mr. MR was outside India on the dates on which the financial statements were purportedly signed. A further allegation was that while filing Form AOC-4 for FY 2015-16, the Respondent attached the balance sheet of another company, M/s GIS, instead of the balance sheet of MKJ.

Key Allegations

(i) Filing Form AOC-4 for FY 2016-17 and FY 2017-18 with allegedly forged signatures of the directors.

(ii) Failure to verify authenticity of financial statements and Board approvals before signing as auditor.

(iii) Wrongly attaching the balance sheet of M/s GIS. while certifying Form AOC-4 of MKJ for FY 2015-16.

Respondent’s Defence      The Respondent denied any role in forgery and stated that signed financial statements were routinely provided by the company’s accountant before audit signing. He contended that there was no evidence linking him to fabrication of signatures. Regarding AOC-4, he admitted that the balance sheet of GIS was attached due to a clerical error by office staff. He explained that filings of both companies were made on the same day (28.11.2016), resulting in the attachment mix-up, while the figures reported in Form AOC-4 remained correct.

Findings  Forgery Allegation: The Committee noted that the Board Reports showed approval of financial statements by the Board and that the same directors had signed the financial statements for several preceding years. The Committee held that the Complainants failed to produce conclusive evidence establishing that the Respondent was involved in forging signatures. However, the outcome of proceedings before NCLT, ROC, ED and other authorities is pending and no conclusive findings have been presented to the Committee to establish the Respondent’s role. Therefore, the allegation remained unsubstantiated.

Wrong Attachment in AOC-4: The Committee accepted that the attachment of GIS’s balance sheet was a clerical error. It noted that both companies’ filings were made on the same date and that the financial figures reported in Form AOC-4 of MKJ were otherwise correct. The Committee held that the error did not affect the true and fair view of the financial statements and was insufficient to establish professional misconduct.

Charges Established       None. The Committee held that the allegations were not substantiated by sufficient evidence.

Decision      Not Guilty under Clause (7) of Part I of the Second Schedule. The Committee also ultimately held the Respondent Not Guilty of Professional and Other Misconduct, including the charge under Clause (2) of Part IV of the First Schedule.

3. Case: JKR vs. CA. UVB

File No.: PR/393/2021-DD/08/2022-DC/1858/2024

Date of Order: 06.02.2026 (Findings dated 26.12.2025)

Particulars                               Details

Complainant                 Shri JKR , Managing Director, GMI

Nature of Case                 Incorrect reporting of unabsorbed depreciation in Tax Audit Report (Form 3CD) resulting in tax demand on the company

Background     

The Respondent acted as Tax Auditor of GMI for AY 2015-16 and had also been Tax Auditor for AY 2009-10. Unabsorbed depreciation of ₹2,00,89,668 pertaining to AY 2007-08 had been fully set off in AY 2009-10. However, in Form 3CD for AY 2015-16, the same amount was again reported as available unabsorbed depreciation. The company relied upon the tax audit particulars while filing its return, following which the Income-tax Department raised a demand of approximately ₹1.04 crore upon detecting the incorrect claim.

Key Allegations

– Incorrect certification of brought forward unabsorbed depreciation in Form 3CD for AY 2015-16.

– Failure to verify that the depreciation had already been fully set off in AY 2009-10.

– Lack of due diligence resulting in financial loss to the company.

Respondent’s Defence

– He had not filed the income-tax return of the company.

– The error arose during migration from “Tax Base” software to “Winman”, where historical XML data was imported.

– Incorrect depreciation figures were auto-populated due to software mapping issues.

– The lapse was inadvertent and there was no adverse action by the Income-tax Department against him.

– Sought leniency considering his 37-year unblemished professional career.

Findings

– The Committee found no conclusive evidence that the Respondent had filed the company’s ITR; however, he had admittedly signed the Tax Audit Report (Form 3CD).
– Form 3CD for AY 2015-16 incorrectly reported unabsorbed depreciation of ₹2,00,89,668 as available despite the same having been fully utilised in AY 2009-10.
– The Respondent himself had been Tax Auditor for AY 2009-10 and was expected to know that no such depreciation remained available for carry forward.
– Reliance on software-generated data without independent verification could not absolve the Respondent of responsibility.
– During hearing, the Respondent’s counsel admitted that reporting the figure without verification was a lapse on the Respondent’s part.
– The Committee held that certifying incorrect figures in Form 3CD constituted failure to exercise due diligence and professional negligence.
Charges Established- Guilty under Item (7), Part I of the Second Schedule – failure to exercise due diligence / professional negligence.
Punishment -Reprimand under Section 21B(3) (a) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

Company Law

7. Saxena Multispecialty Hospital (P.) Ltd. vs.Tulip Multispecialty Hospital (P.) Ltd.

185 taxmann.com 529, NCLT, New Delhi

Date of Order 19th May, 2026

Where company allotted 1,20,000 equity shares through a rights issue without adhering to section 62 and principles of corporate fairness, such allotment was vitiated as an act of oppression under section 241. Hence, entire impugned share issuance was declared null and void, directing restoration of the shareholding and rectification of the register to its original pre-allotment position.

FACTS

  • Company is engaged in hospital services. Its paid-up capital consisted of 10,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each. The Petitioner held 5,000 shares (50%), while the Respondents held 2,500 shares each (25% each). Petitioners were directors from incorporation and resigned on 4th June 2019; their resignations were approved on 15th July 2019. Discussions for separation/exit commenced around June 2019
  • On 27th July 2020, the company’s lender asked for an improvement in the debt–equity ratio (as stated by the respondents). On 28th July 2020, the Board resolved to issue 2,40,000 equity shares on a rights basis and issued an offer letter dated 28th July 2020. The respondents stated that the offer was dispatched to Petitioner No. 1’s address by courier and speed post, delivered on 1st August 2020, and remained open until 19th August 2020. As the Petitioner did not accept the offer within the stipulated time, it was deemed to have declined the same. Thereafter, by Board resolution dated 20th August 2020, 60,000 shares each were allotted to the Respondents and statutory filings, including Form PAS-3, were made.
  • The petitioner filed the instant petition under sections 241 and 242 seeking reliefs viz., to declare and order that the affairs of the company had been carried on by the existing directors in a manner that was oppressive and that the affairs of the company had also been mismanaged in terms of Sections 241 (1)(b) read with Section 242; to declare that the dilution of the Petitioners’ shares was illegal and improper and to set aside the same; and to pass an order removing the current Board of Directors and appointing an independent Interim Board of Directors to manage the affairs of the company. Thus, the petition was filed under sections 241–242 seeking, inter alia, to set aside the dilution arising from a share issue and to restore the pre-allotment shareholding, along with governance-related reliefs.

HELD

  • Having considered the rival submissions and material on record, the primary issue for determination was whether the Rights Issue was undertaken in strict compliance with Section 62(1)(a) and Section 62(2), and whether the manner in which it was executed satisfies the test of fairness and probity expected in corporate governance, particularly in a closely held company with equal shareholding.
  • Section 62 confers a statutory pre-emptive right upon existing shareholders and mandates that a notice of offer be given specifying the number of shares offered and granting not less than fifteen days for acceptance. Compliance with Section 62 must therefore be real and substantive and not merely formal or technical.
  • In the present case, although the Respondents have produced proof of dispatch to the address reflected in MCA records, the surrounding circumstances raised serious doubts as to effective and meaningful service. It was not disputed that the address in question was also the registered office of the Company and was under the control of the then existing directors. The building belonged to the mother of one of the directors, as admitted by the company. The Petitioners had ceased participating in the management of the Company since June 2019. The delivery acknowledgment did not identify the recipient and merely mentioned “Family,” without clarity as to who accepted the communication. No attempt appeared to have been made to send the offer through electronic means, despite prior correspondence between the parties through such channels. In a situation where the consequence of non-subscription would be the complete erosion of a 50% shareholding, the Company was expected to ensure actual and demonstrable service upon the shareholder concerned.
  • The Tribunal was conscious that technical compliance with dispatch requirements may, in ordinary circumstances, suffice. However, in the context of a closely held company where two groups held equal shares and were in dispute, and where the impugned allotment would decisively tilt control in favour of one group, the obligation of fairness assumes heightened significance. Mere mechanical dispatch to an address under the control of the beneficiary group cannot, in these facts, be treated as adequate compliance with the spirit of Section 62.
  • The company relied upon a bank communication dated 27th July 2020 requiring improvement of the debt-equity ratio. Even assuming that such financial requirement existed, the manner in which the issue was executed remained questionable. The timing of the Board resolution immediately following the bank letter, the absence of any prior consultation with the 50% shareholder, and the ultimate allotment exclusively in favour of existing directors cumulatively indicated that the impugned issue had the effect of consolidating control. Corporate powers to issue shares cannot be exercised for the primary purpose of creating or perpetuating a majority. Where such issuance results in the drastic reduction of an equal shareholder to a negligible minority, the transaction must withstand strict scrutiny.
  • The company’s reliance on the alleged exit understanding and resignation of Petitioners from the Board does not advance its case. Resignation from directorship does not extinguish rights as a shareholder. In the absence of a concluded share transfer in accordance with law, Petitioner continued to enjoy full proprietary rights in respect of her 50% shareholding. Those rights could not be unilaterally diluted through a process lacking demonstrable fairness.
  • The effect of the impugned allotment was to reduce Petitioner from an equal participant in management and control to a marginal shareholder holding approximately 3.48%. Such a drastic alteration of the shareholding structure, conducted in circumstances where effective notice was doubtful and where the beneficiary group stood to gain complete control, constitutes conduct lacking in probity.
  • Oppression under Section 241 is established when the conduct complained of is burdensome, harsh, and wrongful, and such that it justifies interference by the Tribunal. In the present case, the cumulative circumstances like the questionable service, absence of meaningful opportunity to subscribe, and disproportionate dilution, establish that the impugned Rights Issue was not conducted in a fair and transparent manner.
  • In view of the foregoing discussion, the Tribunal held that the Rights Issue dated 28th July 2020 and the consequential allotment dated 20th August 2020 were not undertaken in a manner consistent with the requirements of Section 62 and the principles of corporate fairness. The impugned allotment therefore stood vitiated and constituted an act of oppression within the meaning of Section 241.
  • In view of the findings returned hereinabove holding that the Rights Issue dated 28th July 2020 and the consequential allotment dated 20th August 2020 to be invalid and unsustainable in law, the company Petition was allowed in terms of appropriate reliefs under Section 242.
  • Accordingly, it was ordered that the allotment of 1,20,000 equity shares made in favour of existing directors pursuant to the impugned Rights Issue was declared null and void and was set aside. The share capital of the company was restored to the position as it existed immediately prior to 20th August 2020
  • S was appointed as an Administrator in the Board of Directors of the company to take charge by all necessary means and conduct the day-to-day affairs of the company for a period of 90 days, and a sum of Rs.2,00,000/- (Rupees Two Lakhs Only) per month was fixed as remuneration. The remuneration and other incidental expenses of Administrator were ordered to be paid and shared by Petitioner (50%) and Respondent Company (50%). The Administrator would also take over all the functions of the Board qua the company, and the power and functions of the Board would remain in abeyance for a period of 90 days.
  • The Register of Members maintained by the company was ordered to be rectified to reflect the original shareholding pattern, restoring the Petitioner to a 50% shareholding as it stood prior to the impugned allotment. Such rectification was ordered to be carried out within a period of four weeks from the date of pronouncement of the Order.
  • The order further mentioned that:
  • The Administrator may appoint/engage Key managerial persons and skilled professionals to assist him in managing the affairs of the Company.
  • The Administrator may take steps to appoint an Independent Auditor for the purpose of ascertainment of the true and correct financial position of the company.
  • The Administrator shall take steps to convene the meeting for the board of the company within a period of thirty (30) days from the date of the Order.
  • The Administrator shall do all acts as necessary, keeping in view the complications involved in the case. All directors (existing and former), Key Managerial Personnel (KMPs), stakeholders, and officers of the Company were directed to extend full cooperation to the Administrator and provide all necessary documents, records, and assistance as may be required for the effective functioning of the Company, failing which necessary action shall be taken in accordance with law.
  • The Administrator was directed to file all the statutory document(s) along with prescribed fees/ additional fee/fine as determined by the Registrar of Companies within 30 days from the date of this Order.
  • The Administrator shall take steps to regularly file monthly compliance report, detailing all actions taken, compliance measures undertaken, and the overall functioning of the company. Furthermore, every action taken by the Administrator shall be in strict compliance with the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013, and any other applicable laws governing the Company. The Administrator was at liberty to approach the Tribunal for any clarification/direction with regard to the issues before him and may also seek an extension of the time period fixed by the Tribunal, if so required. The Administrator so appointed shall hand-over charge to the Board of the Company after 90 days from the passing of the order.

All the sections referred to above are of the Companies Act, 2013

8. Invesco Developing Markets Fund (formerly Invesco Oppenheimer Developing Markets Fund) vs. Zee Entertainment Enterprises Limited 

APPEAL (L) NO.25420 OF 2021

Date of Order: 22nd March, 2022

The Bombay High Court, held that the provisions of Section 100(4) of the Companies Act, 2013 are mandatory in nature, obligating the Board of Directors to call an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) upon receipt of a valid requisition from shareholders. The court further stated that Section 430 of the Companies Acts bars civil courts from entertaining suits on matters that the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) is empowered to adjudicate.

The Division Bench of the Bombay High Court established several critical principles regarding shareholder rights and the duties of a company’s Board:

  • Mandatory Duty of the Board: Under Section 100 of the Companies Act, 2013, the Board has a mandatory obligation to call an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) if the requisition meets numerical and procedural requirements (representing at least 10% of the paid-up share capital).
  • Interpretation of “Valid Requisition”: The Board cannot refuse to act on a requisition by questioning the legality or effectiveness of the proposed resolutions before they are considered and passed by the shareholders.
  • Shareholder Democracy: Shareholders have the same right as the management to propose the removal or appointment of directors. They are not legally bound to disclose the reasons or “motives” behind such resolutions.
  • Jurisdictional Bar: Under Section 430 of the Companies Act, 2013, Civil Courts are barred from granting injunctions that interfere with matters falling within the domain of the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), such as the calling and holding of meetings.

IN CONCLUSION,

The Court clarified that Section 100 of the Companies Act, 2013, serves as a vital mechanism for shareholder democracy, ensuring that the Board remains accountable to the shareholders, regardless of whether it agrees with the proposed changes or considers them incapable of implementation.

Outsourcing Directives For SEBI Regulated Intermediaries – Delegation V/S Accountability

SEBI’s 2011 guidelines regulate outsourcing to ensure investor protection and regulatory accountability.

  • While intermediaries may outsource ancillary tasks like technology support, “core” functions—including investment decisions, compliance, and risk profiling—must remain under their direct control
  • SEBI adopts a “substance-over-form” approach, intervening when third parties effectively assume regulated roles regardless of their formal titles
  • Recent enforcement orders demonstrate that accountability cannot be delegated; intermediaries must maintain effective oversight and remain fully liable for the acts and omissions of all service providers.

INTRODUCTION

Over a period of time, advances in technology, increasing regulatory complexity and the need for operational efficiency have led many SEBI regulated intermediaries to engage third-party service providers for a variety of support functions. While outsourcing can improve efficiency, scalability and cost effectiveness, it also raises concerns regarding investor protection, accountability, confidentiality, operational resilience and regulatory oversight.

Recognizing these concerns, the Securities and Exchange Board of India (“SEBI”) issued Circular No. CIR/MIRSD/24/2011 dated 15th December 2011 titled Guidelines on Outsourcing of Activities by Intermediaries (“Outsourcing Guidelines”). The Circular applies to all SEBI-registered intermediaries, including stock brokers, merchant bankers, portfolio managers, investment advisers, research analysts, mutual funds, depository participants, registrars and transfer agents, debenture trustees, custodians and other regulated entities. The principles enshrined in these guidelines extend to person’s (within or outside the group) who perform activities on behalf of the regulated intermediaries.

WHY REGULATE OUTSOURCING?

The Outsourcing Guidelines are substantially based on principles developed by the International Organization of Securities Commissions (“IOSCO”) for mitigating various risks associated with outsourcing which may be operational risk, reputational risk, legal risk, country risk, strategic risk, exit strategy risk, counter party risk, concentration and systemic risk. It also reflects SEBI’s broader regulatory objective of ensuring that investors continue to deal with regulated entities that remain responsible for the services provided.

If regulated intermediaries are permitted to outsource core functions without adequate oversight, a situation may arise where the licensed entity merely acts as a conduit while actual regulated activities are carried out by outsourced third parties. Such arrangements may undermine investor protection, dilute accountability and impair regulatory supervision.

Accordingly, the Circular seeks to ensure that:

  • Regulatory accountability remains with the registered intermediary;
  • Investors continue to receive services from regulated entities;
  • “Core” business activities are not outsourced to third persons;
  • SEBI’s supervisory and inspection powers remain unaffected; and
  • Intermediaries retain effective control over outsourced functions.

The central principle emerging from the Circular/Guidelines is that outsourcing should facilitate business operations, not substitute the intermediary’s regulated role.

SEBI has provided illustrative examples of activities considered core in nature:

Intermediary “Core” Activities
Stock Broker Execution of orders and monitoring of client trading activities
Depository Participant Dematerialization of securities
Mutual Fund Investment related activities
Portfolio Manager Investment related activities
All Intermediaries Compliance functions

The list above is illustrative rather than exhaustive. Whether a function constitutes a core activity depends on the nature of the intermediary’s regulated business and the extent to which the intermediary continues to exercise independent judgment, supervision and control.

The Accountability Anchor

As a general principle, functions involving investment discretion, advisory judgment, regulatory compliance, investor protection obligations and fiduciary responsibilities shall not be outsourced.

While designing the outsourcing framework for any organization, it is pertinent to keep the following parameters in mind:

i. Activities which can be outsourced

ii. Activities which cannot be outsourced

iii. To Whom Activities can be outsourced

iv. Terms of Outsourcing

v. Responsibilities & Obligations of the intermediary and third party in respect of outsourced activity towards client, regulator & market

BUILDING AN EFFECTIVE OUTSOURCING FRAMEWORK

The Outsourcing Guidelines require intermediaries to establish a comprehensive framework for managing outsourcing arrangements. The responsibility for such framework rests with the Board of Directors, partners or equivalent governing body of the intermediary.

The Key Constituents that should be kept in mind at the time of designing an Outsourcing Framework are as under:

1. Outsourcing Policy- Determining the activities that can be outsourced and are prohibited and its Governance and Monitoring arrangements

2. Risk Assessment – Effective Risk Assessment procedures should be carried out to address outsourcing risks and relationships with third party.’

3. Appropriate Due Diligence of Service Providers including evaluation of it’s: –

  • Financial strength;
  • Technical competence;
  • Experience and expertise;
  • Compliance track record;
  • Infrastructure capabilities;
  • Data protection standards; and
  • Business continuity arrangements.

4. Tightening of Contractual Obligations in Outsourcing Agreements

5. Ongoing Monitoring of Outsourced Services and Providers

6. Confidentiality and Data Protection

7. Business Continuity Planning Measures in case of Default of Service providers

8. Outsourcing within the Group wherein Shared Resources cannot overtake the responsibility of core functions and Implementation of Chinese Wall measures to ensure transactions are undertaken at arm’s length without compromising accountability.

The Circular permits intermediaries to outsource support and ancillary functions — for example, technology infrastructure maintenance, legal support and similar services that do not constitute core business activities. The line is crossed when external parties begin to participate in, generate, or drive core business activities. Therefore, it’s quintessential to have an outsourcing framework which by design does not defeat its core purpose and is also implementable in its true spirit. The situation should not arise whereby the market has only third parties to provide intermediation services while the registered intermediaries confine themselves to earning income.

ENFORECEMENT ORDERS

Although there are relatively few reported cases involving standalone violations of the Outsourcing Guidelines, SEBI has repeatedly relied upon the principles underlying the Circular
while examining whether intermediaries have impermissibly delegated core regulated functions to third parties.

A recent SEBI Final Order QJA/MN/IMD/IMD-SEC-4/32418/2026-27, dated May 26, 2026, (the “Order”), in the case of First Global Finance illustrates how these principles apply in practice. A SEBI-registered portfolio manager (the “Portfolio Manager”) had engaged in a technology consulting agreement with a third-party vendor. SEBI conducted an on-site inspection and a forensic audit covering a period of approximately two and a half years.

  • The findings revealed that the arrangement was, in substance, an outsourcing of core investment-related activities, wherein specific buy/sell allocations were generated by algo systems and transmitted for execution and personnel of the outsourced entity were involved in execution related communications & instructions.
  • Further, the compensation structures to the outsourced entity related to investment function and overall operational arrangement demonstrated substantial involvement in investment related activitiesOther multiple activities which corroborated and substantiated the role of technology consultant, detailed as under, had very well exceeded and surpassed his core responsibilities and his compensation structures were not commensurate to the title of services carried.
  • Governance documents i.e. the Board Resolutions did not separately identify the role of a consultant and was included to form a part of Investment Committee to take all investment related decisions. Distinguishing between technical invitees and core decision making members shall be made at the time of composition of committee and while circulating a Board Resolution and imposing a contemporaneous limitation reflecting such restricted role.
  • Participating, rendering an opinion and concurrence of collective decision making in substance cannot be viewed as originating separately and exclusively from a technical consultation, wherein the technology consultant was given authority and power to participate in decision making function of Investments.
  • The expression “investment decision” is broader than model portfolio approval and extends to all multiple inter-related determinants which involve governing actual deployment of client fund.
  • Sharing of performance linked fees is a clear indication that the outsourcing entity was contributing, participating or influencing the investment process which generated performance and can in no way be classified as fees for maintaining technological infrastructure.

Outsourcing cannot be examined in compartmentalized or an isolated manner but is a collation of multiple activities put together and the underlying intention to perform the activity.

It was further observed, in the matter of M/s AFCO Capital India Private Limited (QJA/SS/CFD/CFD-SEC-5/32324/2025-26) vide order dated 30 March 2026, a person who was not an employee of the company was assigned the responsibility to authorize and operate activities for the purpose of open offer. A serious compliance breach was identified as the merchant bankers desirous of outsourcing their activities shall not, however, outsource their core business activities and compliance functions. In the said case, outsourcing of core activities have been compromised, thereby dampening the core principle of outsourcing.

SEBI’s order the matter of Bharosa Technoserve Ltd (Order/AN/SM/2024-25/30748-30751) dated 11 September 2024 was explicitly clear that the core function of Risk Profiling & Suitability Assessment of clients was not carried out by the Investment Advisor and was outsourced to a technology platform provider and the client had access to investment advice without their intervention, which was in all practical sense violating the intent of the law.

Taken together, these cases demonstrate that, SEBI does not object to outsourcing per se. Rather, SEBI intervenes where the outsourced arrangement effectively transfers investment discretion, advisory judgment, merchant banking functions, compliance responsibilities or investor-facing regulated activities to third parties.

The enforcement actions reviewed above demonstrate that SEBI adopts a substance-over-form approach and focuses on whether a third party has effectively assumed functions that are expected to be performed by the regulated intermediary itself.

KEY TAKEAWAYS – PHILOSOPHY OF OUTSOURCING

A review of the Outsourcing Guidelines and enforcement actions indicates the following principles:

(a) Substance Prevails Over Form

SEBI examines the actual role performed by a third party and not merely the terminology used in agreements. A service provider described as a consultant, advisor, technology provider or support vendor may nevertheless be regarded as performing a regulated activity if it effectively influences or undertakes the relevant function.
(b) Investment Decisions Must Remain with the Registered Entity
Investment discretion, portfolio construction, security selection and investment recommendations are regarded as core functions that must remain with the regulated intermediary.
(c) Compliance Functions Cannot Be Outsourced
Responsibility for regulatory compliance remains with the intermediary irrespective of any outsourcing arrangement.
(d) Accountability Cannot Be Delegated
While operational activities may be outsourced, accountability for those activities cannot be transferred to a service provider.
(e) Effective Control Must Be Retained
The intermediary must continue to exercise independent judgment, supervision and oversight over all outsourced activities.
The intention of the directive is to distinguish between operational support functions and core regulated activities. While administrative, technological and ancillary support services may be outsourced subject to adequate safeguards; investment discretion, compliance functions, investor-facing regulated activities and other core business functions must remain under the direct control of the registered intermediary. Further, for functions outsourced, the arrangement shall not affect the rights of investors against the entity and the entity remains fully liable for omissions and acts of the third party.
“It is not what we do, but also what we do not do, for which we are accountable” – Molière

Using Companies As Investment Vehicles: Reboot By RBI

Effective July 1, 2026, the RBI’s Amendment Directions introduce “Unregistered Type 1 NBFCs,” exempting companies with assets under ₹1,000 crore from registration if they avoid public funds and customer interfaces. This shift addresses legacy issues where investment vehicles were often penalised as “deemed NBFCs” for conducting financial business without a license. These entities are now ideal for family offices, providing benefits like perpetual succession without intensive systemic risk regulations. However, they are barred from overseas investments and must register if they seek public funds or exceed asset thresholds. This modernization streamlines compliance for smaller, low-risk financial entities

INTRODUCTION

If you took a quick dip-stick poll of the number of people who have violated the NBFC Directions by making investments via a company structure or using a corporate investment vehicle, you would have a resounding majority! Most of them would look at you with innocent faces and say that they invested with their own funds or that they did not trade and were only investors! None of these arguments used to cut any ice with the RBI, and the clear view of the regulator was that if the Principal Business of a company was from financial services activities, then the company was a deemed NBFC that commenced operations without obtaining a Certificate of Registration (CoR) from the RBI. Scores of companies ended up becoming deemed NBFCs that had violated these norms and this led to stringent action by the regulator.

The biggest hurdle with the deemed NBFC aspect was that a company could not be used for the purposes of a family office/as an investment vehicle. This led to most family offices being structured in the form of a trust/partnership firm.

All this is set to change for many companies by virtue of the Amendment Directions issued by the RBI, which will be effective from 1st July 2026. The effect of these amendments is the creation of a new class of NBFCs called “Unregistered Type 1 NBFCs”.

LEGACY ISSUES

To better appreciate the Amendment Directions, let us first understand the legacy problems that the Directions seek to address.

Legal Framework ~ In the year 1997, sections 45-IA to 45-IC were enacted in the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (“the Act”) and these for the first time introduced requirements such as registration, net owned funds, reserve fund, etc., for an NBFC. A non-banking financial company was defined as a company that has as its principal business the receiving of deposits, or lending in any manner. It also included a company that carried on as a part of its business the acquisition of shares, debentures or other marketable securities. However, it did not include any company that carried on as its principal business any industrial activity, development of immovable property, etc.

Principal Business ~ Subsequently, vide the Press Release dated 8th April, 1999, the RBI laid down the criteria for identification of the principal business for being treated as an NBFC. In order to identify a particular company as an NBFC, the RBI considers both the assets and the income pattern as
evidenced from the last audited balance sheet of the company to decide its principal business. A company is treated as an NBFC if its financial assets are more than 50% of its total assets, and the income from financial assets are more than 50% of the gross income. Both these tests are required to be satisfied as the determinant factor for the principal business of a company.

Auditor’s Report ~ Based on the same, the RBI issued the NBFC Auditor’s Report (Reserve Bank) Directions, 2016 (Master Direction dated 29th September 2016). As per these Directions, conducting a non-banking financial activity without a valid CoR was treated as an offence under the Act. In such a case, the Auditor was required to make a report containing the details of his qualification and report it to the Regional Office of the Department of Non-Banking Supervision of the RBI.

CARO ~ In addition, the CARO 2020 contains a reporting item of whether the company is required to be registered under s.45-IA of the Act and, if so, whether the registration has been obtained.

Scale Based Directions – RBI has issued the Reserve Bank of India (Non-Banking Financial Companies – Registration, Exemptions and Framework for Scale Based Regulation) Directions, 2025 (“the Registration Directions”), which provide for the registration and other criteria for NBFCs.

Violations ~ For companies that were required to be registered with the Reserve Bank as NBFCs, and were found to be conducting non-banking financial activity, such as, lending, investment, etc., as their principal business, without obtaining Certificate of Registration from the Reserve Bank, the same was treated as contravention of the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934 and invited penal action viz., penalty or fine or even prosecution in a Court of Law.

AMENDMENT DIRECTIONS

Recently, the RBI has issued the Reserve Bank of India (Non-Banking Financial Companies – Registration, Exemptions and Framework for Scale Based Regulation) Amendment Directions, 2026 (“the Amendment Directions”), which amend the Registration Directions and are effective from 1st July 2026.

The RBI Reboot

UNREGISTERED NBFC

The Amendment Directions introduce a new class of NBFCs known as the Unregistered Type I NBFCs. The meaning of this NBFC is defined as one:

a) not availing public funds;

b) not having any customer interface, as defined in these Directions; and

c) exempted from the provisions of sections 45IA and 45IC of the RBI Act, 1934.

BENEFITS

Such NBFCs can avail of the following benefits:

(a) NBFCs not availing public funds and not having any customer interface, and having asset size of less than ₹1,000 crore as per the latest audited balance sheet are exempted from the provisions of sections 45IA and 45IC of the Act with effect from 1st July, 2026.

(b) Existing ‘NBFCs not availing public funds and not having any customer interface’, including those holding CoR, and fulfilling the prescribed criteria for exemption, may apply to the Reserve Bank for deregistration within a period of six months, i.e., by 31st December, 2026.

(c) NBFCs currently not fulfilling the prescribed criteria for exemption but fulfilling the same in future are also eligible to apply for deregistration at that point of time.

The application for deregistration shall be made through the PRAVAAH Portal of the RBI along with the prescribed documents. One of the important documents is the Statutory Auditor’s Certificate certifying that the NBFC does not have public funds and also does not have a customer interface as of the date of application. The Statutory Auditors are also required to submit an Exception Report to the RBI in case of violation of conditions on public funds, customer interface or any other conditions for the exemption. RBI would grant deregistration if it is satisfied that all conditions are met. According to the RBI, the regulatory concerns on systemic risk and customer protection issues are not relevant in the case of these NBFCs. These companies normally undertake investments out of their own funds, and hence, their potential to pose systemic risk is very low. Furthermore, as per RBI, since they cannot have any customer interface, KYC regulations prescribed by the Reserve Bank may not be relevant for them due to absence of any account-based relationship. They are required to comply with applicable AML requirements as also adhere to requirements emanating from Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA), 2002 and Rules framed thereunder, as applicable to them.

MEANING OF CERTAIN KEY TERMS

Certain key terms appearing in the Amendment Directions are explained below:

‘Customer interface’ is defined to mean the interaction between an NBFC and its customers in carrying on its business. Thus, granting of loans would be a customer interface. Customer interface can be through an account-based relationship, lending relationship or interaction with the customers as part of business of the NBFC. Any customer-oriented activity like lending or providing guarantee, or placing inter-corporate deposits, including to ‘entities in the Group’, its shareholders, its directors, or providing any other product or service to these entities would constitute ‘customer interface’. However, loans to employees as per terms of employment condition/ contract and not on commercial terms, shall not be treated as customer interface.

‘Public Funds’, which is the most important term, is defined inclusively to include funds raised either directly or indirectly through public deposits, inter-corporate deposits, bank finance, and all funds received from outside sources, such as funds raised by the issue of Commercial Papers, debentures, etc. However, it excludes funds raised by the issue of instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding 5 years from the date of issue. As such, loans from directors and/ or shareholders will be classified as public funds. Further, money availed through margin trading facility shall also be classified as public funds. The Amendment Regulations further provide that the NBFC should not even have an indirect receipt of public funds, i.e., funds received not directly but through associates and Group entities that have access to public funds. Thus, if a company that has raised public funds, in turn, lends or invests (even in securities) in an NBFC, that would violate the Amendment Directions and hence, not be eligible for the exemption.

OVERSEAS INVESTMENTS

If an ‘Unregistered Type I NBFC’ intends to undertake an overseas investment in the financial services sector, then it shall be required to be registered with Reserve Bank and be regulated like an NBFC holding a Certificate of Registration. Further, an ‘Unregistered Type I NBFC’ shall not undertake overseas investment in the non-financial sector.

VIOLATIONS

Any ‘Unregistered Type I NBFC’ intending to avail public funds and/ or have customer interface must seek registration with the Reserve Bank as ‘Type II NBFC’ prior to having either of these, to avoid penal action. It may also be noted that ‘NBFCs not availing public funds and not having any customer interface’ with asset size of ₹1,000 crore & above shall invariably be required to seek registration as ‘Type I NBFC’ even if they do not avail public funds and do not have a customer interface. New companies desirous of not accessing public funds and not having customer interface are not required to seek registration till they attain the asset size of ₹1,000 crore. In other words, companies (including new companies) desirous of accessing public funds and/ or engaging in operations involving customer interface are compulsorily required to seek registration with the Reserve Bank, irrespective of their asset size or any other factor. Failure to comply with registration requirements would attract penal provisions under the RBI Act, 1934.Violation of any of the provisions applicable to ‘Unregistered Type I NBFC’ shall be viewed seriously and shall invite penal action under the provisions of the RBI Act, 1934.

USE FOR FAMILY OFFICES

In light of these amendments, companies can now be used for the purposes of family offices. Of course, from a tax perspective, the dual taxation issue remains, but there may be situations where a corporate structure is preferred over a trust or a firm, such as perpetual succession, liability ring fencing, etc. In such cases, a
company can now be freely used. While structuring the entity, the restriction on making overseas investments by Unregistered NBFCs should be remembered.

CONCLUSION

Exempting smaller NBFCs from registration is the right step by the RBI. Scores of companies were unwittingly caught up in the regulatory glare of the RBI. There have been countless instances of prosecution cases/ show cause notices, etc., languishing against companies. As a follow-up the RBI could probably even come up with a one-time amnesty scheme for companies that have already violated the Principal Business Test and become deemed NBFCs!

Allied Laws

15. Kulsum Nisha v. State of U.P. & Ors.

2026 INSC 617

Succession – Compassionate allotment – Married daughter – Exclusion from definition of “family” – Marital status cannot be the sole ground for denial of consideration. [Constitution of India, Arts. 14, 15, 19(1)(g) and 21; Uttar Pradesh Essential Commodities (Regulation of Sale and Distribution Control) Order, 2016] (Ratio )

FACTS

The appellant’s mother was a fair price shop dealer. Upon her death, the appellant sought allotment of the shop under the dependent quota. The application was rejected solely on the ground that the appellant was a married daughter and was excluded from the definition of “family” under the applicable Government Order. The appellate authority affirmed the rejection. The High Court dismissed the writ petition following earlier Division Bench decisions.

The appellant challenged the decision before the Supreme Court.

HELD

The Supreme Court held that the exclusion of a married daughter from consideration solely based on marital status is arbitrary and constitutionally impermissible.

Dependency is a question of fact and cannot be determined solely based on marriage. A beneficial scheme intended to provide financial support upon the death of a dealer cannot deny consideration merely because the dependent is a married daughter. The competent authority must examine actual dependency and eligibility instead of applying a blanket exclusion.

The Appeal was allowed.

16. Shishu Pal @ Shish Ram & Ors. v. Surjeet & Ors.

2026 INSC 634

Motor accident compensation – Homemaker – Economic value of domestic work – Contribution of homemaker requires realistic assessment – Fixed at a minimum of 30,000/- per month. [Motor Vehicles Act, 1988]

FACTS

The deceased, a homemaker, died in a motor accident in 2001. The Tribunal awarded compensation, which was subsequently enhanced by the High Court after nearly two decades of pendency.

The claimants sought further enhancement before the Supreme Court, contending that the contribution of the deceased homemaker had not been adequately valued.

HELD

The Supreme Court observed that the services rendered by a homemaker constitute a substantial economic contribution to the family and society. Domestic labour performed by a homemaker cannot be treated as having no pecuniary value merely because it does not generate direct monetary income.

Assessment of compensation must account for the multifaceted contribution of a homemaker and should not be based on outdated assumptions regarding unpaid domestic work. The Court stated that home makers are, in fact, the ‘nation builders’ and fixed the minimum value of the loss of domestic care rendered by the deceased homemaker at ₹30,000 per month.

The Court also expressed concern regarding extraordinary delays in the adjudication of motor accident claims and emphasised the need for expeditious disposal.

The Appeal was allowed in part.

17. K. Ranganayakulu v. State of Telangana & Ors.

2026 INSC 555

Dishonour of cheque – Authorised signatory – Liability under section 138 – Person responsible for transaction treated as drawer. [Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, S.138]

FACTS

An NGO entered into an arrangement for the collection and remittance of electricity bill payments. The appellant, acting as Treasurer of the NGO, executed the relevant documents and signed the cheque that was subsequently dishonoured.

The appellant contended that he was merely an authorised signatory and not the drawer of the cheque and, therefore could not be prosecuted under section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act.

The High Court affirmed the conviction.

HELD

The Supreme Court held that liability under section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act depends upon the role undertaken by the person in the transaction. The appellant was the individual authorised to execute the agreement, sign negotiable instruments and undertake remittances on behalf of the NGO. In the factual context of the case, the appellant effectively functioned as the drawer of the cheque and was responsible for the consequences arising from its dishonour.

The conviction was upheld. However, the sentence was modified.

The Appeal was partly allowed.

18. Shephali Chakraborty v. State of West Bengal

2026 INSC 621

Minor’s property – Permission for development agreement – Court’s scrutiny under section 8 – Benefit to minor to be assessed prospectively.

[Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act, 1956, S.8]

FACTS

The appellant, mother and natural guardian of a minor, sought permission to transfer and develop immovable property in which the minor held an undivided share inherited from his deceased father.

A development agreement had been entered into with a developer under which the family would receive consideration and residential units in the redeveloped property. The District Judge rejected the application, holding that no material had been produced to demonstrate necessity or evident advantage to the minor.

The High Court affirmed the order. The appellant approached the Supreme Court.

HELD

The Supreme Court held that proceedings under section 8 of the Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act require an assessment of the proposed transaction from the standpoint of the minor’s future welfare and benefit. The inquiry is essentially prospective and not confined to a rigid evaluation of existing utilisation of the property.

Where the proposed transaction demonstrably advances the interests of the minor, courts should adopt a practical and welfare-oriented approach.

The matter was remitted for fresh consideration in accordance with law.

The Appeal was allowed.

19. H.N. Dhananjaya v. H.N. Malleshappa

RFA No.1835 of 2022 (Kar)(HC) August 7, 2025

Recovery of money – Acknowledgement through WhatsApp message – Limitation – Electronic evidence corroborated by bank transfers – suit held within limitation. [Limitation Act, 1963, S.18; Indian Evidence Act, 1872, S.65B]

FACTS

The plaintiff advanced a hand loan of Rs.2,00,000 to the defendant, who was his brother. The amount was transferred through bank transactions in October 2015.

Alleging failure to repay the loan, the plaintiff instituted a suit for recovery of money. The defendant denied the loan transaction and contended that the amounts were paid pursuant to a family arrangement. It was further contended that the suit was barred by limitation.

The Trial Court relied upon the bank statements evidencing transfer of funds and a WhatsApp message dated 11.10.2017 acknowledging the liability, and decreed the suit. Aggrieved, the defendant preferred an appeal before the High Court.

HELD

The Court held that the bank statements unequivocally established the transfer of Rs.2,00,000 from the plaintiff to the defendant.

The defence that the payments formed part of a family arrangement was unsupported by any documentary or oral evidence. The defendant also failed to establish repayment.

The WhatsApp message acknowledging the liability was not effectively disputed during the trial. The evidentiary value of the electronic record stood reinforced by the admitted bank transfers. The acknowledgement dated 11.10.2017, having been made within the original period of limitation, meant that the suit instituted on 20.10.2018 was within time. No perversity or illegality was found in the judgment of the Trial Court.

The Appeal was dismissed.

From Published Accounts

COMPILER’S NOTE:

Given below is the Auditor’s Report (report) on the consolidated financial statements of a leading global telephone operator headquartered in UK and operating in several countries, including India – it operates in India as Vodafone Idea Limited (or VI) and is in the news for state ownership on conversion of government telecom dues into Equity and also for sizable further liabilities payable to the government.

The report on the group’s consolidated financial statements is very informative and includes many disclosures not so far applicable in India. Some of these are:

  • Mention of non-audit services provided by the auditor and how the same did not affect independence;
  • Period for which the firm is acting as auditors;
  • Audit process and methodology including reporting to the audit and Risk Committee;
  • Addressing concerns regarding ‘Going Concern’;
  • Key risks and how addressed;
  • Impact of Climate change;
  • Involvement with Component Teams (as per ISA 600) – there is no ‘Other Matters’ paragraph which is the norm for reports by auditors in India on Consolidated Financial statements

The report is very relevant to get a glimpse of how the auditing professionals will have to adapt to the global reporting trends.

VODAFONE GROUP PLC

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Vodafone Group PLC (year ended 31st March 2026)

OPINION

In our opinion:

  • Vodafone Group PLC’s consolidated financial statements and Parent company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent company’s affairs as at 31 March 2026 and of the Group’s loss for the year then ended;
  • the consolidated financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards (‘IAS’), with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’);
  • the Parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and
  • the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements of Vodafone Group PLC (the ‘Parent company’ or ‘Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the year ended 31 March 2026 which comprise:

Group Parent company
Consolidated income statement for the year then ended Company statement of financial position as at 31 March 2026
Consolidated statement of comprehensive expense for the year then ended Company statement of changes in equity for the year then ended
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 2026 Related notes 1 to 11 to the Company financial statements including material accounting policy information
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year then ended
Consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended
Related notes 1 to 33 to the financial statements, including material accounting policy information

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements is applicable law and UK-adopted international accounting standards, with IFRS as issued by the IASB. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

BASIS FOR OPINION

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

INDEPENDENCE

We are independent of the Group and Parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the Parent company, except as discussed below, and we remain independent of the group and the parent company in conducting the audit.

Provision of non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard

This exception related to the provision of translation services of the local audited statutory financial statements for the years ending 31 March 2020, 31 March 2021, 31 March 2022, 31 March 2023 and 31 March 2024 of a subsidiary in Germany.

For audit periods covering 31 March 2021 to 31 March 2024, we note this is a breach under FRC Ethical Standard 2019, as the service is not permitted under paragraph 5.40 of FRC Ethical Standard 2019.

The service was performed by EY Germany with a total fee across the five years of service delivery of €13k. We considered that the provision of the service did not create a self-review threat as the prohibited service could only be delivered once the audit has been completed and there was therefore no risk of self-review. Appropriate safeguards also existed as the individuals who performed the prohibited services were not part of the audit engagement team. We informed the Audit and Risk Committee of the inadvertent breach in September 2025. We considered this to be a minor breach of the FRC’s Ethical Standard.

Reliance on M&A Transition Provision in relation to the Acquisition of Hutchison 3G UK Holdings Limited

We are required to provide an explanation of how we have maintained our independence where we have applied paragraph 1.31 of the FRC’s Ethical Standard 2024 (“the M&A Transition Provision”).

Vodafone Group PLC became the ultimate parent of Hutchison 3G UK Holdings Limited (“Three UK”), following the acquisition of Three UK on 31 May 2025.

During the course of our independence procedures prior to the completion of the acquisition, it was identified that we provided non-permissible services for which Three UK was a beneficiary. Except for certain tax advisory services provided by EY UK, all non-permissible services were ceased prior to completion of the acquisition.

The tax advisory services that could not be reasonably terminated by the effective date of the acquisition were terminated within the three-month transition period allowed under the M&A Transition Provision. Appropriate safeguards existed as the individuals who performed the prohibited services were not part of the audit engagement team.

We informed the Audit and Risk Committee of the matter in September 2025.

We consider that an objective, reasonable and informed third party would not conclude that our independence was impaired as a result of these matters; and that we remain independent of Vodafone Group PLC in conducting the audit.

CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO GOING CONCERN

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Group and Parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:

  • confirming our understanding of the directors’ going concern assessment process, including the controls over the review and approval of the budget and long-range plan;
  • assessing the appropriateness of the duration of the going concern assessment period to 30 June 2027 (“the going concern assessment period”) and considering the existence of any significant events or conditions beyond this period based on our procedures on the Group’s long-range plan and knowledge arising from other areas of the audit;
  • verifying inputs against board-approved forecasts and debt facility terms and reconciling the opening liquidity position to the balance sheet as at 31 March 2026;
  • reviewing borrowing facilities to confirm both their availability to the Group and the forecast debt repayments through the going concern assessment period and to validate that there are no financial covenants in relation to any of the borrowing facilities;
  • understanding and evaluating the appropriateness of management’s model, including testing the assessment, including forecast liquidity, for clerical accuracy;
  • challenging whether sensitivities in respect of potential downside scenarios were reasonable and appropriately severe, in light of the Group’s relevant principal risks and uncertainties and our own independent assessment of those risks;
  • evaluating management’s historical forecasting accuracy and the consistency of the going concern assessment with information obtained from other areas of the audit, such as our audit procedures on the long-range plans, which underpin management’s goodwill impairment assessments;
  • evaluating the impact of the subsequent events relating to transactions expected to close within the going concern period, including with respect to Safaricom, VodafoneZiggo and VodafoneThree;
  • independently evaluating the mitigating actions available to respond to a severe, but plausible downside scenario, and whether those actions are feasible and within the Group’s control. These mitigations were not modelled by management as they were not relied upon for their conclusion;
  • reviewing management’s reverse stress test to understand how severe conditions would have to be to breach liquidity and whether the required reduction in profitability metrics has no more than a remote possibility of occurring when compared to current performance and forecasts;
  • performing independent sensitivity analysis on management’s assumptions, including applying incremental adverse cashflow sensitivities. These sensitivities included the impact of certain severe but plausible scenarios, evaluated as part of management’s work on the Group’s long-term viability materialising within the going concern assessment period; and
  • reviewing the Group and Parent company’s going concern disclosures included on page 125 of the Annual Report to assess that the disclosures are consistent with the basis upon which the Board have concluded, and in conformity with the reporting standards.

OUR KEY OBSERVATIONS

  • The directors’ assessment forecasts that the Group will maintain sufficient liquidity throughout the going concern assessment period. This included the scenario of non-refinancing of certain debt maturities in the assessment period, with continuing availability of the Group’s €7.6 billion revolving credit facilities, which were undrawn as at 31 March 2026.
  • Furthermore, management’s reverse stress test to model the extent of reduction in profitability compared to forecasts required to breach liquidity during the going concern assessment period is considered by management to have only a remote possibility of occurring.
  • The controllable identified mitigating actions available to increase liquidity over the going concern assessment period were not modelled by management due to the level of headroom in the directors’ assessment forecasts.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and Parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period from when the financial statements are authorised for issue to 30 June 2027.

In relation to the Group and Parent company’s reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report. However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

Overview of our audit approach

Audit scope
  • We performed an audit of the complete financial information of 7 components and audit procedures on specific balances for a further 9 components. We also performed specified audit procedures on certain accounts on 1 additional component.
  • We performed certain central procedures on financial statement line items as detailed in the ‘Tailoring the scope’ section below.
Key audit matters
  • Carrying value of cash generating units, including goodwill (Germany).
  • Recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets in Luxembourg and Vodafone Three.
  • Revenue recognition.
  • Merger of Vodafone Limited and Hutchison 3G UK Holdings Limited in the UK.
Materiality
  • Overall Group materiality of €270m (FY25: €215m) has been calculated based on the Group’s Adjusted EBITDAaL. This represents approximately 2.5% (FY25: approximately 2.0%) of the Group’s Adjusted EBITDAaL

AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF THE PARENT COMPANY AND GROUP AUDITS

Tailoring the scope

We have followed a risk-based approach when developing our audit approach to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence on which to base our audit opinion. We performed risk assessment procedures, with input from our component auditors, to identify and assess risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements and identified significant accounts and disclosures. When identifying components at which audit work needed to be performed to respond to the identified risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, we considered our understanding of the Group and its business environment, the potential impact of climate change, the applicable financial reporting framework, the Group’s system of internal control, the existence of centralised processes, applications and any relevant internal audit results.

The goodwill balance was audited centrally by the Group audit team. In addition, we determined that certain centralised audit procedures would be performed on investments in associates and joint ventures, other investments, deferred tax assets, post-employment benefits, derivative financial instruments (classified within trade and other receivables and trade and other payables), taxation recoverable, cash and cash equivalents, equity, borrowings, deferred tax liabilities, taxation liabilities, roaming revenue (classified within revenue), other income, investment income, financing costs and one-off transactions (including the accounting for the merger with Three UK). For these audit areas, audit procedures were also performed by the Group audit team with input from Component audit teams.

Vodafone has centralised processes and controls over certain areas within its Vodafone Intelligent Solutions (“VOIS”) finance shared service centre locations. The Group audit team and our audit teams at VOIS form an integrated audit team to perform centralised testing for certain controls and accounts, including procedures on property, plant and equipment, other intangible assets and centralised purchase to pay processes (impacting trade and other payables, cost of sales, selling and distribution expenses and administrative expenses).

We then identified 17 components as individually relevant to the Group due to our assessment of risks of material misstatement or a significant risk impacting the consolidated financial statements. We also considered the materiality of the components relative to the Group.

For those individually relevant components, we identified the significant accounts where audit work needed to be performed at these components by applying professional judgement. We considered the Group significant accounts on which centralised procedures would be performed, the reasons for identifying the component as an individually relevant component and the size of the component’s account balance relative to the Group significant financial statement account balance.

We then considered whether the remaining Group significant account balances not yet subject to audit procedures, in aggregate, could give rise to a risk of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements.

Having identified the components for which work would be performed, we determined the scope to assign to each component.

Of the 17 components selected, we designed and performed audit procedures, including tests of controls, on the entire financial information of 7 components (“full scope components”). For 9 components, we designed and performed audit procedures, including tests of controls, on specific significant financial statement account balances or disclosures of the financial information of the component (“specific scope components”). For the remaining 1 component, we performed specified audit procedures to obtain evidence for one or more relevant assertions on specific account balances.

Our scoping to address the risk of material misstatement for each key audit matter is set out in the Key audit matters section of the report.

INVOLVEMENT WITH COMPONENT TEAMS

In establishing our overall approach to the Group audit, we determined the type of work that needed to be undertaken at each of the components by us, as the Group audit engagement team, or by component auditors operating under our instruction. Of the 7 full scope components, audit procedures were performed on 2 of these directly by the Group audit team with the remaining 5 being performed by component audit teams. For the 9 specific scope components, the audit procedures were performed on 4 of these directly by the Group audit team with the remaining 5 being performed by component audit teams. For the 1 specified procedures scope component, audit procedures were performed by the Group audit team. Where the work was performed by component auditors, we determined the appropriate level of oversight to enable us to determine that sufficient audit evidence had been obtained as a basis for our opinion on the consolidated financial statements as a whole.

The Group audit team continued to follow a programme of planned visits that has been designed to ensure that the Senior Statutory Auditor, or another Group audit team member, visits all full and specific scope locations each year. During the current year’s audit cycle, visits were undertaken by the Group audit team to the component teams in Germany, UK, South Africa, Turkey and Egypt as well as to VOIS in India. These visits involved meetings with local management, understanding the overall audit approach, including key issues and responses as well as reviewing key work papers on risk areas. The Senior Statutory Auditor, also remotely attended audit closing meetings with component teams and management of all full scope and specific scope locations.

The Group audit team interacted regularly with the component teams where appropriate, during various stages of the audit, were responsible for the scope and direction of the audit process and reviewed relevant working papers. Where relevant, the section on key audit matters details the level of involvement we had with component auditors to enable us to determine that sufficient audit evidence had been obtained as a basis for our opinion on the Group as a whole.

This, together with the additional procedures performed at Group level, gave us appropriate evidence for our opinion on the consolidated financial statements.

CLIMATE CHANGE

Stakeholders are increasingly interested in how climate change will impact the Group. The Group has determined that the most significant future impacts from climate change on its operations will be from its Planet activities and commitments set out on pages 28 to 32 and the material climate-related physical and transitional risks explained on pages 65 to 70 in the required Task Force for Climate related Financial Disclosures, both of which form part of the “Other information,” rather than the audited consolidated financial statements. Our procedures on these unaudited disclosures therefore consisted solely of considering whether they are materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appear to be materially misstated, in line with our responsibilities on “Other information”.

In planning and performing our audit we assessed the potential impacts of climate change on the Group’s business and any consequential material impact on its financial statements.

The Group has explained in Note 1 Basis of Preparation to the consolidated financial statements, environmental, regulatory and other factors responsive to climate change risks are still developing, and are outside of the Group’s control, and consequently financial statements cannot capture all possible future outcomes as these are not yet known. The degree of uncertainty of these changes may also mean that they cannot be taken into account when determining asset and liability valuations and the timing of future cash flows under the requirements of UK-adopted international accounting standards. The significant accounting estimates and judgements assessed by management to be potentially impacted by climate risks have been described in Note 1.

Our audit effort in considering the impact of climate change on the consolidated financial statements was focused on evaluating management’s assessment of the impact of climate risk, physical and transition, their climate commitments, the effects of material climate risks disclosed on pages 65 to 70 and the significant judgements and estimates disclosed in note 1, and whether these have been appropriately reflected in asset values and associated disclosures where values are determined through modelling future cash flows, being ‘Goodwill’, ‘Other intangible assets’ and ‘Deferred tax assets’, and in the timing and nature of liabilities recognised, being ‘Asset Retirement Obligations’. As part of this evaluation, we performed our own risk assessment, supported by our climate change internal specialists, to determine the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements from climate change which needed to be considered in our audit.

We also challenged the Directors’ considerations of climate change risks in their assessment of going concern and viability and associated disclosures. Where considerations of climate change were relevant to our assessment of going concern, these are described above.

Based on our work we have not identified the impact of climate change on the financial statements to be a key audit matter or to materially impact a key audit matter.

KEY AUDIT MATTERS

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

Risk

Carrying value of cash generating units, including goodwill (Germany)

As more fully described in Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements, in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets, the Group calculates the recoverable amount for cash generating units (‘CGUs’) based on value in use (‘VIU’) to determine whether an impairment to the carrying value of the CGU, and therefore, goodwill, is required. As at 31 March 2026, the Group has recorded €21,918 million (FY25: €20,514 million) of goodwill, including €16,092 million (FY25: €15,985 million) with respect to Germany. The Group’s assessment of the VIU of its CGUs involves estimation about the future performance of the local market businesses. In particular, the determination of the VIU for Germany was sensitive to the significant assumptions of projected Adjusted EBITDAaL growth, timing and amount of future capital expenditure, licence and spectrum payments, the long-term growth rate, and the discount rate.

Auditing the Group’s annual impairment test for the Germany CGU was complex and involved significant auditor judgement, given the estimation uncertainty related to the significant assumptions described above and the sensitivity to fluctuations and market specific factors in those assumptions.

Our response to the risk

We obtained an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of management’s controls over the Group’s goodwill impairment review process, including, for example, management’s controls over the significant assumptions described above.

We evaluated, with the involvement of EY valuation specialists, the methodology applied in the Germany VIU model, as compared to the requirements of IAS 36, including the mathematical accuracy of management’s model. We performed procedures to assess the significant assumptions used in the Germany VIU model, including:

  • evaluating projected Adjusted EBITDAaL growth, for example by comparing underlying assumptions including Average Revenue Per User (‘ARPU’) to external data, such as economic and industry forecasts and competitor data for the German telecoms market, supporting contracts and benchmarking provided by management, and for consistency with evidence obtained from other areas of our audit;
  • comparing the cash flow projections used in the Germany VIU model to the Long-Range Plan approved by the Group’s Board of Directors as part of their annual budgeting exercise and evaluating the historical accuracy of management’s German business projections, which underpin the VIU model, by comparing the prior years’ forecast to actual results for each of the last five years;
  • comparing forecast capital expenditure and license and spectrum payments to actual historical spend, assessing market specific events such as network deployment plans, industry analysis and competitor data, where available;
  • comparing the long-term growth rate and discount rate assumptions to independently determined ranges, with the involvement of EY valuation specialists;
  • performing sensitivity analyses on the VIU model, to evaluate the impact that changes in assumptions would cause to the valuation of the Germany CGU; and
  • in considering the existence of contrary evidence, for management’s assessment of implied recoverable value, we compared the Germany CGU EBITDAaL multiple to market listed peers and considered independent analyst valuations for the Germany CGU.

We also assessed the adequacy of the related disclosures provided in Note 4 of the consolidated financial statements, in particular the sensitivity disclosures in relation to changes in assumptions that would lead to an impairment being recorded.

KEY OBSERVATIONS COMMUNICATED TO THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE

Based on our audit procedures, we considered management’s assessment supporting the recoverability of the goodwill balance allocated to the Germany CGU, including the conclusion that no impairment charge was required, to be reasonable. Accordingly, no impairment charge has been recognised for the year.

The disclosures in Note 4 of the consolidated financial statements in respect of the Germany CGU are consistent with the requirements of IAS 36 including the sensitivity disclosures.

How we scoped our audit to respond to the risk and involvement with component teams

The recoverability of the Group’s Germany CGU carrying value was audited centrally by the Group audit team with support from the component audit team on certain procedures at the local market level.

Risk

Recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets in Luxembourg and VodafoneThree

As more fully described in Note 6 to the consolidated financial statements, the Group recognises deferred tax assets in accordance with IAS 12 Income Taxes, based on whether management determines that it is probable, which requires significant judgement, that there will be sufficient and suitable taxable profits in the relevant legal entity or tax group to allow the recognized assets to be recovered.

Deferred tax assets amounting to €15,248 million (FY25: €15,563 million) are recognised in Luxembourg in respect of losses and €2,067 million (FY25: Nil) for VodafoneThree, primarily relating to excess capital allowances.

Management concluded it is probable that the related entities will continue to generate taxable profits in the future against which the deferred tax assets will be recovered over a period of 46 to 50 years (FY25: 47 to 52 years) in Luxembourg and 46 years for VodafoneThree. The Company does not currently recognize deferred tax assets which are forecast to be used 60 years beyond the reporting period.

The nature of the respective forecasts impacts the timeframe over which the deferred tax assets in Luxembourg and for Vodafone Three are expected to be recovered.

  • The Luxembourg companies’ income is primarily derived from internal financing, centralized procurement and international roaming activities. The forecasted future finance income considers assumptions of future interest rates and levels of intragroup financing, as well as forecasted income from the activities described above.
  • The VodafoneThree income is derived from the operating activities of the VodafoneThree UK tax group. Management’s forecast assumes an expected level of future profitability, expected levels of intercompany debt and reflects inherent risks related to the telecommunications sector.

Auditing the Group’s recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets in Luxembourg and of VodafoneThree is significant to the audit because it involves material amounts, and the judgements and estimates in relation to future taxable profits and the period of time over which the Group expected to utilise these assets, results in increased estimation uncertainty.

Our response to the risk

Overall procedures in respect of both jurisdictions

We obtained an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of management’s controls over the recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets specifically relating to the Luxembourg and the VodafoneThree tax groups, including the calculation of the gross amount of deferred tax assets recorded and the preparation of the prospective financial information used to determine the Luxembourg and VodafoneThree entities’ future taxable income.

We involved our tax professionals and tax specialists, in the performance of our audit procedures which includes, among others, assessing the existence of available losses for both jurisdictions and excess capital allowances for VodafoneThree, and evaluating management’s position on the recoverability of the losses and excess capital allowances with respect to local tax law and tax planning strategies adopted. We also evaluated the nature of reconciling items between forecast profit before tax and taxable profit and considered their appropriateness in accordance with IAS 12. We performed sensitivities to understand the impact of changes in key assumptions of forecast taxable income, on the utilisation period, including historical profitability against forecast.

We evaluated the adequacy of the disclosures in respect of the recognition of the deferred tax asset against the requirements of IAS 12.

Luxembourg specific procedures

Our additional audit procedures included, among others;

  • evaluating the forecast finance income by, on a sample basis, recalculating income with reference to underlying agreements, comparing future interest rates utilised in the forecasts to relevant external benchmarks and assessing the projections of internal debt levels for consistency with our understanding of the business and relevant tax regulations in respect of transfer pricing of financial transactions;

  • assessing whether contrary evidence exists that is not consistent with either management’s stated intention that the financing structures, as projected, as well as the intercompany debt levels, will remain in place or that it is probable that sufficient future taxable profits will exist in the relevant jurisdictions;
  • evaluating how the assumptions used in the impairment model for the Germany CGU impact Luxembourg’s forecast interest income from Vodafone Germany, and therefore, the recoverability of the deferred tax assets in Luxembourg; and
  • assessing the reasonability of forecasted procurement and roaming taxable profits utilised in management’s assessment, by considering historical forecasting accuracy, and comparing forecasts with evidence obtained from other areas of our audit.

VodafoneThree UK specific procedures

Our additional audit procedures included, among others:

  • corroborating that the VodafoneThree UK forecast trading activities used within the deferred tax asset recognition model are consistent with those used as an input into the going concern, long-term viability statement, impairment assessment and the information approved by the Board related to management’s business plans;
  • assessing management’s expected future profitability, by comparing underlying assumptions, to external data, such as economic and industry forecasts and competitor data for the UK telecommunication sector, and supporting contracts and benchmarking provided by management; and
  • evaluating the reasonability of expected future profitability by comparing underlying assumptions to historical performance, commercial rationale, the application of transfer pricing policies and with evidence obtained from other areas of our audit.

KEY OBSERVATIONS COMMUNICATED TO THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE

We agree with the recognition of the deferred tax assets in Luxembourg and VodafoneThree, and consequently the long recoverability period, on the basis of forecast profits, which are considered probable. In the case of Luxembourg, this reflects the commercial rationale and management’s intention to retain current activities in Luxembourg and the intergroup debt levels, over the longer term and this reflects the track record of historical profitability. In the case of the VodafoneThree, this reflects the commercial rationale for the merger. Both VodafoneThree and Luxembourg have established market structure for telecoms including high barriers to entry for new market entrants, the long-dated funding structure and local tax law.

Changes in key assumptions, in particular Luxembourg, including a plausible reduction in the level of intra-group debt levels with Germany could lead to an increase in utilisation period beyond 60 years.

The Group does not currently recognise deferred tax assets which are forecast to be used 60 years beyond the balance sheet date and consequently, should the assumptions change, a different conclusion could be reached in respect of the level of deferred tax asset recognised.

We consider that the disclosures included within Note 6 to the consolidated financial statements acknowledges both the judgement made in respect of the timing and profile of the utilisation of the losses in the short to medium term and the longer-term uncertainties in relation to the carrying value of the related deferred tax asset.

How we scoped our audit to respond to the risk and involvement with component teams

Audit procedures on the recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets on tax losses in Luxembourg were performed by the Group audit team and its tax professionals, with support from Luxembourg tax and transfer pricing specialists for certain procedures. Audit procedures on the recognition and recoverability of deferred tax assets in VodafoneThree were performed by the Group audit team and its tax professionals and with support from UK tax specialists for certain procedures.

Risk

Revenue recognition

As more fully described in Note 2, Note 14 and Note 15 to the consolidated financial statements, the Group reported revenue of €40,461 million (FY25: €37,448 million), contract assets of €2,982 million (FY25: €2,969 million) and contract liabilities of €2,262 million (FY25: €2,228 million) for the year ended or as at 31 March 2026. Management records revenue according to the principles of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, including following the 5-step model therein.

We identified a risk of management override through inappropriate manual topside revenue journal entries, given revenue is a key performance indicator, both in external communication and for management incentives.

We also consider auditing the revenue recorded by the Group to involve greater auditor effort and attention, due to the multiple IT systems and tools utilised in the initiation, processing and recording of transactions, which includes a high volume of individually low monetary value transactions. The involvement of IT professionals was required to determine the audit approach to test and evaluate the relevant data that was captured and aggregated, and to assess the sufficiency of the audit evidence obtained.

Our response to the risk

Our audit procedures at full scope and specific scope component locations included, among others obtaining an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of management’s controls over the Group’s revenue recognition process, which includes management’s determination of the timing of revenue recorded. With the support of our IT professionals, we also evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of management’s controls over the appropriate initiation and flow of transactional data through the IT systems and tools and the reconciliation of the transactional data to the accounting records. Where we were unable to rely on controls within the underlying IT systems, we designed alternative procedures to mitigate the risk.

For significant revenue streams, which include service and equipment revenue, at full and specific scope locations, our audit procedures included the following, on a sample basis:

  • We used data analytic tools to identify revenue related manual journal entries posted to the general ledger and traced these back to underlying source documentation, to evaluate the propriety, completeness and accuracy of the postings. We also performed analytical procedures to consider the completeness of journal entry postings;
  • Where it was deemed to be most effective, at certain components we extended the use of data analytics. These incremental procedures involved testing full populations of transactions, including performing a correlation analysis between invoiced revenue, receivables and cash. We performed targeted audit procedures over items above our testing threshold that did not correlate as expected;
  • In order to support our data analytic approach, we performed a completeness test over the underlying data to ensure this data reconciled to the financial statements;
  • At components where the above procedures were not used, for the significant revenue billing systems, we obtained the billing data to general ledger reconciliation, which included the relevant adjustments to deferred and accrued revenue balances. We reperformed these reconciliations, including assessing the accuracy of the revenue adjustments by vouching billing data inputs to underlying source documentation, including contractual agreements where applicable. In addition, we tested the mathematical accuracy and completeness of the reconciliations and reconciling items above our testing threshold, including significant revenue postings outside of the billing systems; and
  • We recalculated the revenue recognised to evaluate whether the processing of the revenue recognition by the Group’s IT systems was materially correct. Where relevant, for multi-element arrangements, we used contractual data to apply the Group’s accounting policy to allocate transaction price to the identified performance obligations and recalculate the revenue to be recognised.

We also assessed the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in respect to the accounting policies on revenue recognition.

KEY OBSERVATIONS COMMUNICATED TO THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE

Based on the procedures performed, including those in respect of manual adjustments to revenue, we concluded that revenue has been appropriately recognised in accordance with IFRS 15, in the year ended 31 March 2026.

How we scoped our audit to respond to the risk and involvement with component teams

Our component audit teams performed audit procedures over this risk area in 5 full scope and 3 specific scope components, which covered 74% of the Group’s revenue. The Group audit team also performed centralised audit procedures over certain revenue streams which covered 1% of the Group’s revenue.

For the remaining 25% of revenue, we performed risk assessment, and selective analytical and controls testing procedures to ensure the risk of material misstatement was sufficiently low. We also performed targeted journal entry testing procedures to mitigate residual risk of material misstatement.

We held regular discussions with component teams throughout the audit, including in person on site visits at all locations. We participated in the development of their planned audit strategy for revenue recognition, reviewed all component deliverables and additional key and supporting workpapers prepared by the component teams to address the risk identified.

Risk

Merger of Vodafone Limited and Hutchison 3G UK

Holdings Limited in the UK

As more fully described in Note 27 to the consolidated financial statements, on 31 May 2025, the Group completed a transaction to merge Vodafone Limited (‘Vodafone UK’) and Hutchison 3G UK Holdings Limited (‘Three UK’), to form VodafoneThree Holdings Limited (‘VodafoneThree’) for a total consideration valued at €2,446 million. The transaction was accounted for using the acquisition method, which resulted in the recognition of identifiable intangible assets of €2,555 million, tangible assets of €3,457 million and goodwill of €1,358 million.

The audit of the merger required significant auditor judgement, in assessing control over VodafoneThree, including whether the Group has the power and ability to use that power to affect its returns. Significant judgement was also involved in evaluating the valuation of the consideration and the identified intangible and tangible assets, given the estimation uncertainty and sensitivity of key assumptions, including those relating to future performance.

Our response to the risk

We obtained an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of management’s controls over its accounting for the acquisition. We tested controls over management’s review of the control assessment, valuation of the consideration and valuation of identifiable intangible and tangible assets, including the review of the valuation models and significant assumptions, as described above, used in the valuation.

To test the control assessment, our audit procedures included, an evaluation of the terms of the Shareholder Agreement, including the rights of minority shareholders, and management’s own assessment against the requirements of IFRS 10.

To test the valuation models used to fair value the acquired identifiable intangible assets, our audit procedures included, among others:

  • assessing the competence, capabilities and objectivity of management’s specialists;
  • testing the completeness and accuracy of the underlying data used in the purchase price allocation by comparing to supporting ledgers, and evaluation of the valuation methodologies applied against the requirements of IFRS 13, with the involvement of our internal valuation specialists, and;
  • for identified intangible assets impacted by prospective financial information, we identified key assumptions and benchmarked them to available competitor data and external industry reports, and performed sensitivity analysis over the key assumptions.

To test the valuation of consideration, our audit procedures include, assessing the valuation of the Vodafone UK equity value contributed based on its standalone valuation model, market assumptions and review of the Shareholder Agreement.

In addition, we evaluated the adequacy of the related disclosures, in particular the description of the transaction and the purchase price allocation.

KEY OBSERVATIONS COMMUNICATED TO THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE

Based on the procedures performed, we agree that the assumptions, methodologies and judgements applied as part of the purchase price allocation (‘PPA’) are reasonable.

The disclosures in Note 1 and 27 are appropriate.

HOW WE SCOPED OUR AUDIT TO RESPOND TO THE RISK AND INVOLVEMENT WITH COMPONENT TEAMS

The Accounting for the merger with Three UK was audited centrally by the Group audit team with support from the component audit team on certain procedures at the local market level.

OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY

We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit and in forming our audit opinion.

Materiality

The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of the users of the financial statements. Materiality provides a basis for determining the nature and extent of our audit procedures.

We determined our materiality for the Group to be €270 million (2025: €215 million), which is approximately 2.5% (2025: 2.0%) of Adjusted EBITDAaL. We believe that Adjusted EBITDAaL provides us with the most relevant performance measure for the continuing business on which to determine materiality, given the prominence of this metric throughout the Annual Report and consolidated financial statements, investor presentations, profit metrics focused on by analysts and its alignment to the management remuneration metric of adjusted EBIT. When calculating our final materiality, we consider the need to make adjustments to the basis for materiality to reflect a consistent view of the underlying business.

We determined materiality for the Parent company to be €588 million (2025: €421 million), which is approximately 1.5% (2025: 1.0%) of the Parent company’s equity. However, since the Parent company was a full scope component, for accounts that were relevant for the consolidated financial statements, a performance materiality of €43 million was applied.

The increase in the materiality for the Group and Parent company reflects the completion of significant portfolio changes as well as the overall stability of the industry and business as well as the viability of the Group.

Performance materiality

The application of materiality at the individual account or balance level. It is set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds materiality.

On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the effectiveness of the Group’s overall control environment to prevent or timely detect and correct material errors, our judgement was that performance materiality was 75% (2025: 75%) of our planning materiality, namely €200m (2025: €160m).

Audit work was undertaken at component locations for the purpose of responding to the assessed risk of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements. The performance materiality set for each component is based on the relative scale and risk of the component to the Group as a whole and our assessment of the risk of misstatement at that component. In the current year, the range of performance materiality allocated to components was €39m to €200m (2025: €32m to €160m).

Reporting threshold

An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being clearly trivial.

We agreed with the Audit and Risk Committee that we would report to them all uncorrected audit differences in excess of €13m (2025: €11m), which is set at 5% of materiality, as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative measures of materiality discussed above and in light of other relevant qualitative considerations in forming our opinion.

Other information

The other information comprises the information included in the annual report set out on pages 1 to 126, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

OPINIONS ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006

In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

  • the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and
  • the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Parent company and its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report.

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:

  • adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
  • the Parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or
  • certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
  • we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT

We have reviewed the directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group and Company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review by the UK Listing Rules.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:

  • Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on page 125;
  • Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page 64;
  • Directors’ statement on whether it has a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meets its liabilities set out on page 64;
  • Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 125;
  • Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on page 122;
  • The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems, including the material control weakness described, set out on page 122; and
  • The section describing the work of the Audit and Risk Committee set out on page 92.

Responsibilities of directors

As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 125, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group and Parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect irregularities, including fraud. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.

However, the primary responsibility for the prevention and detection of fraud rests with both those charged with governance of the Company and management.

  • We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that are applicable to the Group and determined that the most significant are those that relate to the reporting framework (UK-adopted International Accounting Standards, with IFRS accounting standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced disclosure framework’ (‘FRS 101’), the UK Companies Act 2006, UK Corporate Governance Code, the US Securities and Exchange Act of 1934 and the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority), the relevant tax compliance regulations in the jurisdictions in which the Group operates, the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and other local Data Regulations.
  • We understood how the Group is complying with those frameworks by making enquiries of management, internal audit, those responsible for legal and compliance procedures and the Company Secretary. We supplemented our enquiries through our review of board minutes and papers provided to the Audit and Risk Committee, correspondence received from regulatory bodies and attendance at all meetings of the Audit and Risk Committee, as well as consideration of the results of our audit procedures across the Group, including our testing of entity level and group-wide controls.
  • We assessed the susceptibility of the Group’s financial statements to material misstatement, including how fraud might occur by meeting with management from various parts of the Group, including management and finance teams of the local markets designated as full scope and specific scope locations, management at Head Office, the Audit and Risk Committee, the Group Internal Audit function, the Group Legal function, the Group Corporate Security team and individuals in the fraud and compliance department, to understand where it considered there was susceptibility to fraud; and assessing whistleblowing logs and associated incidences for those with a potential financial reporting impact. We also considered performance targets and their propensity to influence efforts made by management to manage earnings or influence the perceptions of analysts. We considered the programmes and controls that the Group has established to address risks identified, or that otherwise prevent, deter and detect fraud, and how senior management monitors those programmes and controls.
  • Based on this understanding we designed our audit procedures to identify non-compliance with such laws and regulations or fraudulent financial reporting, where the impact on the financial statements of such non-compliance or fraudulent financial reporting could be material. These procedures included, where necessary, the use of forensic and other relevant specialists. Our procedures involved enquiries of external legal counsel and other specialists, management and finance teams of the local markets designated as full and specific scope locations, management at Head Office, the Audit and Risk Committee, the Group Internal Audit function, the Group Legal function, the Group Corporate Security team and individuals in the fraud and compliance department. We also performed journal entry testing, with a focus on manual consolidation journals, journals indicating large or unusual transactions and journals with key words that could indicate management override, based on our understanding of the business; and challenging the assumptions and judgements made by management in respect of significant one-off transactions in the financial year and significant accounting estimates, as referred to in the key audit matters section above. At a component level, our full and specific scope component audit teams’ procedures included enquiries of component management; journal entry testing; and testing in respect of the key audit matter of revenue recognition. We also leveraged our data analytics capabilities in performing work on the purchase to pay process and fixed asset balances and leases, to assist in identifying higher risk transactions and balances, for testing. Any instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations, including in relation to fraud, were communicated by/to components and considered in our audit approach, if applicable.
  • Where the risk of fraud, including the risk of management override, was considered to be higher, including areas impacting Group key performance indicators or management remuneration, we performed audit procedures to address each identified material fraud risk or other risk of material misstatement. These procedures included those on revenue recognition referred to in the key audit matters section above and testing journal entries that we judged to be of higher risk and were designed to provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements were free from material fraud or error.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at https://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

OTHER MATTERS WE ARE REQUIRED TO ADDRESS

  • Following the recommendation from the Audit and Risk Committee, we were appointed by the Parent company on 23 July 2019 to audit the financial statements for the year ending 31 March 2020 and subsequent financial periods.
  • The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments is seven years, covering the years ending 31 March 2020 to 31 March 2026.
  • The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit and Risk Committee.

USE OF OUR REPORT

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

IFRS Disclosures About Uncertainties: What Finance Leaders Need To Know

The IASB’s 2025 illustrative examples clarify existing IFRS disclosure requirements regarding uncertainties, particularly climate-related risks. They emphasize that materiality includes qualitative factors, requiring transparency in critical assumptions and estimates even when financial impacts appear small. Financial statements must provide a coherent narrative consistent with sustainability reports to meet growing stakeholder expectations. Key themes include linking climate-related matters to credit risk and enhancing disaggregation. These principles apply equally to Ind AS, with regulators expecting companies to reassess their disclosures to ensure they faithfully reflect all significant strategic, economic, or operational uncertainties.

INTRODUCTION

In November 2025, the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) issued a set of illustrative examples titled Disclosures about Uncertainties in the Financial Statements. These examples were added to the guidance accompanying IFRS 7, IFRS 18, IAS 1, IAS 8, IAS 36 and IAS 37. Although the examples use climate-related scenarios, the principles apply to all forms of uncertainty affecting financial reporting. Importantly, the guidance does not introduce new accounting requirements; instead, it demonstrates how existing IFRS requirements should be applied in practice.

The initiative reflects increasing expectations from investors, regulators and other stakeholders that financial statements, management commentary and sustainability disclosures should tell a coherent and consistent story. Concerns had been raised that some entities were discussing significant risks—particularly climate-related risks—in sustainability reports while providing little or no related information in their financial statements. The IASB’s examples seek to address this perceived disconnect.

WHY THE GUIDANCE MATTERS

The examples reinforce a fundamental IFRS principle: material information must be disclosed when it could reasonably influence the decisions of users of financial statements. Materiality is not determined solely by numerical size. Qualitative factors—such as strategic importance, regulatory developments, industry trends, or stakeholder expectations—can make information material even when the immediate financial impact appears limited.

Consequently, management must look beyond the face of the financial statements and consider the broader context in which investors evaluate the business. Information discussed in sustainability reports, climate-transition plans, industry developments, or public commitments may create expectations that require corresponding explanations within the financial statements.

KEY THEMES FROM THE ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES

1. Materiality Requires Both Quantitative and Qualitative Assessment

The first example presents two contrasting scenarios. In one case, a company concludes that explaining why its climate-transition plan has not yet affected its financial statements is material because investors would reasonably expect to see such effects. In the second scenario, a company with limited exposure to climate-related risks determines that a similar disclosure would not be material.

The lesson is that materiality is highly entity-specific. Management must consider not only the magnitude of financial effects but also factors such as the business model, industry exposure, regulatory environment and stakeholder expectations.

The transparency Gap

2. Assumptions and Estimates Must Be Transparent

The guidance highlights that disclosures should focus on assumptions that truly drive outcomes.Under IAS 36, companies performing impairment testing should disclose key assumptions whenever they are material to understanding recoverable amounts, even when no impairment is recognised.

Similarly, IAS 1 and IAS 8 require disclosure of significant estimation uncertainties. Companies may need to explain assumptions that could lead to material changes in asset or liability values in future periods, even if those uncertainties will not be resolved within the next year.

For preparers, the implication is clear: boilerplate disclosures are increasingly unlikely to satisfy users or regulators. Investors want insight into the assumptions management considers most critical.

3. Climate Risk and Credit Risk Are Connected

The IFRS 7 example demonstrates how climate-related factors may affect credit risk assessments. Financial institutions and other lenders may need to explain how climate-related risks influence expected credit losses, portfolio quality and risk management practices.

This example is particularly significant because it shows that climate considerations are no longer viewed solely as sustainability matters. They can directly affect financial instruments, credit quality and valuation decisions.

4. Small Accounting Amounts Can Still Require Disclosure

One of the most practical examples relates to decommissioning and site-restoration provisions under IAS 37. The provision recognised in the financial statements may be quantitatively small because future cash outflows are discounted to present value. However, the underlying obligation and the undiscounted settlement costs may be substantial.

The example illustrates that disclosures may still be necessary when the nature of an obligation or the uncertainty surrounding it is significant, even if the carrying amount appears immaterial.

5. Greater Focus on Disaggregation

The final example addresses aggregation and disaggregation requirements under IFRS 18. Companies may need to separate information about assets that are currently reported together if they are exposed to different risks or uncertainties. For example, this may involve disclosing separately the carrying amounts of two types of PP&E in the notes to the financial statements.

The example illustrates possible factors an entity might consider when determining whether the two types of PP&E have sufficiently dissimilar risk characteristics such that disaggregating them would result in material information. These factors may include the size of the PP&E carrying amount, the significance of climate related transition risks to the entity’s operations, and external climate related qualitative factors (such as market, economic, regulatory and legal framework).

The objective is to ensure that users receive information that is sufficiently detailed to understand how different parts of the business are affected by evolving economic, regulatory or climate-related developments.

PRACTICAL IMPLICATIONS FOR COMPANIES

Regulators are likely to expect entities to consider them in upcoming reporting cycles. The examples represent the IASB’s current thinking on how existing disclosure requirements should be applied. As a result, companies should reassess whether their financial statement disclosures adequately reflect significant uncertainties discussed elsewhere in the annual report.

Management teams should consider the following questions:

  • Are climate-related or other strategic risks discussed outside the financial statements adequately reflected within the financial statement disclosures?
  • Do impairment models disclose the assumptions that genuinely drive valuation outcomes?
  • Have significant estimation uncertainties been described with sufficient specificity?
  • Could qualitative factors make an apparently small item material?
  • Would investors benefit from more disaggregated information about assets, liabilities or risk exposures?

CONCLUSION

The IASB’s new illustrative examples do not create new accounting rules. Instead, they raise expectations around transparency, judgement and connectivity in corporate reporting. The overarching message is that financial statements should provide a faithful and coherent explanation of how uncertainties—whether climate-related, economic, regulatory or operational—affect an entity’s financial position and performance.

For finance leaders, the challenge is no longer simply determining whether an uncertainty has produced a measurable accounting impact. Increasingly, the question is whether investors would expect to understand how that uncertainty has been assessed, even when the immediate financial consequences appear limited. The examples signal that meaningful disclosure, supported by robust judgement, will remain central to high-quality IFRS reporting. The examples do not have an effective date or transition requirements. Entities are entitled to sufficient time to implement any changes resulting from the illustrative examples.

Ind AS and IFRS requirements are aligned (barring some legacy differences). Whilst the above discussion is presented in the context of IFRS, it equally applies to Ind AS, and NFRA would expect to see disclosures that comply with the spirit of the change that IASB is seeking to achieve. The examples discussed above, do not introduce any new disclosure requirements; rather, they explain existing disclosure requirements. The Examples are not included in Ind AS because of prevailing copyright issues. Therefore, preparers applying Ind AS should refer directly to these examples in the IFRS guidance discussed above and comply with the spirit of those requirements, without exception.

Recent Decisions in GST

I HIGH COURT

30. (2026) 43 Centax 124 (Del.) Directorate General of GST Intelligence vs. Girish Sachdeva dated 05.06.2026

Prior notice before coercive action is an important safeguard, but it does not restrict the department from continuing its investigation or taking lawful action thereafter.

FACTS

Petitioner initiated investigation against M/s. Daak International Pvt. Ltd. on intelligence that the company had issued high-value E-way bills without filing GST returns. During verification, the company was found non-existent at its registered address. Respondents were identified as directors/persons connected with the company. Petitioner alleged availment of ineligible ITC and circular trading resulting in substantial tax evasion. Summons were issued requiring the respondents to appear and produce records. Respondents furnished replies but allegedly did not appear as required. They filed anticipatory bail applications before the Sessions Court. The Sessions Court rejected anticipatory bail but directed the petitioner to give seven day’s prior notice before taking coercive action. Being aggrieved only by the prior-notice direction, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that economic offences involving tax evasion require serious investigation. Petitioner retained full power to investigate and proceed in accordance with law. Since only summons had been issued and there was no imminent threat of arrest, the Court declined to grant anticipatory bail. The Court further held that the direction requiring seven days’ prior notice before any coercive action did not amount to blanket protection, as it neither restricted the investigation nor prevented the department from proceeding in accordance with law. Accordingly, the petition was dismissed.

31. (2026) 43 Centax 73 (All.) Samarpan Jain vs. State of U.P. dated 21.05.2026

An Advocate cannot be criminally prosecuted for bona fide professional acts performed during client representation, absent independent material showing conspiracy

FACTS

Petitioner was an Advocate engaged by a registered taxpayer for the purpose of filing statutory appeals under section 107 of the Goods and Services Tax Act. The appeals challenged tax, interest, and penalty orders passed against the assessee. Acting on instructions, the petitioner filed two online appeals before the respondent. Petitioner debited the statutory pre-deposit from the assessee’s Electronic Credit Ledger by utilising ITC. Respondent rejected this mode and dismissed the appeals as not maintainable. Thereafter, respondent lodged an FIR against the assessee and the petitioner. The FIR alleged illegal debit of ITC and conspiracy to evade tax. The police filed a charge-sheet and cognizance was taken. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that criminal proceedings against the petitioner were legally unsustainable. In Union of India vs. Yasho Industries Ltd. (2025) 30 Centax 352 dated 28-07-2025, ECL utilisation for pre-deposit was considered permissible. This supported the petitioner’s professional understanding while filing appeals. The petitioner acted only as an Advocate in the appellate proceedings. A professional act, even if legally debatable, could not constitute conspiracy with the client. Criminal prosecution for filing appeals would impair fearless legal representation and citizens’ right to legal assistance. The FIR, charge-sheet, and cognizance order were quashed against the petitioner.

32. (2026) 43 Centax 51 (Del.) IBA Crafts Pvt. Ltd. vs. Union of India dated 26.05.2026

Statutory IGST refund on zero-rated exports cannot be denied or stalled merely due to absence of departmental procedure.

FACTS

Petitioners exported goods through authorised Foreign Post Offices during July 2017 to June 2018. For July to December 2017, the exports were made on payment of IGST. From January 2018 onwards, the exports were made under LUT. Export proceeds were received through authorised banking channels. Petitioner claimed refund of IGST paid on zero-rated exports. They submitted export details, postal receipts, GSTR-1 records, and proof of tax payment. However, the refund claim was not processed due to absence of a prescribed procedure and data-capture mechanism. The Foreign Post Office stated that Customs was required to process the refund. The respondent-authorities, particularly Customs officers, expressed inability due to lack of Board-prescribed procedure. Being aggrieved, the petitioners approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that a statutory refund of IGST paid on zero-rated exports cannot be denied or kept pending merely due to the absence of a prescribed procedure or data-capture mechanism. Having fulfilled the statutory requirements and furnished the necessary documents, the petitioners were entitled to refund. The Court observed that procedural gaps or administrative inaction could not defeat a substantive statutory right and directed the respondents to take concrete steps for processing the refund claims.

33. [2026] 187 taxmann.com 233 (Madras) Noordeen Enterprises vs. Additional Director General Directorate of GST Intelligence dated 03-06-2026] dated 03-06-2026

When the GST Department issued recovery notices to the customers of petitioner before completion of adjudication, the Hon’ble Court declared the pre-adjudication recovery communications invalid, while preserving the department’s right to undertake lawful recovery after determination of liability.

FACTS

The respondents (GST authorities) issued letters to the customers of the petitioners directing them to remit amounts payable to the petitioners directly to the Government GST account. These communications were issued during the investigation stage when only a tax proposal existed and no adjudicated tax liability was determined against the petitioners. Pursuant to such communication, one customer remitted ₹15 lakh to the GST authorities. Similar letters were allegedly issued to other customers of the petitioners. The petitioners challenged the validity of such actions. Meanwhile, adjudication orders determining tax liability were subsequently passed and were separately under challenge.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court held that any letters issued by the GST authorities to customers of the petitioners prior to the issuance of an Order-in-Original determining tax liability are invalid and cannot form the basis for recovery proceedings. In MNS Enterprises vs. Additional Director General Directorate of GST Intelligence WP No.20067 of 2021 dated 04/03/2022 recovery before crystallization of liability was held impermissible. The Court reiterated that when the communications were issued, the alleged tax demand was not crystallized into an enforceable liability. Therefore, neither section 79 (recovery proceedings) nor section 83 (provisional attachment) could be invoked for such recovery. However, the Court clarified that after issuing adjudication orders determining tax liability, the authorities are at liberty to initiate recovery proceedings in accordance with the law, including recourse to section 79(1)(c) of the GST enactment.

34. [2026] 187 taxmann.com 287 (Gauhati) Metal Syndicate vs. Union of India dated 05-06-2026

Unless evidence exists showing collusion, fraud or lack of bona fides on the part of the purchaser, the ITC cannot be denied to the bona fide purchasers of the goods if the supplier has failed to pay tax to the Government.

FACTS

The petitioner, engaged in the business of trading scrap batteries, purchased goods from registered suppliers located in Kolkata during the period July 2017 to March 2019. The petitioner received the goods, paid the value of the goods along with GST through banking channels, and possessed valid tax invoices.

The petitioner duly filed GSTR-1 and GSTR-3B returns and availed Input Tax Credit (ITC) in accordance with section 16 of the CGST Act. Subsequently, the Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGGI) alleged that the petitioner had availed ineligible ITC on certain invoices without actual receipt of goods. Summons were issued and the petitioner produced all relevant documents, including purchase invoices and GST returns. A search conducted at the business premises did not result in recovery of any incriminating material. The petitioner also confirmed that goods were received and payments were made through banking channels. Despite this, a Show Cause Notice was issued proposing the denial of ITC amounting to ₹78.70 lakh along with interest and penalty alleging that the petitioner had wrongly availed and utilized the ITC of Rs.78,70,952/- in violation of section 16(2)(a)(b) of the CGST Act, 2017 without actual receipt of goods and thereby proposed recovery of tax along with interest and penalty. The demand was confirmed through an Order-in-Original and subsequently upheld in appeal. The petitioner challenged both orders before the High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court observed that the issue was squarely covered by the earlier decision in the case of National Plasto Moulding vs. State of Assam. [2024] 129 GSTR 544 (Gauhati). The Court reiterated that where a purchasing dealer has purchased goods from a registered supplier, received valid tax invoices, received the goods, paid consideration including GST through banking channels, and complied with statutory requirements, ITC cannot be denied merely because the supplier subsequently failed to deposit the tax with the Government. The Court emphasized that a bona fide purchaser cannot be expected to ensure that the supplier remits tax to the Government. Such an interpretation would place an impossible burden upon the purchaser. It further held that the proper remedy for the department is to proceed against the defaulting supplier and recover the unpaid tax from such supplier rather than denying ITC to the purchasing dealer. However, if evidence exists showing collusion, fraud or lack of bona fides on the part of the purchaser, the department would be free to initiate proceedings in accordance with law. Accordingly, the Order-in-Original and Order-in-Appeal were quashed and set aside.

35. [2026] 187 taxmann.com 185 (Gauhati) MD. Nekib Hussain vs. Union of India dated 01-06-2026

The Hon’ble Court permitted the petitioner to approach the jurisdictional authority within sixty days seeking restoration of GST registration by fulfilling the requirements of proviso to Rule 22(4) of the CGST Rules.

FACTS

The petitioner, a proprietorship concern engaged in execution of works contract services, was a registered person under the GST law. Due to non-filing of GST returns for a continuous period of six months, a Show Cause Notice was issued by the Superintendent, CGST. Simultaneously, the GST registration of the petitioner was suspended and was subsequently cancelled. The petitioner contended that the default occurred because of negligence on the part of the tax consultant, who failed to inform him about the non-compliance. The petitioner was willing to file all pending returns and pay the entire tax dues along with applicable interest, penalty, and late fees but could not do so because of restrictions on the GST portal and expiry of the prescribed time for seeking revocation. The petitioner relied upon the earlier decision of the Gauhati High Court in Dhirghat Hardware Stores vs. Union of India [2025] 180 taxmann.com 73 (Gauhati), which involved identical facts and legal issues.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court observed that the controversy was fully covered by its earlier decision in Dhirghat Hardware Stores vs. Union of India. The Court noted that the proviso to Rule 22(4) provides that where a registered person, instead of replying to the show cause notice issued for non-filing of returns, furnishes all pending returns and pays the entire tax liability together with applicable interest and late fees, the proper officer may drop the cancellation proceedings and restore the registration. Considering that cancellation of GST registration results in serious civil consequences and that the petitioner was willing to regularize all defaults, the Court held that the petitioner deserved an opportunity to restore the registration. Accordingly, the petitioner was permitted to approach the jurisdictional authority within sixty days seeking restoration of GST registration. Upon filing all pending returns and making payment of tax, penalty, interest, and late fees as required under Rule 22(4), the authority was directed to consider the application and take necessary steps for restoration of registration expeditiously. The Court further directed that the limitation period prescribed under section 73(10) shall be computed from the date of the Court’s order, except for Financial Year 2024-25, which would be governed by section 44 of the CGST Act.

36. [2026] 187 taxmann.com 74 (Allahabad) Sai Auto Mobiles vs. Commissioner Central Goods Service Tax and Central Excise dated 29-05-2026

Where the Adjudication Order is passed adversely and against the petitioner without supplying to him relied upon documents even after specific requests made by the petitioner, the Hon’ble Court set aside the order and remanded the matter for adjudication afresh.

FACTS

The petitioner, a registered person under the GST regime, challenged an adjudication order passed under section 74 of the CGST Act confirming tax demand, interest and penalty. During adjudication proceedings, the petitioner specifically applied to the Department for supply of copies of the Relied Upon Documents (RUDs) forming the basis of the Show Cause Notice. However, neither was the application decided nor were the requested documents supplied. The petitioner contended that due to non-supply of RUDs, it was deprived of an effective opportunity to defend itself. It was also argued that certain accounting discrepancies, including alleged double entries, had been explained in the reply but were not considered by the adjudicating authority. Aggrieved by the confirmation of demand without supply of the relied upon documents, the petitioner approached the High Court under Article 226. The Revenue failed to produce satisfactory material showing that the RUDs had been supplied before passing the adjudication order.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court held that where a demand is proposed based on specific RUDs, supply of such documents is an essential requirement of natural justice. The Court observed that without access to the RUDs, a taxpayer’s reply to the Show Cause Notice would remain incomplete and the right to effectively contest the proposed demand would be seriously impaired. Since the Revenue failed to establish that copies of the RUDs had been supplied and the petitioner had specifically pleaded non-supply, the Court inferred that the documents had not been furnished prior to confirmation of the demand. Accordingly, the impugned adjudication order was set aside, and the matter was remanded for fresh adjudication for passing a speaking order and allow cross-examination of witnesses where adverse statements are relied upon, unless valid reasons exist for refusal.

II GST APPELLATE TRIBUNAL

37. (2026) 43 Centax 75 (Tri. – GST – Delhi) DG Anti Profiteering, Director General of Anti-Profiteering, DGAP vs SJP Hotels & Resorts Pvt. Ltd. dated 26.05.2026

A concluded anti-profiteering determination cannot be reopened through a fresh complaint for the same project, period, respondent, and cause.

FACTS

Respondent developed the real estate project after GST was introduced. Earlier, some homebuyers had filed complaints alleging profiteering in the same project. The DGAP investigated those complaints and computed profiteering for the entire project. The computation also included the amount attributable to the petitioner. The competent authority confirmed violation of section 171 of the CGST Act. The respondent challenged that order, but the writ petition was dismissed. Thus, the earlier findings became final. Later, the petitioner filed another complaint for the same project and period. The Standing Committee recommended fresh investigation. During proceedings, the petitioner withdrew the complaint after receiving possession. A full settlement deed was also produced. The DGAP placed the matter before the Hon’ble Tribunal.

HELD

The Hon’ble Tribunal held that fresh investigation was not maintainable for the same respondent, project, period, and cause. In DG Anti-Profiteering vs. SJP Hotels & Resorts Pvt. Ltd., (2026) 43 Centax 75 dated 26-05-2026, final adjudication barred reopening. The earlier profiteering determination had been investigated, adjudicated and affirmed by the Hon’ble High Court. The issue had therefore attained finality on facts and law. Res judicata prevented repeated proceedings on an already concluded subject. The unconditional withdrawal and settlement deed further rendered the complaint infructuous. Accordingly, the proceedings were dropped, and no further action was directed.

Recent Developments in GST

A. NOTIFICATIONS

i) Notification No.2/2026-Central Tax dated 07.05.2026

By above notification, the GSTAT Principal Bench is notified as the National Appellate Authority for Advance Ruling (NAAAR) with effect from 1st April 2026.

ii) By Office Order No.3/GSTAT/PB/2026 dt.14.05.2026, the constitution of the GSTAT Bench has been specified.

B. ADVISORY

i) GSTN has issued an Advisory dated 18.05.2026 in relation to the filing of Annexure-B for refund applications involving accumulated ITC using the offline utility on the GST portal.

ii) GSTN has issued Advisories dated 20.05.2026 & 21.05.2026 informing Taxpayers and Stakeholders about enhancements in the E-Way Bill (EWB) Portal.

iii) GSTN has issued an Advisory dated 09.06.2026 regarding the extension of the timeline for implementation of the “Ship to GSTIN” and Voluntary Closure of E-Way Bill functionalities. The timeline has been extended to 01.08.2026.

C. ADVANCE RULINGS

Easy Flux Polymers Pvt. Ltd. (AAAR Order No. 01/2026-2027 dt. 02.04.2026)(Raj)

16. Classification – Only Biodegradable Bags are eligible for the benefit of the concessional rate of tax, under Entry No. 319 of Schedule I to Notification No. 09/2025-Central Tax (Rate).

FACTS

This appeal arose out of the order of the Ld. AAR, Rajasthan, reported in 2026-VIL-36-AAR. The appellant is engaged in the manufacture and supply of compostable plastic bags, which are claimed to be eco-friendly substitutes for conventional plastic bags. The Appellant holds valid CPCB / CIPET / TÜV Rheinland certifications confirming compostability and biodegradability as per ISO 17088 and EN 13432 standards in respect of said product.

Vide Notification No. 09/2025-CTR dated 17th September, 2025 (effective from 22.09.2025), the Government inserted an entry at Serial No. 319 in Schedule- I, prescribing GST @ 5% for “Paper Sacks/Bags and Biodegradable Bags” under Chapters 39 & 48.

The appellant applied for an advance ruling before the Ld. AAR regarding the classification of its product.

The Ld. AAR ruled that the bags in question are made from polymer materials and are classifiable under Chapter 39 – Plastics and articles thereof, specifically under heading 3923, being articles for the conveyance or packing of goods. It was held that this classification is independent of whether the material is biodegradable or not. Regarding the rate of tax, the Ld. AAR held that it was not in a position to decide whether the product is biodegradable or compostable and ruled that, if bags are biodegradable, then the benefit of Entry No. 319 of Schedule I to Notification No. 9/2025-Central Tax (Rate) dated 17.09.2025 would be available and GST would be payable at the rate of 5% (2.5% CGST + 2.5% SGST); otherwise, GST would be payable at 18%.

In appeal, the appellant reiterated its submission that the Ld. AAR failed to appreciate that the CPCB/CIPET certification is conclusive and that the ruling lacks clear findings and is arbitrary and unsustainable.

The appellant further clarified the nature and quality of the goods so as to merit classification as biodegradable bags.

HELD

The Ld. AAAR, on the basis of the certificates and other material, appreciated the factual position that the bags manufactured by the appellant fall under Chapter 39- ‘Plastics and articles thereof’ and that rate of 5% applies if they are bio-degradable.

However, the Ld. AAAR concurred with the ruling of the AAR, observing as under:

“15. We agree with the findings of the AAR, Rajasthan that advance ruling authorities do not possess the jurisdiction to determine whether a product meets environmental, technical or scientific standards of bio-degradability or compostability and that determination of bio-degradability of any product is not in the scope of this advance ruling forum. We find that advance ruling authority is preordained forum for interpretation of GST law to answer questions on the issues as prescribed under Section 97(2) of CGST Act, 2017. And therefore, it can only be concluded that if the products of the applicant are bio-degradable, then the same would be eligible for benefit of concessional rate of tax under Entry No. 319 of Schedule I to Notification No. 09/2025-Central Tax (Rate) dated 17th September, 2025, otherwise the applicable rate for plastic bags under Chapter 39 would apply.”

The Ld. AAAR also observed that the jurisdictional GST field formation may draw samples and get the same tested and decide the applicability of the rate depending upon the findings regarding the biodegradability of the product.

17. Akhil Arun Naik (AAAR Order No. GOA/GAAAR/01 of 2025-26/1973 dt.31.7.2025)(Goa)

Classification – Drinking water not in sealed bottles. Supply of drinking or potable water through water tankers is exempt from Tax.

FACTS

The appellant received a work order from the Indian Institute of Technology (IIT), Goa for the staggered delivery of potable drinking water for students. The said water was to be transported either from a well or from an R.C.C. storage tank of the Public Works Department(PWD) for students.

The appellant sought an advance ruling as to whether GST would be applicable if a bulk quantity of water is supplied through tankers.

The members of the Advance Ruling Authority differed on the GST applicability on the supply of the said water. The SGST Member found the supply of water through water tankers exempt under Entry No. 99 of exemption Notification No. 2/2017-CT (Rate) dated 28.06.2017, whereas the CGST Member held opposite view. Accordingly, the impugned Advance Ruling Order No. GOA/GAAR/04 of 2023-24 dated 31.01.2025 – 2025-VIL-222-AAR was passed, and the said order was referred to the Appellate Authority for hearing and decision, as envisaged under Section 98(5) of the GST Act.

HELD

The Ld. AAAR noted that the water sourced from a well or an RCC storage tank (containing chlorinated water) maintained by the PWD is supplied via tankers by the appellant to IIT, Goa for use by students.

The Ld. AAAR reproduced the relevant Entry No. 99 of Notification No. 2/2017-CT (Rate) dated 28.06.2017, which reads as under:

“Water [other than aerated, mineral, purified, distilled, medicinal, ionic, battery, de-mineralized and water sold in sealed container]” – NIL rate of CGST.

The Ld. AAAR analyzed the entry and observed that:

“- The entry provides GST exemption for supply of “water”, subject to certain exclusions;

– Excluded from this exemption are specific types of aerated water, mineral water, purified water, distilled water, distilled water, medicinal water and water sold in sealed containers.”

The Ld. AAAR also referred to Circular No. 56/26/2018-GST dated 09.08.2018 explaining the applicability of GST on the supply of potable or drinking water for public purposes, which had not been considered by the members of AAR. The Ld. AAAR, after analysis, held that “it is an undisputed fact as observed from the work order submitted by the applicant that the drinking or potable water was required to be supplied by the applicant through water tankers to IIT Goa students. Hence, it clearly comes out in the instant case that the drinking or potable water is not supplied in a sealed container and is clearly for public purpose. Accordingly, exemption for GST to the impugned supply of drinking or potable water through water tankers to IIT Goa for students is available under Sl. No. 99 of Notification No. 2/2017-CT (Rate) dated 28.06.2017 as amended.”

Accordingly, the Ld. AAAR held supply of water as exempt.

18. Indian Oil-Adani Gas Pvt. Ltd. (AAAR Order No. GOA/GAAAR/02 of 2025-26/2209 dt.18.8.2025)(Goa)

RCM on Government Services: PWD Goa, being the service provider, falls under the category of State Government or Local Authority, and the service receiver (being business entity) is liable to pay GST under RCM.

FACTS

The appeal arose from the ruling of the AAR vide order no. GOA/GAAR/01 of 2024-25 dated 30.01.2025.

The appellant had sought an advance ruling for determination of the following questions:

“Whether GST on permission charges, reinstatement charges, road cutting charges and ground rent charges levied by Goa PWD authorities is to be paid under reverse charge by IOAGPL in terms of Serial No. 5 of Notification No. 13/2017- Central Tax (Rate) dated 28-06-2017?”

The Ld. AAR held that RCM is leviable on the charges paid as above to the Goa PWD.

In appeal, the appellant reiterated its submission that, as per section 7(2), activities or transactions undertaken by the Central / State Government, or any Local authority in which they are engaged as public authorities, as may be notified by the Government on the recommendations of the Council, shall be treated neither as a supply of goods nor a supply of service.

Reference was also made to Entry No.4 of the Twelfth Schedule to the Constitution, which entrusts the municipalities i.e. the local bodies/authorities, with the construction of roads and bridges within their respective jurisdiction, which includes maintenance, repairs, restoration etc. of the roads. The argument was that, since the functions of construction, repairs, maintenance of the roads were undertaken by the PWD department (which is the State Government itself), the same did not constitute a taxable supply by the PWD and, hence, no RCM was leviable.

HELD

After discussion, the Ld. AAAR held as under:

“11.2 Here, we observe that Sl. No. 5 of Notification No. 13/2017-CT dated 28.06.2017 clearly states that GST on the services that supplied by the Central Government, State Government, Union territory or local authority to a business entity is payable by the service recipient i.e. the business entity. In the instant case, PWD Goa, the service provider falls under category of State Government or Local Authority and the appellant (IOAGPL), the service receiver is a business entity. Hence, the appellant are rightly liable to pay GST under RCM, in the instant matter, in terms of Sl. No. 5 of Notification No. 13/2017-CT dated 28.06.2017.”

The Ld. AAAR refrained from deciding the taxability of the services under reference, as the same was not under challenge before AAR.

One more issue raised by the appellant was that the original Advance Ruling was passed after 90 days, as provided under section 98(6). The appellant argued that the Advance Ruling should be declared void. However, the Ld. AAAR held that although the Advance Ruling should be passed within 90 days, no consequences are prescribed under section 98(6) in the event of a delay in passing the Advance Ruling. In view of the above, the Ld. AAAR held that the Advance Ruling, though passed after 90 days, was still validly effective.

19. Nichirin Imperial Autoparts India Pvt. Ltd. (AAAR Order No. HAAAR/2022-23/03 dt.29.4.2026) (Haryana)

Classification – Brake Hoses – Interpretation of entries

FACTS

The appellant is engaged in the manufacture and import of automotive components, including Brake Hoses for two-wheelers and four-wheelers. The appellant sought an advance ruling from the AAR regarding the classification and applicable GST rate for its product, “Brake Hoses.” The AAR, in Order No. HAAR No. HR/ARI/09/2021-22, dated 13.12.2021, classified Brake Hoses for four-wheelers under HSN 8708 with a GST rate of 28% and brake hoses for two wheelers under HSN 8714 with a GST rate of 5%. Aggrieved by this ruling, the Appellant filed the present appeal before the AAAR.

The appellant contended that Brake Hoses are essentially rubber hoses with fittings and should be classified under HSN 40093100 & 40093200, which covers “Tubes, pipes and hoses, of vulcanized rubber other than hard rubber, with fittings,” attracting GST rate of 18%.

HELD

The Ld. AAAR considered three relevant Headings for classification of the above product – namely Heading 4009, 8708 and 8714 – as applicable prior to 22.9.2025.

The Ld. AAAR also referred to the classification methodology under the Customs Act and considered the relevant Chapter Notesas well as the General Rules for Interpretation.

The Ld. AAAR referred to Notification No. 72/93-Cus. dated 28.02.1993 issued under the Customs Act, wherein the product in question was also shown as classifiable under Chapter 4009.

The Ld. AAAR further referred to the decisions in M/s Track Parts Corporation [1992 (57) ELT 98 (Tri.) – 1991-VIL-15-CESTAT-DEL-CU] and M/s. Dunlop India Ltd. [1997 (91) ELT 673 (Tri.)], wherein the Tribunal consistently recognized that products composed predominantly of rubber and retaining their material identity must be classified under Chapter 40, even if used in automobiles. The mere fact that the hoses are sold to automobile manufacturers does not automatically reclassify them as “motor vehicle parts” under Chapter 87.

In view of the above, the Ld. AAAR held that the Brake Hoses manufactured and supplied by the appellant, being primarily composed of vulcanized rubber and retaining the essential characteristics of hoses, are appropriately classifiable under Heading 4009 of Chapter 40 and taxable at 18% GST.

The Ld. AAAR allowed the appeal and classified the product under Chapter 4009.

20. Chelliah Rangaraj (AAR Order No. 45/ARA/2026 dt.5.5.2026)(TN)

Business – Taxability of License fees: Activity of granting a license to collect hair from the temple premises against consideration by way of license fees is a taxable activity.

FACTS

The applicant, a registered person, is engaged in the collection of human hair from Arulmigu Mariamman Temple, Samayapuram, Tiruchirappalli Dist. Tamil Nadu (hereinafter known as the temple). The applicant stated that Temple Authorities conduct an auction for the activity of sale of human hair within the Temple premises, The Applicant participates in such auctions and pays the auction amount to the Temple Authorities. The applicant further stated that the Temple is collecting GST on the auction amount on the ground that the said activity falls within the ambit of GST.

Under above circumstances, the applicant has sought advance ruling on the following questions:

“1. Whether, the Auction amount that is collected by the Temple Authorities, which is controlled by the HR & CE Department for collection of human hair falls within the ambit of section 7 of CGST Act.

2. Whether the Temple is business premises.

3. Sale of Human hair is exempted from GST Tax liabilities, and whether as a consequence the Auction amount paid to the Temple for conducting the activity of collection of hair is also exempted.”

The applicant explained that the temple is managed by the Hindu Religious and Charitable Endowments Department, Tamil Nadu (HR & CE department). The public offers hair as part of a religious practice. The Temple grants a license to the successful tenderer to collect human hair from the premises of the temple against licence fees. The applicant argued that undertaking such activity from the temple premises does not amount to carrying on any business activity, nor does it amount to providing any service under the GST Act.

It was also argued that human hair is exempted from GST and that the payment of fees in terms of the tender cannot be considered as “consideration”. In the absence of any consideration, GST cannot be collected by the Temple Authorities.

Although the Ld. AAR was initially reluctant to entertain the Advance Ruling application on the ground that the applicant himself was not a supplier, it entertained the same after considering the judgment of Hon. Calcutta High Court in M/s. Anmol Industries Limited vs The West Bengal Authority for Advance Ruling, Goods and Services Tax & Others (M.A.T. 630 of 2023 with I.A. No. CAN 1 of 2023 dated 21.04.2023) (2023-VIL-251- CAL).

HELD

The Ld. AAR noted that the temple is not raising any invoice but merely grants a license to collect human hair from the temple.

The Ld. AAR noted one of the conditions in E-tender, as under:

“18. The successful bidder is entitled to collect only the hair offered by the devotees. Any share in tonsure ticket or any other tickets will not be given.”

The Ld. AAR also noted that the temple charges fees from devotees for allowing tonsuring and observed that such activity is exempt, being a religious activity. The Ld. AAR further noted that the process of granting a license to collect the tonsured hair is a different activity altogether.

The Ld. AAR observed that all the activities undertaken by a temple or any place of worship are not exempt from GST. It was observed that commercial activities undertaken from a place of worship are liable to tax.

The Ld. AAR compared the activity in question with the renting of rooms by charitable institutions, which is a taxable service, and accordingly held the activity of granting a license to collect hair against consideration by way of license fees is a taxable activity.

The Ld. AAR also noted that although the sale of human hair is exempt under Notification No. 10/2025-Central Tax (Rate) dated 17.09.2025, the activity of granting a license to collect human hair, being an independent supply of service, is liable to tax.

The Ld. AAR ruled that the license fees collected by the temple are liable to GST in its hands.

When Stakes Overrule Skills: Supreme Court’s Verdict On Online Gaming

The Supreme Court, in DGGI vs. Gameskraft, ruled that staking money on any game—whether based on skill or chance—constitutes “betting and gambling” under the GST framework. Reversing the Karnataka High Court’s decision, the Court validated a 28% GST levy on the full face value of bets rather than just the platform’s commission. It established that platforms create “actionable claims” and act as “suppliers”. Furthermore, the Court held that 2023 legislative amendments are clarificatory and retrospective, significantly impacting the digital economy by prioritizing the act of staking over player skill

INTRODUCTION

The advent of online gaming, fantasy sports, and digital casino platforms has brought longstanding debates regarding the boundaries between skill and chance, commerce and speculation, and regulation and prohibition into renewed focus within the Goods and Services Tax (GST) regime. Recently, the Supreme Court, in the case of DGGI vs. Gameskraft Technologies Private Limited 2026-VIL-51-SC ruled that placing monetary stakes on any game—irrespective of whether it is a game of skill or chance—constitutes “betting and gambling” under the GST framework, thereby validating the levy of GST on the full face value of the bets placed. This article analyses the said decision in detail and discusses the wide-spread impact thereon on GST jurisprudence.

LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND

Prior to the introduction of the GST regime via the Constitution (One Hundred and First Amendment) Act, 2016, the legislative competence to levy taxes on betting and gambling was traceable to Entry 62 of List II of the Seventh Schedule to the Constitution, which empowered States to impose taxes on luxuries, including entertainments, amusements, betting, and gambling. Therefore, under the erstwhile service tax regime, betting, gambling, and lottery were placed in the negative list of services under Section 66D(i) of the Finance Act, 1994, thereby excluding them from the levy of service tax by the Union. Section 65B(15) of the Finance Act, 1994 defined “betting or gambling” as putting on stake something of value, particularly money, with consciousness of risk and hope of gain on the outcome of a game or contest whose result may be determined by chance or accident.

Following the 101st Constitutional Amendment, the earlier taxing fields under Entry 62 of List II were subsumed within the comprehensive GST framework under Article 246A, which conferred simultaneous legislative competence upon Parliament and State Legislatures to enact laws with respect to GST. Drawing upon the said powers, Section 9 of the CGST Act levies CGST on all intra-State supplies of goods or services or both. Section 2(52) of the CGST Act defines “goods” as every kind of movable property other than money and securities but explicitly includes “actionable claim”. An “actionable claim” is assigned the same meaning as in Section 3 of the Transfer of Property Act, 1882, which refers to a claim to any debt or to any beneficial interest in movable property not in the possession of the claimant, which civil courts recognise as affording grounds for relief.

While actionable claims are included within the definition of goods, Section 7(2) read with Schedule III of the CGST Act carves out certain activities which shall be treated neither as a supply of goods nor a supply of services. Entry 6 of Schedule III explicitly listed “Actionable claims, other than lottery, betting and gambling”. The entry was amended w.e.f. 01.10.2023 to list “Actionable claims, other than specified actionable claims”. In turn, the phrase “specified actionable claims” was defined under section 2(102A) to mean betting, casinos, gambling, horseracing, lottery and online money gaming. Therefore, even prior to its amendment on October 1, 2023, this entry excluded lottery, betting, and gambling from the general exemption granted to actionable claims, meaning actionable claims arising from these three activities remained expressly taxable under GST.

Further, Section 15 of the CGST Act mandates that the value of a supply of goods or services shall be the “transaction value”, which is the price actually paid or payable for the supply. Where the value cannot be determined under Section 15(1), Section 15(4) allows it to be determined in a prescribed manner. Section 15(5) additionally allows the Government, upon recommendations of the GST Council, to notify the value of certain supplies in a prescribed manner notwithstanding Section 15(1) or 15(4). Pursuant to these rule-making powers, Rule 31A of the CGST Rules was introduced, prescribing that the value of supply of actionable claim in the form of a chance to win in betting, gambling, or horse racing in a race club shall be 100% of the face value of the bet or the amount paid into the totalizator.

when stakes overrules skill

THE CONTROVERSY IN BRIEF

The genesis of the present nationwide constitutional and fiscal controversy stems from show cause notices (SCNs) issued by the Directorate General of Goods and Services Tax Intelligence (DGGI) to several online gaming platforms, fantasy sports operators, and physical casinos.

In the lead case involving M/s. Gameskraft Technologies Pvt. Ltd. (GTPL), the DGGI issued an SCN proposing to recover allegedly short-paid or unpaid GST amounting to Rs.20,989 crores for the period between 2017 and 2022. GTPL operated online platforms allowing users to play skill-based games, principally Rummy, against each other. GTPL had classified its activities as “services” under Service Accounting Code (SAC) 998439 and discharged 18% GST exclusively on the “platform fee” or commission it retained from the players for facilitating the game. For instance, if two players deposited Rs.200 each, the winner received Rs.360, and GTPL retained Rs.40 as a platform fee, upon which GST was paid.

The Revenue, however, alleged that by allowing players to play Rummy with monetary stakes, the platform was essentially supplying “actionable claims” in the nature of betting and gambling. Therefore, the Revenue sought to levy 28% GST on the entire “buy-in” or gross bet value (the full Rs.400 in the illustration) by invoking Rule 31A(3) of the CGST Rules, treating the entire pooled amount as the taxable value.

The industry, encompassing rummy platforms, fantasy sports operators like Dream 11, and physical casinos, vehemently contested this. The operators argued that their games were “games of skill”, which have historically and constitutionally been distinct from “games of chance”, and therefore outside the purview of “betting and gambling”. They argued that the 100% face value taxation was confiscatory, arbitrary, and legally baseless. This conflict led to multiple writ petitions across various High Courts, ultimately culminating in the Supreme Court transferring and consolidating the cases for a definitive ruling.

THE HIGH COURT DECISION AND ITS BASIS

In the focal judgment, the High Court of Karnataka (in Gameskraft Technologies Private Limited v. Directorate General of Goods Services Tax Intelligence) delivered a comprehensive order on May 11, 2023, allowing the writ petitions and quashing the SCN issued to GTPL.

The core issue adjudicated by the High Court was whether offline or online games such as Rummy, which are mainly or preponderantly based on skill and not on chance, when played with stakes, tantamount to “gambling or betting” as contemplated in Entry 6 of Schedule III of the CGST Act.

The High Court anchored its reasoning deeply in decades of Supreme Court jurisprudence, primarily what it termed the “Chamarbaugwala Jurisprudence.” The Court analyzed the landmark Constitution Bench decisions in State of Bombay v. R.M.D. Chamarbaugwala1 (RMDC-1) and R.M.D. Chamarbaugwalla v. Union of India2 (RMDC-2). In RMDC-1, the Supreme Court had evaluated the Bombay Lotteries and Prize Competitions Control and Tax Act, 1948, noting that a competition where success does not depend to a substantial degree upon the exercise of skill is recognized as being of a gambling nature. In RMDC-2, the Supreme Court applied the doctrine of severability to hold that the Prize Competitions Act, 1955 would apply only to competitions of a gambling nature and not to those involving substantial skill, which are protected business activities under Article 19(1)(g) of the Constitution.


1. 1957- VIL-05-SC

2.1957- VIL-06-SC

Building on this, the High Court referred to State of Andhra Pradesh v. K. Satyanarayana3, where the Supreme Court explicitly held that Rummy is not a game entirely of chance but is mainly and preponderantly a game of skill, comparable to bridge. The High Court observed that the Satyanarayana decision protected Rummy under the Hyderabad Gambling Act and did not criminalize it merely because it was played for stakes. The Revenue’s reliance on a specific sentence in Satyanarayana—that the offence of a common gaming house might be attracted if the club makes a profit or if there is “gambling in some other way”—was rejected by the High Court. The High Court clarified that this meant side-betting by third parties or the club taking a stake in the outcome, not the mere collection of a platform fee for facilitating the game.

The High Court also heavily relied on K.R. Lakshmanan v. State of Tamil Nadu4, wherein the Supreme Court held that horse racing is a game of mere skill (preponderance of skill) and that wagering or betting on horse racing does not constitute “gaming” or gambling. The High Court derived the principle that a game of skill does not transform into a game of chance merely because stakes are involved.

Addressing the interpretation of the terms under the GST framework, the High Court applied the principle of nomen juris. It held that words of legal import occurring in a statute should be construed in their established legal sense. Since the terms “gambling,” “game of chance,” and “game of skill” have developed distinct meanings in judicial parlance over 60 years, the expression “betting and gambling” in Entry 6 of Schedule III of the CGST Act must be interpreted to exclude games of skill. The High Court ruled that a game of mixed chance and skill is not gambling if it is substantially a game of skill, and Rummy, whether played online or offline, with or without stakes, is not gambling.

The High Court dismissed the Revenue’s reliance on M.J. Sivani v. State of Karnataka5, which had upheld regulations on video games. The High Court distinguished Sivani, noting it involved arcade video games that were tampered with to eliminate the player’s chance of winning, thus rendering them pure games of chance. In view of the High Court, Sivani did not erase the functional distinction between skill and chance.


3 1967 INSC 269
4 1996 (2) SCC 226
5 (1995) 6 SCC 269

The High Court therefore concluded that GTPL merely provided a platform service, and the pooled stake amounts held in a fiduciary capacity were not “consideration” for actionable claims supplied by GTPL. Therefore, the High Court declared the SCN illegal, arbitrary, and without jurisdiction, effectively shielding online skill-based games from the 28% GST levy on gross bet value.

THE REVENUE APPEAL AND 2023 LEGISLATIVE AMENDMENTS

In view of the high stakes involved, the Revenue preferred an appeal before the Hon’ble Supreme Court. In the interregnum, to resolve the prevailing ambiguities, the GST law was amended with effect from October 1, 2023. This amendment altered Entry 6 of Schedule III to explicitly exclude “specified actionable claims” from the general exemption granted to actionable claims. These “specified actionable claims” were statutorily defined to include actionable claims involved in betting, casinos, gambling, horse racing, lottery, and online money gaming.

Concurrently, numerous online gaming platforms, fantasy sports operators, and physical casinos received notices and such taxpayers were forced to approach various courts across the country. Consequently, a multitude of similar writ petitions, transferred cases, and appeals were tagged together by the Supreme Court to comprehensively settle the constitutional and statutory questions surrounding the taxation of the gaming industry, culminating in the recently delivered, consolidated landmark decision.

ARGUMENTS PRESENTED BY THE TAXPAYERS IN THE SUPREME COURT

In the Supreme Court, the taxpayers advanced extensive arguments defending the High Court’s ruling and challenging the GST imposition.

A. The Distinction Between Skill and Chance is Immutable

It was argued that the distinction between games of skill and games of chance is a binary, mutually exclusive constitutional classification. Relying on the Chamarbaugwala cases, Satyanarayana, and Lakshmanan, they asserted that activities where skill predominates fall outside the ambit of “betting and gambling”. A game of skill does not suddenly transform into a game of chance merely because money is staked. It was argued that players of online rummy exercise training, expertise, and strategic judgment, making it a constitutionally protected business activity under Article 19(1)(g).

In the context of Fantasy Sports, it was emphasized that selecting a virtual team of players requires analytical and strategic decision-making akin to a real-life coach. Since the mathematical combinations are vast and depend on player form and conditions, fantasy sports are games of skill. Multiple High Courts (Rajasthan, Punjab & Haryana, Bombay) had previously ruled fantasy sports as games of skill, and the Supreme Court’s dismissal of SLPs against those judgments meant the issue was no longer res integra.

B. Absence of an “Actionable Claim” and Lack of “Supply”

It was contended that no “actionable claim” comes into existence in the structure of online games. Relying on the historical concept of a chose in action, it was argued that an actionable claim must confer an enforceable right to money. Under Section 30 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872, agreements by way of wager are void and unenforceable. Consequently, it was argued that if the Revenue alleges that these are gambling transactions, the resulting “chance to win” is legally unenforceable and thus fails the statutory definition of an actionable claim under Section 3 of the Transfer of Property Act. Furthermore, it was argued that even if an actionable claim existed, there is no “supply” from the platform to the player. The gaming operators act purely as technology facilitators. The money deposited into digital wallets remains the property of the players and is held in escrow. When players join a game, their funds move into a common pool administered by the operator, but the operator has no beneficial interest in the pool. Applying the Quistclose trust doctrine (from Barclays Bank Ltd. v. Quistclose Investments Ltd. and Twinsectra Ltd. v. Yardley), it was argued that funds advanced for a specific purpose are impressed with a trust; if the operator went bankrupt, these funds would not form part of its liquidation estate. The operator only ever takes its predefined platform fee. The Supreme Court’s ruling in Sunrise Associates (holding lottery tickets as actionable claims) was distinguished, as lotteries involve a sovereign “grant” transferred to a buyer, whereas private online games involve mutual rights in personam which are merely discharged, not transferred.

C. Rule 31A is Ultra Vires Section 15 and Manifestly Arbitrary

The taxpayers also challenged the valuation mechanism under Rule 31A(3), which taxes 100% of the face value of the bet. They argued that under Section 15(1) of the CGST Act, GST must be levied on the “transaction value,” which is the price actually paid or payable. Because the operator only retains a platform fee (e.g., Rs.10 out of a Rs.100 pot), levying 28% on the entire pool (Rs.28) artificially inflates the tax base, making it a tax on the activity rather than the supply, thereby violating Article 246A. It was argued that the prize pool money is characterized as a “deposit” under the proviso to Section 2(31) of the CGST Act, meaning it cannot be treated as consideration. Furthermore, it was argued that Section 15(5) of the CGST Act requires a mandatory two-step process: first, the Government must notify the class of supplies, and second, prescribe the valuation rule. While the 2023 amendments followed this process for Rules 31B and 31C, Rule 31A lacked the foundational Section 15(5) notification prior to 2023, rendering it unenforceable.

D. The Casino Perspective: GGR versus GBV

It was argued that casinos do not supply actionable claims since bets are placed and settled instantaneously with chips that serve merely as tokens of convenience, not tradable goods. However, the crux of the casino argument was valuation. Historically and globally, casinos are taxed on Gross Gaming Revenue (GGR)—the net amount retained by the casino after payouts to players. The Revenue’s attempt to tax the Gross Bet Value (GBV) under Rule 31A was deemed mathematically absurd and practically impossible. In a dynamic physical casino environment, chips are continuously reused and circulated across multiple tables; tracking the face value of every single bet is unworkable. To calculate GBV, the Revenue resorted to an arbitrary “best judgment” extrapolation based on “House Advantage” from a limited 66-day sample, resulting in astronomical, confiscatory demands. For instance, one casino had a net revenue of Rs. 1,640 crores, but the GST demand computed via GBV was Rs. 11,139 crores. The casinos argued that a “chance to win” has a net value of zero at the time a bet is placed because there is an equal “chance to lose” and a simultaneous contingent liability incurred by the casino; thus, no transaction value accrues until the game ends.

E. Prospective Nature of the 2023 Amendments

The taxpayers submitted that the 2023 amendments to the CGST Act—which introduced specific definitions for “online money gaming” (Section 2(80B)), “specified actionable claims” (Section 2(102A)), and Rules 31B and 31C—were substantive changes rather than clarificatory. The very introduction of a deeming fiction in Section 2(105) (deeming the platform operator as the supplier) proved that platforms were not suppliers under the pre-amendment law. Therefore, these amendments could only operate prospectively from October 1, 2023, and the SCNs issued for the period between 2017 and 2023 lacked statutory backing.

ARGUMENTS PRESENTED BY THE REVENUE IN THE SUPREME COURT

The Revenue vehemently countered the taxpayers’ assertions on the following broad grounds:

A. Definition of Betting and Gambling

The Revenue highlighted several “Sutras” (principles), the core of which was that gambling arises whenever stakes are placed upon an uncertain outcome, irrespective of whether the underlying game is one of skill or chance. While a game of skill per se is not gambling, the introduction of stakes transforms the activity into gambling. A wager on a game of skill and a wager on a game of chance share the same preponderant uncertainty. The Revenue pointed out that the GST enactments use the phrase “betting and gambling,” not “betting on gambling” as interpreted by the High Courts. The statutory exemptions granted to games of skill under State police or gaming acts merely shield participants from penal/criminal consequences; they do not alter the inherent commercial character of the activity as betting or gambling for taxation purposes.

B. Supply of Actionable Claims by Platforms

The Revenue clarified that it was not arguing that pre-existing actionable claims were “transferred”; rather, the platforms “create” and “supply” actionable claims. Under Section 7 of the CGST Act, “supply” is defined with broad inclusivity and is not restricted to traditional sale or transfer of title. The moment a player stakes money on an uncertain outcome on the platform, a contingent beneficial interest in movable property (the prize pool) is created, fulfilling the criteria of an actionable claim under Section 3 of the Transfer of Property Act.

The Revenue dismantled the “trust” and “deposit” arguments by highlighting the Terms and Conditions of platforms like Gameskraft. Once a player deposits money into the “Deposit Segment” of the RC Account and commits it to a game, they lose unfettered dominion and control over that money. Withdrawals are heavily restricted by minimum thresholds and KYC requirements, proving there is no genuine entrustment.

Addressing the enforceability argument (Section 30 of the Contract Act), the Revenue asserted that while a wagering agreement inter se between players might be void, the collateral agreement between the player and the platform facilitating the game is perfectly valid and enforceable. Furthermore, the platform acts as the “supplier” because it orchestrates the entire ecosystem: it invites players, structures the game, regulates the algorithm, and distributes winnings.

C. Valuation: Gross Bet Value is Consideration

The Revenue maintained that the entire amount staked by the player constitutes “consideration” under Section 2(31) of the CGST Act. The payment is made “in respect of, in response to, and for the inducement of the supply” of the chance to win. The Revenue relied on Skill Lotto Solutions6, where the Supreme Court held that the value of lottery tickets is the full face value and deductions for prize payouts are not permissible. Rule 31A(3), which mandates 100% of the face value of the bet as the taxable value, was enacted on the explicit recommendations of the GST Council (Agenda Items 48-51) and thus satisfied statutory requirements.


6 2020-VIL-37-SC

D. Casinos and Fantasy Sports

Regarding Casinos, the Revenue argued that the GGR model is a flawed income-tax concept that conflates taxable supply with business profitability. The taxable event is the supply of gambling services upon placing a bet. When a player loses, the casino treats it as consideration; when a player wins, the casino nets the loss against other receipts. This netting off is impermissible in GST, which taxes gross supply. Because casinos failed to maintain records of every bet, the Department was justified in using Rule 31 (residual method) to extrapolate GBV using the mathematical “House Advantage”.

For Fantasy Sports, the Revenue argued that it is effectively “side betting”. Participants do not exercise physical skill in the sport; they merely wager on the performance of real-world athletes. The prior dismissals of SLPs by the Supreme Court were in limine non-speaking orders or kept the GST questions open for review, meaning the issue had not attained constitutional finality.

KEY OBSERVATIONS OF THE SUPREME COURT AND FINAL DECISION

The Supreme Court comprehensively reversed the Karnataka High Court’s decision, upholding the Revenue’s demands and validating the taxation of online gaming, fantasy sports, and casinos at 28% on the gross bet value.

A. Interpretation of “Betting and Gambling”

The Supreme Court fundamentally disagreed with the High Courts of Madras and Karnataka, calling their interpretation of Entry 34 of List II as “betting on gambling” a “clear Constitutional aberration, tinkering with the Constitution or actually rewriting the Constitutional text”. The Court clarified that “betting and gambling” is a composite and interchangeable expression referring to the act of staking money or money’s worth upon uncertain outcomes.

The Court held that the essential element of betting and gambling is the staking of money on an uncertain outcome with the hope of gaining more. Crucially, the Court ruled that “when the element of betting and gambling enters the picture, the nature of the game ceases to be of relevance”. Even if the underlying game is one of substantial skill (like Rummy or Fantasy Sports), once participation is conditioned upon staking money on uncertain outcomes, the transaction acquires the character of betting and gambling for the purposes of the GST framework. The Court observed that earlier judgments like RMDC-1 and Lakshmanan protected games of skill from being classified as gambling only in the context of specific penal statutes that carved out explicit exemptions for skill; these precedents did not immunize the wagering on such games from taxation.

B. Constitutional Validity of the Levy

The Court affirmed that the GST framework enacted under Article 246A of the Constitution gives Parliament and State Legislatures wide latitude to tax supplies. The inclusion of actionable claims within the definition of “goods” under Section 2(52) is constitutionally valid and does not transgress Article 366(12) or 366(12A). The levy is upon the “taxable supply of actionable claims” and not a direct tax on the activity of betting or gambling simpliciter. The Court also dismissed challenges under Articles 14, 19(1)(g), and 21, noting that the doctrine of res extra commercium applies to betting and gambling, removing fundamental right protections, and that mere commercial hardship or high tax incidence does not render a fiscal measure unconstitutional.

C. Existence and Supply of Actionable Claims by Platforms

The Court countered the taxpayers’ arguments regarding actionable claims. It held that once participants place stakes in the organized gaming framework, a pooled stake fund (movable property) comes into existence. Each participant acquires a “contingent beneficial interest” in this property, which fits the definition of an actionable claim under the Transfer of Property Act.

The Court rejected the Quistclose trust argument, finding that players relinquish unrestricted dominion and control over their funds once committed to gameplay. The funds cease to be a “refundable deposit” under the proviso to Section 2(31) and transform into consideration for the supply. Regarding Section 30 of the Contract Act, the Court held that the legal definition of an actionable claim does not require every wagering element to be independently enforceable; the proprietary interests created within the platform’s ecosystem are legally cognizable.

Importantly, the Court ruled that the online gaming platforms themselves are the “suppliers” under Section 2(105) of the CGST Act. They do not merely facilitate a transaction inter se between players; they control the architecture, pool the stakes, and administer the payout, thereby creating and supplying the actionable claim.

D. Valuation, Rule 31A, and 2023 Amendments

The Court upheld Rule 31A(3) as a valid machinery provision intra vires the CGST Act, traceable to Sections 15(4), 15(5), and 164. It operationalizes the concept of “transaction value” under Section 15(1) by establishing that the entire amount staked (face value of the bet) is the consideration paid for the chance to win.

Regarding the 2023 amendments (which introduced Rules 31B and 31C and specific definitions for “online money gaming”), the Court held that they did not create a fresh levy but were clarificatory and explanatory in nature. Therefore, they operate retrospectively.

E. Rulings on Fantasy Sports and Casinos

For fantasy sports, the Court ruled that previous SLP dismissals were non-speaking orders and did not establish binding law under Article 141. Fantasy sports involve pooled stakes on uncertain future outcomes, thereby acquiring the character of betting and gambling under the GST framework.

For physical casinos, the Court rejected the GGR methodology as incompatible with the GST structure, which taxes gross supply rather than business profits. The Court upheld the applicability of the newly inserted Rule 31C (which taxes the total amount paid for chips/tokens) as retrospectively applicable. For the pre-amendment period where casinos failed to maintain individual betting records, the Department’s use of best judgment assessment via Rule 31 (using the House Advantage method to extrapolate GBV) was deemed permissible. However, the actual quantification of the tax was left open for reconsideration by adjudicating authorities based on the clarified Rule 31C principles.

CONCLUSION:

The Supreme Court’s decision in the Gameskraft batch of matters transcends the online gaming and casino sectors. It establishes jurisprudential precedents that will influence the interpretation of the GST framework across all industries. The following observations carry significant legal implications across multiple sectors:

1. Expansive Interpretation of “Supply” Over Traditional Transfer:

The Court reaffirmed that GST marks a paradigm shift from a sale-centric model to a supply-centric one. The term “supply” in Section 7 is of the widest amplitude. It encompasses not just the traditional transfer or assignment of pre-existing rights, but the very creation of a contingent beneficial interest (such as a chance to win). Industries dealing in digital assets, intellectual property, derivatives, or complex financial instruments must note that the mere generation of a recognizable right can trigger a taxable supply.

2. Transformation of “Deposits” into “Consideration” :

The Court provided clarity on the proviso to Section 2(31). Monies held in wallets, escrows, or trust accounts lose their character as “deposits” the moment the user relinquishes unrestricted dominion and the funds are committed or appropriated toward a specific activity or supply. This strict standard affects e-commerce platforms, telecommunication operators, aggregators, and gig-economy apps holding user funds, dictating exactly when tax liability crystallizes.

3. Inapplicability of the Quistclose Trust Doctrine to Commercial Operations:

By rejecting the application of the Quistclose trust principle (where funds advanced for a specific purpose are shielded from the recipient’s general assets), the Court signaled that complex fiduciary structuring in mass digital platforms does not shield pooled funds from being characterized as consideration for a supply if the platform controls the operational matrix.

4. Intermediary vs. Supplier Distinction in Digital Platforms:

The judgment alters how digital platforms are classified. By holding that platforms controlling the algorithms, pooling of funds, and distribution of payouts are actual “suppliers” of the underlying actionable claim (rather than mere facilitators or intermediaries), the Court has set a high bar. Any platform exerting pervasive control over the transactional ecosystem may find itself vulnerable to GST on the gross transaction value rather than just its commission.

5. Gross Valuation (GBV) Over Net Profits (GGR):

The Court drew a sharp line between income tax jurisprudence and GST jurisprudence. GST is a transaction-based tax on the gross value of supply. The Court explicitly rejected the notion of netting off business expenses, payouts, or losses to arrive at a taxable value (the GGR model). Industries operating on narrow margins with high throughput (like trading, brokering, or certain financial services) must ensure their valuation models reflect gross supply if they act as principals.

6. Retrospective Application of Clarificatory Amendments:

The Court reaffirmed that statutory amendments designed to cure defects, standardise practices, or explain legislative intent can operate retrospectively, even if they introduce specialized machinery provisions (like Rules 31B and 31C). The use of a non-obstante clause or the insertion of detailed sub-rules does not automatically imply a substantive, prospective change if the core taxable event already existed in the parent act.

7. Unenforceability in Civil Law Does Not Preclude Taxability:

In a fascinating intersection of contract and tax law, the Court held that a transaction’s unenforceability under civil law (e.g., wagering agreements voided by Section 30 of the Contract Act) does not nullify its taxability. As long as a legally cognizable beneficial interest exists within an organized framework, the fiscal statute will apply. This reinforces that tax law operates independently of the strict enforceability paradigms of contract law.

8. Harmonious Construction of Subordinate Valuation Legislation:

The Court validated the use of executive rule-making power to determine valuation. Sections 15(4) and 15(5) of the CGST Act allow the Government to prescribe specific valuation methods that may deviate from the standard “transaction value” if authorized by the GST Council. The Court noted that fiscal legislation permits a greater degree of flexibility, and rules (like Rule 31A) that bear a reasonable nexus to the taxable event will not be easily struck down for manifest arbitrariness.

9. HSN Classification is Not a Prerequisite for Taxability:

The Court clarified that the Harmonized System of Nomenclature (HSN) or Customs Tariff entries are merely procedural tools for administrative convenience. The absence of a specific HSN code does not invalidate a levy if the charging section (Section 9) and the definition of goods (Section 2(52)) cover the supply. This is vital for emerging tech industries creating novel products that do not yet fit neatly into global tariff schedules.

10. Doctrine of Res Extra Commercium and Proportionality in Taxation:

By invoking the doctrine of res extra commercium for betting and gambling, the Court confirmed that activities considered noxious or injurious to public welfare do not enjoy fundamental right protections under Article 19(1)(g). Consequently, taxation on such activities can be intentionally burdensome or regulatory, and courts will not test such fiscal measures strictly on the anvil of proportionality or commercial hardship.

In conclusion, the Supreme Court’s judgment in the Gameskraft saga is a watershed moment in Indian indirect tax jurisprudence. By decisively settling the “skill versus chance” debate in the context of GST and endorsing the taxation of gross stakes, the Court has not only safeguarded massive public revenues but also provided a rigorous, modernized interpretation of “supply”, “consideration”, and “valuation” tailored for the digital economy.

Glimpses Of Supreme Court Rulings

5. L.K. Trust vs. Commissioner of Income Tax and Ors.- SC

Civil Appeal No. 527/2012 decided on 07.05.2026

Deduction – Interest – Section 36(1)(iii) – The provisions of Section 36(1)(iii) concern capital borrowed and not other debts or liabilities – for determining the allowability, the court should examine the transfer of borrowed funds from the point of view of commercial expediency and not from the point of view whether the amount was advanced for earning profits.

The Assessee borrowed a sum of Rs.3.80 crore from Corporation Bank to purchase shares of Shaw Wallace and Company Limited in pursuance of an Agreement dated 19-11-1987. Under the said Agreement, the Company had committed to sell 7.80 lakh shares for a total consideration of Rs.3.8 crore.

The Assessee filed its return of income for the Assessment year 1989-90 declaring total income of Rs.7,55,67,530/-. The return was processed under Section 143(1)(a) of the Act, and later a notice was issued under Section 143(2). While passing the Assessment Order in 1992, the Assessing Officer noted that the Assessee had availed a loan of Rs.3,80,00,000/- from Corporation Bank and had paid interest of Rs.21,74,234/-. However, the AO further noted that the amount had been transferred to M/s Gayatri Holdings Private Limited, a group company, through purchase of its shares, which in turn transferred the amount to Shri G Venkateshwaran for the purchase of shares of M/s Shaw Wallace and Company Limited.

In the circumstances referred to above, the AO took the view that the Assessee was not entitled to claim deduction under Section 36(1)(iii) of the Act and, accordingly, the interest paid on the loan was disallowed.

The Assessee went in appeal before the CIT(A). The CIT(A) also disallowed the deduction. The matter then went in appeal before the ITAT. The ITAT allowed the appeal preferred by the Assessee.

The ITAT noted that the Hon’ble Supreme Court, in the case of Madhav Prasad Jatia v. CIT, (118 ITR 200), while dealing with Section 10(2)(iii) of 1922 Act (which was akin to the present section 36(1)(iii) of the Income-tax Act, 1961), laid down three pre-requisites to be complied with before allowing the deduction of interest expenses. First, the loan must have been borrowed by the Appellant; second, it must have been borrowed for the purpose of Appellant’s business; and third, the Appellant must have paid interest on the loan and claimed deduction for the same.

According to ITAT, the first condition, namely, that the Assessee must have borrowed the monies, is fully satisfied in the instant case. The second condition was also satisfied, in its view, on the basis of detailed discussion in its decision wherein it was concluded that the money had been raised and utilized for the purposes which were integral to the business of the Appellant. Thirdly, the Assessee had paid the entire interest of Rs.21,74,234/- to the bank on the borrowings made by it and had claimed the said amount as a deduction by way of charge to P&L A/c.

The ITAT observed that the Appellant had more than one source of income under the head ‘business’ as it was deriving income from businesses of money-lending, speculation business, film distribution, and investment in shares. The Appellant-trust had maintained only one common set of books of account in which entries pertaining to these businesses of film distribution, money lending, investments, speculation etc. were incorporated. The management of the entire set of operations was vested in the trustees, and there was complete interlocking of funds. Therefore, according to ITAT, the business of the Appellant was a composite one in as much as it carried on several businesses, including the business of investment in shares through its subsidiaries.

The ITAT noted that the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India, in the case of CIT v. Associated Fibre and Rubber Industries (P) Ltd. (236 ITR 471), had opined that as long as the assets purchased from borrowings had been treated as business assets, the interest outgo on such borrowings was allowable. Also, the Apex Court in Veecumsees v. CIT (220 ITR 185) had taken the view that so long as the loans had been obtained for the purposes of business, the fact that the particular part of the business for which the loans had been obtained was closed or transferred subsequently did not alter the fact that the loans had (when raised), been for the purpose of Assessee’s business; and, that the interest paid on such loans could not be denied as the management was common, though the line or branch of business for which loan was raised had been closed down.

According to the ITAT, an irresistible inference that could be drawn from a reading of the judgments of the Apex Court was that the existence or otherwise of the composite nature of a business is essential in considering the allowability of interest on loans borrowed by an Assessee, and in the present case, it was found that the business was composite nature.

The ITAT concluded that a sum of Rs.21,74,234/- paid by the Appellant-trust as interest to Corporation Bank on borrowings of Rs.3.80 crore was eligible for deduction under Section 36(1)(iii) of Income-tax Act.

The Revenue, being dissatisfied with the Order passed by the ITAT, went before the High Court.

The High Court answered the questions of law referred to it in favour of the Revenue, holding as under:

“That the Appellant Trust has borrowed a loan from the Bank in order to invest the same in its share business. It is also not in dispute that a sum of Rs.3,80,00,000/- has been transferred to M/s. Gayathri Holdings Private Limited by the Assessee. It is also not in dispute that the Assessee has paid the interest payable to the Bank on the entire borrowings. It is also not in dispute that out of Rs.3,80,00,000/- transferred to M/s. Gayathri Holdings Private Limited, certain amounts of shares of Shaw Wallace and Company are also transferred to the name of the Assessee. Therefore, we are of the view that the Assessing Officer was justified in granting the relief to the Assessee in respect of the value of the shares purchased by it through M/s. Gayathri Holdings Private Limited in respect of shares of Shaw Wallace and Company Limited. We are also of the view that the Assessing Officer is justified in disallowing the interest paid by the Assessee to the Bank in respect of the amount which was lying with M/s. Gayathri Holdings Private Limited in the account of the Assessee.”

In the circumstances referred to above, the Assessee filed an appeal before the Supreme Court.

According to the Supreme Court, the short point that fell for its consideration was whether the Appellant – Assessee was entitled to a deduction of Rs.21,74,234/- being the interest paid by it in respect of the loan availed from the Corporation Bank under Section 36(1)(iii) of the Income-tax Act 1961.

On reading of the provisions of section 36(1)(iii) of the Act, the Supreme Court observed that the sub-section has three important words or phrases, i.e, (i) Interest, (ii) Borrowed and, (iii) For the purpose of business or profession.

The Supreme Court noted that the definition of “interest” in Section 2(28A) means “interest payable in any manner in respect of any moneys borrowed or debt incurred”. However, for the purposes of Section 36(1)(iii), “interest” is restricted to that on money borrowed and not on debt incurred. In other words, the essence of interest is that it is a payment which becomes due because the creditor has not had his money at his disposal. It may be regarded either as representing the profit he might have made if he had the use of his money, or conversely, the loss he suffered because he had not that use. The general idea is that he is entitled to compensation for the deprivation.

The provisions of Section 36(1)(iii) concern capital borrowed and not other debts or liabilities. A loan of money undoubtedly results in a debt, but every debt does not involve a loan. Liability to pay a debt may arise from diverse sources, and a loan is one of such sources. The legislature has, under this clause, permitted as an allowance interest paid on capital borrowed for the purposes of the business; and the capital, in this context, means money and not any other asset purchased on credit [Bombay Steam Navigation Co. Pr. Ltd. v. CIT, 56 ITR 52 (SC)].

The Supreme Court further noted that the expression “for the purpose of business” occurs in Section 36(1)(iii) and also in Section 37(1). A similar expression, with different wording, also occurs in Section 57(iii), which reads as “for the purpose of making or earning income”. This issue came up for consideration before this Court in the case of Madhav Prasad Jatia v. CIT reported in (SC) 118 ITR 200. The Court held that the expression occurring in Section 36(1)(iii) is wider in scope than the expression occurring in Section 57(iii). Thus, meaning thereby that the scope for allowing a deduction under Section 36(1)(iii) would be much wider than the one available under Section 57(iii).

On a plain reading of the impugned order, it appeared to the Supreme Court that, according to the High Court, the business of the subsidiary company could not be considered in law as the business of the Assessee. The High Court took the view that the finding of the Tribunal based on commercial expediency was not correct. The High Court went on to observe that the amount borrowed was ultimately utilised for the benefit of the subsidiary company of the Assessee and not for the business of the Assessee as such.

According to the Supreme Court, the High Court fell into error in taking the aforesaid view.

The Supreme Court observed that in Sharp Business System v. CIT, reported in 479 ITR 1, one of the questions considered by it was whether interest on borrowed funds invested by the Assessee in its sister concern and its directors is an allowable business expenditure.

In aforesaid context, the Supreme Court made an analysis of Section 36 of the Income Tax Act, 1961, more particularly, Section 36(1) (iii) thereof. After referring to its earlier decision in S.A. Builders v. CIT, reported in 288 ITR 1, it opined that the court should examine the transfer of borrowed funds from the point of view of commercial expediency and not from the point of view of whether the amount was advanced for earning profits.

In the facts of that case, it was held that the Assessee was entitled to claim allowance of interest on the borrowed funds invested in a sister concern for acquiring a controlling interest.

The Supreme Court agreed with the line of reasoning assigned by the ITAT insofar as the interpretation of Section 36(1) (iii) of the Act 1961 was concerned. In the result, the Appeal of the Assesee-Appellant was allowed and the impugned Judgment and Order passed by the High Court was set aside.

The Supreme Court declared that the Assessee was entitled to seek deduction of the amount of the interest paid in respect of the capital borrowed to the tune of Rs.3.80 crore for the purposes of the business.

TDS — Section 195 — Payment of interest to a Non-resident — Payment under a judgment debt — Execution of decree — Retains the character of a judgment debt — Cannot be subjected to deduction of tax in the absence of a provision in the decree.

22. DLF Home Developers Limited v. Anto Thomas

2026 (6) TMI 505 – (Ker):

Date of order 19/05/2026:

S. 195 of ITA 1961

TDS — Section 195 — Payment of interest to a Non-resident — Payment under a judgment debt — Execution of decree — Retains the character of a judgment debt — Cannot be subjected to deduction of tax in the absence of a provision in the decree.

A dispute between the Petitioner and the Respondent was referred to an Arbitrator, and by way of an award dated 16/07/2018, the Arbitrator directed the Petitioner to refund the amount paid by the Respondent along with interest. The arbitration award was challenged in appeal before the High Court, and the High Court dismissed the appeal filed by the Petitioner. The Petitioner further challenged the order of the High Court by way of an SLP, which also came to be dismissed by the Supreme Court.

Subsequently, the Petitioner submitted a calculation statement regarding the balance amount payable. The said amount was computed after deducting TDS. The amount, as per the statement, was
deposited. The Respondent raised a dispute regarding the deduction of TDS from the interest amount payable. The District Court directed the Petitioner to pay the amount of TDS deducted to the Respondent.

Being aggrieved by the said order of the District Court, the Petitioner filed a writ petition before the High Court and contended that there was a statutory obligation to deduct TDS from the interest payable to a non-resident and, since the Respondent was a non-resident, the amount was paid after deducting TDS to avoid any action from the Income-tax Department.

The Kerala High Court dismissed the petition and held as follows:

“i) As per the judgment of a learned Single Judge of the Delhi High Court in Voith Hydro Ltd. & Ors. v. NTPC Ltd. [2021 SCC OnLine Del. 1325], TDS was not liable to be deducted on amounts payable under a decree.

ii) The Delhi High Court in the said judgment has relied on the judgment of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in All India Reporter Ltd. v. Ramachandra D. Datar [AIR 1961 SC 943] and the decision of the High Court of Bombay in Islamic Investment Co. v. Union of India [(2002) 3 Mah. LJ 555], Sino Ocean Ltd. v. Salvi Chemicals Industries Ltd. [2017 SCC OnLine Bom. 9401] and DSL Enterprises Pvt. Ltd. v. Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd. [EP No.422 of 2018, decided on 13.03.2018], which are also judgments which took the same view.

iii) In All India Reporter (supra), the Hon’ble Supreme Court held that under the scheme of the Civil Procedure Code, a decree has to be executed as it stands, subject to such deductions or adjustments as are permissible under the Code and as between the judgment debtor and the decree holder, the amount payable represented a judgment debt. The Court held that for payment of income tax on such debts, no provision was made in the decree and the judgment debtor cannot hence deduct at source the tax payable by the decree holder.

iv) Section 195 of the Income Tax Act, 1961 which requires to deduct TDS does not speak of a decretal debt. The definition of ‘interest’ in Section 2(28A) says that ‘interest’ means interest payable in any manner in respect of any moneys borrowed or debt incurred (including a deposit, claim or other similar right or obligation). The said definition also does not include interest payable on a decree amount. In view of the judgments in All India Reporter Ltd. (supra), Voith Hydro Ltd. (supra), Islamic Investment Co. (supra) and Sino Ocean Ltd. (supra), I do not find any reason to interfere with the order dated 10/11/2025 in EP No.202 of 2023 of the 2nd Additional District Court, Ernakulam.”

Stay of demand — S. 220(6) — Pre-deposit of 20% of the disputed demand — Not a mandatory condition — Issue is decided by the Jurisdictional High Court — Assessee eligible for grant of complete stay of demand.

21. Cadence Design Systems India Pvt. Ltd. v. PCIT:

TS – 652 – HC – 2026 (Del.):

A. Ys. 2020-21 & 2021-22: Date of order 04/05/2026:

S. 220(6) of ITA 1961

Stay of demand — S. 220(6) — Pre-deposit of 20% of the disputed demand — Not a mandatory condition — Issue is decided by the Jurisdictional High Court — Assessee eligible for grant of complete stay of demand.

In the scrutiny assessments for A. Y. 2020-21 and A. Y. 2021-22, additions were made by disallowance in relation to the expenditure incurred in respect of the employee stock option plan. The assessment were completed and demands were raised for both the years. The assessee filed appeals and filed applications for stay of demand u/s. 220(6) of the Income-tax Act, 1961. The assessee’s application for stay of demand was rejected, and the assessee was required to deposit 20% of the demand.

The assessee filed a writ petition before the High Court challenging the rejection of stay of demand, primarily on the ground that when the issue is decided in favour of the assessee by the jurisdictional High Court, the requirement of deposit of 20% of the demand would not be applicable.

The Delhi High Court allowed the petition and held as under:

“i) The leeway granted in the circular which gives the impression that the Assessing Officer may ask the assessee to deposit a lesser amount than 20%, cannot be construed to mean that in every case the Assessing Officer or the Competent Authority shall ask the assessee to deposit 20% of the due demand.

ii) Once the jurisdictional High Court has taken a view, in normal circumstances, the Assessing Officer or the Competent Authority deciding an application u/s. 220(6) of the Act of 1961 is supposed to grant a complete stay, because judgments of High Court are binding on all the authorities, including the authority deciding the stay application.

iii) The writ petitions are allowed and the impugned orders passed by the Deputy Commissioner of Income Tax, Circle 4(2) Delhi dated 21/05/2024 (2020-21) and 18/08/2025 (2021-22) and the order dated 15.09.2025 passed by the Competent Authority for both A. Ys. (2020-21 and 2021-22), to the extent they require 20% of demand pursuant to the impugned assessment orders dated 27/09/2023 (2020-21) and 23/12/2024 (2021-22) to be deposited as a condition for grant of stay of remaining recovery, are set aside. Needless to observe that till disposal of the appeals, the recovery proceedings against the petitioner shall remain stayed. The Assessing Officer to do requisite entry in Income Tax Business Application (ITBA) Portal.”

Settlement of case — Application for settlement in assessment pursuant to search and seizure — Undisclosed income in jewellery business — Modus operandi of inflation of refinery loss — Full and true disclosure in application of the manner in which undisclosed income derived — Rejection of application on ground of failure to make a full and true disclosure — Single Judge of the High Court dismissed the writ petition — Division Bench of the High Court allowed the appeal and held that failure of competent authority to scrutinize the assessee’s application in detail resulted in the dismissal of the writ petition — Order in the writ petition and order rejecting application for settlement of the case set aside — Matter remanded to the competent authority with a direction to scrutinize the application.

20. Khazana Jewellery (P) Ltd. v. Income-Tax Settlement Commission:

(2026) 487 ITR 19 (Mad): 2026 SCC OnLine Mad 3939:

A. Y. 2011-12 to 2017-18: Date of order 16/02/2026:

Ss. 245C(1) and 245D(4) of ITA 1961

Settlement of case — Application for settlement in assessment pursuant to search and seizure — Undisclosed income in jewellery business — Modus operandi of inflation of refinery loss — Full and true disclosure in application of the manner in which undisclosed income derived — Rejection of application on ground of failure to make a full and true disclosure — Single Judge of the High Court dismissed the writ petition — Division Bench of the High Court allowed the appeal and held that failure of competent authority to scrutinize the assessee’s application in detail resulted in the dismissal of the writ petition — Order in the writ petition and order rejecting application for settlement of the case set aside — Matter remanded to the competent authority with a direction to scrutinize the application.

The petitioner/assessee is a company engaged in the business of manufacturing and trading of jewels. A search u/s. 132 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 was conducted at its premises on April 21, 2016. During the course of the search proceedings, the Managing director admitted, in response to question No. 8 in his sworn statement, that the company’s inflated refinery loss would be around three per cent. to five per cent and that excess gold from the refining process was siphoned off and sold in the black market. By virtue of the inflation of refinery loss, the assessee had generated a sum of Rs. 70.66 crores during A. Ys. 2011-12 to 2016-17, which was stated by the assessee in its letter dated June 29, 2016. In the aforesaid letter dated June 29, 2016, the assesee had offered an amount of Rs. 80 crores (268.200 kgs. of gold bullion) towards stock-in-trade kept with and held by the employees, goldsmiths, agents, etc., in the year of search, i. e., A. Y. 2017-18.

During the pendency of the assessment u/s. 153 of the Act pursuant to the search, the assessee submitted a settlement application dated October 16, 2018 before the competent authority. The application came to be rejected.

The rejection order was challenged by filing writ petition. The learned single judge of the Madras High Court, vide impugned order (Khazana Jewellery Pvt. Ltd. v. ITSC [(2026) 487 ITR 1 (Mad).]), concluded that, in order to be eligible for settlement, the provisions contained in section 245C(1) of the Act require full and true disclosure. As the Settlement Commissioner arrived at the conclusion that there was no full and true disclosure, the rejection of the application could not be faulted. Moreover, it was held that the question of changing the stand by converting the undisclosed portion of income into the income u/s. 69B of the Act was beyond the scope of settlement proceedings.

The assessee filed an appeal. The Division Bench allowed the appeal and held as under:

“i) We have perused the application filed by the writ petitioner before the authority. The application itself titles “Confidential Enclosure ‘D’: The manner in which the additional income has been derived”. This contains the details of the assessee’s involvement in inflating refinery loss. The process of refinery, as to how the loss was being assumed and periodically accumulated has been explained in great detail. The details run in as many as 25 paragraphs.

ii) The order passed by the authority rejecting the application, however, says that full and true particulars of the materials and evidence have not been disclosed with regard to the manner in which the undisclosed income, i. e., Rs. 80 crores was derived.

iii) We are of the view that the assessee has submitted details of the manner in which the undisclosed income, i. e., Rs. 80 crores was derived. According to the assessee, the stock-in-trade is directly related to Rs. 80 crores which in turn was a result of inflation of refinery loss, which perhaps the assessee was not correct in claiming as such, and this appears to be only a device not to disclose an income which the assessee otherwise had accumulated.

iv) The aforesaid aspect, in our view, was not taken into consideration in a proper manner by the competent authority. Since the rejection of the application for settlement not only results in imposition of interest, penalty, but also in prosecution, we are of the view that the competent authority was required to closely examine and scrutinise the manner in which income was derived, as was stated by the assessee in his application dated October 16, 2018.

v) We are, therefore, of the view that interest of justice would be served if the competent authority scrutinises in detail the manner in which the assessee derived undisclosed income of Rs. 80 crores. We make it clear that even according to the Revenue, as far as the remaining Rs. 70 crores is concerned, the writ petitioner is already eligible for settlement.

vi) In view of the above consideration, the impugned order passed by the learned single judge (Khazana Jewellery Pvt. Ltd. v. ITSC, 1) is set aside. Consequently, the order dated June 11, 2020 is also set aside. The case is remanded to the competent authority for consideration afresh of the writ petitioner’s application for settlement, keeping in view the observations made by this court, more particularly, the detailed application filed by the writ petitioner explaining the manner in which it derived the undisclosed income.”

S. 115BBE — Scope of amendment — Enhancement of rate of tax from 30% to 60% — Prospective or retrospective operation of taxing statutes — Absence of express retrospective language — Onerous fiscal amendment — Applicable prospectively from 01/04/2017 and not from F. Y. 2016-17.

19. Deepak Maratha (S/o Ramchandra Maratha) v. UOI:

2026 (6) TMI 371 – (Raj):

A. Y. 2017-18: Date of order 27/05/2026

Ss. 115BBE and 271AAC of ITA 1961

S. 115BBE — Scope of amendment — Enhancement of rate of tax from 30% to 60% — Prospective or retrospective operation of taxing statutes — Absence of express retrospective language — Onerous fiscal amendment — Applicable prospectively from 01/04/2017 and not from F. Y. 2016-17.

The Assessee was engaged in the business of jewellery and bullion. During F. Y. 2016-17, the assessee deposited a sum of Rs. 66.17 lakhs (including Specified Bank Notes) in his bank account during November – December 2016, i.e., the demonetisation period. The assessee filed his return of income on 30/10/2017 declaring a total income at Rs. 7,92,860.

Subsequently, the assessee’s case was selected for scrutiny, and the assessment was completed vide an order dated 21/12/2019 passed u/s. 144 of the Act. The books of account of the assessee were rejected u/s. 145(3) of the Act, and it was held that the assessee could not explain the cash deposit of Rs. 66,17,500 in the bank account. Accordingly, the said amount was treated as unexplained money and was added to the total income u/s. 68 of the Act. Further, tax was computed at 60% on the addition of Rs. 66,17,500, and a separate penalty notice was issued under the newly inserted section 271AAC of the Act.

Section 115BBE was amended by way of the Taxation Laws (Second Amendment) Act, 2016, enhancing the rate of tax from 30% to 60% with an additional surcharge of 25% on such tax, resulting in an effective rate of 75% plus 10% of tax as penalty with cess, resulting in an aggregate tax liability of 83.25% w.e.f. 01/04/2017 on income falling u/ss. 68 to 69D of the Income-tax Act, 1961.

The assessee challenged the retrospective application of the amended provisions of section 115BBE, whereby income earned prior to 01/04/2017 was taxed at the higher rate of 60% plus surcharge and penalty was also imposed.

The assessee challenged the order by way of a writ petition challenging the validity and vires of the retrospective operation of the amended provisions of section 115BBE of the Act. The core issue before the Hon’ble High Court was as follows:

Whether the amendment to Section 115BBE, which enhanced the rate of tax from 30% to 60%, can lawfully be applied to income arising from transactions completed during Financial Year 2016-17 w.e.f. 01/04/2016 to 31/03/2017, and/or more specifically, whether such enhanced rate operates from 15/12/2016, being the date of notification/Presidential assent to the amending Act, or only from 01/042017, being the effective date expressly specified in the amending provision itself?

The Rajasthan High Court allowed the petition and held as follows:

“i) The assessee had voluntarily disclosed that the relevant sum of Rs.66,17,500/- deposited in his bank accounts during November/December, 2016 was part of his business income for F. Y. 2016-2017. True, the Assessing Officer was not satisfied the explanation of the assessee about this income. But the fact remains that there was absolutely no concealment of income by the assesse in this case.

ii) The rate prescribed in the principal charging section, Section 115BBE itself, is an integral and inseparable component of the substantive tax liability. It determines the precise fiscal consequence that attaches to the taxable event. An assessee who completes a transaction under a regime prescribing 30% tax acquires, at that moment, a vested right to be assessed at that rate. The subsequent doubling of that rate, from 30% to 60%, without express retrospective language, cannot reach back to alter the consequence of a transaction already complete.

iii) The distinction between “imposing a new tax” and “enhancing an existing rate” has never been recognised as a basis for implying retrospectivity in taxing statutes. Both create or increase a fiscal burden on the subject. As Vatika (supra) holds, citing Halsbury: “retrospective operation should not be given to a statute so as to affect, alter or destroy an existing right or create a new liability or obligation unless that effect cannot be avoided without doing violence to the language of the enactment.” An enhancement of the rate from 30% to 60%, i.e., doubling the burden, plainly “affects or alters” existing rights and cannot be treated as a mere procedural or clarificatory change.

iv) In our opinion, enhancement of principal tax certainly creates new liability. The rate prescribed in the principal charging section is an integral and inseparable component of the substantive tax liability. It defines the precise fiscal consequence that attaches to the taxable event, and an assessee who completes a transaction under a regime prescribing 30% acquires, at that moment, a vested right accrues in his favour to be assessed at that rate. The subsequent doubling of that rate, without any express language for retrospectivity of the doubling of rate of tax cannot relate back and to alter the legal consequences of a transaction already completed.

v) The fundamental rule of interpretation is that legislation is presumed to operate prospectively unless a contrary intention clearly appears, grounded in the principle of lex prospicit non respicit, i.e., law looks forward not backward, since every person is entitled to arrange his affairs by relying on existing law without finding later on that his plans have been upset retrospectively.

vi) The correct legal position which emerges is summarized as below:

“(a) The law applicable to an assessment year is the law in force on the first day of that year — i.e., 01st April. A provision coming into force after that date, without express retrospective language, cannot be applied to assessments for that year.

(b) Changes in law occurring after the commencement of a financial year cannot govern the tax liability for that year unless the amendment is expressly made retrospective.

(c) The amendment to Section 115BBE came into force on 01/04/2017 i.e. the first day of F. Y. 2017-18. For F. Y. 2016-17, the law in force on 01/04/2016, prescribing a rate of 30%, must govern. The enhanced rate of tax @60% came into force on 01/04/2017 and can apply only from that date, i.e. from financial year 2017-18 onwards.

(d) The Taxation Laws (Second Amendment) Act, 2016 contains no express language for its retrospective effect of section 115BBE. We thus hold that the Taxation Laws (Second Amendment) Act, 2016 is prospective in effect as specified therein (from 15/12/2016, except the amendment of Section 115BBE, which is effective from 01/04/2017).” ‘

vii) The question framed in para 8.1, in the preceding part, is answered accordingly. The appellate authority shall therefore proceed further to adjudicate the assessment order impugned before it keeping in mind what has been enunciated hereinabove, in accordance with law.”

Revision u/s. 264 — Scope of power of Commissioner u/s. 264 — Capital gain — Exemption u/s. 54F — Failure to claim exemption u/s. 54F in the return — Revised return not filed — Claimed raised in revision u/s. 264 — Commissioner rejected application u/s. 264 — Held by the High Court that the Power of Commissioner is wide enough to grant relief even for the assessee’s errors and mistakes — Power u/s. 264 is intended to prevent miscarriage of justice and grant relief even where errors are committed by the assessee — Rejection order quashed and set aside — Matter remanded to the Principal Commissioner to consider afresh and decide in accordance with law.

18. Nisarg Ajaykumar Vakharia v. Principal CIT:

(2026) 488 ITR 75 (Bom): 2026 SCC OnLine Bom 3455:

A. Y. 2022-23: Date of order 03/02/2026:

S. 54F and 264 of ITA 1961

Revision u/s. 264 — Scope of power of Commissioner u/s. 264 — Capital gain — Exemption u/s. 54F — Failure to claim exemption u/s. 54F in the return — Revised return not filed — Claimed raised in revision u/s. 264 — Commissioner rejected application u/s. 264 — Held by the High Court that the Power of Commissioner is wide enough to grant relief even for the assessee’s errors and mistakes — Power u/s. 264 is intended to prevent miscarriage of justice and grant relief even where errors are committed by the assessee — Rejection order quashed and set aside — Matter remanded to the Principal Commissioner to consider afresh and decide in accordance with law.

For A. Y. 2022-23, the assessee filed the return of income on July 19, 2022, declaring his income at Rs. 18.10 crores. The assessee’s income included long-term capital gains of Rs. 11.69 crores. The assessee had purchased an immovable property for Rs. 23.06 crores in December 2020, which was registered on February 1, 2021. The assessee had disclosed the new property under Schedule AL (Assets and Liabilities) of the income-tax return for A. Y. 2022-2023. Accordingly, the assessee was entitled to claim any deduction u/s. 54F but by mistake the assessee had not claimed any such deduction u/s. 54F. The return was processed, and an intimation order u/s. 143(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 was passed on October 19, 2022.

Therefore, the assessee filed a revision application u/s. 264 making a claim for deduction u/s. 54F. The assessee submitted that while filing the income-tax return for A. Y. 2022-2023, an inadvertent mistake had crept in as he did not make a claim u/s. 54F of the Income-tax Act against the long-term capital gains on the sale of shares. The assessee also submitted a copy of the intimation order, the sale deed, computation of income, etc.

The Principal Commissioner of Income-tax concluded that since the petitioner had not made the claim in his original return and had also not filed any revised return, he could not make the aforesaid claim before the Commissioner u/s. 264, for the first time. Accordingly, the Principal Commissioner dismissed the application filed by the assessee u/s. 264 of the Income-tax Act. While doing so, the Principal Commissioner relied upon the decision of the hon’ble Supreme Court in the case of Goetze (India) Ltd. v. CIT [(2006) 284 ITR 323 (SC); 2006 SCC OnLine SC 1446.].

The assessee filed a writ petition and challenged the order. The Bombay High Court allowed the petition and held as under:

“i) We find that the issue raised in the above writ petition is squarely covered by several decisions of this court in favour of the petitioner. This court has time and again held that revisional powers u/s. 264 are not only wider in their scope but are also intended for preventing miscarriage of justice and providing relief to an assessee, which it is otherwise entitled to.

ii) This court has also taken into consideration the decision of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Goetze (India) Ltd. v. CIT [(2006) 284 ITR 323 (SC); 2006 SCC OnLine SC 1446.] and held that the said decision would be wholly inapplicable since the Hon’ble Supreme Court was not considering the revisional powers as conferred under the provisions of section 264 of the Income-tax Act, but was in the context of a deduction claimed by the assessee by a letter, after the return was filed, without filing of a revised return. If one needs to take support from any decision of this court, the decision rendered in Swaminarayan Mandir Trust v. CIT (Exemptions) [(2026) 488 ITR 65 (Bom).] (Writ Petition No. 2162 of 2025, decided on December 24, 2025) would be apposite.

iii) In view of the aforesaid settled position in law, we are clearly of the view that respondent No. 1 ought to have considered the revision application of the petitioner (filed u/s. 264) even though mistakes/errors were committed by the petitioner itself in the return of the income. Once we are of this view, the impugned order passed u/s. 264 cannot be sustained and would have to be set aside.

iv) The matter is remanded to the Principal Commissioner for fresh disposal in accordance with law.”

Charitable trust — Charitable purpose — Exemption — Filing of audit report within the prescribed time is a condition precedent — Assessee, a trust engaged in providing medical aid to the underprivileged — Delay of 687 days in filing of audit report not condoned by CIT(E) — High Court held that, considering the nature of the work done by the assessee and the fact that the audit report had already been filed, and that the reason for the delay in filing was bona fide, this was a fit case to condone the delay.

17. Manav Vikas Bahuuddeshiya Gramin Seva Sanstha v. CIT (Exemption):

(2026) 486 ITR 427 (Bom): 2025 SCC OnLine Bom 6396:

A. Y. 2017-18: Date of order 03/03/2025

S. 119(b) of ITA 1961

Charitable trust — Charitable purpose — Exemption — Filing of audit report within the prescribed time is a condition precedent — Assessee, a trust engaged in providing medical aid to the underprivileged — Delay of 687 days in filing of audit report not condoned by CIT(E) — High Court held that, considering the nature of the work done by the assessee and the fact that the audit report had already been filed, and that the reason for the delay in filing was bona fide, this was a fit case to condone the delay.

The assessee is a trust engaged in providing medical aid to the underprivileged. There was a delay of 687 days in filing audit report in Form 10B for the accounting years 2016-17. Therefore, on August 18, 2018, the assessee filed an application before the Commissioner of Income-Tax (Exemption) for condonation of delay of 687 days in filing the audit report in form 10B. The reason given for delay was that the Chartered Accountant of the petitioner was not aware of the online filing requirement, which was newly introduced, and that the mistake was unintentional and due to oversight. By an order dated July 25, 2024, the Commissioner of Income-Tax (Exemption) rejected the application, holding that it was not a genuine reason for the grant of condonation of delay u/s. 119(b) of the Income-tax Act, 1961.
The assessee filed a writ petition challenging the order. The Bombay High Court allowed the writ petition and held as under:

“i) Considering that the petitioner is a trust, engaged in providing medical aid to the underprivileged, considering what has been held in Al Jamia Mohammediyah Education Society v. CIT (Exemptions) [[2025] 482 ITR 41 (Bom); 2024 SCC OnLine Bom 1157; [2024] DGLS (Bom) 1521.] and the nature of work being done by the petitioner and the fact that the audit report has already been filed and considering the reason appears to be an honest one, we deem it a fit case to condone the delay.

ii) In view of this, the impugned order is quashed and set aside. and the delay in filing the audit report in form 10B was to be condoned subject to costs of Rs. 10,000 to be paid to the Raman Science Centre and Planetarium, Subhash Road, Empress City, Nagpur, Maharashtra 440 018.”

Article 5 of India-Denmark DTAA – Software sold through a distributor’s channel on a principal-to-principal basis cannot constitute a dependent agent permanent establishment.

8. [2026] 184 taxmann.com 194 (Delhi – Trib.)

Milestone Systems A/S vs. ACIT(IT)

A.Y.: 2022-23 Dated: 06 March 2026

Article 5 of India-Denmark DTAA – Software sold through a distributor’s channel on a principal-to-principal basis cannot constitute a dependent agent permanent establishment.

FACTS:

The Assessee, a Danish company, was engaged in the business of distributing video management and surveillance software through its distributor channel in India. It contended that the receipts constituted business income and, in the absence of a Permanent Establishment (“PE”) in India, were not taxable in India. Accordingly, it claimed a refund of taxes withheld by distributors.

The AO observed that the Assessee sold customised software and exercised significant control over the distributors’ operations, including the price at which the software could be sold to customers. The AO noted that resellers in the distribution channel were approved by the Assessee. The AO held that the distributors constituted dependent agents and triggered dependent agency PE (“DAPE”) for the Assessee.The AO attributed 50% of receipts from distribution of software as profit attributable to DAPE. The Ld. DRP upheld the finding of DAPE but restricted the profit attribution to 25% of the receipts. The primary contention of the Assessee was that the transactions between it and the distributors were on a principal to principal basis and not that of principal-agent.

Aggrieved by the final order, the department preferred an appeal before the ITAT.

HELD

The AO has not demonstrated that the distributors concluded contracts or played a principal role leading to their conclusion on behalf of the Assessee. Under the distribution agreement, the distributors sold the software on their own account and assumed the associated risks.

The distributors were free to determine the sale price of the software, subject only to the condition that the price should not exceed the maximum retail price. This restriction on ceiling retail price cannot establish that the Assessee exercised control over the distributor’s operations.

The distributors were also distributing competitors’ products. On comparison, the revenue generated from the Assessee’s products constituted a minuscule portion of their overall sales.

The approval of resellers in the distribution chain was intended solely to ensure the quality of service and product installation, and it could not be equated with control over the distributors’ business operations.

Based on the above, the ITAT held that distributors do not constitute a DAPE of the Assessee. Accordingly, in the absence of a PE, the business income was taxable only in Denmark.

Article 4 & 12 of India-USA DTAA – Even in the absence of a specific reference in Article 4(1)(b) of the DTAA, a single-member LLC is entitled to the benefits of the DTAA as it satisfies the ‘liable to tax’ requirement. The consideration for offshore repairs to aircraft engines is taxable only in the US in the absence of fulfillment of the make-available condition.

7. [2026] 184 taxmann.com 238 (Delhi – Trib.)

GE Engine Services LLC vs. ACIT

A.Y.: 2021-22

Dated: 11 March 2026

Article 4 & 12 of India-USA DTAA – Even in the absence of a specific reference in Article 4(1)(b) of the DTAA, a single-member LLC is entitled to the benefits of the DTAA as it satisfies the ‘liable to tax’ requirement. The consideration for offshore repairs to aircraft engines is taxable only in the US in the absence of fulfillment of the make-available condition.

FACTS I:

The Assessee, a single-member LLC owned by a US resident, was engaged in aircraft repair services. The Assessee obtained a tax residency certificate (“TRC”) from the US tax authorities. During the year, it earned INR 37.71 Lacs and claimed a refund of INR 60.22 Lacs. The AO noted that the Assessee received a sum of INR 471.64 Crores towards repairs of aircraft (including supply of parts), which was not offered to tax.

The AO observed that a single-member LLC was regarded as a fiscally transparent entity (“FTE”) in the USA and was not specifically included as a resident under Article 4(1)(b) of India-USA DTAA; hence, it was not entitled to treaty benefits. The Ld. DRP confirmed the draft order.

Aggrieved by the final order, the tax authority preferred an appeal before the ITAT.

HELD I:

The Assessee was allotted a tax identification number and also obtained a TRC from the US tax authorities. As per the TRC, the Assessee was certified to be a business unit of a US resident, and the US resident discharged tax on the LLC’s income.

The coordinate benches in the cases of General Motors Company USA v. ACIT (IT) [2024] 209 ITD 60 (Delhi-Trib), Wild West Domains, LLC v. ACIT [IT Appeal No.1774 (Delhi) of 2022, dated 29-7-2024] and Go Daddy.Com LLC v. Dy. CIT [2025] 123 ITR(T) 29 (Delhi – Trib.) held that while an LLC is not specifically referred to under Article 4(1)(b) of the India-US DTAA, it satisfied the requirement of being ‘liable to taxation’ by virtue of the tax being discharged by the US owners on the LLC’s income. The term ‘liable to tax’ is used in the treaty to determine fiscal domicile and refers to the powers of taxation, while the actual incidence/payment of tax may differ.

Following the coordinate bench rulings, the ITAT held that the Assessee was entitled to the benefits of the India-USA DTAA.

FACTS II:

Without prejudice, the AO treated the receipts from aircraft engine repair services as FTS under the Act and the DTAA, contending that the Assessee had provided technical guidance and expertise to its customers, enabling them to identify issues requiring repair.

HELD II:

The ITAT observed that the AO failed to produce any evidence demonstrating that the Assessee had made available technical knowledge, experience, or skill to its customers.

The customers’ learning or expertise acquired through their interactions with the Assessee over the years did not amount to the Assessee making such knowledge available. There must be a conscious effort by the Assessee to make such knowledge available.

Post-repairs, the customers remained dependent on the Assessee for future repairs and were not enabled to perform such services independently.

Based on the above, the ITAT held that the offshore repair services do not satisfy the make available condition; hence, in the absence of a permanent establishment, the receipts are taxable only in the US.

Amounts deposited in the bank account of a Chartered Accountant for payment of clients’ taxes, supported by corresponding tax challans and matching debits, cannot be treated as unexplained money under section 69A in his hands.

33. (2026) 186 taxmann.com 1084 (Chennai Trib)

Bose Saravanan v. DCIT

A.Y.: 2016-17  Date of Order: 11.05.2026

Section: 69A

Amounts deposited in the bank account of a Chartered Accountant for payment of clients’ taxes, supported by corresponding tax challans and matching debits, cannot be treated as unexplained money under section 69A in his hands.

FACTS

The assessee was a Chartered Accountant. He filed his return of income for AY 2016-17 on 14.10.2016 declaring total income of Rs.2,95,197. The A.O received information that the assessee had deposited substantial amount of cash into his bank account. Since the income declared by the assessee in the return of income was not commensurate with the cash deposit, the A.O held that he had a reason to believe that the income of the assessee had escaped assessment and accordingly reopened the assessment by issuing notice under section 148. The assessee submitted before the A.O that the said bank account was opened for the purpose of paying taxes on behalf of the clients and that the entire amount deposited was with respect to the amount received from the clients towards payment of various taxes such as income tax, VAT, TDS, service tax, etc. The A.O, however, did not accept the submissions of the assessee and proceeded to make addition of Rs. 23 Crores under section 69A.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed an appeal before the CIT(A), who enhanced the addition by Rs. 6,87,60,832, by considering the credits in another bank account as unexplained.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed an appeal before ITAT.

HELD

Considering the affidavit filed by the assessee and the various other documents, the Tribunal observed:

(a) On sample basis, the tax challans matched with the debits reflected in the bank account of the assessee and that the lower authorities, while making the addition, had completely ignored the debits in the bank account of the assessee, which in the narration clearly mentioned the various government authorities.

(b) Considering the overall facts and circumstances, there was merit in the submission that the assessee had acted as a conduit for payment of taxes on behalf of the clients and that the deposits reflecting in the bank account of the assessee did not belong to the assessee.

Accordingly, the Tribunal directed the AO to delete the addition.

In the result, the appeal of the assessee was allowed.

Where assessee deposited employees’ contribution to PF and ESI after due date under the respective Acts but before due date of return under section 139(1) during COVID-19 period, since issue regarding deductibility was debatable and pending before Supreme Court, adjustment under section 143(1) was not permissible.

32. (2026) 186 taxmann.com 1020 (Jodhpur Trib)

Yadvendra Dhabhai v. ITO

A.Y.: 2021-22

Date of Order: 21.05.2026

Sections: 36(1)(va), 143, 154

Where assessee deposited employees’ contribution to PF and ESI after due date under the respective Acts but before due date of return under section 139(1) during COVID-19 period, since issue regarding deductibility was debatable and pending before Supreme Court, adjustment under section 143(1) was not permissible.

FACTS

The assessee filed his return of income for AY 2021-22. The return was processed by the CPC under section 143(1) making an addition of Rs. 1,85,03,917 on account of delayed deposit of employees’ contribution as per due dates prescribed under the PF and ESI Acts, though such payments were admittedly deposited before the due date of filing the return of income under section 139(1). The assessee filed a rectification application under section 154 with a request to grant relief since the delay was due to unprecedented disruption caused by COVID-19 pandemic. However, the CPC rejected the said application.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed an appeal before CIT(A), who did not grant any relief.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed an appeal before ITAT.

HELD

The Tribunal observed as follows:

(a) Recently, the Supreme Court had issued a notice in the case of Woodland (Aero Club) Pvt. Ltd. v. ACIT [SLP No. 1532 of 2026, dated 15-1-2026] to examine the issue of due date for deposit of employer contribution to PF and ESI interpretation amid lingering conflicts where the proceedings were pending and judgment was awaited. Thus, the claim for deduction on deposit of employer contribution to PF and ESI before the due date under respective Acts or due date of filing of return of income u/s 139(1) of the Act was a debatable issue.

(b) Considering the EPFO Circular (infra) on granting relaxation from levy of damages and penalty for delay deposit during the lockdown period and that the issue was sub-judice for review before the Supreme Court, showed that it was an issue which involved interpretation of law at the level of Supreme Court, which was out of the scope of section 143(1) which allows for making prima facie adjustments by the CPC to the return of income of the assessee.

(c) The relaxation from penalties, made by EPFO vide Circular dated 15.05.2020, made it apparently clear that the EPFO authorities had acknowledged genuine hardship, and hence, intended to grant relief to the assessee from levy of penalty on acceptance of delayed payments under the exceptional circumstances such as the COVID-19 pandemic. Meaning thereby, that the relaxation of penalty by the competent authority from the Employees Fund Organization, Ministry of Labour and Employees, Government of India, acknowledged the genuine hardship and intended to grant relief.

(d) In circumstances of the COVID-19 pandemic, the non-levy of penalty tantamounted to acceptance of delay under exceptional circumstances and the absence of formal extension of due date did not negate the intent of relief. Therefore, such delays during the COVID-19 pandemic deserved to be viewed pragmatically and not in a strict technical manner.

Accordingly, the Tribunal held that the impugned order of CIT(A) rejecting the application under section 154 was perverse to the facts on record and did not appreciate the genuine hardships of the COVID-19 period as duly acknowledged by EPFO authorities, and thereby deleted the addition.

As a result, the appeal of the assessee was allowed.

A trust engaged in teaching of Islamic studies, Quranic texts or Arabic language to the public, without conducting religious rituals, ceremonies, or worship, is carrying on an educational activity rather than a religious activity and accordingly, such trust is eligible for registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G.

31. (2026) 186 taxmann.com 769 (Bang Trib)

An-Nauman Educational Religious Social Charitable and Welfare Trust v. CIT(E)

A.Y.: N.A.

Date of Order: 19.05.2026

Sections: 12AB, 80G

A trust engaged in teaching of Islamic studies, Quranic texts or Arabic language to the public, without conducting religious rituals, ceremonies, or worship, is carrying on an educational activity rather than a religious activity and accordingly, such trust is eligible for registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G.

FACTS

The assessee was a charitable trust established on 8.4.2013 with the primary object to establish, set up and run educational institutions. It was also imparting religious education on the tenets of Islam in Arabic and governed by the SUNNI-HANAFI sect of school of thought. It was also decided to set-up an Arabic Madarasa for imparting Arabic courses after generating funds and creating regular infrastructure such as building.

It filed applications for grant of registration under section 12AB and approval under section 80G. The CIT(E) observed that the nature of the trust was religious-cum-charitable since the building intended for use as an educational institution was proposed to be constructed in the land belonging to a Masjid, and that the trust was imparting religious education on tenets of Islam and running a Madarasa. Accordingly, he rejected the applications under section 12AB and section 80G.

Aggrieved, the assessee filed appeals before ITAT.

HELD

The Tribunal observed as follows:

(a) The trust was not doing any religious activities except to impart Arabic education which was nothing but a language. Similarly, the tenets of Islam were also taught to the public and not to any particular group of persons.

(b) The tax department did not have any documentary proof to show that the assessee trust was carrying on religious activities such as religious worship, rituals, ceremonies or propagation. When there was no proof to show that the trust was doing these activities, merely relying on some words in the trust deed would not be a reason to treat the trust as a religious trust.

(c) Nowhere in the trust deed was there a restriction that the education was to be imparted to a particular group of persons, and in fact, the trust served the entire public at large.

(d) Learning a language as well as owning a Madarasa (which was nothing but a place for education) could not be treated as religious in nature. (e) The assessee trust was carrying on various activities such as relief to the poor, provision of education, etc. and therefore the trust could not be treated as carrying out the religious activities.

(e) The assessee trust was carrying on various activities such as relief to the poor, provision of education, etc. and therefore the trust could not be treated as carrying out the religious activities.

(f) Imparting of education in Arabic language and Islamic academic instruction could at best be termed as education and not providing any religious practice. When the assessee trust was not engaging in any religious worship or rituals, it could not be presumed that the assesse was engaging in religious activities, and on that basis, a trust could not be termed as a religious trust.

(g) The teaching of Islamic studies, Quranic texts or Arabic language academically did not amount to religious worship or religious activity. When the assessee’s trust deed was examined, it was noticed that the dominant objective was to impart education, establish institutions, provide scholarships, develop knowledge, operate libraries and offer language, professional and technical courses. The aforesaid activities were not for a particular religious community but to the general public.

(h) The academic teaching of religious texts at best could be termed as an educational activity whereas the religious worship, rituals or propagation could be termed as a religious activity. In the present case, the assessee trust was engaged in the imparting of education and therefore the assessee trust could not be termed as a religious trust. There was no evidence to show that the assessee trust was engaged in religious activities such as religious worship, rituals, ceremonies and propagation.

(i) Relying on the madarasa to term the assessee trust as doing the religious activity was also not correct. The teaching of Arabic and establishing an Arabic madarasa could not be treated as doing the religious rituals. In fact, several universities in India were having Arabic departments and therefore the imparting of education in the Arabic language could not be treated the institution as a religious trust. The madarasa was performing the function of a school, i.e. imparting structured learning, teaching languages, moral studies, general subjects or vocational skills and therefore the madarasa could at the best be treated as educational institution and no religious worship was carried out in that place and therefore the madarasa could not be equated with mosque. Mosque was a place of religious worship whereas madarasa was a school imparting academic instruction. When the dominant purpose is providing education, the other incidental things done by the assessee could not term the assessee as a religious trust.

Accordingly, the Tribunal set aside both the rejection orders and directed the CIT(E) to grant registration under section 12AB to the assessee trust as a public charitable trust and also grant approval under section 80G.

As a result, the appeals of the assessee were allowed.

Utilization of borrowed funds does not alter the character of investment transactions where other indicators of business activity are absent. In terms of para 3(b) of CBDT Circular No. 6/2016, the Assessing Officer is bound to accept the treatment adopted by the assessee where shares are held for more than 12 months and are consistently reflected as investments in the balance sheet and there is no allegation of bogus or sham transactions.

30. TS-590-ITAT-2026 (Ahmedabad)

DCIT v. Kutir Navinchandra Patel

A.Y.: 2017-18

Date of Order: 23.4.2026

Sections: 28, 45

Utilization of borrowed funds does not alter the character of investment transactions where other indicators of business activity are absent.

In terms of para 3(b) of CBDT Circular No. 6/2016, the Assessing Officer is bound to accept the treatment adopted by the assessee where shares are held for more than 12 months and are consistently reflected as investments in the balance sheet and there is no allegation of bogus or sham transactions.

FACTS

The assessee, an individual engaged in the business of manufacturing corrugated boxes and trading in cloth filed his return of income for assessment year 2017-18 declaring total income of Rs. 8,62,20,910, which included Short Term Capital Gain (STCG) of Rs. 8,51,46,889 and exempt Long Term Capital Gain (LTCG) of Rs. 4,58,83,452 arising from sale of listed equity shares.

In the course of assessment proceedings, the Assessing Officer (AO) issued a show cause notice proposing to treat the capital gains as business income. The assessee filed reply along with documentary evidences explaining that the shares were held as investments, transactions were delivery-based, and investments were made out of own funds and business surplus. The assessee also submitted that the shares were consistently reflected as investments in the books and that there was no intention to carry on trading activity.

However, the AO rejected the explanation primarily on the ground that the assessee had utilized unsecured loans for making investments in shares and that such loans were repaid upon sale of shares, indicating a systematic and profit-oriented activity akin to business. The AO held that the entire activity constituted business activity. Accordingly, he treated both STCG of Rs. 8,51,46,889 and LTCG of Rs. 4,58,83,452 aggregating to Rs. 13,10,30,341 as business income and made addition under the head “Profits and Gains of Business or Profession.”

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) where he inter alia submitted that even if borrowed funds were used, the same would not ipso facto convert investment transactions into business transactions.

The CIT(A) allowed the appeal and held that the AO had failed to carry out any objective analysis of relevant factors such as intention, holding period, frequency, and accounting treatment, and had instead proceeded merely on presumptions regarding use of borrowed funds. With regard to LTCG, the CIT(A) held that in terms of para 3(b) of CBDT Circular No. 6/2016, the AO was bound to accept the treatment adopted by the assessee. On these specific facts, the CIT(A) held that the LTCG of Rs. 4.58 crores was rightly claimed as exempt under section 10(38) and could not be recharacterized as business income.’

As regards STCG, the CIT(A) applied the judicially settled tests, and having examined the specific facts of the assessee’s case, held the gains to be on investment account.

On the issue of borrowed funds, the CIT(A) held that the AO’s reliance on this factor was misplaced and contrary to settled law.

Aggrieved, the Revenue preferred an appeal to the Tribunal.

HELD

The CIT(A) has passed a well-reasoned and speaking order after duly appreciating the factual matrix and the settled legal position governing the issue. The Tribunal noted that there is no allegation by the AO that the transactions in shares are bogus, sham or in the nature of penny stock transactions. The genuineness of purchase and sale of shares, supported by demat statements, contract notes and banking channels, has not been doubted. Also, admittedly, the shares giving rise to Long Term Capital Gains were held for more than the stipulated period of 12 months and were consistently reflected as “investments” in the books of account of the assessee.

The CIT(A) has correctly applied the binding CBDT Circular No. 6/2016 dated 29.02.2016, particularly para 3(b), which mandates that where listed shares are held for more than 12 months and the assessee treats the same as investments, the AO shall not dispute the characterization of income as capital gains. It observed that the AO, in the present case, has disregarded the said binding circular without recording any finding that the transactions were non-genuine. Therefore, the CIT(A) was justified in holding that the LTCG of Rs. 4,58,83,452 is to be assessed under the head “Capital Gains” and is eligible for exemption under section 10(38) of the Act.

With regard to the STCG, the Tribunal observed that the CIT(A) has examined the issue in the light of well-settled judicial principles governing distinction between investment and trading. The factual findings recorded by the CIT(A) were not controverted by the Revenue, clearly demonstrating that the shares were held on delivery basis in dematerialized form, the investments were largely concentrated in a single scrip, there was no frequency or multiplicity of transactions indicative of systematic trading, and the assessee did not have any infrastructure or organized activity for dealing in shares as a business. Further, the accounting treatment consistently reflected the shares as investments and not as stock-in-trade. These factual findings, according to the Tribunal, establish that the intention of the assessee was to hold the shares as investments and not to trade.

It observed that the sole basis adopted by the AO for recharacterizing the income is the alleged use of borrowed funds. It held such reasoning is unsustainable in law. It noted that the jurisdictional High Court in CIT vs. Bhanuprasad D. Trivedi (HUF) [(2017) 87 taxmann.com 137 (Guj)], following the earlier decision in CIT vs. Rewashanker A. Kothari [(2006) 283 ITR 338 (Guj)], has categorically held that mere utilization of borrowed funds or volume of transactions does not alter the character of investment into stock-in-trade if the intention of the assessee is to hold the shares as investments.

The Tribunal dismissed the appeal filed by the Revenue.

Once the assessee has demonstrated that capital gains has been substantially invested in construction of a residential house, the deduction cannot be denied merely on the ground that certain additional documents such as approval letters, possession certificate or complete set of bills were not furnished. The provisions of section 54/54F are beneficial in nature and are intended to promote investment in residential housing. Therefore, the same should be interpreted liberally. Substantive compliance of the conditions is sufficient, and the claim cannot be denied on mere technicalities.

29. TS-571-ITAT-2026 (Bangalore)

Javaji Naga Darshan v. ITO

A.Y.: 2022-23

Date of Order: 15.4.2026

Sections: 54, 54F

Once the assessee has demonstrated that capital gains has been substantially invested in construction of a residential house, the deduction cannot be denied merely on the ground that certain additional documents such as approval letters, possession certificate or complete set of bills were not furnished.

The provisions of section 54/54F are beneficial in nature and are intended to promote investment in residential housing. Therefore, the same should be interpreted liberally. Substantive compliance of the conditions is sufficient, and the claim cannot be denied on mere technicalities.

FACTS

The assessee, in his return of income returned long term capital gains of Rs 33,18,773 on sale of immovable property and claimed entitlement to deduction under section 54 of Rs 45,00,000, but restricted the same to Rs 33,18,773 being amount of capital gains.

In the course of assessment proceedings, the Assessing Officer (AO) called for details and evidence such as purchase of land, evidence for construction and proof of ownership of constructed property. The assessee furnished only sample copies of bills of construction material which were held to be insufficient. The AO, accordingly, denied the claim for deduction of Rs 33,18,773 under section 54 of the Act.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) and submitted that the AO has not appreciated the fact that the assessee had entered into a Joint Development Agreement and a copy thereof was placed on record to establish ownership and development of the property. The CIT(A) dismissed the appeal filed by the assessee.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal before the Tribunal where it was submitted that copy of sale deed of original property, Joint Development Agreement, details of reinvestment in construction of residential house, bank statements evidencing flow and utilisation of funds and sample copies of invoices relating to construction have been furnished.

It was contended that the assessee has established that the amount of capital gains stood reinvested and that the claim for deduction has been denied on alleged deficiencies in documents without disproving the core fact of investment; substantive compliance cannot be denied on technical lapses; once the source of funds and their utilisation for construction is established, minor deficiencies such as non-submission of certain documents such as approval letters or complete bills cannot be a ground to deny exemption. The claim has been denied on mere suspicion and that neither the AO nor CIT(A) have conducted an independent enquiry. Such an action is violative of principles of natural justice.

HELD

The Tribunal noted that from the facts on record that it is not in dispute that the assessee has earned capital gain on sale of immovable property and has claimed deduction on account of construction of a residential house. The only basis for denial of the claim by the lower authorities is alleged insufficiency of documentary evidence.

On perusal of the records, it observed / held that –

(i) the assessee has furnished a Joint Development Agreement (JDA) entered between the assessee and his family members to substantiate the claim of construction of residential house. The CIT(A) has rejected the same by observing that the agreement mentions nil consideration and is executed on a stamp paper of Rs. 200, thereby treating it as doubtful; the Tribunal held the reasoning of the CIT(A) to be not sustainable;

(ii) the JDA placed on record evidences the arrangement for construction and cannot be disregarded merely on the ground that the consideration mentioned therein is nil or that the stamp duty is nominal, especially when the arrangement is within family members. It held that these factors, by themselves, do not disprove the factum of construction activity undertaken by the assessee;

(iii) the assessee has furnished sample bills for the purchase of building materials aggregating to Rs. 24,25,282. The Revenue authorities have rejected such evidence in a general manner without pointing out any specific defect or discrepancy in such bills. The Tribunal held that in absence of any adverse finding regarding genuineness of these documents, the same cannot be brushed aside as insufficient;

(iv) it is also pertinent to note that the assessee has furnished details of construction expenses exceeding Rs. 21 lakhs incurred through banking channels, along with the names of parties and nature of materials purchased or services availed but formal bill or voucher was not available. It held that such evidence clearly demonstrates the flow and utilization of funds towards construction. It also held that, the lower authorities have failed to consider these details in proper perspective and have proceeded to reject the claim without any verification or rebuttal.

The Tribunal held that the approach adopted by the AO as well as by the CIT(A) is hyper-technical. Once the assessee has demonstrated that the capital gains have been substantially invested in construction of a residential house, the deduction cannot be denied merely on the ground that certain additional documents such as approval letters, possession certificate, or complete set of bills were not furnished. It is well settled that the provisions of section 54/54F are beneficial in nature and are intended to promote investment in residential housing. Therefore, the same should be interpreted liberally. Substantive compliance of the conditions is sufficient, and the claim cannot be denied on mere technicalities. Considering the JDA, material purchase bills, and details of expenditure incurred through banking channels, the Tribunal held that the assessee has satisfactorily demonstrated the construction of a residential house and utilization of capital gains for the said purpose. Accordingly, the Tribunal deleted the disallowance made by the AO and confirmed by the CIT(A) amounting to Rs. 33,18,773 as not sustainable.

In the absence of consideration and absolute possession, capital gains cannot be taxed u/s 45(1).

28. TS-567-ITAT-2026(HYD)

Vasudeva Rao v. ITO

A.Y.: 2014-15

Date of Order: 17.4.2026

Sections: 2(47), 45

In the absence of consideration and absolute possession, capital gains cannot be taxed u/s 45(1).

FACTS

The assessee, for the first time, filed a return of income in response to a notice issued under section 147 of the Act, declaring total income to Rs 11,029 being interest income. In the course of assessment proceedings, the assessee denied any liability to capital gains tax on account of execution of Joint Development Agreement (JDA) dated 11.1.2013, in respect of which the Assessing Officer (AO) had information in his possession. Since the share of the assessee in respect of land which was subject matter of JDA was 1/8th, the AO taxed 1/8th of the total consideration of Rs 5.30,50,000 under JDA i.e. Rs 66,31,250 to be the long-term capital gains taxable in the hands of the assessee.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the CIT(A) who upheld the action of the AO.

The primary issue raised by the assessee before the Tribunal was that during the year under consideration there is no taxable event of `transfer’ u/s 2(47) of the Act since during the year under consideration neither was any consideration received under the JDA nor was absolute possession granted by the assessee. This proposition was sought to be supported by the decision of the jurisdictional High Court in the case of Smt. Shantha Vidyasagar Annam vs. ITO (170 taxmann.com 754).

HELD

The Tribunal observed that, on perusal of clauses 1 to 3 of the JDA, it is evident that the possession of the property has been handed over by the assessee to the developer only for the limited purpose of development of the property, and not as an absolute transfer of possession in terms of section 53A of the Transfer of Property Act, 1882. It also noted that there is also no dispute about the facts that the assessee has not received any consideration from the developer on account of the said JDA during the year under consideration.

The Tribunal noted that the jurisdictional High Court in the case of Smt. Shanta Vidyasagar Annam (supra) has, in paras 17 and 18, categorically held that unless consideration is received by the assessee or possession is handed over in the manner contemplated under section 53A of the Transfer of Property Act, no “transfer” can be said to have taken place for the purpose of section 45 of the Act.

Since Revenue did not bring on record any material to demonstrate that the assessee has received any consideration, whether monetary or otherwise, during the year of execution of the JDA and neither was there any material to show that the possession was handed over to the developer in a manner other than for the limited purpose of development, the Tribunal held that the very foundation for invoking section 45(1) of the Act in the year under consideration fails.

Following the binding decision of the jurisdictional High Court in the case of Smt. Shantha Vidyasagar Annam vs. ITO (supra), it held that no taxable capital gain arose in the hands of the assessee during the year under consideration.

The issuance of valid notice u/s. 143(2) by a jurisdictionally competent AO is a mandatory requirement for completing assessment u/s. 143(3) of the Act and failure to issue such a notice, or issuing it without proper jurisdiction vitiates the entire assessment and renders it void ab initio. Section 292BB is only confined to service of notice and does not apply to issuance of notice.

27. TS-500-ITAT-2026(DEL)

Rachit Jain v. DCIT

A.Y.: 2019-20

Date of Order: 6.3.2026

Sections: 143(2), 153A, 292B

The issuance of valid notice u/s. 143(2) by a jurisdictionally competent AO is a mandatory requirement for completing assessment u/s. 143(3) of the Act and failure to issue such a notice, or issuing it without proper jurisdiction vitiates the entire assessment and renders it void ab initio.

Section 292BB is only confined to service of notice and does not apply to issuance of notice.

FACTS

The Tribunal in an cross appeal by the assessee was required to decide the legal issue viz. that a notice under section 143(2) issued by a non-jurisdictional Assessing Officer (AO) renders such a notice illegal, invalid, non-est and without jurisdiction and the consequent assessment order to be illegal. The facts relevant for deciding the issue were as under –

In the assessment proceedings u/s. 153A r.w.s. 143(3) of the Act for AY 2019-20, the AO claimed to have issued a notice u/s. 143(2) dated 30.9.2020. However, as per the record, the jurisdiction over the case was transferred to DCIT, Central Circle-31, New Delhi only on 15.10.2020, vide order u/s. 127 of the Act which was communicated to the assessee only on 25.02.2021. Therefore, on the date of issuance of notice, the AO did not have valid jurisdiction over the assessee. Also, on the assessee’s e-filing portal, a notice under section 143(2), a copy of the first page of the appraisal report was attached in place of the statutory notice.

During the appellate proceedings before CIT(A), the assessee raised the specific ground that no valid notice u/s. 143(2) had been issued by a jurisdictionally competent Assessing Officer (AO). However, in response thereof, the CIT(A) called for a remand report from the AO and in the remand report, the AO reiterated the issuance of notice dated 30.09.2020. The AO, however, failed to address that jurisdiction under section 127 was assumed after the date of notice. Despite this fact, the CIT(A) upheld the validity of the notice, holding that since the notice was visible on the portal and the assessment was completed u/s. 153A, the defect was curable.

Aggrieved, the assessee preferred an appeal to the Tribunal.

HELD

The issuance of valid notice u/s. 143(2) by a jurisdictionally competent AO is a mandatory requirement for completing assessment u/s. 143(3) of the Act and failure to issue such a notice, or issuing it without proper jurisdiction vitiates the entire assessment and renders it void ab initio. It is settled law that section 292BB is only confined to service of notice and does not apply to issuance of notice.

The Tribunal observed that the Apex Court in the case of ACIT vs. Hotel Blue Moon [(2010) 324 ITR 372 (SC)] has held that in the absence of the notice u/s. 143(2) of the Act, the assessment framed by the Assessing Officer is liable to be quashed.

The Tribunal held that the notice u/s. 143(2), which is mandatory, has not been served on the assessee and thus, the consequent assessment order is void ab initio and deserves to be quashed. It directed accordingly.

Since the Tribunal quashed the assessment on jurisdictional ground in the assessee’s appeal, the appeal filed by the revenue was held to have become infructuous and was dismissed as such.

Globalisation Readiness Self-Assessment For Indian Mid-Sized CA & Professional Services Firms

These questions accompany seven articles in this Annual Issue of BCAJ on the Globalisation of Indian Accounting Firms. They are intended to provoke honest reflection, serve as a mirror, and surface gaps that domestic incumbency may be concealing. We hope that the user will answer them with evidence rather than intention — and that the distance between the two will tell you something useful.

HOW TO USE THIS QUESTIONNAIRE

  •  Work through every section with your full partnership leadership team.
  • Answer with evidence, not aspiration. Where you cannot point to a concrete fact, name, decision, or number — record it as a gap.
  • Each question leads to an action. Use the right-hand column to commit to a specific action, owner, and date.
  • Rate each section GREEN (answered with evidence) / AMBER (answered aspirationally) / RED (cannot answer honestly) in the Readiness Summary at the end.
  • Answer the Diagnostic Question last. It is the single most important question in this document.
1 STRATEGIC INTENT & CLIENT REALITY

Why are you going global — and does the market actually validate it?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Why do we want to globalise — and can we articulate a reason that is not prestige, not a vanity address, and not ‘because others are doing it’? Response:

Prompt: Name the specific client need or market opportunity. If you cannot name it, reconsider the premise before spending a rupee.

Q2 Are we going global out of genuine ambition to build a better, stronger firm — or because domestic growth has slowed and we are looking for an exit from a problem? Response:

Prompt: Globalisation does not fix a weak home practice. It exposes it. Be honest about which dynamic is at work.

Q3 Have we made a documented, partnership-level decision to globalise — with a board resolution, a committed budget, and a named owner — or is this the initiative of one or two enthusiastic individuals? Response:

Prompt: Without a formal commitment, it is an intention, not a strategy. The difference matters when the first setbacks arrive.

Q4 Do our existing clients have genuine cross-border needs we currently cannot serve — and are we demonstrably losing mandates because of that gap? Response:

Prompt: Name 3 specific situations in the last 2 years where a global capability was needed and absent. These are your actual business case.

Q5 Is there a specific overseas market where Indian client need is forming ahead of full maturity — where early presence would give us a decisive, compoundable first-mover advantage? Response:

Prompt: Which market? What is the trigger — regulatory change, trade flow, or capital movement? What is the entry timing window?

Q6 Beyond serving existing Indian clients abroad, can we win clients who are not Indian — local clients, third-country multinationals — in the target market? Response:

Prompt: If the honest answer is ‘probably not yet’, the international office is a client-servicing outpost, not a global practice. Both are valid but require very different capital commitments.

Q7 Have we mapped the full advisory chain generated by India’s FDI and ODI flows — entry strategy, valuation, FEMA, transfer pricing, audit — and identified which links we handle end-to-end vs. which we refer out? Response:

Prompt: Every dollar of cross-border investment creates a chain of advisory needs. Where in that chain does our capability actually start and end?

Q8 Are we going global to become a better firm — or merely to look like a larger one? If the international office closed in Year 3, would the home practice be stronger or weaker for the experience? Response:

Prompt: The right answer is ‘stronger, because we will have identified and fixed gaps the domestic market conceals.’ If the honest answer is ‘we are not sure’, globalisation is premature.

2 HONEST SELF-ASSESSMENT OF CAPABILITY

What would remain if domestic incumbency were removed?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 What are our one or two genuinely distinctive capabilities — the things a sophisticated overseas client, who owes us nothing, would pay meaningful fees for? Response:

Prompt: Not ‘we are good at tax.’ Name the specific sub-domain, jurisdiction, client type, and problem we solve better than competitors. ‘Inbound FDI tax structuring for Japanese manufacturers entering India’ is a capability.

Q2 Are those capabilities embedded in the firm as an institution — or do they reside in one or two senior partners who could leave next year? Response:

Prompt: If your two best partners resigned today, which client mandates and technical capabilities would walk out with them? The answer is your institutional capability gap.

Q3 Have we tested our quality against international benchmarks — through a quality review, a joint engagement, a network inspection, or competitive selection against global firms? Response:

Prompt: Domestic reputation is not a proxy for international quality. Have any of our professionals worked in or been assessed by international firms? What external evidence of our capability exists beyond long-standing client loyalty?

Q4 Do we have genuine specialisation by domain and by industry sector — or are we still a generalist practice that claims expertise in everything and is truly differentiated in nothing? Response:

Prompt: List your firm’s specialised practices. Is each staffed by a dedicated team with documented methodologies? Or is ‘specialisation’ just a website heading?

3 REGULATORY & COMPLIANCE READINESS

Do we understand the rules of the game in every market we intend to enter?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Do we have a jurisdiction-wise map of what services can be delivered from India, what requires local registration, what requires local collaboration, and what we cannot do at all in each target market? Response:

Prompt: For each target market: What are the licensing requirements? Is the Indian CA qualification recognised? Can Indian staff sign deliverables? These are non-negotiable baseline facts before any office investment.

Q2 Have we mapped our independence obligations under all applicable frameworks — ICAI, local auditor independence rules, IESBA, and PCAOB if relevant — and do we have a live, firm-wide conflict-check system? Response:

Prompt: An independence failure in one office can compromise the entire firm’s global reputation. Is there a partner whose specific and sole responsibility is independence governance?

Q3 Do we understand and have we prepared for peer review, external inspection, and regulatory scrutiny in every market we intend to enter? Response:

Prompt: Welcoming inspection, not resisting it, is the mark of a globally ready firm. Regulation is the architecture of trust — not the enemy of growth.

Q4 Have we built our globalisation plan within ICAI’s current regulatory framework on firm structure, branding, advertising, multidisciplinary partnerships, and external capital — or are we betting on regulatory reform that has not yet happened? Response:

Prompt: ICAI reform is necessary but not yet complete. Build for the regulations as they are, with optionality for reform. A strategy that requires ICAI to change before it works is not a strategy.

4 PEOPLE, LEADERSHIP & INSTITUTIONALISATION

Has this firm built something genuinely larger than its founding individuals?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Do we have a deliberate, documented hiring plan for the new office — naming specific roles, profiles, languages, and qualifications — or will we default to sending whoever is available from India? Response:

Prompt: Name the first 3 roles you will hire locally. If you cannot profile them specifically today, the hiring plan does not exist.

Q2 Does our international team plan genuinely reflect the local market — culturally, linguistically, professionally — or is it an Indian team operating in another country? Response:

Prompt: What percentage will be local hires vs. seconded India staff after Year 1 and Year 3? What is the explicit path to local leadership of the office?

Q3 Can we retain the best local hires once attracted? What is our answer when a senior local professional asks: ‘Is my growth path connected to this firm’s trajectory — or am I an instrument of delivery?’ Response:

Prompt: What equity, authority, or growth opportunity are we offering senior local hires beyond a salary? If the answer is ‘nothing yet’, retention risk is very high.

Q4 Do we have a formal HR function — with a dedicated HR head — or is people management a part-time responsibility of the managing partner? Response:

Prompt: Once a firm reaches critical mass, a professional HR head is not optional. At what headcount does your firm plan to appoint one?

Q5 Is succession planned, documented, and known to the full partnership — or would a founder stepping back create a client and capability crisis? Response:

Prompt: Name the next three people who could lead the firm in five years. What specific development plan is in place for each of them today?

Q6 Are client relationships owned by the firm as an institution — or by individual partners who could take those clients with them if they left? Response:

Prompt: Name your top 5 clients. How many have meaningful working relationships with more than one partner or senior manager? That number is the firm’s actual institutional client ownership.

Q7 Do we have a genuine second line of leadership — partners and directors with real authority, real accountability, and real client ownership — or does everything flow through two or three founders? Response:

Prompt: Name them. In the last 12 months, what significant decisions did they make independently, without founder sign-off? If you cannot name a decision, authority has not actually been transferred.

Q8 Will our current equity and governance structure survive when top talent demands a fairer share — or will it fracture under that pressure before the international practice reaches maturity? Response:

Prompt: When was the equity split last reviewed? Is it defensible to the next generation of partners who are already watching and making their own calculations?

Q9 Are we prepared to give real authority to the next generation before they have been fully tested — and absorb the uncertainty that involves? Response:

Prompt: In the last 12 months, name one significant decision made by a next-generation leader without founder sign-off.

Q10 Have we moved from a founder-name firm to an institution with its own identity, systems, and client relationships that are larger than any individual? Response:

Prompt: Obsession with founder names prevents meaningful consolidation and global scale. What is the firm’s institutional name and identity independent of its founders?

Q11 Have we seriously evaluated merger with one or more complementary Indian firms as a faster route to the scale required for credible global presence — before investing in international offices? Response:

Prompt: The Big Four were built through merger and consolidation over decades. Is domestic scale the missing precondition for our globalisation ambition? What formal conversations have we initiated in the last two years?

5 CULTURE & ETHICS

What happens when no one senior is in the room?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Would a junior team member in an overseas office raise a difficult client complication at 11 pm — or find a workaround because no one senior is watching? Response:

Prompt: When did a junior professional last raise an inconvenient issue with a client proactively? How the firm responded to that moment is more diagnostic than the incident itself.

Q2 Does our culture depend on physical proximity to the founders — or is it genuinely internalised and portable across cities, countries, and time zones? Response:

Prompt: What would change in how work gets done in the new office if a founding partner visited only once per quarter? If the answer is ‘a great deal’, it is supervision, not culture.

Q3 Have we ever explicitly defined what is non-negotiable in our culture — and demonstrated that commitment by making a costly decision to uphold it in the last three years? Response:

Prompt: Name one client mandate or piece of work we declined or resigned because it conflicted with our standards. If you cannot name one, the standard may not be as firm as believed.

Q4 Do we have a single P&L across all offices — or separate economics that create invisible incentives for each office to optimise locally at the expense of firm-wide standards? Response:

Prompt: How is the new office’s performance currently measured? Is it integrated with or separate from the home practice? Shared economics create shared accountability.

Q5 Do we have an ethics partner or governance function with real authority — not just a name on a policy document — and do partners see that independence breaches and lapses are taken seriously? Response:

Prompt: A global firm cannot operate with variable ethics. The firm’s ethical floor must be consistent everywhere. Where local law is less stringent, the firm’s own standard must still prevail.

Q6 Are we building institutional brand through knowledge publications, sector alerts, and thought-leadership — and can we show a sceptical new international client tangible evidence of our expertise? Response:

Prompt: What published content has the firm produced in the last year that a prospective overseas client could read to assess our capability? If the answer is ‘nothing’, the knowledge marketing programme does not yet exist.

6 TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE

Can our systems support global delivery today — not eventually?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Where are we honestly on the technology maturity curve: Level 1 (email and spreadsheets), Level 2 (integrated cloud tools with standardised workflows), or Level 3 (unified, AI-enabled, continuously improving)? Response:

Prompt: Be specific. List the actual systems in use for practice management, document control, client collaboration, time recording, and quality review. Do not describe the aspiration — describe the current reality.

Q2 Are we allocating 5–10% of annual revenues to technology — or treating it as a residual cost that gets funded only after every other priority is met? Response:

Prompt: What was actual technology spend last year as a percentage of revenue? Who owns the technology investment decision, and does that person have authority to commit to multi-year infrastructure spend?

Q3 Can a colleague in another country pick up exactly where a Mumbai team member left off — with full access, no version confusion, no data privacy breach, and no loss of audit trail? Response:

Prompt: Test this. Name one current engagement and map how work would actually flow between Mumbai and, say, Dubai or Singapore. Where are the friction points today?

Q4 Do we have governance embedded into daily workflows — so that conflict checks, independence clearances, and quality sign-offs are systemic and cannot be bypassed? Response:

Prompt: Can a partner sign off on a deliverable without completing the required governance steps within the system? If yes, the governance is illusory regardless of what the policy document says.

Q5 Have we addressed compliance with India’s Digital Personal Data Protection Act 2023 and applicable data privacy laws in target markets (GDPR for Europe) — and do we have documented cybersecurity controls for multi-jurisdiction client data? Response:

Prompt: When was the last independent security audit? Is there a documented incident response plan? Have client data processing agreements been reviewed for DPDP 2023 compliance?

7 CAPITAL & FINANCIAL READINESS

Are we financially built for this?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Do we have an explicit, board-approved, multi-year capital plan covering technology, talent, brand building, overseas compliance, and office infrastructure — with committed rupee figures, not aspirational ranges? Response:

Prompt: Produce a 3-year capital requirement estimate with specific line items. If you cannot do this today, the globalisation plan is an intention, not a strategy.

Q2 Are our charge-out rates internationally competitive? Can senior partners bill at USD 500–800/hr equivalent for cross-border advisory — and does the international office stand on its own economics? Response:

Prompt: Compare your current blended rate per partner to market benchmarks. What would it need to be for the international office to be self-sustaining within 3 years without subsidy from the home practice?

Q3 Are we growing revenues at 15–20% annually with EBIT margins of 20–25%? If not, what specifically is preventing it — and is the cause structural or managerial? Response:

Prompt: Structural causes (equity model, service mix, pricing architecture) require strategic intervention. Managerial causes (execution quality, focus, talent gaps) require operational intervention. The diagnosis determines the solution.

Q4 If PE or other external capital becomes relevant, are we investor-ready — with documented governance, auditable MIS, credible second-line leadership, and a strategic plan not dependent on any one founding partner? Response:

Prompt: Could you hand an investor a board pack for the last 4 quarters today — with credible management accounts, KPIs, and a coherent strategic narrative? If not, when realistically could you?

Q5 Do we fully understand ICAI’s current position on external investment — including the separation of audit and non-audit practices required before PE capital can be accepted — and have we taken formal regulatory advice on this? Response:

Prompt: The firm must address statutory audit independence before signing a term sheet, not after. Assuming ICAI flexibility on this specific point is a material planning risk.

8 MARKET POSITIONING, NETWORKS & EXPANSION

Do we know what we are selling, who we are selling to, and how we will reach them?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Have we decided: are we building a full-service firm or a boutique? Or are we drifting between the two without having made the choice? Response:

Prompt: Write the answer in one sentence. If the sentence contains ‘both’ or ‘it depends’, the decision has not been made. Indecision on this question is visible to sophisticated clients and investors.

Q2 If boutique: is there genuinely a niche in the market, and — more importantly — is there a market in that niche large enough to sustain a viable international practice? Response:

Prompt: Estimate the addressable fee pool in your specific niche in your target geography. Is it large enough? Is it growing? Who else is competing for it?

Q3 Have we identified the 2–3 industry sectors where we can build differentiated cross-border credibility — pharma, engineering goods, SaaS, renewables, family-owned multinationals — rather than claiming relevance in every sector? Response:

Prompt: Sector-lens competition allows a mid-sized firm to compete on insight rather than size. Which sectors? What is the existing evidence of depth, not just familiarity?

Q4 Have we mapped the competition in the target market — who is already there, what they charge, what clients say about them, and where the genuine opening for an Indian firm lies? Response:

Prompt: Could you produce a 1-page competitor map for your target geography right now? If not, market research is the immediate next action before committing capital.

Q5 Have we consciously chosen our expansion model — organic greenfield, merger/acquisition, network membership, bilateral alliance, or building our own network — and can we articulate why we chose it over the alternatives? Response:

Prompt: Defaulting to the most familiar option without evaluating the alternatives is not a strategic choice — it is a habit. What is our chosen model and why?

Q6 If we are considering network membership, have we rigorously assessed whether it genuinely adds clients and capability — or primarily adds a brand name, quality reporting obligations, and fee payments? Response:

Prompt: What specific mandates has the network generated for member firms of comparable size in the last 3 years? What are the exclusivity terms, governance obligations, and exit conditions?

Q7 Do we have a cross-border referral network — formal alliances, best-friend relationships, or network memberships — with demonstrated referral flow in both directions? Response:

Prompt: Name the three overseas firms who would send us a referral today. When did a senior partner last visit them in person? Relationships that have never generated a referral are contacts, not alliances.

9 BRANDING & VISIBILITY

Are we building a firm — or just a name?

# Question Our Position Today / Action, Owner, Date
Q1 Within ICAI’s framework — which was meaningfully revised effective 1 April 2026 — are we doing everything permitted: strong website, LinkedIn presence, client roundtables, conference participation, authored publications? Response:

Prompt: Audit each of these. Which are active and regular? Which are absent? Assign ownership and a 90-day action to each absent item.

Q2 Are our senior professionals active in public forums of peers — study circles, seminars, BCAJ events, global conferences? Is this tracked, encouraged, and resourced by the firm? Response:

Prompt: In the last 12 months, how many times did a partner from your firm speak at an external professional forum? What is the firm’s target, and how is it supported?

Q3 Are we building institutional brand — or relying entirely on individual partner relationships that will not survive those partners stepping back? Response:

Prompt: What would remain of the firm’s market visibility if the two most senior partners stopped attending external events tomorrow? That residual is your institutional brand.

THE DIAGNOSTIC QUESTION — Answer This Last & Answer It Honestly

 

If we removed our domestic structural advantages — long-standing client relationships, regulatory barriers to foreign competition, and the market’s limited ability to distinguish excellent advice from confident mediocrity — what would a new client in a new market actually see when we walked through their door?

 

Write your honest answer below. This is not a question for the pitch deck. It is the question a sophisticated international client — a CFO of a cross-border MNC, a family office, a private equity fund — will answer for themselves in the first two meetings. Answer it before they do.

 

Our honest answer:

√ READINESS SUMMARY

Complete this after all nine sections.

After completing all nine sections, classify each section into one of three categories:

GREEN — Answered with evidence

Concrete facts, names, decisions and numbers support the answer.

AMBER — Answered aspirationally

The answer describes intent or plans, not current reality.

RED — Cannot answer honestly

Honest response is ‘we don’t know’ or ‘we haven’t thought about this.’

Section GREEN AMBER RED Priority Gap / Next Action
1. Strategic Intent & Client Reality
2. Honest Self-Assessment of Capability
3. Regulatory & Compliance Readiness
4. People, Leadership & Institutionalisation
5. Culture & Ethics
6. Technology Infrastructure
7. Capital & Financial Readiness
8. Market Positioning, Networks & Expansion
9. Branding & Visibility
Readiness Level What It Means
Sections answered confidently with evidence Globalisation-ready: proceed to market selection and capital planning.
Sections answered partially or aspirationally Globalisation-capable: address specific gaps before committing capital abroad.
Sections where honest answer is ‘we don’t know’ Globalisation-premature: invest in institutional foundations first.
The Diagnostic Question unanswerable honestly Do not globalise yet. Fix the home practice first. The market will not wait indefinitely — but neither will it reward an unprepared entry.

Learning From Global Firms, What Indian Firms Can Adopt And What They Can Avoid

Indian accounting firms struggle to compete with global giants due to deep fragmentation and lack of scale. To survive and grow, they must learn from the Big Four by prioritizing institutionalization over individual ownership, investing heavily in technology and AI, and developing deep industry and domain specializations. Furthermore, Indian practices need robust governance, talent management, and quality control systems. However, instead of mimicking the rigid silos of global networks, Indian firms can carve a competitive edge by offering highly integrated, personalized services and dedicated relationship management, particularly to mid-sized clients.

INTRODUCTION

The Indian accounting sector is highly fragmented, with over 72% of 1,00,000+ firms operating as sole proprietorships. With only 13 firms having more than 50 partners, these small firms lack the scale to invest in technology and talent and thus lose significant market share to large global giants.

GLOBAL FIRMS – A PERSPECTIVE

This article is about learning from global firms, and whilst there are many global firms other than the Big Four (such as BDO and Grant Thornton), for the purpose of this article, some statistics regarding the Big Four have been highlighted just as a reference point, especially to understand the difference in scale, and to keep in mind the big picture.

The global revenue and employment generation of the Big Four firms for the year 2025 is given in the table below.

Firm FY 2025 ($) Employees
Deloitte 70.5 B 4,73,000
PwC 56.9 B 3,64,000
EY 53.2 B 3,95,000
KPMG 39.8 B 2,76,000

Each of these “firms” (actually networks) have been built, on an average, over a hundred years and it is important to recognize that these are not firms which are, so to speak, majority owned by a handful of people; they are not. First of all, in most countries, the individual firms are part of a network and it is not that one country “owns” the entities in the other countries. It is often wrongly thought that USA would own, say, the Indian counterpart; local firms are owned by local partners, and the branding is the result of, say to speak, a franchise. There are, of course, some exceptions, such as that the US firm may have a joint venture with the Indian firm for some parts of the business, such as a back office or a global capability center, but that is not the same as saying that there is a holding company which owns all other entities. Also, this is not the same as consulting firms like, say, McKinsey or BCG or Accenture, where it is not a confederation or a network, but like a multinational MNC; it is very important to bear this distinction in mind to understand how these firms function and what could be the learnings therefrom.

The Indian Accounting Evolution

BIG FOUR IN INDIA

The Big Four in India are a minuscule part of the global operations, although obviously, India being the fifth largest economy in the world, it is very important to these firms. One of the reasons for this importance is not the revenue, but a gap in the ability to service MNCs across the world is a major issue; also, India often also has back office capabilities which are often leveraged by larger global firms, either as joint ventures or otherwise.

The 2025 March India revenues and employees of the Big 4 was estimated as under:

Firm FY 2024 (Rs. cr) Approximate employees in India
EY India 13,400 ~ 1,00,000+
Deloitte India 10,000 ~ 55,000 – 60,000
PwC India 9,200 ~ 30,000 – 35,000
KPMG India 5,900 – 6,200 ~ 25,000 – 30,000

SOME CHARACTERISTICS OF GLOBAL FIRMS

The single biggest characteristic of Global firms is institutionalization; as mentioned above, these are not individual partner owned and even the chairman of the firm at the global level (he is chairman of a network as such), or let’s say the chairman of an Indian Big Four firm does not “own” the firm, and therefore is not the “promoter/founder”. Majority of the people at the Chairman/CEO level (and there are some exceptions), are usually there for 8 to 10 years, and, in a sense, it’s like a rotating position; in a sense, this is like being the first amongst equals.

There are several other characteristics of a big global firm that are important to understand for aspiring large Indian firms in terms of learnings and aspirations and also what to avoid; some of these are elaborated below:

1. Big global firms have significant specialization, both domain and industry. In a sense, it’s a matrix organization; usually, the Global firms are divided into three broad service lines:

– Audit (or what is called “assurance”)

– Advisory/consulting

– Tax and regulatory services

Very often, internal audit is a part of the advisory practice and not the assurance practice.

2. The advisory practice has a large number of specializations in terms of domain, such as the following:

– Technology consulting, which is usually the biggest

– Cyber consulting

– Financial advisory

– HR/people consulting

– Strategy consulting

– Operations consulting

– Government advisory practice

The above list is not exhaustive and indeed may differ somewhat across firms, but it would possibly be substantially representative of most of them. It is important to understand that even within the above, there are several subdivisions; so for example, in financial advisory services, one would have corporate finance/investment banking, due diligence and valuations, each of which is a significant size practice in its own right.

The key thing is that there is a very vast range of services with significant specialization, which gives Global firms tremendous muscle power, in the sense that it gives it the ability to service clients across a spectrum of needs. Of course, it also has the disadvantage of being too “siloed” in some sense, which is a drawback that Indian firms can leverage on.

Another characteristic of a Big Four is industry specialization; for example, financial services in most Big Four firms as a part of the tax and regulatory practice is a separate SBU. So while direct tax, indirect tax, transfer pricing, expatriate taxation and transaction tax could be separate SBUs, none of which is industry specialized, very often, financial services is a separate specialization because it has its own peculiarities. Indeed, even within that, there are sub segments such as asset management, FIIs, private equity and others, recognizing the completely different nature of the respective animals. Obviously, that means that the professionals who work in these are specially trained for that purpose and obviously develop that knowledge over a period. Indeed, even within the assurance/audit practice, partners are often identified based on domain specialization, such as financial services, power sector, FMCG, pharma, etc., and that is one of the considerations that clients often use in deciding which firm to use even for audit.

WHAT ONE CAN LEARN FROM GLOBAL FIRMS

There are three pillars to a professional services firm: clients, people, and infrastructure. However, if one thinks deeply, it is essentially people, people, and people because with the right talent, the clients will come and the infrastructure will be built. Of course, this in one sense is an oversimplification, but it is important to bear in mind that global firms lay a lot of emphasis on people.

There are a variety of dimensions that one can learn from global firms and some of these are as follows.

– Institutionalisation is a critical aspect and institutionalise comes with size and also the other way around i.e. once you grow in size, you require the firm to be institutionalised; in simple terms, it means that the ownership mentality has to give way and if the founder or the owner has, let’s say, 60% equity and 20 or 30 other partners have 40% equity, it’s a model which will at some point face a challenge, although there are a large number of firms, (including law firms), which do have this model. However, if the talent is really top class, at some point, this model will face challenges; accordingly, a model needs to be thought upfront, or at least may need to be evolved once the firm acquires a critical mass as to what is the model in terms of institutionalisation versus non-institutionalisation. In the latter situation, there are likely to be challenges to growth and also to the attraction and retention of top talent. Of course, if it is a small boutique firm, the non-institutionalised model can work well.

– Governance is another major dimension, and it becomes complex because most global firms (and especially the Big Four) are networks and as such, not one unified firm. As such, the global governance involves a global Chairman who represents the network and the network entity which is not a service entity lays down standards, brand rules, independence rules, risk issues, etc, the enforcement being through membership service agreements. It’s important to recognize that each service line will also have a global service leader, such as an assurance global leader, a tax global leader, and an advisory global leader; the respective local entity service leaders do not report to them directly, but may have something like a dotted line relationship, but there is no direct enforceability by the network except through the membership agreements. This obviously creates its own complexities and tensions, which is unavoidable, given the overarching architecture . Most of the individual firms have an executive committee or an India leadership team, and there is usually also a “partner oversight committee” (or some similar body) which deals with partner related issues. It’s overall a very complex ecosystem which emerges out of the need for significant institutionalization and the checks and balances.

– Quality standards and reviews is again a major issue and it partly emerges out of what is stated in the point above; as such, there are quality control reviews and of course, this becomes even more important in the assurance practice, which gets further complicated by regulatory issues such as PCOAB and NAFRA; most network firms, in any case, have their own quality departments not only for the assurance practice, but even for other service lines such as tax and advisory. In relation to tax, for example, there are reviews in relation to the quality of communication, technical positions, etc.

– Independence and conflict of interest management are also extremely important; as such, client acceptance is usually a long and sometimes painful process because it requires checks by an independence team. There is also often a conflict between different service lines, including on client ownership and, in relation to assurance clients, this becomes even more complex and of course has also significant regulatory constraints. The assurance practice has obviously got much more stringent independence requirements but even otherwise, overall, the independence and conflict of interest ecosystem is very elaborate and quite complex.

– Partner compensation is often a very sensitive topic and while the general principle is “eat what you kill” and it’s like a modified lockstep, this issue is always sensitive; some firms have a “grid”, and others have points, but the bottom line is that it is usually a combination of firm performance, service line performance, responsibilities assumed and individual performance. It is overseen by the executive committee and leadership team at an overall level, but in certain cases by specific remuneration committees somewhat on the lines of an NRC of a limited company. Very often, the issue of management responsibility vis a vis the delivery responsibility and the compensation becomes a complex issue and has inbuilt tensions.

– Global firms normally have robust structures and with structures, there is specialization. If one sees also from the perspective of knowledge/content, for a professional to say that “I do audit and I do tax and I do internal audit and I do cybersecurity”, does not sound credible, and in these days of deep knowledge and specialization, it will definitely not give comfort to a client. In other words, while some people at the top may be able to do work across different domains, more operating teams will need to have specialization. Obviously that means one needs structures; in practical terms, this means clearly defined service lines and SBUs within service lines; for example, even in a 50-people tax firm, one could have a Direct tax SBU, Indirect tax SBU and a transfer pricing SBU, each with, say, 15 to 20 people, so that the client gets comfort of specialisation.

– As mentioned elsewhere in this article above, industry specialisation is becoming crucial. In some sense, it could be a matrix of domain + industry. Usually, the industries where one may need to specialize is financial services, infrastructure, real estate, and, of course, the larger the firm, the larger the number of industries in which one could specialize. This industry specialization, along with domain specialization, is often seen as a critical differentiator of global firms; for example, if one is doing work for a NBFC, then a direct tax professional, an indirect tax professional, and a transfer pricing professional all of whom are specializing in financial services would create a better impact on the NBFC client than generalists who may not understand the special aspects involved in an NBFC.

– One other aspect of global firms is the quality of presentation and packaging; there is a lot of stress on communication, both oral and written, and there are detailed guidelines on fonts, formatting, presentation formats, etc. It would be helpful for Indian firms to also create certain templates so that there is a standardization; also, it’s important to have focus on oral communications and softer skills, so that the overall “packaging” is professional and creates a good impression. This is particularly relevant in situations where there is interaction with the C-suite.

– Linked with the issue of quality, as also with the issue of packaging, is the ability of big global firms to charge larger fees. Of course, their costs are also higher, but the combined effect of quality, domain specialization, industry specialization, and packaging is integrated into the ability to charge larger fees. Without getting over-commercial, it is important to recognize that earning good fees will also enable people to be paid well, and this creates a vicious cycle of talent and quality, which Indian firms could do well to emulate to the extent possible.

– Coming again to talent, there is a huge amount of training that would need to go in; this could be a combination of seminars, in-house trainings, international trainings, etc. This updation is critical because at the end of the day, one is in a knowledge profession and knowledge updation is a crucial dimension. Large global firms have significant budgets in this regard and it may be worth considering for Indian firms, (at least those who are 50 to 75 people or more), to actually have a formal budget for this aspect (equivalent of an R&D budget for manufacturing companies).

– As an elaboration of the above, Knowledge access is a critical part of large firms; some of them have knowledge centers or a Knowledge and solutions team, technical teams for audit, etc. Given that developments in regulations, specific industry related developments and judicial precedents are all making it a huge challenge to keep up to date, it is very important for Indian firms to have a knowledge updation architecture, and unless that engine fires and fires effectively, on an ongoing basis, the ability to make a difference qua clients will be impacted.

– Big global firms often tend to come up with publications on a variety of aspects; as an example, this could encompass developments on Ind AS/NFRA (both of which are very relevant for assurance practice) or changes in tax laws or changes in SEBI or RBI regulations, developments on Artificial Intelligence, Cyber Security related etc. These publications are usually significantly researched and very well presented. Indian firms may first of all not be engaged in many of these areas, but in relation to services they are engaged in, it would be a
good idea to think of periodical publications where there is some trigger; for example, Income Tax Act coming into force or a monthly newsletter would demonstrate pro-active capability and helps to build branding also.

– We are in a world where technology is becoming crucial and investment in technology is very crucial. Now, of course, there is a new dimension of technology which is artificial intelligence and hence, training in AI is becoming crucial and, of course, subscribing to AI tools like ChatGPT and Claude across the firm would be crucial because there is obviously going to increase productivity and quality, including in knowledge and drafting.

– Large global firms tend to have robust evaluation processes and HR practices and that is another aspect that Indian firms need to invest in. This obviously means that one may need to recruit an HR head, once the firm acquires a critical mass; HR is a very specialised function and the ability to have a proper professional people focus will come with an organized HR department headed by an HR professional. This obviously would include evaluations, trainings, surveys, proper recruitment processes, exit interviews, etc. This focus on talent is an extremely crucial learning from large firms.

One of the key items of focus for a big four firm or for a global firm is risk management. This manifests itself in various forms beginning from client acceptance to quality control checks and in many other ways. In audit/assurance practice, of course, the level of rigor is extremely high given the oversight also by NFRA as well as extreme focus by boards, proxy advisory firms, analysts and the press; this focus on risk management is an important learning for Indian firms although, of course, constraints of size both of the firm and of the clients, and often the inefficiency built into large firms, can be appropriately cut down in what would obviously be relatively small Indian firms, but the concept of risk management is extremely crucial to acknowledge and put into practice.

While the above and many more could be the learnings from large firms, it is important to recognize that the sheer scale and size of the big firms, the depth of the talent, the geographical spread and indeed, quite often, the compensation levels, is a significant issue in relation to the ability to compare. The compensation part is often a serious constraint in attracting talent, where the ground reality is that the growth of the Indian economy has led to quite a few average people being promoted to senior levels in global firms, at least in India; what is actually happening is that the “banding” concept in global firms is leading to people being in bands and being promoted. This is not to say that high quality talent does not exist in large firms in India; it does, but the practical reality which one has seen from experience is that very often the top 15% or 20% take completely disproportionate load, and very often average professionals tend to get overcompensated and this becomes a huge constraint for Indian firms to attract talent.

THE BRANDING IMPERATIVE … AND RELATIONSHIPS

Branding is another significant advantage that the large firms have and whilst one there are often risks associated with branding in the sense that something going wrong, it can seriously damage the brand, as a broad concept, the brand is a major attraction for clients because larger clients (and decision makers within those clients) usually want the “shelter” of going with a brand name, rather than sticking their neck out for relatively unbranded names. As such, global firms often tend to have the “pull factor” of a brand and a network, whereas an Indian firm may not have that brand or at least, not a level anywhere comparable to global firms, and therefore, the ability to build relationships and connects is crucial for Indian firms.

One of the issues that Indian firms face is that they rely primarily on individual contacts, and that is, of course, important, but global firms, including the Indian counterparts of these large firms, have a significant institutional connect more so with MNCs, but increasingly, also with large Indian corporates. The important thing to recognize is that when one is dealing with large clients, the size of the firm which deals with large clients becomes important, and in a sense, as one senior professional one put it, the institutional connect like “a building talking to a building, as opposed to the normal model in India of a person talking to a person”. As seen, both are important i.e. individual relations are extremely important, but institutional branding and networking is very crucial and a large advantage for global firms.

In this context, one has to recognize that the ICAI regulations have also lagged behind contemporary reality, and the ethical framework rooted in Clause 6 of Part 1 of the first schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act has traditionally been very restrictive. However, the professional services landscape has evolved significantly, and recognizing this, important revisions to the ethical framework has been announced with effect from 1st April 2026, signalling a glide path to what may be described as enabling professional visibility, at least to some extent. While one need not get into details in this article, (and much of this has been brought out in a very useful article in the BCA Journal of April 2026), suffice it to say that Indian firms can do a lot more in terms of institutional branding; here are some examples.

– A strong, robust and updated website

– Writing articles in professional/business journals/newspapers.

– A good social media presence, particularly on LinkedIn.

– Hosting webinars and/or podcasts.

– Holding roundtables for clients (this can be extremely effective if targeted properly; for example, separately for independent directors, separately for CFOs, separately for some specific industry, etc).

– Sponsoring some events.

Obviously, larger Indian firms can do this on a meaningful scale, but mid-size firms can also do this, although at a much smaller scale. One of the issues that will arise is funding, but that’s a “chicken or the egg” situation and that is indeed also one of the reasons why Indian firms are now looking at collaborating or merging, which obviously means that the mind set will have to change in terms of big a fish (maybe a big one) in a pond, as opposed to being the pond itself.

WHAT ASPIRING INDIAN FIRMS COULD DO ….. AND AVOID

Having discussed quite a few aspects of big firms and the constraints of relatively much smaller Indian firms, there are aspects of big global firms which Indian firms can avoid, and, in fact, do the converse in some sense. This is very important keeping in mind that the client landscape can also be segmented and different clients have different needs and also have need for different approaches.

Before one gets into that, as a broad concept, one of the temptations that Indian firms must avoid is getting into all kinds of work and accepting clients without understanding risks or cultural fit. Of course, in the last decade or so, both from a regulatory standpoint, the ability to raise funds and the market cap imperative, the overall quality of governance has gone up significantly and yet, Indian firms would do well to be careful and accepting clients only where the cultural fit is good and the governance levels are high.

One important dimension that has to be recognized is that a professional practice will need to architecture its path. Is it to be a full service firm, in which case size will become critical, or will it be a boutique firm? For example, a boutique firm which does only audit or only internal audit or only specialized tax work or only litigation. In fact, there could be many other examples, such as doing only structuring work, or only forensic work or only back office work. One important question to ask, in order to go down the niche path, “is there a niche in the market” and more importantly, “is there a market in the niche”? If the answer to both is yes, then that could be the model, but it is critical to recognize that if one is going the niche/boutique path, there has to be clearly demonstrated differentiation and skill. It’s like saying that “this is not a multi-cuisine restaurant, it’s a specialized Mexican food restaurant, but our Mexican food is the best”.

Global firms derive significant advantage from cross-border referral networks. Indian firms, especially those aspiring to serve inbound FDI clients or outbound Indian MNCs could seek to become part of formal networks or “best friend” alliances in order to create a larger catchment area in relation to cross border work.

Given that AI is fundamentally reshaping the audit, tax and advisory landscape, Indian firms can learn from the global firms as to how they are embedding AI in audit workflows, the risks of AI-driven commoditization of some services, and how Indian firms can use AI as a leveller against larger firms.

One critical aspect that Indian firms should do even if it is not fully institutionalised is regarding succession planning; that gives both team and clients, greater comfort.

Some further aspects which Indian firms would do well to keep in mind.

– Large firms often tend to work in silos due to the specialization and the structural imperatives Indian firms would also need structures, but have the ability often to provide a more “integrated” face to the clients and that becomes very important; for example, if one is doing tax work, an integrated approach between a direct tax partner, an indirect tax partner and a transfer pricing partner to present a coordinated face to the client is often very important. This does not mean that large firms are not doing it, but the sheer size and structure makes it more difficult for them to do so and that is where Indian firms can do better.

– In a Big Four, relationships are usually is normally institutional and that becomes sometimes a put-off for mid-sized companies, especially those which are promoter driven; what Indian firms can do is to have a more personalized, less commercial approach.

– Big firms will obviously have a large number of service lines and significant geographical spread; Indian firms may not be able to match up to this and should therefore avoid the temptation to spread too thin, both in terms of number of services as well as geography, but try and focus on quality and personalized service as their USP.

– Big firms have several internal constraints in partners accepting Board memberships (usually not permitted at all), whereas in Indian firms, that constraint may not be there; while one has to be careful in getting onto boards given the risks involved, it is worth considering joining high-quality boards because it leads to a lot of learning, creates stature and also enables creating a business and professional network that can be of benefit to the firm.

– Becoming a member of committees of professional organizations (and preferably business chambers of commerce) is often very helpful and Indian firms should have a framework to enable their partners to do so.

– Big firms normally have relationship partners for large accounts and that becomes a very important aspect for the clients; however, the relationship partner concept is usually for very large clients and the definition of what is “large” will obviously be very different from Indian firms and therefore, Indian firms which service mid-sized clients that can provide them with a relationship partner, especially where the firm is rendering different kinds of services, would be an important attraction for such clients as opposed to going for a global firm.

CONCLUSION

There is a lot to learn from global firms and Indian firms have a long way to go in that respect. Some key issues are that institutionalisation is a very important aspect of growth and talent retention. Also, that size does matter because investing in people, investing in technology, investing in knowledge is very difficult for a firm of smaller sizes. Also, alternatively of course, one can go the niche path, but then very specialized knowledge and clear differentiation is necessary.

As such, adapting the learning of big global firms to an Indian context, particularly in terms of structure, knowledge, updation, technology and focus on talent will enable Indian firms to get to the next level and reinvent themselves; it is however, important to bear in mind that the need to reinvent is not a one-time exercise, but needs to be revisited every few years in an incredibly fast changing world.

However, as mentioned above, there are a large number of things that large Indian firms that Indian firms can do in terms of personalized service, relationship building, providing work-life balance, and indeed, within the constraints of the size of the firm, also create visibility. At the end of the day, however, content and technical skill is also extremely important, and providing that content with personalised relationship and an integrated approach are very important dimensions where Indian firms can do better, particularly with mid-sized clients, and sometimes even with large ones.

Financing Global Growth

As Indian businesses globalise, Indian accounting firms must evolve from founder-centric, domestic practices into scalable global institutions. This transformation demands significant capital investment in enterprise technology, brand building, and top-tier talent, which traditional partnership economics can no longer sustain. Consequently, Private Equity (PE) is increasingly financing professional service firms, drawn by their high client stickiness and predictable revenues. However, attracting private capital requires adopting alternative practice structures to maintain strict statutory audit independence. Ultimately, firms seeking PE funding must professionalize governance, establish strong second-line leadership, and rigorously balance aggressive growth targets with uncompromising professional integrity.

Financing global growth is very critical for accounting firms — and, for that matter, for all types of professional service firms that are looking to grow. When it comes to capital requirements, private equity, and business economics, there are a few things I think are worth saying plainly, from the vantage point of someone who has lived this transition from the inside.

For decades, Indian accounting firms operated within a stable and predictable professional ecosystem. Growth was relationship-led, partner-driven, and largely domestic in orientation. Capital requirements were modest. Expansion was linear. International presence, if any, was through correspondent relationships or selective referrals. That world has fundamentally changed.

Today, Indian accounting firms operate in an environment shaped by cross-border transactions, global regulatory frameworks, multinational clients, digital delivery models, private capital flows, and rising client expectations around quality, responsiveness, and scalability. As Indian businesses globalise and international investors deepen their presence in India, professional firms are being compelled to evolve from founder-centric practices into scalable institutions. That transformation requires capital — more capital than traditional partnership firms and their underlying economics can comfortably generate.

I. CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS: WHAT IT ACTUALLY TAKES

Capital requirements fall into two broad categories: expenditure on the firm’s foundational assets, and expenditure on the people and activities that sustain and grow it. Both demand explicit planning and committed allocation. Neither can be treated as discretionary.

A. TECHNOLOGY

Every accounting firm today has to think about a reasonable but fair allocation to technology — and must do so without inhibition. Technology here means technology infrastructure, software, tools for automation, custom development tools, and specific aspects of AI that will help execute faster and in a much more efficient way than today.

What this means in practice is that firms need dedicated IT teams, or outsourced vendors, who can provide an honest estimate of technology spend on an annual basis. The subscription stack alone is longer than most managing partners appreciate: Microsoft 365 or equivalent, AI tools, audit tools, practice management platforms, HRMS, performance evaluation tools, timesheet and attendance systems, high-quality accounting and ERP software, CRM — each carrying annual licence costs that compound with headcount growth.

Firms need to provide for technology and technology-related spend constantly and without inhibition. For a typical mid-sized firm with INR revenues of around ₹50 crore, I would expect technology spend to be anywhere between 5 and 10% annually — so up to ₹5 crore per year. I would ideally like to go more, but I am careful about the relative size of the firm: a ₹50 crore practice would mean anywhere between 100 and 200 people, and all of them are using infrastructure, laptops, and service tools every day. All of that needs technology spend. None of it is optional. The example of ₹50 crores is merely an illustration — the 5 to 10% spend can be higher or lower depending on what is the priority for a particular firm. None of these percentages or numbers are cast in stone, so readers will need to consult their IT specialists and technology firms which specialise in servicing professional services firms, and then budget this aligned to their individual requirements.

Scaling the Global Accounting Firm

B. STRATEGIC INVESTMENTS: BRAND BUILDING

All views expressed in this section must be read in conjunction with the specific rules and advertising guidelines of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) in respect of brand building, and the nuances thereof. Nothing herein should be construed as suggesting any practice or ideas which fall outside of ICAI’s regulations and ambit.

It is very important that accounting firms think about brand building in a manner that is recognised and appreciated. That means marketing and PR, a thought-through branding strategy, podcasts with well-known personalities and with partners and individual brilliant technical people who disseminate knowledge. For me, branding in a professional services firm is really about knowledge marketing. It is participation in events, conferences, seminars, and workshops. It is knowledge partnerships and sponsorships where the brand becomes visible.

But the most important thing in a professional services firm — especially an accounting firm — when it comes to branding, is clear technical speakers who talk about what is happening in the world of accounting, tax, M&A, valuation, and all the service areas in a consistent, crisp manner that shows expertise. Public speaking in study circles, seminars, workshops, global and national events — that, to my mind, is the finest form of branding one can do. Because when a professional is heard in a public forum of peers, and when those peers accept and respect that professional — there is no substitute to that kind of branding. No marketing budget can replicate it.

For both of the above, it is important that the budget for expenditure on brand building and on events is well thought through and planned in advance, such that capital raise discussions or investor conversations become easier and sharper — given the express and articulated need for funds.

C. OPERATING EXPENDITURE: TALENT

When it comes to operating expenses, the key lever for a professional services firm to grow is talent. It is really the people — good-quality, high-performing individuals — who are not only qualified as Chartered Accountants or Certified Public Accountants, but who have the right experience at every level. A firm can expect to grow positively only and only if the people are growing themselves.

That means real investment in two things: attracting high-quality people, and retaining them. Retention means learning and development programs, motivating people constantly, taking care of what they really need, having off-sites, dinners, and coffee chats — taking interest in their L&D and their growth at an individual level, as opposed to only the group level. A senior employee who is technically brilliant may need some help in soft skills and social skills. Somebody who is a great communicator may not have the best technical skills. Each individual is different in their thought process and in their work approach. The talent that one needs for running a professional service firm must take into account diversity of thought process, diversity of skill sets, and diversity of experience. Therefore, accounting firms must align on the right expenditure to be incurred for the right talent, and this should be very much part of the budgeting process.

D. OPERATING EXPENDITURE: GLOBAL EXPANSION AND COMPLIANCE

Global expansion is really about globalisation. Can a firm in India think about setting up licensed practices in locations like Dubai, Abu Dhabi, Singapore, Japan, Australia, London, and other English-speaking countries? I think it is about licensing, about having a vision, about ensuring that the plans are ambitious enough and have global aspirations — and that the firm can be the firm of choice for the global growth of its clients.

But global expansion comes with compliance obligations that are complex and non-negotiable.

A firm growing internationally has to ensure that all the laws of the overseas country, as well as India, are always fully complied with. There is transfer pricing. There is permanent establishment.There are tax withholding rules. There is documentation for each of these. And therefore, it is very important that a professional services firm — an accounting firm above all — thinks about the full level of compliance before thinking about growth. In this profession, a compliance failure overseas should be best avoided.

II. REVENUE ECONOMICS: SCALABILITY, MARGIN PROFILES, AND CROSS-BORDER PRICING

For an accounting firm, revenue has to sustainably grow at 15 to 20% year on year. Some service lines will grow faster — 25 to 30%. For high-growth firms, even 25 to 30% aggregate growth is not unachievable and is very much within the range of what disciplined firms have demonstrated.

For that to happen, the firm has to have a strong vision of scalability. It needs to invest in partners, directors, senior managers, and managers — and invest in their growth. It needs to identify the next-generation leaders from within the ecosystem of interns, associates, and assistant managers who are becoming managers, then directors, then partners. And for that, the firm has to have a high-quality culture of performance — which means merit-based promotions, not just general year-end conversations. High-quality processes, practice management, and policies that encourage and inspire growth, such that the firm scales both organically and inorganically. It is also important to cap the growth aspirations with a reasonable degree of focus. One cannot be generating revenues without direction — growth that is stunted or scattered is not what investors or the partnership expects. Focus on key core domain areas. In those focused areas, scalable growth at reasonable margins is possible and sustainable.

Investors evaluating revenue forecasts want to see achievable numbers — a trend that clearly demonstrates the firm’s growth trajectory without overpromising. Revenue projections, growth assumptions, and the partnership’s collective thinking on scale must be in alignment. When in doubt, err on the side of being conservative; a forecast that is met or exceeded builds far more investor confidence than one that is missed.

MARGIN PROFILES AND CHARGE-OUT RATE ARCHITECTURE

When we are talking about growth and global growth, one of the most important aspects that private equity investors — and investors in general — look at is the firm’s ability to scale at good margins. There is no value in revenue increase with losses or sustained cash burn. Scale has to happen at decent margin profiles.

From what I am seeing currently and basis my experience, typical charge-out rates for senior partners in India across mid-sized firms with specific expertise in say Tax or Valuation or Advisory would be between USD 500 and 800 per hour. For mid-level and junior partners, USD 300 to 500. For directors, USD 200 to 400. For senior managers, USD 150 to 300. For anybody below senior manager level, up to USD 150. These are the benchmarks of a firm that is competitive at an international level, and they should serve as directional targets even for firms that are earlier in the journey. Again these are perhaps averages and there will always be exceptions to these for a few firms.

Whilst the above is the way to think about high-quality margin profiles and charge-out rates, this is again not cast in stone. Individual firms may have higher charge-out rates or a different value-based pricing methodology, and there could be smaller or mid-sized firms charging lower. It all depends on the market being served, the customer value proposition being offered, and the way a particular firm — its partners and its services — is perceived in the market. The above is guidance, and one of several ways to think about this. It is by no means the only way to think.

CROSS-BORDER PRICING: A CALIBRATED APPROACH

When it comes to cross-border engagements, pricing must be well thought through at cross-border rates. Cross-border rates will carry a premium over Indian rates — but how much depends entirely on what type of work is being done. For high-end work — high-end tax advisory, complex M&A structuring, specialised assurance — one can even go to two, three, or four times Indian rates. For routine work — accounting, auditing, routine compliance taxation — one must be cognizant and not overcharge.

Cross-border pricing must therefore be approached thoughtfully and within a defined range: 10 to 15% for routine services, going to 30, 40, or 50% depending on the actual complexity and value of the work being done, and up to 2 to 4 times for genuinely high-end advisory. Price to the value delivered, not to the location of delivery.

III. PRIVATE EQUITY TRENDS IN ACCOUNTING FIRMS

Private equity is, of course, one of several financing levers available to a professional services firm, and it is worth briefly placing it in that context before going further. Firms across the globe have long used, and continue to use, discounting of outstanding receivables to manage working capital, lease financing for office infrastructure and equipment, and working capital facilities from banks for shorter-term needs. These tools remain valid and, for many firms, sufficient. What has changed is that for firms with genuinely global ambitions — multi-country expansion, large technology investment, and scaled talent acquisition — these traditional levers are often not enough on their own, and that is where private equity has entered the conversation.

Over the last five to six years, specifically in the United States, we have seen high and increasing interest from private equity in financing — through equity capital, convertible debt, and sometimes straight debt — of professional services firms, and especially accounting firms. This is not speculation. The transactions are on the record, and they tell a very clear story.

Table 1: Major PE Investments in Global Accounting Firms (2021–2025)

Year Firm PE Investor Deal / Valuation Structure
2021 EisnerAmper TowerBrook Capital Partners Undisclosed Minority  (non-audit)
2021 Citrin Cooperman New Mountain Capital Undisclosed Majority stake
2022 Cherry Bekaert Parthenon Capital Undisclosed Majority stake
2024 Baker Tilly Hellman & Friedman + Valeas Capital USD 2 billion+ Majority stake
2024 Grant Thornton US New Mountain Capital USD 2.4 billion (rev); majority stake Majority (non-audit)
2025 Citrin Cooperman Blackstone (secondary) First PE-to-PE transfer in profession Secondary buyout

Sources: Journal of Accountancy, Accounting Today, Financial Times, CFO Brew, Transacted (2024–25)

Limitation: Data shared to the extent publicly available from reliable sources.

Five of the top 26 US accounting firms received private equity backing in less than three years. Three of the top four fastest-growing US accounting firms — EisnerAmper, Citrin Cooperman, and Cherry Bekaert — were PE-backed, with year-on-year topline growth of between 38 and 100%, against an industry average of 18%. And in 2025, Citrin Cooperman completed the first-ever PE-to-PE transfer in the profession, with Blackstone acquiring the stake from New Mountain Capital. This flip is validation of why PEs got interested in the first place.

Private equity looks at accounting firms as businesses with annuity growth backed by strong partners, strong clients, and very high client stickiness. In an accounting firm, growth is directly proportionate to and corresponds with how the professional services firm has built its client base over years. Accountants by nature do not splurge. They do not spend too much money, which means most of the profits are retained in the business. Partners withdraw money as and when there is cash, but that is limited to their needs. The balance is typically reinvested. That frugality, i.e. a natural tendency toward cash accumulation, is a green tick in private equity investments. These are businesses that can effectively declare a dividend every month or every quarter, and do so reliably.

Even in an AI-driven environment and across all market climates — whether markets are up or down — accounting firms continue to play an essential role. Their value is increasingly recognised when greater assurance is required on the quality of earnings and the quality of numbers. When tax laws change and tax becomes complex, good accounting firms are needed. An M&A transaction or a funding transaction cannot happen without accounting firms conducting due diligence exercises, their audits, their M&A tax structuring. Private equity understands this well.

THE INDIA PICTURE: A MARKET AT THE BEGINNING OF ITS PE JOURNEY

India is at an early but accelerating stage of the same transition. The transactions completed so far are small by global standards, but highly significant as signals of direction.

NAVIGATING THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

This Indian picture must be read against the regulatory framework that governs it. ICAI does not, at present, permit external or private equity capital to be infused directly into a firm holding audit practice. Some of the transactions referenced above have been structured using an Alternate Practice Structure model (“APS”) in international firms that house the advisory, valuation, tax, and other non-audit lines of business, kept entirely separate from the audit practice, which continues to be owned and controlled exclusively by its partners in the manner the local regulations require. This is not a workaround; it is the operative model for any firm seeking external capital today, and it has direct implications for how a firm structures itself, its governance, and its independence safeguards. The AICPA has provided guidance on APS which then has been adopted by various regulators worldwide. ICAI regulated firms need to tread cautiously and seek appropriate advice before proceeding on these lines.

Table 2: PE and Institutional Investments in Indian Professional Services Firms (2022–2026)

Year Firm Investor Deal / Valuation Notes
2022 Uniqus Consultech (USA/ Mumbai) Nexus Venture Partners + Sorin Investments Seed / Series A First Indian PS firm to receive PE
2024 KNAV Advisory Inc.  (Atlanta / India) NKSquared (Nikhil Kamath) Minority For acquisitions, talent, technology
2025 Uniqus Consultech

(USA/ Mumbai)

Nexus + Sorin (Series C) USD 20 million; valuation USD 250 million Doubled valuation from Series B
2025 Springline Advisory (PE-backed, US) Acquired Smart Accountants + Infinity Globus, Ahmedabad Undisclosed PE-backed firm acquiring Indian outsourcing firms
2025 Dhruva Advisors (Mumbai, India) Ryan LLC, USA (global tax services firm) Undisclosed Ryan acquires majority stake in Dhruva, forming a JV in India; Dhruva partners receive equity in Ryan

Sources: Accounting Today, Uniqus Consultech, Economic Times, Tracxn, The Finance Story, Ryan LLC / Dhruva Advisors press release, BusinessWire (2024–26).

Limitation: Data shared to the extent publicly available from reliable sources.

The Indian accounting services market was valued at approximately USD 28.38 billion in 2025 and is expected to reach USD 65.63 billion by 2033, according to IMARC Group. PE capital will follow that growth. (Source: https://www.imarcgroup.com/india-accounting-services-market)

If a firm is generating 25% or more revenue growth over the last three to five years, and generating EBIT of 20 to 25%, that is a very strong green tick mark for any private equity investor. Capital will not be a constraint for firms that have built those foundations. The question is whether the firms are in readiness.

It is also important to note that when a firm attracts private capital, here would be expectations on accelerated growth. PE investors typically work to a five-to-seven year horizon, and within that window they expect to see growth, margin expansion, and a credible exit, whether through a secondary sale, a strategic acquisition, or in due course a public listing. That creates real pressure: pressure to grow faster than may be organically comfortable, to professionalise governance on a compressed timeline, and to demonstrate the kind of consistent reporting and forecasting discipline that an institutional investor expects. Firms that take private capital without a clear-eyed view of this pressure, and without the governance maturity to manage it, will find the relationship harder than they anticipated. This is precisely why readiness or willingness to adapt, is perhaps the way to evaluate the decision.

IV. VALUATION TRENDS AND VALUE DRIVERS

Typical valuations observed in PE transactions involving accounting firms have ranged from four and five times to mid-teens EBITDA as a broad range. Firms that have shown consistent growth in revenue and profitability and have great, diversified client relationships will typically end up on the right side of that equation. Firms which have not grown as fast, which are looking to exit, which have founder challenges or partner disputes, will be at the lower end of that range.

The drivers of premium valuation are really questions of firm quality. How strong is the brand in the market? How solid is the advice the firm delivers — is it the firm of choice for a certain type of problem? What are people saying when they come in as clients, and what are they saying when they leave? Has there ever been a partner dispute in the firm? How partner-dependent is it — could the firm have delivered the same outcome differently if key individuals had left? These are the questions that will come up in any due diligence. The answers will impact the valuation offered.

Leadership depth and succession planning deserve particular emphasis. A firm where client relationships and technical authority are concentrated in one or two founding partners faces a structural valuation discount, because the investor is effectively acquiring individuals rather than an institution. Building a genuine second line of leadership — ensuring that clients have relationships with multiple partners and senior managers, and that institutional knowledge is documented rather than residing in individual heads — takes years to execute but is among the highest-return investments a firm can make in its own future valuation.

V. GOVERNANCE CONSIDERATIONS: INDEPENDENCE, TRANSPARENCY, AND FIDUCIARY DISCIPLINE

INDEPENDENCE

Whenever there is an investor on the cap table, independence rules and conflict of interest rules become paramount. If investor has invested in an accounting firm, then the firm cannot accept audit mandates of the investor group. Even for investor’s portfolio companies, anything, if at all, will need proper conflict waivers and independence checks and the right governance approvals, without which the firm cannot accept engagements.

To be precise, this is not a single rule with an exception, but two distinct scenarios.

Audit services: largely, not possible. If an investor has invested in the firm, the firm cannot accept audit mandates for that investor or its portfolio companies.

Non-audit services: largely, possible, but only with fiduciary discipline. If the investor instructs the firm to handle a portfolio company’s financial planning, tax matters, MIS reporting, or similar advisory tasks, this may be structured as a non-audit engagement that does not create the same independence conflict — but only after the firm has reviewed independence pro-actively.

GOVERNANCE QUALITY: CAPITAL DEPLOYMENT AND TRANSPARENCY

One would also tend to look at governance from a broader perspective as well. Is the firm able to take the right decisions on deploying capital, on allocating capital, on using capital wisely? Is there proper transparency in decision-making – in the monthly and quarterly MIS meetings? Are the plans well shared and articulated? Is decision- making done through clearly defined processes and SOPs, so that there is no ambiguity about how divisions are driving growth and how resources are being allocated?

These are not bureaucratic requirements. They are the substance of what makes a PE-backed professional services firm actually work. Investors investing in an accounting firm are not investing in a project; they are investing in the firm’s leadership and in the firm’s processes. The governance processes of the firm, demonstrated through consistent investor reporting, credible and process driven performance reviews and clear strategic execution are what help in maintaining and growing investor relationship over the full investment cycle.

VI. STRATEGIC CONSIDERATIONS: BALANCING GROWTH, FUNDING, AND PROFESSIONAL INTEGRITY

It is very, very important for firm leaders to recognise that whilst funding will come, funding is a fiduciary responsibility that the partners — the CEO and the partners collectively — are assuming. Every single dollar, every single rupee raised from an investor has to be treated with the highest level of integrity and as a fiduciary obligation.

What this means is that no partner or leader can decide to spend money in isolation. Whether it is events and conferences, branding initiatives, or technology investments, every rupee of investor capital must flow through approved budgets and well-defined processes. The fiduciary standard demands discipline, structure, and accountability in every spending decision.

At the same time, professional integrity must be preserved not only in how capital is spent, but in how growth is pursued. The pressure to demonstrate returns to investors within a defined time horizon is real. It can, if left unmanaged, create incentives to prioritise revenue growth over quality, or to accept clients and mandates that compromise the firm’s independence or professional standards. Firm leaders must be explicit — with themselves and with their investors — about what growth the firm will and will not pursue. A reputation for integrity, once damaged, is not easily or quickly rebuilt. In a profession where reputation is the primary asset, protecting it is of paramount importance. It cannot be called a constraint.

The firms that will succeed in balancing growth, funding, and professional integrity are those whose leadership has thought carefully about all three before signing a term sheet. They will have a strategic plan that is ambitious, a governance framework that is robust, and a culture that holds the fiduciary standard as an extension of their core values. Those are the firms that will build enduring global institutions — and that will be remembered, decades from now.

CONCLUSION

The globalisation of Indian accounting firms is no longer aspirational. Clients, talent, regulation and capital are all globalising. Professional firms must adapt and evolve with this trend.

This evolution requires capital — for technology, for talent, for brand, for global presence. It requires a revenue model built for scale: growing at double-digit rates, priced appropriately for the value delivered, and structured to improve margins as the firm grows. It requires an understanding of what private equity investors see in this sector — and the governance discipline to manage their capital with the fiduciary responsibility. And it requires the strategic clarity to pursue growth in a way that preserves, rather than compromises, the professional integrity that makes accounting firms worth investing in at all.

Indian accounting firms have the talent, the reputation and the ambition to become genuine global institutions. What remains is the resolve to invest accordingly; and all this with the wisdom to do so in a manner worthy of our noble profession.

The views expressed are personal.

Technology as Infrastructure

For Indian accounting firms aiming for global scale, technology is no longer a mere support function; it is the core infrastructure driving growth. To seamlessly deliver services across borders, firms must invest strategically in cloud computing, artificial intelligence, and integrated collaboration platforms. This technological foundation enables standardized workflows, centralized knowledge management, and robust professional governance. However, successful adoption requires navigating significant challenges, particularly change management, cybersecurity threats, and stringent data privacy regulations. Ultimately, technology should not replace professional judgment but rather amplify human expertise, ensuring firms maintain the unwavering quality and trust demanded in a complex global marketplace.

As leaders of professional services firms, we are witnessing a defining shift in how accounting firms must prepare for growth. India’s accounting firms today operate in an increasingly global, connected, and demanding marketplace, where ambition is no longer limited by geography, but enabled by capability.

In this environment, technology must be understood not as a support function, but as core infrastructure. It is the foundation that allows firms to scale consistently, serve clients across jurisdictions, navigate regulatory complexity, and maintain the standards of quality and trust on which the profession is built. The firms that will lead in the years ahead will be those that deliberately embed technology into how they operate, collaborate, and deliver value. The firms should empower partners and practitioners to choose their technology roadmap that aligns with the firm’s purpose, ethics, quality standards while staying compliant with the laws of the land.

This article breaks down why technology is the very infrastructure that keeps modern global service delivery running. We’ll look at how to build scalable models, where to invest your capital, how to manage the risks, and how to tackle the practical challenges that come with it.

I. TECHNOLOGY IN GLOBAL DELIVERY

Global delivery is the beating heart of a modern accountancy practice, and technology is the circulatory system that keeps it running smoothly. Where the focus used to be simply on labor arbitrage – offshoring work and providing round-the-clock service coverage – today’s real value lies in a unified experience built on cloud, analytics and artificial intelligence.

TECHNOLOGY IN GLOBAL DELIVERY

The cloud completely dissolves physical boundaries. Clients expect information on demand, not just when their partner finishes travelling between meetings. At the same time, businesses are squeezing margins to the limit, forcing service providers to focus their energy on genuine value creation rather than back-office housekeeping. The friction of moving data across physical offices disappears when teams log onto a common platform.

The global delivery model powered by technology is often called a process-driven model. Standardized workflows are defined once and carried out synchronously across geographies.

These workflows can move from the UK to India to Australia without interruption, with quality checkpoints embedded into the daily routine so that consistency is built into the process. Technology also makes each stage of work transparent and traceable, replacing the older approach in which senior partners often reviewed only the final output.

EXAMPLE – BORDERLESS COLLABORATION

Client onboarding can be made much simpler through digital workflows. Instead of exchanging scanned forms over email, firms can use secure cloud-based portals where clients submit their information directly. A client entering data in New Delhi can have it instantly available to teams in Mumbai, while automated checks can identify potential issues early and partners in Dubai can review exceptions in real time. Processes that once depended on people working in the same office can now connect teams across cities and countries, making collaboration faster, smoother, and more efficient.

Today, firms can operate seamlessly across time zones, turning global teams into a round-the-clock delivery model. As one team finishes its day, another can pick up the work, helping projects move forward continuously. By using tools such as Microsoft SharePoint for document management, OneDrive for file sharing, and Teams for collaboration, firms can reduce version-control issues and improve visibility across locations. A deliverable can be prepared in one country, reviewed in another, and checked for compliance elsewhere—all while working from the same set of documents and maintaining clear audit trails. The real opportunity is not simply working across geographies but creating an infrastructure that enables teams to collaborate as if they were in the same office.

A. CLOUD

Cloud infrastructure is the baseline of global delivery. Data and applications live in secure remote data centers maintained by specialists, accessible from anywhere with a safe login. This eliminates upfront server costs, removes local installation headaches, and unlocks serious computing power right when you need it most – like during quarter-end reporting or heavy year-end reviews. Typically, mid-sized professional services firms invest between 5–10% of their revenue into overall technology, with the lion’s share going into storage, compute power, and integration layers. Larger firms push that figure toward 10–15% or more to support thousands of simultaneous users1.


1 Gartner Nasscom

From a technical standpoint, the big wins are centralized identity management, common APIs and built-in redundancy. These enable secure access to sensitive client data, seamless integration across tax, audit, and accounting systems, and uninterrupted service delivery. From a business perspective, the pay-as-you-go model ties your cost directly to consumption, aligning your expenses with the client engagements that bring in revenue.

The Borderless Firm

EXAMPLE – SCALABILITY POWERED THROUGH CLOUD

Business demands can change quickly, especially during peak periods such as year-end financial closes when workloads increase significantly. With cloud platforms like Microsoft Azure, firms can scale their computing capacity up or down as needed, often within hours rather than weeks. Additional resources can be deployed securely and in line with regulatory and compliance requirements, helping teams manage higher workloads without investing in permanent infrastructure. Once demand returns to normal, those resources can be scaled back, ensuring organizations pay only for what they use. For finance and BPO firms, this flexibility helps ensure that technology capacity supports business needs, even during the busiest periods.

B. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND ANALYTICS

AI is no longer a futuristic concept. It sits right alongside a practitioner’s desk, embedded directly into core platforms. Machine learning models classify account balances, flag deviations from normal patterns, draft narrative commentary, and turn complex regulatory updates into quick reminders. When you combine analytics with visualization tools, engagement managers can spot trends across hundreds of clients at once, scanning a clear heatmap instead of drilling into endless spreadsheets.

EXAMPLE – GENERATIVE AI FOR INTERNAL AUDIT FUNCTION

Generative AI can help firms review internal control documentation more efficiently by identifying potential gaps, inconsistencies, and areas that may not align with established compliance frameworks. While human expertise remains essential for validation and decision-making, AI can significantly reduce the time spent on manual reviews. This allows professionals to focus on higher-value advisory work, improve productivity, and support a growing client base without a proportional increase in headcount.

Professionals reviewing tax computations, audit observations, or compliance outputs provide feedback on AI-generated results, allowing the models to learn from corrections and improve over time. However, if the underlying training data or human inputs contain inconsistencies or biases, the system can reinforce those patterns. This makes robust model governance, periodic validation, documented audit trails, and oversight by experienced professionals essential to ensure accuracy, fairness, and regulatory compliance.

Firms must budget beyond AI platforms, account for data management, cybersecurity, model monitoring, and skilled talent. Investments often include analytics tools, RPA, predictive engines, and ongoing model refinement, making AI a continuous capability rather than a one-time expense.

C. COLLABORATION PLATFORMS

Collaboration is the glue that keeps distributed teams together. Platforms that bring together messaging, video, document editing and project tracking eliminate the constant context-switching tax that happens when practitioners are forced to juggle half a dozen disconnected tools.

A half-hearted adoption leaves email as the only common denominator and completely defeats investment.

Enterprise-grade chat and document management systems enforce retention policies, role-based access, and detailed audit logs. Because they integrate directly with the cloud backend, clicking a link opens the correct version of a spreadsheet instantly without forcing you to download it to your desktop. The business benefit is highly measurable: teams report 40–60% less time wasted chasing status updates, leaving more room to focus on client insights.

EXAMPLE – COLLABORATION TOOLS

Microsoft Teams enables multiple teams to communicate seamlessly through chats, virtual meetings, and shared workspaces, while SharePoint serves as a centralized repository for engagement files, standard templates, and knowledge resources with robust version control. Project management tools such as Asana help track assignments, statutory deadlines, and team responsibilities. Meanwhile, DocuSign streamlines client interactions by enabling secure digital execution of engagement letters, approvals, and other critical documents. Together, these tools foster better collaboration, governance, and operational efficiency across the firm.

EXAMPLE – SMART BOARD FOR GLOBAL TASK MANAGEMENT

Digital collaboration platforms can help firms manage work more efficiently across teams and locations. Tasks can be assigned, tracked, and reviewed through a shared workspace, giving everyone real-time visibility into progress and responsibilities. AI-powered tools can further support teams by summarizing key updates, highlighting outstanding items, and facilitating smoother handoffs between team members. By reducing the need for frequent status meetings and manual follow-ups, firms can free up more time for focused, value-added work while improving overall productivity.

II. STRATEGIC ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY

Technology is a strategic asset, not a commodity. Too often firms treat IT spend as a line-item cost center to be minimized. They adopt a bare minimum of tools, piece them together in an ad hoc way, and then wonder why workflows fall apart across engagement teams.

A more enlightened view positions technology alongside people and capital as one of the three core pillars of the business. When technology is consciously backed by investment – and aligned with professional judgment, it becomes a powerful engine for scalability, consistency, and continuous improvement.

A. SCALABILITY AND STANDARDIZATION

Firms that scale responsibly are the ones that standardize their work. The invisible scaffolding of reliable templates, defined roles and prebuilt workflows allows partners to redeploy talent from one client to another without endless retraining. Standardization makes the intangible tangible: Standardization helps firms maintain consistent quality and deal with exceptions in a structured and efficient manner.

Technically, this means using common APIs across systems, standardized file naming conventions, and centralized repositories indexed by task rather than office location. The core business logic is simple: when an associate in Pune produces work measured in the same units as one in New York, there’s zero translation cost for the partner overseeing both.

SCALABILITY AND STANDARDIZATION

EXAMPLE – STANDARDIZING ACROSS OFFICES

As professional services firms grow, they often develop different ways of working across teams and locations. Standardizing processes and moving from scattered spreadsheets to a unified system with built-in controls, workflows, and templates can help create greater consistency in service delivery. With a common approach, teams can complete work more efficiently, reduce variations in output quality across offices. Quality reviews can then focus less on identifying routine errors and more on applying professional judgement.

B. KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

Knowledge is the core currency of any professional services firm. Technology unlocks it from the closed circuits of individual minds and puts it into a shared communal vault. By centralizing precedents, templates, rationales, regulatory interpretations, and benchmarks in easily searchable hubs, firms can help everyone reach top-level performance.

The technical building blocks here include knowledge graphs, tagging schemas, version-controlled wikis, and QMS systems integrated with engagement workflows. Business rules drive mandatory usage: a partner literally cannot proceed until the appropriate checklist is ticked or a required commentary is entered. Meanwhile, confidentiality is woven into the fabric of the platform, meaning any unexpected exposure of client data immediately triggers alerts and audit actions.

EXAMPLE – CENTRALIZED KYC REPOSITORY

Knowledge retention and easy access to information are increasingly important challenges for growing organizations. As teams expand and expertise becomes distributed across locations, firms need effective ways to capture, organize, and share institutional knowledge. Interactive learning and development platforms can help address this by digitizing training materials, best practices, and subject-matter expertise, making them easily accessible whenever employees need them.

C. PROFESSIONAL GOVERNANCE

Professional firms are strictly bound by codes of conduct, ethical obligations and rigid quality standards. Without technology that encodes those expectations into the daily workflow, governance simply lives in unread manuals and on whiteboards – inert and quickly forgotten.

A modern professional governance platform ties compliance directly to daily actions. The digital signature itself records who signed to what and when.

For instance, to sign off on a piece of work, a partner must confirm that the conflict check passed, peer review was completed, and no open issues remain. Behind the scenes, the system simply ensures that each required step is completed and verified before work can move to the next stage. This turns broad ethical and quality requirements into clear day-to-day actions that everyone follows consistently. Over time, the information collected helps identify where additional training is needed, where delays occurring, and where existing processes need to be updated.

D. SUSTAINING AND GROWING THE BUSINESS

Clients now demand the same accuracy and speed from professional services firms, that they would expect in their day-to-day life. With technology in everyday use, firms that fail to provide digital touchpoints will lose business to more tech-forward firms as these firms will be able to provide better outcomes at cheaper price. Embracing technology has become inevitable for the firms to remain in business.

Firms who have embraced technology will also be able to launch new-age services, increase global reach and build efficient processes thereby leading to business growth.

III. TECHNOLOGY STRATEGY IN ACTION

Technology delivers the greatest value when it is aligned with an organization’s operational needs and long-term business goals. However, many firms struggle with where to begin their transformation journey and how to prioritize investments. As organizations grow and expand across geographies, success often depends on a combination of standardized processes, integrated systems, and strong governance. While challenges are a natural part of any transformation effort, a phased and practical approach can help firms manage change effectively, build momentum, and achieve sustainable results.

A. FIRM SIZE AND TECHNOLOGY MATURITY

Technology maturity does not necessarily correlate with firm size. While larger firms often have greater resources to invest in technology, smaller firms can also achieve high levels of digital maturity through focused investments and cloud-native platforms. A firm’s position on the maturity curve is shaped by factors such as leadership priorities, legacy systems, client expectations, operational complexity, and investment strategy rather than headcount alone.

A straightforward maturity framework helps a firm decide exactly where to invest next:

  • Level 1 (Emergent): Technology barely touches the core process.
  • Level 2 (Established): common tools are adopted and basic integration begins.
  • Level 3 (Optimized): the tech stack is unified, intelligent and continuously improved.

Smaller firms often begin at Level 1 and progressively adopt integrated platforms as they grow, while many mid-sized and larger firms aim for Level 2 or Level 3. However, these are broad tendencies rather than fixed rules, and firms of any size may operate at any maturity level depending on their strategic priorities and technology investments.

EXAMPLE – A FIRM’S JOURNEY THROUGH MATURITY LEVELS

Technology transformation journey is a series of incremental improvements rather than a single transformation project. As firms grow, manual processes, spreadsheets, and disconnected systems often become difficult to manage, prompting the move from Level 1 (Emergent) to Level 2 (Established). This transition usually involves adopting integrated practice management, collaboration, or workflow tools. Common challenges include process standardization, data migration, training, and resistance to change.

The progression from Level 2 (Established) to Level 3 (Optimized) focuses on connecting systems, improving data quality, automating routine activities, and leveraging analytics and AI to support decision-making. At this stage, firms often face challenges related to integration, governance, cybersecurity, and ensuring that technology investments generate measurable business value.

Firms may pursue this journey through either a phased implementation or a full-scale transformation. A phased approach spreads costs over time, reduces disruption, and lowers implementation risk, although benefits may take longer to materialize. A full-scale transformation can deliver faster and more comprehensive benefits but requires greater upfront investment, stronger change management, and carries higher execution risk.

The appropriate path depends on the firm’s strategic objectives, operational complexity, available resources, and readiness for change.

B. TECHNOLOGY AS A STRATEGIC INVESTMENT

Investing in technology means accepting upfront costs in exchange for serious operational agility down the line. Firms that underinvest risk being left behind by competitors who harness automation, analytics and connectivity to deliver deeper insights at a much lower marginal cost. Too many practices view their IT spend through a narrow, defensive lens. A better approach sees extra spend as purchasing optionality – giving you – more flexible infrastructure, more powerful tools, and richer data at your fingertips.

Typical benchmarks for professional services put IT spend around 4–7% of revenue for nascent firms, 5–10% for those on a clear growth trajectory, and 10–15% or more for advanced global players.

These ranges are not strict rules but benchmarks to climb. Firms calibrate them to their own strategy, risk appetite, and long-term ambition.

EXAMPLE – ROI-DRIVEN TECHNOLOGY SCALING

Allocating a small percentage of revenue to a cloud-based CRM platform can help improve client engagement, strengthen relationship management, and create opportunities for repeat business. As the firm matures, investments may expand to include integrated finance, reporting, and analytics platforms that provide deeper operational and client insights. To maximize value, technology investments should be evaluated regularly against business outcomes, ensuring they are viewed as strategic enablers of growth rather than simply operating expenses.

A balanced investment approach carefully weighs cost vs. actual value and opportunity cost. If the firm doesn’t invest today, competitors will; if it overinvests in the wrong tech, it will end up locked into rigid, unfit solutions. Smart investors balance a solid baseline of core capabilities with a small portfolio of experimental bets, listening closely to feedback from practitioners and partners alike.

C. GLOBAL SCALING & THE DELIVERY MODEL

Scaling a firm beyond a single geography means divorcing knowledge from physical location. A report might be drafted in Chennai, reviewed in Cape Town, and filed in London. Technology dissolves that distance, but only if it’s paired with absolute process discipline.

Standardized end-to-end workflows break complex assignments into segments that can be assigned. Automated reminders and real-time deadlines keep progress on track, while quality gates built directly into the workflow orchestration ensure client data stays completely current.

The journey from partner-centric to institution-centric delivery requires codifying historical knowledge. The institution now embeds smart cues right into the workflow itself, so the next person can effortlessly pick up where the last person left off.

Cloud encryption and identity management ensure that only the parties with a strict ‘need to know’ can ever see the relevant portions of a file.

EXAMPLE – FOLLOW-THE-SUN DELIVERY

Firms with multi-geography teams can benefit significantly from standardized processes and shared digital platforms. By establishing common workflows and review standards, work can move seamlessly between teams in different time zones, creating a continuous delivery model. A task initiated by one team can be reviewed, refined, and finalized by others as the workday progresses around the world. This enables firms to accelerate turnaround times, improve collaboration across locations, and respond more quickly to client needs while maintaining consistency and quality.

D. INTEGRATION & GOVERNANCE

Going beyond individual tools, integration is where the real value starts to compound. Without it, email attachments and manual reconciliations remain the norm. An integrated platform shares a single source of truth: the numbers in a client’s balance sheet appear identically across the risk dashboard, the delivery timeline, the team’s mobile app, and the partner’s briefing pack.

Integration requires a reliable backbone bus or API contract with a common language, shared endpoints, and consistent schemas. Role-based access and strong identity management enforce the principle of least privilege. Retention policies are automatically applied so that records expire or transfer to archives strictly according to local law and firm policy. Every single click and keystroke is securely recorded in audit logs.

The system prevents a partner from overlooking the firm’s obligations, and the partner ensures the system doesn’t escape unchecked scrutiny.

EXAMPLE – INTEGRATION OF SYSTEMS FOR CLIENT MANAGEMENT

A firm can capture all leads in a centralized CRM platform and integrate it with contract management, finance, and other operational systems. This enables client information to flow seamlessly across the organization, reducing manual effort, improving data accuracy, and providing a unified view of client relationships across service lines.

Approval workflows live directly within the application. A draft simply cannot be moved to “signed” until the reviewer explicitly acknowledges all open issues and the contract manager has digitally countersigned. These fine details are what build a true governance culture.

EXAMPLE – ENTERPRISE IDENTITY AND TWO-FACTOR AUTHENTICATION

Implementing technologies such as multi-factor authentication, role-based access controls, and biometric verification can help validate user access before information is shared or transferred. At the same time, automated audit trails can record key access and activity events, providing greater transparency, strengthening governance, and supporting compliance requirements.

E. IMPLEMENTATION CHALLENGES & APPROACH

The journey to becoming a technology-enabled firm is full of real-world obstacles. The primary challenge is managing the change and people’s expectations. Most technology implementations fail because of change mismanagement. Integrating legacy systems, navigating interoffice politics, managing vendor divergence and fighting resistance to change can all slow progress down.

Another challenge that firms face is to get comfort on an ROI which is way in the future. As mentioned earlier, investment in technology will not just help in growing the business but also in sustaining the existing business. If this is factored in the decision making, ROI becomes much clearer and obvious. Implementation demands genuine patience; a credible program typically runs for 24–36 months and treats technology as a living art rather than a one-time sunk cost.

One of the other subtle challenges is the balance between global vs. local alignment: central policies need local context to actually resonate, otherwise they remain paper tigers. For example, technology implemented centrally for KYC compliances without taking into consideration local law requirements may not have acceptance in some regional offices.

One of the most significant decisions firms face is whether to pursue a phased implementation or a full-scale transformation. As discussed in Section III-A, the right approach often depends on the firm’s technology maturity. Firms at Level 1 (Emergent) typically benefit from a phased approach, introducing foundational systems and standardizing processes before moving to deeper integration and automation. Firms at Level 2 (Established) may be better positioned for broader transformation initiatives involving analytics, AI, and enterprise-wide integration.

While a phased approach reduces disruption and implementation risk, a full-scale transformation can deliver benefits faster but requires greater investment, stronger change management, and higher execution discipline. The appropriate path depends on the firm’s readiness, strategic priorities, and capacity to manage change.

IV. RISK AND GOVERNANCE

Firms today face a faster, more interconnected risk landscape that traditional governance models – periodic reviews, spreadsheets, siloed teams and annual audits – can no longer manage. Regulators aren’t just looking for a compliance manual gathering dust on a shelf – they want real time proof that your controls work in the real world.

The key is having an integrated Governance, Risk and Compliance (GRC) platform. Only integrated, technology-enabled GRC platforms can provide real-time visibility across risks, controls, incidents, vendors, and compliance obligations.

A. CYBERSECURITY AS A STRATEGIC PRIORITY

Cybersecurity has shifted to become one of the most critical strategic priorities for governments, businesses, and individuals alike due to the rapid evolution of threats, technologies, and global dynamics. Cyber attacks are becoming faster, more complex, and significantly harder to detect. AI has further added to the risk. AI is a double-edged sword: it powers smart, automated defences, but it also gives rise to highly sophisticated, automated attack vectors Build a Cyber-Aware and Security –First Culture, with a theme – “Do your part be Cybersmart”.

CYBERSECURITY AS A STRATEGIC PRIORITY

This calls organizations to Prioritize cybersecurity investments based on risk criticality and business impact. Strengthening Supply Chain and Third-Party Cyber Security are commonly referred to as Vendor Risk Management. Cyber security requires a proactive and resilience –focused approach. (Refer table for some proactive measures).

CYBERSECURITY CHECKLIST FOR CA FIRMS

√ Restrict access to client files based on roles and responsibilities.

√  Use strong passwords, multi-factor authentication, and secure login practices.

√  Ensure vendors, software providers, and outsourcing partners follow adequate security standards.

√  Clearly define data protection responsibilities in vendor and client agreements.

√  Periodically review systems for vulnerabilities and promptly fix identified issues.

√  Establish clear policies on the use of AI tools and prevent sharing confidential client information on unapproved platforms.

√  Maintain regular backups and periodically test whether critical data can be restored successfully.

√  Have a business continuity and disaster recovery plan for major disruptions.

√  Conduct regular employee awareness sessions on phishing, fraud, and data protection.

√  Encourage every team member to treat client information as confidential and report suspicious activities immediately.

B. DATA PRIVACY AND LOCALIZATION

Data privacy and localization are no longer mere footnotes: many jurisdictions strictly require client data to remain on local soil and be processed under local laws. Robust GRC means tying data sovereignty rules directly back into your access permissions and embedding them into the platform so that a file stays in the right country, even when it moves across a global screen. Local jurisdictions also need the contracts to be localized ensuring the local compliance as well as industry compliance (eg: Standard global engagement contract by client in US or UK may need localization like GST, AML obligations, professional standards issued by ICAI, for appointing Indian CA firm). Some jurisdictions may not accept DSC and will mandate wet signatures.

India’s Digital Personal Data Protection (DPDP) Act, 2023 places clear obligations on organizations to collect, use, store, and protect personal data responsibly. It requires appropriate consent mechanisms, security safeguards, and breach reporting procedures, while holding organizations accountable for protecting personal information throughout its lifecycle. For CA firms, compliance with DPDP has become a critical component of technology governance and client trust.

EXAMPLE – PRIVACY BREACH RESPONSE IN ACTION

Even with strong controls in place, firms may occasionally face situations where sensitive information is shared unintentionally. In such instances, a structured incident response process can help contain the issue, assess potential impact, notify affected stakeholders where necessary, and implement corrective actions. These experiences often highlight opportunities to strengthen privacy controls through technologies such as data loss prevention tools, access monitoring, and automated alerts that can detect unusual data-sharing patterns and help prevent future incidents.

PRIVACY BREACH RESPONSE IN ACTION

Governance is the art of guiding emerging capabilities toward professional benefit and away from emergent harm.

Other modern risks demand the exact same discipline: AI bias (unfair or inaccurate outcomes), model poisoning (manipulation of AI training data), privacy leaks (exposure of confidential information), rogue insider access (misuse by authorized users), algorithmic opacity (difficulty in understanding how an AI system reached a conclusion), and the dangerous assumption by a partner that technology somehow absolves them of professional responsibility instead of actively amplifying it.

Firms should ensure that client engagement letters, technology vendor agreements, and data processing contracts clearly define responsibilities, liability limits, and data protection obligations. Appropriate professional indemnity and cyber insurance can provide an additional layer of protection against residual risks.

CONCLUSION

Technology is no longer a support function for accounting firms – it is the infrastructure that enables scale, consistency, collaboration, governance, and client trust. Firms that adopt cloud platforms, AI-assisted workflows, integrated collaboration tools, and strong governance frameworks will be better positioned to serve global clients and deliver higher-value services.

However, technology adoption must be purposeful. Underinvestment can leave firms inefficient and uncompetitive, while investing in disconnected tools can create unnecessary complexity. The goal is to build a coherent digital foundation aligned with the firm’s strategy, service model, and professional obligations.

For Indian accounting firms operating in a global environment, technology is now central to sustainable growth. It helps standardize processes across offices, preserve institutional knowledge, strengthen cybersecurity and data privacy, and manage risk more effectively.

EXAMPLE – TECHNOLOGY ENABLING GLOBAL CLIENT DELIVERY

Consider a client with operations across India, the UK, and the Middle East. Using a common cloud platform, standardized workflows, collaboration tools, and centralized knowledge repositories, teams across locations can work on the same engagement while maintaining consistent quality standards and complete visibility. Client queries can be routed to the appropriate specialists, documents can be accessed securely, and progress can be tracked in real time. The result is faster turnaround, greater transparency, and a seamless client experience regardless of where the work is performed.

The firms that will succeed will not be those that adopt the most software, but those that combine technology with sound professional judgement, strong governance, and a clear client-centric strategy. Technology should amplify human expertise – not replace the responsibility and trust at the heart of the profession.

Talent, Leadership, and Culture Building Firms That Travel Well

Indian professional firms have a unique opportunity to expand globally, driven by client needs and the desire to elevate professional standards rather than domestic limitations. Successful globalization requires moving beyond commoditized compliance to offer high-value, partner-led judgment. Rather than merely exporting Indian staff, firms must build diverse, local teams to establish true international credibility. Furthermore, firms must transition from personality-driven models to systemic leadership architectures. Ultimately, globalization acts as a rigorous diagnostic test, exposing structural weaknesses and demanding an internalized culture of uncompromising quality and excellence across all borders.

I have been asked many times—by younger professionals, by firm founders, by partners considering their next move—what it actually takes to build a practice that works across borders. My honest answer is always the same: less than you think on the infrastructure side, and far more than you expect on the human side.

People focus on the relatively irrelevant things. They talk about office locations, billing structures, brand guidelines, referral arrangements. All of that matters, eventually. But none of it is the hard part. The hard part is whether your institution’s thinking—not just its name, but its actual standards, instincts, and culture—can survive being transplanted into a different location, a different country, a different language, a different commercial environment, and a different set of professional norms.

Most of the time, it may not. And the reason it may not is rarely what the firm’s leaders think it is.

WHY GO GLOBAL AT ALL?

Let me start with a question that doesn’t get asked enough: why should an Indian professional firm globalise in the first place?

I ask because the answer is not as obvious as it sounds, and because firms that get the answer wrong tend to globalise badly. If the motivation is prestige—if it is about having an address in Dubai or Singapore so that the firm can describe itself as international—then the result is typically a small, under-resourced outpost that serves as a vanity project and a drain on the home practice. I have seen this happen. It is more common than it should be.

As I speak to a number of professionals including Chartered Accountants, lawyers and other advisors, the point I invariably hear is that opportunities in India are limitless. Why go elsewhere? This is very understandable. India is a high performing growth story. Others are coming to India; why should we go elsewhere? The real reasons to go global are different. They certainly are not lack of opportunity in India.

The Indian Chartered Accountant is, by any honest assessment, among the most capable professionals that any accounting and advisory practice can employ. The qualification is genuinely hard. The training is genuinely broad. When an Indian CA sits across from a client or a counterpart anywhere in the world and demonstrates what they know—across financial reporting, taxation, corporate law, regulatory frameworks—there is a recognition that this person has been through something serious. That credibility is real, and it is portable. What is not portable, historically, is the institutional framework around that individual. We produce excellent professionals. We have been slower to produce excellent firms.

That gap is the opportunity. And the pressure to close it is now coming from the market itself.

Indian companies are not domestic businesses that occasionally venture abroad. They are genuinely global—acquiring overseas assets, managing cross-border supply chains, listing on international exchanges, navigating BEPS and Pillar Two and transfer pricing regimes across multiple jurisdictions simultaneously. These clients need advisors who can follow them. Not advisory networks that pass files between loosely affiliated member firms, but integrated practices with genuine multi-jurisdictional competence and a single point of accountability.

Beyond the client imperative, there is a professional one. A firm that operates only in one market tends, over time, to mistake local convention for universal best practice. It stops questioning its own assumptions because those assumptions are never tested from the outside. Global exposure—the discipline of competing in markets where your incumbency and relationships give you no advantage—forces a rigour that purely domestic practices rarely achieve. I genuinely believe that our Indian practice became better because of what we learned building our international ones. The causality runs both ways.

Firm that Travel Well The Human Side of Going Global

THE UAE: WHAT WE LEARNED BY GOING EARLY

In April 2017, we opened our office in the UAE. At the time, this was considered, by most people we spoke to, premature at best and inadvisable at worst; particularly by a firm which was doing very well in India.

VAT was being discussed, yes. But there was genuine uncertainty about whether it would actually happen. The region had positioned itself as a tax haven. VAT was thought to be counterproductive. Implementation on the announced timeline seemed, to many observers, ambitious. The advice we received, from people who knew the market well, was to wait and see.

We decided not to wait.

There was a prospective client—a well-established business in the Emirates—who told me, with some amusement, that he would call us on 1 January if the VAT actually came in. It was a polite way of saying he thought we were getting ahead of ourselves.

On 1 January 2018, VAT was introduced. He called, as promised. And because we had been on the ground for the better part of a year, we were ready in a way that firms arriving in January simply could not be. We had already built relationships, understood the local regulatory machinery, hired and trained people. When corporate tax followed some years later, the compounding effect of that early presence was substantial.

Today our UAE practice has around 150 professionals and is, by most assessments, one of the largest dedicated tax advisory practices in the country. From there, we expanded into Saudi Arabia as that market’s tax and regulatory environment developed its own complexity, and also into Singapore, where the nature of the work is somewhat different—more international structuring, more cross-border transactions, a different category of client conversation.

Each of these moves followed the same logic. Not going where the opportunity already exists, but going where the client need is forming, before it has fully formed. This requires a particular kind of institutional confidence—the belief that you can deliver something genuinely valuable in a new market, even before that market has validated you.

Getting that confidence right is the difference between conviction and recklessness. It has to rest on honest self-assessment. If you know what you can actually deliver, and why sophisticated clients will value it, then timing an entry into a developing market is a calculated bet. If you don’t know—if you’re entering because the opportunity looks large and you want a piece of it—then you are gambling with the firm’s reputation in a market that will find you out quickly.

BEING CLEAR ABOUT WHAT YOU ARE OFFERING

Every new market has the same initial dynamic: you arrive as an unknown. The clients who will eventually become your best relationships don’t know you. The referral sources are working with other firms. The market’s trust is elsewhere.

The question is what you have to offer that is distinctive enough for a client to take the initial risk of engaging you.

In tax advisory specifically—which is Dhruva’s core practice—the answer is not difficult to articulate, but it is not always honestly examined. Much of what passes for tax advice in most markets is actually tax compliance: competent, necessary, but ultimately commoditised. Any established firm can file a return, prepare a transfer pricing report, or manage standard corporate tax obligations. Clients know this, and they price it accordingly.

What is genuinely scarce—and what sophisticated clients will pay significant fees for—is judgment. The ability to read a regulatory framework and identify the position that is both legally sound and commercially intelligent. The ability to tell a client something they don’t want to hear before it becomes expensive. The experience of having seen how similar questions have been resolved across multiple jurisdictions, and applying that comparative perspective to a specific problem. That is not a commodity. It cannot be manufactured at scale. It requires partner-level involvement in every substantive engagement. We distinguished ourselves as a partner-led firm which stood apart from the competition and gave us a competitive advantage.

This is the positioning we chose, and I think it was right. But I want to be honest about something: it is also a constraint. A partner-led, judgment-intensive practice does not scale in the same way that a process-oriented compliance business does. Growth requires finding, developing, and retaining partners who are genuinely capable of that level of advisory work—not just technically competent administrators. That talent pool is smaller than it looks from the outside.

Too many Indian firms go international to look large. They end up with offices that produce neither the revenue nor the reputation that justified the investment. The firms that build something durable are those that go global to become better—and that have a clear, honest answer to the question of what they are distinctively good at. To compete effectively it is.

THE TALENT QUESTION: HARDER THAN IT LOOKS

When I think about what has actually determined the quality of our international practices, the honest answer is: the people we hired in the first eighteen months of each office.

Not the strategy. Not the brand. Not even the client relationships we brought with us. The people.

This is counterintuitive to firm leaders who are used to thinking about talent as an operational matter—important, obviously, but downstream of the strategic decisions about markets and positioning. In a global expansion, it’s the opposite. The early hires determine almost everything: the quality of the work, the relationships that develop with clients, the culture that the subsequent hires join, and ultimately whether the office becomes a real practice or an expensive holding position.

We made some decisions early that were, in retrospect, correct, though they weren’t obvious at the time. One of them was to resist the temptation to staff our international offices primarily with Indian professionals who were available. The available-people instinct is understandable—they know the firm, they’ve been trained in the firm’s methods, they’re low-risk in a certain sense. But if you staff a Dubai office with ten Indians and present yourself as an international firm, sophisticated local clients will see through it immediately. You’re not an international firm. You’re an Indian firm with a UAE phone number.

Real international credibility requires teams that genuinely reflect the market. In our UAE practice, we have professionals from India, from the Arab world, from South and Southeast Asia, and from other markets. This is not a diversity initiative. It is a practical necessity. When we are advising an Emirati family business on the implications of corporate tax for their holding structure, having team members who understand the cultural context of that conversation—not just the technical framework—is not a nice-to-have. It changes the quality of the advice.

On retention: the standard assumption is that compensation is the answer. Pay people well and they stay. In my experience, this is true up to a point—probably the point at which the person is no longer worried about the basics—and largely false beyond it. What actually retains talented professionals in a growing practice is participation. Meaningful work. Some sense that their own trajectory is connected to the firm’s trajectory, and that their input matters. Professionals who join a new office and are treated as instruments of delivery rather than co-builders of something tend to leave when they have developed enough to have options. And the ones who leave are, by definition, the best ones.

Building the talent pipeline for international markets also requires patience that many firm leaders struggle with. The best local talent will not join you in the first few months. They observe. They ask around about how the firm treats its people. They wait to see whether the promises in the recruitment conversation correspond to the reality. The reputation you build as an employer in the first year of a new office is as important as the reputation you build as an advisor—often more so, because the advisor reputation is built on a handful of client engagements, while the employer reputation propagates through the professional community at large.

LEADERSHIP AS ARCHITECTURE, NOT PERSONALITY

The professional services model in India has historically been personality-driven. There is a senior partner who has relationships, who brings in clients, who is the face of the practice. This works remarkably well at a certain scale. I have seen domestic practices built on the strength of one or two extraordinary individuals that generate revenues and client loyalty that most firms would envy.

But it does not travel. And this is one of the places where Indian firms going global most consistently underestimate the challenge.

The founding partner of an Indian firm entering a new market is unknown in that market. The relationships cannot be transferred because they are personal. The client’s trust in the senior partner’s judgment is a function of years of interaction and delivered value—you cannot replicate that by arriving in a new city with a well-designed pitch deck.

What you can do—what you must do—is build a leadership architecture that is systemic rather than personal. This means developing partners who have genuine authority within the practice and genuine accountability for outcomes. It means ensuring that client relationships are owned by the practice and not by any single individual, so that a partner’s departure does not take the relationship with it. It means creating quality frameworks that are embedded in how the work is done, not dependent on the senior partner reviewing everything personally.

I want to be direct about this because it has been one of the more difficult cultural shifts within Dhruva as we have grown. We were, in our early years, a partner-intensive practice in the sense that the senior partners were involved in almost everything. That model produced excellent work. It was also not scalable. Building the next generation of leadership—identifying individuals who have both the technical capability and the firm-building instinct, developing them, giving them real authority before they have been fully tested—requires accepting a degree of uncertainty that is uncomfortable.

The partners who succeed in global practices are a specific type. Technically strong, obviously. But also genuinely interested in building—in developing junior professionals, in creating institutional capability rather than personal leverage. And culturally resilient—able to maintain the firm’s standards and instincts in their market without constant reinforcement from the centre. If culture in your firm depends on the physical proximity of the founders, then you do not yet have a culture. You have supervision.
Succession in global practices is harder than in domestic ones, and it needs to be planned earlier. Domestic practices can sometimes sustain themselves through generational transitions on the basis of inherited client relationships—a long-standing client stays with the firm when the senior partner retires because the relationship has become institutional over time. In international offices, where relationships are newer and less deeply embedded, the systems and quality frameworks must carry more of the weight. That means they need to be built properly long before they are needed.

WHAT CULTURE ACTUALLY MEANS

Culture gets talked about constantly in professional services firms, and it is almost always described in terms of values statements or firm histories. Neither of those is culture. Culture is what happens when no one senior is in the room. What happens when no one is watching over your shoulder.

I mean that very specifically. When a junior associate is drafting an advice note at eleven at night and realises there is a complication that would require a difficult conversation with the client—does she raise it or find a way to work around it? When a partner is being pressured by a commercially important client to take a technical position that the partner privately believes is wrong—does he push back or find a way to frame the answer that gives the client what they want? When an office is having a bad quarter and a piece of work comes in that is at the margins of the firm’s standards—does the team take it or decline it?

The aggregate of those decisions, made hundreds of times a year across all the firm’s offices, is the firm’s actual culture. And the only way to build a culture that is consistent across geographies is to have those decisions be instinctive—not the result of checking whether someone senior is watching, but a reflection of genuinely internalised values.

This is why the single P&L across our practices has been important in ways that go beyond accounting. When every office is part of the same financial structure, the incentive for one office to cut corners—to take on work that the rest of the firm would decline, because the work is in that office’s market and its revenue impact is invisible to the centre—is significantly reduced. Shared economics create shared accountability. Fragmented economics, almost inevitably, create fragmented cultures.

The other mechanism is reputation indivisibility. I make this point to our partners regularly: if something goes wrong in our Singapore office, the firm’s reputation in Mumbai is affected. Not because clients will necessarily hear about it, but because we will know. And because the professionals in Mumbai will behave differently—more carefully, more rigorously—if they understand that the firm’s name is a single, undivided asset. Firms that treat international offices as separate ventures, to be assessed independently, produce exactly the quality inconsistency that clients notice and talk about.

ADAPTATION IS NOT THE SAME AS COMPROMISE

One of the practical questions that comes up in every market is how much to adapt. Local clients have preferences. Local professional norms differ. The pace of relationship-building, the formality of client communication, the acceptable scope of social interaction before business conversation begins—these vary meaningfully across cultures, and firms that ignore those differences come across as tone-deaf.

So adaptation is necessary. The question is what you are adapting and what you are not.

The things you adapt are operational: how you communicate, how you price engagements, how you structure the client relationship, how much flexibility you allow in payment terms, how you present technical advice in a way that is accessible to a client whose regulatory literacy is different from your home market. These are adjustments in method. They are entirely appropriate.

The things you do not adapt are standards: the rigour of the technical work, the honesty of the advice, the willingness to tell a client something inconvenient, the care taken in understanding a problem before proposing a solution. Firms that adapt on standards—that become more willing to cut corners, to give clients the answer they want rather than the answer that is correct, because local practice seems to permit it—are not adapting. They are diluting. And a diluted practice in one market will eventually infect the rest.

I have seen this happen with firms that entered markets with strong short-term commercial results and found, a few years later, that the quality of their work had degraded in ways they could not easily trace back to a single decision. The degradation was cumulative. Each small compromise seemed justifiable in context. Together, they had changed what kind of firm it was.

Preventing this requires a particular kind of clarity from firm leadership about what is non-negotiable. Not as an aspiration—everyone can articulate good values when asked—but as a practical behavioural commitment, demonstrated in specific decisions, especially costly ones.

WHAT GOING GLOBAL EXPOSES

Here is something that does not get said enough: globalisation is not just an expansion strategy. It is a diagnostic. And the diagnosis is often uncomfortable.

Domestic success in professional services is, to a significant extent, a function of structural advantages that have little to do with technical excellence. Incumbent relationships with clients who don’t change advisors often. Regulatory barriers that limit foreign competition in certain practice areas. Market sophistication that doesn’t always permit clients to distinguish between good advice and mediocre advice delivered confidently. These advantages are real and they are valuable—but they also create professional firms that believe themselves to be better than they are.

When you go international, those advantages disappear. The client owes you nothing. There is no switching inertia. The competition includes firms that have been building international practices for decades. And the sophisticated international client—the CFO of a multinational, the family office managing cross-border assets, the private equity fund navigating a multi-jurisdiction transaction—has typically worked with several firms and knows very well what good work looks like.

The firms that struggle internationally are usually not the ones that face an inhospitable market. They are the ones that, when they arrive in a new market, discover that the capabilities they thought they had are less developed than they believed. The talent they sent abroad is not quite ready for the environment. The quality frameworks they assumed were embedded turn out to have been enforced by proximity and supervision rather than internalised as habits. The partner-level judgment they trade on is available in only two or three individuals, rather than distributed across the practice.

Globalisation reveals all of that. And the right response is not to paper over the gaps—to make the international office look successful on the surface while the underlying problems remain—but to use the exposure as a genuine improvement mechanism. The firms that have built durable international practices are, almost without exception, firms that were honest with themselves about what they found when they looked.

THE LARGER OPPORTUNITY

I want to end with something that is more a matter of perspective than strategy.

The Indian professional services industry is at an unusual moment. The opportunities in India are significant and going global is not out of necessity but out of choice. The quality of the talent we produce is, as I said at the outset, genuinely exceptional. The client base we serve is becoming genuinely global. The regulatory environment is converging with international frameworks in ways that make cross-border expertise more valuable than it has ever been. And the competitive landscape—the question of which firms will define what a leading Indian-origin global practice looks like—is genuinely open. It has not been decided. The firms that will own that position in fifteen years are making the decisions that matter right now.

What I hope younger professionals and firm leaders take from this article is not a formula—there isn’t one—but a sense of what the work actually consists of. Building a firm that travels well is not primarily about geography or strategy. It is about people: finding them, developing them, retaining them by giving them something worth staying for. It is about leadership that is systematic and durable rather than personal and fragile. And it is about culture that is honest enough to be preserved in places where no one from the home office can see it.

A firm that gets those three things right will find that the markets are, in the end, receptive. Sophisticated clients everywhere are looking for the same thing: advisors who are genuinely excellent, genuinely honest, and genuinely invested in the client’s outcome. That is not a local proposition. It travels.

The question is not whether Indian firms will be present globally. They will be. The question is whether they will be there as leaders—firms that have built something of genuine institutional stature—or as participants. That choice is being made now, in the decisions that firm leaders are taking about talent, leadership, and culture. I hope more of them choose to build.

Regulatory, Ethical And Policy Dimensions Of Global Accounting Practices

India missed the chance to build a global accounting firm in 2002, but converging forces of technology, client fatigue, and regulatory shifts have reopened the window for a “Fifth Firm.” To succeed, Indian firms must evolve from fragmented, partner-led practices into unified institutions. This requires mastering complex regulatory dimensions across jurisdictions, maintaining strict audit independence, and managing cross-border conflicts. Firms must strategically separate regulated audit from non-regulated advisory services, embracing multidisciplinary structures and external capital to fund growth. Ultimately, Indian firms must view regulation not as a barrier, but as the foundational architecture of trust required for global scale.

1. INTRODUCTION – THE NEED FOR AN INDIAN FIRM WITH A GLOBAL PRESENCE

Some opportunities come once in a generation. They arrive quietly, without hype or hoopla, and leave just as quietly. You recognise them much later, when the world has moved on.

‘Professional Services’ had such a moment when a multinational firm collapsed. The crash opened the doors wide for a new entrant. For someone in India or the Global South. We didn’t seize the moment. We let it go uncashed.

In 2002, Arthur Andersen, the world’s top audit and accounting firm, went Kaput, courtesy of Enron, shredded documents, and broken trust. A once storied entity with over 80,000 professionals across more than 80 countries vanished overnight. The tsunami left many things under the debris, including hope, innocence, and trust.

The four remaining firms—Deloitte, PwC, EY, and KPMG—moved double fast. Within months, they absorbed Andersen’s people, practices, and clients. The Big Five became the Big Four. That moment was the crack through which an Indian firm could have emerged. A firm with different soil, different story, and different DNA. But it didn’t happen.

We lost the opportunity. Andersen disappeared, and the Big Four continued to party. The Fifth never showed up.

Now, in 2025, India has over 400,000 CAs. She is the headquarters for global back offices. She audits global subsidiaries. Her professionals speak the language of IFRS, ESG, and PE exits. Yet, India has not built a single professional services firm to match the Four.

This is the time to build The Fifth firm, in other words a large Indian firm with a global presence which could equal the Big Four at some point in time in the future. Thank fully the Government of India has embarked on the initiative of building more Indian firms to increase the options available in the market place.

AT ITS CORE, WHAT DOES THE FIFTH FIRM REPRESENT?

It represents a choice for clients seeking a longer shortlist. It represents the ability to interpret things through a dual lens, viz., global in structure, but local in insight. It represents the possibility of a world-class institution born not in Europe or America, but in Asia.

‘Professional Services’ remains perhaps the only trillion-dollar industry where four firms hold a vice-like grip. Here, market concentration is mistaken for competence. When clients select a Big Four, they believe they are managing risk. When ambitious talent joins them, they assume it is a shortcut to success.

Unfortunately, the brand has become a proxy for legitimacy. When clients choose a ‘Big Four’ firm they believe their actions would be justified as they have picked one of the best in the business in the belief that the world considers size as equivalent to capability and quality.

This has created a paradox: a high-trust industry with low innovation and zero institutional mobility. And India stays in the second tier. Not because it lacks capability, but because capability alone doesn’t build institutions. To scale globally, you need belief, which today is represented by brand, capital, governance, and an internal culture that can weather storms.

The globalisation of Indian accounting firms cannot be viewed merely as an exercise in opening offices abroad, joining international networks, or serving Indian clients in overseas markets. At its core, it requires the ability to operate within multiple regulatory systems, each with its own rules on licensing, audit eligibility, independence, confidentiality, data protection, quality review, disciplinary jurisdiction and ownership structures. A firm seeking to grow globally must therefore develop not only commercial ambition, but also regulatory awareness and an institutional ability to take considered positions on difficult questions before they arise in client situations.

The Rise of the Fifth Firm Indian Global

That’s why dozens of mid-sized firms, some of which are technically excellent and trusted locally, have never crossed the line to achieve global relevance. Because the leap from regional to global isn’t about scale; it’s about design. It requires governance that clients can trust. It needs talent models that retain stars. It should have brand equity that signals both competence and confidence.

This is particularly important because accounting firms occupy a distinctive position in the economy. In advisory services, they compete like professional businesses. In audit and assurance, however, they perform a public-interest function. The audit opinion is relied upon not only by the client that pays the fee, but also by shareholders, lenders, regulators, employees and capital markets. Consequently, global accounting practices must reconcile two sometimes competing impulses: the commercial need to scale and the professional duty to remain independent, credible and ethically consistent.

For Indian firms, this balance will be central to global expansion. The firm of the future may combine audit, tax, transaction advisory, forensic, sustainability, technology and risk consulting services. It may work through Indian partnerships, LLPs, network arrangements, foreign affiliates, corporate entities for non-regulated services, or multi-disciplinary models. Each model creates opportunities, but also raises regulatory and ethical questions.

FOR DECADES, THE FIFTH FIRM FELT OUT OF REACH. BUT TODAY, THE GROUND IS MOVING.

First, there’s technology. AI and automation are transforming the face of delivery. Routine work, such as reporting, reconciliations, and document preparation, is getting commoditised. The traditional advantage of large firms, namely, their scale of delivery, is slipping. The differentiator is shifting from execution to interpretation, from templates to trust. And trust can’t be outsourced.

Second, regulators worldwide (from the UK’s Financial Reporting Council to India’s NFRA) are raising concerns about audit concentration and advisory conflicts. They’re looking for alternatives. The question now is “Why hasn’t someone else done it yet?”

Third, there’s client fatigue. After two decades of transformation programs, PowerPoint decks, and playbooks, clients are becoming less tolerant of generic value. They’re willing to work with smaller, smarter, and more contextually sharp partners—if they can trust them.

Fourth, talent is shifting. Young professionals today are not looking for ten-year ladders and corner-office titles. They want purpose and autonomy.

For the first time in decades, all four forces—technology, regulation, client sentiment, and talent mobility—are moving in the same direction. The forces reshaping this industry are already here. It depends on who steps forward and what they choose to build.

And the timing is not just right. It may be now or never.

2. THE INDIAN REGULATORY BASE: WHAT CAN TRAVEL AND WHAT CANNOT

Indian accounting firms begin their global journey from a regulatory base that is significantly shaped by the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949, the Chartered Accountants Regulations, 1988, the Code of Ethics issued by the ICAI, the Companies Act, 2013, and, for certain audit engagements, oversight by bodies such as the National Financial Reporting Authority. This base is not merely procedural. It determines who may practice, in what form, under what ethical obligations, and with what limitations on services.

A useful distinction must be drawn between regulated services and non-regulated services. Statutory audit, tax audit, certification and certain assurance functions are regulated professional services. They are typically required to be performed by members holding a certificate of practice, and the ability to sign reports is tied to professional registration and disciplinary control. In contrast, many non-assurance services—such as consulting, technology implementation, process transformation, transaction support, business advisory, risk management and outsourcing—may be capable of being delivered through other legal vehicles, subject of course to applicable laws and restrictions arising from independence or professional conduct rules.

This distinction is important for globalisation. If an Indian firm treats all services as though they must be delivered only through the traditional audit partnership model, it may constrain its ability to raise capital, hire non-CA professionals, build technology platforms and compete with integrated global firms. Conversely, if a firm treats all services as commercial services without recognising the regulated character of audit and assurance, it may compromise independence and invite regulatory action.

The corporate entity therefore has a legitimate role in the globalisation debate, particularly for non-regulated services. A limited liability company or other corporate structure may be appropriate for technology consulting, business process services, research support, data analytics, ESG advisory support, training, outsourcing or global capability services, provided it does not hold itself out as performing reserved professional functions and provided conflict, branding and independence issues are properly managed. The challenge is not whether corporate entities should exist around professional firms; they already do in many forms. The more important question is how the relationship between the regulated practice and the non-regulated entity should be governed.

Section 144 of the Companies Act, 2013 illustrates the issue sharply. It prohibits an auditor from rendering specified non-audit services to the audit client, its holding company or subsidiary company, including accounting and book-keeping, internal audit, design and implementation of financial information systems, actuarial services, investment advisory, investment banking, outsourced financial services and management services. The provision also expands “directly or indirectly” to include services through related entities or entities using the auditor’s name, trade mark or brand. This shows that merely shifting a prohibited service to a separate entity may not solve the problem if, in substance, the service remains connected with the auditor or its brand.

At the same time, the regulatory framework is slowly recognising the need for scale. It began with the setting up of LLP and now leading to allowing Multi Disciplinary Entities to be created. Additionally networks are being encouraged and the regulations around them are evolving despite the reluctance to open it up fully and jettison the past ‘controlled’ culture. Just as India opened up in the early 1990s the recent regulatory are welcome ‘green shoots’. These developments are important not because they immediately create global firms, but because they recognise that the traditional fragmented practice model needs institutional pathways for scale.

The Indian regulatory base, therefore, should not be seen as a barrier to globalisation. It is the starting architecture. But Indian firms must understand what part of that architecture is portable across borders and what part is jurisdiction-specific. The right to audit in India does not automatically create the right to audit in another country. Likewise, a network name may create market recognition, but it may also create independence, liability and quality-control expectations. For global practice, structure must follow regulation; it cannot be designed purely by reference to tax efficiency or branding convenience.

What the Big Four got right was that they built firms, not confederations of partners. In many professions, partnerships evolve into loose alliances of celebrities. There, clients belong to individuals, revenues are jealously guarded, and the firm exists as a shared letterhead. The Big Four resisted this movement, even at the cost of internal friction. They centralised brand ownership, partner admissions, and client acceptance norms. The logo did not belong to any one partner. The firm’s credibility no longer depended on a single individual.

The Key, therefore, is creating a model where no single firm, geography, individual or practice controls the firm. The model should facilitate regulatory compliance, balance risks, reward fairly and democratise decision making. One way of doing this is to form a non-practising entity which owns the brand, where leadership resides, where intangible assets are owned and licensed to individual entities in the network, cost are incurred for research and development, IT initiatives in each service line to develop new products and processes, manage the network through central policies, provide funding support to entities in need, etc.

In India, initially, this model feels unnatural. After all, Indian firms had been shaped by towering founders whose personal credibility carried client relationships. The Big Four model, by contrast, appeared impersonal. Partners rotate off marquee clients. Personal brands are deliberately submerged beneath a global identity.

This suppression of individual prominence allows for the emergence of continuity. Over time, clients will not leave when partners do. Relationships will outlive personalities. The firm, not the individual, will become the unit of trust. Single hero led firms will give way to numerous leaders with democratisation of ownership, decision making and choosing leaders with fixed terms through and unbiased merit based selection process.

All of this is possible within one network comprising of regulated and non-regulated entities with checks and balances to ensure that the regulated entities continue to comply with regulatory requirements.

3. INDEPENDENCE: THE NON-NEGOTIABLE CORE OF GLOBAL PRACTICE

Independence is the most sensitive regulatory issue in the globalisation of accounting firms. It is also the issue most likely to be misunderstood. Independence is not only a state of mind; it is also a matter of appearance. A firm may believe that its professional judgment is unaffected, but if the surrounding circumstances create a reasonable perception that the firm is financially dependent, commercially conflicted, or reviewing its own work, the independence concern remains.

The IESBA Code of Ethics has become an important global reference point. The 2024 IESBA Handbook includes revisions relating to the definition of public interest entity, including replacing the earlier “listed entity” category with the broader “publicly traded entity” concept for relevant provisions effective for audits of financial statements for periods beginning on or after 15 December 2024. (Ethics Board) The IESBA framework is based on identifying threats to compliance with fundamental principles and applying safeguards where available. However, for public interest entity audits, many non-assurance services are not merely subject to safeguards but are prohibited or tightly restricted.

Different jurisdictions apply independence requirements through different mechanisms. Some rely substantially on professional ethical codes; others combine professional codes with securities law, audit regulator rules, audit committee pre-approval and statutory prohibitions. A global Indian firm cannot rely only on Indian rules when servicing clients with overseas reporting, listing or audit requirements.

Jurisdiction / Framework Main Source of Independence Regulation Key Features Relevant to Global Firms Practical Implication for Indian Firms
India Companies Act, 2013; ICAI Code of Ethics; NFRA/ICAI oversight Section 144 prohibits specified non-audit services by auditors directly or indirectly to audit clients, holding companies and subsidiaries. Indian firms must map services across the audit client group and across entities using the same brand or network.
United States SEC independence rules; PCAOB standards and inspections Audit committees are expected to pre-approve audit and permissible non-audit services; SEC guidance identifies prohibited services such as bookkeeping, financial information systems design and implementation, management functions and advocacy roles. If an Indian firm audits or supports audit work for an SEC registrant, US independence standards may become relevant even where Indian rules appear less restrictive.
European Union Regulation (EU) No. 537/2014 for statutory audits of public-interest entities Article 5 prohibits statutory auditors and audit firms auditing PIEs from providing specified non-audit services to the audited entity, its parent and controlled undertakings within the prescribed framework. Network-level service mapping is critical, especially where advisory services are provided in one country and audit services in another.
United Kingdom FRC Ethical Standard for Auditors The FRC Ethical Standard applies to audits and other public interest assurance engagements; the 2024 update is effective from 15 December 2024. UK-related audit work requires attention to fee caps, non-audit services, long association and public-interest restrictions.
Singapore ACRA Code and Practice Monitoring Programme ACRA regulates public accountants and accounting entities, including registration, ethics and practice monitoring. The PMP assesses whether audits are performed according to prescribed professional standards. Singapore-facing work requires readiness for regulator-led practice monitoring and quality-control expectations.

There are a number of case studies of actions against professional firms by regulators for breach of independence. The lesson is clear: independence is not managed only by engagement partners. It requires firm-wide systems, consultation protocols, technology-enabled tracking, training and accountability.

For Indian firms aspiring to operate globally, independence should be treated as a design principle. Before accepting a client or service, the firm must ask: Who is the audit client? Who are its affiliates? Which network firms serve the group? Are there financial interests, employment relationships, family relationships, fee dependence issues, self-review threats or advocacy threats? Is the service prohibited absolutely, permissible with safeguards, or permissible only after audit committee approval? These questions must be asked before commercial discussions have matured, not after the engagement letter is ready.

Large global networks manage independence by classifying their global client base into attest and non-attest clients. They monitor compliance through continuous monitoring through using technology besides cross border conflict checks and have a rigorous oversight over individual partner and professionals’ independence through compliance tools requiring disclosure of holdings and other interests of themselves and their family members.

4. NETWORKS, ALLIANCES AND THE PROBLEM OF SHARED IDENTITY

Networks and alliances are attractive pathways for Indian firms because they allow access to global referrals, methodologies, training, branding and cross-border execution without immediate merger into a single global partnership. However, networks create their own regulatory complexity. The larger the network, the greater the risk that one-member firm’s services may affect another member firm’s independence.

In audit regulation, the concept of a “network firm” is significant because independence concerns may extend beyond the signing firm. Under international independence standards, non-assurance services provided by a network firm to an audit client or its related entities may affect the independence of the audit firm. The IESBA Handbook specifically addresses communication with those charged with governance before a firm or network firm provides non-assurance services to entities within the corporate structure of a public interest entity audit client.

This is where many mid-sized firms underestimate the challenge. A network may be marketed as “independent member firms,” but from the client’s or regulator’s perspective, common branding, shared methodologies, referral arrangements, common quality standards and global pitches may create expectations of coordinated conduct. The phrase “independent member firm” cannot become a shield against poor coordination. If a network markets itself globally, it must also govern itself globally.

Indian firms joining networks must therefore examine the network agreement carefully. Questions of exclusivity, brand use, referral obligations, quality control, inspection rights, client acceptance procedures, independence databases, confidentiality obligations, dispute resolution and exit consequences are not merely legal drafting points. They determine whether the network is a real institutional platform or only a loose referral club. Globalisation through networks is viable, but only if the firm understands that shared identity brings shared risk.

5. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST: BEYOND INDEPENDENCE

Conflicts of interest are related to independence, but they are not identical. Independence is primarily associated with audit and assurance objectivity. Conflict of interest is broader. It can arise in advisory, tax, valuation, insolvency, transaction support, forensic, litigation support and consulting assignments, even where no audit relationship exists.

For example, a firm advising a buyer on due diligence may previously have advised the seller on tax structuring. A firm assisting a company in a regulatory investigation may also be advising a whistle-blower or a competing bidder in another jurisdiction. A firm providing transfer pricing advice to two companies in the same supply chain may be asked to support positions that are commercially adverse. A firm providing forensic support to a board committee may have earlier designed internal controls that are now under review. In each case, the question is not merely whether the firm can technically perform the work. The question is whether its objectivity, loyalty, confidentiality obligations or professional credibility are compromised.

Sometimes firms claim to have “Chinese Wall” between teams providing services to get around conflict of interest situations. This is a mere fig leaf and firms have to realise that even the legendary Great Wall of China was breached. In today’s highly connected world where physical locations don’t matter and the spread of communication in the digital world and social media are lightning swift “Chinese Wall” is illusory.

A global firm faces a higher conflict risk because client relationships are dispersed across offices, legal entities and practice lines. The tax team in one country may not know that the transaction team in another country is advising an adverse party. A consulting entity may not know that the audit practice has a relationship with the same group. Without a centralised conflict check process, the firm may discover the conflict only after it has received confidential information from both sides.

A practical conflict-check framework for global Indian firms should include the following:

Conflict Area Practical Question Required Control
Client identity Who is the real client: parent, subsidiary, promoter, board committee, lender, investor or management? Client and beneficial ownership mapping
Adverse party Is the firm or any affiliate advising a counterparty or competitor in the same matter? Matter-level conflict search
Prior work Has the firm earlier advised on the structure, valuation, control, tax position or system now being reviewed? Prior engagement review
Confidential information Has the firm received non-public information from another party that may be relevant? Information barrier assessment
Scope creep Can a permitted advisory assignment become advocacy or management decision-making? Scope approval and periodic review
Network impact Does any network firm have a relationship that affects acceptance? Network-wide conflict confirmation
Resolution Can the conflict be cured by disclosure and consent, or is refusal/resignation required? Ethics partner approval

The most important discipline is to define the “matter” correctly. A conflict check limited to client name may fail where the conflict is transaction-specific. Global firms therefore need databases that identify clients, related parties, beneficial owners, engagement types, industry restrictions, independence status, confidentiality restrictions and adverse parties. More importantly, they need a culture where partners accept that a lucrative engagement may have to be declined.

6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND INFORMATION BARRIERS

Confidentiality deserves separate treatment because it is not merely a subset of conflict of interest. Professional accountants receive sensitive information: financial statements before publication, tax positions, merger plans, pricing models, payroll data, board papers, litigation strategies, regulatory exposures, whistle-blower complaints and personal data. In cross-border practice, confidentiality risk increases because information may move across countries, cloud platforms, shared service centres, network firms and subcontractors.

The ethical duty of confidentiality requires firms not to disclose information acquired through professional relationships without proper authority, unless there is a legal or professional duty to disclose. But in a global firm, the practical question is: who within the firm should have access? The answer cannot be “everyone under the same brand.” Access must be need-based.

Information barriers should therefore be formal, not informal. Engagement teams should be ring-fenced where necessary. Data rooms should have role-based access. Internal emails should avoid unnecessary circulation. Shared drives should be controlled. Consultants and external experts should sign confidentiality undertakings. Cross-border transfer of data should be checked against applicable data protection law. Where the firm operates through a network, confidentiality obligations must be contractually imposed across member firms and subcontractors.

The growing use of artificial intelligence and analytics tools adds a further dimension. Firms must ensure that client data is not uploaded into tools in a manner that breaches contractual confidentiality, data protection obligations or regulatory expectations. A global Indian firm should have a clear AI-use policy covering approved tools, client consent, anonymisation, retention, access control and prohibition on training public models using confidential client data.

7. DATA PROTECTION: FROM BACK-OFFICE ISSUE TO BOARD-LEVEL RISK

Data protection is now a core regulatory issue for global accounting firms. Accounting firms process large volumes of personal data relating to employees, customers, vendors, investors and directors. They also handle sensitive financial and commercial data. When services are delivered across borders, personal data may be transferred between jurisdictions with different privacy standards.

Indian firms must consider India’s Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023, but global work may also trigger the EU GDPR, UK GDPR, Singapore PDPA, UAE data protection laws or sectoral confidentiality rules depending on the client, data subject, place of processing and contractual terms. A single global engagement may involve data collected in Europe, processed in India, reviewed by a team in Singapore and stored on servers of a cloud provider located elsewhere. The regulatory analysis cannot be left to the IT department alone.

From a governance perspective, every cross-border engagement should answer certain basic questions: What data will be accessed? Does it include personal data? Who is the controller or processor? Is there a data processing agreement? Is cross-border transfer permitted? What security standards apply? What is the retention period? What is the incident reporting protocol? Are subcontractors involved? Has the client consented to offshore processing?

Data protection also intersects with professional secrecy. A firm may be contractually permitted to process data but ethically required to restrict access. Conversely, a regulatory demand in one jurisdiction may conflict with confidentiality expectations in another. Global firms must therefore establish escalation mechanisms for regulatory notices, data breach incidents and client information requests.

8. AUDIT OVERSIGHT, INSPECTION AND PEER REVIEW

Global accounting practices operate in a world where audit quality is no longer left only to self-regulation. Public oversight bodies, audit regulators, peer review mechanisms and inspection programmes increasingly shape the credibility of firms.

Internationally, audit oversight is perceived to be more intrusive than in India though NFRA in its recent inspections and investigations has changed this perception. The PCAOB oversees audits of public companies and SEC-registered brokers and dealers, and its responsibilities include registration, inspection, standard-setting and enforcement. Singapore’s ACRA Practice Monitoring Programme assesses whether audits are performed in accordance with prescribed professional standards and other requirements. These regimes demonstrate that global audit practice requires readiness for external inspection, not merely internal confidence.

Indian firms that aspire to global work must therefore invest in quality management systems, methodology, engagement documentation, consultation processes, EQCR/EQR mechanisms, independence tracking, training records and archival discipline. The firm’s quality file must be capable of being reviewed by an external inspector who was not part of the engagement and may not share the firm’s informal understanding of the client.

Indian firms must adopt quality practices which compare with the best in the world. Quality has to be consistent across clients and geographies and not different for listed companies and private limited companies. Global practices must be embraced including acting swiftly and firmly on non-compliances.

9. DISCIPLINARY JURISDICTION AND CROSS-BORDER ACCOUNTABILITY

Globalisation complicates disciplinary jurisdiction. A partner may be registered in India, the client may be incorporated in Singapore, the parent may be listed in the United States, the work papers may be stored in India, and a network firm may have contributed specialist input from the United Kingdom. If something goes wrong, which regulator has jurisdiction?

The answer may be: more than one. Professional bodies may discipline their members. Audit regulators may sanction registered firms. Securities regulators may act where listed-company filings are affected. Courts may entertain civil claims. Data protection authorities may investigate breaches. Insolvency, anti-money laundering, sanctions and anti-corruption regulators may also become relevant depending on the assignment.

This creates a major governance issue for Indian firms. Engagement letters and network agreements must address governing law, liability, confidentiality, cooperation with regulators, ownership of work papers, document retention, subcontracting and responsibility for specialist work. However, contractual provisions cannot override statutory jurisdiction. A firm cannot contract out of disciplinary obligations.

For global practice, the safest approach is to assume that work may be reviewed by regulators beyond India if it feeds into an overseas audit, listing, transaction, tax filing, investigation or assurance report. Firms must therefore avoid the attitude that “the signing happens elsewhere, so our risk is limited.” Component work, offshore support and specialist memoranda can all become part of a regulatory record.

10. MULTI-DISCIPLINARY PRACTICE: OPPORTUNITY WITH ETHICAL BOUNDARIES

Multi-disciplinary practice is a natural response to modern client needs. Clients do not experience problems in professional silos. A cross-border acquisition may require financial due diligence, tax structuring, regulatory review, valuation, accounting advice, integration support, technology assessment, ESG review and internal control design. A firm that can bring multiple disciplines together has a commercial advantage.

The key regulatory question in MDP is control of professional judgment. Can non-audit professionals influence audit decisions? Are revenue targets creating pressure on assurance teams? Are consulting partners rewarded for selling services to audit clients? Is confidential audit information being used for advisory opportunities? Are clients being offered bundled services that impair independence? These are not theoretical issues; they are structural risks.

A well-designed MDP must therefore have ring-fenced audit governance, independent ethics oversight, service-line restrictions, clear profit-sharing rules, conflict checks, independence systems and disciplinary accountability. The firm must be able to demonstrate that multi-disciplinary capability enhances service quality without diluting professional independence.

11. EXTERNAL CAPITAL

The interest of private equity and other investors in accounting firms has increased globally, driven by the need for technology investment, succession planning, consolidation, growth capital and professionalisation of management. Accountancy Europe has noted that private equity and third-party ownership are reshaping the European accountancy and audit sector and has highlighted both opportunities and risks relating to quality, independence and governance. (Accountancy Europe)

For Indian firms, external capital raises difficult questions. Audit is a public-interest function. If investors seek short-term returns, cost rationalisation or aggressive cross-selling, there may be pressure on audit quality and independence. On the other hand, without capital, Indian firms may struggle to invest in technology, training, global infrastructure, cyber security, quality systems and international expansion. The policy issue is not whether capital is good or bad. The issue is what type of capital, in what entity, with what governance rights, and with what restrictions.

One possible approach is to distinguish between the regulated audit practice and non-regulated service platforms. External investment may be more feasible in technology, consulting, outsourcing, analytics or training entities, subject to safeguards that prevent interference with audit judgment, misuse of brand and independence violations. If external capital is ever permitted in regulated audit entities, it would require stringent restrictions on voting rights, profit rights, governance influence, exit arrangements, confidentiality, independence and regulator access.

This debate should not be postponed. Global competitors are already investing heavily in technology and multidisciplinary capability. Indian firms cannot become global institutions solely through partner capital if the scale of investment required is far beyond traditional practice economics. But capital must serve the profession; the profession cannot become captive to capital.

There are many who argue against private capital in regulated firms. In my view if in the medical profession doctors can continue to save lives and yet be accountable despite the ownership of their institutions by non-doctors there is not reason why professional firms cannot have private capital. The day is not far off when professional firms would be also listed in stock exchanges!

12. RECOGNITION, MOBILITY AND QUALIFICATION BARRIERS

Professional mobility is another critical dimension of globalisation. A chartered accountant qualified in India may be highly competent, but the right to sign audit reports, appear before regulators, undertake insolvency work or provide reserved services in another jurisdiction depends on local law. Mutual recognition arrangements, qualification pathways, local licensing and residency requirements can determine how far an Indian firm can globalise through its own professionals.

For Indian firms, mobility should be viewed at three levels. The first is people mobility: the ability of Indian professionals to work abroad, obtain local qualifications where needed, and participate in global engagements. The second is firm mobility: the ability of Indian firms to register, affiliate, merge or practise in foreign jurisdictions. The third is service mobility: the ability to provide cross-border services remotely without violating licensing rules in the destination jurisdiction.

Technology may make cross-border delivery easier, but it does not eliminate licensing restrictions. A team sitting in India may support a foreign audit, but the signing rights, review obligations and regulatory responsibility may remain with a locally registered auditor. Similarly, tax advice may cross into unauthorised practice of law in some jurisdictions if not structured properly. Global firms therefore need jurisdiction-wise service maps: what can be delivered from India, what requires local registration, what requires collaboration, and what cannot be done.

13. ETHICAL CONSISTENCY ACROSS JURISDICTIONS

A global Indian firm cannot operate with variable ethics—strict in one country, flexible in another. Regulatory requirements may differ, but the firm’s ethical floor must be consistent. Where local law is less stringent, the firm should still follow its internal global standard. Where local law is more stringent, the firm must comply with the higher standard.

Ethical consistency requires written policies, but it also requires leadership behaviour. Partners must see that independence breaches, confidentiality lapses, poor documentation and aggressive client acceptance are taken seriously. Staff must be trained to escalate concerns. Ethics partners must have authority. Commercial success must not become the only measure of performance.

The reputation of a global accounting firm is cumulative. A failure in one office can affect credibility elsewhere. This is especially true in the age of public enforcement orders, inspection reports, social media and cross-border regulatory cooperation. Indian firms aspiring to global stature must therefore build reputational resilience by investing in ethics before scale, not after scale.

14. CONCLUSION: REGULATION AS THE ARCHITECTURE OF TRUST

The globalisation of Indian accounting firms is both necessary and possible. Indian businesses are global, Indian professionals are capable, and Indian firms have the opportunity to build institutions that combine technical depth, cost competitiveness, cultural adaptability and entrepreneurial energy. But globalisation cannot be built on ambition alone.

The successful global Indian accounting firm will not be the one that merely has the most offices or the widest network. It will be the firm that understands regulated and non-regulated services clearly, manages independence before conflicts arise, separates confidentiality from convenience, treats data as a fiduciary responsibility, welcomes peer review and external inspection, builds systems for multi-jurisdictional compliance, and balances capital with professional control.

Policy support will be useful—particularly in areas such as regulatory harmonisation, recognition of qualifications, facilitation of firm aggregation, and clarity on permissible structures. But the primary responsibility will remain with firms themselves. They must build governance before growth, quality before branding, and trust before scale.

If Indian accounting firms are to move from domestic practices to global institutions, they must recognise a simple truth: regulation is not the enemy of globalisation. Properly understood, it is the architecture that makes global trust possible.

The decisive difference between the past and the present is this: hero partners are no longer enough. Cross-border reporting, ESG assurance, forensic analytics, and technology-enabled audit require systems, platforms, and capital investment in methodology and risk governance. These are baseline expectations.

In earlier decades, caution preserved stability. Today, excessive caution may lead to irrelevance.

The emergence of a Fifth Firm would not be to fight the Big Four. It would be a response to conditions that now make institutional scale feasible within India.

History reminds us that windows do not remain open indefinitely. Competitors respond. Markets consolidate. So, the question is no longer whether India has the conditions for scale. It is whether its professional institutions recognise that the ground beneath them has shifted.

How To Go Global (India’s Big Four Moment)

That the next big accounting firm should emerge from India is a laudable vision. The Global Networking Guidelines is a step in that direction but much more needs to be done in terms of reducing regulatory constraints and aligning Indian regulations with global norms. The Indian firms need to abandon their legacy mindset and work at building a recognizable brand. The landscape is strewn with firms that are small and fragmented and there is a crying need for consolidation, particularly amongst mid-sized firms to build scale. The vision cannot be achieved in one big leap but will be a long and arduous journey. It needs all stakeholders to work in sync and to have a radical shift of thinking both on part of the regulator and the Indian firms.

Truth can walk naked, but a lie always needs to be dressed. Khalil Gibran.

THE REALITY

The naked truth is that the Indian CA firms are nowhere close to challenging the dominance of the multi-national accounting firms (MNF) (also popularly known as the Big 4). Their combined revenues exceeded a staggering INR 45,000 crore in FY251, driven largely by growth in consulting and technology-led services. 67% of the Nifty 5002 companies are audited by the Big 4, being the default preference due to their brand value.

So why are Indian firms not able to create their own brand and provide a strong and viable alternative to MNFs at least within India? After all the MNFs were established by recruiting Indian CAs who were then running their own professional practices. Even today these firms are managed and assignments are executed, predominantly by home grown CAs.

Statistics also show that more than 90% of India firms are “pop & mom shops” with 3 or less partners3. It seems Indian firms are unwilling to scale up as they are averse to sharing authority and are trappedin the illusion that being small ensures independence. They are also wedded to their name which prevents meaningful collaboration with other firms.


1 Big four's Indian arms outpace global counterparts in FY24 revenue growth | Company News - Business Standard

2 https://thefinancestory.com/audit-rotations-in-india-dominated-by-big-6

3 https://thefinancestory.com/mid-sized-indian-ca-firms-employing-20-percent-audit workforce

THE BIG (FOUR) MOMENT

But now there is a thrust from the Government and from ICAI encouraging the next large accounting firm to emerge from India. Many mid-sized Indian firms have also come of age and are looking at scaling up in India and globally.

It is indeed a great vision set for the Indian firms, but has the right framework been put in place where Indian firms can unleash their ambitions and capabilities and break the shackles that limits them to playing second fiddle.

The answer lies in reducing regulations and constraints and creating a level playing field where Indian firms can operate with greater freedom.

Often ICAI regulations are aimed at reigning in the MNFs, particularly those working through surrogate entities. But these very regulations also restrict Indian firms, perhaps more than they restrict the MNFs. We must accept that the MNFs are here to stay and have become an integral part of the Indian ecosystem. They have helped enhance service standards and professionalism, which in turn has benefited Indian firms. Today, advisory services are recognised, valued and are monetized, which was rare earlier.

History has shown that competition helps improve quality, which benefits both the clients and the CA firms. There can be no question that all firms including MNFs must function within the constraints of the ICAI regulations. But the solution is not to put in place stifling regulations but to look at international practices and ensure that regulations apply equally to all.

In most countries the regulations are much more liberal in terms of firm name, advertising, sponsorship, payment of referral fees, charging success fees in certain situations and so on. A more liberal approach with focus on creating a level playing field will benefit everyone. Indian firms are unable to flourish and expand globally as the ecosystem currently is holding them back. Rather than tinkering with current regulations with cosmetic changes, ICAI should consider completely overhauling its ICAI regulations and Code of Ethics even if it requires approval from the Parliament. With the Government supporting this initiative, now is the right time to push for big changes.

India Big Four Moment

THE LONG ROAD AHEAD

It is important to remember that Indian firms cannot become global players overnight. The MNFs emerged through mergers and consolidation, and this process started in 1980s or even earlier. So, the vision of an India incubated MNF to fructify will be a long and arduous journey. The CA community, Government and ICAI will need to stay the course and act consistently with complete synchronization. Any contradictory messaging or constant change in policy will likely derail the process. Only if Indian firms are sure that the policy framework will be consistent would they be willing to invest funds and resources in major strategic decisions and initiatives.

MNFs grew through merger and consolidation and Indian firms aspiring to create a globally recognizable brand will have to follow that route and change their obsession of wanting to maintain their name or the illusory independence.

Indian firms cannot reach scale in one big leap and would have to take many small steps towards their goal. The first obvious step is to gain international exposure and imbibe the best practices followed around the world. ICAI must remove roadblocks to allow Indian firms to get that exposure.

GLOBAL NETWORKING GUIDELINES

ICAI has recently formulated the ICAI (Global Networking) Guidelines, 2025 where the preamble lays down the laudable objectives of exposing Indian firms to global best practices and to enhance their capacities and capabilities. The guidelines require the global Network to be registered with ICAI if any Indian firm or Indian Network is a constituent of such global Network.

The guidelines also encourage Indian firms to take the initiative and establish their own global network. However, this can be the ultimate goal and not the starting point. The obvious first step would be to become member of an existing international association/network and thereby build international experience and connections. This can be the steppingstone to finally going global.

The guidelines define Network as an arrangement, alliance, or association, drawn in writing, (irrespective of its nomenclature) formed with the objective aimed at any one or more of the following:

√ cost sharing amongst member firms;

√ Sharing common quality control / procedures

√ Sharing a common operational strategy;

√  Common brand name. initials, name or logo amongst the constituents;

√   Common website / domain name / email;

√ Common systems, partners and staff, technical resources, audit methodology, training courses, facilities

√  Any other circumstances wherein the actions of the constituents convey that they are associated in a way that constitutes a network.

The first 6 qualifying parameters for a Network have been adapted from the Handbook of the International Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants published by International Federation of Accountants (IFAC). The IFAC guidelines recognise the distinction between a Network (where there is much greater cohesion and at least one of the above six criteria are satisfied) and other Associations where firms come together on a common platform but maintain their own distinct and independent identity. Each member firm is free to develop its own brand and is totally independent of the Association or its other members. In fact, member firms may also compete amongst themselves and may have completely divergent growth and operational strategies. An Association is typically a membership model where none of the above-mentioned criteria are satisfied, and the purpose is to imbibe best practices and establish international connections.

So, Networks and Associations are fundamentally different, and it appears that ICAI wants only those alliances to be registered that satisfy the criteria of a network. This makes logical sense; however, it would be good if ICAI clarifies this explicitly to avoid any confusion. Appropriate safeguards can be put in place (if considered necessary by ICAI) to avoid misuse.

These guidelines are a welcome initiative as besides giving a framework to the Indian firms, it seeks to bring the MNFs within the regulatory framework. Unsurprisingly, due to the disclosure requirements, these guidelines have not been welcomed by the MNFs that function through multiple entities that are structured to stay outside the oversight of ICAI.

ALL MEMBERSHIPS ARE NOT NETWORKS

The guidelines clarify that when an Association is aimed at cooperation, by any means whatsoever, and there is cost sharing amongst the constituent entities, it is deemed to be a Network. However, the guidelines accept the proposition that all alliances or memberships are not networks required to be registered with ICAI. They specifically state that “the determination as to whether an Association is a Network shall be made as a person of ordinary prudence is likely to conclude under the given facts and circumstances…….”. It also clarifies that a larger structure aimed only at facilitating referral of work by itself would not constitute a network.

Take an example of a mid-size firm that already operates a domestic network registered with ICAI and has presence in various cities in India. Also, consider that such a firm also has presence outside India through entities under its direct control. Therefore, under the guidelines, the Indian firm would have to register this international presence as a global Network with ICAI. Let’s call this Network G1. Typically, the domestic network (registered with ICAI) would become part of G1, which in turn would also be registered with ICAI.

Further, assume that in consonance with the vision of the Indian Government and avowed objectives of ICAI, the Indian firm wants to further expand its footprints globally. With that in mind, it wants to stay connected with like-minded foreign firms and stay abreast of international practice. To achieve this long-term growth strategy, it would also like to be a member of an international association with member firms from more than 50 countries. The Indian firm is totally independent of this international association and its members and is pursuing its own global expansion strategy. There is no cooperation between the member firms with regards to strategy or operations or branding. Indeed, the membership of the global association is a steppingstone in the direction of ultimately establishing its direct presence outside India in many countries. Let’s call this membership to the International Association G2.

Surely, the Indian firm is not be expected to register G2 with ICAI. The Indian firm is just a member of this association and has no commonality with the other member firms as each of them function independently. Justifiably, G1 would be registered with ICAI as all the constituents cooperate and are working under a common brand with a unified operational strategy. G2 is a mere membership model and would not be required to be registered with ICAI as a network. The guidelines also support this view as the intention is to monitor Networks where there is commonality of objectives between member firms and at least one of the specified criteria is met.

ESTABLISHING PRESENCE IN A FOREIGN COUNTRY

The guidelines issued by ICAI would help and clearly come in play when an Indian firm wants to establish its global imprints.

An Indian firm could enter an existing network where all member firms closely cooperate and work with a common objective or may create its own separate network. In both cases, this would be a Network model (as envisaged in the guidelines issued by ICAI) that would have to be registered with ICAI. It could also consider establishing a branch or entering in partnership with an existing firm in a foreign country.

An Indian firm that wants to establish presence outside India directly under its control has its task cut out for it. It cannot enter in partnership with a local firm in that country unless all the partners of that firm are also qualified Indian CAs. The problem is that cross-nation partnership is not permitted by ICAI and by most jurisdictions. Therefore, partnership with locally qualified professionals who understand the terrain is not possible. ICAI (and most other countries) does not permit partnership with anyone who is not a member of ICAI.

Even if one finds a firm in another country where all partners hold the Indian COP the problem is not solved. Besides Indian qualification, the partners will also need to hold qualifications of that country so that it is eligible to sign audits and do attest functions under the regulations of that country. In most jurisdictions this would mean not just passing the relevant exam of that country but also serving the internship period there. This effectively means the person needs dual qualification and should have done dual internship in India and in that foreign country. Such an animal may not exist and hence it becomes mission impossible.

The Indian firm may consider setting a branch abroad and this under the ICAI regulations will require appointing an Indian CA to be in charge of that branch. Again, audit and attest functions may not be possible unless the gridlock mentioned above is broken. So most Indian firms that establish presence abroad render services other than attest functions.

The Global Networking guidelines enacted by ICAI are therefore a real and viable way forward. An Indian firm can enter into an arrangement with firms in a foreign country with partners holding qualification in that country. It would be a network arrangement with all firms under a common brand. This network would have to be registered with ICAI. So, this is a good starting point. However, taking a direct partnership interest in an entity abroad would not be possible as that entity may have persons qualified in that country but not holding an Indian COP. International co-operation and reciprocity is required between countries and their regulators for cross-border partnerships to become practically possible.

The other option would be to establish an entity that does not do any attest functions. This can even be a corporate entity, and the Indian firm or the partners of the Indian firm may invest in the share capital of that entity. Such arrangement would also have to be registered with ICAI as a global network.

So, it is not easy and the firms have to navigate a myriad of problems to establish presence outside India. The global networking guidelines provide some direction, but a lot more needs to be done. ICAI is well aware of the problems and will hopefully come out with more options and clarity by not just changing the Indian regulations but also working internationally for greater cooperation and reciprocity.

We are still at a stage where we are struggling to establish international presence. All stakeholders need to recognise that building an internationally recognizable brand is a long way off.

LEVEL PLAYING FIELD

Besides audits and attest functions, MNFs have grown in size and recognition due to their large consulting practice. They have managed conflict by creating multiple entities, some of which operate as surrogate entities outside the oversight of ICAI. It is essential to bring MNFs within the regulatory framework and the global networking guidelines are a step in that direction. This will, to an extent, provide level playing field within India.

All of us agree that the independence of the auditor cannot be compromised and conflict of interest must be avoided. However, the definition of a related party for determining conflict of interest is not consistent across regulations. It is imperative that there should not be any divergence between Company Law, SEBI, NAFRA and ICAI. There is need to lay down clear ground rules that apply and are enforced consistently for all CA firms, including MNFs.

MANAGING CONFLICT

ICAI has framed regulations which prohibit CA firms from taking up non-attest functions for certain Audit clients. There are stringent restrictions, but due to conflicting versions across different regulations there is confusion and lack of clarity. Surely, there should be one set of uniform guidelines. Secondly, such restrictions should not apply to unlisted SMES and other privately owned companies and the “one size fits all” approach needs a rethink. The smaller enterprises prefer getting all their services from a single service provider as this is a value proposition for them. Arguably, the advantage of relaxing these restrictions for small entities would far outweigh any risk of professional independence being compromised. In many jurisdictions smaller entities are exempted from Audit. In India also such exemption to small entities is under consideration through amendment to the Companies Act.

MULTI-DISCIPLINARY FIRMS

Multi-disciplinary firms are another initiative that needs to be fast tracked. Time is ripe for CAs to partner with other professionals, including technology experts, to enhance their service offerings. The idea has widespread acceptance, and it is time that it is operationalized so that CA firms leverage expertise of other domain experts.

Despite the clear advantages, conflict of regulatory jurisdiction (e.g. ICAI vs Bar Council) is a major roadblock. Who regulates whom if an MDF is charged with misconduct or professional violation could trigger jurisdictional nightmare. Strict restrictions on advertising and branding as well on raising capital through innovative funding methods is another damper.

CA firms doing audit functions are restricted from doing several non-attest functions and this is pushing firms from being either an all-audit firm or all consulting and non-attest firm. This means audit firm may not opt to partner with other professionals as each will restrict and may even cannibalize the other. On the other hand, CA firms not engaged in audit and attest functions are increasingly preferring to stay altogether outside the ambit of ICAI regulations.

So, there are legal amendments that would have to be formalized and harmonized across different disciplines if MDF is to become a reality. But even more important, the inherent contradiction will have to be acknowledged and bridged.

CONCLUSION

Indian CA firms have the quality and the capabilities to compete with MNFs, if they are unshackled from the constraints imposed on them and are provided a level playing field. In recent times, several mid-sized firms have emerged as a viable alternative to the MNFs. But the gap between them and the MNFs is huge in terms of size, scale and access to resources. These Indian firms must now go through a second renaissance of scaling up not incrementally but exponentially. Both organic and inorganic growth options need to be considered. In particular, they should consider further consolidation amongst themselves. After all the Big eight consolidated into the Big four.

Indian firms have an opportunity to realise their tryst with destiny. The atmosphere is conducive and time is ripe with the momentum set by the Government. However, I am sure even ICAI recognises that what has been done is just a beginning and the road is long and arduous with many hurdles to be crossed.

ICAI needs to look at the regulatory framework with a clean slate without carrying the legacy of the past. If Indian firms are to emerge as global players, then the Indian regulations must model itself based on global norms. If our regulations are more restrictive then we lose our competitive advantage. Indian firms cannot compete with their hands and feet tied up.

Similarly, partners of Indian firms have to get out of their narrow thinking of clinging to their name, which has no real brand value or unwillingness to let go of control.

If all stakeholders work in sync, the vision of the next big firm emerging from India need not be just the proverbial castle in the air. It can indeed be a dream that can be actualised.

Why Globalisation Matters The Strategic Imperative For Indian Accounting Firms

As Indian businesses expand internationally, globalisation is no longer merely an option for Indian accounting firms, but a strategic necessity. Currently, many firms remain focused on domestic compliance or act as mere back-office executioners for foreign networks. If they fail to adapt, they risk losing high-value clients, top talent, and market relevance. To survive, Indian firms must transition from individual, partner-led practices into unified, capability-led global institutions. This requires building strategic international alliances, investing in enterprise-grade technology, creating dedicated cross-border teams, and developing deep sector-specific expertise. Ultimately, firms must become trusted, globally connected advisors to accompany their clients’ international growth.

INTRODUCTION

क्षणे क्षणे यन्नवतामुपैति तदेव रूपं रमणीयतायाः।

That which attains newness every single moment, that alone is the form of true excellence.

Nothing could be more relevant than this from Shishupal Vadha in the context of Raivatak Mountain.

In this everchanging world, evolution and adaptation to change is the only constant. The globalisation of Indian accounting firms is no longer an aspirational conversation to be conducted at conferences; it is becoming a strategic necessity arising from the changing character of Indian business itself. For decades, a large part of the Indian accountancy profession grew around domestic compliance—statutory audit, tax audit, income-tax representation, company law compliance, indirect tax, exchange control filings and allied advisory. This domestic orientation served the profession well when Indian clients were largely domestic, capital was substantially local, regulatory exposure was mostly Indian and international work was either exceptional or routed through large multinational networks. That world has changed. Indian enterprises are acquiring companies abroad, raising foreign capital, setting up overseas subsidiaries, entering global supply chains, dealing with transfer pricing and Pillar Two-type tax developments, building global capability centres, and facing investors, lenders and regulators who expect advice that is integrated across jurisdictions. Therefore, the relevant question before mid-size Indian accounting firms is not whether they should become global in some abstract sense, but whether they can remain strategically relevant without building global capability.

EVER INCREASING PACE OF GLOBALISATION

India’s macroeconomic position provides the first and perhaps most compelling reason. India is projected to remain among the fastest-growing large economies, and several assessments place it on the path to becoming the third-largest economy around 2030, with S&P Global projecting annual growth of about 6.7% and India becoming the third-largest economy by fiscal 2030-31. With this scale comes a change in the nature of professional services demand. A larger economy does not merely produce larger domestic companies; it produces companies with global ambitions, international supply chains, cross-border financing requirements and multi-country regulatory exposure. India has also become a major destination for global capital.

ever increasing

Growth Trends FDI ODI

The Chart below gives some idea about how cross border investments have grown in last 2 decades and where it is likely to go in next 5 – 7 years.

[Table created from data from DPIIT, RBI, UNCTAD and World Bank]

These numbers are not merely economic data; they are indicators of professional services opportunity. Every dollar of FDI / ODI creates advisory requirements around entry strategy, valuation, due diligence, tax structuring, FEMA compliance, transfer pricing, accounting, audit, reporting, governance and eventual exit. This does not only require knowledge of the domestic laws but also laws of other jurisdictions of either the investor / investee as the case may be.

This outward expansion changes the advisory landscape. A client that acquires a subsidiary in Europe, establishes a manufacturing operation in Vietnam, invests in a UAE holding company, sells SaaS products in the United States, or raises capital from Singapore does not need isolated Indian compliance advice. It needs a firm that can understand the commercial intent in India, coordinate local law, tax and accounting advice abroad, maintain consistency of positions, and take responsibility for the integrated outcome. If mid-size Indian firms cannot provide or organise such capability, the client relationship will naturally migrate to firms that can.

CHANGING CLIENT EXPECTATIONS

The profession of accountancy and related advisory services is very closely connected with the businesses and commercial entities. The profession has evolved with the changes occurring in business entities. In last few decades, the scope of services of an accounting firm has extended significantly. Due to offering of diverse services by the Indian Accounting Firms (IAFs), the expectation of the society from a CA Firm has also been ever expanding and they would consider an accounting firm which provides an entire catena of services to be more “evolved” as compared to a firm which restricts to certain areas of services.

Similarly, the international businesses have been eying fondly active investments in India. If India is not the most preferred investment destination, it is certainly one of the most preferred destinations. The sheer size of the domestic demand is attracting global companies for having more firm Indian presence.

A mid-market Indian company today may have export revenues, overseas warehouses, foreign subsidiaries, ESOPs for international employees, global investors, inter-company services, royalty payments, cloud-based digital operations, and permanent establishment risks in multiple countries. Even when the company is not large, the complexity of its footprint may be global. Further, even if an entity does not have such global reach, aspirational targets for all growing entities include the above. Such clients increasingly expect their trusted advisor to provide a single conversation across audit, tax, regulatory, valuation, transaction, ESG, technology risk and business advisory. They may not insist that every service be rendered by the same legal entity, but they do expect the Indian advisor to organise the solution, manage the interfaces and remain accountable. A single-location, single-speciality, single-jurisdiction practice therefore appears increasingly inadequate for growth-oriented clients. The relevant capability is not merely technical knowledge in one area, but the ability to assemble and govern a multi-disciplinary, multi-jurisdictional response.

With introduction of Transfer Pricing in India under the income tax laws, the IAFs could no longer provide complete tax service to a multi-national enterprise unless the IAFs had capability of transfer pricing advisory, document preparations (which was multi-disciplinary) and also knowledge about the transfer pricing regulations of the jurisdiction of the counter related party, as the policy and the transaction has to meet the regulations of both the countries. Those IAFs which could not cope with these requirements ultimately lost this work to the firms which could provide such services and in long term also impacted retention of such clients for the tax services.

Similarly, with introduction of IFRS, initially and then Ind AS, which were primarily adopted from the International Accounting Standards, several firms which could not cope with the complex requirements of these standards, lost out to the firms which could do so.

The Globalisation Mandate

STATUS TODAY

There is almost negligible presence of IAFs in any major economies, save and except in some specialised jurisdiction like UAE, Singapore, etc. IAFs have somehow chosen to remain subservient as a service provider to international accounting firms without creating their own brand presence in any of the major jurisdictions. These outsourced service outfits are marketed on the principles of cost arbitrage, whereas the real arbitrage is exceptional intelligence that we IAFs possess in accounting, finance and tax related matters irrespective of the country and complexities. The question that arises is whether we are able to leverage the said capabilities in true sense or allow these capabilities to be leveraged by other firms.

What we have observed is that even attempts of the larger and mid-size IAFs have been to persuade ICAI to enable them to become members of some foreign networks / associations. Our aspirations are also not centred around creating a global branded capability of ourselves that is India centric, India focussed and India controlled. This would only make us subservient to the global players including networks / associations.

Due to our almost negligible presence in countries outside India, whenever a person needs services outside India, IAFs have to either rely on their associates outside India or let the client source services independently from their own sources. In this process, we may lose a client to multi-national accounting firms (MNFs), who are vying for such opportunities. Similarly, due to our absence outside India, when an entity outside India enters India for the first time, it has no background of the IAFs and therefore they by default fall in the hands of MNFs.

EMERGENCE OF GLOBAL CAPABILITY CENTRES (GCC)

One of the drivers for the need for changes in the service areas, is the transformation of India into a hub for global enterprise operations. The rise of global capability centres in India demonstrates both India’s professional talent advantage and the risk to Indian accounting firms if they remain positioned only as manpower providers. NASSCOM-Zinnov’s India GCC landscape report notes that India had over 1,700 GCCs in FY 2024, with more than 2,975 centres, estimated revenue of USD 64.6 billion and employment of over 1.9 million people; it further projects GCC revenue of around USD 100 billion by 2030 and headcount crossing 2.5 million. The significance of GCCs for accounting firms is twofold. On the positive side, they confirm the world’s trust in Indian talent, process discipline and cost-effective delivery. On the cautionary side, they show how Indian professionals may become embedded in global service delivery without Indian firms necessarily owning the brand, the client relationship or the intellectual property. If Indian accounting firms remain content with back-office execution for foreign networks, they may grow in headcount but not in institutional stature. The strategic challenge is to move from “delivery capacity” to “market-facing capability”. The move has been from Global Delivery Centre (GDC) to GCC.
Now we have to be the client facing capability created in India.

INCREASING COMPETITION FOR GLOBAL WORK IN INDIA

The competitive landscape reinforces the urgency. Multinational networks and global advisory firms have become more aggressive in India because India is both a high-growth market and a global delivery base. At the same time, global networks outside the Big Four and large consulting brands are strengthening their India presence through member firms, affiliates, alliances and specialist practices. The Indian deals market also reflects the increasing sophistication of business activity where each transaction generates work in diligence, tax, valuation, financial reporting, integration, controls and post-acquisition compliance. If Indian firms do not scale their capabilities, much of this work will be captured by larger networks, even when the client relationship originated locally.

Increasing competitions

RISKS FOR IAFs

There is, therefore, a serious strategic risk for domestically focused firms. The first risk is client leakage: the firm may retain routine compliance but lose strategic work. The second risk is talent leakage: ambitious professionals prefer platforms offering cross-border exposure, sector specialisation and technology-enabled work. The third risk is margin compression: domestic compliance work is increasingly standardised, automated and price-sensitive, whereas integrated advisory commands better economics. The fourth risk is brand stagnation: firms that do not invest in visible capability may become known for execution, not judgement. The fifth risk is dependency: Indian firms may become sub-contractors or resource pools for global networks rather than independent institutions with their own market identity. These risks do not arise suddenly; they accumulate gradually as clients outgrow the firm’s capability.

STRATEGIC GLOBAL CAPACITY CREATION

The answer, however, is not that every Indian mid-size firm must immediately open offices across continents or join a global network. Globalisation should not be confused with foreign addresses. The real strategic requirement is controlled access to global capability. A firm may build this through a combination of its own specialist teams, carefully chosen correspondent firms, bilateral alliances, referral arrangements, sector-focused collaborations and technology platforms. The essential point is that the Indian firm must remain the relationship owner and solution architect. It should not merely “refer” the client abroad and disappear. It should frame the issue, select the overseas advisor, coordinate advice, challenge assumptions, ensure Indian implications are considered, manage timelines, and present an integrated conclusion. This is the difference between being a local practitioner with contacts and being a globalising professional institution.

For practical implementation, mid-size firms should begin with a deliberate international strategy rather than opportunistic networking. Recommended steps could be as under:

STRATEGIC GLOBAL CAPACITY CREATION

1. The first step is to map the existing client base and identify global touchpoints: exports, imports, overseas subsidiaries, foreign investors, ECBs, ODI, transfer pricing, digital services, expatriate employees, cross-border M&A, and international tax exposures. This mapping will reveal which jurisdictions matter most—often the UAE, Singapore, the United States, the United Kingdom, the Netherlands, Mauritius, Japan, Germany and selected African or Southeast Asian markets.

2. The second step is to create internal service lines around recurring global needs: international tax, transfer pricing, FEMA and ODI advisory, cross-border transaction support, IFRS / Ind AS reporting, global mobility, ESG reporting and technology risk.

3. The third step is to identify reliable overseas firms in priority jurisdictions and convert informal relationships into documented working protocols covering response time, confidentiality, conflict checks, fee sharing, quality standards and client communication.

4. The fourth step is to invest in knowledge infrastructure. A globalising firm cannot depend entirely on individual memory or partner-level improvisation. It requires jurisdiction notes, checklists, standard engagement models, tax treaty summaries, transfer pricing documentation protocols, foreign subsidiary reporting calendars, and templates for cross-border diligence. These tools need not be elaborate at the beginning, but they must be systematic.

5. The fifth step is to create a cross-border desk within the firm, even if initially small, which acts as the coordinating point for international matters. Such a desk should not be a decorative label; it should maintain the alliance database, track assignments, update regulatory developments, coordinate webinars with foreign firms, and support partners in client conversations.

6. The sixth step is to develop talent differently. Global capability cannot be built only through senior partner relationships. Younger professionals must be trained in international tax concepts, IFRS, global audit methodologies, data analytics, business communication and project management. They should participate in joint assignments with overseas firms and, where feasible, undertake short secondments. The firm should encourage writing, speaking and thought leadership on cross-border issues because brand is built not only by doing work but by being seen as capable of doing it.

7. The seventh step is to choose sectors in which the firm can build differentiated credibility. For example, Indian firms can develop strong cross-border practices around pharmaceuticals, engineering goods, chemicals, IT/SaaS, renewable energy, financial services, family-owned multinational groups, start-ups expanding overseas, and inbound manufacturing. A sector lens allows a mid-size firm to compete on insight rather than size.

FINER ASPECTS FOR GLOBAL ACCEPTABILITY – TECHNOLOGY – CONFIDENTIALITY – BRANDING

Technology must be treated as infrastructure, not as an accessory. A firm that seeks to manage multi-jurisdictional work requires secure document management, workflow tools, knowledge repositories, data analytics, collaboration platforms and cyber controls. Global clients will increasingly ask how data is protected, how work is reviewed, how continuity is ensured, and how quality is monitored. The internationalisation of services also brings challenges of data privacy, confidentiality, sanctions screening, anti-money laundering sensitivity, independence conflicts and professional liability. Globalisation expands opportunity, but it also expands risk. Mid-size firms must therefore strengthen governance, risk acceptance procedures, engagement documentation, quality review and insurance arrangements before aggressively pursuing cross-border work.

A further strategic shift is required in branding. Indian accounting firms have historically underinvested in institutional brand building, partly because professional work was relationship-led and partly because regulatory culture discouraged overt marketing. However, brand building need not mean aggressive advertising. It means clarity of positioning, quality of publications, consistency of client experience, visible expertise, professional website content, participation in international forums, collaboration with chambers of commerce, and the ability to present credentials confidently. If Indian firms wish to become alternatives to multinational service providers, they must project themselves not as low-cost substitutes but as high-quality, India-rooted, globally connected advisors.

COLLABORATIONS AND NETWORKING

The profession must also recognise that independence and collaboration can coexist. Joining or setting up your own global network may be suitable for some firms. In fact, an Indian firm or group of firms, may consciously decide to either become member of (though not the best option) or set up a global network, which has scope for preserving strategic autonomy, avoid restrictive branding obligations, and work with best-fit firms across jurisdictions. What matters is not membership for its own sake, but capability, quality and control. A carefully curated independent alliance model may sometimes serve clients better than a passive network membership, provided the Indian firm invests in governance and relationship depth.

CONCLUSION

In conclusion, globalisation matters because Indian clients have globalised, capital has globalised, regulation has globalised, competition has globalised and talent aspirations have globalised. The accounting firm that remains purely domestic may continue to survive, but its ability to remain central to high-value client decisions will diminish. For mid-size Indian firms, the strategic imperative is to move from compliance-centric practices to capability-led institutions; from manpower supply to brand ownership; from referral dependence to coordinated global delivery; and from individual partner networks to firm-level international strategy. The opportunity is considerable. India has the talent, credibility, entrepreneurial energy and client base to create globally respected accounting and advisory institutions. The next phase will belong to firms that do not merely follow their clients abroad, but build the confidence, systems and alliances to accompany them as trusted global advisors.

Conclusion

From The President

My Dear BCAS Family,

The month of July signifies not only the beginning of the busy compliance and assurance season but also heralds the onset of a new academic year at BCAS, coupled with the new leadership team taking over.

I would like to welcome CA Kinjal Shah as the President and CA Mandar Telang as the Vice President of the Society for the academic year 2026-27. Kinjalbhai is an experienced professional who has been associated with BCAS for several years in various capacities and is also a techno-savvy administrator with an eye for detail. Mandar is a solid professional in his chosen field of Indirect Taxation, methodical in his work, and tech-savvy. Alongside them, CA Kinjal Bhuta, CA Mrinal Mehta, and CA Samit Saraf complete the team of youthful office bearers who will bring vibrancy and push the Society to greater heights in the coming years.

As part of our ongoing self-reflection, the Managing Committee formulated a comprehensive five-year strategic plan for the Society in 2023–24, structured around six key pillars (reach, professional development, networking, advocacy, Yuva Shakti and chartered for change), which is midway through its implementation. During the year, to implement these themes into meaningful outcomes, we identified several focused projects and strategic verticals, each of which was reviewed through periodic monitoring and key actionable plans. The overarching theme binding the implementation of various projects and initiatives was Logistical and Administrative Excellence, reflecting our continuing ISO accreditation, which was further renewed until 28th February, 2029. Accordingly, we have continued to focus on strengthening operational efficiency and ensuring the smooth execution of programmes, events, and internal processes. Continuous efforts were made to streamline events and administrative functions, improve coordination mechanisms, and enhance the overall effectiveness of programme delivery and backend support systems.

SEVEN STRATEGIC INITIATIVES:

Considering that we are in the seventh month of the year and as the seventy-seventh President, I would like to focus on seven strategic initiatives that I believe will go a long way toward building and strengthening the Society’s professional development and visibility in the coming years.

BCAS A New Chapter of Excellence

  •  Appointment of Sherpas – The formal appointment of Sherpas in 13 cities during the year played a key role in connecting with members, facilitating local engagement, and supporting the Society’s outreach efforts across the country.
  • Town Hall and Sherpa-Led Events – These were conducted at Jaipur, Kolkata, Thane, Indore, Coimbatore and Vadodara with help and support from local associations in certain cases, covering diverse topics, depending on the needs of local members. These events fulfil a key finding from last year’s membership survey, in which outstation participants longed for more in-person programmes on contemporary topics.
  • AARAMBH and FALCON Initiatives – Through the AARAMBH – MAKING ARTICLESHIP COUNT initiative, we engaged directly with students by sharing practical insights, real-life experiences, and guidance from young Chartered Accountants who have recently walked the same path, with the aim of getting students and youngsters familiarised with the Society. Under the FALCON (FROM ARTICLESHIP TO LEADERHIP CARVING ONES NICHE) initiative, BCAS offers aspiring graduates an opportunity to interact and learn from young Core Group members who have walked the path before them. The initial sessions under these initiatives were conducted at H.R. College of Commerce & Economics and N M College of Commerce & Economics, respectively.
  • Sakhi Circle and Women’s RefresHER Courses (Nari Shakti Initiative) – The formation of the Sakhi Circle, a women-only study circle, provided a dedicated platform for women CAs to converse, connect and collaborate on professional and technical developments in a supportive environment. During the year, 3 meetings were held by senior women core group members on topics aimed at encouraging women’s uniqueness and on soft skills. During the year, the Society also launched Specialised RefresHER Course under the BCAS Academy Platform exclusively for women CAs, covering relevant technical, regulatory, and professional subjects to help members stay updated in an evolving professional landscape. A total of 14 sessions were conducted during the year by experienced women subject-matter experts.
  • SAMVAD with BCAS – This was launched as a PODCAST SERIES, wherein recorded conversations with renowned speakers on certain topics that inspire insights and shape the future, moderated by the President and Past Presidents, were released. These were all recorded at our own in-house studio.
  • Collaboration and Outreach Initiatives – The Society continues to deepen its existing collaborations with IMC, CTC, WIRC – ICAI, amongst others. Further, during the year, an MOU was signed with SIMSREE to focus on relevant professional opportunities and research and a campus visit and lecture meeting was organised during the RRC at IIM-BANGALORE. During the year, the Society continued to collaborate with NITI Aayog, the premier think tank on policy and planning initiatives, and with the Bharti Institute of Public Policy – Research Division of the Indian School of Business (BIPP), by participating in a multi-stakeholder workshop on reforming tax policy consultation in India. BCAS also hosted an outreach programme in association with the Office of the Chief Commissioner of Income Tax – 4, Mumbai, to raise awareness of the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 2025, and the Income Tax Rules, 2026, which came into effect from April 1, 2026. The session was conducted under ‘Prarambh 2026’ initiative of the Income Tax Department.
  • Reading Club – BCAS recently launched the ‘BCAS Reading Forum’ with the objective of reviving the BCAS library and creating a community around the idea of reading through discussions, curated conversations, and reading-led engagements.

To conclude, I would like to reflect on BCAS’s journey and its commitment to collective progress over the past 77 years with the following quote from Henry Ford, which aptly sums up our ethos.

“Coming together is a beginning, staying together is progress, and working together is success.”

As we end another year, I would like to place on record my deep appreciation to all the members, office bearers, Past Presidents and other stakeholders for their co-operation and allowing me an opportunity to serve. May God bless you all, and may God bless our beloved BCAS!

A big thank you to one and all!

Warm Regards,

CA. Zubin F. Billimoria

President

Globalisation Of Indian Firms | A Timed Opportunity

Some opportunities arrive quietly and leave just as quietly. In 2002, the collapse of a global accounting giant left a vacuum in the professional services market, instantly consolidating the Big Five into the Big Four. It was a moment when a new, formidable institution could have emerged from the Global South. India missed that window. Over two decades later, despite producing hundreds of thousands of the most rigorously trained professionals in the world, India has yet to build a single accounting firm of true global scale. We have mastered the art of exporting exceptional talent, but we have fundamentally struggled to export the institution.

The market will no longer wait for us to catch up. Indian corporations are no longer purely domestic entities; they are acquiring assets overseas, operating complex cross-border supply chains, and navigating multi-jurisdictional tax and regulatory regimes. They require advisors who can follow them, providing integrated, multi-jurisdictional competence with a single point of accountability. Simultaneously, technology has dismantled the traditional advantages of geographic proximity. Cloud infrastructure and artificial intelligence are rapidly commoditizing routine compliance work. The premium has shifted entirely to high-level professional judgment and trust.

So, what holds Indian firms back? The barrier is rarely technical capability; it is our structural DNA. The Indian accounting sector remains deeply fragmented, with the vast majority of practices operating as small proprietorships. Many firms remain trapped in the illusion that staying small preserves professional independence. We are often wedded to founder names, reluctant to share authority, and deeply reliant on individual hero-partners who control marquee client relationships. A practice built entirely around the personal credibility of one or two individuals cannot cross a state line, let alone an international border. More importantly, the regulatory architecture has historically constrained the form, branding, ownership, fee-sharing and multidisciplinary models through which Indian CA firms could participate in international platforms.

The rise of the Fifth Firm

To build a firm that travels well, leadership must pivot from personality to systemic architecture. Globalisation demands transitioning from a loose confederation of partners sharing a letterhead to a unified institution. This requires uncomfortable shifts. Client relationships must belong to the firm, not the individual. Technology must be treated not as a discretionary overhead, but as the core infrastructure that enables scale and enforces quality. Most critically, it requires massive capital. Expanding internationally, attracting top-tier local talent in foreign markets, and deploying enterprise-grade technology necessitates funding models that challenge traditional partnership economics. It requires patient capital and investment discipline: whether generated internally, pooled across partners, or enabled through structures that remain consistent with professional independence.

Furthermore, true global expansion exposes the cracks in a firm’s foundation. Domestic success is frequently insulated by long-standing relationships and regulatory barriers. In a new market, incumbency vanishes, and the firm must survive purely on its distinctive value. To survive this exposure, firms must view regulation and independence not as constraints, but as the very architecture of trust. A global practice cannot operate with variable ethics—strict in one jurisdiction and flexible in another. Institutional culture is not a values statement; it is what happens when a junior associate spots an error at midnight and raises it, even when no senior partner is watching.

The forces of technology, client fatigue with market concentration, and shifting regulatory frameworks are finally aligning to create an opening for the “Fifth Firm”. However, going global must never be a vanity project pursued simply to print a foreign address on a business card. It is the ultimate diagnostic test of a firm’s resilience and maturity.

History reminds us that windows of opportunity do not stay open indefinitely. The question facing the Indian accounting profession is no longer whether we have the talent to operate on a global stage; our professionals already run the engine rooms of the world’s largest corporations. The real question is whether we have the institutional courage to build our own. We can choose the comfort of our fragmented domestic ecosystem, remaining highly competent participants in a game governed by others. Or, we can undertake the heavy work of forging an enduring global institution—one where the firm outlives its founders, where economics are shared, and where the name on the door stands for uncompromising trust. Two decades ago, we watched an opportunity pass us by. The ground has shifted once again. This time, we must be the ones to build.

Best Regards,

CA. Sunil Gabhawalla

Editor

द्रव्येण सर्वे वशा !!

This is an age old truth in life. This is a common experience over hundreds of years. An irrefutable reality! The Subhashit reads as follows: –

माता निन्दति नाभिनन्दति पिता भ्राता न संभाषते

भृत्य : कुप्यति नानुगच्छति सुत: कान्ता च नालिङगते !

अर्थप्रार्थनशङ्कया न कुरुते संभाषणं वै सुहृद

तस्मात् द्रव्यमुपार्जयस्व सुमते ! द्रव्येण सर्वे वशा : !!

This is the plight of a poor man! Literal meaning –

माता निन्दति   Mother keeps on cursing

नाभिनन्दति पिता   Father does not hold such son in high esteem. Father criticises him.

भ्राता न संभाषते    Brother does not talk or converse with him.

भृत्य : कुप्यति       The servant disrespects him or gets irritated.

नानूगच्छति सुत:   The son does not follow him nor does he obey him.

कान्ता च नालिङगते      Wife does not love (embrace) him. She keeps a distance!

अर्थप्रार्थनशङ्कया न कुरुते संभाषणं वै सुहृद    F riends avoid him thinking that he will demand money from him. She is always displeased.

तस्मात द्रव्यमुपार्जयस्व सुमते   Hence, Oh wise man, earn money, make money.

द्रव्येण सर्वे वशा:   Since, money makes the mare go.

The weight of wealth

If one has not earned money nor if one possesses money, one is nowhere! One is not counted at all. The family members do not love him, nor respect him. They may even disown such person. They may have sympathy but no affection or respect.

In the society, people will avoid him. Even in his friend circle, he has no say. He is not welcome. No one listens to him nor cares for him.

If a man is poor, his whole family also may suffer from all these difficulties among their relatives or in the society. Poor man/family may not be even invited for social functions or events.

Extending this logic, a poor community or even a poor nation may be ignored or looked down upon. Unfortunately, even good qualities of poor people will not be recognised or appreciated.

On the other hand, if one has money one is regarded as a talented and respectable person! सर्वे गुणा: कांचनमाश्रयन्ते We have earlier studied this Subhashit – meaning all good qualities and virtues automatically get attributed to a wealthy person.

Hence, friends, always try to be a moneyed person!

Learning Events At BCAS

1. BCAS Jointly with TAASI Presents: A 2-Day Knowledge Symposium & Summit held on Friday, 15th May 2026 to Saturday, 16th May 2026 @ Residency Towers, Avinashi Road, Coimbatore.

As part of its outreach initiative, the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society, in collaboration with The Auditors’ Association of Southern India (TAASI), organized a two-day conference in Coimbatore, attended by over 100 participants. The program was thoughtfully designed to meet the specific needs of industry professionals and practicing members in the region.

The conference opened with a welcome address by CA Zubin Billimoria and CA S. Venkatesh, Presidents of the two organisations, followed by a keynote address by CA G. Ramaswamy, former President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India. In his address, he underscored the importance of continuous professional learning, ethical governance, and financial discipline in today’s rapidly evolving business environment.

The first technical session, titled “Preparation for an IPO,” was delivered by Adv. Manan Lahoty along with Ms. Janhavi Manohar and covered the key preparatory steps involved in an IPO, including timelines, promoter identification, estate planning, corporate restructuring, board constitution, due diligence, and financial readiness. The session also explained the distinction between public and confidential filing frameworks and discussed how companies can assess and strengthen their IPO preparedness.

This was followed by a presentation by Mr. Jinesh Doshi on IPO valuation, viewed as a strategic exercise in sustainable wealth creation rather than a mere fundraising event. He highlighted the role of valuation, pricing discipline, governance quality, and investor confidence in ensuring long-term IPO success, while cautioning against aggressive pricing and weak post-listing performance.
The session on succession planning through private trusts was presented by CA Paresh P. Shah, who outlined the objectives, structures, and advantages of private family trusts as compared with wills, gifts, HUFs, and family arrangements. He also covered key legal and tax considerations under the Indian Trusts Act, the Income-tax Acts of 1961 and 2025, FEMA, and relevant international aspects, including the taxation of determinate and discretionary trusts, stamp duty, anti-avoidance rules, and an offshore trust case study.

On the second day, a Tax Summit was held, during which five speakers addressed the delegates on various topics relating to direct and indirect taxation. CA Raghavender Kuncharapu spoke on the practical issues surrounding e-way bills and the movement of goods under GST, including detention, interception, documentation checks, route and vehicle changes, and the response strategy under Sections 68, 129, and 130.

This was followed by Taxation Bytes, where CA Abhinav Venkatesh presented a detailed overview of the minimum alternate tax framework under the Income Tax Act, 2025, covering applicability, tax rates, book profit computation, MAT credit, filing requirements, and key amendments and judicial precedents. CA V. Venkatram then examined the GST treatment of OIDAR services, intermediary services, and electronic commerce, with emphasis on place of supply, time of supply, registration, recipient-side compliance, and the evolving jurisprudence in cross-border digital transactions.

The summit also featured a session on the tax and FEMA implications of cross-border remittances, presented by Dr. CA Mayur B. Nayak, who discussed TDS on payments to non-residents, Form 15CA/15CB and Form 145/146 compliance, LRS limits, overseas direct investment, and the treatment of foreign assets and business remittances under FEMA. The conference concluded with an interactive session by CA Sunil Gabhawalla on input tax credit under GST, including eligibility conditions, matching and reversal rules, blocked credits, fake invoicing concerns, ISD and cross-charge issues, and important judicial precedents.

2. Special Session for under privileged students by BCAS Foundation. 28th April 2026

BCAS Foundation has taken up a number of activities to contribute to the society in many different ways. One such activity was undertaken by the BCAS Foundation at the request of Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust, to empower youths in Mumbai’s slum areas. Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust is running a number of centres in different parts of Mumbai bastis to empower women, children and you ths belonging to the marginalised sections of the society through various activities. The sessions were held at the training centre of the Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust at Jogeshwari (East) on Tuesday, 28th April, 2026.

Dr CA Mayur Nayak, conducted a special session on “Goal Setting and Overcoming Failure“. He motivated youths to set goals in life, think big, be positive and develop a strong mindset to overcome failures and challenges of life. Youths were inspired and engaged actively through practical examples, motivational stories and attractive PowerPoint presentation.

The session on “Grooming & Personality Development” was conducted by CA Mihir Sheth. The idea was to give the students orientation on importance of grooming and how it can help them transform into a well- rounded personality to succeed in real world. The workshop was conducted with practical life examples which helped students to learn about grooming externally and internally too, through practical exercises, activities, videos to make them future ready. Topics covered were personal hygiene, dressing, communication skill, confidence building, time management, social etiquette, digital etiquette, goal setting etc.

Mr. Namit Vanmali, Key Person in the Leadership Role at the Rangoonwala Foundation (India) Trust facilitated the session.

35 students from 10th to 12th standards enthusiastically participated and interacted with the faculty in this Life Skill session which was a part of the 3 day Yuva Saarathi Workshop.

3. Webinar on IBC Amendment Act, 2026 and Corporate Laws Amendment Bill, 2026 – Key Changes and Practical Implications held on Tuesday, 28th April 2026 @ Virtual.

The Finance, Corporate and Allied Laws Committee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society organised a webinar on “IBC (Amendment) Act, 2026 and Corporate Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2026 – Key Changes and Practical Implications” in view of the notification of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Act, 2026 on 6th April 2026 and the proposed Corporate Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2026, which are expected to significantly influence the regulatory and compliance landscape. The objective was to familiarise members with the legislative intent and the key practical implications for businesses and stakeholders.

The programme was conducted in two segments. CA Sunil Kumar Bansal discussed the key amendments under the IBC framework, covering critical changes and implications of the same. CS Amita Desai covered the proposed changes under the Corporate Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2026, highlighting emerging issues and implications for corporates and professionals.

The webinar received an encouraging response from members across practice and industry. 26 participants enrolled for this webinar from 13+ cities participated in the webinar. Participants appreciated the clarity of explanations and the practical insights shared by the speakers.

Scan to watch online at BCAS Academy

Webinar on IBC Amendment Act, 2026 and Corporate Laws Amendment Bill, 2026

4. BCAS Reading Forum | Inaugural Session held on 21st April 2026 @ BCAS – Hybrid.

BCAS inaugurated the ‘BCAS Reading Forum’ with an interactive session featuring Mr. Shantanu Naidu, author, entrepreneur and founder of ‘Bookies’. The Forum has been initiated with the objective of reviving the BCAS library and creating a community around the idea of reading through discussions, curated conversations and reading-led engagements, centered around the thought – “Read, Discuss, Reflect, Rise!”

The session focused on the role of reading in an increasingly fast-paced and AI-driven world. Shantanu shared his thoughts on how reading helps build empathy, attention, reflection and independent thinking, and why books continue to remain relevant even in an age dominated by digital content and short-form media.
A key takeaway from the discussion was his “50:50 theory”- if one carries a book, there is always a possibility of reading it, whereas not carrying one almost certainly results in replacing reading time with scrolling. He also spoke about the importance of nurturing hobbies, engaging in offline activities and consciously protecting one’s attention span.

Participants were introduced to the idea behind Bookies, a reading movement that encourages silent community reading and meaningful conversations around books. The session also explored how stories, biographies and narrative non-fiction can shape perspectives and influence personal and professional growth.

The launch of the BCAS Reading Forum also marks a renewed focus on the BCAS LIBRARY and its lending facilities. Members and student members are encouraged to explore the Society’s library collection, enroll for the lending facility, borrow books, and become part of a growing reading community at BCAS. In an age of constant scrolling and shrinking attention spans, the Forum seeks to create space for deeper reading, reflection and meaningful conversations.

The event concluded with an engaging interaction with participants, including a rapid-fire segment and audience questions. Several book recommendations were also shared during the session, including Tuesdays with Morrie, A Man Called Otto, The Book Thief, The Old Man and the Sea and A Gentleman in Moscow.

The inaugural session set the tone for the BCAS Reading Forum’s future initiatives aimed at building a sustained culture of reading, discussion and reflective learning within the BCAS community. Watch this space for more reading-led conversations and community engagements.

Scan to watch online at YouTube

BCAS Reading Forum

5. Webinar on New Income Tax Rules, 2026 – Decoding the New Tax Framework held on Monday, 6th April 2026 @ Virtual.

The Direct Tax committee of BCAS had organised a webinar on the new Income Tax Rules, 2026 in virtual mode to address the new Income Tax Rules 2026 and the allied new forms.

CA Ashok Mehta opened with a structured comparison of the TDS provisions under the Income Tax Act, 1961 vis-à-vis the new Income Tax Act, 2025, covering the revised threshold amounts and applicable rates of deduction. He then walked participants through the changes in applicable forms and due dates, with a focused discussion on the new Forms 145 and 146 governing foreign remittances and international tax provisions. Form 141 and the mandatory TIN requirement for foreign payments were explained in particular depth.

The changes in the salary perquisites valuation like the motor vehicle, education allowance, free meals, gift vouchers, amendments in house rent allowance were discussed as per the new tax provisions. Some practical aspects such as taxation of salary arrears, Form 130 (erstwhile Form 16), and transactions requiring mandatory PAN quoting were also covered.

Lastly, the session concluded with a detailed discussion on the revised Tax Audit form and key changes in the Transfer Pricing report, equipping participants with the clarity needed to maintain requisite records for audit purposes.

The webinar offered a comprehensive and practice-oriented walkthrough of the significant amendments brought in by the new Income Tax Rules, 2026

Scan to watch online at BCAS Academy

Webinar on New Income Tax Rules, 2026

II. BCAS IN NEWS & MEDIA

  •  BCAS has been featured in several news and media platforms, showing our active involvement, professional contributions, and commitment to the field. This reflects the growing recognition of BCAS in the public and professional space.

Link: https://bcasonline.org/bcas-in-news/

QR Code:

BCAS News and Media

SN Photos june 2026

30th International Tax and Finance (ITF) Conference

The International Tax Committee of BCAS organized ITF which was attended by nearly 200 delegates, including senior professionals and experts from across the country.

The 4-day Conference commenced with intense group discussion on Paper I – ‘Global Mobility – 360° Perspective on Tax & Regulatory issues’ authored by CA Vishal Gada on Day 1. This was followed by an insightful address by CA Amish Thakkar on ‘AI in International Tax and Finance’ where practical AI tools prepared by him were demonstrated and their application in professional practice was explained. The tax tools were based on topics of the Conference and were shared by the speaker. The first paper writer, CA Vishal Gada, then presented on his paper considering the issues raised in the Group Discussion. The session dealt on several key issues surrounding global mobility with case studies designed to provoke thought and real-life application. Participants appreciated the gamut of issues covered by the faculty with aplomb.

The second day of the conference started with an involved discussion by the groups on Paper II – ‘Taxation of Intellectual Property Rights (incl. Software)’. Considering the milestone event of the 30th edition of this Conference a felicitation ceremony honouring past contributors to the International Tax Conference was held over the past 30 years with personal and video tributes from the pioneers of the ITF Group as well as past Presidents, Chairmen, Coordinators and Faculty. Post the Felicitation Ceremony, under the Chairmanship of Sr. Adv. V. Sridharan Sir, CA Ganesh Rajagopalan dealt with his presentation on the second Group Discussion Paper covering the nuanced issues in his case studies in detail. Blending legal depth with technical precision, the session unpacked the evolving landscape of IP taxation, addressing interpretational challenges. The Chairman provided his succinct comments bringing out the importance of the issues laid out by the Paper-writer. Participants acknowledged the fresh take and deep analysis of the topic which was understood to not have any major controversies now. Post lunch, most of the participants headed for Mahakaleshwar Jyotirlinga, Ujjain, and all the participants enjoyed the VIP Darshan and seamless arrangements made.

The third day of the conference opened with a highly engaging group discussion on Paper III – ‘Cross-Border Business Model Structuring (including PE issues)’. The discussion was followed by an excellent presentation on ‘Fiscally Transparent Entities’ where CA Geeta Jani. With exceptional clarity, the session demystified complex concepts around fiscally transparent entities, providing the participants with foundational understanding of the various issues surrounding such entities. Post her session, we had a presentation on ‘Transfer Pricing aspects on Intangibles’ by CA Akshay Kenkre. Drawing from his vast experience, he examined the complexities of intangible assets, their valuation, and their treatment under transfer pricing principles. The session, together with the detailed paper on the international tax principles on the same subject, offered the delegates a complete package as far as cross-border tax issues of Intangibles are concerned. The manner in which the presentation was handled made it a pleasure for the participants to glean the technical insights offered. Post lunch we had CA Rashmin Sanghvi, one of the pioneers of the ITF Group, who shared his vision and extensive study on the topic of ‘India @ 2047 : Geopolitics, Changing World Order and India’s place in a De-dollarised Globe.’ It enabled a thought-provoking discussion session that traced the evolution of global economic power structures, offering a compelling perspective on India’s emerging role and the US Dollar’s uncertain future as a global currency.

The concluding day of the conference featured a comprehensive panel discussion on “Cross-Border Business Model Structuring (including PE issues)”, after the Group Discussion held previous day. The session was ably moderated by CA Pranav Sayta with panellists CA Padamchand Khincha and Former CBDT Member Shri Akhilesh Ranjan providing their insights. The panel examined the issues thrown up from the case studies including the practical challenges and interpretational issues that arise in the application of treaty entitlement, the principal purpose test, and GAAR, drawing on judicial perspectives. The discussion brought out the complexities of balancing anti-avoidance principles with legitimate tax planning, while also offering practical insights for professionals advising in cross-border matters. The engaging exchange of views and depth of analysis provided a fitting conclusion to the conference, leaving participants with key takeaways for navigating an evolving international tax landscape.

Overall participants were pleased with the 4-day intellectual fest, in no small part due to the dedicated efforts of Conference Director CA Chintan Shah and Convenors CA Jagat Mehta, CA Mahesh Nayak, under the leadership of Chairman CA Chetan Shah and Co-Chairman CA Rutvik Sanghvi. Notably, this year saw nearly 50% participation from professionals outside Mumbai—an encouraging sign of growing national interest in the conference and its relevance across the country.

The smooth execution of the event was supported by —CA Rajesh Shah, CA Kartik Badiani, CA Mayur Nayak, CA Divya Jokhakar, CA Chaitanya Maheshwari among many other members and the BCAS Events and Admin Team—whose attention to detail and behind-the-scenes commitment ensured a seamless experience for all delegates.

30th ITF Conference

AQPAAS

Government announced a policy to promote Start Ups to encourage businesses based on innovative ideas. In response to this policy, a few intelligent individuals came together to do ‘something’ in the interest of common man.

They felt that there are no good educational institutions. Teaching quality is not up to the mark. There are no facilities for teachers and students. Parents have to bear the hefty fees of coaching classes and external tuitions. The overall performance of the students in various high level examinations is not satisfactory.

They thought of an innovative idea to solve this problem of national importance. They came out with a system called AQPAAS meaning Advance Question Papers And Answer Sheets.

They formed a public limited company with an intention to come out with an IPO as quickly as possible.

They created a network with centres in all taluka places. The procedure for students was simple. A student will have to register at least 4 months prior to any examination in the country. All KYC documents are taken and an absolute confidentiality is maintained. The entire fee is payable at the time of registration.

The promoter directors of the company contacted all Universities, Schools, Colleges, Autonomous bodies and other Institutions all over the country. The professors/teachers who are paper-setters and examiners can also register in confidence. For different levels of exams, different standards of compensation are fixed.

When any question paper for any exam is set, the paper-setter has to hand it over to the corporate
office of the company personally. 50% of his honorarium is paid up front. The balance is paid after the exam. Similarly, the model answer sheets are also created. Students have an option either to get only question papers or both – questions as well as answers. Fee structure differs accordingly.

There are also settings at the concerned printing presses. Police protection is also arranged. For various subjects, there are schemes of Combos packages.

There are a few advanced versions of the scheme. If a student registers his hand writing, then with the help of AI, the answer paper written in his handwriting also can be created in advance. A student has to simply attend at the examination hall and at appropriate time, can hand over the readymade answer sheets to the Supervisor.

There is a further version on which the company is working at present – that is, once you register with them, even your mark sheets and passing certificates also can be created right upto Ph.D.

Like a Tour and Travel Agent, the company arranges for all your admissions, registrations. Even your AI generated clone can attend the school/college or appear for the examinations

The company is in the process of expanding its activities in foreign countries as well.

No wonder that the IPO was oversubscribed 100 times!

Now, the competitors are entering this field. It has a huge potential of employment generation. Everybody is now happy!

However, now all corporates and other employers are evolving a separate and independent system of examination and assessment for the candidates who seek employment with them!

Mera Bharat Mahan!

Statistically Speaking

1. COUNTRIES WITH THE NUMBER OF AI PATENTS

Number of AI patents

2. 49 OF THE WORLD’S 50 HOTTEST CITIES ARE IN INDIA

49 OF THE WORLD'S 50 HOTTEST CITIES ARE IN INDIA

3. REAL GDP GROWTH PROJECTIONS

REAL GDP GROWTH PROJECTIONS

4. COMPARISON OF INDIA AND GLOBAL DIGITAL METRICS

COMPARISON OF INDIA AND GLOBAL DIGITAL METRICS

5. DATA CENTER CAPACITY DISTRIBUTION – % SHARE OF CAPACITY

 

DATA CENTER CAPACITY DISTRIBUTION - % SHARE OF CAPACITY

Regulatory Referencer

I. FEMA

1. RBI withdraws earlier relaxation and restricts ADs from undertaking INR Forex derivative contracts with related parties

RBI has withdrawn the relaxation provided on 1st April 2026 for authorised dealers regarding undertaking INR Forex derivative contracts with related parties. Now Authorised Dealers shall not undertake any foreign exchange derivative contract involving INR with their related parties except for the following:

i. cancellation and rollover of existing contracts; and

ii. transactions undertaken with non-related non-resident users on a back-to-back basis in terms of the Master Direction – Risk Management and Inter-Bank Dealings, dated July 05, 2016, as amended from time to time.

[A.P. (DIR Series ) Circular No. 7, dated 20th April 2026]

2. RBI issues final reporting directions for AD Category-I banks on forex derivatives involving INR by related parties

The Reserve Bank of India had issued the draft directions on ‘Reporting Instructions for Authorised Dealer Category-I Banks’ on February 16, 2026, seeking feedback from market participants, stakeholders and other interested parties. The feedback received has been examined and suitably incorporated in the final directions issued by RBI now. RBI has mandated the AD Category-I banks to report all INR-based Over-the-counter (OTC) derivative deals, including those done abroad by their group entities, to Clearing Corporation of India Limited (CCIL) to improve transparency. This includes both types of contracts (deliverable and non-deliverable), but transactions under USD 1 million and certain back-to-back hedging transactions are exempt. Banks must submit key details within 2 working days from the date of the transaction, and reporting must be completed in phases by 2028.

[Press Release dated 27th April 2026 2026-2027/152 and A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 08 dated 27th April 2026]

3. Govt. amends FEM (NDI) Rules, 2019; mandates prior govt. approval for change in beneficial ownership & prescribes reporting norms

Government had earlier amended the Press Note 2 of 2020 which laid down prior permission for FDI received from India’s land-bordering countries (LBCs). These amendments brought in vide Press Note 2 of 2026 and included a definition for ‘beneficial ownership’ as per that prescribed under the Prevention of Money-laundering Act, 2002 and the Prevention of Money-laundering (Maintenance of Records) Rules.

However, the amendment in the Foreign Exchange Management (Non-debt Instruments) Rules was awaited. The Government has now notified these amendment rules. The amendments are in line with Press Note 2 of 2026. Please refer to April 2026 issue of the BCAJ for coverage on the same.

[Notification No. S.O. 2174(E) (F. NO. 1/4/2026-EM) Dated 1st May 2026]

4. Govt. amends FEM (Non-debt Instruments) Rules; hikes FDI limit in insurance sector to 100% under automatic route

Government has amended the Foreign Exchange Management (Non-debt Instruments) Rules to allow 100% Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in the insurance sector via the automatic route, replacing the previous 74% limit. While this facilitates full foreign ownership for insurers, brokers, and intermediaries, investment in the Life Insurance Corporation of India (LIC) remains subject to a 20% cap. Key safeguards require a majority of board directors and key management personnel to be resident Indian citizens. Certain conditions have also been made applicable to foreign investment in LIC.

[Notification No. S.O. 2186(E) (F. NO. 1/5/EM/2019) Dated 2nd May 2026]

5. RBI notifies FEMA (Authorised Persons) Regulations, 2026; discontinues fresh franchisee arrangements for FFMCs

The Reserve Bank of India has issued the Foreign Exchange Management (Authorised Persons) Regulations, 2026, introducing revised norms for entities dealing in foreign exchange and discontinuing fresh licences for Full-Fledged Money Changers (FFMCs). Under the new framework, authorised persons are prohibited from entering any fresh franchisee arrangements, and all existing franchisee arrangements are required to be phased out and discontinued within two years from May 06, 2026. Further, FFMCs/non-bank AD Category II entities are required to submit to the concerned Regional Office of the Reserve Bank a copy of the annual audited balance sheet along with a statutory auditor’s certificate confirming net worth by 31 October each year, and a separate statutory auditor’s certificate certifying annual forex turnover for the relevant financial year by 30 April each year.

[Circular No. A.P. (DIR Series) Circular No. 09 and Notification No. FEMA 401/2026-RB dated April 30, 2026]

II. IFSCA

1. IFSCA issues 2026 rules for IFSC-Listed Companies on process, disclosures & timelines of rights issue

The International Financial Services Centres Authority (IFSCA) has introduced a detailed framework for rights issues under its Listing Regulations, 2024 bringing much-needed clarity and structure to capital raising in IFSCs. The rules are applicable only to entities listed exclusively in IFSC. The circular provides for key aspects such as eligibility, disclosures, pricing, and timelines. Notably, it mandates dematerialized allotment, enables on-market and off-market renunciation of rights entitlements, and prescribes a minimum subscription period of 7 days. The framework also emphasizes governance requiring prior in-principle approval, detailed disclosures in the letter of offer, and strict post-issue timelines for allotment and refunds.

(Circular F. NO. IFSCA -PLNP/16/2024-Capital Markets dated 22nd April 2026)

2. IFSCA mandates appointment of CISOs, reporting of breach within 6 hour & 24×7 Security Operations w.e.f. 1st April 2026

IFSCA Issues Comprehensive Cybersecurity Guidelines for Market Infrastructure Institutions (MII) comprising Stock Exchanges, Clearing Corporations, Depository and the Bullion Exchange in GIFT IFSC. The key objective of these Guidelines is to establish a comprehensive cyber security and cyber resilience framework for the MIIs operating in IFSC. The Guidelines are structured around seven core cybersecurity functions that Govern, Identify, Protect, Detect, Respond, Recover, and Resilience, mirroring globally recognised frameworks while embedding the operational and jurisdictional realities of GIFT IFSC. The Guidelines have come into effect from 1st Apri 2026. The MIIs need to ensure that full compliance is achieved within the timelines specified in the respective provisions of these Guidelines.

(Circular No. IFSCA-CSD/MSC/2/2026 DCS, dated 20th April 2026)

3. IFSCA aligns ship leasing rules with 2025 regulations by dropping physical asset management clarification

The International Financial Services Centres Authority (IFSCA) has amended its 2022 Ship Leasing Framework to align with the IFSCA (TechFin and Ancillary Services) Regulations, 2025. The amendment removes the explanation under clause 3.D.(ii), consequent to the inclusion of “management of physical assets” in the Third Schedule under the IFSCA (TechFin and Ancillary Services) Regulations, 2025, which specifies the services not permitted to be provided by TechFin and Ancillary Service Providers.

(Circular F. No. IFSCA-FCR0SL/25/2025-Banking/2026-27/01, dated 22nd April 2026)

4. IFSCA issues 2026 framework for preferential issues & QIPs for listed IFSC entities

IFSCA, has introduced a comprehensive framework for preferential issues and Qualified Institutions Placement (“QIP”) under the IFSCA (Listing) Regulations, 2024, enabling listed entities in IFSCs to raise capital through these routes (“Framework”).

The Framework applies to listed entities whose specified securities are listed solely on recognised stock exchanges in the IFSC. It lays down the eligibility criteria and tenure of convertible securities apart from specific disclosure and lock-up conditions for Preferential Issues as well as requirements for QIP.

(Circular F. No. IFSCA-PLNP/16/2024-Capital Market, dated 22nd April 2026)

5. IFSCA approves rules for fund-raising for listed entities along with an SPV based leasing structure

IFSCA approved amendments to enable the creation of Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) within GIFT IFSC. The changes, spanning the IFSCA (TechFin and Ancillary Services) Regulations, 2025 and the IFSCA (Finance Company) Regulations, 2021, will allow end-to-end structuring of leasing transactions within India. The new framework facilitates the registration of Trust and Company Service Providers (TCSPs), which manage SPV structures widely used by global financiers for aircraft leasing.

The new framework is designed to attract global lenders, lessors, and investors while reducing reliance on offshore jurisdictions for aircraft financing. The revised regulations, shaped by stakeholder consultations, also incorporate strong governance standards, including AML/KYC compliance and alignment with global norms. International Financial Services Centres Authority (Finance Company) Regulations, 2021 have been amended to introduce new definitions for SPV and TCSP. The minimum owned fund, or paid-up share capital of the SPV undertaking leasing or financing activity, shall be equivalent to the amount prescribed under the Companies Act, 2013, or such other amount as may be specified by the Authority.

IFSCA has further notified IFSCA (TechFin and Ancillary Services) (Amendment) Regulations, 2026. A new chapter relating to ‘Trust and Company Services Provider’ has been inserted. The chapter covers norms relating to the obligation to seek registration, permissible services, governance and control, and appointment of principal officer & compliance officer. Further, a new schedule specifying the permissible services that a ‘Trust and Company Services Provider’ may undertake, has been inserted.

(Press release dated 24th April 2026 and Notifications No. F. NO. IFSCA/GN/2026/ 009 and No. F. NO. IFSCA/GN/2026/ 008 dated 5th May 2026)

6. IFSCA notifies draft IFSCA (Managing General Agents) Regulations, 2026 for IFSC insurance ecosystem growth

The IFSC Authority has notified the draft IFSCA (Managing General Agents) Regulations, 2026 to provide a comprehensive regulatory framework for registration, regulation and operations of Managing General Agents in IFSCs. The Regulations prescribe eligibility conditions, business scope, capital and net worth requirements, governance standards and operational safeguards to promote transparency, accountability and orderly growth of the insurance ecosystem in IFSCs. The notification will be released in due course.

(Press Release dated 12th May 2026)

Miscellanea

  •  ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

# Sony AI’s “Project Ace” Robot Defeats Elite Table Tennis Professionals in Landmark Real-World AI Breakthrough

In a milestone moment for artificial intelligence and robotics, Sony AI on 23rd April 2026 unveiled “Project Ace” — the first known autonomous robotic system capable of consistently outplaying elite and professional-level human table tennis players. The research, published as the cover story of the journal Nature under the title “Outplaying Elite Table Tennis Players with an Autonomous Robot”, describes a system that combines high-speed cameras, motion sensors and reinforcement-learning algorithms to perceive, plan and execute return shots in milliseconds. In a series of evaluation matches conducted between December 2025 and March 2026 against new professional players, Ace defeated each opponent at least once, exhibiting faster shot speeds, more aggressive ball placement near the table edge and a rapidly accelerating rally pace.

The implications of Ace’s victory extend far beyond the sport. While AI systems have long demonstrated “superhuman” performance in digital domains such as chess, Go and complex video games, applying such intelligence to the physical world — where perception, planning and motor control must unfold in milliseconds — has remained one of the field’s most stubborn challenges. According to Peter Stone, Chief Scientist at Sony AI, the breakthrough “represents a landmark moment in AI research, showing for the first time that an AI system can perceive, reason and act effectively in complex, rapidly changing real-world environments that demand precision and speed.” Researchers believe the underlying perception-and-control architecture lays the groundwork for robots that can safely operate in dynamic environments ranging from industrial automation and elder care to surgical assistance and disaster response.

(Source: ai.sony / Nature – dated 23rd April 2026)

# Anthropic Crosses USD 900 Billion Valuation as Q1 2026 Revenue Grows 80x Year-on-Year

In one of the most striking developments of the current artificial intelligence funding cycle, Anthropic — the maker of the Claude family of large language models — closed a fresh funding round in May 2026 at a valuation of approximately USD 900 billion, placing it among the most highly valued private companies in history. The fundraise coincided with the disclosure that Anthropic’s first-quarter 2026 revenue had grown roughly 80 times year-on-year, as enterprise demand for Claude-based agents in coding, financial analysis, legal review and compliance accelerated sharply through the early part of the year. The fresh capital is earmarked principally for compute infrastructure, including a multi-year strategic partnership with Elon Musk’s SpaceX that will give Anthropic access to an estimated 220,000 GPUs through SpaceX’s Colossus data-centre architecture, alongside continued scaling on Amazon Web Services and Google Cloud.

The pace and scale of the round throws into sharp relief the structural rewiring of the global AI industry: market leadership is now determined as much by access to compute and electrical power as by model intelligence itself. Combined 2026 AI capital expenditure by Alphabet, Amazon, Meta and Microsoft is projected to exceed

USD 700 billion, with Microsoft alone raising its 2026 guidance to USD 190 billion. For Indian professional-services firms, the takeaway is two-fold: first, frontier AI capability — already significantly cheaper than 2024 levels — will continue to compound in both capability and cost-efficiency through the second half of 2026; and second, the centre of gravity of the global technology economy is shifting decisively toward a small group of compute-and-capital concentrators, with material implications for cross-border tax structuring, royalty flows and transfer-pricing benchmarking of AI-enabled services.

(Source: bloomberg.com / AIToolsRecap – dated 9th–11th May 2026)

  •  WORLD NEWS

# IMF Warns of a “Global Economy in the Shadow of War” as Strait of Hormuz Disruption Sends Oil Prices Soaring

The International Monetary Fund’s April 2026 World Economic Outlook, sub-titled “Global Economy in the Shadow of War”, has lowered the global growth forecast to 3.1% for 2026 and 3.2% for 2027, citing the outbreak of conflict in the Middle East and the resulting disruption to global energy supplies as the dominant downside risk. The closure of the Strait of Hormuz — through which approximately 20 million barrels of oil per day, or nearly 27% of global maritime petroleum trade, transit — pushed Brent crude above USD 100 per barrel in March 2026 for the first time since August 2022. The IMF has cautioned that global headline inflation will rise modestly in 2026 before resuming its decline in 2027, with the slowdown and inflationary pressures particularly pronounced in emerging market and developing economies.

For India, the World Bank’s India Development Update released on 9th April 2026 projects growth moderating to 6.6% in FY27, with higher energy prices and supply-chain disruptions weighing on activity. Nevertheless, India remains among the fastest-growing major economies in the world, with the World Bank attributing resilience to substantial foreign reserves, moderating inflation, predominantly rupee-denominated public debt, a healthy financial sector and ongoing trade diversification. The IMF’s broader caution — that downside risks now dominate the outlook, including geopolitical fragmentation, a possible reassessment of expectations around AI-driven productivity and renewed trade tensions — underscores the urgent need for businesses to stress-test working capital, hedging policies and contingency plans.

(Source: imf.org / worldbank.org – April 2026)

  •  ENVIRONMENT

# “How the World Lost the Goal of 1.5°C”: New Report Declares the Paris Target Out of Reach as 2026 Tracks for Record Heat

In a sobering assessment released on 7th April 2026, the Washington-based think-tank Resources for the Future published its Global Energy Outlook 2026 under the stark sub-title “How the World Lost the Goal of 1.5°C”, concluding that the cornerstone target of the 2015 Paris Agreement — limiting global temperature rise to 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels — is no longer achievable on any plausible policy pathway. The findings coincide with World Weather Attribution scientists warning that 2026 is on track to become the second-warmest, if not the warmest, year on record, with sea surface temperatures approaching all-time highs and Arctic sea ice at its lowest level for the second consecutive year.

Amid the gloom, Ember’s Global Electricity Review released on 21st April 2026 offered one bright signal: in calendar 2025, clean-power growth finally exceeded the rise in overall global electricity demand, marking a small but meaningful inflection point. The combined message for policymakers and businesses is unambiguous — the climate-transition agenda is shifting from ambition to adaptation, with material implications for capital allocation, ESG disclosures and physical-risk management under frameworks such as SEBI’s Business Responsibility and Sustainability Reporting (BRSR) regime.

(Source: Resources for the Future & earth.org – dated 7th & 21st April 2026)

# WMO Warns of Imminent “Super El Niño” as Global Wildfires Burn a Record 150 Million Hectares in First Four Months of 2026

The World Meteorological Organisation, in a coordinated warning issued on 12th May 2026, alerted governments and businesses to the imminent onset of an unusually strong El Niño event in the tropical Pacific, with sea surface temperatures near all-time highs and Arctic sea ice at its lowest May reading for the second consecutive year. Scientists at the World Weather Attribution group reported on the same day that wildfires from January to April 2026 had already burned more than 150 million hectares globally — roughly 20% above the previous record for the same period and double the area burned in 2024. Africa accounted for the largest share at approximately 85 million hectares (23% above the previous high), while Asian countries including India, Myanmar, Thailand, Laos and China collectively recorded 44 million hectares burned, exceeding the previous 2014 record by approximately 40%.

The WMO has cautioned that the combination of a developing El Niño with already record-warm baseline conditions creates a “serious risk of unprecedented weather extremes” through the remainder of 2026 and into 2027, with heat, drought, flood and wildfire impacts likely to compound one another. Parts of northern India have already recorded daytime temperatures touching 46°C ahead of the southwest monsoon, and the Copernicus Climate Change Service has flagged May 2026 sea-surface temperatures as being among the highest on record. For Indian businesses, the warning has direct bearing on agricultural supply chains, monsoon-dependent working-capital cycles, insurance and reinsurance pricing, and the increasingly material physical-risk disclosures expected under SEBI’s BRSR framework and emerging climate-disclosure standards.

(Source: World Meteorological Organisation / Reuters / Euronews – dated 12th May 2026)

ICAI and Its Members

I. ICAI ANNOUNCEMENTS

ICAI INVITES APPLICATIONS FOR EIFR TECHNICAL REVIEWERS

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India has invited applications for empanelment as Technical Reviewer (TR) and Head Technical Reviewer (HTR) for the ICAI Awards for Excellence in Financial Reporting (EIFR).

The role involves reviewing financial statements for compliance with accounting standards, statutory disclosure requirements, and auditors’ reporting obligations.

ELIGIBILITY

  • TRs: 4–5 years’ audit experience; HTRs: 5–8 years’ audit experience.
  • currently active in the practice of accounting and auditing or employed in the industry with comparable experience in financial reporting and auditing.
  • Experience in Ind AS financial statements is desirable
  • Exposure in the preparation, finalization, or audit of Ind AS- based financial statements

Empaneled members will receive honorarium and CPE hours.

LAST DATE

Applications can be submitted online up to 30 May 2026 (4:00 PM) through: https://forms.gle/LorzV58eCFVHmqdq9

Last date application

For more details visit: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/91948rc-aps4940-empanelment-tr-htr.pdf

resource icai

ICAI DOCTORAL SCHOLARSHIP SCHEME 2026

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India has invited applications for the ICAI Doctoral Scholarship Scheme 2026 for members pursuing full-time Ph.D. in areas such as Auditing, Taxation, Commerce, Management, Accounting, and allied subjects.

KEY HIGHLIGHTS

  • Scholarship of ₹75,000 per month for up to 36 months
  • Yearly contingency grant up to ₹50,000.
  • Applicant should:

                      • Be an ICAI member,

                      • Be below 40 years of age,

                     • Have confirmed Ph.D. registration,

                    • Be a full-time Ph.D. scholar,

                   • Not be availing any other scholarship for the same research

SELECTION PROCESS

Applications will undergo preliminary scrutiny, followed by virtual presentation/interview for shortlisted candidates. Final approval will be by the Research Committee.

LAST DATE

  • 15 June 2026.

For more details visit: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92083research-aps5015-flyer.pdf

Last date resource icai

II. ICAI GIST OF OPINION

1. Accounting Treatment under Ind AS 37 for EPR Obligations under ELV Rules

A. Facts of the Case

  • The company is an automotive manufacturer preparing financial statements under Ind AS.
  • Under the Environment Protection (End-of-Life Vehicles) Rules, 2025, OEMs are required to fulfil Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) obligations through purchase of EPR certificates.
  • The obligations relate to vehicles introduced in the market in earlier years and continue even if the producer ceases operations.
  • The querist stated that the Rules created a present legal obligation and sought guidance on provisioning under Ind AS 37.

B. Query

  • What is the obligating event under Ind AS 37 for ELV Rules?
  • Whether ELV Rules require provisioning for past vehicle sales.
  • Whether such provision should be recognised in profit and loss or adjusted against retained earnings.

C. Points considered by the Committee

  • The Committee noted that under Ind AS 37, recognition of a provision requires a present obligation arising from a past obligating event.
  • Mere enactment of law is not sufficient; the event to which the law applies must have occurred.
  • Introduction/sale of vehicles in earlier years constitutes the obligating event once ELV Rules became effective.
  • The obligation continues irrespective of future operations of the company.
  • Settlement of the obligation requires probable outflow of economic resources through purchase of EPR certificates/scrapping.
  • Although measurement uncertainty exists, Ind AS 37 requires recognition if a reliable estimate can be made, which generally can be determined using best estimates and probability-weighted outcomes.
  • The Committee noted that the provision arises when ELV Rules became effective in respect of already introduced vehicles.

D. Opinion

  • Introduction/sale of vehicles in earlier years is the obligating event once ELV Rules became effective.
  • The company should recognise a provision under Ind AS 37 for obligations relating to already introduced vehicles.
  • The provision should be recognised in the Statement of Profit and Loss.
  • Adjustment against retained earnings is not appropriate since it is neither a prior-period error nor a change in accounting policy.

2. Accounting for Change in Measurement Technique of ECL

A. Facts of the Case

  • The company was recognising Expected Credit Losses (ECL) on trade receivables using an internal grid matrix approach after transition to Ind AS.
  • The company proposed to adopt an actuarial valuation approach using probability-weighted techniques and statistical modelling.
  • The querist contended that the shift represented a change in accounting policy requiring retrospective application.

B. Query

  • Whether transition from internal grid matrix to actuarial valuation for ECL should be treated as a change in accounting policy with retrospective application.

C. Points considered by the Committee

  • The Committee examined the issue only from the perspective of change in ECL measurement technique.
  • Ind AS 8 distinguishes accounting policies from accounting estimates.
  • Accounting estimates are values derived using measurement techniques based on latest available reliable information.
  • Paragraph 32 of Ind AS 8 specifically identifies ECL allowance as an accounting estimate.
  • Paragraph 32A states that techniques used to measure ECL are estimation techniques forming part of measurement techniques.
  • Changes in measurement techniques are changes in accounting estimates unless arising from correction of prior-period errors.
  • If the earlier grid matrix approach was not compliant with Ind AS 109, the change would amount to correction of prior-period error.

D. Opinion

  • Change from internal grid matrix to actuarial valuation method for ECL is not a change in accounting policy.
  • It is a change in accounting estimate unless it represents correction of prior-period error.
  • Changes in estimates are accounted for prospectively.
  • If the earlier method was not compliant with Ind AS 109, correction should be made retrospectively as a prior-period error with appropriate disclosures.

3. Appropriateness of Considering EFBS under Ind AS 19

A. Facts of the Case

  • The company operates an Employees’ Family Benefit Scheme (EFBS) providing benefits in case of death in service or permanent total disability.
  • Benefits are payable upon deposit of employee’s provident fund and gratuity balances and are based on last drawn salary till notional superannuation.
  • Management contended that EFBS is not a defined benefit plan and resembles other long-term employee benefits.

B. Query

  • Whether EFBS is a defined benefit scheme or not.

C. Points considered by the Committee

  • The Committee noted that employee benefits under Ind AS 19 include benefits provided to employees’ family members.
  • The benefits under EFBS arise only on death or permanent disability while the employee is in service and are provided under a separate scheme.
  • Paragraph 5(c)(iii) and paragraph 153(c) of Ind AS 19 include long-term disability benefits within other long-term employee benefits.
  • BC253 of IAS 19 clarifies that death-in-service benefits under a separate scheme are treated as other long-term employee benefits.
  • The level of benefit does not depend on years of service and is based on last drawn salary.
  • Therefore, expected cost should be recognised when the event causing disability or death-in-service occurs.

D. Opinion

  • Benefits under EFBS are covered within employee benefits under Ind AS 19.
  • EFBS should be treated as “other long-term employee benefits”.
  • Since benefits do not depend on years of service, expected cost should be recognised when the event causing long-term disability or death-in-service occurs.

Visit to read in detail: https://resource.cdn.icai.org/92002cajournal-may2026-33.pdf

Opinion

III. ICAI Board of Discipline cases

1. Case: Ms. HKS, IRS vs. CA. SK

File No.: PR/G/45/2019/DD/272/2019/BOD/751/2024

Date of Order: 30.12.2025

Particulars                                                    Details

Complainant              Ms. HKS, IRS, Assistant Director of Income Tax (Investigation), Mohali

Nature of Case          Entering into business partnerships with non-CAs while holding COP

Background              The matter arose from investigation into the Punjab Sand Mining Auction Scam, where alleged benami entities were used for securing mining contracts. The Respondent, while holding a full-time Certificate of Practice, became partner in multiple firms formed for mining-related activities, namely M/s Rajbir Enterprises, M/s Rajbir Enterprises Mohali, and M/s New Rajbir Enterprises.

Key Allegations          – Entering into partnership with non-members.

                                      – Engaging in business other than profession while holding COP.

                                      – Alleged involvement in arrangements connected with mining business entities.

Respondent’s Defence  – Mining business never commenced;no bank accounts or licences obtained.

                                        – Intended to surrender COP only upon commencement of operations.

                                        – Partnership deeds alone do not amount to carrying on business.

                                       – Raised procedural objections regarding authorization of complaint.

Findings                         – Partnership deeds clearly showed objects relating to mining and related activities and Respondent held 3% profit share.

                                         – Respondent entered into partnerships while continuing professional practice and attestation work.

                                        – No prior permission obtained under Regulation 190A.

                                        – Board held that even if business had not commenced, joining business partnerships itself constituted misconduct.

                                       – Procedural objections rejected; complaint held duly authorized

Charges Established                                  Guilty under:

                                                • Item (4), Part I, First Schedule – partnership with non-members

                                               • Item (11), Part I, First Schedule – engaging in other business/occupation

Punishment                      Removal of name from Register of Members for 1 month

2. Case:                              Ms. PS vs. CA. NJK

File No.:                        PR/G/498/2022/DD/490/2022/BOD/752/2024

Date of Order:              30.12.2025

Particulars                      Details

Complainant            Ms. PS, Deputy Director of Income Tax (Investigation)

Nature of Case        Involvement in bogus political donation / tax evasion scheme.

Background            Income Tax Department conducted search and seizure operations on certain political parties and charitable institutions in Ahmedabad, including Kisan Party of India (KPI), Manvadhikar National Party (MNP), Kisan Adhikar Party (KAP), AISECT and Aadhar Foundation. It was alleged that the Respondent acted as a mediator in a bogus donation racket where clients routed donations to political parties and received equivalent cash back after deduction of commission,
thereby facilitating wrongful tax deductions.

Key Allegations     – Soliciting clients for bogus political donations.

                                – Facilitating tax evasion through accommodation donation entries.

                               – Earning commission for arranging donation-and-cash-back transactions.

Respondent’s Defence – Statement recorded by Income Tax authorities was incorrectly recorded and obtained through misrepresentation.

                                         – Retraction affidavit filed disputing alleged admission.

                                        – Relied upon WhatsApp chats had no evidentiary value.

                                       – No reassessment or tax action initiated against him by Income Tax Department.

Findings             – Respondent had expressly admitted involvement in bogus donation modus operandi in statement recorded u/s 131(1A)/132(4) of Income Tax Act (page 5).

                            – Retraction after nearly two years was held to be belated and lacking credibility

                            – Board held that admission on oath remained valid unless rebutted within reasonable time.

                            – Corroborative evidence from investigation supported allegations.

                             – Failure to produce cogent evidence in defence led Board to sustain charge.

Charges Established  – Guilty under Item (2), Part IV, First Schedule – Other Misconduct

Punishment                     Reprimand

3. Case: Mr. PM vs. CA. NKSP

File No.: PR/G/381/2019/DD/150/2021/BOD/804/2025

Date of Order: 30.12.2025

Particulars             Details

Complainant – Mr. PM, Deputy Commissioner of Police, Economic Offences Wing

Respondent         CA. NKSR

Nature of Case     Auditor independence breach and involvement in financial transactions linked to real estate fraud

Background            The matter arose from investigation into the “CANVAS” redevelopment project, where investors allegedly paid over ₹5 crore for flats sold by M/s J.V. Developers, despite the developer allegedly lacking authority to sell them. Investigation and forensic audit revealed diversion and routing of investor funds through Kamla Landmarc Group entities. Approximately ₹2.5 crore was traced to the Respondent’s personal account, and transactions involving flats purchased in the names of the Respondent’s wife and relatives were also identified.

Key Allegations    –  Facilitating financial transactions connected with alleged investor fraud.

                                – Receipt and routing of ₹2.5 crore linked to auditee/group entities

                                – Compromising auditor independence through personal financial dealings with clients.

                                – Use of relatives’ names in connected property transactions.

Respondent’s Defence – Denied involvement in J.V.

                                            Developers or the CANVAS project.

                                       – Claimed he ceased association with Kamla Group in 2013.

                                       – Asserted funds represented legitimate business loans/investments duly repaid.

                                      – Contended that property dealings of family members were genuine and unrelated to fraud allegations.

Findings                  – Respondent admitted receipt of funds from entities under his audit.

                                – Board held that personal financial transactions with auditee/group entities compromised independence and violated professional ethics

                                – Forensic audit indicated round-tripping transactions involving Respondent’s accounts.

                               – Explanation of “genuine investment/loan” was found unconvincing in view of financial trail and auditor relationship.

                              – Even though criminal conspiracy allegations were pending before court, Board independently examined ethical and professional misconduct aspects.

Charges Established          Guilty under Item (2), Part IV, First Schedule – Other Misconduct

Punishment                        Removal of name from Register of Members for 3 months

Recent Decisions in GST

HIGH COURT

21. (2026) 41 Centax 440 (Bom.)

Navin Vishwanathan vs. State of Maharashtra

dated 15.04.2026

GST dues of a deceased proprietor cannot be recovered from his son directly without examining the statutory provisions of legal representative liability.

FACTS

Petitioner was independently carrying on business as a sole proprietor under a separate GST registration. Petitioner’s deceased father was running another proprietorship concern under a similar trade name. Respondent confirmed GST demand against the deceased father’s proprietorship. Thereafter, respondent issued DRC-13 to the petitioner’s banker for recovery of such dues attaching the petitioner’s bank account without issuance of any prior SCN or grant of opportunity of hearing. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that recovery presupposes an established liability against the specific person. Separate GSTINs and premises indicated that petitioner and his father were distinct taxable persons. It further observed that similar trade name alone could not prove business succession or continuation as section 93 of CGST Act, 2017 required prior determination through notice, material consideration, and hearing. In Radha Krishan Industries vs. State of Himachal Pradesh, 2021 (48) G.S.T.L. 113 (SC), the Hon’ble Supreme Court held that attachment requires tangible material and strict statutory compliance. Freezing the petitioner’s bank account without due process violated Article 300A Thus, DRC-13 Order attaching bank account was quashed.

22. (2026) 42 Centax 106 (Bom.)

Tata Sons Pvt. Ltd. vs. Union of India

dated 30.04.2026.

Compensation arising from international arbitral adjudication of contractual breach does not constitute consideration for supply under GST merely because enforcement proceedings are mutually settled.

FACTS

Petitioner entered into a shareholders’ agreement with a Japanese company investing in an Indian telecom venture. The agreement required the petitioner to secure a buyer upon failure to achieve certain agreed financial targets. After such failure, disputes arose regarding exit obligations and payment commitments. The disputes were referred to international arbitration, resulting in an award directing payment of damages, interest, and costs. Enforcement proceedings were thereafter initiated before foreign Courts and Indian Courts. The parties subsequently entered consent terms before the Hon’ble High Court for satisfaction of the arbitral award. Respondent later alleged that the settlement constituted taxable import of services under GST. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that arbitral damages constitute compensation for contractual breach and not consideration for any supply. Liability arose only upon adjudication by the arbitral tribunal. Settlement of the arbitral award did not create any independent contractual obligation amounting to supply. Entry 5(e) of Schedule II required an independent agreement for tolerating an act against consideration. The Court further relied upon the decision of UOI vs. Raman Iron Foundry, (1974) 2 SCC 231, where the Hon’ble Supreme Court held that damages are not debt payable before adjudication. Accordingly, IGST liability was held unsustainable.

23. (2026) 42 Centax 170 (Bom.)

Gunjan Surgical and Scientific Co. vs. State of Maharashtra

dated 23.04.2026.

Transitional provisions under section 140 of CGST Act cannot be expanded to verifying eligibility of credit claimed under MVAT Laws and denial based on mismatch goes beyond the statutory scope.

FACTS

Petitioner claimed transitional ITC through TRAN-1 under the GST regime. Respondent examined the claim and considered the credit prima facie admissible. Subsequently, at the time of processing the claim, the respondent denied the claim to the extent of mismatch of J1/J2 (difference between purchase and sales under VAT Laws) under MVAT. Petitioner filed an appeal, where the appellate authority partly allowed the appeal and recomputed the liability based on mismatch of J1 and J2 determined earlier. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that appellate authority could not import MVAT assessment issues into TRAN-1 adjudication. The Court further observed that demand based on J1/J2 mismatch was vague and lacked statutory clarity. Transitional credit determination required strict application of Section 140 parameters without assessing the validity of credit claimed in the erstwhile Law. Relying upon the judgement of Usha Martin Ltd. v. Additional Commissioner, CGST & C.Ex., 2023 (68) G.S.T.L. 338 (Jhar.), the Hon’ble High Court held that transitional credit proceedings must remain confined to statutory transitional provisions. Accordingly, the appellate order was quashed and proceedings were restored for fresh consideration.

24. 2026 (4) TMI 1571

Andhra Pradesh High Court Jwala Energy Resources Pvt. Ltd. vs. State of Andhra Pradesh

dated 08.04.2026.

Interest on refund arising from amount paid as tax earlier, which was subsequently declared as an unconstitutional levy, starts from payment date independent of statutory refund limitation provisions under GST law.

FACTS

Petitioner imported coal on CIF basis for operating its power generation unit. Respondent required payment of GST on ocean freight under reverse charge mechanism. Subsequently, the levy under Notification No. 10/2017 dated 28.06.2017 was declared unconstitutional by judicial pronouncements. Petitioner applied for refund of GST paid on ocean freight along with interest. The refund application was initially rejected on limitation grounds under section 54. Petitioner filed a writ petition challenging such rejection before the Hon’ble High Court. During the pendency of the said writ petition, the respondent sanctioned the refund of the tax amount, whereas the issue relating to interest remained pending consideration before the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that refund arising from an unconstitutional levy is not governed by ordinary statutory refund limitations. Amount collected under an invalid levy constituted money wrongfully retained by the State as per Article 265 of Constitution of India. In Union of India vs. Mohit Minerals Pvt. Ltd., (2022) 10 SCC 700, the Hon’ble Supreme Court struck down levy of GST on ocean freight under reverse charge. Thus, Court held that interest being compensatory in nature for deprivation of use of money shall be computed from date of payment till grant of refund. Petitioner was therefore held entitled to interest at 6% per annum from deposit date till refund date.

25. 2026 (5) TMI 163 

Andhra Pradesh High Court Tata Power Renewable Energies Limited vs. Joint Commissioner & Ors

dated 29.04.2026.

Separate invoicing cannot override statutory deeming provisions prescribing composite valuation mechanisms under GST notifications for integrated solar power generating system supplies.

FACTS

Petitioner supplied solar power generating systems along with installation and commissioning services during 2020–2021. Petitioner paid GST using the statutory 70:30 valuation mechanism under relevant GST notifications. Respondent accepted the returns initially without objection. Subsequently, respondent issued a SCN under section 74 of the CGST Act alleging short payment of tax and proposed GST at 18% on the entire value of supply. Petitioner filed replies contending that the supplies constituted composite contracts covered under the notifications. Respondent rejected the objections and confirmed the demand along with interest, and penalty. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that the statutory 70:30 valuation mechanism applies to solar power generating system supplies. The Court observed that the notifications created a legal fiction deeming goods value at 70% and the remaining 30% was deemed to represent taxable service value. The Court held that separate invoices could not defeat the statutory valuation mechanism. The Court further held that taxing the entire turnover at 18% lacked legal justification. Moreover, Hon’ble Court also relied on the decision of Sterling and Wilson Pvt. Ltd. vs. Joint Commissioner & Ors. W.P.No.20096 of 2020, where solar power contracts involving supply of goods as well as services were recognized as composite supplies. Consequently, the impugned assessment order was set aside to the extent of differential tax levy.

26. 2026 (5) TMI 500 

Bombay High Court DP Jain & Co Infrastructure Pvt. Ltd. vs. Union of India

dated 06.05.2026.

Corporate guarantees issued expressly without any consideration do not constitute taxable supply merely through valuation machinery prescribed in rules or circulars providing taxability prospectively.

FACTS

Petitioner executed corporate guarantees in favour of banks for loans sanctioned to its subsidiary companies. The guarantee deeds specifically recorded that no security, fee, commission, or consideration was received by the petitioner. Meanwhile, giving corporate guarantee was regarded as supply of service after introduction of Rule 28(2) and related circulars issued concerning valuation of corporate guarantees. Respondent firstly issued summons and later SCN proposing GST liability on the guarantees issued by the petitioner. Being aggrieved, the petitioner approached the Hon’ble High Court.

HELD

The Hon’ble High Court held that the foundational requirement for a taxable supply under GST is the existence of consideration. Corporate guarantees issued as in-house financial support to subsidiaries were not regular commercial guarantee services. The guarantee deeds expressly recorded absence of fee, commission or consideration. In Commissioner of CGST & Central Excise vs. Edelweiss Financial Services Ltd., 2023 (4) TMI 170 (SC), the Hon’ble Supreme Court recognized that absence of consideration negates taxability of service. Consequently, summons and SCN were quashed.

27. [2026] 186 taxmann.com 380 (Madras)

Transafe Services Ltd. vs. Superintendent of Central GST and Central Excise

dated 10.04.-2026.

Statutory GST dues pertaining to Pre-CIRP (Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process)are extinguished once the CIRP process is commenced and the resolution plan is approved with a moratorium period. However, the tax dues pertaining to the period after the initiation of the Corporate insolvency Resolution proceedings are payable.

FACTS

A CIRP had been initiated against the petitioner before the NCLT Kolkata, and a moratorium was in force from the date of such initiation, i.e. from 21.11.2019. Eventually, the resolution plan filed by the resolution applicant was sanctioned, and the petitioner company was taken over by the Management of the Resolution Applicant (M/S Om Logistics Ltd). However, the show cause notice and order-in-original were passed for the period April 2018 to March 2020 on 02.12.2022 and 26.12.2025, respectively.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court, relying upon the decision in the case of Committee of Creditors of Essar Steel India Ltd. vs. Satish Kumar Gupta [2019] 111 taxmann.com 234 (SC)/(2020) 8 SCC 531 and in view of the decision of Ghanashyam Mishra and Sons Private Limited v. Edelweiss Asset Reconstruction Company Limited and Others, held that the petitioner cannot be imposed with the tax liability for the period prior to initiation of CIRP before the NCLT i.e. prior to order of the NCLT dated 21.11.2019. The matter was thus remanded back to consider the impact of these decisions. However, the Hon’ble Court held that the petitioner company will be liable to pay tax dues pertaining to the period confirmed vide the impugned order for the period after the initiation of CIRP against the petitioner’s company under the provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 within a period of 30 days from the date of receipt of a copy of this order.

28. [2026] 186 taxmann.com 558 (Chhattisgarh)

Vandana Global Ltd vs. Principal Commissioner Central GST Central Excise

dated 08.05.2026.

Interest on delayed payment of GST to be levied only on net tax liability paid through the Electronic Cash Ledger based on the retrospective amendment under Section 50(1). Any Interest amount on the gross liability is liable to be set aside.

FACTS

The petitioner challenged demand notices issued seeking interest on the delayed payment of GST calculated on the entire gross output tax liability without adjusting the available Input Tax Credit (ITC). The petitioner contended that pursuant to the retrospective amendment to the proviso to section 50(1) of the CGST Act, 2017, effective from 1st July 2017, interest could be levied only on the net cash liability, i.e. the portion of tax paid through the electronic cash ledger. The petitioner also sought directions for the reconfiguration of the GSTN portal and the re-computation of interest liability after considering admissible ITC.

HELD

The Hon’ble Court observed that by virtue of the amendment introduced through notification dated 1st June 2021, the proviso to section 50(1) was retrospectively substituted to clarify that interest on delayed filing of returns is payable only on the tax paid through the electronic cash ledger.

It held that since the retrospective proviso mandated the levy of interest only on net cash liability from 1st July 2017, interest was chargeable only on tax paid by debiting the electronic cash ledger. Interest demand thus held, requiring reconsideration on the said basis after granting the opportunity of hearing.

29. [2026] 186 taxmann.com 767 (TRIPURA)

Nikhil Debnath vs. Union of India

dated 06.05.2026

Mere presenting dispatch register showing dispatch by speed post is not sufficient, as the acknowledgement card with the signature of the petitioner thereon is a must for compliance with service requirements under section 169(1)(b) of the CGST Act.

FACTS AND HELD

The Hon’ble Court relying upon the decision in the case of Sharp Tanks and Structurals Pvt. Ltd. vs. Deputy Commissioner (GST) (Appeals), Tirunelveli [2025] 178 taxmann.com 519/102 GSTL 199 (Madras) held that mere uploading of the order in the GST Portal would not suffice. The department ought to choose other modes of service also, which would be a proper exercise of the power of the department when there are other choices also made available under section 169 of the Act. Further, it held that section 169(1)(b) of the Act requires that the order-in-original should be sent by Speed Post with “Acknowledgement due”. Hon’ble Court held that though the respondents have produced the dispatch register and a photocopy of the receipt issued by the Postal Department showing dispatch by Speed Post, they have not produced the ‘Acknowledgement’ card, which would have been returned to the respondent after the article sent by speed post is received by the petitioner with the signature of the petitioner’s representative. Therefore, prima facie it cannot be said that there is compliance of sub-clause (b) of sub-section (1) of section 169 of the CGST Act.